Sunteți pe pagina 1din 484

TopPage

SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMXM754/S2E

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

MX-M654N
MODEL MX-M754N
CONTENTS

NOTE FOR SERVICING

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

[7] TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

[13] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

[14] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.

This document has been published to be used


SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS

NOTE FOR SERVICING [6] SIMULATION


1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. General and purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 2. Starting the simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 3. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii 4. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii [7] TROUBLESHOOTING
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the transfer unit, 1. Error code and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
the developing unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
2. JAM and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
3. Image send communication report code . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 4. Dial tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
1. System diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 [8] FIRMWARE UPDATE
2. Option list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS 2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[9] MAINTENANCE
2. Copy functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
1. Works necessary when executing
3. Printer function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 the maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
4. FAX function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 2. Display of maintenance execution timing. . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
5. Image send function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 3. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
6. Report/list function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
7. Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
1. Disassembly of Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
8. Dimensions and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING
9. Ambient conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
1. HDD/SD card/CF card memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS 2. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB,
1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 HDD, the SD Card and the CF Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3. Necessary procedure and notes for replacement
3. Definition of developer/drum life end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 of the mirroring kit HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 4. Note for installing and repairing the mirroring kit . . . 11-11
5. Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 [12] SERVICE WEB PAGE
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 2. Details and operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
2. Internal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 [13] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
3. Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 1. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
4. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 2. DSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
5. Sensors and detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 3. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
6. Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 4. Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
7. Clutches and solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 5. Paper transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
8. Drive motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 6. LSU section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
9. Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 7. OPC drum section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
10. Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 8. Toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
11. Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 9. Developing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
12. Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 10. Transfer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
13. Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 11. Waste toner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
14. PWB/Memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 12. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
15. Fuses and thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 13. Duplex/paper exit section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
16. Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
[14] ELECTRICAL SECTION
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 2. Power line diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 3. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 4. Signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
NOTE FOR SERVICING *Service
When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the fol-
Manual
lowing points.
 Gas tube
1. Precautions for servicing
 Lightning conductor
* When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, the  A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, except grounding object by the authorities.
when performing the communication test, etc.
 Grounding wire for telephone line
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
* There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use
* Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord.
extreme care when servicing.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not stress, forc-
It may cause a burn. ibly bend, or pull the power cord.
* There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
* Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
* Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
* Do not place liquids or foreign metallic objects inside the
* When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to
machine.
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other
driving sections. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
* Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. * Do not touch the power cord, insert the phone jack, operate the
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch inside machine, or perform service on the machine with wet or oily
hands.
the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or an injury.
It may cause an electric shock.
* When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink exces-
sively. Do not get them in the eyes.
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with
3. Note for installing site
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary. Do not install the machine at the following sites.
* The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to dam- * Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature,
age fingers when servicing. low humidity, place under an extreme change in temperature
* Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, toner and humidity.
may ignite and burn you. Paper may get damp and form condensation inside the machine,
* When replacing a lithium battery on a PWB, only use the speci- causing paper jam or copy dirt.
fied replacement battery. For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
If a battery of different specification is used, it may cause a described later.
machine malfunction or breakdown.
* When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to it,
be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may otherwise cause a machine breakdown or malfunction.

CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
(200V series only) * Place of extreme vibrations
It may cause a breakdown.

2. Warning for servicing


* Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
shock.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
* If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
* Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage * Poorly ventilated place
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may result. An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening, The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so as
grounding must be made. not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of such a
machine may produce an ozone smell. Install the machine in a
well ventilated place.

NOTE FOR SERVICING - i


* Place of direct sunlight. 4. Note for handling PWB and electronic
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may parts
undergo qualitative change.
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
It may cause a breakdown or output quality problems.
observe the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-
age by static electricity.
* When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or an
anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.

* Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium


The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier and blue
print machine may result in poor quality output.
* There was a trouble in a place where silicon-series gas or vol- * When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag (case),
atile components are generated. Use great care for avoiding use an earth band as shown below:
this. ? Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the machine.

* Place of much dust


When dust or contaminants enters the machine, it may cause a
breakdown or poor quality output.

* Place near a wall


The machine will require ventilation. ? When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the
If ventilation is not proper, poor output or machine failure may procedure on an anti-static mat.
result.

11-13/16"
(30cm)

11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)

* Unstable or irregular surface


If the machine is dropped or tips over, it may cause injury or
machine malfunction.
Use an optional desk or an exclusive-use desk.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and lock
the casters.

NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii


5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU 7. Screw tightening torque
When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following The screws used in this machine are largely classified into three
items. types.
* When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect the These types are classified according to the shape of the screw
power plug from the power outlet. grooves and use positions.
* When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures The table below shows the types of the screws and the tightening
described in this Service Manual. torques depending on the use position.
* When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to the
the parts including the cover installed and perform the operation table.
check. However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than speci-
* Do not modify the LSU. fied on this table, or under special circumstances, the details are
* When visually checking the inside of the machine for the opera- described on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on such
tion check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the eyes. an exception.
If the above precaution is neglected or the LSU is modified, ones Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is an electrode
safety may be at risk. or a current flows, use enough care to tighten securely to avoid
loosening.
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the
transfer unit, the developing unit Screw kinds and tightening torques

When handling the OPC drum unit, the transfer unit, and the devel- Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
oping unit, strictly observe the following items. Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the torque torque torque
diameter fixed
(N m) (kgf cm) (lbft)
copy and print image quality.
M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7
Drum unit
M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
* Avoid working at a place with strong lights. M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
* Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights for
a long time. Tapping screws (for iron)
* When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it with Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 sheets torque torque torque
diameter fixed
of paper to cover it.) (N m) (kgf cm) (lbft)
* Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
(Plate thickness
material on the OPC drum surface.
0.8mm or above)
Transfer unit M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
* Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign (Plate thickness
material on the transfer roller, transfer belt, and the transfer belt 0.8mm or above)
and transfer cleaning roller. M3 Steel plate 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
(Plate thickness
Developing unit
less than 0.8mm)
* Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign M4 Steel plate 1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
material on the magnet roller. (Plate thickness
Fusing unit less than 0.8mm)
* Be careful not to attach finger prints or foreign materials on the
fusing roller. Tapping screw (for plastic)
Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
(N m) (kgf cm) (lbft)
M3 Plastic resin 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
M4 Plastic resin 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9

NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii


[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE Service Manual

1. System diagram

MX-FN19
(+0+5*'4

MX-PN12 
A/B/C/D
270%*/1&7.'
MX-TR16
':+664#;70+6

MX-FN20 MX-TU15
5#&&.'56+6%* ':+664#;%#$+0'6
(+0+5*'4 
MX-RB13
MX-LT10
4'.#;70+6
.10)2#2'4(''&+0)
64#;

MX-PN13

MX-FN21 MX-RB23
A/B/C/D
(+0+5*'4 2#2'42#55
270%*
70+6
/1&7.' MX-CF11
+05'46'4 MX-LC15
.#4)'%#2#%+6;
MX-RB15
%74.%144'%6+10 MX-M654N  64#;

70+6
MX-M754N
MX-FD10 &+)+6#./7.6+(70%6+10#.
MX-TM10 (1.&+0)70+6 5;56'/
64+//+0)
/1&7.'
MX-LC16
MX-FN22 .#4)'%#2#%+6;
5#&&.'56+6%* 64#;
(+0+5*'4

MX-PUX1 MX-PF10 MX-FX11 AR-SU1 MX-FWX1 MX-FR47U MX-FR47


:25':2#05+10-+6 $#4%1&'(106-+6 (#%5+/+.'':2#05+10 56#/270+6 +06'40'6(#: &#6#5'%74+6;-+6 &#6#5'%74+6;-+6
-+6 
':2#05+10-+6


MX-EC50
%#4&51.76+10-+6
MX-EB12N
/+4414+0)-+6
MX-USX1
5*#42&'5-.+%'05'
MX-USX5
5*#42&'5-.+%'05'
MX-US10
5*#42&'5-.+%'05'
MX-US50
5*#42&'5-.+%'05'
MX-USA0
5*#42&'5-.+%'05'
-+6 -+6 -+6 -+6 -+6

MX-AMX1 MX-UN01A MX-UN05A MX-UN10A MX-UN50A MX-UN1HA MX-AMX2


#22.+%#6+10 5JCTR15#0GVYCQTM5ECPPGT 5JCTR15#0GVYCQTM5ECPPGT 5JCTR15#0GVYCQTM5ECPPGT 5JCTR15#0GVYCQTM5ECPPGT 5JCTR15#0GVYCQTM5ECPPGT #22.+%#6+10
+06')4#6+10/1&7.' 6QQN.KEGPUG-KV 6QQN.KEGPUG-KV 6QQN.KEGPUG-KV 6QQN.KEGPUG-KV 6QQN.KEGPUG-KV %1//70+%#6+10/1&7.'
    

MX-AMX3 MX-AK10 MX-KB13 MX-AM10


':6'40#.#%%176 5JCTR#EEQWPVCPV -';$1#4& 9'$$4195+0)':2#05+10
/1&7.' 2TQHGUUKQPCN.KEGPUG-KV -+6

PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1
2. Option list
MX-M654N
Model name Name Remarks
MX-M754N
Paper Feeder MX-LC15 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY OPT A4
MX-LC16 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY OPT A3
MX-LT10 LONG PAPER FEEDING TRAY OPT For Main unit
Paper exit system MX-TR16 EXIT TRAY UNIT OPT
MX-TU15 EXIT TRAY CABINET OPT Cannot install the MX-TU15 and the MX-RB23
MX-FN19 FINISHER OPT For 50 sheets binding
MX-FN20 FINISHER OPT For 50 sheets binding/ saddle 15 sheets binding
MX-PN12A PUNCH MODULE OPT 2 holes (For 50-sheet 4K Finisher/Saddle Stitch
Finisher)
MX-PN12B OPT 3 holes (For 50-sheet 4K Finisher/Saddle Stitch
Finisher)
MX-PN12C OPT 4 holes (For 50-sheet 4K Finisher/Saddle Stitch
Finisher)
MX-PN12D OPT 4 wide holes (For 50-sheet 4K Finisher/Saddle
Stitch Finisher)
MX-RB23 PAPER PASS UNIT OPT Cannot install the MX-RB23 and the MX-TU15
MX-RB13 RELAY UNIT OPT For 100 sheets binding
MX-FN21 FINISHER OPT 100 sheets binding
MX-FN22 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER OPT 100 sheets binding/saddle 25 sheets binding
MX-PN13A PUNCH MODULE OPT 2 holes (For 100-sheet 4K Finisher/Saddle Stitch
Finisher)
MX-PN13B OPT 3 holes (For Saddle Finisher)
MX-PN13C OPT 4 holes (For Saddle Finisher)
MX-PN13D OPT 4 wide holes (For Saddle Finisher)
MX-TM10 TRIIMING MODULE OPT
MX-CF11 INSERTER OPT
MX-RB15 CURL CORRECTION UNIT OPT
MX-FD10 FOLDING UNIT OPT
Printer expansion MX-PUX1 XPS EXPANSION KIT OPT
MX-PF10 BARCODE FONT KIT OPT
--- Printer Expansion Kit STD
--- PS Expansion Kit STD
Image send expansion MX-FX11 FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT OPT Not available for some destination.
AR-SU1 STAMP UNIT OPT
MX-FWX1 INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT OPT
Authentication/ MX-FR47 DATA SECURITY KIT OPT Authentication version
Security MX-FR47U DATA SECURITY KIT OPT Non-authentication version
MX-EC50 CARD SOLUTION KIT OPT For North America only.
MX-EB12N MIRRORING KIT OPT
Application MX-USX1 SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT OPT
MX-USX5 SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT OPT
MX-US10 SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT OPT
MX-US50 SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT OPT
MX-USA0 SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT OPT
MX-AMX1 APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE OPT
MX-UN01A Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 1 License Kit OPT
MX-UN05A Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 5 License Kit OPT
MX-UN10A Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 10 License Kit OPT
MX-UN50A Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 50 License Kit OPT
MX-UN1HA Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool 100 License Kit OPT
MX-AMX2 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE OPT Standard for North America and Europe. Sharp
MX-AMX3 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE OPT OSA Utility CD ROM is not included.
MX-KB13 KEYBOARD OPT Standard for North America.
MX-AM10 WEB BROWSING EXPANSION KIT OPT Standard for North America.
Service AR-SC3 STAPLE CARTRIDGE OPT
(For MX-FN20, Saddle Stitch)
AR-SC2 STAPLE CARTRIDGE OPT
(For MX-FN19/20, 50-sheet Finisher)
MX-SCX1 STAPLE CARTRIDGE OPT
(For MX-FN22, Saddle Stitch)
MX-SCX2 STAPLE CARTRIDGE OPT
(For MX-FN21/22, 100-sheet Finisher)
AR-SV1 STAPLE CARTRIDGE OPT Product for service maintenance
DVENDFS1 External Vend Interface Kit OPT

STD: Standard equipment


OPT: Installable

PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2
[2] SPECIFICATIONS Service Manual

1. Basic specifications
A. Engine Specification
Photo-conductor OPC (Diameter: Black: 65mm)
kind
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser)
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method
Transfer system Transfer belt
Separation system Natural separation method
* Sub separation claw is equipped.
Cleaning system Counter blade
Fusing system Heat roller
Waste toner disposal No toner recycling system / Waste toner bottle system
Toner supply during Available
operation
Outer Color Pastel white, natural wave design

B. Engine speed (ppm)


(1) Tray 1 - 4, LCC, LCT

Paper 65ppm 75ppm


machine machine
Plain A3W/ 12×18" 31 34
paper A3/11×17"/8K 34 37
B4/8.5×14”/8.5×13”/8.5×13.4”/8.5×13.5” 39 42
A4/B5/8.5×11”/16K 65 75
A4R/8.5×11R/B5R/7.25×10.5R/16KR 45 48
A5R/5.5×8.5R 45 48
Custom 215.9mm or less 65 75
(vice- 216mm or more - less than 51 55
scanning 225mm
direction 225.1mm or more - less than 45 48
length) 297mm
297.1mm or more 31 34
Heavy A3W/ 12×18" 22 22
paper A3/11×17"/8K 23 23
B4/8.5×14”/8.5×13”/8.5×13.4”/8.5×13.5” 26 26
A4/B5/8.5×11”/16K 43 43
A4R/8.5×11R/B5R/7.25×10.5R/16KR 31 31
A5R/5.5×8.5R 31 31
Custom 215.9mm or less 43 43
(vice- 216mm or more - less than 41 41
scanning 225mm
direction 225.1mm or more - less than 31 31
length) 297mm
297.1mm or more 22 22
OHP A4/8.5×11” 43 43
A4R/8.5×11R 31 31

(2) Multi Bypass

Paper 65ppm 75ppm


machine machine
Plain A3W/ 12×18" 31 34
paper A3/11×17"/8K 33 35
B4/8.5×14”/8.5×13”/8.5×13.4”/8.5×13.5” 37 40
A4/B5/8.5×11”/16K 65 68
A4R/8.5×11R/B5R/7.25×10.5R/16KR 43 46
A5R/5.5×8.5R 45 48
Custom 215.9mm or less 65 68
(vice- 216mm or more - less than 51 54
scanning 225mm
direction 225.1mm or more - less than 43 46
length) 297mm
297.1mm or more 31 34
Extra 31 34

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1
Paper 65ppm 75ppm
machine machine
OHP A4/8.5×11” 43 43
A4R/8.5×11R 31 31
Heavy A3W/ 12×18" 22 22
paper A3/11×17"/8K 23 23
B4/8.5×14”/8.5×13”/8.5×13.4”/8.5×13.5” 26 26
A4/B5/8.5×11”/16K 43 43
A4R/8.5×11R/B5R/7.25×10.5R/16KR 31 31
A5R/5.5×8.5R 31 31
Custom 215.9mm or less 43 43
(vice- 216mm or more - less than 41 41
scanning 225mm
direction 225.1mm or more - less than 31 31
length) 297mm
297.1mm or more 22 22
Extra 22 22
Postcard HIGH *1 43 43
Postcard LOW *1 22 22

*1: Switched by the service simulation setting. Postcard is set Low


before shipment.

C. Printable area *2: The Dither and Error Diffusion methods using 8 bit input will be
performed.
A3 Wide * 297 x 420mm 12" x 18" * 297 x 432mm
A3 293 x 413mm 11" x 17" 275 x 425mm
E. Scanner section
B4 253 x 357mm 8.5" x 14" 212 x 349mm (1) Resolution/Gradation
A4 206 x 290mm 8.5" x 13.5" 212 x 336mm
B5 178 x 250mm 8.5" x 13.4" 212 x 333mm Scanning Monochrome
A5 144 x 203mm 8.5" x 13" 212 x 323mm Resolution (dpi) Platen 600 x 600dpi
Postcard 96 x 141mm Executive 180 x 260mm 600 x 400dpi (default)
8K 266 x 383mm 8.5" x 11" 212 x 272mm DSPF 600 x 600dpi
5.5" x 8.5" 136 x 209mm 600 x 400dpi (default)
16K 191 x 263mm Exposure lamp White LED
Reading gradation 10bit
Custom Min: 86mm x 133mm / Max: 299mm x 1,192mm
Output gradation BW: 1bit
* The printable area for A3W / 12" x 18" must be A3 / 11" x 17"( Gray scale: 8bit
Full Color: each color RGB 8bit
299 x 450mm) via PCL/PS printer driver.
(2) Document table
Void area Lead edge: 4mm +/- 1mm
Rear edge: 2mm to 5mm, Total 8mm or less
Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed)
FR total: 4mm +/- 2mm
Scanning area 297 x 432mm
Image loss Top: 4mm +/- 1mm
Original standard Left corner as standard
FR total: 4mm +/- 2mm
position
Loss width Top:5mm or less
Detection Yes
Rear:5mm or less
FR total: 6mm or less Detection size Automatic detection (One type of detection unit to
be switched for software destination)
D. Engine resolution Dehumidifying Supplied as a service parts
heater (Scanner
Resolution *1 Copy Writing section)
600 x 600dpi
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi F. Document feeder
1200 x 1200dpi (1) DSPF
Print Writing
600 x 600dpi Type DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder)
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi
Scan speed Monochrome Color (A4/8.5" x 11")
1,200 x 1,200dpi
(A4/8.5" x 11")
Gradation *2 Copy Writing
Copy Single: N/A
(256 levels) 600 x 600dpi, 4bit
100 pages/min.
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi
(600 x 300dpi, 4bit)
1,200 x 1,200dpi, 1bit
75 pages/min.
Print Writing (600 x 400dpi, 4bit)
PCL: 51 pages/min.
600 x 600dpi, 1bit, 600 x 600dpi,4bit (600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi Duplex:
1,200 x 1,200dpi, 1bit 200 pages/min.
PS: (600 x 300dpi, 4bit)
600 x 600dpi, 1bit, 600 x 600dpi,4bit 110 pages/min.
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi (600 x 400dpi, 4bit)
1,200 x 1,200dpi, 1bit 76 pages/min.
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
*1: Resolution: 600dpi (default)

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 2
FAX Single: 100 sheets/min. NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Duplex: 200 pages/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Internet FAX Single: 100 sheets/min. NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Duplex: 200 pages/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Scanner Single: 100 sheets/min. Single: 100 sheets/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit)
Duplex: 200 pages/min. Duplex: 200 pages/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit)
Document setup Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard)
direction
Document Center standard (Rear one-side standard for
standard position random feeding)
Document Sheet-through method
transport method
Document size Standard size
Inch-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11",
8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
AB-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
AB-4: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-5: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
Long paper 1000 mm (Monochrome 2 levels only)
Mix paper feed Available
(Same series,
same width paper)
Random feeding Available
(different (A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5; B5 and A5;
combination of AB/ and 11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS effective.)
inch system,
different width)
Document weight Single:
Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2)
Plain paper: 13 - 34 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
* Thin paper mode (54cpm (600 x 300dpi), 46cpm
(600 x 400dpi), 35cpm(600 x 600dpi)) is set up for
the thin paper.
Duplex: 13 - 34 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
Document capacity Max. 150 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max.
height: 50/64 inch, 19.5mm or less
Types of document OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon
that may not be paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or
transport. breakage, pasted paper, cutout document,
document printed with ink ribbon, documents with
perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated
document by punch unit is allowed.)
Paper detection Yes
Detectable paper Auto detection (Refer to “Document size”)
size
Paper feeding Right hand feeding
direction
Finish stamp Option

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 3
G. Paper feed section
(1) Basic specifications

Type Standard 4 trays (Tandem LCC + 2 trays) + Multi bypass


Maximum 4 trays + Multi bypass + Large capacity casette
Dehumidifying heater Service parts

Tray 1 Tray 2
Tray Tray 3 Tray 4 Multi bypass tray
(LCC left side) (LCC right side)
Paper capacity Plain paper (80g/m2) 1,250 sheets 850 sheets 500 sheets 500 sheets 100 sheets
Paper size Refer to “Feedable Paper Type”.
Paper size detection No Refer to “Feedable Paper Type”.
Paper type settings Refer to “Feedable Paper Type”.
Method to change paper size Switche by User/Serviceman *1 User selection
Universal cassette handle Yes ---
Default Paper Size Inch series 8.5" x 11" 8.5" x 11" Shipped with the guides set for the largest ---
Setting AB series A4 A4 paper size. ---
Paper remaining quantity detection None and 3 levels None and 3 levels None and 3 levels(100%/67%/9%/None) Available detect
(100%/33%/6%/ (100%/50%/9%/ “None” status only.
None) None)
Paper size display Yes ---

*1: The trays can be changed between A4 and 8.5" x 11" by the users. However, they can be changed to and form B5 only by the serviceman.
(2) Extra paper capacity

Paper type Feeding Tray Multi bypass tray


Postcard NA 20 sheets
Envelope NA NA
OHP 40 sheets 20 sheets
106-256g/m2:40 sheets,
Heavy paper 80 sheets
257-300g/m2:20 sheets,
Tab paper 40 sheets 20 sheets
Glossy paper NA 1 sheet
Others 1 sheet 1 sheet

(3) Feedable Paper Type

Tray 1 Tray 2 Multi


A4LCC A3LCC
Paper feed section (Tandem (Tandem Tray 3 Tray 4 bypass tray
(Option) (Option)
left) right) (Option)
Minimum weight 60g/m2 60g/m2 60g/m2 60g/m2 55g/m2 60g/m2 60g/m2
Maximum weight 105g/m2 105g/m2 220g/m2 220g/m2 300g/m2 220g/m2 220g/m2
Paper Thin paper No No No No Yes No No
type Plain paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter head Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre printed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre Punched Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 1 106 - 220g/m2 28lbs bond- No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
80lbs cover
Heavy paper 2 221 - 256g/m2 80lbs cover- No No No No Yes No No
140lbs index
Heavy paper 3 257 - 300g/m2 140lbs index- No No No No Yes No No
110lbs cover
Tab paper*2 No No No Yes Yes No No
OHP Transparency No No No Yes Yes No No
Label No No No Yes Yes No No
Glossy paper No No No No Yes No No
User settings 1 - 8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 4
Tray 1 Tray 2 Multi
A4LCC A3LCC
Paper feed section (Tandem (Tandem Tray 3 Tray 4 bypass tray
(Option) (Option)
left) right) (Option)
Paper 12" x 18" (A3W) 305 x 457 No No No No Yes No Yes
size Ledger (11" x 17") 279 x 432 No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Legal (8.5" x 14") 216 x 356 No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Asian legal (8.5" x 13.5") 216 x 343 No No Yes Yes Yes No No
Mexican legal (8.5" x 13.4") 216 x 340 No No Yes Yes Yes No No
Foolscap (8.5" x 13") 216 x 330 No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Letter (8.5" x 11") 279 x 216 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter R (8.5" x 11"R) 216 x 279 No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Invoice R (5.5" x 8.5"R) 140 x 216 No No No Yes Yes No No
Executive R (7.25" x 10.5"R) 184 x 266 No No Yes Yes Yes No No
9 x 12 (A4W) 305 x 229 No No Yes Yes Yes No No
A3 297 x 420 No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes
B4 257 x 364 No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes
A4 297 x 210 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4-R 210 x 297 No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes
B5 257 x 182 Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5-R 182 x 257 No No Yes Yes Yes No No
A5-R 148 x 210 No No No Yes Yes No No
8K 270 x 390 No No Yes Yes Yes No No
16K 270 x 195 No No Yes Yes Yes No No
16K-R 195 x 270 No No Yes Yes Yes No No
Monarch 98 x 191 No No No No No No No
COM10 105 x 241 No No No No No No No
DL 110 x 220 No No No No No No No
C5 229 x 162 No No No No No No No
Nagagata3 120 x 235 No No No No No No No
Nagagata4 90 x 205 No No No No No No No
Yogata2 114 x 162 No No No No No No No
Yogata3 105 x 235 No No No No No No No
Kakugata2 240 x 332 No No No No No No No
Kakugata3 216 x 277 No No No No No No No
Extra - Custom size*1 No No No Yes Yes No No
Min X 148mm/ 140mm/
No No No No No
(sub scan) 5.875inch 5.5inch
Max X 432mm/ 457mm/
No No No No No
(sub scan) 17inch 18inch
Min Y
Custom range 100mm/ 90mm/
(main No No No No No
4inch 3.625inch
scan)
Max Y
297mm/ 305mm/
(main No No No No No
11.625inch 12inch
scan)
Extra - Unknown size No No No No Yes No No
Width: 90 -
305
Banner paper No No No No Yes No No
Length:
458 - 1200

*1: Custom size to be set by software switch. (Default: not effective) Banner paper (Multi Bypass): Support maximum 1,200mm.
*2: Tab width: A4(12-20mm), 8.5x11(6.1-17mm)

H. Paper exit section


(1) Exit Capacity

Exit location Center (option) Right side (option)


Exit Capacity 250 sheets (80g/m2,,recommended paper) 100 sheets (A4/8.5 x 11)(80g/m2,,recommended paper)

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 5
(2) Size of paper which can be discharged

Paper exit section Duplex Main unit center tray Right exit tray
Paper Thin paper 55-59g/m2 13-16 lb bond No Yes Yes
type Plain paper 60-105g/m2 16-28 lb bond*5 Yes Yes Yes
Recycled paper*5 Yes Yes Yes
Color paper*5 Yes Yes Yes
Letter head*5 Yes Yes Yes
Pre printed paper*5 Yes Yes Yes
Punch paper*5 Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 1 106 - 220g/m2 28lb bond-80 lb cover Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 2 221 - 256g/m2 80lb cover-140 lb index No Yes Yes
Heavy paper 3 257 - 300g/m2 140lb index-110 lb cover No Yes No
Envelope No No No
OHP Transparency No Yes Yes
Label No Yes Yes
Tab paper*2 No Yes No
Glossy paper No Yes No
User settings 1 - 8 *3*5 Yes Yes Yes
Paper 12" x 18" (A3W) 305 x 457 Yes Yes Yes
size Ledger (11" x 17") 279 x 432 Yes Yes Yes
Legal (8.5" x 14") 216 x 356 Yes Yes Yes
Asian legal (8.5" x 13.5") 216 x 343 Yes Yes Yes
Mexican legal (8.5" x 13.4") 216 x 340 Yes Yes Yes
Foolscap (8.5" x 13") 216 x 330 Yes Yes Yes
Letter (8.5" x 11") 279 x 216 Yes Yes Yes
Letter R (8.5" x 11"R) 216 x 279 Yes Yes Yes
Executive R (7.25" x 10.5"R) 184 x 266 Yes Yes Yes
Invoice R (5.5" x 8.5"R) 140 x 216 Yes Yes Yes
A3 297 x 420 Yes Yes Yes
B4 257 x 364 Yes Yes Yes
A4 297 x 210 Yes Yes Yes
A4-R 210 x 297 Yes Yes Yes
B5 257 x 182 Yes Yes Yes
B5-R 182 x 257 Yes Yes Yes
A5-R 148 x 210 Yes Yes Yes
8K 270 x 390 Yes Yes Yes
16K 270 x 195 Yes Yes Yes
16K-R 195 x 270 Yes Yes Yes
Postcard *1 195 x 270 No Yes Yes
Monarch 98 x 191 No No No
COM10 105 x 241 No No No
DL 110 x 220 No No No
C5 229 x 162 No No No
Nagagata3 120 x 235 No No No
Nagagata4 90 x 205 No No No
Yogata2 114 x 162 No No No
Yogata3 105 x 235 No No No
Kakugata2 240 x 332 No No No
Kakugata3 216 x 277 No No No
Extra - Custom size Yes Yes Yes
Min X (sub scan) 182mm/7.25inch 140mm/5.5inch 140mm/5.5inch
Max X (sub scan) 457mm/18inch 457mm/18inch 457mm/18inch
Custom range
Min Y (main scan) 140mm/5.5inch 90mm/3.625inch 90mm/3.625inch
Max Y (main scan) 305mm/12inch 305mm/12inch 305mm/12inch
Extra - Unknown size No Yes No
Width: 90 - 305
Banner paper*4 No Yes No
Length: 458 - 1200

*1: Japan only.


*2: Tab width: A4(12-20mm), 8.5x11(6.1-17mm)
*3: Comply with Paper type setting.
*4: Banner paper (from Multi Bypass): Max.1200mm by simulation setting. Banner paper for right exit tray is not available for every destination.
*5: Fusing control setting (60-89g/m2 (default) 90-105g/m2) is available.

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 6
I. Operation panel 2. Copy functions
Size 10.1 inch A. Copy Magnification Ratio
Type Dot matrix LCD, touch panel
Same size 1:1±0.8%
Display dot number 1,024 x 600 dots (WSVGA)
AB system : 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%,
Color Yes
Copy ratio       115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
LCD Drive Display Area 222.72x125.28mm (CMO 10.1inch) Inch system : 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%,
(WxD) 121%, 129%, 200%, 400%
LCD back-light LED lamp back-light system Zoom 25 – 400% (25-200% for the document feeder)
LCD Contrast Adjust Yes Preset magnification 4 levels (Reduction : 2 levels / Enlargement : 2
Angle / position Yes ( tiltable): free positions ratio levels)
adjustment XY zoom Yes
Touch panel method Resistive touch display (effective 2-point touch) Auto Ratio calculation The copy ratio is automatically calculated by
specifying the original size and copy size
J. Controller board manually.
(Selected from standard sizes / input directly)
CPU ARM11: 600MHz
ARM9: 400MHz (Energy save mode: 75MHz) B. Number of Sets
SOC Intel Atom D525 1.8GHz
Interface Acceptable number of 1 – 9999 sets
IEEE1284 Parallel No sets
Ethernet 1port Setting number of sets No
Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T by page (Setting number
Support Protocol TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, Ether Talk of sets by original)
USB 2.0 (high speed) 2port (Front 1+ rear 1)
(host)*1 ATOM
C. Density / Copy Image Quality Processing
For Rear USB Port
Internal: 4port Exposure mode Automatic (Magical view, Character AE)
? For Front USB Port Text, Text/Printed Photo, Printed Photo, Text/
? For Wireless LAN module Photo, Photo, Map and Pale-color document
? For IC card reader Mode of Copy original Yes
? For Keyboard Manual levels 9 levels
USB 2.0 (high speed) 1port Toner save mode Yes. Selected from 3 levels in the SIM settings.
(device)
Acquisition of USB No
Validation
D. Original
ACRE expansion I/F No (ACRE Expantion Standard)
Ir-Simple I/F No Auto detection Yes
Video I/F No AB system Yes (A5/A5R/B5/B5R/A4/A4R/B4/A3/216x340/
(for panel-PC BOX) 216x343)
Serial I/F 1port(Be sure to prepare a connector on board *Clipping B5R(Coner), Clipping B5R(Center)
(for coin vendor) for a supplemental port.) D-Sub cable to be support by soft SW.
provided as service part. Inch system Yes (5.5x8.5/5.5x8.5R/8.5x11/8.5x11R/8.5x13/
Memory Refer to section "Memory/Hard disk". 8.5x14/11x17/8.5x13.4)
Memory slot 1 slot Direct input X direction (AB system:25-432 mm; inch system:1-
Acquisition of Windows No 17 inches)
Premium Logo Y direction (AB system:25-297 mm; inch system:1-
WHQL acquisition Yes 11 5/8 inches)
Size registration Yes (Registered up to 12 sizes)
*1: USB Host to be disabled through Sim setting.

K. Memory/Hard disk E. Paper


Standard paper tray Tray 1-4
ICU PWB
SD CF Bypass Tray
Reus SOC HDD*1
card card Option paper tray Large Capacity Tray(A3/Ledger)
On board On board Slot Large Capacity Tray(A4/Letter)
4GB 8GB 1GB (STD) 2GB (STD)*2 1GB (OPT) 320GB Bypass tray settings on Yes
the paper selection
*1: HDD capacity may vary depending on the procurement condi-
screen
tion.
Input of non- Yes
*2: Maximum scanning number: 6000 sheets. standard sizes
Registration of Yes
Memory area Boot/Program area non-standard sizes
(SD card) FAX data storage area: 1GB

L. Warm-up time
Main power SW on *1 Sub power SW on *1
Warm-up time 24sec. 24sec.
Pre heat Yes
Jam recovery time 24sec. 24sec.
*2

*1: Result may change depending on the environmental condition.


*2: After 60 seconds leaves door open, standard condition, poly-
gon motor is stopping.

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 7
F. 2-Sided Copy Auto Offset OFF when Yes
outputting one sheet
1-sided copy > 1-sided Yes Select the ups or downs Yes
copy output tray at outputting
1-sided copy > 2-sided Yes (Capable of rotating the orientation of the by finisher
copy paper by 180 degrees when the paper is
reversed.) I. Job Program
2-sided copy > 2-sided Yes (Capable of rotating the orientation of the
copy paper by 180 degrees when the paper is Job program calling/ Yes (Registered up to: 48; Preset: 1)
reversed.) registration
2-sided copy > 1-sided Yes (Capable of rotating the orientation of the Job program name Yes
copy paper by 180 degrees when the paper is registration
reversed.) Job program calling/ No
registration by user
G. Image Quality Adjustment Bypass tray paper type Yes
registration
Auto calibration Yes Bypass tray paper size Yes
Registration adjustment No registration

H. Copy Functions J. Copy Performance


Speed to Change Original Document (Copy mode)
Automatic paper Yes (Mixed/random-size feeding are supported.)
selection (APS) Engine 65ppm 75ppm
Automatic magnification Yes (Mixed/random-size feeding are supported.) S to S 65cpm (100%) 75cpm (100%)
selection (AMS)
Paper type selection Yes: Type setting is allowed *Defines the copy speed at the combination of the main unit and a
Rotated copy Yes (Large rotated copy exceeding A4 is document feeder.
supported.)
* S to S: A4 / 8.5x11 document, 11 pages and 1 copy (not including
Rotated copy is Yes
the first copy) Monochrome : 600x300dpi(default)
supported when the
APS / AMS are off. *Except multi mode broadcasting.
Electric sort Yes
K. Job Efficiency
Rotated sort No
Job reservation Yes (Job status up to 99) BLI target (DSPF)
Auto Selection Setting of Yes
Engine 65ppm 75ppm
tray that is Supplied the
Paper S to S 85.9% 85.2%
Preview function Yes S to D 84.3% 83.6%
Notification sound of Yes (Supported by the Soft-SW) D to D 91.3% 90.9%
finished copy job
Calculation method:
Stop copy when no Yes (Supported by the Soft-SW)
original S to S/StoD=FCOT+60/cpm x 10-original x the number of set
Display of the number of No DtoD=FCOT+60/cpm x 20-image x the number of set
original pages read * S to S : Average of 10 originals of A4 / 8.5x11 document
Void less copy No
x1,x5,x10 -set
Copy reservation while Yes
warming up * S to D : Average of 10 originals of A4 / 8.5x11 document
When proof copying No x1,x5,x10-set
* D to D : Average of 10 originals of A4 / 8.5x11 document
(20 images) x1,x5,x10 -set

3. Printer function
A. Printer driver supported OS
OS*1 Custom PCL6 Custom PCL5c PS PPD PC-Fax TWAIN
Windows 98/Me No No No No No No
NT 4.0 SP5 or later No No No No No No
2000 No No No No No No
Server 2003 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2003 (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Vista CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Vista (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008 (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8 (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8.1 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8.1 (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2012 (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 8
OS*1 Custom PCL6 Custom PCL5c PS PPD PC-Fax TWAIN
Mac For 9.0 No No No No No No
For X 10.2 No No No No No No
For X 10.3 No No No No No No
For X 10.4 No No CD-ROM No No No
For X 10.5 No No CD-ROM No No No
For X 10.6 No No CD-ROM No No No
For X 10.7 No No CD-ROM No No No
For X 10.8 No No CD-ROM No No No
For X 10.9 No No CD-ROM No No No

*1: New OS is supported according to the rule in Digital Document System Group.,

B. PDL emulation/Font

PDL (Command) Installed font Option font


PCL5c / PCL6 compatible STD European outline font = 80 styles Barcode font = 28 styles
Line printer font (BMP) = 1 style
Genuine Postscript 3 STD European outline font = 139 styles ?
Font for List Print Salable font STD Arfic mobile font -

C. Supported Print Channel

Installed font Option font


USB (device) USB1.1 / USB2.0(High-Speed)
USB (host) USB1.1 / USB2.0(High-Speed)
PSERVER/RPRINT for the NetWare Print channel in PSERVER/PRINT mode to be used in the NetWare
environment environment.
LPR UNIX LPR/LPD command-compatible print channel
IPP Print channel in compliance with IPP1.0
PAP EtherTalk (AppleTalk) Print channel to be used for the Macintosh environment.
FTP Equipped with the function to print data received via built-in FTP server.
NetBEUI No
Raw Port(Port9100) 9100 TCP port (Raw Port) supported
HTTP (Web Submit Print) Set/ Print the file by Web via network.
POP3 (E-Mail To Print) Print attached data of receiving E-mail automatically.
BMLinkS Support Network OA equipment interface by JBMIA (Only Japan)

IPP,HTTP and POP3 support SSL.

D. Print Functions

Function Description SPDL/PCL PostScript3


Multiple Pamphlet Binds multiple pamphlet outputs into a single Yes Yes
booklet.
Network tandem print Two units connected via network can be used simultaneously for a Yes Yes
printout. Separate the data on the PC and send to MFP. (Only Windows)
*Guaranteed for same model, same configuration
Windows Cluster Print When a Windows server breaks down, a mirror server takes over Yes Yes
and executes the suspended print job. (Only Windows)
*There may be color differences between machine types.
ROPM The function enables the printout of a multiple number of copies in Yes Yes
one RIP processing.
Multi-access RIP processing must be allowed during printing. Yes Yes
Printing must also be allowed during scanning.
Paper direction setting for 2-sided printing Pages with front-back attribute such letterhead or punch paper are to Yes Yes
of letterhead paper and pre-punched be printed correctly in front-back page order for 2-sided printing.
paper. (Logo paper print supported
(SEGA AOK Corporation))
Enable Selected Paper For setting of Bypass tray, even if the setup values on the main unit Yes Yes
Type/Size in Bypass Tray side do not match with those on the driver side, the printing will be
executed in the setting of the driver regardless of the setup values
on the main unit side.
Control of setting under terminal service Print setting of each client is memorized under terminal service of Yes Yes
environment server OS. (Setup for each log-in can be skipped.) (Only Windows)

Control of setting under Citrix products Auto create printer print settingof each client is memorized under Yes No
environment CitrixXenApp products environment (XenApp 5.0, XenApp 6.0,
XenApp 6.5) (Save labor to set when log-in)
Driver delivery function SRDM allows the administrator to deliver a driver to clients. Or Yes Yes
enables delivery installation by using MSI. (Only Windows)
Form overlay The function downloads a form to the main unit beforehand, sends No Yes
the contained data only, and inserts the data into the form in the main
unit for printout.

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 9
Planet Press Objectif Lune Corporation’s Planet Press (Software Yes Yes
to execute the mapping of forms (DL beforehand)
and variable data in the printer interior)
Bonjour for This technology detects and connects peripheral equipment on the No Yes
Macintosh environment network automatically.
The dynamic network connection (computer, peripheral equipment
and software) is possible without user setting.
Document control Print the document with a fixed pattern to avoid Yes Yes
illegal copy. (Opt) (Opt)
Object judgment (screen change / screen In the printer color mode output, object of image data (area of Yes Yes
setting) photograph / graphic text) is judged.
Print screen (resolution) is changed automatically.
Binding with no line To prevent bound pages from becoming thick, saddle stitch printing is No No
performed for a small number of pages.
Chapter inserts Insert blank page automatically to entering 1st page of each chapter Yes No
to odd page.
Expansion of margin shift In the current model, the margin shift width setting value can be Yes Yes
changed per 10mm. Change from 10mm to 1mm. When Margin Shift (Only Windows)
is set, it will not be cut off when it is shifted.
Move Adjusting copy position in vertical axle and cross axle. No No
Configurable each right side or back.
Saddle staple support In the current model, imposition of images and stapling are Yes Yes
performed in Saddle stitch printing.
However imposition is sometimes already performed in the
application etc. Therefore, the specification of saddle staple only
is added.
Full image pamphlet support Layout the Fixed-form as full-image pamphlet, and print to the larger Yes No
size paper. (e.g. Layout two A4 data as A3 without center
margin, and print to A3W paper/ Saddle stitch imposed A3 data to
A3W paper, etc)
A3W paper center output support A3W paper can be output on the center output tray. Yes Yes
IC card authentication of driver Usually, it needs to register authentication data to driver for No No
authentication of printer.
In addition, it needs to authenticate IC card and insert ID of IC card to
printed data when print out.
SSFC support driver It’s able to register CL code in driver beforehand. Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
WSD support Discovery function for printer Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
90 degrees rotation function Even if paper is set to different direction, print with 90 degrees image Yes Yes
rotation automatically when printing image is matched paper size. (Rotation is made (Rotation is made
(However, cannot change direction during job) by the MFP.) by the MFP.)
Spool display Show jobs that will be spooled in HDD before ripping printer jobs. Yes Yes
Long original print Print long original.(max.1200mm) (Supported by Sim of machine) Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
Woven pattern print When printing confidential documents, print copy controlled Yes No
character such as “Copy prohibition” as woven pattern behind the
original.
Job cancel at Auto job control review User can cancel the job at Auto job control review dialog. Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
A0/A1 fit page Print A0&A1 data into A4 or Letter size. Yes No
Page interleave This function is used to interleave each printed page with an identical Yes No
insert page. To use this function, it’s necessary to use the “Overlay”
function to prepare an insert page file.
Use driver to render JPEGs In case of having JPEG image in the original document, user can Yes Yes
select whether printer driver or MFP to render JPEG image. (Only Windows)
Print Position This function is to adjust print position of odd and even page of Yes Yes
document separately. (Adjustable in increments of mm/inch) (Only Windows)
Print number of page when N-up printing Print number of page on not only each original but also each output. No No
Expansion of N-up printing Normal print only 1st page, and remaining pages are N-up printing. Yes No
(can be duplex)
100%N-Up Print in 100% size in N-Up for specific combination of data and paper Yes Yes
size, when the data is usually reduced in imposition. (Only Windows)
Gloss paper printing Print digital camera pictures to gloss paper easily. No No
It’s able to set gloss paper as paper type without adding profile.
N-Up support when saddle stitch printing Ex. Print presentation documents by 2-up and pamphlet layout. Yes Yes
Repeat printing of indeterminate size Repeat indeterminate size original with automatically reduction. Yes No
Void less printing Ex. Possible to print void less when print photo to gloss paper at No No
Kiosk.
Driver setting priority This function prioritize print setting specified in the printer dricer UI, Yes Yes
ignoring the printer settings from application. (Only Windows)
Print Policy To limit operation by user level, function to turn on some item Yes Yes
mandatory. Refer below about item which is limited. And design (Only Windows)
consideration of can support additional demand.

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 10
User authentication every time This function enforces print users to execute user authentication. Yes Yes
Force Retention This function enforces print users to use retention function. Yes Yes
Force B&W print This function enforces print users to print in monochrome. N/A N/A
Acquisition of Windows login name Windows login name information can be applied to the login name for Yes Yes
printer driver.
Billing cord It’s selectable every item whether user choose charging on job Yes Yes
running.
Force Retention of Printer job by MFP This function enforces to save all printer job to HDD of MFP inspite of Yes Yes
setting for retention.
(Forbiding to print of DSK function except holding is diferrent
function, because it deletes automatically the job without saving.)
Toner save mode Toner save mode (1 level) Yes Yes
(3 levels: separately supported by the driver)
Smoothing (RET) Support RET (resolution enhancement techniques) Yes Yes
To smooth the edges of image and reduce jagged lines in order to
obtain virtually high resolution.
Trapping Select to prevent void area which may be generated around edge of No No
colors.
Sharpness This is used to sharpen an image or make it softer. Yes Yes
5 levels (Sharp: 2 levels, Soft: 2 levels)
Custom Image Custom image can be stored and registered in MFP through printer Yes No
driver.
Function Flow Lite Print & Send. “Send” can be specified by printer driver. Yes No
Auto Offset cancellation at only one sheet When only 1 page is printed in a job and it is output from the finisher, No No
of output offset is canceled automatically.
Saddle fold at only one sheet of output It’s able to saddle fold even if when out put sheet is only one in 1 job. Yes Yes
Offset by each specified number of sets Offset by each specified number of sets when printing No No
when no staples
Lot4 support Duplex setting is default when printing. Yes Yes
And do not pass through duplex path for one page job. (For EU only) (Only Windows)
Crop mark Print corner crop marks and center crop marks when printing full No No
fixed size data on larger-than-fixed-size sheet.
Centerfold insertion Inserts a sheet from the inserter at the last page of pamphlet as No No
centerfold.
Trimming width adjustment Trimming width by the trimmer is adjustable for saddle stitching and Yes Yes
saddle folding.
Extended maximum number of sheets for Extends the maximum number of insert for cover / back cover / insert Yes Yes
insertion to 1000 sheet. (Only Windows)
Continuous insertion of cover / insert Enables continuous insertion (including paper feeding from the Yes Yes
inserter) (Only Windows)
Put inserts before the back cover It’s able to put inserts before the back cover. Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
Cover/Insert multiple selection/deletion It’s able to choose multiple inserted pages and delete them. Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
Separator page insertion Enables to insert separator pages between sets / jobs. Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
Disabling blank print by printer driver Enables to disable the blank print from the printer driver. Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
Number-of-set management number Adds the number for managing number of sets in multiple set Yes No
print printing.
Printable area adjustment Expand engine void to 1.5mm. Yes Yes
(Only Windows)
AirPrint support Support AirPrint which is the standard print service of iOS. Yes Yes
It supports version after iOS 5.0.
Image rotation of custom size It’s able to print for both Short edge direction (Landscape) and Long Yes Yes
Edge direction (Portrait)
Carbon Copy This function makes possible to print data to several different types Yes Yes
of paper by using different paper trays.Carbon copy’s paper feeding (Only Windows)
order is displayed on the print driver.
Displaying paper weight Paper types’ weight is displayed on the print driver’s dialog. Target Yes Yes
paper types are Thin paper, Plain paper, and Heavy paper 1-3. (Only Windows)
Support four-digit number of sets Support acceptable number of sets up to 9999 sets Yes Yes
CMYK Image Enhancement Correct the gray scale density when CMYK data is printed out from No Yes
applications by PS driver. (Only Windows)

E. Condition Settings

Setting item Description


Initial setting Basic settings for printer use such as number of copies or printing direction.
PCL setting Setting of PCL symbols and fonts.
PS setting Setting of allowing or not allowing printing and binary output during PS error.

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 11
4. FAX function
A. Transmission method E. Record Size

Transmission time Less than 3 sec (Super G3) Max. record width 293mm
Less than 7 sec (G3 ECM) Record size (AB series)
Compression/ MH, MR, MMR, JBIG A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R
expansion system (Fixed to ECM for MMR or JBIG.) (Inch series)
Modem speed 33.6kbps 2.4kbps automatic fallback 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
Resolution 8 x 3.85 line/mm, 8 x 7.7 line/mm, 8.5 x 5.5R
8 x 15.4 line/mm, 16 x 15.4 line/mm (Standard
* If the document length exceeds A3 size, it is divided and printed.
memory is used for transmit/receive.)
Intercommunication G3/Super G3: Standard (V.34, V.17, V.33, V.29, * For printing the list, A5R and 8.5 x 5.5R cannot be used.
V.27ter)
F. Dial
Communication line Public switched telephone network (PSTN),
Private branch exchange (PBX), F-net
Manual dialing To be entered by 10-key, # key, * key
SEGA: R-key for PBX setting
Re-dialing The previous 50 items (max.) can be saved,
ECM Yes
and one of them can be selected.
Individual call is available.
B. Number of Support Line
Individual dialing 2000 items including the group dialing items
Standard 1 line Group dialing 2000 items including the individual dialing
items
Expansion Not provided
Program dialing 48 items + preset 1 item
C. Transmission Mode Chain dialing Max. 64 digits including individual dialing,
10-key dialing, and pause.
DSPF/OC Yes (Switching during the reading is feasible Dial search Alphabet order search, User index groups
transmission switching (When Preview and Job build mode) Quick search Yes
LDAP search Yes
D. Image Quality/Image Process Sub address Yes
Password Yes
Half tone reproduction Equivalent to 256 levels Memory box registration Yes
Exposure adjustment Auto / Manual (5 steps)
FAX quality selection Standard (8 x 3.85 line/mm (203.2 x 97.8dpi)) * LDAP: Lightweight Directory Access protocol
Fine (8 x 7.7 line/mm (203.2 x 195.6dpi))
Super Fine (8 x 15.4 line/mm (203.2 x 391dpi))
Ultra Fine (16 x 15.4 line/mm (406.4 x 391dpi)) G. Memory for Transmit/Receive
Half-tone (Combination with normal character is
invalid.) FAX transmission data HDD
FAX reception data HDD (SD card: Mirror)

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 12
H. Function Receive Receive data print condition Yes
function function
Transmit Calling function Yes Receive data staple setting/ Yes
function Requires the frequency Copy number setting
setting for each destination. Rotation receive Yes
PBX function Germany, France only Output by clockwise rotation
Memory transmit Yes (Definable destinations: of 90 degrees
94 destinations) Divided receive Yes
On-hook Yes Divided print is not made in
Quick online transmit Yes duplex mode.
Direct transmit Yes Duplex receive Yes
Manual transmit Yes F-code confidential receive Yes
Auto re-call mode Yes Print hold Yes
Time indication function Yes Document Admin Yes
Sequential broadcasting Yes Inbound Routing Yes
function Sender registration function Yes
F code interface Yes Sender print function Yes
broadcasting indication Only one interface station On-hook dialing function Yes
function can be specified. Retransmit function Yes
F code interface Yes Pause function Yes
broadcasting function Pause time is 1 ? 15 sec.
F code confidential send Yes Sound volume setting Yes
function function
Polling Yes Tone pulse select function Tone, Pulse, Auto
Even with another company (North America/Taiwan)
machine * For the other destinations,
Sequential polling function Yes set with the soft switch.
Even with another company External phone connection Yes
machine Memory remaining capacity Yes
F-code polling Yes check function Only the integral part is
Bulletin board Yes displayed.
F code bulletin board Yes Back up Yes
function Registered data read/write Yes
Auto reduction transmit Yes function
A3 B4, A3 A4, B4 A4 Report/List Yes
Rotation transmit Yes Special Destination check function Yes
Counterclockwise rotation of function Broadcasting destination Yes
90 degrees display function
Duplex transmit Yes Transmit job change function Yes
Document transmit from OC Yes Save-energy function Yes
function
Line monitor display function Yes
Long length original transmit Only when DSPF is used.
FAST Yes
Transmission is enable up to
Facsimile Automated Service
1000mm.
Technology
Mixed documents function Only when DSPF is used.
Time adjust function Yes
Zoom transmit Yes Summer time ON/OFF
2 in 1 transmit Yes PC-FAX Yes
Card shot transmit Only when transmitting from Color mode No
OC
Sender registration function Yes
Thin paper scan function Available except for duplex Number of registration: 1 for
scan standard sender name and
Edge erase transmit function Yes address. And 18 sender
Only for the fixed sizes names can be registered.
Job build Yes Default destination setting No
Page division transmit Yes Unauthorized scan Yes
Cover No prevention function
Index No Filing-each-page function No
Transmit message adding No Re-operation function Yes
function User account function Yes
Receive Auto receive Yes Max. 200 items additionally
function Manual receive Yes to the default
DRD call function Distinctive Ring Detection Counter function Yes
North America: Standard,
Pattern 1 ? 5
Australia/New Zealand/Hong
Kong: ON/OFF (TEL/FAX)
Memory receive Yes
Transfer function Yes
Number of registration: 1
item
Specified receive function Yes (Number of registration)
Rejection numbers: Max.50
items

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 13
5. Image send function Mode Format / Item Support
Compression
A. Mode method
Scanner File format High compression Yes
Mode Sub mode Support (Mono 2 gradation) PDF
Scanner E-mail Yes (with ACRE installed)
FTP server Yes*1,*2 File format Black Letter Yes
Shared folder (SMB) Yes*1 (Mono 2 gradation) Emphasis
Desktop Yes File format 2-color PDF No
Internet Fax / Direct SMTP - Yes (Mono 2 gradation)
Fax - Yes Internet Fax File format TIFF-FX(TIFF-F / Yes
Data input ( metadata ) E-mail Yes Direct SMTP (Color/ Gray scale) TIFF-S)
FTP server Yes File format TIFF-C No
Shared folder (SMB) Yes (Mono 2 gradation)
Desktop Yes Compression Non-compression N/A
Remote PC scan - Yes method G3 (1- dimentional)= Yes
(Monochrome) MH (Modified
*1:Their can send e-mails that include hyper links. Huffman)
*2:Also support for Passive mode. Active mode and Passive mode G4 = MMR (Modified Yes
MR)
are switchable by setting.
Compression TIFF-C (high/ middle/ No
B. Support System method low)
(Color/ Gray scale)
Mode Scanner Internet Fax/ Fax Fax File format N/A N/A
Direct SMTP (Monochrome)
Corresponding SMTP/SMTP- POP3 server N/A Compression MH/ MR/ MMR/JBIG Yes
server / SSL SMTP server method
Protocol FTP (TCP/IP)/ ESMTP server (Monochrome)
FTPS File per page (Setting of the number of pages available) Yes
SMB *1
HTTP/HTTPS * Apply the formats which have been set by each mode when
(Supported broadcasting across modes of Image Send. (One scan multi for-
protocol of mat).
Sharp OSA)
E. Image Processing
*1:Network environment for SMB.
(1) Color mode
[Windows]
Server2003, Server2003x64, Vista, Vistax64, Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax
Server2008, Server2008x64, Windows7, Windows7x64, Direct SMTP
Windows8, B&W Yes Yes Yes
Gray scale Yes N/A N/A
Windows8x64,Server2012, Windows 8.1, Windows 8.1x64
Full color Yes N/A N/A
[Macintosh] Auto Color Selection Yes N/A N/A
For OSX 10.4, 10.5, 10.6, 10.7, 10.8, 10.9
(2) Resolution
C. IPv6 Support
No support Internet Fax/
Level Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
D. Support Image 1 100x100dpi 200x100dpi Standard: 203.2x97.8dpi
(Half Tone: N/A.) (Half Tone: N/A.)
Mode Format / Item Support 2 150x150dpi N/A N/A
Compression 3 200x200dpi 200x200dpi Fine (203.2x195.6 dpi)
method 4 300x300dpi 200x400dpi Super Fine (203.2x391 dpi)
Scanner File format TIFF Yes 5 400x400dpi 400x400dpi Ultra Fine (406.4x391 dpi)
(Mono 2 gradation) PDF Yes 6 600x600dpi 600x600dpi N/A
PDF/A Yes
Encrypted PDF Yes (3) Exposure / Original Type
XPS Yes
File format Color TIFF Yes Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax
(Color/ Gray scale) JPEG Yes Direct SMTP
PDF Yes Halftone reproduction Equivalent to 256 gradations
PDF/A Yes Exposure Auto Yes <- <-
Encrypted PDF Yes Adjustment Manual 5 levels <- <-
High compression Yes Original Text Yes N/A N/A
PDF document type Text / Photo Yes N/A N/A
(with ACRE installed) (Selectable in Text / Yes N/A N/A
XPS Yes manual mode) Printed photo
Compression Non-compression Yes Photo Yes N/A N/A
method G3 (1-dimentional)= Yes Printed photo Yes N/A N/A
(Mono 2 gradation) MH (Modified Map Yes N/A N/A
Huffman) Magical scan Yes N/A N/A
G4= MMR (Modified Yes (Area division + Suppress
MR) Background)
Compression JPEG (high/middle/ Yes Selection of image quality N/A Halftone (B&W only)
method low) ON/OFF
(Color/ Gray scale)

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 14
(4) Other Image Processing Functions F. Specifying Addresses
Internet Fax/
(1) Address Specifying Method
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Function Support
Moire reduction mode N/A*1 N/A N/A
CPT(notes’ security) One-touch Yes
Yes N/A N/A
Group key Yes
Scanning QR No No No
Direct input Yes (e-mail/SMB/Internet Fax (including
*1:A similar function is available by adjusting sharpness. (Entry from the soft keyboard, Direct SMTP)/Fax)
externally-connected *Addresses of FTP/Desktop can not be
keyboard or 10 keypad) input directly.
Selection from the LDAP server Yes
Display the address No
information stored in the LDAP
server directly in the key list.

(2) Other Address Specifying Method

Function Description Support


Setting of the The default address can be set in the Yes
default address scanner mode. The user
can send only by setting an original
and touching the start key.
Apply E-mail The e-mail address of the Yes
address authenticated user is automatically
of the user for set as the default address.
login (Scan to Me) It’s available to set whether to choice
address of the user for login or
not when broadcasting to fax /
internet fax. It’s available to set
whether to choice the address of the
user for login or not when
broadcasting.
And it has the function to prohibit to
choice address except the user
who log in.
Scan to Self Scanned images are only sent to the Yes
login user’s e-mail address (When the
that is stored in the CAC card. A MX-EC50 is
CAC-related function. enabled.)
Scan to Site Scanned images are only sent to the Yes
e-mail address that the (When the
administrator has specified MX-EC50 is
beforehand. A CAC-related function. enabled.)
Accept “!” in the Support for SIICA. Yes
address of Scan It accepts that it forbids to input “!” in
to SMB folder the address of Scan to SMB
folder.
My address The authenticated user can select Yes
function any of his/her e-mail addresses at
the time of sending. (The address
can also be set as default.)
A specification for the SEF tender.
Home Directory The authenticated user can select Yes
Function any of the network folders as
default address.
Prohibit the It prohibits to input the next address Yes
broadcast for making to send only the
transmission of user who log in at Scan to Home
Home Directory Directory.
Home Directory A function to acquire directory No
Function (CAC) information from the AD or MFP, and
to set the user info that I read at the
time of CAC use from CAC in an
address automatically.
Scan to URL Scanned data are sent by attaching No
them to an e-mail when they are
small. When large, they are stored in
the server or the HDD of the
MFP whose URL is sent by e-mail.
Linkage with the Scan to Me function
is possible.
Disabling of The authenticated user can select No
sending any of his/her e-mail addresses at
to domains that the time of sending. (The address
are not specified can also be set as default.)
A specification for the SEF tender.

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 15
Function Description Support 4) Specification of Multiple Addresses
Resend Addresses can be selected from the Yes
latest 50 destinations in the Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax
sending history. Selections can be Direct SMTP
made from all destinations in the Broadcast Yes (E-mail/ Yes Yes
sending history including FTP/ Transmission FTP/Desktop/
Desktop/SMB. SMB)
Permit only Specification for SAE2. Support only No Number of 500 500 500
specific the domain address set in destinations
domain address advance. of broadcast
when users transmission
Sequential N/A N/A Yes
(3) Address Book Broadcast
1) Registration Transmission
request
Max. number of registrations Total: 2000 keys Deleting addresses No Yes Yes
*It’s abailable to register 2,000 items from groups which
about the address scan to FTP / Desktop have been already
/ SMB. registered.
Number of addresses can be Max. 500 addresses
5) Settings to Disable Address Specification /Registration
registered
in one Group key
Internet Fax/
Number of addresses can be 6000 addresses (included in the 2000 Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
registered keys)
Disable Yes Yes Yes
by inputting directly in Group
Registering
keys
Destination from
Registration using the LDAP Yes
Operation Panel
search results
Disable Yes Yes Yes
Address book registration in Yes
Registering
the sending history screen
Destination on
Registration of a sending line Yes Web Page
to fax individuals
Disable Yes N/A N/A
(when a line is installed.)
Registration
Speed dial (quick key) Yes (Call by inputting a registration Using Network
number from the 10-key pad) Scanner Tool
Disable [Resend] Yes Yes Yes
2) Registration Method
on Fax/Image
Send Mode
Registration in Registration in Registration
Disable Selection Yes Yes Yes
Address Type the operation the sending on the Web
from Address Book
panel history page
Disable Direct Yes Yes Yes
E-mail Yes Yes Yes Entry
address mode
Disable Broadcast No No Yes
FTP address No No Yes Setting
Desktop No No Yes or registration Disable PC-Fax/ N/A Yes N/A
address from PC-I-Fax
NST (Network Transmission
Scanner Tool)
Prohibition to send N/A N/A Yes
SMB addres No Yes Yes for PC-FAX
Fax address Yes Yes Yes
Internet Fax Yes Yes Yes (4) Program
address
Direct SMTP Yes Yes Yes Registered up to: 48; Preset: 1 (Group/
Number of registrations
address Individual can be registered.)
3) Address Book Functions (5) Information to Be Sent
Import/export of VCF format No Internet Fax/
Import of CSV format No Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
My address book Yes Subject Select from the list. N/A
Cloning Address book Yes (Directly from one MFP to another) Direct entry (80 one-byte/two-byte
Retrieve local address book Yes characters; Number of lists: 30)
Fixed mode display Yes
Linkage with the PC-FAX Yes File name Select from the list*1 N/A
address book Match the subject
Import/export of the address Yes Direct entry (80 one-byte/two-byte
book (by the storage backup function) characters; Number of lists: 30)
Readout/read-in of data Yes
registered in other models (by the address book conversion utility) Outbound Yes N/A
Changeable user tab support No message
(message body)
Default color mode No
registration to individual Outbound Select from the list.Direct entry N/A
message selection
Number of letters 1800 one-byte characters (900 N/A
in an outbound two-byte characters)
message

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 16
Internet Fax/ Mode Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP Direct SMTP
Pre-Setting Mail Yes N/A Original Count Yes Yes Yes
Signature *2 (Available to both DF/
OC scanning)
*1 : Support when saving to external memory device. Edge Erase (Edge/ Yes Yes Yes
*2 : A text message can be set to be automatically added in Edge +Center/Center/
the body of outbound messages. It can not be edited at the Side)
Pages division Yes Yes Yes
time of sending.
Book division Yes Yes Yes
1) Registration/Selection of Sender/Reply-to
Card Shot Yes(Ratio:63 Yes(Ratio:63 Yes(Ratio:6
Internet Fax/ -400%) -400%) 3-400%)
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP Time Specified send Yes Yes Yes
Reply-to Select from the N/A N/A Own Number Sending N/A Yes Yes
list. (One Own Name (Sender’s name is
direct entry is fixed as included in outbound
Select from the default) message)
LDAP server Transaction Report N/A Yes Yes
Number of 1,000 addresses N/A N/A (The print method of
destinations (used for user the transaction report
registered in authentication can be selected at the
Reply-to as well) time of sending)
Sender N/A 1 sender 1 sender Memory Box N/A N/A Yes
registration (up to 20 two- (up to 20 two- Supress Background Yes N/A N/A
byte / 40 byte / 40
Blank Page Skip Yes N/A N/A
one-byte one-byte
(Available to both DF/
characters) Only characters)
OC scanning)
one set of sender Only one set of
information can sender
Drop Out Color Yes(Text N/A N/A
be registered, information can mode/only
and I-Fax be registered, B&W 2 gra-
addresses are and Fax numbers dation
registered in are registered Sharpness Yes(5 levels) N/A N/A
the name part. in the name field. Contrast Yes(5 levels) N/A N/A
It’s not available
to register
Stamp No No No
sender’s name Watermark No No No
for internet fax Filing Yes Yes Yes
/ direct SMTP. Quick File Yes Yes Yes
(6) Send Function Multi Shot No Yes Yes
Verification Stamp Yes Yes Yes
1) Original
ON/OFF setting Yes Yes Yes
of Verification
Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax stamp from
Direct SMTP
basic screen
Original size input Yes
Default Yes Yes Yes
Original size Yes*1
verification
registration
stamp is set in
Non standard Yes Every modes
size input Preview Yes Yes Yes
Non standard NO Polling reception N/A N/A Yes
size registration Job divide by N/A N/A N/A
Sending Long YES recognizing
Size registration Max. 1000 mm (1-sided copy/only B&W 2 gradation) blank pages
Dual Page Scan send Yes Yes Yes
*1: Postcard and photo (L size) can be handled on the document
Combined pages send No No No
glass.
Divide send by size Yes(support No No
2) Fax Send limit only E-mail)
Memory transmission Yes (Max. 100 in total in the image
send mode.)
Speaker Yes
Quick online transmission Yes 4) Other Send Functions
Direct transmission Yes
Mode Internet Fax/
(Switching: Memory transmission Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
<-> Direct transmission)
Manual transmission setting No
Auto Reduction N/A N/A Yes
Sending Setting
3) Special Functions Rotation Sending N/A Yes Yes
Zoom sending Enlargement/reduction is allowed only
Mode Internet Fax/ from standard sizes.
Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP Own Name Select No No Yes
Job Build Yes Yes Yes Select
Slow Scan Mode Yes Yes Yes from the
Mixed Size Original Yes Yes Yes total of 18.

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 17
Mode Internet Fax/
Scanner Fax Mode Internet Fax/
Direct SMTP Fax
Direct SMTP
Own Number Sending N/A Yes Yes Auto Receive Reduce Setting Yes Yes
Printing Page Number N/A Yes Yes Fixed size reception Yes (by the No
at Receiver (can be
switched in the System Soft-SW)
Settings) Specified size scaled reception No No
Date Print (can be N/A Yes (Nota- Yes (Nota- Rotated reception Yes Yes
switched in the System tion can be tion can Setting of received data print No Yes
Settings) switched) be condition
switched) (Setting of Print Actual Size or
Reduction Print)
Recall mode N/A DSMTP: Yes
2-sided copy reception Yes Yes
Times and
interval of Multi Shot (2in1) reception No No
recall setting Auto Reduction Sending Setting Yes Yes
when A3 size is received
can be set in
(for only the places of destination
the System
of the fax with the inch system)
Setting.
Auto Reduction Sending Setting Yes Yes
Error N/A Yes Yes when letter size is received
Busy N/A Yes Yes (for only the places of destination
Change of the number Yes N/A N/A of the fax with the AB system)
of pages for each file Received data bypass output Yes Yes
Restriction on Yes Yes (Direct No Index printing N/A N/A
transmission size SMTP : No) Body Text Print Select Setting Yes Yes
Reception Report N/A Yes N/A Output tray setting Yes Yes
Time out Output tray setting as for every line N/A N/A
1 min.-240 Insert job separators No No
hrs. Set in
Number of copies of received data No No
increments of
Staple setting of received data No No
1 min. (Direct
SMTP: No) Color print when empty black toner N/A N/A
Transmission result No N/A N/A Foot Print Yes Yes
notification*1 All pages collective delection of Yes Yes
Deleting the sending Yes Yes Yes reception data on the preview screen
history*2 Delete specified pages of received No No
Covers N/A No N/A data
Outbound message N/A No N/A undo No No
Keeping address for a Yes Yes Yes Bulk deletion plural pages No No
certain time after
sending*3 3) Inbound Routing of Received Data
Retry mode from the No No No
Mode Internet Fax/Fax/ Direct SMTP
transmission error job
list display Format PDF, Single TIFF, Multi TIFF, XPS
Destination E-mail, FTP, SMB, Desktop, Fax,
Auto adjustment of Yes Yes Yes
image set direction Internet-Fax
when Legal original Save to HDD of the MFP Yes (Creatable folders : Max
automatically 500, Creatable files : Max 500
Take priority to show Yes Yes Yes
the address book per one folder)
Setting the shut out Yes Yes Yes Auto image reduction of received Yes
time of image sending data at auto saving
job Auto create settings of PDF for PC Yes
Browsing to the HDD of the MFP
*1: The file size can be displayed in the Complete Queue in the job
File name setting when inbound Yes
status screen. routing (Attached TSI information)
*2: The sending history to be deleted is for resending in the normal The sender name is added to the Yes
mode. The addresses in the sending history can be deleted both inbound file name
individually or all. Information about the MFP that Yes
*3: It’s available to set ON / OFF to show the system setting by soft transfers the data is added to the
transferred data
SW (default: OFF).
Timetable Yes
(7) Receive Functions Inbound routing by line type Yes
1) Receive method Alternative mode for destination Yes
error
Mode Internet Fax/ Easy switching destinations of Yes (The forward table can be
Fax
Direct SMTP inbound routing enabled/disabled in the home
Automatic reception Yes Yes screen.)
Manual reception Yes (Direct SMTP: No) Yes Automatic image reduction at the Yes
Switching from manual N/A Yes line of the reception data
reception to (SEF only) transmission
auto reception
4) Other Receive Functions
2) Print Functions for Received Data

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 18
Mode Internet Fax/
Mode Internet Fax/ Scanner Fax
Fax Direct SMTP
Direct SMTP
Allowing specified Yes(50 addresses) N/A
Communication line N/A N/A Public
address/domain switched tele-
reception phone net-
Rejecting specified Yes(50 addresses) N/A work (PSTN),
address/domain private branch
reception exchange
Allowing reception N/A Only specified numbers (PBX), F-net
from specific numbers (50 numbers / 20 digits) SEGA: R-key
Rejecting reception N/A Only specified numbers for PBX set-
from specific numbers (50 numbers / 20 digits) ting
Rejecting reception N/A Yes (by the Soft-SW) Max. number of lines N/A N/A 1 line
from fax numbers
without a TSI value
ECM N/A N/A Yes
External phone N/A Yes Support the digital N/A N/A Yes
connection remote line network
(Sending level)
Received data bypass Yes Yes
output
Time Specified output Yes Yes
Reception Check Yes (Direct SMTP: N/A
Interval Setting No)(0-8 hours in
increments of 1
min.)
POP3 Communication Yes (Direct SMTP : N/A
Time out Setting No)(30-300 sec-
onds in incre-
ments of 30sec.)
Data Forwarding in Yes Yes
case of trouble
of output
Auto wake up print Yes Yes
Alternative reception 400 messages 400 messages
(including fax and (including fax and
Internet fax) Internet fax)
NJR transmission after No No
reception
(Notifying PC of
reception)

5) Received Data Preview

Mode Internet Fax/


Fax
Direct SMTP
Print Hold Setting for Yes Yes
received data
Image check (Preview) Yes Yes
Forwarding from Yes Yes
preview
Filing to HDD from Yes Yes
preview
Register to junk FAX No Yes
from preview
Printing/forwarding of Yes Yes
specified pages.
Output reception from Yes Yes
specified fax numbers. (as in C-Jupiter2) (as in C-Jupiter2)

6) Transmission Method

Mode Internet Fax/


Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Transmission time N/A N/A Less than 2
sec. (Super
G3/JBIG)
Modem Speed N/A N/A 33.6 kbps ->
2.4 kbps
Auto-fallback
Intercommunication N/A N/A Super G3 / G3

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 19
7) Record Size (10) Sound settings
Mode Internet Fax/ Internet Fax/
Scanner Fax Mode Item Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP Direct SMTP
Maximum recording N/A 293mm Speaker Speaker N/A N/A Yes *1 *2
width Volume Setting
Record size N/A A3-A5, 11x17-5.5x8.5 Calling Speaker N/A N/A Yes *1 *6
Volume Setting
(8) F-code Ring tone Speaker N/A N/A N/A
1) F-code Transmission Volume Setting
Line monitor Speaker N/A N/A Yes *1 *6
Mode Internet Fax/ Volume Setting
Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP Reception Speaker N/A Yes *1 No
Sub-address N/A N/A Yes (20 digits) Volume Setting
Pass code N/A N/A Yes (20 digits) Receive Speaker N/A N/A Yes *1 *6
Complete Signal Volume Setting
2) F-code Memory Box (Fax Functions) Sound pattern N/A N/A Yes *1 *3
Time setting for N/A N/A Yes *1 *4
Fax Polling Security Yes communication
Pass code Number Setting Yes (10 numbers/20 digits) ending sound
Polling Memory Send Yes Send Complete Sound volume N/A N/A Yes *1 *6
100 memory boxes can be registered for Signal setting
Polling Memory, Confidential and Relay Sound pattern N/A N/A Yes *1 *3
Broadcast in all (Public Box: 1). Time setting for N/A N/A Yes *1 *4
Setting the number of times the public communication
box may be polled: ending sound
once/unlimited number of times Send/receive Sound volume N/A N/A Yes *1 *6
Confidential transmission Yes (F-code Method) error signal setting
Relay Broadcast transmission Yes (F-code Method) Sound pattern N/A N/A Yes *1 *3
request Time setting for N/A N/A Yes *1 *5
Relay Broadcast Send Yes communication
(Fax to e-mail/ Internet Fax/ ending sound
Fax (F-code))* Communication Sound volume N/A Yes *1 No
Number of characters can be 18 one-byte/two-byte characters Error Signal setting
registered in the Setting of Sound volume Yes *1 Yes * 1 Yes *1
memory box Original Scan setting
Complete Signal
(9) Telephone Function (Image send)

Mode
Scanner
Internet Fax/ FAX *1: Set up in the System Settings.
Direct SMTP
*2: 9 levels including mute.
Receiver N/A N/A No
*3: PATTERN 1/2/3/4.
Speaker N/A N/A Yes
Setting of different sounds for each of the receive signal, send
Hold N/A N/A No
complete signal and send/receive error signal shall be available.
Pause Time N/A N/A Yes (1-15 sec.)
Setting *4: 5 levels from 2.0 to 4.0 sec.
Telephone call N/A N/A No (External *5: 2 levels of 0.3 and 0.7 sec.
during power telephone calls are
*6: 10 levels including mute.
outage possible.)
Switching N/A N/A 10/20/TONE/ Auto (11) Others
between tone Select Availability of
and pulse setting or the default Mode Internet Fax/
value varies Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
depending on the PC- Internet Fax N/A Yes N/A
destination of the
PC- Fax N/A N/A Yes
product.
FAST N/A N/A Yes
(SIICA only)
Network FAST N/A N/A No
Distinctive ring N/A N/A Settings vary
detection depending
on the area.
Trial mode Scanner: No No N/A
Meta data:
Yes
Linearized PDF Yes Sup- N/A N/A
ported by the
network
scanner tool.
Support the Yes (Supported by soft SW)
format of date for 1.File name of send job for scanner / internet
file name fax 2.File name of received data transfer
(Support to save the received data to HDD of
MFP) 3.File name of received data
when automatically document filling

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 20
Mode Internet Fax/ 6. Report/list function
Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Sharpdesk Mobile Yes N/A N/A
A. User Authority
supports
Type Support
Profile Yes N/A N/A
registration Total Count Yes
from Device Count Yes
Sharpdesk All Custom Setting List Yes
Mobile Printer Test SPDL Symbol Set List Yes
Send scanned Yes N/A N/A Page SPDL Internal Font List Yes
data to PS Font List Yes
Sharpdesk Kanji Font List Yes
Mobile NIC Page Yes
Sending Individual List Yes (Partial printing in the
Address List address book screen is
available.)
Group List Yes
Memory Box List Yes
All Sending Address List Yes (Batch print of
Individual/ Group/
Memory Box)
Document Filing User / Folder List Yes

B. Administrator Authority
Type Support
Administrator Copy Yes
Settings List Print Yes
Fax/Image send Yes
Document filing Yes
Security Yes
Common Yes
All Administrator Settings Yes (Batch print of the
List Administrator Settings
List)
Image Image Sending Activity Yes
Sending Report (Scan)
Activity Report Image Sending Activity Yes
Report (Internet Fax)
Image Sending Activity Yes
Report (Fax)
Anti Junk Anti Junk Fax Number List Yes
Allow/Reject Mail and Yes
Domain Name List
Data Receive/ Inbound Routing List Yes
Forward List Document Admin List Yes
Web Settings List Yes
Metadata Set List Yes
User All User Information Print Yes
Information User List Yes
Print List of Number of Pages Yes
Used
Page Limit Group List Yes
Authority Group List Yes
Favorite Operation Group Yes
List

C. Other List Print Functions


Type Support
List 2-sided print Yes
Changing settings Log No

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 21
7. Power consumption
A. Power consumption
The full configuration can be operated with the rated power source.

100 V Type (North America, etc.) 200 V Type (Europe, etc.)


Maximum rated power Consumption*1 1.92kW 1.84kW
TEC value*3 65cpm machine 4.9kWh 4.8kWh
75cpm machine 5.5kWh 5.6kWh
Fax waiting power consumption is 1W or less/*Condition Yes No
of Standing by Network: Connect with TCP/IP protocol (Exclude the case of use Fax and Network at
only once)
Time to move into Preheat mode*2 15 minutes (default)
Recovery time from pre-heat mode 65cpm machine 15sec(30 sec*4):
75cpm machine 15sec(30 sec*4):
Time to move into sleep mode 58 minutes (default)
* Printer mode: 1seconds. (default)
Recovery time from sleep mode 65cpm machine 20sec(48.15 sec*4) 20sec(48.15 sec*4)
75cpm machine 20sec(53.25 sec*4) 20sec(53.25 sec*4)

*1: Power switch ON, Dehumidity switch: OFF


*2: Blue Angel (RAL-UZ171)
*3: Compliant to new standard
*4: Compliant to BA(RAL-UZ171)

8. Dimensions and Weight


Outer dimension W663 x D772 x H1218mm
(Included operation panel) (adjuster and protruding objects
included)
Dimension occupied by the W1003 x D818mm
machine (with manual tray extended, and
LCD is tilted upright. Adjuster and
protruding objects are included)
Weight Approx. 166kg
(including photo conductor.not
including consumables)

9. Ambient conditions
1) Working environment

Humidity (RH)

85%

60%

20%

10°C 30°C 35°C


Temperature

Standard Temperature 20 -25°C


environmental Humidity 65 ±5%RH
conditions
Usage Temperature 10 -35°C
environmental Humidity 20-85%RH
conditions Atmospheric 590-1013hPa (height:0-2000m)
pressure
Storage period Toner/Developer:
24 months from the manufactured month
(Production lot) under unsealed state
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured month
under unsealed state

SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 22
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS Service Manual

1. Supply system table


A. North America, Middle America, South America
Quantity in
Item Content Life Model name Remarks
collective package
Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x1 83K MX-754NT 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 6%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 800K MX-754NV 10
Drum OPC drum x1 800K MX-754DR 10

B. Europe, Eastern Europe, Russia, Australia, New Zealand


Quantity in
Item Content Life Model name Remarks
collective package
Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x1 83K MX-754GT 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 6%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 800K MX-754GV 10
Drum OPC drum x1 800K MX-754DR 10

C. Asia, Hong Kong


Quantity in
Item Content Life Model name Remarks
collective package
Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x1 83K MX-754AT 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 6%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 800K MX-754AV 10
Drum OPC drum x1 800K MX-754DR 10

D. Middle East, Taiwan, Africa, Israel, Philippines, Korea


Quantity in
Item Content Life Model name Remarks
collective package
Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x1 83K MX-754FT 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 6%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 800K MX-754FV 10
Drum OPC drum x1 800K MX-754DR 10

CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1
2. Maintenance parts list
A. U.S.A/Canada/South and Central America
Quantity in
Model
Item Content Life collective Remarks
name
package
Main charger kit MX-754MK Main charger unit x1 400K 10
Cleaning blade x1
Side seal F x1
Side seal R x1
Drum separate pawl x4
Toner reception seal x1
Drum gear x1
Transfer belt kit MX-754TT Transfer belt x1 400K 10
Transfer roller x1
Transfer drive gear x1
Transfer cleaning roller x1
Transfer roller bearing x2
Heat Roller kit MX-754HK Upper heat roller x1 400K 10
Upper heat roller bearing x2
Upper heat roller insulation bush x2
Upper heat roller gear x1
Upper heat roller separate pawl x6
Separate pawl spring (Upper) x6
Lower heat roller x1
Lower heat roller bearing x2
Lower heat roller separate pawl x2
Separate pawl spring (Lower) x2
Web cleaning kit MX-754WB Upper web roller x1 400K 10
Upper web back up roller x1
Upper web back up roller bearing x2
Upper web pressure spring x2
Lower web roller x1
Lower web back up roller x1
Lower web back up roller bearing x2
Lower web pressure spring x2
Toner collection container MX-700HB Toner collection container unit x1 400K 5
Filter kit MX-754FL Ozone filter x1 400K 10
DV ozone filter x1
Toner filter x1
DV filter AS x1
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20
x3
Staple cartridge AR-SC3 Staple cartridge x3 2000 times 40
x3
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20
x3
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge x2 - 20
Fusing unit MX-754FU1 Fusing unit (For servicing rotation) x1 - 1
(Heater lamp 120V)

CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 2
1 : ‘14/Dec
B. Europe/East Europe
Quantity in
Model
Item Content Life collective Remarks
name
package
Main charger kit MX-754MK Main charger unit x1 400K 10
Cleaning blade x1
Side seal F x1
Side seal R x1
Drum separate pawl x4
Toner reception seal x1
Drum gear x1
Transfer belt kit MX-754TT Transfer belt x1 400K 10
Transfer roller x1
Transfer drive gear x1
Transfer cleaning roller x1
Transfer roller bearing x2
Heat Roller kit MX-754HK Upper heat roller x1 400K 10
Upper heat roller bearing x2
Upper heat roller insulation bush x2
Upper heat roller gear x1
Upper heat roller separate pawl x6
Separate pawl spring (Upper) x6
Lower heat roller x1
Lower heat roller bearing x2
Lower heat roller separate pawl x2
Separate pawl spring (Lower) x2
Web cleaning kit MX-754WB Upper web roller x1 400K 10
Upper web back up roller x1
Upper web back up roller bearing x2
Upper web pressure spring x2
Lower web roller x1
Lower web back up roller x1
Lower web back up roller bearing x2
Lower web pressure spring x2
Toner collection container MX-700HB Toner collection container unit x1 400K 5
Filter kit MX-754FL Ozone filter x1 400K 10
DV ozone filter x1
Toner filter x1
DV filter AS x1
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20
x3
Staple cartridge AR-SC3 Staple cartridge x3 2000 times 40
x3
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20
x3
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge x2 - 20
Fusing unit MX-754FUN Fusing unit (For servicing rotation) x1 - 1
1 (Heater lamp 230V)

CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 3
1 : ‘14/Dec
C. Australia / New Zealand
Quantity in
Model
Item Content Life collective Remarks
name
package
Main charger kit MX-754MK Main charger unit x1 400K 10
Cleaning blade x1
Side seal F x1
Side seal R x1
Drum separate pawl x4
Toner reception seal x1
Drum gear x1
Transfer belt kit MX-754TT Transfer belt x1 400K 10
Transfer roller x1
Transfer drive gear x1
Transfer cleaning roller x1
Transfer roller bearing x2
Heat Roller kit MX-754HK Upper heat roller x1 400K 10
Upper heat roller bearing x2
Upper heat roller insulation bush x2
Upper heat roller gear x1
Upper heat roller separate pawl x6
Separate pawl spring (Upper) x6
Lower heat roller x1
Lower heat roller bearing x2
Lower heat roller separate pawl x2
Separate pawl spring (Lower) x2
Web cleaning kit MX-754WB Upper web roller x1 400K 10
Upper web back up roller x1
Upper web back up roller bearing x2
Upper web pressure spring x2
Lower web roller x1
Lower web back up roller x1
Lower web back up roller bearing x2
Lower web pressure spring x2
Toner collection container MX-700HB Toner collection container unit x1 400K 5
Filter kit MX-754FL Ozone filter x1 400K 10
DV ozone filter x1
Toner filter x1
DV filter AS x1
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20
x3
Staple cartridge AR-SC3 Staple cartridge x3 2000 times 40
x3
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20
x3
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge x2 - 20
Fusing unit MX-754FUN Fusing unit (For servicing rotation) x1 - 1
1 (Heater lamp 230V)

CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 4
1 : ‘14/Dec
D. Asia/Middle East/Africa
Quantity in
Model
Item Content Life collective Remarks
name
package
Main charger kit MX-754MK Main charger unit x1 400K 10
Cleaning blade x1
Side seal F x1
Side seal R x1
Drum separate pawl x4
Toner reception seal x1
Drum gear x1
Transfer belt kit MX-754TT Transfer belt x1 400K 10
Transfer roller x1
Transfer drive gear x1
Transfer cleaning roller x1
Transfer roller bearing x2
Heat Roller kit MX-754HK Upper heat roller x1 400K 10
Upper heat roller bearing x2
Upper heat roller insulation bush x2
Upper heat roller gear x1
Upper heat roller separate pawl x6
Separate pawl spring (Upper) x6
Lower heat roller x1
Lower heat roller bearing x2
Lower heat roller separate pawl x2
Separate pawl spring (Lower) x2
Web cleaning kit MX-754WB Upper web roller x1 400K 10
Upper web back up roller x1
Upper web back up roller bearing x2
Upper web pressure spring x2
Lower web roller x1
Lower web back up roller x1
Lower web back up roller bearing x2
Lower web pressure spring x2
Toner collection container MX-700HB Toner collection container unit x1 400K 5
Filter kit MX-754FL Ozone filter x1 400K 10
DV ozone filter x1
Toner filter x1
DV filter AS x1
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20
x3
Staple cartridge AR-SC3 Staple cartridge x3 2000 times 40
x3
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20
x3
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge x2 - 20
Fusing unit MX-754FUN Fusing unit (For servicing rotation) x1 - 1
1 (Heater lamp 230V)

CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 5
1 : ‘14/Dec
E. Hong Kong
Quantity in
Model
Item Content Life collective Remarks
name
package
Main charger kit MX-754MK Main charger unit x1 400K 10
Cleaning blade x1
Side seal F x1
Side seal R x1
Drum separate pawl x4
Toner reception seal x1
Drum gear x1
Transfer belt kit MX-754TT Transfer belt x1 400K 10
Transfer roller x1
Transfer drive gear x1
Transfer cleaning roller x1
Transfer roller bearing x2
Heat Roller kit MX-754HK Upper heat roller x1 400K 10
Upper heat roller bearing x2
Upper heat roller insulation bush x2
Upper heat roller gear x1
Upper heat roller separate pawl x6
Separate pawl spring (Upper) x6
Lower heat roller x1
Lower heat roller bearing x2
Lower heat roller separate pawl x2
Separate pawl spring (Lower) x2
Web cleaning kit MX-754WB Upper web roller x1 400K 10
Upper web back up roller x1
Upper web back up roller bearing x2
Upper web pressure spring x2
Lower web roller x1
Lower web back up roller x1
Lower web back up roller bearing x2
Lower web pressure spring x2
Toner collection container MX-700HB Toner collection container unit x1 400K 5
Filter kit MX-754FL Ozone filter x1 400K 10
DV ozone filter x1
Toner filter x1
DV filter AS x1
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20
x3
Staple cartridge AR-SC3 Staple cartridge x3 2000 times 40
x3
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20
x3
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge x2 - 20
Fusing unit MX-754FUF Fusing unit (For servicing rotation) x1 - 1
1 (Heater lamp 230V)

CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 6
3. Definition of developer/drum life end
When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified count.
When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified count.
When either of the above reach the specified count, it is judged as life end.

when correction or warm-up operation is performed as well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates.
Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm reaches the
specified amount, it is judged as life end.
To check the developer/drum life, use SIM22-13.

Developer/drum counter Developer/drum rpm


B/W B/W
Drum 65cpm/75cpm 800K 2,000K rotations
Developer 800K 2,000K rotations

4. Production number identification 1: Alphabet


Indicates the production factory.
A. OPC drum 2: Number
Indicates the production year.
3/4: Number
Indicates the production month.
5/6: Number
Indicates the production day.
7: Hyphen
8: Number
Indicates the production lot.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The lot number is comprised of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the
content as follows.
The number is printed on the inside of the drum.

1: Number
For this model, this digit is 2.
2: Alphabet
Indicates the model conformity code.
3: Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
4: Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
5/6: Number
Indicates the day of the production date.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
7/8/ Number, Alphabet
9/10: Indicates the factories number of production factory.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.

B. Developer

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

The lot number is 8 digits in length. Each digit indicates the content
as follows.
The number is printed on the developer bag. (For BK, at the right
lower side of the front. For Cl, at the right lower side of the back.)

CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 7
C. Toner cartridge
The label indicating the management number is attached to the
bottom of the toner cartridge.

: Unit code/Model name


: Destination
: Skating
: Production place
: Serial number
: Production date (YYYYMMDD)
: Version

5. Environmental conditions
Humidity (RH)

85%

60%

20%

10°C 30°C 35°C


Temperature

Standard environmental Temperature 20 ? 25 °C


conditions Humidity 65 +/- 5% RH
Usage environmental Temperature 10 - 35 °C
conditions Humidity 20 - 85% RH
Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
manufactured month (Production lot) under
unsealed state
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured month
under unsealed state

CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 8
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
Service Manual

1. External view
A. External view

3
1
9
2

4
5

16
6

8*
15 *

7*

14*
17 *
11
10
12 13

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals.
Both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned.
2 Front cover Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" or to replace a toner cartridge.
3 Output tray (center tray) Output is delivered to this tray.
4 Operation panel This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
5 Exit tray unit (right exit tray)* When installed, output can be delivered to this tray.
6 Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually.
When loading a large sheet of paper, be sure to pull out the bypass tray extension.
7 Finisher (50-sheet stapling) * This can be used to staple output. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
8 Saddle stitch finisher This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch function for folding and stapling output and the
(50-sheet stapling) * fold function for folding output in half are also available.
A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
9 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
10 Tray 1(Left side) Paper holding tray.(1,250 sheets)
11 Tray 2 (Right side) Paper holding tray.(850 sheets)
12 Tray 3 Paper holding cassette.
13 Tray 4 Paper holding cassette.
14 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray (MX-LC15) is The capacity is max. 4,000 sheets of B5, A4, or 8.5" x 11".
installed) *
15 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray (MX-LC16) is This holds paper. 8-1/2" x 11" to 12" x 18" (B5 to A3W) paper can be loaded. Up to 3500 sheets of
installed) * paper can be loaded.
16 Keyboard* (North America is standard.) This is a keyboard that is incorporated into the machine. When not used, it can be stored under the
operation panel.
17 Punch module * This is used to punch holes in output. Requires the finisher (large stacker) or the saddle stitch
finisher (large stacker).

*: Peripheral device.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 1


18*

22*

19* 21*

20*

No. Name Function/Operation


18 Finisher (100-sheet stapling) * This can be used to staple output. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
19 Saddle stitch finisher This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch function for folding and stapling output and the fold function for
(100-sheet stapling) * folding output in half are also available.
A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
20 Folding unit * When outputting different paper sizes such as A3 and A4, the larger size paper can be Z-folded to align with the
smaller size paper.
21 Inserter * The cover paper and the inserted paper inserted to the printed paper can be set. By the off-line finish function, paper
can be directly sent to the finisher or the saddle finisher, executing stapling, punching, and folding.
22 Curl correction unit * Corrects curl of printed paper properly.

*: Peripheral device.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 2


B. Internal operation parts

1
5

No. Name function/Operation


1 Document feeder cover Open this cover to remove an original miss feed.
2 Original guides Set this guide to the original width to scan the original properly.
3 Document feeder tray Place originals in this tray. Originals must be placed face up.
4 Original exit tray Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
5 Original size detector Detects the size of documents set on the document table (glass surface).
6 Scanning area Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
7 Document glass Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 3


2
1
4

8
7

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Toner cartridge The toner cartridge contains toner for the developed image in the copy/print processes. when toner
completely runs out of the cartridge, the cartridge must be replaced.
2 Fusing unit Heat and pressure are applied to fuse the transferred image into the paper.
3 Transfer belt The transfer belt copies a toner image on a transfer belt.
4 Right side cover Open this cover to remove a paper mis-feed.
5 Paper reversing section cover This is used when 2-sided copying/printing is performed. Open this cover to remove a paper mis-feed.
6 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper mis-feed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover.
7 Main power switch Used to power on the machine. When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in the
" on " position.
8 Waste toner bottle A container that collects waste toner which has not been transferred to paper during the copy/print
process.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 4


2. Internal structure

2
1
4

8
7

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Toner cartridges These contain toner for printing. When the toner runs out in a cartridge, the cartridge of the color that
ran out must be replaced.
2 Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.
3 Transfer belt During black and white printing, only the black toner image is transferred onto the transfer belt.
4 Right side cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
5 Paper reversing section cover This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
6 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover.
7 Main power switch This is used to power on the machine. When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in
the "on" position.
8 Waste toner box This collects excess toner that remains after printing.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 5


3. Connectors

No. Name function/Operation


1 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0. This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine. This connector cannot be
used under the factory setting. The connector on the front section can be used under the factory setting. When the
keyboard is installed to the machine, an exclusive connection is enabled. (Simultaneous connection is disabled.)
2 USB connector (B type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer. For the
USB cable, use a shielded cable.
3 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. For the LAN cable, use a shielded type
cable.
4 Service-only connector This connector is for use only by service technicians. Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the machine to
malfunction. Important note for service technicians: The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 118"
(3 m) in length.
5 Power plug

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 6


4. Operation panel

3 4 5

2
1

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display. Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you
perform an operation.
2 [HOME] key / indicator Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to enable
quick and easy operation of the machine.
3 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
4 [POWER] key Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
5 [POWER SAVE] key / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy. The [POWER SAVE] key blinks when
the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
6 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 7


5. Sensors and detectors
SCOV SPRDMD
SPPD2 SPED1 SPLS2
SPLS1
SPPD1 STUD
STLD
SPWS
SPED2
SPPD3 SPPD5 SPOD
SPPD4
SOCD
MHPS OCSW
POD2
TFD2 TFD3
POD3
POD1
WEBEND1 PRTPD
TH_US2 APPD1
TH_UM
TH_US1
DSW_ADU
HUD-DV
WEBEND2
TH-DV
PCS
CCHPD TH_LM
FPFD
CCMD
TFSD
BESTD APPD2 MPWD MPLD1
TCS
MTOP2
PPD2 MPED MTOP1
MPFD HUD_M TH_M
DSW_F
T1PPD1 LPPD
WTSD T2PPD1
T1LUD
T1PED
T1SPD T2LUD DSW_RL1
T2PED
T2SPD

TNDSET
C3PFD
C3LUD C3PED
C3SS1
C3SS2
C3SS3 C3SS4 C3SPD
C4PFD
C4LUD C4PED
C4SS1 C4SS2
C4SS3 C4SS4
WTFD C4SPD
C4PWD

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation


APPD1 ADU paper transport detector 1 Light transmission type Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass.
APPD2 ADU paper transport detector 2 Light transmission type Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass.
BESTD Belt estrangement sensor Light transmission type Detects the estrangement of the belt.
C3LUD Cassette 3 upper limit detection Light transmission type Detects lift up of the cassette 3.
C3PED Cassette 3 paper presence detection Light transmission type Detects the cassette 3 paper presence.
C3PFD Cassette 3 paper entry detection Light reflection type Detects the cassette 3 paper pass.
C3SPD Cassette 3 remaining quantity detection Light transmission type Detects the cassette 3 remaining quantity.
C3SS1 Cassette 3 size detection 1 Tact switch Detects the cassette 3 paper size.Detects insertion of the cassette 3 by
C3SS2 Cassette 3 size detection 2 Tact switch detecting one of cassette 3 size detection 1 to 4.
C3SS3 Cassette 3 size detection 3 Tact switch
C3SS4 Cassette 3 size detection 4 Tact switch
C4LUD Cassette 4 upper limit detection Light transmission type Detects lift up of the cassette 4.
C4PED Cassette 4 paper presence detection Light transmission type Detects the cassette 4 paper presence.
C4PFD Cassette 4 paper entry detection Light reflection type Detects the cassette 4 paper pass.
C4PWD Cassette 4 paper width sensor Volume resistor Detects the paper width.
C4SPD Cassette 4 remaining quantity detection Light transmission type Detects the cassette 4 remaining quantity.
C4SS1 Cassette 4 size detection 1 Tact switch Detects the cassette 4 paper size.Detects insertion of the cassette 4 by
C4SS2 Cassette 4 size detection 2 Tact switch detecting one of cassette 4 size detection 1 to 4.
C4SS3 Cassette 4 size detection 3 Tact switch
C4SS4 Cassette 4 size detection 4 Tact switch
CCHPD MC cleaner HP sensor Light transmission type Detects the MC cleaner home position.
CCMD MC cleaner shift sensor Light transmission type Detects the shift distance of the MC cleaner.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Light transmission type Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/close.
DSW_F Front door open/close detection Light transmission type Detects open/close of the front door.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 8


Signal name Name Type Function/Operation
DSW_RL1 Right lower door open/close detector 1 Light transmission type Detects open/close of the right lower door.
FPFD Fusing front paper pass detector Light reflection type Detects paper pass in front of the fusing section.
HUD_M/TH_M Temperature/humidity sensor Sensor Detects the temperature and the humidity.(For the process control)
HUD_DV/
Temperature/humidity sensor Sensor Detects the temperature and the humidity.(For the process control)
TH_DV
LPPD LCC transport detector sensor Light reflection type Detects paper transport from the LCC.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Light transmission type Detects the scanner home position.
MPED Manual feed paper entry detection Light transmission type Detects the manual feed paper empty.
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Light transmission type Detects the manual feed paper empty.
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detector 1 Light transmission type Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
Manual paper feed tray paper width
MPWD Volume resistor Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
detector
Manual paper fees tray pull-out position Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position (storing
MTOP1 Light transmission type
detector 1 position).
Manual paper fees tray pull-out position Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position (pull-out
MTOP2 Light transmission type
detector 2 position).
OCSW Original cover switch? Light transmission type Detects the trigger for document size.
PCS Process control sensor Light reflection type Detects the ID density.
POD1 Fusing rear detection Light transmission type Detects the paper exit from fusing.
POD2 Paper exit detection Light transmission type Detects the paper from paper exit.
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Light transmission type Detects the paper exit to right tray.
PPD2 Registration pre-detection Light reflection type Detects the paper in front of registration roller.
PRTPD Right paper exit tray paper detector Light transmission type Detects paper empty in the paper exit tray (Right paper exit tray)
SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor Light transmission type Detects open/close of the door.
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor Light transmission type Detects open/close of the DSPF unit.
SPED1 DSPF document empty sensor Light reflection type Detects document empty in the document feed tray.
SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor Light reflection type Detects document empty in the document feed tray.
DSPF document length detection short
SPLS1 Light transmission type Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
sensor
DSPF document length detection long
SPLS2 Light transmission type Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
sensor
SPOD DSPF document exit sensor Light transmission type Detects document exit of the document.
SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1 Light transmission type Detects pass of the document.
SPPD2 DSPF document pass sensor 2 Light reflection type Detects pass of the document.
SPPD3 DSPF document pass sensor 3 Light transmission type Detects pass of the document.
SPPD4 DSPF document pass sensor 4 Light transmission type Detects pass of the document.
SPPD5 DSPF document pass sensor 5 Light transmission type Detects pass of the document.
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor Light transmission type Detects the document size in random document feed.
SPWS DSPF document width sensor Volume resistor Detects the document width on the document feed tray.
DSPF document feed tray lower limit
STLD Light transmission type Detects the lower limit of the document feed tray.
sensor
DSPF document feed tray upper limit
STUD Light transmission type Detects the upper limit of the document feed tray.
sensor
Paper upper limit detector (Paper feed
T1LUD Light transmission type Detects the upper limit lift position of paper in the tandem tray.
tray 1)
T1PED Paper empty detector (Paper feed tray 1) Light transmission type Detects paper.
T1PPD1 Paper pass sensor (Tandem tray 1) Light reflection type Detects paper pass in the paper transport section of the Tandem tray 1.
Paper remaining quantity detector
T1SPD Light transmission type Detects the paper remaining quantity.
(Tandem tray 1)
Paper upper limit detector (Paper feed
T2LUD Light transmission type Detects the upper limit lift position of paper in the paper feed tray.
tray 2)
T2PED Paper empty detector (Paper feed tray 2) Light transmission type Detects paper.
T2PPD1 Paper pass sensor (Tandem tray 2) Light reflection type Detects the tandem tray 2 paper pass.
Paper remaining quantity detector
T2SPD Light transmission type Detects the paper remaining quantity.
(Tandem tray 2)
TCS Toner density sensor Magnetic sensor Detects the toner density.
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Light transmission type Detects the face down paper exit tray full.
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection Light transmission type Detects the right tray paper exit full.
TFSD Toner remaining quantity sensor Magnetic sensor Detects the remaining quantity of toner in the toner hopper.
TH_LM Fusing lower temperature sensor Thermistor Detects the surface temperature of the fusing lower roller.
Fusing upper temperature sensor
TH_UM Thermistor Detects the center surface temperature of the fusing upper roller.
(Center)
TH_US1 Fusing upper temperature sensor (Edge) Thermistor Detects the edge surface temperature of the fusing upper roller.
Fusing upper temperature sensor (Edge)
TH_US2 Thermistor Detects the edge surface temperature of the fusing upper roller.
:for monitoring
TNDSET Open/close detector (Tandem tray 1,2) Light transmission type Detects open/close of the Tandem trays 1 and 2.
WEBEND1 Upper web end detection Light transmission type Detects the upper web end of the fusing unit.
WEBEND2 Lower web end detection Light transmission type Detects the lower web end of the fusing unit.
WTFD Waste toner bottle detector Light transmission type Detects installation of the waste toner bottle.
WTSD Waste toner shutter open/close detection Light transmission type Detects open/close of the waste toner shutter.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 9


6. Switches

SLCOV

DSW_R

MSW PWRSW
DSW_INC

DHSW

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation


DHSW Dehumidification heater switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the Dehumidification heater power supply.
DSW_INC Inner cover right switch Micro switch Detects the open/close of the inner cover right.
DSW_R Right door switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the right door, and turns ON/OFF the power line
of the fusing, motor and the LSU laser.
MSW Main switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the main AC power source.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Push switch Turns ON/OFF the DC power sourse.
SLCOV DSPF under door switch Seesaw switch Detects open/close of the DSPF under door.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 10


7. Clutches and solenoids

6755&
67036 63)& 655&
675&

3636

$'8*6
:(%6
03*6
738&
03)6 7386
775&
038&
375& 7386
&386 738&

&386 &38&

&38&
375&

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation


C3PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 3) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
C4PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 4) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
MPUC Paper feed clutch (Manual paper feed) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
PTRC1 Paper vertical transport clutch (Lower) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller in the lower section of the vertical
paper transport section.
PTRC2 Paper vertical transport clutch (Upper) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller in the upper section of the vertical
paper transport section.
SPFC Paper feed clutch (DSPF) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the document feed section roller.
SRRC No. 2 registration roller clutch (DSPF) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the No. 2 registration roller.
STRRC No. 1 registration roller clutch (DSPF) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the No. 1 registration roller.
STRC Transport roller clutch (DSPF) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller 2.
T1PUC Paper feed clutch (Tandem tray 1) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
T2PUC Paper feed clutch (Tandem tray 2) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
TTRC Transport clutch (Tandem tray 1, 2) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller of the Tandem tray.
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Selects the paper exit gate (ADU gate).
C3PUS Paper feed solenoid (Paper feed tray 3) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
C4PUS Paper feed solenoid (Paper feed tray 4) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
MPGS Paper feed gate solenoid (Manual paper Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the manual paper feed gate.
feed)
PSPS Detachment solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Exfoliates the paper of the drum part.
STMPS Stamp solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Drives the stamp.
T1PUS Paper feed solenoid (Tandem tray 1) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
T2PUS Paper feed solenoid (Tandem tray 2) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
WEBS WEB drive control solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Drives the WEB.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 11


8. Drive motors

SLUM
SPOM
MIM
SPUFM
POM
TNM FUM ADUM1
TNHM1 PGM
DM
TNHM2
PFM RRM CCM
WEBM
HPFM DVM
ADUM2
TURM

CPFM

T2LUM WTM

C3LUM
T1LUM
C4LUM

Signal name Name Type Function / Operation


ADUM1 ADU motor 1 Stepping motor Drives the right door section.
ADUM2 ADU motor 2 Stepping motor Drives the right door section.
CCM MC cleaner motor Brush motor Drives the MC cleaner.
CPFM Paper feed motor Brush less motor Drives the paper feed section.
C3LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 3) DC brush motor Lifts the paper feed tray.
C4LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 4) DC brush motor Lifts the paper feed tray.
DM Drum motor Brush less motor Drives the drum.
DVM Developing drive motor Brush less motor Drives the developing section.
FUM Fusing drive motor Brush less motor Drives the fusing unit.
HPFM Horizontal transport motor Stepping motor Transport paper from the paper feed section to the transport motor
drive system.Transport paper from the right door section to the
transport motor drive system.
MIM Scanner motor Stepping motor Scanner (reading) section
PFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drive transport between the registration roller and the paper feed
section, transport between the registration roller and the right door
section.
PGM Polygon motor DC brush-less motor Scans the laser beam.
POM Paper exit drive motor Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller.
RRM Resist motor Stepping motor Drives the registration roller and controls ON/OFF.
SLUM DSPF lift up motor Stepping motor Drives the lift of the paper tray.
SPOM DSPF exit motor Stepping motor Drives the exit roller of the DSPF.
SPUFM Paper feed/transport motor DC brush-less motor Drives the roller in the paper feed section and the transport roller.
TNHM1 Hopper stirring motor 1 Stepping motor Supplies the toner in toner Hopper to the DV unit.
TNHM2 Hopper stirring motor 2 Stepping motor Conveys the toner in toner Hopper to the toner supply roller.
TNM Toner motor Stepping motor Transport toner of the toner cartridge to the development unit.
TURM TC unit estrangement motor Brush motor Pressure welding, a detached room touch it with the transcription unit
on a drum.
T1LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 1) DC brush motor Lift the paper feed tray.
T2LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 2) DC brush motor Lift the paper feed tray.
WEBM Fusing web cleaning motor 1 Stepping motor Drives the upper web cleaning paper.
WTM Waste toner drive motor Brush less motor Stirs waste toner.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 12


9. Lamps

No. Signal name Name Type Function/Operation


1 DSPF COPY LAMP Scanner lamp (DSPF) LED Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
2 CL Scanner lamp LED Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
3 PTDL Discharge lamp LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum immediately before transfer
operation.
4 DL1 Discharge lamp 1 LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
5 HL_UM/US/UW Heater lamp Halogen lamp Heats the heat roller.
6 DL2 Discharge lamp 2 LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum immediately after transfer
operation.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 13


10. Gates

No. Name Function/Operation


1 ADU reverse gate Discharges paper to the right tray or selects the switch-back transport route to the ADU section.
2 Right exit gate Selects the paper path: to transport paper to the ADU section or to the right tray.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 14


11. Heater

WH_S1

WH_TND

WH_CS2

WH_CS1

Signal name Name Function/Operation


WH_CS1* Paper dehumidifying heater Dehumidifies the paper feed tray section to prevent paper from absorbing humidity which causes
(Paper feed tray 3) degraded image quality and paper jams.
WH_CS2* Paper dehumidifying heater Dehumidifies the paper feed tray section to prevent paper from absorbing humidity which causes
(Paper feed tray 4) degraded image quality and paper jams.
WH_S1* Scanner heat-retention heater Dehumidifies the scanner section to prevent it from dew condensation.
WH_TND* Paper dehumidifying heater Dehumidifies the paper feed tray section to prevent paper from absorbing humidity which causes
(Paper feed tray 1, 2) degraded image quality and paper jams.

*: Service parts

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 15


12. Fans

POFM1
SPFFAN
POFM6
POFM5
POFM4
PROFM
POFM3
OZFM FUFM1

HDDFM LSUFM

FUFM2

DVFM1 DVFM2
PSFM2

PSFM1

Signal name Name Function / Operation


PROFM Process air inlet fan motor Cools charger section of the process.
DVFM1 Development cooling fan motor Cools the development section.
DVFM2 Development cooling fan motor Cools the development section.
FUFM1 Fusing cooling fan motor 1(Exhaust) Cools the fusing section.
FUFM2 Fusing cooling fan motor 2(Intake) Cools the fusing section.
HDDFM HDD cooling fan motor Cools the HDD section.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor Cools the LSU section.
OZFM Ozone fan motor Exhausts ozone.
POFM1 Exit cooling fan motor 1 Cools the exit section.
POFM3 Exit cooling fan motor 3 Cools the exit section.
POFM4 Exit tray cooling fan motor Cools the exit tray section.
POFM6 Paper cooling fan motor (R) Cools paper exited paper.
POFM5 Paper cooling fan motor (F) Cools paper exited paper.
PSFM1 Power cooling fan motor 1 Cools the power unit.
PSFM2 Power cooling fan motor 2 Cools the power unit.
SPFFAN SPF cooling fan motor Cools the SPF section.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 16


13. Filter

3
4

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
2 DV filter AS Prevents toner from splashing from the DV unit.
3 DV ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the DV unit.
4 Toner filter Takes in the floating toner of the image process section.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 17


14. PWB/Memory device
1
2
3

4
19

20
5
21
6 22
23
7
24
8 25
9
10 26
11 27

12 28
13
14
15
16

17 29
18

30
31
32

LSU /(2%29$
33
39

34
40
38

 35


36

37

No. Name Function/Operation


1 ORS PD PWB Output the manuscript size detection signal.
2 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal. Controls the touch panel.
3 USB CONECTOR PWB USB Interface.
4 KEY PWB 2 Outputs the key operation signal.
5 KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
6 CCD PWB Scanner read CCD.
7 LED DRV PWB Drives the scanner lamp.
8 LED PWB Irradiates a manuscript with light for CCD to read a manuscript image.
9 DL PWB Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
10 DL PWB Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
11 PTDL PWB Diselectrifies an exposure body surface before the transcription.
12 Right Door Interface PWB Interfaces the signals of the sensors in the paper transport section.
13 FAX PWB Controls the FAX-related.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 18


No. Name Function/Operation
14 TEL/LIU PWB Controls the TEL/LIU-related.
15 MFPC PWB Controls the image-related items and controls all over the machine.
16 Raid PWB UN Mirroring kit (Option)
17 RRM Drive PWB Drives a conveyance motor.
18 HPFM Drive PWB Drives a conveyance motor.
19 CCD PWB Scanner read CCD.
20 LED PWB Drives the DSPF lamp.
21 DSPF_CNT PWB Controls the DSPF.
22 ORS LED PWB Drives the LED for manuscript size detection.
23 DSPF Driver PWB Drives the conveyance motor relations.
24 HV MC PWB Generates the high voltage for the main charger and the developing bias voltage.
25 HL PWB Controls the heater lamp.
26 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
27 Scan Mother PWB Controls the scanner section and relay the signal of each board.
28 DC Power supply PWB Outputs the secondary side voltage.
29 AC/WH PWB Controls the power supply on the primary side.
30 SIZE DT PWB Detects the paper size of the paper feed tray.
31 SIZE DT PWB Detects the paper size of the paper feed tray.
32 HV TC PWB Generates the primary transfer voltage.
33 SD Card memory Stores the MFP PWB program data, the FAX image data, and the font data.
34 Flash memory Stores the DSK program data.
35 ACRE PWB Performs data generation for high compression PDF.
36 CF Card Stores the SOC program data.
37 DIMM Memory for XPS Extensions.
38 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal.
39 LD PWB Drives the laser diode and controls the power.
40 LSU CNT PWB Controls the LSU.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 19


15. Fuses and thermostats

13
12

定着

DC PWB

AC-WH PWB
11
10
9
8
7

6
5

2
4
3

Fuses

No. Signal name Name Type Location


1 F1 Fuse 20A 250V AC/WH PWB (100V series)
F1 Fuse 10A 250V AC/WH PWB (200V series)
2 F2 Fuse 10A 250V AC/WH PWB (200V series)
3 F101 Fuse 15A 250V DC Power PWB (100V series)
F101 Fuse T8AH 250V DC Power PWB (200V series)
4 F102 Fuse T2AH 250V DC Power PWB
5 F301 Fuse T5AH AC250V DC Power PWB
6 F401 Fuse T3.15AH AC250V DC Power PWB
7 F601 Fuse T6.3AH AC250V DC Power PWB
8 F602 Fuse T6.3AH AC250V DC Power PWB
9 F603 Fuse T6.3AH AC250V DC Power PWB
10 F604 Fuse T6.3AH AC250V DC Power PWB
11 F605 Fuse T6.3AH AC250V DC Power PWB

Thermostats

No. Signal name Name Type Function/Operation


12 TS UM Thermostat 1 Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_UM) circuit when the fusing section is
overheated.
13 TS US Thermostat 2 Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_US//HL_UW) circuit when the fusing
section is overheated.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 20


16. Rollers

7 6 4 5 3 2 1

12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
65
64
69
68
67
66

58
59
61
60
71
70

62
63
56
57

29
54 28
55
34
33 30
50
51
17 53
16 52
18 48
49
31 47
32
46
20 45
19
21
44
23 43
42
22 40
24 41
38
39
26
37
25 35
27 36

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Document pickup roller (DSPF) Picks up a document to feed it to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller (DSPF) Feeds a document to the transport section.
3 Separation roller (DSPF) Separates a document to prevent double-feeding.
4 Transport roller 1(Drive) (DSPF) Provides deflection between the paper feed roller and this roller to correct the document skew.
5 Transport roller 1 (Idle) (DSPF) Applied a pressure to document and the registration roller, and provides transport power of the
registration roller to document.
6 Transport roller 2(Drive) (DSPF) Transports document from transport roller 1 to registration roller.
7 Transport roller 2(Idle) (DSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to the document.
8 Registration roller (Drive) (DSPF) Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts the document scanning timing.
9 Registration roller (Idle) (DSPF) Applied a pressure to document and the registration roller, and provides transport power of the
registration roller to document.
10 Transport roller 3(Drive) (DSPF) Transports document from the No. 1 scan section to the No. 2 scan section.
11 Transport roller 3(Idle) (DSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to the document.
12 Transport roller 4(Drive) (DSPF) Transports document from the transport roller 3 to the document exit roller.
13 Transport roller 4(Idle) (DSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to the document.
14 Paper exit roller (Drive) (DSPF) Discharges document.
15 Paper exit roller (Idle) (DSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to the document.
16 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 1) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
17 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 1) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
18 Separation roller (Paper feed tray 1) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 21


No. Name Function/Operation
19 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 2) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
20 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 2) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
21 Separation roller (Paper feed tray 2) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
22 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 3) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
23 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 3) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
24 Separation roller (Paper feed tray 3) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
25 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 4) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
26 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 4) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
27 Separation roller (Paper feed tray 4) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
28 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
29 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
30 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
31 Horizontal transport roller left (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed roller to the horizontal roller Right.
32 Horizontal transport roller left (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
33 Horizontal transport roller Right (Drive) Transports paper fed from the horizontal roller left to the transport roller 12.
34 Horizontal transport roller right (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
35 Transport roller 1(Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 4 to the transport roller 2.
36 Transport roller 1(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
37 Transport roller 2 Transports paper fed from the transport roller 1 to the transport roller 3.
38 Transport roller 3(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 2 to the transport roller 6.
39 Transport roller 3(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
40 Transport roller 4(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 3 to the transport roller 5.
41 Transport roller 4(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
42 Transport roller 5 Transports paper fed from the transport roller 4 to the transport roller 6.
43 Transport roller 6(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 4 or 5 to the transport roller 7.
44 Transport roller 6(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
45 Transport roller 7(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 6 to the transport roller 9.
46 Transport roller 7(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
47 Transport roller 8 Transports paper fed from the transport roller 2 to the transport roller 9.
48 Transport roller 9(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 2 to the transport roller 10.
49 Transport roller 9(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
50 Transport roller 10(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
51 Transport roller 10(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 9 to the transport roller 12.
52 Transport roller 11(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
53 Transport roller 11(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 15 to the transport roller 12.
54 Transport roller 12(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
55 Transport roller 12(Drive) Transports paper to the registration roller. Makes a bend of the paper between a cash register strike
roller and this roller and corrects a paper skew and an image and relative relations of the paper.
56 Registration roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the transport timing of paper and adjusts the
relative position between images and paper.
57 Registration roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
58 Transport roller 13(Drive) Transports paper fed from the Fusing section to the exit section / the switch back section.
59 Transport roller 13(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the exit roller to provide the transport power of the exit roller to paper.
60 Transport roller 14(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the exit roller to provide the transport power of the exit roller to paper.
61 Transport roller 14(Drive) Transports paper transported from the switchback section to the transport roller 15.
62 Transport roller 15(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the exit roller to provide the transport power of the exit roller to paper.
63 Transport roller 15(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 14 to the transport roller 11.
64 Paper exit roller 1(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the exit roller to provide the transport power of the exit roller to paper.
65 Paper exit roller 1(Drive) Discharges paper to the left side.
66 Paper exit roller 2(Drive) Discharges paper to the right side.
67 Paper exit roller 2(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the exit roller to provide the transport power of the exit roller to paper.
68 Transport roller 16(Drive) Transports paper fed from the exit roller 1 to the transport roller 14 and the exit roller 2.
69 Transport roller 16(Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
70 Heat roller Heat toner onto paper to fuse images.
71 Pressure roller Applies pressure to the heat roller.

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 22


[5] ADJUSTMENTS Service Manual

1. Outline
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the sequence
of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest.
There is, however, no need to perform all the adjustments. Perform only the necessary adjustments.
Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted.
If adjustments are omitted, the sequence of adjustments must be observed in ascending order. Failure to follow this procedure may result in
improper adjustment or failure of operation.

2. Adjustment item list


Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ1 High voltage values ADJ 1A Main charger grid voltage adjustment 8-2
adjustment ADJ 1B Developing bias voltage adjustment 8-1
ADJ 1C Transfer current and voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ1D MC total electric current output setting 8-10
ADJ1E Transcription Electric cleaning output setting 8-17
ADJ2 Developing unit adjustment ADJ 2A Adjust the developing doctor gap
ADJ 2B Adjust the developing roller main pole position
ADJ 2C Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ3 Print image distortion, ADJ 3A Print image distortion manual adjustment (LSU parallelism adjustment) 64-2
position, magnification ratio ADJ 3B Print image magnification ratio manual adjustment (Main scanning direction) 50-10
adjustment (Manual ADJ 3C Print image lead edge void area manual adjustment/Front-rear void area, rear edge 50-5
adjustment) void area manual adjustment
ADJ4 Scan image distortion ADJ 4A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
adjustment (OC mode) ADJ 4B Scan image sub scanning direction distortion adjustment
ADJ 4C Scan image main scanning direction distortion adjustment
ADJ5 Scan image distortion ADJ 5A DSPF level adjustment
adjustment (DSPF mode) ADJ 5B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode) 64-2
ADJ 5C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode)
ADJ6 Scan image focus adjustment ADJ 6A Image focus adjustment (Document table mode/ DSPF front surface mode) 48-1
ADJ 6B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back surface mode)
ADJ7 Scan image magnification ADJ 7A Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment 48-1, 48-5
ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
ADJ 7B Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment 48-1, 48-5
(Document table mode)
ADJ 7C Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment 48-1, 48-5
(DSPF mode)
ADJ 7D Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment 48-1, 48-5
(DSPF mode)
ADJ8 Print/scan image off-center, ADJ 8A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode) 50-12
lead edge position adjustment ADJ 8B Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF mode) 50-12, 50-6
(Manual adjustment) ADJ 8C Print image off-center, lead edge position manual adjustment (Software adjustment) 50-10
ADJ 8D Paper feed off-center manual adjustment (No.1 - 4 paper feed unit in main unit) 50-10
(Mechanical adjustment)
ADJ9 Print/scan image lead edge ADJ 9A Print image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Main scanning direction) 50-28
position, off-center, (Corresponding to ADJ3B)
magnification ratio adjustment ADJ 9B Print image off-center automatic adjustment (Each paper feed tray, duplex mode) 50-28
(Automatic adjustment) (Corresponding to ADJ3C/8C)
ADJ 9C Scan image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Sub scanning direction) 50-28
(Document table mode) (Corresponding to ADJ7B)
Scan image off-center automatic adjustment (Document table mode)
(Corresponding to ADJ8A)
Scan image lead edge reference position automatic adjustment
(Document table mode) (Corresponding to SIM 50-1 RRCA)
ADJ 9D Scan image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Sub scanning direction) 50-28
(DSPF mode) (Corresponding to ADJ7E)
Scan image off-center automatic adjustment (DSPF mode)
(Corresponding to ADJ8B)
Scan image lead edge reference position automatic adjustment (DSPF mode)
(Corresponding to SIM 50-6)
ADJ10 Image position, image loss, ADJ10A Copy mode image loss void area adjustment (Document table mode) 50-1
and void area adjustment ADJ10B Document scan position adjustment (Scanner scanning position adjustment when 53-8
scanning the front surface in the DSPF mode)
ADJ10C Copy mode image loss adjustment (DSPF mode) 50-6
ADJ10D Image send mode, image loss adjustment 50-27
ADJ10E FAX send mode image loss adjustment 50-27

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 1
Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ11/ Gray balance/density Note before execution of the image quality adjustment
SET1 adjustment Copy image quality check
Printer image quality check
ADJ 11A Scanner calibration 11A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) 63-3 (63-5)
(CCD calibration) (1) (Document table mode)
11A Shading adjustment (Calibration) (DSPF mode) 63-2
(2)
11A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (DSPF 63-3
(3) mode)
ADJ 11B Copy/Printer gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) 46-74
(Basic adjustment)
ADJ 11C Copy quality 11C Copy gray balance and density adjustment 46-24
adjustment (1) (Automatic adjustment)
(Basic adjustment) 11C Copy gray balance and density adjustment (Manual 46-21
(2) adjustment)
ADJ 11D Copy/Image send/ 11D Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each 46-2
FAX image quality (1) monochrome copy mode) (separately for the low-
adjustment density area and the high-density area)
(Individual (No need to adjust normally)
adjustment) 11D Copy gray balance, gamma adjustment 46-10
(2) (No need to adjust normally)
11D Monochrome copy density, gamma adjustment (for 46-16
(3) each monochrome copy mode)
(No need to adjust normally)
11D Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode 46-19
(4) document density scanning operation (exposure
operation) conditions setting (Normally no need to
set)
11D Document low density image density reproduction 46-32
(5) adjustment in the automatic monochrome (Copy/
Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background density
adjustment in the scanning section)
11D Copy/Scan low density image density adjustment (for 46-63
(6) each mode) (No need to adjust normally)
11D Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document 46-37
(7) reproduction adjustment
(No need to adjust normally)
11D Monochrome copy/color scan mode sharpness 46-60
(8) adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
11D Copy high density image density reproduction setting 46-23
(9) (Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
11D DSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment 46-9
(10) (No need to adjust normally)
11D Automatic gray balance adjustment by the user (Copy 26-53
(11) gray balance automatic adjustment ENABLE setting
and adjustment)
11D Copy gamma, gray balance adjustment for each 46-54
(12) dither (Automatic adjustment)
11D Dropout color adjustment (Normally not required) 46-55
(13)
11D Watermark adjustment (Normally not required) 46-66
(14)
ADJ 11E Printer image 11E Printer gray balance adjustment 67-24
quality adjustment (1) (Automatic adjustment)
(Basic adjustment) 11E Printer gray balance adjustment 67-25
(2) (Manual adjustment)
ADJ 11F Printer image 11F Printer density adjustment (Low density section 67-36
quality adjustment (1) density adjustment) (No need to adjust normally)
(Individual 11F Printer high density image density reproduction 67-34
adjustment) (2) setting (Supporting the high density section tone gap)
(No need to adjust normally)
11F Printer gamma adjustment for each dither (Automatic 67-54
(3) adjustment) (No need to adjust normally)
11F Automatic gray balance adjustment by the user 26-53
(4) (Printer gray balance automatic adjustment ENABLE
setting and adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to the
setting change)
ADJ12 Image send, FAX send mode, ADJ12A Color image send mode, image density and gradation adjustment (by each mode) 46-4
image quality adjustment ADJ12B Monochrome image send mode, image density and gradation adjustment (by each 46-5
mode)
ADJ12C Image send mode, image color balance adjustment 46-8
ADJ12D FAX send mode, image sharpness adjustment 46-39

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 2
Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ13 FAX send mode image quality ADJ13A Image density and gradation adjustment in the FAX send mode 46-40
adjustment (Collective adjustment of all the FAX modes)
ADJ13B Image density and gradation adjustment in the FAX send mode (Normal mode) 46-41
ADJ13C Image density and gradation adjustment in the FAX send mode (Fine mode) 46-42
ADJ13D Image density and gradation adjustment in the FAX send mode 46-43
(Super fine mode)
ADJ13E Image density and gradation adjustment in the FAX send mode (Ultra fine mode) 46-44
ADJ13F Image density and gradation adjustment in the IFAX send mode (600dpi mode) 46-45
ADJ14 Setting of the auto exposure mode operating conditions in copy, scan, and FAX 46-19
ADJ15 Paper size detection ADJ15A Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment 40-2
adjustment ADJ15B Paper feed tray 4 paper width sensor adjustment 40-12
ADJ15C DSPF paper feed tray document width sensor adjustment 53-6
ADJ16 Document size detection adjustment (Document table mode) 41-2
ADJ17 Touch panel coordinate adjustment 65-1
ADJ18 Fusing paper guide position adjustment (Manual adjustment of fusing paper guide position ) 43-33

3. Datails of adjustment 1) Enter the Sim. 8-2 mode.


2) Select the output mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.

ADJ 1 High voltage values adjustment Setting


Actual voltage
Item/Display (mode) Content 65cpm 75cpm
range
machine machine
1-A Main charger grid voltage adjustment
MID A MIDDLE K charging/grid 150 - -663V -667V
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: DLE SPEED bias set value 850 +/- 5V +/- 5V
* When the MC high voltage PWB is replaced. GB_K at middle
speed
* U2 trouble has occurred.
LOW A LOW K charging/grid 150 - -663V -663V
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. SPEED bias set value 850 +/- 5V +/- 5V
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. GB_K at low speed

3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed mode and press [OK] key.
Enter the adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label attached on the MC high voltage power PWB.
CAUTION: Since the MC high voltage output cannot be checked
GBK:XXX with a digital multimeter in this model, a judgment of the
output must be made by checking the print image qual-
EUK9MHC54HA ity.

D V - : 5 0 6 G B K : 6 5 9

6 65 5 GG BB+ + 0 0 0 0
7 5 G B + 0 4

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the proce-


dure 3) is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is saved.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.

The default values specified for each model must be


changed
as follows:
65cpm machine: + 0
75cpm machine: + 4
CAUTION: Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on
the MC high voltage PWB.Since the adjustment value
label is attached on the MC high voltage PWB, the PWB
must be removed in order to check the adjustment
value. This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is
advisable to put down the adjustment value in advance.
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the mid-
dle speed mode is set, the adjustment values of the
other modes are automatically set according to the mid-
dle speed mode setting in a certain relationship.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 3
Actual voltage
1-B Developing bias voltage adjustment Item/Display Setting
Content 65cpm 75cpm
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: (mode) range
machine machine
* The high voltage PWB has been replaced. MID A MIDDLE K developing 0 - 600 -500V -500V
* U2 trouble has occurred. DLE SPEED bias set value +/- 5V +/- 5V
DVB_K at middle
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. speed
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. LOW A LOW K developing 0 - 600 -500V -500V
1) Enter the Sim. 8-1 mode. SPEED bias set value +/- 5V +/- 5V
DVB_K at low speed
2) Select the output mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed mode and press [OK] key.
Enter the adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label attached on the MC high voltage power PWB.

DV-:XXX

EUK9MHC54HA
D V - : 5 0 6 G B K : 6 5 9

6 65 5 GG BB+ + 0 0 0 0
7 5 G B + 0 4

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the proce-


dure 3) is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is saved.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.

CAUTION: Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on


the MC high voltage PWB.Since the adjustment value
label is attached on the MC high voltage PWB, the PWB
must be removed in order to check the adjustment
value. This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is
advisable to put down the adjustment value in advance.
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the mid-
dle speed mode is set, the adjustment values of the
other modes are automatically set according to the mid-
dle speed mode setting in a certain relationship.
CAUTION: Since the MC high voltage output cannot be checked
with a digital multimeter in this model, a judgment of the
output must be made by checking the print image qual-
ity.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 4
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
1-C Transfer current and voltage adjustment
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
1) Enter the Sim. 8-6 mode.
* The high voltage PWB has been replaced.
2) Select the output mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content 65 cpm 75 cpm
range
machine machine
A TC PLAIN BW SPX Primary transfer bias reference value Plain paper Front surface 0 - 255 113 129
B TC PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 113 129
C TC HEAVY1 BW SPX Heavy paper 1 Front surface 0 - 255 129 129
D TC HEAVY1 BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 129 129
E TC HEAVY2 BW SPX Heavy paper 2 Low speed 2 0 - 255 113 113
F TC HEAVY3 BW SPX Heavy paper 3 Middle speed 0 - 255 113 113
G TC OHP BW OHP Low speed 1 0 - 255 113 113
H TC ENVELOPE BW Envelope Low speed 2 0 - 255 97 113
I TC THIN BW Thin paper Middle speed 0 - 255 97 129
J TC GLOSSY BW Glossy paper Low speed 1 0 - 255 97 129
K TC ADSORPTION BW Transfer current adsorption process 0 - 255 113 129
L TC INTERVAL BIAS MID Transfer current between paper middle speed Middle speed 0 - 255 113 129
M TC INTERVAL BIAS LOW Transfer current between paper low speed Low speed 0 - 255 113 129
N TC FRONT EDGE MID Transfer bias front edge Middle speed 0 - 255 0 0
O TC FRONT EDGE LOW Low speed 0 - 255 0 0
P TC BACKEND MID Transfer bias back end Middle speed 0 - 255 0 0
Q TC BACKEND LOW Low speed 0 - 255 0 0
R TC CLEANING AC Transcription bias standard value cleaning At the time of a cleaning process (AC) 0 - 255 218 218
S TC CLEANING DC process At the time of a normal cleaning process 0 - 255 36 36
T PTDL SPX Pre transfer discharge Front surface 0 - 255 15 20
U PTDL DPX Back surface 0 - 255 15 20
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
1-D MC total electric current output setting
The adjustment value is set.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is
outputted. * When the primary transfer high voltage power PWB or Second-
ary transfer high voltage power PWB is replaced.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the adjustment value is
saved and the transfer voltage is outputted simultaneously. * U2 trouble has occurred.
Since the actual output cannot be checked, if it is presumed to * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
be abnormal even though the adjustment value is set to the * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
default value, replace the high voltage pwb. 1) Enter the SIM 8-10 mode.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. pressed during outputting, the operation is terminated.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec. When [EXECUTE] key is
Setting Default Current value
Button Item Display Content
range value Variable range Minimum unit
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED MC_K Main charger total current (middle speed mode) K 50 - 100 70 -500 - -1000A 10A
LOW1 A LOW1 SPEED MC_K Main charger total current (low speed 1 mode) K 50 - 100 70 -500 - -1000A 10A

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 5
* U2 trouble has occurred.
1-E Transcription Electric cleaning output
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
setting
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
1) Enter the SIM 8-6 mode.
* When the primary transfer high voltage power PWB or Second-
ary transfer high voltage power PWB is replaced.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. pressed during outputting, the operation is terminated.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec. When [EXECUTE] key is
Default
Item Display Content Content SPD Setting range
value
A TC CLEANING ROLLER+ Transfer cleaning roller output Print mode - 0 - 255 128
B TC CLEANING ROLLER- Cleaning mode - 0 - 255 128
C TC DRIVERROLL MID(FACE) Separation bias output (Front surface) MID 0 - 255 128
D TC DRIVERROLL MID(BACK) Separation bias output (Back surface MID 0 - 255 128
E TC DRIVERROLL MID(FACE) Separation bias output (Front surface) LOW 0 - 255 128
F TC DRIVERROLL MID(BACK) Separation bias output (Back surface LOW 0 - 255 128

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 6
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.
ADJ 2 Developing unit adjustment
2-A Adjust the developing doctor gap
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
the developing unit upper cover.

3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.42mm in between 20mm - 40mm


from the edge of the developing doctor.

4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, Insert a


thickness gauge of 0.775mm in between 40mm - 70mm from
the edge of the developing doctor.

5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 20mm - 40mm


from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
0.42 +/- 0.05mm.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the developing roller.
Note for use of a thickness gauge
? Do not insert the gauge diagonally.
? The gauge must pass freely.
? The advisable point of measurement is the MIN point of the MG
roller oscillation.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 7
1 : ‘14/Dec

2-B Adjust the developing roller main pole


position
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.

NOTE: Be careful mot to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or foreign


materials on the roller during the work.

Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the developing roller main pole


1) Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the develop-
position comes to the specified range.
ing unit on a flat surface.
7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller
2) Attach a piece of string to a sewing needle or pin.
main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjust-
3) Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing ment plate with the fixing screw.
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because too heavy. It will not
provide a correct position.)
2-C Toner density control reference value
4) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the
setting
needle with the needle at 2 - 3mm from the developing roller
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.) This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When developer is replaced.
CAUTION: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer
is replaced. Never execute it in the other cases.
1) With the right door open, enter SIM25-2.
2~3mm
When setting the toner density control reference value, pull out
the toner cartridge in advance.
2) After input, close the right door.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
4) After [EXECUTE] key is highlighted, it is highlighted. The 1
developing roller rotates, and the toner density sensor detects
toner density, and the output value is displayed.
The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the aver-
age value of the toner density sensor detection level is set
(saved) as the reference toner density control value.
However in case this work is performed under high tempera-
5) Measure the distance between the marking position and posi- ture environment (with the humidity approximately 80% or
tion A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 14.5 +/- more), this movement continues for five more minutes to stabi-
0.5mm. lize developer.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the devel- When the reference toner density control adjustment operation
oping roller main pole position in the following procedures. is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to normal from highlight.
This makes known about whether the adjustment operation is
completed or not.
In case this adjustment stops before finish (by turning the
power off etc.), execute the adjustment again.
CAUTION: If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the
adjustment result is not reflected.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the
operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
14.5±0.5mm
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EC] is displayed, setting of
the reference toner density control value is not com-
pleted normally.

Error
Error name Detail of error
display
6) Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level than 26, or sensor
screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and control voltage level over 197
move the adjustment plate in the direction to adjust. EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 200, or sensor
control voltage level less than 49
EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level: other than 120 +/- 5
CAUTION: When not replacing the developer, do not execute
SIM25-2.
CAUTION: During execution of this adjustment, do not insert the
toner cartridge.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 8
ADJ 3 Print image distortion, position, 8) Loosen screws ① , ② and adjust the right side up and down by
magnification ratio adjustment a direction slipping off and do screw flagging down.Fix the
screw in order of ① , ② .
(Manual adjustment) <Adjustment procedure>
1.When it slips off in A, send you to the (a) direction.
3-A Print image distortion manual adjustment 2.When it slips off in B, send you to the (b) direction.
(LSU parallelism adjustment)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When the LSU unit is replaced.
* When the LSU unit is removed from the main unit.
This adjustment should be followed by:
1) Enter the Sim.64-2 mode.
2) Set the conditions as shown below.

Item Display Item Description


Set ①
value ② a
A PRINT PATTERN Used to specify the print 1
pattern.
(* For details, refer to the
following descriptions.) b
B DOT1 Used to set the print dot 1
number. (Self print pattern: 9)

for m by n)
C DOT2 Used to set the empty dot 254 3-B Print image magnification ratio manual
number. (Self print pattern:
for m by n) adjustment (Main scanning direction)
D DENSITY Used to specify the print 255 This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
gradation. * LSU (write) unit has been replaced.
3) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 X 17) paper in it by * U2 trouble has occurred.
changing the value of G. * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
The grid pattern image is outputted.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Enter the Sim.50-10 mode.
The check pattern is printed out.
2) Select A4 (11 X 8.5) paper.
5) Check the printed image for any skew.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Measure the right angle level by using the printed cross pat-
The check pattern is printed out.
tern.
4) Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240
6) Fit the side of A3 (11 X 17) paper to the long side of the rectan-
0.5mm.
gle print pattern.

Comparison line

0.5mm or less

Direction A Direction B

7) Measure the shift distance between vertical side of paper and


side of the rectangle print pattern. If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
If the above distance is0.5mm or less, there is no need to
adjust.
If not, execute the following procedures.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 9
5) Change the set value of set item A.
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed 3-C Print image lead edge void area manual
by 0.1mm. adjustment/Front-rear void area, rear edge
When the set value is increased, the main scanning direction void area manual adjustment
image magnification ratio in the main scanning direction is This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
increased. When the set value is decreased, the mian scan-
* When the resist roller section is disassembled.
ning direction image magnification ratio in the main scanning
direction is decreased. * When the LSU is replace or removed.
Repeat procedures 3 thru 5 until a satisfactory result is * U2 trouble has occurred.
obtained. * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
1) Enter the Sim. 50-5 mode.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the following
items are the standard values.

Standard
adjustment value
X Lead edge void area 4mm or less
Y Rear edge void area more than2mm,
less than 5mm
Z1/Z2 FRONT / REAR void area 4 mm +/- 2mm less
(Z1+Z2)

4mm ±2mm (Z1+Z2)

X Y
4mm or less More than 2mm,
less than 5mm

4mm ±2mm (Z1+Z2)

(Note)
Check by feeding from all the paper feed trays.
If the above conditions are not satisfied or the adjustment
value is set to an optional value, perform the following proce-
dures.
3) Select the adjustment item with the scroll key.

Setting Default
Display/Item Content Remark
range value
A DEN-C (Void quantity) Printer print lead edge 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value to fit the print lead edge in the printer mode.
adjustment value When the adjustment value is decreased by 1, the printer print start
position is shifted to the lead edge in the paper transport direction by
0.1mm.
B DEN-B (Void quantity) Sub scanning direction 1 - 99 30 Void quantity generated at the paper rear edge.
print area adjustment value When the adjustment value of B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the sub
scanning direction print area adjustment value is decreased in the
paper transport direction by 0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR (Void quantity) FRONT / REAR void 1 - 99 20 Adjustment of the void quantity generated at the right and left edges
quantity adjustment of paper.
When the value is increased, the void quantity is increased.
D DENB-MFT (Sub scanning direction print area) 1 - 99 50 Adjustment of the void quantity generated at the rear edge of paper.
Manual paper feed correction value When only the manual feed is adjusted for the adjustment value of
item B (DEN-B), this value is changed.
E DENB-CS1 (Sub scanning direction print area) 1 - 99 50 Adjustment of the void quantity generated at the rear edge of paper.
Cassette 1 correction value When only the cassette 1 is adjusted for the adjustment value of item
B (DEN-B), this value is changed.
F DENB-CS2 (Sub scanning direction print area) 1 - 99 50 Adjustment of the void quantity generated at the rear edge of paper.
Cassette 2 correction value When only the cassette 2 is adjusted for the adjustment value of item
B (DEN-B), this value is changed.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 10
Setting Default
Display/Item Content Remark
range value
G DENB-CS3 (Sub scanning direction print area) 1 - 99 50 Adjustment of the void quantity generated at the rear edge of paper.
Cassette 3 correction value When only the cassette 3 is adjusted for the adjustment value of item
B (DEN-B), this value is changed.
H DENB-CS4 (Sub scanning direction print area) 1 - 99 50 Adjustment of the void quantity generated at the rear edge of paper.
Cassette 4 correction value When only the cassette 4 is adjusted for the adjustment value of item
B (DEN-B), this value is changed.
I DENB-LC (Sub scanning direction print area) 1 - 99 50 Adjustment of the void quantity generated at the rear edge of paper.
LCC/LCT/LCT manual paper feed When only the LCC/LCT/LCT manual feed is adjusted for the
correction value adjustment value of item B (DEN-B), this value is changed.
J DENB_ADU (Sub scanning direction print area) 1 - 99 55 Adjustment of the void quantity generated at the rear edge of paper.
ADU correction vaule When only the ADU is adjusted for the adjustment value of item B
(DEN-B), this value is changed.
K DENB-HV (Sub scanning direction print area) 1 - 99 50 Adjustment of the void quantity generated at the rear edge of paper.
Heavy paper correction value When only the heavy paper is adjusted for the adjustment value of
item B (DEN-B), this value is changed.
L MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 - 999 1
M PAPER Cassette select 1 - 99 3
N DUPLEX Duplex print select 0-1 1
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key or
[EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, it is changed by
about 0.1mm.
Repeat procedures 2 thru 4 until the conditions of procedure 2)
are satisfied.

Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
ADJ 4 Scan image distortion unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
adjustment (OC mode) When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on
the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: proper.
* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled.
* When a distortion is produced in copy and scan images.

4-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism


adjustment
Before execution of this procedure, remove the document table
glass.
1) Remove the LED lamp unit, and then loosen the screws which
are fixing the scanner unit A and the drive wire. Release the
scanner unit A from the drive wire.

If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 11
2) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame 5) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
side of the scanner unit B. edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.

3) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.
4) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B. If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce-
dures, perform the following procedures. Loosen the fixing
screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which is not in contact.
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 12
4) If there is a distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform the
4-B Scan image sub scanning direction following procedure.
distortion adjustment Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
1) Make a test chart (a rectangular pattern with four right angles) pulley. (Either one in the front frame side or the rear frame side
on A3 (11 X 17) paper as shown below. will do.)

L L

L = 10mm

2) Set the test chart made in the procedure 1) on the document


table so that the test charts is shifted toward you by 30mm
from the document set reference position. With the document
cover open, make a copy on A3 (11" X 17") paper.

5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
scanner unit drive pulley to adjust the parallelism of the scan-
ner unit A and B. (Change the relative positions of the scanner
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
Tighten the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley.
Repeat the procedures of 2 thru 5 until the condition of proce-
dure 3) is satisfied.
If a distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be removed
in the above procedures, perform “ADJ 4C Scan image overall
distortion adjustment.”

4-C Scan image main scanning direction


distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
3) Check for any distortion in the sub scanning direction.
If La = Lb, there is no distortion. L

La Lb
L L

L = 10mm

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 13
2) Set the test chart made in the procedure 1) on the document 6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
table, and make a copy on A3 (11” X 17”) paper. frame side, change the overall height.
3) Check for any distortion in the main scanning direction.
If the four angles of the copy image (rectangle) is right angles, 7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
there is no distortion. (Work completed) ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check
that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the
specified range. Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the dis-
tortion in the main scanning direction is in the specified range.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted
with the above procedures, perform ADJ 4D Scan image dis-
tortion adjustment (whole scanner unit).

4-D Scan image distortion adjustment


(Whole scanner unit)
This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform adjusted with ADJ 4A, ADJ 4B, and ADJ 4C related to the scan
the following procedures. image distortion adjustment.
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion
and right-hand side images distortions. adjustment plate on the right edge of the scanner unit so that the
scan image distortion is minimized. By adjusting the distortion of
the whole scanner unit, the scan image distortion is adjusted.
1) Loosen the fixing screw (A).
Lc Lc 2) Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate.

Copy A Copy B

Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld Lc Ld

If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right. A A A


(The distortions are balanced.) If the above condition is satis- A
fied, go to the procedure 6). If not, perform the following proce-
dures.
5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side.

Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the


scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
right and the left heights of the scanner rail. Repeat the proce-
dures 2) - 5) until the difference between the image distortions
(distortion balance) is deleted.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 14
When the front frame side is higher (there is a clearance in B):
ADJ 5 Scan image distortion Turn the height adjustment screw R of the DSPF rear frame
clockwise. When the rear frame side is higher (clearance A is
adjustment (DSPF mode) more than 1mm): Turn the height adjustment screw L of the
DSPF rear frame counterclockwise. Repeat steps 2) to 3) until
5-A DSPF level adjustment an acceptable result is obtained.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: 4) After adjustments of A and B, check to insure that the projec-
* The DSPF section has been disassembled. tion on the front right side is in contact with the glass surface of
* The DSPF unit has been replaced. the main unit.

* When a DSPF JAM is generated.


* When a skew is generated in the document feed operation.
* When there is a distortion (skew) in the scan image in the DSPF
unit.
1) Close the DSPF unit and check the clearance between the
projections in the front side and the rear side and the SPF
glass holding resin surface.
Cut copy paper in the longitudinal direction.

5-B DSPF skew adjustment


(Front surface mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Make an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2.
SIM 64-2 set values
A = 1, B = 1, C = 254, D = 255
2) Visually check to insure that the clearance A is 1mm or less Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
and the clearance B is 0mm (in contact). If the above require- the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
ment is not met, do step 3). the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.

A Paper pass direction

3) Turn the height adjustment screw to adjust the DSPF front/rear


frame horizontal level.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 15
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17") 4) Open the DSPF unit and loosen the screw.
paper in DSPF/RSPF duplex mode, and then check the image
for skews (Set in the DSPF/RSPF feed tray so that the mark
on the adjustment chart is at the edge).
* Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]

(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm

A B

a b 5) Adjust by turning the DSPF skew adjusting screw on the right


side of the DSPF rear frame.
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm

C D

c d

[Check Method 2]
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
1.0mm.

1.0

5-C DSPF skew adjustment


(Back surface mode)
A This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2.
SIM 64-2 set values
A = 1, B = 1, C = 254, D = 255
If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
front surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
of "ADJ 5C DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)". the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
If the back surface copy is not as shown above, perform the
back sides of the paper.
procedures of step 3).
3) Loosen the hinge screws and lower the two attachments.

2 A Paper pass direction

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 16
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17") 4) Turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw on the CCD unit to
paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for adjust.
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
* Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]

(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm

A B

a b A B

(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm

C D
ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment
c d
6-A Image focus adjustment (Document table
[Check Method 2] mode/DSPF front surface mode)
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within * The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
1.0mm. * The CCD unit has been replaced.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
1.0 ning direction is not properly adjusted.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
1) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.

A 
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&' 0$,1
$˖  %˖ ˖&&' 68%

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 0$,1


'˖  ˖63) 68%

(˖  ˖63)% 0$,1

)˖  ˖63)% 68%

If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the


front surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
of "ADJ 5B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)". 2.

If the back surface copy is not as shown above, perform the


procedures of step 3) or later. 2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).
3) Open the upper door and remove the adjustment cover. Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 17
4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper. 10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.
5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale
length in terms of length.
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main
scanning direction from the following formula.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
(Example)
Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the
copy image.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1

* Never loosen the screws marked with X.


If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
100mm scale
(Orignal)
10 20 90 100 110 angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.
1.0mm 11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
Copy image
(1mm (1%) CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
10 20 90 100 110
shorter than than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
the original)
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the in procedure 9).
following procedures.
7) Remove the document table glass.
8) Remove the dark box cover.
9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.

12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 +/-
0.8%, repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is
satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 +/- 0.8%)
* This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
replaced.
cal system structure.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 18
6) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
6-B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back direction) to change the installing position. When the copy
surface mode) image is longer than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the
This adjustment is required in the following cases: direction B. When the copy image is shorter than the original
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced. scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A. One scale of mark-
off line corresponds to 0.2%. At that time, fix the CCD unit so
* When the COPY/SCAN/FAX image focus is not properly
that it is in parallel with the scale on the front and the rear side
adjusted.
of the CCD unit base.
* When the DSPF unit is removed.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
* When the DSPF unit is replaced. in procedure 4).
1) Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode.
2) Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper
is satisfactorily focused.
If the image is not satisfactorily focused, do the following
steps.
3) Open the door. Remove the screws and transport PG upper.

7) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.


If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 +/-
4) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
0.8%, repeat the procedures of 4) - 6) until the condition is sat-
CCD unit base as shown below.
isfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 +/- 0.8%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.

ADJ 7 Scan image magnification ratio


5) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws. adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of
SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When the copy image magnification ratio in the sub scanning
direction is not properly adjusted.
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
position adjustment) must have been completed.
* Never loosen the screws marked with 5.
Loosening these screws could possibly change the CCD
unit base optical axis. Once the optical axis has been
changed, it cannot be corrected through on-site adjust-
ments. Solving such a problem requires the replacement of
the entire scanner unit.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 19
7-A Main scanning direction image 7-B Sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment magnification ratio adjustment
(Document table mode) (Document table mode)
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below. 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
below.

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode. 2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.

 
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&' 0$,1 $˖ ˖&&' 0$,1
$˖  %˖ ˖&&' 68% $˖  %˖ ˖&&' 68%

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 0$,1 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 0$,1


'˖  ˖63) 68% '˖  ˖63) 68%

(˖  ˖63)% 0$,1 (˖  ˖63)% 0$,1

)˖  ˖63)% 68% )˖  ˖63)% 68%

2. 2.

3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. 3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy. copy mode, and make a copy.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 +/- 0.8%). If the copy magnification ratio is within Copy magnifi- (Original dimension - Copy dimension)
the specified range (100 +/- 1.0%), the adjustment is com- cation ratio 100%
Original dimension
pleted. If the copy magnification ratio is not within the specified
range, perform the following procedure.
5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. (Example 1)
Copy A
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica- (Shorter than 10 20 90 100 110
tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed the original)
by 1, the copy magnification ratio is changed by about 0.02%.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio
is within the specified range (100 +/- 0.8%).

Scale
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110

(Example 2)
Copy B
10 20 90 100 110
(Longer than
the original)

4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified


range (100 +/- 0.8%). If the copy magnification ratio is within
the specified range (100 +/- 0.8%), the adjustment is com-
pleted. If the copy magnification ratio is not within the specified
range, perform the following procedure.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 20
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. 5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased. When the 
adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnification ratio ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(

is changed by about 0.1%. 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17


$˖ ˖&&' 0$,1
$˖  %˖ ˖&&' 68%

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 0$,1


Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is '˖  ˖63) 68%
within the specified range (100 +/- 0.8%). (˖  ˖63)% 0$,1

)˖  ˖63)% 68%

7-C Main scanning direction image


magnification ratio adjustment
(DSPF mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
2.
* When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. Setting Default
Item Display Content
* When U2 trouble occurs. range value
* When the copy magnification ratio is not matched. A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
* When the DSPF is disassembled.
adjustment (CCD)
a. Adjustment procedures B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-
adjustment (CCD)
ment tray of the DSPF/RSPF. The adjustment chart is pre-
C SPF(MAIN) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
pared by the following procedures. Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, surface magnification ratio
and put marks on both sides and both surfaces of the paper at adjustment (Main scan)
10mm from each edge. D SPF(SUB) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan)
Paper pass direction E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back 1 - 99 50
A4 size surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
* Items A, C, E: When the set value is increased by 1, the
magnification ratio is increased by 0.02%.
* Items B, D: When the set value is increased by 1, the magni-
(Both the front surface fication ratio is increased by 0.1%.
and the back surface)
10mm 10mm * It affects scanning (PC scanning, etc.) as well as copying.
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper. 6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with
the scroll key.
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
images. SPF (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Front surface)
SPFB (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio

original 7)
(Back surface)
Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed
copy by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.02%.
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 7) until a satisfactory result is
10 50 100 150 200 250

obtained.
NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the
machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this
10 50 100 150 200 250
state, copy check can be normally performed. When the
system key is pressed, the machine returns to the simula-
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following tion mode.
formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
(100 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 21
5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
7-D Sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment

(DSPF mode) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: $˖ ˖&&' 0$,1

* When the scan control PWB is replaced.  %˖ ˖&&' 68%

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 0$,1


* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. '˖  ˖63) 68%

* When U2 trouble occurs. (˖  ˖63)% 0$,1

)˖  ˖63)% 68%
* When the copy magnification ratio is not matched.
* When the DSPF is disassembled.
a. Adjustment procedures
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-
ment tray of the DSPF. The adjustment chart is prepared by 2.

the following procedures. Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put


marks on both sides and both surfaces of the paper at 10mm
Setting Default
from each edge. Item Display Content
range value
A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
10mm magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
Paper pass direction B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50

A4 size magnification ratio


adjustment (CCD)
C SPF(MAIN) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
D SPF(SUB) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan)
10mm E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper. adjustment (Main scan)
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
* Items A, C, E: When the set value is increased by 1, the
images. magnification ratio is increased by 0.02%.
* Items B, D: When the set value is increased by 1, the
magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.
10

* It affects scanning (PC scanning, etc.) as well as copying.


50

6) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.


100

SPF (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio


10

(Front surface)

original SPFB (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio


150
50

(Back surface)
7) Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10-
200
100

key, and press [OK] key.


copy
150

When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-


tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed
200

by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.01%.


4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following Repeat the procedures of 1) - 7) until a satisfactory result is
formula: obtained.
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100 NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the
(%) machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%) state, copy check can be normally performed. When the
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range system key is pressed, the machine returns to the simula-
(100 +/- 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment. tion mode.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 22
4) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key.
ADJ 8 Print/scan image off-center, 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
The entered value is set. When the set value is increased, the
lead edge position adjustment main scanning print position is shifted to the front side by
(Manual adjustment) 0.1mm.
This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of 6) Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result. copy mode and make a copy. Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6)
until the above condition is satisfied.
8-A Scan image off-center adjustment
(Document table mode) 8-B Scan image off-center adjustment
(DSPF mode)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the
adjustment mode (document table). * When the DSPF section is disassembled.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, it is required that the ADJ 8A
Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode)
must have been properly adjusted.
A
a. Adjustment procedures
1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back sur-
A=B face of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport
direction.

B Paper transport direction

Front surface Back surface

2) Check the copy image center position.


If A' - B' = 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.

A'

Draw a line at the center of the


front surface and the back surface
A' - B' = 1.0mm of paper in parallel with the paper
(100%) transport direction.

2) Set the adjustment chart to the DSPF.


B'
3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the
manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the
front surface and the back surface of the copy paper.

If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following


procedures. original copy
3) Enter the SIM 50-12 mode.
a


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖2&
$˖  %˖ ˖63) 6,'(

˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 6,'(


b

If the difference is within the range of 0 2.7mmm there is no


need to perform the adjustment. If the adjustment is required,
2. perform the following procedures.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 23
4) Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode. Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
(SIM50-12) F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 40
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss

 amount amount setting
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783 G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
$˖ ˖2& SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount
$˖  %˖ ˖63) 6,'( setting
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 6,'(
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) edge image loss
amount setting
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
adjustment
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
2. adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 - 99 50
front surface
(SIM50-6) magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub
 scan)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( 63)
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
timing is delayed.
$˖ ˖6,'(

 %˖ ˖6,'(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*( 6,'( * Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
'˖ ˖)5217B5($5 6,'(
image loss is increased.
(˖ ˖75$,/B('*( 6,'(
)˖ ˖/($'B('*( 6,'( * Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
*˖ ˖)5217B5($5 6,'(
* The DSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for
+˖ ˖75$,/B('*( 6,'(

,˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
countermeasures against the case when shades are
-˖ ˖2))6(7B63) produced.
5) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.
.˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)

2.
(SIM50-12)
SPF(SIDE1) Front surface mode
SIM50-12
SPF(SIDE2) Back surface mode
Setting Default
Item Display Content (SIM50-6)
range value
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50 OFFSET SPF1 Front surface mode
center adjustment OFFSET SPF2 Back surface mode
B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment 6) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50 (Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
center adjustment (When the adjustment value is increased, the print image is
A - C: When the adjustment value is increased, the image shifted to the rear.) Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until a sat-
position is shifted to the rear frame side. isfactory result is obtained.
1step = 0.1mm NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the
machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this
SIM50-6 (DSPF)
state, copy check can be normally performed. When the
Setting Default system key is pressed, the machine returns to the simula-
Item/Display Content
range value tion mode.
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position adjustment 8-C Print image off-center, lead edge position
(CCD) manual adjustment (Software adjustment)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50 This adjustment is required in the following cases:
document scan
position adjustment * When the LSU is replaced or removed.
(CIS) * When the paper feed tray is replaced.
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20 * When the paper feed tray section is disassembled.
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
* When “ADJ 3B Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment
amount amount setting
setting (Main scanning direction)” is performed.
D FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount * When the manual paper feed tray is replaced.
setting * When the manual paper feed tray is disassembled.
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
* When the duplex section is disassembled.
(SIDE1) edge image loss
amount setting * When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
* When the resist roller section is disassembled.
* When the U2 trouble occurs.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
(Note)

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 24
Before execution of this adjustment, check to confirm that the fol- 4) Enter 50 as default value of off-center adjustment, and press
lowing item is properly adjusted. [OK] button.
“ADJ 3B Print image magnification ratio manual adjustment (Main 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
scanning direction)" has been properly adjusted. The adjustment pattern is printed.
1) Enter the Sim. 50-10 mode. 6) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
2) Select a paper feed source of the adjustment target with the rect position.
scroll button. When the adjustment pattern is printed virtually at the center,
3) Set A4 (11 X 8.5) or A3 (11 X 17) paper on the paper feed tray go to the procedure 10).
selected in the procedure 2). If not, go to the procedure 7).
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment pattern is printed. RV 2.5mm or less
5) Check the image position on the adjustment pattern.
Measure the void area sizes of the adjustment pattern on the
front edge and the rear edge, and check that the sizes satisfy
all the following conditions.

RV 2.5mm or less

LV
(Lead edge void)
3 1mm FV 2.5mm or less

7) Shift the paper feed tray paper guide position and the paper
feed tray base plate back and forth to adjust the off-center.
Adjust so that the adjustment pattern comes virtually to the
center.
FV 2.5mm or less
(No. 1 paper feed tray)
RV: REAR VOID AREA * Front frame side
FV: FRONT VOID AREA Loosen the paper guide fixing screw, and shift the paper guide
RV + FV 5.0mm position back and forth.
RV = 2.5mm or less
FV = 2.5mm or less
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following Paper guide
procedures.

6) Enter the adjustment value, and press [EXECUTE] button.


When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image is shifted
to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is
decreased, the image is shifted to the rear frame side.
A change in the adjustment value by 1 corresponds to a shift
by about 0.1mm.
Repeat the procedures 4 thru 6 until the conditions of the pro- ȚȸȑȸǬǤȉ‫ܭ׍‬ȓǹ
Paper guide fixing screw
cedure 5) are satisfied.
* Rear frame side
After removing the protector, loosen the paper guide fixing
8-D Paper feed off-center manual adjustment screw and shift the paper guide position back and forth.
(No.1 - 4 paper feed unit in main unit)
(Mechanical adjustment)
Paper guide
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: Protector
* When the paper feed tray section is replaced.
* When the paper feed tray section is disassembled.
1) Enter the Sim. 50-10 mode.
2) Select a paper feed source for an adjustment target with the
scroll button.
Paper guide fixing screw
ȚȸȑȸǬǤȉ‫ܭ׍‬ȓǹ
3) Set A4 (11 X 8.5) or A3 (11 X 17) paper on the paper feed tray
selected in the procedure 2).

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 25
(No. 2 paper feed tray) 10) When the adjustment pattern comes virtually to the center by
* Front frame side the adjustment, perform the fine adjustment with the simula-
Loosen the paper guide fixing screw, and shift the paper guide tion. (90cpm machine only)
position back and forth. Enter the adjustment value, and press [EXECUTE] button.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
Paper guide When the adjustment value is increased, the image is shifted
to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is
decreased, the image is shifted to the rear frame side.
A change in the adjustment value by 1 corresponds to a shift
by about 0.1mm.
11) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
rect position.
Measure the void area sizes of the adjustment pattern on the
front edge and the rear edge, and check that the sizes satisfy
all the following conditions.

RV 2.5mm or less

Paper guide fixing screw


ȚȸȑȸǬǤȉ‫ܭ׍‬ȓǹ

* Rear frame side


Loosen the paper guide fixing screw, and shift the paper guide
position back and forth.

Paper guide fixing screw


ȚȸȑȸǬǤȉ‫ܭ׍‬ȓǹ

FV 2.5mm or less

Paper guide
RV: REAR VOID AREA
FV: FRONT VOID AREA
(No. 3 paper feed tray / No. 4 paper feed tray) RV + FV +/- 5.0mm
Loosen the paper feed tray base plate fixing screw, and shift RV = 2.5mm or less
the paper feed tray base plate position back and forth. FV = 2.5mm or less
Perform the procedures 10 and 11 until the above conditions
are satisfied.
Paper feed tray
ȚȸȑȸǬǤȉ‫ܭ׍‬ȓǹ
base plate fixing screw

Paper feed tray base plate

8) Press [EXECUTE] key.


The adjustment pattern is printed.
9) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
rect position.
Perform the procedures 7 thru 9 until the adjustment pattern
comes virtually at the center.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 26
Sim. 50-10.

Item Display item Item content Setting range Default value


A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio 60-140 116
B MAIN-MFT (Print off center) Manual paper feed adjustment value 1-99 52
C MAIN-CS1 (Print off center) Tray 1 adjustment value 1-99 60
D MAIN-CS2 (Print off center) Tray 2 adjustment value 1-99 60
E MAIN-CS3 (Print off center) Tray 3 adjustment value 1-99 60
F MAIN-CS4 (Print off center) Tray 4 adjustment value 1-99 60
G MAIN-LCC (Print off center) LCC adjustment value 1-99 60
H MAIN-ADU (Print off center) ADU adjustment value 1-99 42
I SUB-MFT (Lead edge adjustment registration motor ON timing) Manual paper feed 1-99 44
adjustment value
J SUB-CS12 (Lead edge adjustment registration motor ON timing) Tray 1 adjustment value 1-99 44
K SUB-CS34 (Lead edge adjustment registration motor ON timing) Desk adjustment value 1-99 44
L SUB-LCC (Lead edge adjustment registration motor ON timing) LCC/ adjustment value 1-99 44
M SUB-ADU (Lead edge adjustment registration motor ON timing) ADU adjustment value 1-99 44
N MULTI COUNT Number of print 1-999 1
O PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2(CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
P DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection YES 0-1 0 1(NO)
NO NO 1

ADJ 9 Print/scan image lead edge Section Adjustment item


Adjust
ment
position, off-center, menu
Scanner OC Scan image lead edge OC ADJ
magnification ratio adjustment reference position
(Automatic adjustment) adjustment
Scan image off-center
The following adjustment items can be automatically performed adjustment
with Sim. 50-28. Sub scanning direction scan
* ADJ 3B Print image magnification ratio manual adjustment (Main image magnification ratio
scanning direction) adjustment
DSPF SIDE1 Scan image lead edge SPF ADJ
* ADJ 3C Print image lead edge void area manual adjustment/
(Front reference position (DSPF)
Front-rear void area, rear edge void area manual adjustment
surface) adjustment
* ADJ 7B Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio Scan image off-center
adjustment (Document table mode) adjustment
* ADJ 7D Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio Sub scanning direction scan
adjustment (DSPF mode) image magnification ratio
adjustment
* ADJ8A Scan image off-center manual adjustment
SIDE2 Scan image lead edge
(Document table mode)
(Back reference position
* ADJ8B Scan image off-center manual adjustment surface) adjustment
(DSPF mode) Scan image off-center
* ADJ 10C Copy mode image loss adjustment (DSPF mode) adjustment
Sub scanning direction scan
Automatic adjustment items of Sim. 50-28 and the correspond-
image magnification ratio
ing manual adjustment items, simulation
adjustment
Engine - Main scanning direction print BK-MAG
Automatic adjustment Corresponding manual
image magnification ratio ADJ
items adjustment items, simulation
adjustment
OC ADJ (Corresponding to ADJ8A)
MFT Print image lead edge SETUP/
(Corresponding to ADJ7B)
position adjustment PRINT
(Corresponding to Sim.50-1 RRCA)
Print image off-center ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ (Corresponding to ADJ3B)
adjustment
SPF ADJ (Corresponding to ADJ9C)
CS1,2,3,4 Print image lead edge
(Corresponding to ADJ8B)
position adjustment
(Corresponding to ADJ7E)
Print image off-center
SETUP/PRINT ADJ (Corresponding to ADJ3C)
adjustment
(Corresponding to ADJ8A
ADU Print image lead edge
(Sim 50-28 mode menu) position adjustment
Print image off-center
adjustment
LCC Print image lead edge
position adjustment
Print image off-center
adjustment

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 27
9-A Print image magnification ratio automatic
CLOSE
adjustment (Main scanning direction) TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28

AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE


(Corresponding to ADJ3B) BK-MAG 㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕
1) Enter the Sim. 50-28 mode.

TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE

AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE

OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ

SPF ADJ SETUP/PRINT ADJ REPRINT RESCAN RETRY DATA OK


RESULT DATA
7) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.

9-B Print image off-center automatic


adjustment (Each paper feed tray, duplex
1/1
mode) (Corresponding to ADJ3C/8C)
2) Press [BK-MAG ADJ] button to select [BK-MAG ADJ] mode.
3) Select the paper feed tray with A4/11 X 8.5 paper init with the 1) Enter the Sim. 50-28 mode.
paper feed tray button. (A4/11 X 8.5)
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE

SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE


TEST
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ
MFT CS1 CS2 CS3 SPF ADJ SETUP/PRINT ADJ

CS4 RESULT DATA

1/1

EXECUTE 1/1
2) Press [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] button to select [SETUP/PRINT
ADJ] mode.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Press [ALL] button to select [ALL] mode.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (No need to
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE
take care of the setting direction.)
Note: Set the adjustment pattern so that it fits precisely with LEAD OFFSET

the document guide. ALL

1/1

Note:
The adjustment can be performed individually in the [LEAD]
mode or in the [OFFSET] mode.
LEAD: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
OFFSET: Print image off-center adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, the above two adjustments are per-
formed simultaneously.

6) Press [EXECUTE] key.


The automatic adjustment is executed.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 28
4) Select the paper feed tray to be adjusted.
9-C Scan image magnification ratio automatic
adjustment (Sub scanning direction)
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.50̆28 CLOSE
(Document table mode)
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE (Corresponding to ADJ7B)
MFT  CS1 CS2  CS3

CS4 ADU  LCC1  LCC2


Scan image off-center automatic
 LCC3
adjustment (Document table mode)
(Corresponding to ADJ8A)

Scan image lead edge reference position


automatic adjustment
(Document table mode)
(Corresponding to SIM 50-1 RRCA)
1) Enter the Sim. 50-28 mode.

EXECUTE 1/1 TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE

AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE

5) Press [EXECUTE] key. OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ

The adjustment pattern is printed. SPF ADJ SETUP/PRINT ADJ


RESULT DATA
6) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (No need to
take care of the setting direction.)
Note: Set the adjustment pattern so that it fits precisely with
the document guide.

1/1

2) Press [OC ADJ] button to select [OC ADJ] mode.


3) Select the paper feed tray with A4/11 X 8.5 paper in it with the
paper feed tray button. (A4/11 X 8.5)

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.50̆28 CLOSE

AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE

MFT  CS1 CS2  CS3

CS4 ADU  LCC1  LCC2

 LCC3

7) Press [EXECUTE] key.


The automatic adjustment is executed.

0
TEST SIMULATION NO.50̆28 CLOSE

AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE


PRINT LEAD          㧦MFT㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕 CS1/CS2㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕 ADU㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕
EXECUTE 1/1
   㧦CS3/ CS4㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕LCC㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕

PRINTER OFFSET       㧦MFT㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕 CS1㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕 CS2㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕 ADU㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕

 㧦CS3㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕 CS4㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕 LCC㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.


The adjustment pattern is printed.

REPRINT RESCAN RETRY DATA OK

8) Press [OK] button.


The adjustment result becomes valid.
Perform the procedures 4 thru 7 for each paper feed tray.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 29
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (No need to
Item Content
take care of the setting direction.)
SIDE1 SPF adjustment front surface
Note: Set the adjustment pattern so that it fits precisely with
SIDE2 SPF adjustment back surface
the document guide.
ALL SPF adjustment front/rear surfaces

TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE

AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE

SIDE1 SIDE2
ALL

1/1

4) Select the paper feed tray with A4/11 X 8.5 paper in it with the
paper feed tray button. (A4/11 X 8.5)

0
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. SIMULATION NO.50̆28 CLOSE
TEST
The automatic adjustment is executed. AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE

MFT  CS1 CS2  CS3

CS4 ADU  LCC1  LCC2


TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE
 LCC3
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT SERVICE
OC : LEAD: ** (**) OFFSET: **(**) SUB**: (**)

REPRINT RESCAN RETRY DATA OK

EXECUTE 1/1
7) Press [OK] button.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
9-D Scan image magnification ratio automatic 6) Set the adjustment pattern on the DSPF tray in either direction.
adjustment (Sub scanning direction ) (Placing the adjustment pattern)
(DSPF mode) (Corresponding to ADJ7D) Placing manner of the adjustment pattern differs depending on
the adjustment mode. Refer to the description below and set
the adjustment pattern properly.
Scan image off-center automatic
adjustment (DSPF mode) Adjustment mode Placing the adjustment pattern
(Corresponding to ADJ8B) SIDE1 or first time of ALL Place with the adjustment pattern print
(Front surface mode adjustment) surface facing up.
SIDE2 or second time of ALL Place with the adjustment pattern print
Scan image lead edge reference position (Back surface mode adjustment) surface facing down.
automatic adjustment (DSPF mode)
(Corresponding to SIM 50-6)
1) Enter the Sim. 50-28 mode.

TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE

AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE

OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ

SPF ADJ SETUP/PRINT ADJ


RESULT DATA

1/1

2) Press [SPF ADJ] button to select [SPF ADJ] mode.


3) Select an item (front, rear, both) to be adjusted.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 30
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The automatic adjustment selected in the procedure 3) is exe- ADJ 10 Image position, image loss,
cuted.
If [ALL] mode is selected in the procedure 3), perform the pro-
and void area adjustment
cedures 6 and 7 again.
10-A Copy mode image loss void area
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE
adjustment (Document table mode)
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
SPF (SIDE1)  LEAD** (**) OFFSET: ** (**) SUB: ** (**)

SPF (SIDE2) 㧦LEAD** (**) OFFSET: ** (**) SUB: ** (**)


* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When the LSU is replace or removed.
* When the resist roller section is disassembled.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
REPRINT RESCAN RETRY DATA OK
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
8) Press [OK] button.
NOTE:
The adjustment result becomes valid.
Before execution of this adjustment, the following adjustment must
have been completed:
* ADJ3A Print engine image distortion adjustment (LSU parallel-
ism adjustment)
* ADJ3B Print image magnification ratio manual adjustment (Main
scanning direction)
* ADJ3C Print image lead edge void area manual adjustment/
Front-rear void area, rear edge void area manual adjustment
* ADJ8C Print image off-center, lead edge position manual adjust-
ment (Software adjustment)
Standard image loss, void area

LV : Lead edge void area 4.0 +/- 1.0mm


TV : Rear edge void area 2.0- 5.0mm
LV+TV : 8mm or less
FV+RV: FRONT/REAR void area 4.0 +/- 2.0mm
LIL : Lead edge image loss 4.0 +/- 1.0mm

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 31
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown below. 4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.
Set the scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
and the scale tip is in close contact with the document guide copy mode. Make a copy at 100% and at 200% in the docu-
plate. ment mode.
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale tip If the lead edge section from 3.0mm position of scale in the
can be seen. copy images of both 100% and 200% is not copied, the adjust-
ment value of RRCA is proper.
If the above conditions are not satisfied, change the adjust-
ment value of RRCA to adjust.
(Adjust the adjustment value of RRCA so that the lead edge
section from 3.0mm position of scale is not copied for different
10
copy magnification ratios.)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

Scale image 3.0mm position


Paper lead
edge

100%
2) Enter the Sim. 50-1 mode. 5mm 10mm
3) Set the items RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.

Setting
Item Display/Item Content Default 200%
range
5mm 10mm
Lead edge A RRCA Document lead 10 - 99 50
adjustment (ADJUSTM edge reference
value ENT) position (OC)
B RRCB Resist Main 1 - 99 50
(ADJUSTM motor ON unit 5) Lead edge image loss adjustment
ENT) timing paper The lead edge image loss is set to the standard level if the fol-
adjustment feed lowing adjustment items are adjusted to the default values.
C RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
If they are not the standard level or are set to optional values,
(ADJUSTM
ENT)
change and adjust them.
Image loss D LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30 Paper lead edge
quantity (IMAGE loss quantity setting
setting LOSS)
value E SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
(IMAGE quantity setting Copy area Maginification ratio: 400%
LOSS)
Void F DEN-A Print lead edge void 1 - 99 35
quantity (VOID) quantity adjustment 1 2 3 4
setting G DEN-B Print rear edge void 1 - 99 35 5mm 10mm
(VOID) quantity adjustment
H FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 35
REAR quantity adjustment Void area: 3.0mm Image loss: 3.0mm
(VOID)
Adjust Standard
Display
Content ment Default adjustment
/Item
range value
LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 - 99 30 3.0 +/-
adjustment image loss 1.0mm
adjustment
SIDE Side image 0 - 99 20 2.0 +/-
loss 2.0mm
adjustment
To change the adjustment value, enter the desired adjustment
value and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
becomes greater.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the image loss
becomes smaller.
(Change rate for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 32
(In the case of the automatic adjustment)
10-B Document scan position adjustment
1) Make a copy on A4 (11 X 8.5) paper in the sky shot mode.
(Scanner scanning position adjustment (All black copy is made.)
when scanning the front surface in the 2) Set the copy paper so that the all black surface of the copy
DSPF mode) paper is overlapped with the document guide at the left edge of
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: the document table, and close the DSPF unit.
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced. NOTE:
* The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced. If copy paper is not set in a overlapped state, the SPF scan-
* The scan control PWB has been replaced. ning position is shifted by the lead edge void quantity.
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the DSPF section is disassembled.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced.
This adjustment is used to adjust the scanner reading position
when scanning the front surface in the DSPF mode.
If this adjustment is improper, the scanner stop position is shifted to
the specified position, and a shade of the document table may be
copied in the lead edge section of the scan image in the DSPF
(front surface) mode.
(Note)
After completion of this adjustment, be sure to perform the “ADJ9C
3) Enter the Sim. 53-8 mode.
copy mode image loss adjustment (DSPF mode)”.
(The value of "SIDE2" in Sim. 50-6 is adjusted.) 4) Press the auto button to select the auto mode.
Make a copy of white paper in the DSPF (front surface) mode, and 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
check to confirm that no shade is printed in the lead edge section of [EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and the scanner reading
the copy image. position adjustment when scanning the front surface in the
DSPF mode is automatically performed.
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment value is dis-
played and [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
Papar lead edge When an error occurs, MEASUREMENT DISTANCE/RRCA
"--" is displayed.
Image area In this case, the adjustment is made in the manual mode.
6) Select the copy mode, and check the adjustment result.
Repeat the procedures 2 thru 4 until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
Shadow image of SPF
10-C Copy mode image loss adjustment
(DSPF mode)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
If the printed image at the leading edge of the copied image con- * The MFP control PWB has been replaced.
tains a shadow of the original table, then do the following steps. * The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced.
(In the case of the manual adjustment) * The scan control PWB has been replaced.
1) Enter the Sim. 53-8 mode. * The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced.
2) Press the manual button to select the manual mode. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button. * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner reading * U2 trouble has occurred.
position when scanning the front surface in the DSPF mode is
* When the DSPF section is disassembled.
shifted further from the scanner home position.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the scanner read-
ing position when scanning the front surface in the DSPF NOTE:
mode is shifted by 0.1mm. Before execution of this adjustment, the following adjustment must
4) Select the copy mode, and check the adjustment result. have been completed:
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is * ADJ3A Print engine image distortion adjustment (LSU parallel
obtained. ism adjustment)
* ADJ3B Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (Main
scanning direction)
* ADJ3C Print engine image off-center adjustment
* ADJ8C Printer mode lead edge void area adjustment/ Print
engine front/rear void area and rear edge void area adjustment
* ADJ9A Copy mode image loss/ void area adjustment (Document
table mode)

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 33
Standard image loss, void area 2) Use the DSPF to make a duplex copy at 100%. Check to con-
firm that the lead edge image loss is 3.0 1.0mm on the front
LV : Lead edge void area 3.0 +/- 1.0mm
surface and the back surface.
TV : Rear edge void area 2.0 +/- 1.0mm
Press [CLOSE] button in the simulation mode to jump to the
FV/RV : FRONT/REAR void area 2.0 +/- 2.0mm
copy mode. Make a duplex copy and check the adjustment
FV+RV : 4.0mm or less
result.
LIL : Lead edge image loss 3.0 +/- 1.0mm

If an acceptable result is not obtained, do the following steps.


3) Change the adjustment values of SIDE1 and SIDE2 and make
an adjustment.
(Change the adjustment values of SIDE1 and SIDE2, and
press [OK] key.)
1) Enter the Sim. 50-6 mode. SIDE1: DSPF front surface lead edge scanning position
adjustment value
Display/Item Content Default
SIDE2: DSPF back surface lead edge scanning position
A SIDE1 Front surface 50
document scanning adjustment value
start position (CCD) (Change rate for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
B SIDE2 Back surface 50 Repeat the procedures 2 and 3 until a satisfactory result is
document scanning obtained.
start position (CCD)
(Rear edge image loss adjustment)
C Image loss LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 20
quantity (SIDE1) edge image loss 1) Use the DSPF at the magnification ratio of 100%, and make a
setting SIDE1 quantity setting duplex copy. Check to confirm that the rear edge image loss is
D FRONT_REAR Front surface side 20 2.0 1.0mm on the front surface and the back surface.
(SIDE1) image loss quantity Press [CLOSE] button in the simulation mode to jump to the
setting
copy mode. Make a duplex copy and check the adjustment
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 30
result.
(SIDE1) edge image loss
quantity setting
F mage loss LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 30
quantity (SIDE2) edge image loss
setting SIDE2 quantity setting
G FRONT_REAR Back surface side 20
(SIDE2) image loss quantity
setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 20
(SIDE2) edge image loss
quantity setting
(Leading edge image loss adjustment) TIL
1) Adjust the lead edge image loss adjustment values TV
(LEAD_EDGE) of the front and back surfaces as shown below:
(Standard setting values)
C: LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1) : 20
F: LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2) : 30 If the result is not acceptable, do the following steps.
Set "C: LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)" and "F: LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)" 2) Change the adjustment value of TRAIL_EDGE and make an
to 30. (Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] adjustment.
button. (Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL_EDGE with 10-key, and
press [OK] button.)
Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is
obtained.
(FRONT/REAR frame image loss adjustment)
1) Set the adjustment values of the front surface and the back
surface to 20.
(Enter 20 for the adjustment values of FRONT_REAR (SIDE1)
and FRONT_REAR (SIDE2), and press [OK] key.)

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 34
10-D Image send mode, image loss adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When shading is copied on the scanned image in the image send
mode.
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced.
* The scan control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced.
* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled.
* The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the DSPF section is disassembled.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced.
1) Use A3 (11X17) paper and make a chart shown below.

Write arrow marks on the four sides of the front surface and
the back surface.
2) Scan the chart made in the procedure 1) by the SCAN to USB
mode, SCAN to PC mode, and SCAN to e-MAIL mode in the
following modes.
* Original table mode
* DSPF mode (Duplex mode)
3) Open the scanned image file on PC, and check every edge of
the arrow marks to confirm that the image loss is "0" .
(If there is no void on the arrow marks, it is judged that the
image loss is "0.")
If the above conditions are not satisfied, perform the following
procedure.
4) Enter the Sim. 50-27 mode.
5) Press [SCANNER] button, and select the image send mode
and the image loss adjustment mode.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 35
6) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button

Display/Item Content Setting range Default


Image send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)
mode image B quantity setting FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)
loss adjustment C OC TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)
(Except for FAX, D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)
copy mode) quantity setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1)
E Front surface side image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)
H quantity setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 0 (0mm)

7) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
becomes greater. (Change rate for a change in the adjustment
value: 0.1mm/step)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.

1) Use A3 (11 X 17) paper to make a chart as shown below:


10-E FAX send mode image loss adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When a shade is copied on the scanned image in the FAX send
mode.
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced.
* The scan control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the DSPF section is disassembled.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced.
NOTE:
Normally the adjustment values are default values and there is no Write arrow marks on the four sides of the front surface and
need to adjust them. When, however, an image defect or a shade is the back surface.
generated on the received FAX, this adjustment must be per-
2) Send FAX of the chart image made in the procedure 1) in the
formed.
following modes.
However, check the printable reproduction area on the receiving
* Original table mode
FAX side and the setting conditions before performing this adjust-
ment. * DSPF mode (Duplex mode)
3) Check the received FAX image to confirm that the image loss
is "0" at every edge of the arrow marks.
(If there is no edge defect on the arrow marks, it is judged that
the image loss is "0.")
If the above conditions are not satisfied, perform the following
procedure.
4) Press FAX button to select the FAX send mode and the image
loss adjustment mode.
5) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button

Display/Item Content Setting range Default


FAX send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 30 (3mm)
mode image B quantity setting FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss quantity setting 0-100 20 (2mm)
loss C OC TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 20 (2mm)
adjustment D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 20 (2mm)
E quantity setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss quantity setting 0-100 20 (2mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 30 (3mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 30 (3mm)
H quantity setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss quantity setting 0-100 20 (2mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss quantity setting 0-100 20 (2mm)
6) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
becomes greater.
(Change rate for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 36
To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
ADJ 11 Gray balance/density and the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
0326FC11). Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/
adjustment Printed Photo mode (Manual).
(1) Note before execution of the gray balance/density In addition, all the gray balance adjustments in the user adjustment
adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
* Requisite conditions before execution of the gray balance/den- Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
sity adjustment In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
Before execution of the gray balance/density adjustment, check the following conditions.
to insure that the adjustments which affect the gray balance/den-
sity have been completed properly. (Black-and-white copy)
(Though the following items affect the gray balance/density, Patch 2 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
there is no need to adjust them frequently. When, however, a SHARP GRAY CHART
trouble occurs, they must be checked and adjusted.) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

1) The following items must be adjusted properly.

Job
Adjustment item Sim
No
ADJ High voltage ADJ Main charger grid voltage 8-2 Patch 3 is copied.

1 value 1A adjustment Patch 1 is not copied.

adjustment ADJ Developing bias voltage 8-1


1B adjustment
ADJ Transfer current and voltage 8-6
1C adjustment
ADJ Developing unit ADJ Developing doctor gap
2 adjustment 2A adjustment
ADJ Developing roller main pole
2B position adjustment
ADJ Toner density control reference 25-2
2C value setting
ADJ Scan image focus adjustment 48-1
6
ADJ Gray balance/ ADJ Scanner calibration (CCD 63-3
11 density 11A calibration)
adjustment
Note for the gray balance/density check and adjustments
When setting the adjustment pattern on the document table in the
automatic gray balance adjustment procedures, place 5 sheets of
white paper on the adjustment pattern in order to prevent back
copying and adverse effects of paper wrinkles as far as possible.
(2) Relationship between the servicing job contents and the
gray balance/density check and adjustment
Note that the jobs before and after execution of the gray balance/
density check and adjustment depend on the machine status and
the servicing conditions.
Follow the flowchart of the gray balance/density adjustment proce-
dures depending on the actual conditions.
There are following four, major cases.
1) When installing (When a printer option is installed)
2) When a periodic maintenance is performed.
3) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
(When a consumable part is replaced.)
4) When an installation, a repair, or inspection is performed.
(Without replacement of a consumable part)

(3) Copy gray balance and density check


NOTE: Before checking the copy gray balance and density, be
sure to execute the following jobs.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
Method 1
Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ), and check
that they are proper.
Note for checking the density

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 37
Monochrome copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)

Display/Item Adjustment items


1 There are 12 void areas. ADJ3-A to C Sim50-28
2 The resolution of 5.0 (5 points) Check the dirtof the OC glass
can be seen. Clean the OC glass/mirror of
the scanner
ADJ11-D12
3 The color difference in gray bal- Sim61-11
ance between the F and th sides ADJ11-B Sim46-74
is not so great. Copy/Printer color balance and density adjustment
4 There are no white and black Clean the mirror of the LSU/
streaks. Main Charger/ the mirror of
the scanner
5 The background density is not so ADJ11-B Sim46-74
light. Copy/Printer gray balance and density adjustment
6 The black low-density gradation is ADJ11-B Sim46-74
copied slightly. Copy/Printer color balance and density adjustment

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 38
Void Void

Resolution Resolution

Density difference between the F and the R sides.


No white and black streaks

Resolution

Void Void

Low-density gradation

Background density

Resolution Resolution

Void Void

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 39
(4) Printer gray balance/density check
NOTE: Before checking the copy gray balance and the density, be
sure to execute the following procedures in advance.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* The half-tone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26)
Method 1
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.

Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
print test pattern is printed.

If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
method using the SIT chart.
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed. NOTE: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document
table.

11-A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.


This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: 2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
* When the CCD unit is replaced. The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment,
* When a U2 trouble is occurred.
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
NOTE: Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FC
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Z1) is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet
rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag (such
11-A (1) as a dark file) and store in a dark place of low temperature
CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) and low humidity.
(Document table mode)
(1) Note before adjustment 11-A (2)
* Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens sur- Shading adjustment (Calibration) (DSPF
face are free from dirt and dust. mode)
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.) 1) Open the DSPF document scan section, and insert the white
* Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of the reference adjustment sheet (UKOG-0333FCZZ).
SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are free from
dirt and scratches.
The white reference adjustment sheet (UKOG-0333FCZZ)
If they are dirty, clean them.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
(2) Adjustment procedures
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
ment table.
Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
the left side.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 40
2) Close the DSPF paper exit section.
3) Enter the SIM 63-2 mode.
4) Select [DSPF SHADING].


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6+$',1*(;(&87,21
6+$',1*(;(&87,1*

Push the lower door lock


release lever.

2&6+$',1* '63)6+$',1* (;(&87( 

Open the Lower door


unit 5) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and shading
is started.
* During execution, "SHADING EXECUTING..." is displayed.
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during execution, the
operation is interrupted.
* When shading is completed normally, [EXECUTE] key
returns to the normal display and "COMPLETED" is dis-
played.
<Descriptions of keys>
Display Content
OC OC analog correction level correction, and shading
SHADING correction data making (Document table mode)
DSPF DSPF analog correction level correction, and shading
SHADING correction data making (SPF mode)
<Result display>
Display Content
Insert the white reference COMPLETE Normal completion
jig like the picture, and set . ERROR Abnormal completion
INCOMPLETE Incomplete, interruption

Insert so that the rear of


the white reference jig is in
parallel with the lower door
paper guide .

* When inserting the white reference adjustment sheet, insert


it straight along the guide on the rear frame until the paper
detection actuator can be seen through the cut-out section
of the white reference adjustment sheet.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 41
2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode.
11-A (3)
CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) 
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
(DSPF mode) 7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
2&
This adjustment is required in the following cases: 

* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced. 


* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the DSPF control PWB is replaced. &&&555

000***
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. <<<%%%

(1) Note before adjustment


1) Check to insure that there is no dirt or dust on the DSPF scan-
ning glass, the mirror, and the lens surface. (If there is, clean it
% * 5 '63) (;(&87(
2& 
with alcohol.)
2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of
3) When a color button is selected, the adjustment value of the
the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are selected color is displayed.
free from dirt and scratches. If they are dirty, clean them. If
* When [B] (Blue), [G] (Green), or [R] (Red) button is selected,
they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
the selected button is highlighted and the adjustment value
NOTE:
of the selected color is displayed.
Since the SIT chart is easily discolored by sunlight (especially
* Only one color button can be selected, and the selected but-
ultraviolet rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag ton is highlighted. In the initial state, [B] is selected.
such as a clear file) and store in a dark place of low tempera-
ture and low humidity.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
2&





&&&555
000***

<<<%%%

% * 5 '63) 2& 

4) When [DSPF] button is pressed, it is highlighted, and the color


automatic adjustment execution screen is displayed.
(2) Adjustment procedures
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) 
face-down in the DSPF paper feed tray. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
6(77+(&+$57213/$7(1$1'728&+>(;(&87(@

(;(&87( 

If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CIS gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 42
5) Press [EXECUTE] button and it is highlighted and the color
auto adjustment is executed. 11-B Copy/Printer gray balance and density
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during the automatic adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
adjustment, the automatic adjustment is interrupted. (Basic adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
 * When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17 replaced.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
12:&+$573$7&+5($',1*

* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.


* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
(;(&87( 
a. General
6) After normal completion, the result of calculation is displayed SIM46-74 is used to perform the automatic copy gray balance and
in the initial screen. density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the automatic printer gray bal-
* When an error occurs in execution, the following screen is dis- ance and density adjustment (SIM67-24) continuously.
played. When [CA] key is pressed, the simulation is terminated. Since it is desirable to perform the copy gray balance adjustment
When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the display returns (automatic adjustment) before the automatic printer gray balance
to the sub number entry screen. and density adjustment, it is advisable to perform the adjustment in
this mode.
 This mode is also advisable to effectively perform both of the auto-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( matic copy gray balance and density adjustment (SIM46-24) and
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
6&$11(502725,61275($'< the automatic printer gray balance and density adjustment (SIM67-
24). It saves considerable time when compared with performing
each of the auto copy/printer gray balance and the density adjust-
ment individually.
The gray balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
adjust the density automatically.
When this adjustment is executed, the gray balance adjustments of
all the copy/printer modes are revised.

(;(&87( 

* When an error occurs in the automatic adjustment, all the error


patch numbers are displayed. When [RESULT] button is
pressed, the display returns to the initial screen. (The previous
value is displayed)


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
6$035,1*'$7$81),7





3/($6(&+(&.7+(&+$57$1'3/$7(1*/$66

% * 5 (;(&87(
5(68/7 

* When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-


played. When [RESULT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the initial screen. (The calculation result of normal completion is
displayed.)

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 43
b. Adjustment procedures
(Auto gray balance adjustment by the serviceman)

Copy/printer gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)


(SIM46-74) procedure flowchart

Start

Execute ADJ11B Copy gray balance and density/Printer gray balance and density
adjustment (automatic adjustment). (SIM46-74)

(Copy gray balance and density adjustment (automatic adjustment))

Enter the SIM46-74 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection)

Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)

Set the adjustment pattern on the document table and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.)

Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*3)

(Printer gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment))

Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)

Set the adjustment pattern on the document table and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.)

Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*3)

Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone image correction is automatically
performed.)

Press [EXECUTE] key. (Execute the halftone image correction.)

Cancel SIM46-74.

Check the copy gray balance and density adjustment result.

Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text


/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy gray balance and density.

Use SIM46-16 to print the gray balance check pattern, and check the patch gray *1:
balance and density. If the initial setting of the
halftone image correction is
not properly adjusted,
satisfactory gray balance and
Execute ADJ11C(2) (Copy gray balance and density cannot be obtained. In
Are the gray balance and density NO
density adjustment) (Manual adjustment). this case, check the print
at the specified level? engine for any problems.
(SIM46-16/44-21) (*2)
*2:
YES If satisfactory gray balance and
density are not obtained with
ADJ11C(2) (Copy gray balance
Check the printer gray balance and density adjustment result with the self print and density adjustment) (Manual
check pattern. adjustment) (SIM46-16/44-21),
check the print engine for any
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print problems.
check pattern, and check the printer
gray balance and density. *3:
If there is any streak or unclear
copy on the printed check
pattern, check the print engine
Execute ADJ11E(2) (Printer gray balance and for any problems.
Are the gray balance and density NO
density adjustment) (Manual adjustment).
at the specified level?
(SIM67-25)

YES

End

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 44
1) Enter the SIM46-74 mode. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. The copy gray balance adjustment is automatically executed
The high density process control is performed, and the copy and prints the gray balance check patch image.
gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
(A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.) tern, check the print engine for any problems.

Low High
density density

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q

3) Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
procedure 2) on the document table. The printer gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed
Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the out. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the gray patch selected.)
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time,
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed gray patch image
(adjustment pattern).

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 45
6) Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the 8) The initial setting menu of the halftone image correction is dis-
procedure 5) on the document table. played. Press [OK] key.
Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the The initial setting of the halftone image correction is per-
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the gray patch formed.
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time, 9) Wait until [EXECUTE] key is displayed. When it is displayed,
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed gray patch image press it.
(adjustment pattern). The halftone image correction is performed.
10) When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the
adjustment operation is completed.
Cancel SIM46-74.
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes valid only when the both
adjustments in the copy mode and in the printer mode are
completed.
For example, if the copy gray balance adjustment (auto-
matic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is can-
celed, the adjustment result is invalid.

11) Check the copy gray balance and density.


(Refer to the item of the copy gray balance and density check.)
When the gray balance and the density are unsatisfactory after
the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in pro-
cedure 4), execute the manual gray balance adjustment
(ADJ11C (2)).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual gray balance adjustment (ADJ
11C (2)).
12) Check the printer gray balance and density.
(Refer to the item of the printer gray balance and density
check.)
If a satisfactory result on the gray balance and the density is
7) Press [EXECUTE] key. not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man-
When the gray balance is customized with the manual gray ual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 11E (2)).
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's Also when the service target is selected in procedure 7) to exe-
request and the gray balance is registered as the service tar- cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
get with SIM 67-27, if the gray balance is adjusted to that gray obtained, perform the manual gray balance adjustment (ADJ
balance, select the [SERVICE] target. 11E (2)).
The printer gray balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically If the gray balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even
performed and the gray balance check patch image is printed after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
out. may be another cause.
If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat- Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
tern, check the print engine for any problems. repeat the adjustment from the beginning.

.QYFGPUKV[ *KIJFGPUKV[

# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3

Უ6JGOCZFGPUKV[UGEVKQPKUPQVDNWTTGF

Უ2CVEJ#QT$KUXGT[UNKIJN[EQRKGF

Უȷ6JGRCVEJFGPUKV[KUKFGPVKECNDGVYGGPRCVEJGUQTPQVTGXGTUGF
ȷ6JGRCVEJFGPUKV[KUEJCPIGFITCFWCNN[

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 46
11-C Copy quality adjustment (Basic adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.

11-C (1)
Copy gray balance and density adjustment
(Automatic adjustment)
a. General
The gray balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density automatically.
When this adjustment is executed, the gray balance adjustments of
all the copy modes are revised.

There are following two modes in the auto gray balance adjust-
ment.
1) Auto gray balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24 is
used.)
2) Auto gray balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The gray balance target is the service target.)
The auto gray balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the copy gray balance is lost for some reason, the user can
use this gray balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
work effectively.
If the machine condition is dramatically changed, a fatal prob-
lem occurs, or the normal gray targets cannot be obtained, ser-
vice must recalibrate the machine to specification.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 47
b. Adjustment procedure
(Auto gray balance adjustment by the serviceman)

Copy gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)


(SIM46-24) procedure flowchart

Start

Execute ADJ10C(1) Copy gray balance and density adjustment


(automatic adjustment).

Enter the SIM46-24 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.


(Automatic selection)

Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)

Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.


And press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is
automatically performed to print the check pattern.)

Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*2)

Press [OK] key, and the initial setting of the halftone image correction
is automatically performed. (*1)

Cancel SIM46-24

Check the gray balance and density adjustment result.

Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a


copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy gray bal-
ance and density.

Use SIM46-16 to print the gray balance check pattern, and check the
patch gray balance and density in the process gray. (If the gray bal-
ance is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is properly adjusted.)

Check that the initial setting of the halftone image correction was properly
performed. (*1)

Execute the initial setting of the halftone image correction.


(SIM44-21)

Execute the halftone image correction. (SIM44-26) *1:


If the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is not properly made, satisfactory
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) gray balance and density cannot be
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check obtained. In this case, check the print engine
the gray balance and density. for any problems.
*2:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the
printed check pattern, check the print engine
NO Are the gray balance and den- for any problems.
sity at the satisfactory level?

YES

End

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 48
1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is The copy gray balance adjustment is automatically executed
automatically selected.) to print the gray balance check patch image. Wait until the
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.

Low High
density density

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q

3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in pro- 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
cedure 2) on the document table. According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the
Place the printed patch image (adjustment pattern) paper on halftone image correction is performed.
the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are on NOTE:
the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
image (adjustment pattern) paper.
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
played. This operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
6) Check the gray balance and density.
(Refer to the item of the copy gray balance and density check.)
7) Use SIM44-26 to execute the halftone image correction.
(Forcible execution)
Enter the SIM44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
8) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
0326FC11) in the Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy
gray balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy gray
balance and density check.)
If the copy gray balance and density are not satisfactory, per-
form the following procedures.
9) Execute the initial setting of the halftone image correction.
(SIM 44-21)
10) Execute the halftone image correction. (Forcible execution)
(SIM44-26)
11) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-
0317FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check
the copy gray balance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy
gray balance and density check.)
Though the above procedures 9) - 11) are performed, the copy gray
balance and density are not in the specified range, there may be
another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 49
When the gray balance and the density are unsatisfactory after the
automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in procedure 11-C (2)
4), execute the manual adjustment (SIM46-16)(ADJ11C (2)). Copy gray balance and density adjustment
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 7) to execute (Manual adjustment)
the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not obtained, a. General
perform the manual gray balance adjustment (ADJ 11C(2)). The gray balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to adjust
the copy density. This is used at the following situation. When the
If the gray balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even result of auto adjustment described above is not existing within the
after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there range of reference. When a fine adjustment is required. When
may be another cause. there is request from the user for changing (customizing) the gray
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and balance.
repeat the adjustment from the beginning. This manual adjustment is executed only for the gray patch which
could not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the gray balance is improper, execute the automatic gray balance
adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better effi-
ciency.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 50
b. Adjustment procedure

Copy gray balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure


flowchart (SIM46-16)

Start

Execute ADJ11C(2) (Copy gray balance and density adjustment)


(Manual adjustment). (*1)
Enter the SIM46-16 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.
(Automatic selection)

Press [EXECUTE] key.


(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)

Refer to the printed adjustment check pattern.

Select a target adjustment level with the scroll key.

Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.

Press [EXECUTE] key.


(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)

Check the gray balance and density in the gray balance


check pattern.

Are the gray balance NO


and density at the sati-
sfactory level?

YE S
Cancel the SIM46-16 mode.

Perform the initial setting of the halftone image correction.


(SIM44-21)

Chec k the copy gray balance and density adjustment result with the
test char t. (*1)
Use the test char t (UK OG-0326FCZZ/UK OG-0326FC11)
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and chec k
the gray balance and density.

Are the gray balance NO


and density at the sati-
sfactor y level?

YE S

Chec k to confirm that the initial setting of the halftone image correction is
properly set. (*2)

Perform the initial setting of the halftone image correction.


(SIM44-21)

Perform the halftone image correction. (SIM44-26)

Use the test char t (UK OG-0326FCZZ/UK OG-0326FC11)


to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and chec k
the gray balance and density. *1:
If satisf actor y gray balance and density are not
obtained with the adjustment, chec k the print
engine for any problems .
NO Are the gray balance *2:
and density at the sati- If the initial setting of the halftone image
sfactor y level? correction is not properly adjusted, satisf actor y
gray balance and density cannot be obtained. In
YE S this case , chec k the print engine for any problems .

Set the SERVICE target for the automatic copy gray


balance adjustment. (SIM63-7)

End

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 51
1) Enter the SIM46-16 mode. 7) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the halftone image correction.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is (Forcible execution)
automatically selected.) Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
The gray balance adjustment pattern is printed. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the gray It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
balance is satisfactory. pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
If not, execute the following procedures. After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.

8) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-


0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) and a user's document accord-
ing to necessity in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and
check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the item of the
copy gray balance/density check.)
If the copy gray balance and density are not adjusted to the
specified level, there may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treat-
ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
from the beginning.
Low High
density density
NOTE:
If the gray balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register the
$M gray balance as the service target.
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3 If the gray balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
If the customized gray balance is registered as the service tar-
2) Patch C or D is very slightly copied. get, the automatic gray balance adjustment can be made in
3) The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
the next gray balance adjustment.
The patch density is changed gradually.

The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter


level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
When, however, the gray balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
gray balance stated above.
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic gray balance and
density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 4) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
5) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) and a user's document accord-
ing to necessity in the normal copy mode, the text/Printed
Photo mode (Manual) to check the adjustment result.
(Refer to the item of the copy gray balance/density check.)
6) Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the halftone
image correction.)
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
NOTE:
This procedure is to save the copy gray balance adjustment
data as the reference data for the halftone correction.
Immediately after execution of ADJ 11C (2) (Gray balance
adjustment, Manual) with SIM 46-16, be sure to execute this
procedure.
When ADJ 11C (1) (Gray balance adjustment, Auto) is exe-
cuted with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically exe-
cuted.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 52
11-D Copy / Image send / FAX image quality
adjustment (Individual adjustment)
a. General
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the basic adjust-
ments ADJ 11B and ADJ 11C or there is a request from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this adjustment.
In this adjustment, the adjustment result may be applied to the image send mode and the FAX mode as well as the copy mode.
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.

Copy MODE IMAGE SEND(SCAN) MODE


Monochrome Monochrome
Color mode
mode mode
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer
46-02 Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each monochrome copy mode)   - - - - - -
(separately for the low-density area and the high-density area) (No need to
adjust normally)
46-04 Color image send mode image density adjustment (for each mode) (No - -   - - - -
need to adjust normally)
46-05 Monochrome image send mode image density adjustment (for each mode) - - - -   - -
(No need to adjust normally)
46-08 Image send mode RGB gray balance adjustment (separately for the low- - -   - - - -
density area and the high-density area) (No need to adjust normally)
46-09 DSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment        -
(No need to adjust normally)
46-10 Copy gray balance, gamma adjustment (for each copy mode) (No need to   - - - - - -
adjust normally)
46-16 Monochrome copy density, gamma adjustment (for each monochrome   - - - - - -
copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
46-19 Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode document density  - - -  -  -
scanning operation (exposure operation) conditions setting
(Normally no need to set)
46-23 Copy high density image density reproduction setting   - - - - - -
(Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
46-24 Copy gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)   - - - - - -
46-32 Document low density image density reproduction adjustment in the  - - -  -  -
automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background density adjustment in the
scanning section)
46-37 Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document reproduction   - -    
adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
46-39 FAX send image sharpness adjustment - - - - - -  -
46-40 FAX send image density adjustment - - - - - -  -
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)
46-41 FAX send image density adjustment (Normal text mode) - - - - - -  -
46-42 FAX send image density adjustment (Fine text mode) - - - - - -  -
46-43 FAX send image density adjustment (Super fine mode) - - - - - -  -
46-44 FAX send image density adjustment (Ultra fine mode) - - - - - -  -
46-45 FAX send image density adjustment (600dpi mode) - - - - - -  -
46-46 FAX send image density adjustment (RGB_RIP) - - - - - -  -
46-47 Copy image, image send image, FAX send image (JPEG) compression        
ratio setting (Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
46-48 Copy output resolution setting   - - - - - -
46-51 Gamma manual adjustment for the copy mode heavy paper and the image   - - - - - -
process mode (dither) (No need to adjust normally)
46-52 Gamma default setting for the copy mode heavy paper and the image   - - - - - -
process mode (dither)
46-54 Copy gamma, gray balance adjustment for each dither (Automatic   - - - - - -
adjustment) (No need to adjust normally)
46-55 Dropout color setting - - - - -  - -
46-60 Color (Scan) mode sharpness adjustment (No need to adjust normally) - -  - - - - 
46-61 Area separation recognition level adjustment (No need to adjust normally)       - -
46-62 ACS, area separation, background image process, automatic exposure       - -
mode operation conditions setting (Normally unnecessary to the setting
change)
46-63 Copy/Scan low density image density adjustment (for each mode)       - -
(No need to adjust normally)
46-66 Watermark adjustment   - - - - - -
46-74 Printer/Copy gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)   - - - - - 
(Basic adjustment)
46-90 High-compression PDF image process operation setting (Normally - -   - - - -
unnecessary to the setting change)
46-91 Black text emphasis fine adjustment - -   - - - -

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 53
11-D (1) 11-D (2)
Monochrome copy density adjustment Copy gray balance, gamma adjustment
(for each monochrome copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
(separately for the low-density area and the This adjustment is used to execute the gray balance adjustment for
high-density area) each density level.
(No need to adjust normally) This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. * When there is necessity to change the gray balance and gamma
by each the copy mode individually.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When there is request from the user.
* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low
density and high density part at each copy density individually. 1) Enter the SIM 46-10 mode.
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key.
copy by each the copy mode individually. 3) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the key.
copy mode individually.
Density level Adjustment
* When there is request from the user. Item/Display Default
(Point) value range
1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode. A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
Setting D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
Display/Item Content Default
range E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50 F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
HIGH 1 - 99 50 G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50 H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
HIGH 1 - 99 50 I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
HIGH 1 - 99 50 K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
HIGH 1 - 99 50 O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
HIGH 1 - 99 50 Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
HIGH 1 - 99 50 increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
I TEXT Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 sity is decreased.
(COPY TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 adjusted.
PHOTO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
(COPY TO COPY) document) to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
printed out.
L LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 This adjustment pattern can be used to check the gray balance
and the density for each density level (point).
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
mode and change the adjustment value. Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
density is decreased.
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 54
11-D (3) 11-D (4)
Monochrome copy density, gamma Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX)
adjustment (for each monochrome copy mode document density scanning
mode) (No need to adjust normally) operation (exposure operation) conditions
This adjustment is used to execute the density adjustment for each setting (Normally no need to set)
density level in each monochrome copy mode. Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: ment density in monochrome auto copy mode.
* When it is required to change the gamma in each copy mode. When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu-
* When there is request from the user. ment, change the setting.
1) Enter the SIM 46-16 mode. This setting is required in the following cases.
2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll * When a proper density copy is not obtained in the monochrome
key. automatic copy mode.
* When a document with images near its lead edge is copied.
Density level Adjustment
Item/Display Default * When a document with colored background is copied.
(Point) value range
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500 1) Enter the SIM 46-19 mode.
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500 2) Set REALTIME, STOP or PRE-SCAN to adjustment item AE
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500 STOP COPY. For contents of each setting item, refer to below.
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500 Change the setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500 "PART", in some cases.
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500 Display/Item Content Set value Default
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500 AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 MODE2
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500 AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ PRESCA
Stop (for copy) STOP/PRESCAN N
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500 ON/OFF
Stop (for FAX)
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
Stop (for scanner) STOP/PRESCAN
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500 setting NORMAL
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
SHARP
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL FULL
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. PART
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is NOTE:
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
sity is decreased.
MODE2: Normal gamma
When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively
STOP:
adjusted.
Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of document,
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point decides the output image density according to the density of that
to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
part. (The output image density is constant at whole area.)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
REALTIME:
printed out.
Reads the density of width of the document one by one, decides
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by the output image density according to the density of each part of
referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more the document. (The output image density may be not constant at
practical to make a copy and check it. whole area.)
This adjustment pattern can be used to check the gray balance PRESCAN:
and the density for each density level (point). Once the densities on the document surface are scanned, the out-
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result. put image density is determined according to the average of the
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy scanned densities. (The output image density is even for all the
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result. surface.)Futhermore, automatically judge the classification of the
document and handle it with the most suitable document mode.
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the normal
copy mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the AE WIDTH FULL:
copy until a satisfactory result is obtained. Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7
mm (leading edge of document) x Document width. No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE
AE WIDTH PART:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7
mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width). No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 55
Operation in monochrome auto copy mode:
Magical view is adopted for monochrome auto copy and the densi- 11-D (5)
ties of the all surface of document are scanned. Only for FAX and Document low density image density
monochrome scan, when the density of the document of the read reproduction adjustment in the automatic
area is dark, output image density is decreased by control. monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
Document table/DSPF mode
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background
density in monochrome auto copy mode.
3 to 7mm
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.
* When there is request from the user.
1) Enter the SIM 46-32 mode.
AE WIDTH = FULL
2) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back-
ground and the low density image is decreased.
Document table mode
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
3 to 7mm A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
100mm
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
AE WIDTH = PART (SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
DSPF mode

3 to 7mm 11-D (6)


Copy/Scan low density image density
adjustment (for each mode)
(No need to adjust normally)
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den-
sity area in the copy/scanner mode.
100mm AE WIDTH = PART This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.
* When there is request from the user.
1) Enter the SIM 46-63 mode.
Document density detection area 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

Set
Display/Item Content Default
value
A COLOR PUSH:TEXT/ Text print 1-9 3
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
B COLOR PUSH:TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3
C COLOR PUSH: Printed photo 1-9 5
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
D COLOR PUSH: Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
E COLOR PUSH: Text/Photograph 1-9 3
TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
F COLOR PUSH: MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 56
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. 1) Enter the SIM 46-60 mode.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back- Setting Default
Item/Display Content
ground and the low density image is decreased. range value
A CPY SOFT Sharpness: SOFT 1-3 1 2
PUSH CENTER The CENTER 2 (CEN-
AUTO HIGH sharpness is HIGH 3 TER)
11-D (7) FILTER specified
Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color LEVEL when the
document
document reproduction adjustment
mode is
(No need to adjust normally) judged as A5
Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow or A6 by the
image when printing color document that included the red/yellow auto mode of
PUSH.
image in monochrome copy mode.
B B/W OFF Filter OFF 0-1 0 1(ON)
This adjustment is required in the following cases. COPY mixture,
ON ON 1
* When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red Register
image in case of making a color copy of the color document in select
monochrome copy mode. pattern,
Monochrome
* When there is request from the user.
copy
1) Enter the SIM 46-37 mode. C COLOR OFF Filter OFF 0-1 0 1(ON)
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. PUSH: ON mixture, ON 1
RGB Register
Setting Default select
Item/Display Content
range value pattern,
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 104 Color push
B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 817 D B/W OFF Filter OFF 0-1 0 1(ON)
C R-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 299 PUSH ON mixture, ON 1
Register
D G-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 587
select
pattern,
B-Ratio Gray making setting (B) (1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio)
Monochrome
B-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (B) push
(1000-R-Ratio RIP - G-Ratio RIP)
E B/W OFF Filter OFF 0-1 0 0(OFF)
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. PRINT ON mixture, ON 1
When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased, Register
select
copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment
pattern,
value is decreased, copy density of red image is increased.
Monochrome
When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased, print
copy density of yellow image is decreased. When the adjust-
3) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter
ment value is decreased, copy density of yellow image is process mode).
increased.
? Adjustment item A:
4) Press [OK] key.
When selecting AUTO, filter is selected according to dot pat-
5) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode
tern state automatically and adjusts sharpness.
(manual), check the copy.
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37
numeric value to decrease moire.
mode and change the adjustment value.
? Adjustment item B:
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained. Select HIGH to obtain clear images. Select SOFT to reduce
moire.
? Adjustment item C - J:
When setting ON, smoothness in the image shade part
11-D (8)
improves by applying soft filter. (asperity decreases)
Monochrome copy/color scan mode
4) Press [OK] key.
sharpness adjustment
5) Make a copy and check the copy image.
(No need to adjust normally)
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-60 mode
Use for sharpness adjustment of the high density image in mono- and change the adjustment value.
chrome copy/color scan mode.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
This adjustment changes smoothness (asperity) in the image
shade part.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When changing the sharpness of copy image in copy mode.
(obtain crispy image) (decreases moire)
* When there is desire to improving smoothness in the image
shade part (for decrease of asperity)
* To make the black background and the dark area darker.
* To reproduce the gradation change in the dark area.
* When there is request from the user.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 57
1 : ‘14/Dec
When adjusting density on low density part, select "A (COPY
11-D (9) SIDEA:LOW)". When adjusting density on high density part,
Copy high density image density select "D (COPY SIDEA:HIGH)".
reproduction setting (Normally
Setting Default
unnecessary to the setting change) Item Button Display Content
range value
If a tone gap occurs on part of high density in copy mode, or if there A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
is necessity to increase the density of the part of high density, SIDEA: exposure adjustment
change the setting. LOW (Low density side)
This setting is normally not required. When, however, there are B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
case of following, change the setting. SIDEA: exposure adjustment
LOW (Low density side)
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density.
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
* When there is a necessity to increase the density of the part of LOW exposure adjustment
high density. (Low density side)
* When there is request from the user. D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52
SIDEA: exposure adjustment
a. Adjustment procedure
HIGH (High density side)
1) Enter the SIM 46-23 mode. E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key. SIDEA: exposure adjustment
HIGH (High density side)
Setting Default F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
Item Display Content
range value HIGH exposure adjustment
A K 0 K engine highest density 0-1 1 (High density)
(0:ENABLE correction mode: Enable A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
1:DISABLE) 1 K engine highest density SIDEB: exposure adjustment
correction mode: Disable LOW (Low density side)
B BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
TARGET BLACK max. density SIDEB: exposure adjustment
correction LOW (Low density side)
C RATIO LOW The mixed ratio for max. 0 - 999 50 C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
1 density correction LOW LOW exposure adjustment
D RATIO HIGH The mixed ratio for max. 0 - 100 5 (Low density side)
density correction HIGH D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50
E DITHER Dither threshold LOW 0 - 255 250 SIDEB: exposure adjustment
THRESHOLD HIGH (High density side)
F SLOPE Slope threshold HIGH 100 - 400 E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 50
THRESHOLD 500 SIDEB: exposure adjustment
HIGH (High density side)
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A
F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone HIGH exposure adjustment
gap is better. (High density)
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1 G BALANCE DSPF gray balance 1 - 99 50
to item A. SIDEB: R R
H BALANCE DSPF gray balance 1 - 99 50
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
SIDEB: G G
NOTE: Do not change the setting values of item C, D, E and F. If I BALANCE DSPF gray balance 1 - 99 50
these values are changed, density of the high density part SIDEB: B B
is changed. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
If these values are changed, be sure to execute the copy In case of increase of image density, input large numeric
gray balance density adjustment. (Auto adjustment) value. Or in case of diluting the image density, input small
numeric value.
4) Press [OK] key.
11-D (10) 5) Make a copy in the DSPF mode and check the copy.
DSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-9 mode
adjustment (No need to adjust normally) and change the adjustment value.
This setting is normally not required, however, in the following Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
cases, make changes to the setting:
* When copy in DSPF mode differs from copy in document table
mode.
* When copy density in DSPF mode is low or too high.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
* When the DSPF unit is disassembled.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
a. Adjustment procedure
1) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 58
11-D (11) 11-D (12)
Automatic gray balance adjustment by the Copy gamma, gray balance adjustment for
user (Copy gray balance automatic each dither (Automatic adjustment)
adjustment ENABLE setting and a. General
adjustment) This simulation is used to improve the image quality in a certain
a. General mode. (Refer to the list in procedure 6.)
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto gray cali- b. Adjustment procedures
bration (auto adjustment of the copy gray balance and density). 1) Enter the SIM46-54 mode.
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera- 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
tion with SIM 26-53. A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's The gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed.
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy
gray balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged adequate enough to execute the adjustment.
When set to enable, operation procedures must be fully
explained to the user.
b. Setting procedure
1) Enter the SIM 26-53 mode.
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.
When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1"
(Yes).
3) Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto gray calibration
(automatic adjustment of copy gray balance and density) is not dis-
played in the user program mode.

(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto gray balance adjust-


ment))
NOTE: This adjustment is based on the service target gray bal-
ance set with SIM 63-7 and SIM 63-8. If, therefore, the
above settings are not properly performed, this adjustment
cannot be made properly.
3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
dure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
1) Enter the system setting mode. printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
2) Enter the copy setting mode. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
3) Press the auto gray calibration key. (adjustment pattern).
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
5) Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in proce-
dure 4) on the document table.
Set the patch image so that the thin line is on the left side as
shown in the figure.
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above gray
patch image (adjustment pattern).
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy gray balance adjustment
is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
the display returns to the original operation screen.
The message, "Will you go on to the printer gray balance
adjustment?" is displayed.
To execute the printer gray balance adjustment successively,
perform the procedures same as the above.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 59
1 : ‘14/Dec
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 8) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
The gray balance and the density are automatically adjusted. dure 7) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor- printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
mality.
(adjustment pattern).
5) Press [OK] key.
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).

Select item
Content
(Mode/Image)
Heavy Paper *1 Adjustment item to improve the gray balance in the
heavy paper mode
B/W Ed Adjustment item to improve the gray balance in the text
mode, Text/Photograph mode, Light density document
mode and the map mode.
B/W 1200 Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
the monochrome printed photo mode and the
photography mode.
WOVEN1 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark density
in the watermark mode 1
WOVEN2 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark density
in the watermark mode 2
WOVEN3 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark density
in the watermark mode 3
WOVEN4 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark density
in the watermark mode 4
B/W 600 LOW Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
1 the monochrome printed photo mode and the
photography mode.
*1: When performing adjustments in the heavy paper mode,
load paper in the tray 3, 4.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected. 9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. The gray balance and the density are automatically adjusted,
and the machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
To complete the adjustment and enable the adjustment result,
press [OK] key.
10) Make a copy, and check the copy image quality.
(Refer to the item of the printer gray balance and density
check.)
NOTE: Use SIM46-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default
values.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 60
11-D (13)
Dropout color adjustment
(Normally not required)
a. General
This adjustment is used to adjust the range of reproduction of color
document images as monochrome images in the image send mode
(monochrome manual text mode).
In other words, it is used to adjust the level of chroma of color
images which are reproduced as monochrome images.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When there is request from the user.
b. Adjustment procedures
1) Enter the SIM 46-55 mode.
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout
becomes easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the
adjustment value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult
to widen the reproduction range.

Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3
3) Scan the document in the image send mode (monochrome
manual text mode) and check the adjustment result.

When black characters When the color section is not


are fainted, Document dropped out,

Decrease the adjustment value. Color dropout Increase the value.

Reproduced
image

SIM value 0 SIM value 6


SIM value 3
(Minimum value) (Maximum value)
(Default)

The reproduction range is widened. The reproduction range is narrowed.

Effect and adverse effect when decreasing the value Effect and adverse effect when increasing the value
[Effect] [Effect]
When black characters are fainted by color shift, etc, the black area Colors (of low chroma) which are difficult to be dropped out can be
is outputted clearly. dropped out.
[Adverse effect] [Adverse effect]
Dropout of color sections becomes difficult. Black characters are fainted or cracked.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 61
11-D (14)
Watermark adjustment
(Normally not required)
b. Adjustment procedures
a. General
1) Enter the SIM 46-66 mode.
This adjustment is used to adjust the reproduction capability of the
2) Select the PATTERN mode, then select an adjustment item in
watermark in the copy/printer mode.
the following list according to the situation.
This adjustment is used for watermark documents (primary output).
The result of this adjustment affects the result of watermark print NOTE: Normally there is no need to adjust the PATTERN mode
(secondary output). (items E and F), the COPY MODE, and the POSITION
mode.
In the printer mode, the watermark density can be adjusted by the
printer driver. That adjustment is based on the result of this adjust-
ment.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When there is request from the user. (When a satisfactory result
is not obtained from the adjustment in the system setting mode.)
* When there is request from the user. (When a satisfactory result
is not obtained from the adjustment with the printer driver.)

Setting Default
Category Item Display Content
range value
PATTERN A WOVEN DEN BK LOW Watermark density level (Black LOW) 0 - 255 15
B WOVEN DEN BK MIDDLE Watermark density level (Black MIDDLE) 0 - 255 19
C WOVEN DEN BK HIGH Watermark density level (Black HIGH) 0 - 255 23
D CONTRAST Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2
E HT TYPE (POSI) For halftone index watermark type positive 42 - 43 42
F HT TYPE (NEGA) For halftone index watermark type negative 42 - 43 42
COPY A TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed Photo mode select Enable/Disable OFF 0-1 1
MODE ON
B TEXT Text mode select Enable/Disable OFF 0-1 1
ON
C PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo mode select Enable/Disable OFF 0-1 1
ON
D PHOTOGRAPH Photograph mode select Enable/Disable OFF 0-1 1
ON
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph mode select Enable/Disable OFF 0-1 1
ON
F MAP Map mode select Enable/Disable OFF 0-1 1
ON
G LIGHT Light density document mode select Enable/Disable OFF 0-1 1
ON
H AUTO Automatic mode select Enable/Disable OFF 0-1 1
ON
I DEFAULT MODE Default exposure mode TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO 0-5 0
Used to specify the exposure mode set TEXT
when the watermark is ON. PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
TEXT/PHOTO
MAP
POSITION A LINE SPACE 1 Line space in the watermark print box (24P - 36P) (*1) 0 - 200 20
B LINE SPACE 2 Line space in the watermark print box (37P - 48P) (*1) 0 - 200 20
C LINE SPACE 3 Line space in the watermark print box (49P - 64P) (*1) 0 - 200 20
D LINE SPACE 4 Line space in the watermark print box (65P - 80P) (*1) 0 - 200 20
E BLANK H/B 1 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print box (24P - 36P) (*2) 0 - 200 10
F BLANK H/B 2 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print box (37P - 48P) (*2) 0 - 200 10
G BLANK H/B 3 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print box (49P - 64P) (*2) 0 - 200 10
H BLANK H/B 4 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print box (65P - 80P) (*2) 0 - 200 10
I BLANK L/R 1 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box (24P - 36P) (*3) 0 - 200 60
J BLANK L/R 2 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box (37P - 48P) (*3) 0 - 200 90
K BLANK L/R 3 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box (49P - 64P) (*3) 0 - 200 120
L BLANK L/R 4 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box (65P - 80P) (*3) 0 - 200 150
*1: When the adjustment value is varied by 1, the line space is varied by 0.1mm.
*2: When the adjustment value is varied by 1, the upper and the lower margins are varied by 0.1mm.
*3: When the adjustment value is varied by 1, the left and the right margins are varied by 0.1mm.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 62
Changing adjustment values of adjustment items A - C NOTE: Watermarks have the following characteristics:
and trade off Note for * A watermark is presumed to be synthesized with text
watermarks documents. If it is used with photos or images, the
Kinds of containing characters may be seen in the watermark
watermarks Adjustment document (primary output) or the containing characters
(Mode Density values of may not appear properly in the watermark copy
Effect
selected in value adjustment (secondary output).
the watermark items A - C * When a watermark is synthesized with newspapers or
copy mode) other dark-background documents, the containing
Characters Decrease. The adjustment The watermark images characters may not appear in the watermark copy
appearing. value is become easy to (secondary output).
decreased. disappear. * Containing characters may not appear in the watermark
The containing copy (secondary output) depending on the kind of the
characters become copier which makes the watermark copy (secondary
lighter. output) and the copy mode.
Increase. The adjustment The containing * Containing characters may not appear clearly in the
value is characters become watermark copy (secondary output) depending on the
increased. darker. copy mode in which the watermark document (primary
The watermark images output) is made.
become difficult to * When the print engine status changes, the containing
disappear. characters may not be concealed properly in the
Background Decrease. The adjustment The containing watermark document (primary output). In this case,
appearing. value is characters become easy follow the procedures below to conceal the containing
decreased. to disappear. characters.
The watermark images * Use SIM46-24 to execute the gray balance
become easy to adjustment.
disappear. * Use SIM46-54 to execute the gray balance adjustment
Increase. The adjustment The watermark images for each dither.
value is become darker. * Adjust the watermark print contrast in the system
increased. The containing setting.
characters become * The preview screen of the watermark only indicates the
difficult to disappear. setting of the watermark color, and does not indicate an
actual copy image.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. * When the document control (printer mode) is used
4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result. together, it is advisable to use "Characters appearing"
setting. If "Background appearing" setting is used
Descriptions on the watermark
together, the detection accuracy of document control
may be reduced.
Containing * In the printer mode watermark, setting of 1200dpi and a
characters watermark cannot be used together.
Copy / Print Copy
Watermark adjustment in the system setting
System setting Security setting Watermark print
COPY INHIBITED Contrast tab

COPY INHIBITED Watermark kind


Density Adjustment
mode selection
COPY INHIBITED Character To increase the Decrease the contrast value.
appearing text density (Default: 5)
Document Watermark document Watermark copy To decrease the Increase the contrast value.
(Copy document or (Primary output) (Secondary output) text density (Default value: 5)
Print data) (Copy or Printer output) (This machine or other Background To increase the Increase the contrast value.
(This machine) company's machine) appearing text density (Default value: 5)
To decrease the Decrease the contrast value.
text density (Default: 5)
Containing Characters embedded in a watermark, such as "COPY
characters INHIBITED," are called containing characters. NOTE:
Kinds of There are two kinds: "Character appearing" and Note for adjusting the watermark with SIM46-54
watermarks "Background appearing."
When the gray balance automatic adjustment is executed with
When a watermark of "Character appearing" is copied, the
background disappears and the containing characters SIM46-74 or SIM46-24 but the containing characters are
appear. reproduced, use SIM46-54 to execute the gray balance auto-
When a watermark of "Background appearing" is copied, matic adjustment for each dither.
the watermark of the character area disappears and the However, note the following items.
containing characters become outline characters.
* When either of item E or F of the PATTERN mode is 42, the
Principle of A watermark is composed of two dots: fine dots and rough
adjustment must be executed for the both modes of
watermarks dots.
Since fine dots disappear when copied, they are called WOVEN1 and WOVEN2 of SIM46-54.
disappearing patterns. * When either of item E or F of the PATTERN mode is 43, the
Since rough dots remain when copied, they are called adjustment must be executed for the both modes of
remaining patterns. WOVEN3 and WOVEN4 of SIM46-54.
In a watermark of "Character appearing," the background is
* WOVEN1 and WOVEN2 must be adjusted in a pair as well
a disappearing pattern and the containing characters are
remaining patterns. as WOVEN3 and WOVEN4.
In a watermark of "Background appearing," the background If it is ignored, the containing characters remain reproduced.
is a remaining pattern and the containing characters are
disappearing patterns.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 63
11-E Printer image quality adjustment
(Basic adjustment)
Requisite condition before execution of the printer gray bal-
ance/density adjustment
Before execution of the printer gray balance/density adjustment,
the copy gray balance/density adjustment must have been com-
pleted properly.

This adjustment is required in the following cases.


* Basically same as when the copy gray balance/density adjust-
ment is required.
* After the copy gray balance/density adjustment.

11-E (1)
Printer gray balance adjustment
(Automatic adjustment)
a. General
The gray balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
the print density of automatically with SIM 67-24 or the user pro-
gram.
When this adjustment is executed, the gray balance adjustments of
all the print modes are revised.

There are following two modes in the auto gray balance adjust-
ment.
1) Auto gray balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 67-24 is
used.)
2) Auto gray balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The gray balance target is the service target.)
The auto gray balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the print gray balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this gray balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto gray balance adjustment by the
serviceman functions to recover the normal gray balance
though the machine condition is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal gray balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 64
b. Adjustment procedure
(Auto gray balance adjustment by the serviceman)

Printer gray balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) procedure


flowchart (SIM67-24)

Start

Execute ADJ11E(1) (Printer gray balance and density


adjustment) (Automatic adjustment).

Enter the SIM67-24 mode, and select A4


(11" x 8.5") paper.

Press [EXECUTE] key.


(The adjustment pattern is printed.)

Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.


Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern
is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically
performed to print the check pattern.)

Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or


unclear copy. (*3)

Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone


image correction is automatically performed.) (*1)

Cancel SIM67-24.

Execute ADJ11E(2) (Printer gray balance and density


Check the self print check pattern to check the printer adjustment) (Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25) (*2)
gray balance and density adjustment.

*1:
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print check pattern, If the initial setting of the halftone image correction is not
and check the printer gray balance and density. properly adjusted, satisfactory gray balance and density
cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for
any problems.
*2:
If satisfactory gray balance and density are not obtained
Are the gray balance and NO with ADJ11E(2) (Printer gray balance and density
density at the satisfactory adjustment) (Manual adjustment) (SIM67-25), check the
level? print engine for any problems.
*3:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed check
YES pattern, check the print engine for any problems.

End

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 65
1) Enter the SIM 67-24 mode. 4) Select [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is When the gray balance is customized with the manual gray
automatically selected.) balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's
The gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. request and the gray balance is registered as the service tar-
get with SIM 67-27, if the gray balance is adjusted to that gray
balance, select the service target.
The copy gray balance adjustment is automatically executed
and prints the gray balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in the procedure 5) is displayed.

3) Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in


procedure 2) on the document table.
Place the printed gray patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
gray patch image (adjustment pattern) paper. 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
NOTE:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This
operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
6) Check the gray balance and density.
(Refer to the item of the printer gray balance and density
check.)
If a satisfactory result on the gray balance and the density is
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man-
ual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 11E (2)).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual gray balance adjustment (ADJ
11E (2)).
If the gray balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even
after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 66
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is
11-E (2) automatically selected.)
Printer gray balance adjustment The gray balance adjustment pattern is printed.
(Manual adjustment) 3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the gray
a. General balance is satisfactory.
The gray balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to adjust If not, execute the following procedures.
the printer density. This is used at the following situation. When the
result of auto adjustment described above is not existing within the
range of reference. When a fine adjustment is required. When
there is request from the user for changing (customizing) the gray
balance.
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the gray patch which could
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the gray balance is improper, execute the automatic gray balance
adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better effi-
ciency. .QYFGPUKV[ *KIJFGPUKV[

b. Adjustment procedure # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3

Უ6JGOCZFGPUKV[UGEVKQPKUPQVDNWTTGF

Უ2CVEJ#QT$KUXGT[UNKIJN[EQRKGF
Printer gray balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure
flowchart (SIM67-25) Უȷ6JGRCVEJFGPUKV[KUKFGPVKECNDGVYGGPRCVEJGUQTPQVTGXGTUGF
ȷ6JGRCVEJFGPUKV[KUEJCPIGFITCFWCNN[
Start

Execute ADJ11E(2) (Printer gray balance and density


adjustment (Manual adjustment). (*1)

Enter the SIM67-25 mode, and select A4


(11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection.)

Press [EXECUTE] key.


(The adjustment pattern is printed.)

Refer to the printed adjustment check pattern.


The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
Select a target adjustment density level with the level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
scroll key. not be reversed.
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. Patch B may not be copied.
Press [EXECUTE] key.
Patch A must not be copied.
(The adjustment pattern is printed.) When, however, the gray balance is adjusted according to a
Check the gray balance and density in the gray
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
balance check pattern. gray balance stated above.
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
Are the gray balance
The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
NO
and density at the sati- SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic gray balance and
sfactory level?
density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
YES
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Cancel the SIM67-25 mode.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 4) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer gray balance and
density adjustment.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
check pattern, and check the printer gray balance and density.
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
NO way of adjustment.
Are the gray balance and
density at the satisfactory 5) Check the gray balance and density.
level?
(Refer to the item of the printer gray balance and density
check.)
YES
NOTE:
If the gray balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register
End the gray balance as the service target.
If the gray balance is not customized, this procedure is not
*1: required.
If satisfactory gray balance and density are not
obtained with the adjustment, check the print If the customized gray balance is registered as the service tar-
engine for any problems. get, the automatic gray balance adjustment can be made in
the next gray balance adjustment.
1) Enter the SIM 67-25 mode.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 67
11-F Printer image quality adjustment 11-F (3)
(Individual adjustment) Printer gamma adjustment for each dither
a. General (Automatic adjustment)
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each (No need to adjust normally)
mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the a. General
basic adjustments ADJ 11E (1) and ADJ 11E (2) or there is a
This adjustment is used to adjust the gray balance and the density
request from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this
in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode, and the gloss
adjustment. paper mode.
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment. This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images.
11-F (1) b. Adjustment procedures
Printer density adjustment 1) Enter the SIM67-54 mode.
(Low density section density adjustment) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(No need to adjust normally) A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den- The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
sity area in the printer mode.
Adjust to reproduction setting of the low density image.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When it is required not to reproduce images in the low density
section, or to reproduce low-density images.
* When there is request from the user.
1) Enter the SIM 67-36 mode.
2) Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key.
In case of increase of the image density on low density part,
increase the adjustment value. For diluting the image density
on low density part, decrease the adjustment value.

11-F (2)
Printer high density image density
reproduction setting (Supporting the high
density section tone gap)
(No need to adjust normally)
When a tone gap is generated in the high density section in the
printer mode, the setting is changed to lower the density in the high
density section. 3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
dure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
This setting is normally not required, however, in the following
printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
cases, a change of setting must be made.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density. (adjustment pattern).
* To lower the density in the high density section.
a. Adjustment procedure
1) Enter the SIM 67-34 mode.
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key.

Setting
Display/Item Content Default
range
A K 0 K engine maximum density 0-1 1
(0:ENABLE correction mode Enable
1:DISABLE) 1 K engine maximum density
correction mode Disable
B BLACK MAX Scanner target value for BLACK 0 - 999 500
TARGET maximum density correction
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
gap is better.
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1
to item A and B.
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
NOTE: If the setting values of item B is changed, density of the
high density part is changed.
When these values are changed, be sure to perform the
printer gray balance and density adjustment. (Automatic
adjustment)

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 68
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The gray balance adjustment is automatically performed. The gray balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor- the machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
mality. 10) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
5) Press [OK] key. and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
HEAVY PAPER Adjustment for heavy paper and that for gloss paper press [EXECUTE] key.
4BIT_HIGH For adjustments for each screen of 600/4bit HIGH After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
screen Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
1200DPI_LOW For adjustments for each screen of 1200/1bit LOW tered.
screen
11) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
1200DPI_HIGH For adjustments for each screen of 1200/1bit HIGH
screen (Refer to the item of the printer gray balance and density
check.)
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
NOTE: Use SIM67-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default
A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
values.
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.

11-F (4)
Automatic gray balance adjustment by the
user (Printer gray balance automatic
adjustment ENABLE setting and
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to the
setting change)
a. General
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto gray cali-
bration (auto adjustment of the printer gray balance and density).
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
tion with SIM 26-53.
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the printer
gray balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
When set to enable, operation procedures must be fully
explained to the user.

b. Setting procedure
1) Enter the SIM 26-53 mode.
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.
8) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce- When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1"
dure 7) on the document table so that the thin lines on the (Yes).
printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side. 3) Press [OK] key.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto gray calibration
(adjustment pattern). (automatic adjustment of printer gray balance and density) is not
displayed in the user program mode.
(Auto gray calibration by the user (Auto gray balance adjust-
ment))
NOTE: This adjustment is based on the service target gray bal-
ance set with SIM 67-27 or SIM 67-28. If, therefore, the
above settings are not properly performed, this adjustment
cannot be made properly.
1) Enter the system setting mode.
2) Enter the printer setting mode.
3) Press the auto gray calibration key.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 69
5) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure Check can be made also in the copy mode by the following
4) on the document table. procedure. The scanned image, however, is in monochrome.
Set the patch image so that the thin line is on the left side as 4) Press [CLOSE] button in the simulation mode to jump to the
shown in the figure. normal copy mode, and make a copy and check the adjust-
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above patch ment result.
image (adjustment pattern). Switch alternatively between the simulation mode and the nor-
mal copy mode, and adjust and check the adjustment result
with an actual copy.
Thin line Repeat the procedures 3 and 4 until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

12-B Monochrome image send mode, image


density and gradation adjustment
(by each mode)
Normally, there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
ing cases, however, this adjustment must be performed.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer gray balance adjust- * When the user requests to perform the adjustment.
ment is executed automatically. * When there is a defective copy in a scan image.
The message, "Will you go on to the copy gray balance adjust- * When the scan image density is too light.
ment?" is displayed.
1) Enter the Sim. 46-5 mode.
To execute the copy gray balance adjustment successively,
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.
perform the procedures same as the above.
Item/ Document Setting Default
Display
Mode mode rage value
ADJ 12 Image send, FAX send mode A LOW AUTOTEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
image quality adjustment C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo
12-A Color image send mode, image density and D TEXT/PHOTO Text/ 1 - 99 50
Photograph
gradation adjustment (by each mode)
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 1 - 99 50
Normally, there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow- F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
ing cases, however, this adjustment must be performed. G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
* When the user requests to perform the adjustment. H RIP - 1 - 99 50
* When there is a defective copy in a scan image. A HIGH AUTOTEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
* When the scan image density is too light. B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50
1) Enter the Sim. 46-4 mode.
PHOTO Photo
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button. D TEXT/PHOTO Text/ 1 - 99 50
Photograph
Item/ Document Setting Default E PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 1 - 99 50
Display
Mode mode rage value
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
A LOW AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
H RIP - 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/ Text/Printed 1 - 99 50
PRINTEDPHOTO Photo 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/ 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
Photograph increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 1 - 99 50 image density is decreased.
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 4) Scan a monochrome document in the color scan mode (Scan
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50 to PC or Scan to e-Mail), and check the density of the received
H RIP - 1 - 99 50 image.
A HIGH AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
Check can be made also in the copy mode by the following
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
procedure.
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo 4) Press [CLOSE] button in the simulation mode to jump to the
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/ 1 - 99 50 normal copy mode, and make a copy and check the adjust-
Photograph ment result.
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 1 - 99 50 Switch alternatively between the simulation mode and the nor-
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 mal copy mode, and adjust and check the adjustment result
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50 with an actual copy.
H RIP - 1 - 99 50 Repeat the procedures 3 and 4 until a satisfactory result is
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button. obtained.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image density is decreased.
4) Scan the color document in the color scan mode (Scan to PC
or Scan to e-Mail), and check the density of the received
image.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 70
Setting
Display/Item Content Default
12-C Image send mode, image gray balance range
adjustment H 600 X 600 [DPI] OFF 600 X 600 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone OFF mode
Normally, there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
I 600 X 600 [DPI] ON 600 X 600 [DPI] 0-2 1
ing cases, however, this adjustment must be performed.
Half-tone ON mode
* When the user requests to perform the adjustment.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
* When the scan image gray balance is defective.
To increase the sharpness, increase the adjustment value. To
1) Enter the Sim. 46-8 mode. decrease the sharpness, decrease the adjustment value.
2) Select a color to be adjusted with [R], [G], [B] buttons. 4) Send a FAX message.
3) Select a mode (low density section or high density section) to 5) Check the sharpness of the received FAX image.
be adjusted with the scroll button.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
Setting
Display/Item Content Default
range
A LOW DENSITY Low density section 1 - 99 50
POINT gray balance ADJ 13 FAX send mode image quality
adjustment value
B HIGH DENSITY High density section 1 - 99 50
adjustment
POINT gray balance Normally this adjustment is not required. However, perform this
adjustment value
adjustment in the following cases:
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. * When the user request for performing this adjustment.
To increase the density of the target color, increase the adjust- * When the FAX send image density is low or high.
ment value. To decrease the density of the target color,
NOTE:
decrease the adjustment value.
Normally, the adjustment value may be set to the default value and
5) Scan a color document in the color scan mode (Scan to PC or
there is no need to make this adjustment. When, however, the
Scan to e-Mail), and check the density of the received image.
image density on the receiving FAX side is unsatisfactory, perform
Check can be made also in the copy mode by the following this adjustment.
procedure. The scanned image, however, is in monochrome.
Before execution of this adjustment, however, be sure to confirm
5) Press [CLOSE] button in the simulation mode to jump to the that the receiving FAX operates normally.
normal copy mode, and make a copy and check the adjust-
ment result.
13-A Image density and gradation adjustment in
Switch alternatively between the simulation mode and the nor-
mal copy mode, and adjust and check the adjustment result
the FAX send mode (Collective adjustment
with an actual copy. of all the FAX modes)
Repeat the procedures 3 and 4 until a satisfactory result is 1) Enter the Sim. 46-40 mode, and select the I-FAX or FAX.
obtained. 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
12-D FAX send mode, image sharpness 3) Check the print density in the adjustment pattern.
adjustment If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory,
Normally, there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow- perform the following procedure.
ing cases, however, this adjustment must be performed. 4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
* When the user requests to perform the adjustment. When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
* When the sharpness in the FAX send mode is too low.
image density is decreased.
Note:
Repeat the procedures 2 thru 4 until a satisfactory result is
Normally this adjustment value may be set to the default and there obtained.
is no need to perform the adjustment. When, however, the sharp-
ness of a printed image on the receiving FAX side to too low, per-
form this adjustment.
When performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the receiv-
ing side FAX is normal.
1) Enter the Sim. 46-39 mode.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.

Setting
Display/Item Content Default
range
A 200 X 100 [DPI] OFF 200 X 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone OFF mode
B 200 X 200 [DPI] OFF 200 X 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone OFF mode
C 200 X 200 [DPI] ON 200 X 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone ON mode
D 200 X 400 [DPI] OFF 200 X 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone OFF mode
E 200 X 400 [DPI] ON 200 X 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone ON mode
F 400 X 400 [DPI] OFF 400 X 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone OFF mode
G 400 X 400 [DPI] ON 400 X 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
Half-tone ON mode

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 71
13-B Image density and gradation adjustment in 13-C Image density and gradation adjustment in
the FAX send mode (Normal mode) the FAX send mode (Fine mode)
1) Enter the Sim. 46-42 mode, and select the I-FAX or FAX.
1) Enter the Sim. 46-41 mode, and select the I-FAX or FAX.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.
Setting
Setting Display/Item Content Default
Display/Item Content Default range
range
A AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50
A AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50
send image density
send image density
(Fine mode)
(Normal mode)
B EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50
image density (Fine mode)
image density
(Normal mode) C EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50
image density (Fine mode)
C EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50
image density D EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50
(Normal mode) image density (Fine mode)
D EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50 E EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50
image density image density (Fine mode)
(Normal mode) F EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50 image density (Fine mode)
image density G AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50
(Normal mode) H_TONE send image density
F EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Fine mode)
image density H EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50
(Normal mode) H_TONE image density
G EXECUTE AUTO 1 1 (Half-tone/Fine mode)
MODE EXP1 2 (AUTO) I EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50
H_TONE image density
EXP2 3
(Half-tone/Fine mode)
EXP3 4
J EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50
EXP4 5
H_TONE image density
EXP5 6 (Half-tone/Fine mode)
3) Press [EXECUTE] button. K EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50
The adjustment pattern is printed. H_TONE image density
(Half-tone/Fine mode)
4) Check the print density of the adjustment pattern.
L EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50
If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory, H_TONE image density
perform the following procedure. (Half-tone/Fine mode)
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button. M EXECUTE AUTO 1 1
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is MODE EXP1 2 (AUTO)
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the EXP2 3
image density is decreased. EXP3 4
EXP4 5
Repeat the procedures 3 thru 5 until a satisfactory result is
EXP5 6
obtained.
AUTO H_TONE 7
To select the exposure mode actually used in the FAX send
EXP1 H_TONE 8
mode, select item G and enter the set value corresponding to
EXP2 H_TONE 9
the exposure mode with 10-key and press [EXECUTE] button.
EXP3 H_TONE 10
EXP4 H_TONE 11
EXP5 H_TONE 12
3) Press [EXECUTE] button.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
4) Check the print density of the adjustment pattern.
If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory,
perform the following procedure.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image density is decreased.
Repeat the procedures 3 thru 5 until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
To select the exposure mode actually used in the FAX send
mode, select item M and enter the set value corresponding to
the exposure mode with 10-key and press [EXECUTE] button

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 72
13-D Image density and gradation adjustment in 13-E Image density and gradation adjustment in
the FAX send mode (Super fine mode) the FAX send mode (Ultra fine mode)
1) Enter the Sim. 46-43 mode. 1) Enter the Sim. 46-44 mode.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button. 2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button.

Setting Setting
Display/Item Content Default Display/Item Content Default
range range
A AUTO FAX auto mode send image 1 - 99 50 A AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50
density (Super fine mode) send image density
B EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
image density B EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50
(Super fine mode) image density
C EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
image density C EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50
(Super fine mode) image density
D EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
image density D EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50
(Super fine mode) image density
E EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
image density E EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50
(Super fine mode) image density
F EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
image density F EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50
(Super fine mode) image density
G AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE send image density G AUTO FAX auto exposure mode 1 - 99 50
(Half-tone/Super fine mode) H_TONE send image density
H EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE image density H EXPOSURE1 FAX exposure level 1 send 1 - 99 50
(Half-tone/Super fine mode) H_TONE image density
I EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE image density I EXPOSURE2 FAX exposure level 2 send 1 - 99 50
(Half-tone/Super fine mode) H_TONE image density
J EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE image density J EXPOSURE3 FAX exposure level 3 send 1 - 99 50
(Half-tone/Super fine mode) H_TONE image density
K EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE image density K EXPOSURE4 FAX exposure level 4 send 1 - 99 50
(Half-tone/Super fine mode) H_TONE image density
L EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
H_TONE image density L EXPOSURE5 FAX exposure level 5 send 1 - 99 50
(Half-tone/Super fine mode) H_TONE image density
M EXECUTE AUTO 1 1 (Half-tone/Ultra fine mode)
MODE EXP1 2 (AUTO) M EXECUTE AUTO 1 1
EXP2 3 MODE EXP1 2 (AUTO)
EXP3 4 EXP2 3
EXP4 5 EXP3 4
EXP5 6 EXP4 5
AUTO H_TONE 7 EXP5 6
EXP1 H_TONE 8 AUTO H_TONE 7
EXP2 H_TONE 9 EXP1 H_TONE 8
EXP3 H_TONE 10 EXP2 H_TONE 9
EXP4 H_TONE 11 EXP3 H_TONE 10
EXP5 H_TONE 12 EXP4 H_TONE 11
EXP5 H_TONE 12
3) Press [EXECUTE] button.
The adjustment pattern is printed. 3) Press [EXECUTE] button.
4) Check the print density of the adjustment pattern. The adjustment pattern is printed.
If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory, 4) Check the print density of the adjustment pattern.
perform the following procedure. If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory,
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button. perform the following procedure.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button.
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
image density is decreased. increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image density is decreased.
Repeat the procedures 3 thru 5 until a satisfactory result is
obtained. Repeat the procedures 3 thru 5 until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
To select the exposure mode actually used in the FAX send
mode, select item M and enter the set value corresponding to To select the exposure mode actually used in the FAX send
the exposure mode with 10-key and press [EXECUTE] button. mode, select item M and enter the set value corresponding to
the exposure mode with 10-key and press [EXECUTE] button.
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [EXECUTE]
button.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 73
13-F Image density and gradation adjustment in ADJ 14 Setting of the auto exposure
the IFAX send mode (600dpi mode)
1) Enter the Sim. 46-45 mode.
mode operating conditions in
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll button. copy, scan, and FAX
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
Setting
Display/Item Content Default * When the U2 trouble occurs.
range
A AUTO IFAX 600dpi mode/ 1 - 99 50 * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
Auto exposure mode send * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
image density
* When the SCANNER CONTROL PWB is replaced.
B EXPOSURE1 IFAX 600dpi mode/Exposure 1 - 99 50
level 1 send image density * When the EEPROM on the SCANNER CONTROL PWB is
C EXPOSURE2 IFAX 600dpi mode/Exposure 1 - 99 50 replaced.
level 2 send image density 1) Enter the Sim. 46-19 mode.
D EXPOSURE3 IFAX 600dpi mode/Exposure 1 - 99 50 2) Select the auto mode exposure operating condition of each
level 3 send image density
mode with the mode button.
E EXPOSURE4 IFAX 600dpi mode/Exposure 1 - 99 50
level 4 send image density Item/Display Content Set value Default
F EXPOSURE5 IFAX 600dpi mode/Exposure 1 - 99 50 AE_MODE Auto exposure MODE1, MODE2 MODE2
level 5 send image density mode
G AUTO IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 AE_STOP_CO Auto exposure REALTIME/STOP/ PRESCAN
H_TONE Auto exposure mode send PY mode document PRESCAN
image density density detecting
H EXPOSURE1 IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 condition setting (for
H_TONE Exposure level 1 send image copy)
density AE_STOP_FA Auto exposure ON/OFF ON
I EXPOSURE2 IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 X mode document
H_TONE Exposure level 2 send image density detecting
density condition setting (for
J EXPOSURE3 IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 FAX)
H_TONE Exposure level 3 send image AE_STOP_SC Auto exposure REALTIME/STOP/ STOP
density AN mode document PRESCAN
K EXPOSURE4 IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 density detecting
H_TONE Exposure level 4 send image condition setting (for
density scanner)
L EXPOSURE5 IFAX 600dpi half-tone mode/ 1 - 99 50 AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
H_TONE Exposure level 5 send image setting NORMAL
density SHARP
M EXECUTE AUTO 1 1 AE_WIDTH Auto exposure FULL/PART FULL
MODE EXP1 2 (AUTO) mode document
EXP2 3 density detecting
EXP3 4 width setting
EXP4 5
EXP5 6
AUTO H_TONE 7 ADJ 15 Paper size detection
EXP1 H_TONE 8
EXP2 H_TONE 9
adjustment
EXP3 H_TONE 10
EXP4 H_TONE 11 15-A Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
EXP5 H_TONE 12 adjustment
3) Press [EXECUTE] button. This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
The adjustment pattern is printed. * The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
4) Check the print density of the adjustment pattern. * The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
If the print density of the adjustment pattern is unsatisfactory, * U2 trouble has occurred.
perform the following procedure. * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] button. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is 1) Enter the SIM 40-2 mode.
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image density is decreased.

Repeat the procedures 3 thru 5 until a satisfactory result is ǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
obtained. %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
To select the exposure mode actually used in the FAX send 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

mode, select item M and enter the set value corresponding to


the exposure mode with 10-key and press [EXECUTE] button.

(;(&87(

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 74
2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi- 8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion. tion.

3) Press [EXECUTE] key. 9) Press [EXECUTE] key.


[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display. The maximum width position detection level of the display. The minimum width position detection level of the
manual paper feed guide is recognized. manual paper feed guide is recognized. If the above operation
is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. When the
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
operation is completed normally, the above data are saved to
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display. The A4 size width position detection level of the man-
15-B Paper feed tray 4 paper width sensor
ual paper feed guide is recognized.
adjustment
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* When the paper feed tray 4 section is disassembled.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display. Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the * When the paper feed tray 4 section is replaced.
A4R size. * When the U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
1) Enter the Sim. 40-12 mode.
2) Set the paper feed guide to the maximum width, and press
[EXECUTE] key.

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. When the maximum width


detection level adjustment value is saved, [EXECUTE] key
returns to the normal display.

Adjustment steps and display contents

Display/Item Content
MAX POSITION Maximum width detection level adjustment
MIN POSITION Minimum width detection level adjustment
3) Set the paper feed guide to the minimum width, and press
[EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. When the minimum width
detection level adjustment value is saved, [EXECUTE] key
returns to the normal display.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 75
8) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
* When each of the above operations has been completed,
the "COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the oper-
ations has failed, the "ERROR" message appears.

ADJ 16 Document size detection


adjustment
(Document table mode)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When the original size sensor section has been disassembled.
* When the original size sensor section has been replaced.
After completion of the adjustment, "COMPLETE" is displayed. * When U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
15-C DSPF paper feed tray paper width sensor * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 16-A Document size sensor detection point
* The DSPF paper feed tray section has been disassembled. adjustment
* The DSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced. 1) Enter the SIM 41-1 mode.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* The scanner PWB has been replaced. 

* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3'6(1625&+(&.
1) Enter the SIM 53-6 mode. 2&6: 3' 3' 3'
3' 3' 3' 3'


ǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)75$<$'-8670(17
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17

35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57



Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment screw


and slide the actuator position so that the display OCSW is
returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit
(;(&87(
top from the table glass is 32 0.5mm by slowly tilting the doc-
2) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width posi- ument detection arm unit in the arrow direction and adjust.
tion. (If the ON timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the doc-
ument detection function may malfunction.)

32+
-0.5mm

3) Press [EXECUTE] key.


The maximum width detection level is recognized.
4) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
6) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The A5R width detection level is recognized.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 76
16-B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size ADJ 18 Fusing paper guide position
sensor
1) Enter the SIM 41-2 mode.
adjustment
2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document. (Manual adjustment of fusing
With the document cover open, without placing a document on paper guide position)
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key. This adjustment is required in the following cases:
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press * When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
[EXECUTE] key.
* When the lead edge of paper is folded in the fusing section.
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT PHOTO
* When skew is generated in the fusing section.
SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUSTED" is displayed.
* When blur or improper focusing is generated on the lead edge
section or the rear edge section of an image on paper.
ADJ 17 Touch panel coordinate * When wrinkle is generated on paper.
1) Remove the fusing unit.
adjustment
2) Loosen the screw.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 3) Slide the fusing paper guide up or down to adjust the position.
* The operation panel has been replaced. * Check and mark the scale position before the adjustment
* U2 trouble has occurred. (with a pencil, etc.), and slide to the left and the right evenly.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
1) Enter the SIM 65-1 mode.

2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).


When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen. In 4) Tighten the screw, and fix the fusing paper guide.
case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen again. 5) Install the fusing unit to the main unit, and check the adjust-
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display ment result in the copy mode.
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is * There is no jam.
pressed. * The paper lead edge is not folded.
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such * There is no skew.
as a needle or a pin).
* There is no blur of improper focusing on the lead edge and
the rear edge of an image on paper.
* There is no wrinkle on paper.

ADJUSTMENTS 5 – 77
[6] SIMULATION Service Manual

1. General and purpose 2. Starting the simulation


The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the Entering the simulation mode
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes 1) Double-click the [HOME] key. (Total use quantity/Toner
in an earlier stage, and to efficiently setup and adjust the machine remaining quantity display mode screen)
for improved serviceability.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting, clear VER display section
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data
check, clear.
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
transport.
Touch the VER display section. Touch the [BACK] key.
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of
the operation panel of the machine.

(10-key mode input mode screen)

[BACK] key

2) Touch the VER display section. (10-key mode input mode


screen)
3) Touch the (#) key  Asterisk (*) key  Clear key 
Asterisk (*) key  Ready for input of main code of simulation.
4) Enter a main SIM code with the 10-key pad then touch the
[START] key or select a main code from the SIM key list on the
touch panel.
5) Enter a sub code with the 10-key pad, then touch the [START]
key or select a sub code from the code list on the touch panel.
6) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
7) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simu-
lation operation.
To cancel the current simulation mode and change the main
code and the sub code, press [BACK] key.

Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode


1) Press [EXIT] key.

NOTE: Do not turn OFF the power when the machine is in the sim-
ulation mode.
If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simulation
mode, a malfunction may be resulted. In this case, turn
OFF/ON the main power source.

SIMULATION 6 – 1
START (Copy mode)

Double-click the HOME key.

Touch the VER display section.

Press the sharp (#) key.

Press the asterisk (*) key.

Press the clear key.

Press the Program key.

Standby for entry of Press the BACK key


SIM code.

Enter the main code of


SIM with the 10-key.

The main code of SIM


is displayed.
NO
Press the
COLOR/MONO key. YES Is it the same
simulation main
code?
YES
In the power OFF/ON type
Standby for entry of SIM <Exclusion type> simulation, OFF/ON
Is there a sub code ?
sub code You have to exit message is
simulation mode Press the BACK key displayed by the
NO before entering into SYSTEM
Enter SIM sub code with
this mode for self YES
SETTINGS key.
the 10-key. printing type.
Select the mode and the Do you want
Press the NO
item with the scroll key to perform another
COLOR/MONO key. and the item key. simulation ? The simulation mode
is canceled.
NO
If there is no item. YES Press the EXECUTE key
Operation check ?
and OK key.

NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the EXIT key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?

YES Press the EXECUTE key


Operating conditions
check ? and OK key.

NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.

YES Press the EXECUTE key


Data clear ?
and OK key.

NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.

YES Adjustments NO Operation is made according


or setting (counter data to the selected mode and the item.
change) ? (Other modes)

The display is made according


to the selected mode and the item.
Do you NO
want to change the
content ?
The changed content
YES
is stored.

Enter the new setting and Press the EXECUTE key


adjustment values. and OK key.

SIMULATION 6 – 2
3. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner (reading)
5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. DSPF
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the automatic document feeder section DSPF
and the control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. DSPF
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
30 Inserter sensor check Inserter
31 Inserter individual load check Inserter
40 Paper folding unit sensor check Paper folding unit
41 Paper fold unit individual load check Paper folding unit
42 Paper folding unit adjustment Paper folding unit
50 Decurler sensor check Decurler
51 Decurler individual load check Decurler unit
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and the Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
control circuit of those.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
those.
5 Used to check the operations of the LCC paper transport clutch (LTRC). Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation panel
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit. Process
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the Paper transport/Paper exit section
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Others
3 Used to check the operations of the transport unit and the control circuit. Process (Transfer)
4 Used to check the cleaning operation of the main charger. Process
90 Used to reset the machine to the factory setting. (The scanner is set to the lock enable position) Scanner
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Others
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time.
12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) DSPF
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control Process (Developing)
circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the Process (Charging)
control circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. Process (Transfer)
10 Main charger total current output setting Process
17 Check and adjust the operation of the separation bias voltage and the control circuit. Process (Transfer)
30 Check and adjust the operation of the drum cleaning output. Process
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse section (duplex section) Duplex
and its control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control Duplex
circuit.
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit. Toner supply section
2 Used to check the operations of the toner remaining quantity sensor and the control circuit. Toner supply section
13 - Used to cancel the self- diagram U1 trouble.
14 - Used to cancel the self-diagram H3, H4, H5 troubles.
15 - Used to cancel the self-diagram U6, F3 trouble. LCC/LCT
*The trouble state mentioned above is memorized in power supply OFF.
16 - Used to cancel the self-diagram U2 trouble. MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the
maintenance timing.)
2 Used to check the total number of miss feed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
3 Used to check miss feed positions and the miss feed count of each position.
* Presumption of the faulty point by this data is possible.
4 Used to check the trouble (self diagram) history.

SIMULATION 6 – 3
Main Sub Functions Section
22 5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Firmware
6 Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version,
and the counter list.
8 Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, ADU, LCC
10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
11 Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX
12 Used to check the DSPF miss feed positions and the number of miss feed at each position. (When the DSPF
number of miss feed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
13 Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge) and the Process
fusing unit
14 Used to display the use status of the toner cartridge. Process
18 Used to display the user data delete history.
19 Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.
40 Used to display the error code list and the contents.
41 Used to display the JAM code list and the contents.
42 Used to check the JAM/trouble data.
43 JAM data details display
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and miss feed. (If the number of troubles of miss feed
is considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)
80 Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper Paper feed, Paper transport
transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the
paper feed section and the paper transport section.
81 Backup the paper feed time data to the USB memory
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the
counters.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
3 Used to clear the finisher, DSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
5 Used to clear the developer counter value and the toner hopper remaining quantity counter.
(After replacing developer, clear these counters.)
6 Used to clear the copy counter.
Used to clear the counter value of the toner hopper remaining quantity. (Clear the data after replacing or
cleaning the toner hopper.)
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)
12 Used to clear the document filing counter.
15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
35 Used to clear the toner cartridge use status data.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Process (Developing section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Image process (Photo conductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
4 Used to display the operation data of the toner supply quantity. (Not used in the market.) Process
26 1 Used to set Yes/No of installation of the right paper exit tray. Paper exit
2 Used to set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size is changed, this Paper feed
simulation must be executed to change the paper size in software.)
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. Auditor
(Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.)
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size)
6 Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
7 Used to set the machine ID.
8 Counter mode setting (Long scale)
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards). (For slow start
to drive the fusing heater lamp)
32 Used to set the specifications of the fusing cleaning operation. Fusing
35 Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There
are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.
38 Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the center
binding mode.
49 Used to set the print speed of postcards mode.
50 Used to set functions.
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
53 User auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting.
65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.

SIMULATION 6 – 4
Main Sub Functions Section
26 71 Used to set the trial mode of the web browsing function.
73 Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.
79 Used to set security settings.
27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) Communication (RIC/MODEM)
(FSS function)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Used to set of the enable, alert call out. (FSS function)
9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment
retry number. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number
history. (FSS function)
12 Used to check the high density, halftone process control and the automatic registration adjustment error
history. (FSS Function)
14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
15 Used to display the FSS connection status.
16 Used to set the FSS alert send.
17 Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
18 Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry counter.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and
the control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control
circuits.
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed
12 Used to adjust the tray 4 width detection level. Paper feed
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.
2 Used to set the fusing operation and preheating.
20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
24 Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1.
32 Used to set various items related to the forcible operation of web cleaning when job end. Fusing
34 Used to check the fusing lower web cleaning motor operation. Fusing
35 Fusing nip operation check Fusing
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Image process (Photo conductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
2 Used to adjust the light quantity adjustment of the process control computer sensor and groundwork Process
reading.
4 Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Process
6 Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. Process
9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Image process (Photo conductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
12 Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density sensor Image process (Photo conductor/
(registration sensor). Developing)
14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Process (OPC drum, development)/
Fusing/LSU
15 Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation. Process
17 Process refresh execution Process
21 Used to set the halftone process control target. Process
22 Used to display the toner patch density level in the halftone process control operation. Process
24 Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the halftone process control operation. Process
25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the halftone process control. Process
26 Used to execute the halftone process control compulsory. Process
27 Used to clear the correction data of the halftone process control. Process
28 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
29 Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Process
37 Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation.
43 Used to display the identification information of the developing unit. Developing system
62 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process

SIMULATION 6 – 5
Main Sub Functions Section
46 2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.(Monochromatic copy)
4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.(Color scanner)
5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.(Monochromatic scanner)
8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
9 Used to adjust the scan image density.
10 Used to adjust the engine gray manually.
16 Used to perform the engine color balance manual adjustment (monochrome, all modes).
19 Used to set the monochrome auto exposure mode.
23 Used to perform the half tone highest density correction.
24 Used to perform the engine half tone auto density adjustment.
32 Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.
37 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of monochrome mode color.
39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)
42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
46 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (RGB RIP)
47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
48 Used to set the copy output resolution setting.(Change 600DPI/1200DPI every picture mode.)
51 Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process mode.
52 Used to set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode.
(After execution of either SIM46-54 or SIM46-51, the adjustment value is reset to the initial value.)
54 Used to perform the engine halftone automatic density adjustment (dither).
55 Used to adjust the drop out color in the image send mode (monochrome manual text mode).
58 Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolution. (Smoothing process)
59 Used to perform the copy mode pseudo resolution image process adjustment.
60 Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.
61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.
62 Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and
the auto exposure mode.
63 Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.
66 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of watermarks in the copy/printer mode.
74 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)/Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
90 Used to set the process operation of high-compression PDF images.
91 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of black text.
48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning
direction).
5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Scanner section
6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.
5 Used to perform the watermark update.
10 Used to perform the ACU firmware update.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (DSPF mode) DSPF
10 Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.
28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio.
51 1 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the transport voltage.
2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the DSPF
registration roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image
position on the paper or when paper jams frequently occur.)
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the DSPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the DSPF document size width sensor.
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the DSPF mode document scan position.
9 DSPF dirt detection setting.
10 DSPF dirt detection execution.
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
10 Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan only)

SIMULATION 6 – 6
Main Sub Functions Section
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SD Card, and HDD (including user authentication data and
address data) to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.)
3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
5 Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB memory in the TEXT format.
6 Used to output the JAM/trouble data.
7 Used to backup the SYS log data to the USB memory.
60 1 Used to check the memory operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB.
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Used to set the laser power
4 Used to print the print image skew adjustment pattern. (LSU unit)
11 Used to correct the laser power automatically.
12 Laser power manual correction LSU
13 Used to clear the laser power correction value.
62 1 Used to format the hard disk/SD Card. (HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and the watermark data)
(SD Card: User data)
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.
8 Used to format the hard disk/SD Card. (HDD: Excluding the Operation Manual, the watermark data, and
the system area) (SD Card: User data)
10 Used to clear the job completion list data.
11 Used to delete the document filing data.
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.
13 Used to format the hard disk. (Operation Manual, watermark data only)
14 Used to delete the document filing management data. HDD
20 Used to check the operation of the mirroring hard disk. Mirroring hard disk
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading.
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting.
11 Used to set the target color balance of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
64 2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print)
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation panel section
2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
5 Used to check the operation panel key input.

SIMULATION 6 – 7
Main Sub Functions Section
66 1 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2 - 150) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while FAX
checking with the LCD.
2 Used to enter a country code and set the default value for the country code. FAX
3 Used to check read/write of the EEPROM and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller and display the FAX
result.
4 Used to send the selected signals to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: max.) FAX
5 Used to send the selected signal to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
(For the kinds of send signals, refer to SIM66-04.)
6 Used to print the confidential registration check table (BOX NO., BOX name, pass code. (If there is no FAX
confidential registration, no print is made.)
7 Used to output all image data saved in the image memory. (Confidential data are also outputted.) FAX
8 Used to send the selected sound messages to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
9 Used to send the selected sound message to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For details of sound messages, refer to the sound message table of SIM66-08.
10 Used to clear the FAX and image send image data. (The confidential data are also cleared.) FAX
11 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
12 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps, refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal table.
13 Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be registered.) FAX
14 Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
15 Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
16 Used to execute the DTFM signal send test and to adjust the send level. FAX
17 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
18 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
21 Used to print the selected items (system error, protocol monitor). FAX
22 Used to set the handset sound volume. (This simulation can be executed even though the handset setting FAX
is set to NO. When, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume cannot be checked.)
(Japan model only)
24 Used to clear the FAST save data. FAX
29 Used to initialize the telephone book data (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/Desktop expansion FAX
table, the group expansion table, the program registration table, the interface memory box table, the meta
data, InboundRouting, and the DocumentAdmin table).
30 Used to display the TEL/LIU status change, The display is highlighted by status change. FAX
31 Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to TEL/LIU. FAX
32 Used to check the fixed data received from the line and to display the result. FAX
33 Used to execute detection of various signals with the line connected and to display the detection result. FAX
When a signal is detected, the display is highlighted.
34 Used to execute the send test and display the time required for sending image data in the test. Used to FAX
execute send test and display. (Unit: ms)
36 Used to check send and receive data from the MODEM controller to the MFP controller or the data line or FAX
the command line individually.
39 Used to check and change the destination setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX. FAX
42 Used to rewrite the program to power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
43 Used to write the adjustment value into the power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
61 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while FAX
checking with the LCD.
62 Used to import the FAX receive data into a USB memory in PDF file type. FAX
67 17 Printer reset Printer
24 Printer gray balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) Printer
25 Printer gray balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) Printer
26 Used to set the target gray balance of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value. Printer
33 Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. Printer
34 Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section. Printer
(Support for the high density section tone gap)
36 Used to adjust the density in the low density section. Printer
45 Used to adjust the printer image filter and trapping. Printer
52 Used to set the default of the gamma of the printer screen. Printer
54 Printer gray balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment for each dither) Printer

SIMULATION 6 – 8
4. Details of simulation
2
1
2-1

1-1 Purpose Operation test/check

Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto-
matic document feeder and the control cir-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner cuit.
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
Section DSPF
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the The DSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-
scan resolution (operation speed). ations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (oper-
ation speed).
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
(372.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI Item/Display Operation mode Default value
(372.0mm/s) (SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
600DPI 600DPI (496.0mm/s) (496.0mm/s)
(248.0mm/s) 400DPI 400DPI
1200DPI 1200DPI (372.0mm/s)
(124.0mm/s) 600DPI 600DPI
(248.0mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(496.0mm/s) (496.0mm/s)
1-2 400DPI 400DPI
(372.0mm/s)
Purpose Operation test/check 600DPI 600DPI
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner (248.0mm/s)
(reading) section and the related circuits.
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure 2-2
The operating status of the sensor is displayed. Purpose Operation test/check
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
tion.
sors and the detectors in the automatic
document feeder section and the control
circuits.
1-5
Section DSPF
Purpose Operation test/check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
(reading) unit and the control circuit. played.
Section Scanner (reading) The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
Operation/Procedure are highlighted.
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
Display Content
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. SSET DSPF installation detector
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan SOCD DSPF open/close sensor
resolution (operation speed). SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close sensor
SPED1 DSPF document empty sensor
Item/Display Operation mode Default value SPED2 DSPF document sensor
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1
(372.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s) SPPD2 DSPF document pass sensor 2
400DPI 400DPI SPPD3 DSPF document pass sensor 3
(372.0mm/s) SPPD4 DSPF document pass sensor 4
600DPI 600DPI SPPD5 DSPF document pass sensor 5
(248.0mm/s)
SPOD DSPF document exit sensor
1200DPI 1200DPI
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor
(124.0mm/s)
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short sensor
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long sensor
STLD DSPF document feed tray lower limit sensor
STUD DSPF document feed tray upper limit sensor
STMPU DSPF stamp unit installation detection
SWD_LEN DSPF guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm)
SWD_AD DSPF document detection volume output AD value

NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.

SIMULATION 6 – 9
2-3 No,/Display item Content
25 FSJOGD Finisher stapler alignment interference detection
Purpose Operation test/check 26 FSAD Finisher staple safety SW
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads 27 FSHTD Finisher shutter open detection
in the automatic document feeder and the 28 FCD Finisher connection detection
control circuit. 29 FFDD Finisher front cover open detection
Section DSPF 30 F24V Finisher 24V output interruption detection
31 FPSW1 Finisher PUSHSW1 detection
Operation/Procedure
32 FPSW2 Finisher PUSHSW2 detection
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel 33 FPSW3 Finisher PUSHSW3 detection
key. 34 FAED21 Finisher tray 2 area detection 1
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 35 FAED22 Finisher tray 2 area detection 2
The selected load performs the operation. 36 FAED23 Finisher tray 2 area detection 3
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Finisher (100-sheet stapling)
No,/Display item Content
Display Content
1 FNS103 Staple tray paper sensor
SPFM DSPF document feed transport motor
2 FNS122 Finisher tray 1 area 1 sensor
SPOM DSPF document exit motor
3 FNS123 Finisher tray 1 area 2 sensor
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor
4 FNS124 Finisher tray 1 area 3 sensor
SPFFAN DSPF cooling fan motor
5 FNS146 Discharge paper surface detection
SPFC DSPF document feed clutch
6 FNS149 YO paper surface sensor
SRRC DSPF No.2 registration roller clutch
7 FNS118 Process tray paper surface sensor
STRRC DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch
8 FNS143 Lower tray paper surface sensor
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch
9 FNS114 YOHP sensor
STMPS Stamp solenoid
10 FNS112 Take-up switch home position sensor
11 FNS135 Paper holding lever home position sensor
12 FNS111 Roller nip home position sensor
3 13 FNS142 Buffer flapper home position sensor
14 FNS102 Discharged paper detection
3-2 15 FNS101 Entry port paper detection
16 FNS131 Staple drive home position detection
Purpose Operation test/check
17 FNS128 Staple area sensor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- 18 FNSW110 Tray 1 interference switch
sors and the detectors in the finisher and 19 FNS134 Staple cart sensor
the control circuit. 20 FNS132 Staple lead edge position detection
Section Finisher 21 FNS133 Staple empty detection
22 FNS104 Tray 1 paper detection
Operation/Procedure
23 FNS105 Tray 2 paper detection
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
24 FNS130 Tray 3 paper detection
played.
25 FNPCH_CON Punch unit connection detection
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active 26 FNSW2 PUSHSW2 detection
are highlighted. 27 FNSW1 PUSHSW1 detection
NOTE: When the punch module is installed, the code names are 28 FNS107 Staple shift home position detection
displayed at the back of the sensor display. 29 FNS108 Alignment plate front home position sensor
30 FNS109 Alignment plate rear home position sensor
Finisher (50-sheet stapling) 31 FNS106 Shutter open detection
No,/Display item Content 32 FNS110 Oscillation guide open detection
1 PDPPD1 Finisher paper pass paper transport detector 1 33 FNSW3-1 DIPSW1 detection
2 PDPPD2 Finisher paper pass paper transport detector 2 34 FNSW3-2 DIPSW2 detection
3 PDOS Finisher paper pass cover open/close sensor 35 FNSW3-3 DIPSW3 detection
4 FED Finisher entry port paper detection 36 FNSW3-4 DIPSW4 detection
5 FAED1 Finisher tray 1 area detection 1 37 FNS129 Finisher front cover sensor
6 FAED2 Finisher tray 1 area detection 2 38 FNSW103 Stapler safety switch
7 FAED3 Finisher tray 1 area detection 3 39 FNSW101 Finisher front cover switch
8 FFJHPD Finisher alignment home position detection front 40 FNS148 Shutter close detection
9 FRJHPD Finisher alignment home position detection rear 41 FNSW102 Oscillation guide switch
10 FBED1 Finisher tray 1 paper detection 42 FNS125 Tray 2 area 1 sensor
11 FBED2 Finisher tray 2 paper detection 43 FNS126 Tray 2 area 2 sensor
12 FCCD Finisher tray approach detection 44 FNS127 Tray 2 area 3 sensor
13 FSLD1 Finisher tray 1 paper surface detection 45 FNS113 Rear edge falling home position sensor
14 FPDD1 Finisher discharged paper detection 46 FNS138 YO rear home position sensor
15 FSLD2 Finisher tray 2 paper surface detection 47 FNS139 YO front home position sensor
16 FASHPD Finisher rear edge assist home position detection 48 FNS136 Guide sub rear home position sensor
17 FSWHPD Finisher oscillation guide home position detection 49 FNS137 Guide sub front home position sensor
18 FSWOPD Finisher oscillation guide open detection 50 FN24V-DET 24V-DETECT
19 FSTPD Finisher staple tray paper detection 51 FN24V1-DET 24V1-DETECT
20 FSHPD Finisher staple drive home position detection 52 FNAC-RELAY-ON Relay on signal
21 FSTHPD Finisher staple shift home position detection 53 FNS115 Gripper home position sensor
22 FSD Finisher staple empty detection 54 FNS140 Gripper front/rear sensor
23 FSTD Finisher staple lead edge position detection 55 FNS116 Gripper base front sensor
24 FFANLK Finisher fan motor lock detection 56 FNS117 Gripper base rear sensor

SIMULATION 6 – 10
Saddle finisher (100-sheet stapling)
No,/Display item Content
57 FNM19-LD Load tray upper motor arm No,/Display item Content
58 FNM20-LD Load tray lower motor arm 1 FSS213 Pushing clock sensor
59 FNFAN2-ALM Power supply fan alarm 2 FSS214 Folding clock sensor
60 FNFAN1-ALM PWB cooling fan alarm 3 FSS228 Saddle tray paper sensor
61 FNFAN5-ALM Upper tray fan alarm 4 FSS219 Rear edge holding shift home position
62 FNFAN4-ALM Lower tray fan alarm 5 FSS221 Rear edge holding home position
63 FNS200 Cut staple sensor 6 FSS206 Alignment plate home position
64 FNSDL_CON Saddle connection detection 7 FSS205 Lead edge stopper home position
65 FNFOLD_CON Folding unit connection detection 8 FSS222 Pulling separation home position
66 FNGBC_CON GBC punch connection detection 9 FSS229 Folding home position sensor
67 FNFLD-ETR-ST- Folding unit EntryStartAck signal 10 FSS223 Staple drive home position sensor
ACK 11 FSS208 Pushing home position
68 FNFLD-EJCT-ST Folding unit EjectStart signal 12 FSS203 Vertical path sensor
69 PIS150 Transfer unit bus sensor 13 FSS226 Bundle paper exit path sensor 1
70 PISW200 Transfer unit front cover switch 14 FST-CON Trimmer connection detection
71 PIUNITMOT_ALM Transfer unit transport motor lock detection 15 FSS225 Staple 2 sensor
signal 16 FSS224 Staple 1 sensor
72 PIPASSUNIT-CON Transfer unit connection detection 17 FSS207 Roller guide home position sensor
18 FSS227 Bundle paper exit bus sensor 2
Saddle stitch finisher (50-sheet stapling) 19 FSS218 Rear edge sorting home position
No,/Display item Content 20 FSS201 Entry port path sensor
1 FSSUC Finisher saddle staple unit detection 21 FS24V-DET Interlock power supply (24V) detection
2 FSPIND Finisher saddle entry port paper detection
3 FSPDD Finisher saddle paper exit detection Punch module (Finisher (50-sheet stapling))
4 FSDTPD Finisher saddle tray paper detection No,/Display item Content
5 FS1PD Finisher saddle paper detection 1 1 FPE Punch motor lock detection
6 FS2PD Finisher saddle paper detection 2 2 FPUC Punch unit connection detection
7 FS3PD Finisher saddle paper detection 3 3 FPHPD Punch home position detection
8 FSLGE Finisher paper pushing plate motor lock detection 4 FPSHPD Punch side registration home position detection
9 FSLGHPD Finisher paper pushing plate home position detection 5 FPFDD Punch front door open detection
10 FSLGTD Finisher paper pushing plate lead edge position 6 FPDD Punch dust detection
detection 7 FPUDSW Punch upper cover open detection SW
11 FSFOE Finisher paper folding motor lock detection
12 FSFOHPD Finisher paper folding home position detection Punch module (Finisher (100-sheet stapling))
13 FSPPHPD Finisher paper positioning plate home position
detection No,/Display item Content
14 FSPPPD Finisher paper positioning plate paper detection 1 FCS105 Punch motor clock detection
15 FSAHPD Finisher alignment plate home position detection 2 FCPCB2 Punch dust sensor
16 FSSHPD Finisher stitcher home position detection 3 FCS104 Punch home position detection
17 FSVPPD Finisher vertical path paper detection 4 FCS101 Punch horizontal registration home position detection
18 FSCRPD Finisher semi-circular roller phase detection 5 FCPCB31 Punch horizontal registration A3 sensor
19 FSGHPD Finisher guide home position detection 6 FCPCB32 Punch horizontal registration LD sensor
20 FSSHP1 Finisher stitch operation home position detection 1 7 FCPCB33 Punch horizontal registration B4 sensor
21 FSSHP2 Finisher stitch operation home position detection 2 8 FCPCB34 Punch horizontal registration A4R sensor
22 FSSD1 Finisher saddle needle presence detection 1 9 FCPCB35 Punch horizontal registration B5R sensor
23 FSSD2 Finisher saddle needle presence detection 2 10 FCS102 Punch hole motor position sensor
24 FSGHPC Finisher paper folding guide home position sensor 11 FCS103 Punch hole motor 2-hole/3-hole sensor
connection detection 12 FCSW1-1 Punch DIPSW1
25 FSFOHPC Finisher paper folding home position sensor 13 FCSW1-2 Punch DIPSW2
connector connection detection
26 FSSHPC Finisher stitcher home position sensor connection DIPSW (Finisher (50-sheet stapling))
detection No,/Display item Content
27 FSLGTC Finisher paper pushing plate lead edge position 1 FDSW1 DIPSW1 detection
sensor connector connection detection
2 FDSW2 DIPSW2 detection
28 FSINDD Finisher inlet port cover open detection
3 FDSW3 DIPSW3 detection
29 FSINDSW Finisher saddle inlet port door detection
4 FDSW4 DIPSW4 detection
30 FSFDSW Finisher front door open detection SW
5 FDSW5 DIPSW5 detection
31 FSPSW1 Finisher S-PUSHSW detection
6 FDSW6 DIPSW6 detection
32 FSBHPC Finisher paper pushing plate home position sensor
7 FDSW7 DIPSW7 detection
connector connection detection
8 FDSW8 DIPSW8 detection

DIPSW (Saddle stitch finisher (50-sheet stapling))


No,/Display item Content
1 FSDSW1 S-DIPSWS1 detection
2 FSDSW2 S-DIPSWS2 detection
3 FSDSW3 S-DIPSWS3 detection
4 FSDSW4 S-DIPSWS4 detection
5 FSDSW5 S-DIPSWS5 detection
6 FSDSW6 S-DIPSWS6 detection
7 FSDSW7 S-DIPSWS7 detection
8 FSDSW8 S-DIPSWS8 detection

SIMULATION 6 – 11
Folding unit (100-sheet stapling) No,/Display item Content
No,/Display item Content 5 FAM Finisher bundle paper exit motor
1 FLENTRY Paper transfer start request 6 FFJM Finisher alignment motor front
2 FLEXIT_ACK Paper exit start response 7 FRJM Finisher alignment motor rear
3 FLS30 Speed reduction timing sensor 8 FSM Finisher staple shift motor
4 FLS31 Separation timing sensor 9 FTLM1 Finisher tray 1 lift motor
5 FLS32 Folding position accurate detection sensor 10 FTLM2 Finisher tray 2 lift motor
6 FLS33 Upper stopper section paper sensor 11 FFSM Finisher staple motor
7 FLS25 Lead edge guide home position sensor 12 FSWM Finisher oscillation motor
8 FLS24 Internal 3-fold stopper home position sensor 13 FASM Finisher rear edge assist motor
9 FLS23 Upper stopper section home position sensor 14 FINRRS Finisher inlet port roller separation solenoid
10 FLS22 Discharged 1 paper sensor 15 FBRRS Finisher buffer roller separation solenoid
11 FLS28 Internal 3-fold tray (intermediate tray) home 16 FFDRRS Finisher paper exit roller separation solenoid
position sensor 17 FBES Finisher buffer rear edge holding solenoid
12 FLS26 Internal 3-fold tray (paper exit tray) full sensor 18 FSHC Finisher shutter open/close clutch
13 FLS27 Internal 3-fold tray (intermediate tray) paper 19 FAORC Finisher bundle exit lower roller clutch
sensor
Finisher (100-sheet stapling)
14 FLS29 Folding unit pull-out sensor
15 FLORIHAN_LOCK Brushless motor lock detection signal No,/Display item Content
16 FLSW1 Front cover sensor 1 FNM101 Entry port transport motor
17 FLS20 Entry port sensor 2 FNM104 Paper delivery transport motor
18 FLS21 Discharged paper 2 sensor 3 FNM108 Front alignment motor
19 FLSW3-1 DipSW1 4 FNM107 Stapler shift motor
20 FLSW3-2 DipSW2 5 FNM105 Load tray upper motor
21 FLSW3-3 DipSW3 6 FNM115 Staple motor
22 FLSW3-4 DipSW4 7 FNM110 Oscillation guide motor
23 FLSW3-5 DipSW5 8 FNM102 Buffer transport motor
24 FLSW3-6 DipSW6 9 FNM106 Load tray lower motor
25 FLSW3-7 DipSW7 10 FNM119 Roller nip motor
26 FLSW3-8 DipSW8 11 FNM114 YO motor
27 FLSW1 PushSW1 12 FNM120 Guide motor
28 FLSW2 PushSW2 13 FNM113 Rear edge falling motor
29 FLFAN3_LOCK Power supply fan lock detection signal 14 FNM117 Gripper belt motor
15 FNM116 Gripper arm motor
Trimming module (100-sheet stapling) 16 FNM121 Take-up transport motor
No,/Display item Content 17 FNM112 Take-up swing motor
1 FTS108 Cutter motor clock sensor 18 FNM118 Paper holding lever motor
2 FTS105 Registration home position sensor 19 FNM109 Rear alignment motor
3 FTS106 Press motor home position sensor 20 FNCL102 Shutter clutch
4 FTS104 Rear estrangement motor home position sensor 21 FNM122 Paper delivery lower transport motor
5 FTS102 Front estrangement motor home position sensor 22 FNSL101 Oscillation safety switch solenoid
6 FTS103 Paper delivery sensor 23 FNFAN102 PWB cooling fan
7 FTS101 Inlet sensor 24 FNFAN103 Upper tray cooling fan
8 FTS111 Waste paper full sensor 25 FNFAN104 Lower tray cooling fan
9 FTS109 Waste paper box detection sensor 26 PIM301 Transfer unit transport motor lock (*1)
10 FTSW1-1 DIPSW1 detection
*1: Operates only when the transport unit is installed.
11 FTSW1-2 DIPSW2 detection
12 FTSW1-3 DIPSW3 detection Saddle stitch finisher (50-sheet stapling)
13 FTSW1-4 DIPSW4 detection
No,/Display item Content
14 FTSW2 PUSHSW detection
1 FPPM Finisher saddle paper positioning motor
2 FSIFM Finisher saddle entry port transport motor
3 FSFM Finisher saddle transport motor
4 FSFOM Finisher paper folding motor
3-3
5 FSGM Finisher guide motor
Purpose Operation test/check 6 FSJM Finisher saddle alignment motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in 7 FSFSTM Finisher stitch motor front
the finisher and the control circuit. 8 FSRSTM Finisher stitch motor rear
9 FSLGM Finisher paper holding motor
Section Finisher
10 FSFS Finisher saddle flapper solenoid
Operation/Procedure 11 FS1DFS Finisher paper deflection plate 1 solenoid
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. 12 FS2DFS Finisher paper deflection plate 2 solenoid
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 13 FSFCS Finisher transport plate contact solenoid
The selected load performs the operation.
Saddle stitch finisher (100-sheet stapling)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
No,/Display item Content
Finisher (50-sheet stapling) 1 FSM200 Entry port transport motor
No,/Display item Content 2 FSM201 Transport motor
1 PDPGS Finisher paper pass paper gate solenoid 3 FSM212 Alignment roller (lead edge roller) motor
2 PDPTM Finisher paper pass paper transport motor 4 FSSL206 Inlet port path select solenoid
3 PDCF Finisher paper pass cooling fan 5 FSSL205 Lead edge stopper solenoid
4 FFM Finisher paper transport motor 1 6 FSSL203 Lead edge separation solenoid 1

SIMULATION 6 – 12
No,/Display item Content Setting Default
Item/Display Content
7 FSSL204 Lead edge separation solenoid 2 range value
8 FSM202 Alignment motor E PUNCH Punch hole position 46 - 52 50
9 FSM203 Lead edge stopper motor HOLE adjustment
10 FSM204 Roller guide motor
Saddle stitch finisher (50-sheet stapling)
11 FSM210 Rear edge holding motor
12 FSM211 Rear edge shift motor Setting Default
Item/Display Content
13 FSM213 Flapping motor range value
14 FSM214 Pull-in roller (separation) motor A SADDLE Saddle stitch position 197 - 200
15 FSM209 Staple motor POSITION adjustment 203
16 FSM206 Folding motor B FOLDING Saddle folding position 192 - 200
POSITION adjustment 208
17 FSM205 Push motor
C FRONT Alignment position 0 - 20 10
Punch module (Finisher (50-sheet stapling)) ADJUST adjustment (front)
D STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 94 - 106 100
No,/Display item Content REAR (Rear, one position)
1 FPNM Punch motor E STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 94 - 106 100
2 FPSM Punch side registration motor FRONT (one position in front)
F PUNCH Punch center adjustment 30 - 70 50
Folding unit (100-sheet stapling) CENTER
No,/Display item Content G PUNCH Punch hole position 46 - 52 50
1 FLSOL2 Folding/Straight branch solenoid HOLE adjustment
2 FLSOL3 Separation solenoid
Finisher (100-sheet stapling)
3 FLSOL5 Internal 3-fold stopper solenoid
4 FLM11 Folding transport motor Setting Default
Item/Display Content
5 FLM15 Folding position adjustment motor range value
6 FLM13 Exit port motor 2 A BUFFER Buffer paper shift amount 50 - 150 100
7 FLM14 Exit port motor 1 SHIFT1 adjustment 1
8 FLM5 Inlet port motor B BUFFER Buffer paper shift amount 50 - 150 100
9 FLSOL4 Internal 3-fold tray branch solenoid SHIFT2 adjustment 2
10 FLM8 Upper stopper motor C ALIGNMENT Alignment width adjustment 50 - 150 100
11 FLM9 Internal 3-fold stopper adjustment motor D STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
FRONT (Front 1 position/Small width)
12 FLM10 Lead edge holding guide motor
(S-WIDTH)
13 FLM7 Internal 3-fold tray (intermediate tray) motor
E STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
14 FLCL3 Folding position adjustment clutch (normal)
FRONT (Front 1 position/Wide width)
15 FLCL4 Folding position adjustment clutch (reverse) (W-WIDTH)
F STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
Trimming module (100-sheet stapling) REAR (Rear 1 position/Small width)
No,/Display item Content (S-WIDTH)
1 FTM101 Trimmer transport motor G STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
2 FTM103 Inlet port separation motor REAR (Rear 1 position/Wide width)
(W-WIDTH)
3 FTM104 Paper delivery separation motor
H STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 85 - 115 100
4 FTM102 Registration motor
CENTER (Center 2 positions)
5 FTM106 Cutter motor
I PUNCH Y *1 Punch hole position 85 - 115 100
6 FTSL101 Registration solenoid
adjustment
7 FTM105 Press motor (Y: Main scanning direction)
8 FTSL102 Paddle solenoid J PUNCH X *1 Punch hole position 50 - 150 100
adjustment
(X: Sub scanning direction)
K PUNCH Punch mode skew 80 - 120 100
3-10 SKEW *1 adjustment
Purpose Adjustment L PUNCH Punch mode skew 80 - 120 100
SKEW SHIN *1 adjustment (thin paper)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.
Section Finisher *1: Not saved when the punch is not installed.
Operation/Procedure Saddle stitch finisher (100-sheet stapling)
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch Setting Default
panel. Item/Display Content
range value
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. A BUFFER Buffer paper shift amount 50 - 150 100
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) SHIFT1 adjustment 1
B BUFFER Buffer paper shift amount 50 - 150 100
Finisher (50-sheet stapling) SHIFT2 adjustment 2
Setting Default C ALIGNMENT Alignment width adjustment 50 - 150 100
Item/Display Content D STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
range value
A FRONT Alignment position 0 - 20 10 FRONT (Front 1 position/Small
ADJUST adjustment (front) (S-WIDTH) width)
B STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 94 - 106 100 E STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
REAR (Rear, one position) FRONT (Front 1 position/Wide
(W-WIDTH) width)
C STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 94 - 106 100
FRONT (one position in front) F STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
REAR (Rear 1 position/Small
D PUNCH Punch center adjustment 30 - 70 50
(S-WIDTH) width)
CENTER

SIMULATION 6 – 13
Setting Default Display Sensor name
Item/Display Content
range value LWRLMT2 No. 2 lower limit detection
G STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100 LWRLMT1 No. 1 lower limit detection
REAR (Rear 1 position/Wide width) UPRLMT2 No. 2 upper limit detection
(W-WIDTH) UPRLMT1 No. 1 upper limit detection
H STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 85 - 115 100 INSHP2 No. 2 pickup arm HP detection
CENTER (Center 2 positions)
INSHP1 No. 1 pickup arm HP detection
I PUNCH Y *2 Punch hole position 85 - 115 100
INSEXT Outlet port sensor
adjustment (Y: Main
INSSZ13 No. 1 paper size sensor 3
scanning direction)
INSSZ12 No. 1 paper size sensor 2
J PUNCH X *2 Punch hole position 50 - 150 100
adjustment (X: Sub INSSZ11 No. 1 paper size sensor 1
scanning direction) PPRLNG2 No. 2 length sensor
K PUNCH Punch mode skew 80 - 120 100 PPRLNG1 No. 1 length sensor
SKEW *2 adjustment PPREND2 No. 2 paper end detection
L PUNCH Punch mode skew 80 - 120 100 PPREND1 No. 1 paper end detection
SKEW SHIN *2 adjustment (thin paper) NEREND2 No. 2 near end detection
M SDL FOLD Saddle folding position 80 - 120 100 FECVROP1 No. 1 paper size sensor
adjustment INSSZ25 No. 2 paper size sensor 5
N SDL STPL Saddle stitch position 80 - 120 100 INSSZ24 No. 2 paper size sensor 4
adjustment INSSZ23 No. 2 paper size sensor 3
O SDL DIVIDE Saddle separation position 85 - 115 100 INSSZ22 No. 2 paper size sensor 2
adjustment INSSZ21 No. 2 paper size sensor 1
P SDL WIDTH Saddle alignment width 80 - 120 100 INSSZ15 No. 1 paper size sensor 5
adjustment
INSSZ14 No. 1 paper size sensor 4
Q STPL/FOLD 1 Stapling/Folding position 42 - 58 50
INSFDRSW Front door SW
adjustment value 13x19
VTRCVRSW Vertical transport cover SW
R UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50
FECVROP2 No. 2 cover open detection
FOLD 1 adjustment value A4R/LTRR
S UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50
FOLD 2 adjustment value B4/LGL
T UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50
3-31
FOLD 3 adjustment value A3/LDR
U UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50 Purpose Operation check
FOLD 4 adjustment value SRA3/ Function (Purpose) Inserter individual load check
12x18
V UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50
Section Inserter
FOLD 5 adjustment value 13x19 Operation/Procedure
W UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50 1) Press the name of the signal to which a load is applied with the
FOLD 6 adjustment value (User- touch panel key.
defined size)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start the load operation.
X TRIMMER Trimmer registration position 50 - 150 100
REG S *1 adjustment (Small size) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key again to stop the operation.
Y TRIMMER Trimmer registration position 50 - 150 100
[Display items]
REG L *1 adjustment (Large size)
Z TRIMMER Trimmer cut position 50 - 150 100 Display Content
CUT S *1 adjustment (Small size) TRSH_M Horizontal transport motor
AA TRIMMER Trimmer cut position 50 - 150 100 TRSV_M Vertical transport motor
CUT L *1 adjustment (Large size) PLOUT2_M No. 2 pull-out motor
PLOUT1_M No. 1 pull-out motor
*1: Setting can be made only when the trimmer unit is installed.
FEED2_M No. 2 paper feed motor
*2: Not saved when the punch is not installed. FEED1_M No. 1 paper feed motor
PIKUP2_M No. 2 pickup motor
PIKUP1_M No. 2 pickup motor
3-30 TRYLFT2M No. 2 lift motor
TRYLFT1M No. 1 lift motor
Purpose Operation check
Function (Purpose) Inserter sensor check
Section Inserter
Operation/Procedure 3-40
1) When each sensor is turned ON, the sensor name displayed Purpose Operation check
on the screen is highlighted. Function (Purpose) Paper folding unit sensor check
2) Use the touch panel scroll key to shift between pages. Section Paper folding unit
Display Sensor name Operation/Procedure
INSENT Inlet port sensor 1) When each sensor is turned ON, the sensor name displayed
INSOUT Paper exit sensor on the screen is highlighted.
VTRS2 No. 2 vertical transport sensor 2) Use the touch panel scroll key to shift between pages.
VTRS1 No. 1 vertical transport sensor
PLOUT2 No. 2 pull-out sensor Sensor name Content
PLOUT1 No. 1 pull-out sensor (Display)
INSFEED2 No. 2 paper feed sensor FLENTRY Paper reception start request
INSFEED1 No. 1 paper feed sensor FLEXIT_ACK Paper exit start response
NEREND1 No. 1 near end detection FLS30 Speed reduction timing sensor
FLS31 Separation timing sensor

SIMULATION 6 – 14
Sensor name Content
Setting Default
(Display) Item/Display Content
range value
FLS32 Folding position accurate sensor
A FOLD S1 A3 A3 Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
FLS33 Upper stopper section paper sensor position adjustment
FLS25 Lead edge hold guide HP sensor B FOLD S2 A3 A3 Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
FLS24 Internal 3-fold stopper HP sensor position adjustment
FLS23 Upper stopper section HP sensor C FOLD S1 B4 B4 Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
FLS22 Paper exit 1 paper sensor position adjustment
FLS28 Internal 3-fold tray (Intermediate tray) HP sensor D FOLD S2 B4 B4 Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
FLS26 Internal 3-fold tray (Paper exit tray) full sensor position adjustment
FLS27 Internal 3-fold tray (Intermediate tray) paper sensor E FOLD S1 A4R A4R Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
FLS29 Folding unit pull-out sensor position adjustment
FLORIHAN_LOCK Brushless motor lock detection signal F FOLD S2 A4R A4R Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
FLFSW1 Front cover sensor position adjustment
FLS20 Inlet port senor G FOLD S1 LDR LDR Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
FLS21 Paper exit 2 sensor position adjustment
FLSW3-1 DipSW1 H FOLD S2 LDR LDR Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
position adjustment
FLSW3-2 DipSW2
I FOLD S1 LGL LGL Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
FLSW3-3 DipSW3
position adjustment
FLSW3-4 DipSW4
J FOLD S2 LGL LGL Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
FLSW3-5 DipSW5
position adjustment
FLSW3-6 DipSW6
K FOLD S1 LTRR Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
FLSW3-7 DipSW7 LTRR position adjustment
FLSW3-8 DipSW8 L FOLD S2 LTRR Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
FLSW1 PushSW1 LTRR position adjustment
FLSW2 PushSW2 M FOLD IN T1 A4R internal 3-fold first 50 - 150 100
FLFAN3_LOCK Power fan lock detection signal A4R folding position adjustment
N FOLD IN T2 A4R internal 3-fold second 50 - 150 100
A4R folding position adjustment
O FOLD IN T1 LTRR internal 3-fold first 50 - 150 100
3-41 LTRR folding position adjustment
Purpose Operation check P FOLD IN T2 LTRR internal 3-fold second 50 - 150 100
LTRR folding position adjustment
Function (Purpose) Paper fold unit individual load check
Q FOLD OUT A4R external 3-fold first 50 - 150 100
Section Paper folding unit T1 A4R folding position adjustment
Operation/Procedure R FOLD OUT A4R external 3-fold second 50 - 150 100
T2 A4R folding position adjustment
1) Press the name of the signal to which a load is applied with the
S FOLD OUT LTRR external 3-fold first 50 - 150 100
touch panel key.
T1 LTRR folding position adjustment
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start the load operation. T FOLD OUT LTRR external 3-fold second 50 - 150 100
3) Press [EXECUTE] key again to stop the operation. T2 LTRR folding position adjustment
U FOLD Q1 A4R 4-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
[Display item] A4R position adjustment
No,/Display Content V FOLD Q2 A4R 4-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
1 FLSOL2 Folding/Straight branch solenoid A4R position adjustment
2 FLSOL3 Separation solenoid W FOLD Q1 LTRR 4-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
3 FLSOL5 Internal 3-fold stopper solenoid LTRR position adjustment
4 FLM11 Folding transport motor X FOLD Q2 LTRR 4-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
LTRR position adjustment
5 FLM15 Folding position adjustment motor
Y FOLD Q1 LGL LGL 4-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
6 FLM13 Outlet port motor 2
position adjustment
7 FLM14 Outlet port motor 1
Z FOLD Q2 LGL LGL 4-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
8 FLM5 Inlet port motor
position adjustment
9 FLSOL4 Internal 3-fold tray branch solenoid
AA FOLD H1 A4R A4R 2-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
10 FLM8 Upper stopper motor position adjustment
11 FLM9 Internal 3-fold stopper adjustment motor AB FOLD H1 LTRR 2-fold first position 50 - 150 100
12 FLM10 Lead edge hold guide motor LTRR adjustment
13 FLM7 Internal 3-fold tray (Intermediate tray) motor AC FOLD IN S Z-fold X position fine 46 - 53 50
14 FLCL3 Folding position adjustment clutch (Normal) FINE adjustment designation data
15 FLCL4 Folding position adjustment clutch (Reverse) AD FOLD IN T Internal 3-fold X position fine 36 - 60 48
FINE adjustment designation data
AE FOLD OUT T External 3-fold X position 36 - 60 48
FINE fine adjustment designation
3-42 data
AF FOLD Q1 4-fold X position fine 46 - 60 48
Purpose Adjustment
FINE adjustment designation data
Function (Purpose) Paper folding unit adjustment AG FOLD Q2 4-fold Y position fine 50 - 60 52
Section Paper folding unit FINE adjustment designation data
AH FOLD H FINE 2-fold X position fine 46 - 54 50
Operation/Procedure
adjustment designation data
1) Select an adjustment item with the touch panel scroll key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.

SIMULATION 6 – 15
Variation
Item Content Variation
value Item Content
value
A When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
M When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
a is decreased.
a is decreased.
B When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
N When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased.
b is decreased.
C When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
O When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
a is decreased.
a is decreased.
D When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
P When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased.
b is decreased.
E When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
a is decreased.
F When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased.
G When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of Variation
a is decreased. Item Content
value
H When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm Q When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased. a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased. a is decreased.
I When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm R When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased. b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
a is decreased. b is decreased.
J When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm S When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased. a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased. a is decreased.
K When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm T When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased. b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
a is decreased. b is decreased.
L When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased.

SIMULATION 6 – 16
Item Content Variation
value
AD When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
a is decreased.

Variation
Item Content
value
U When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of Variation
Item Content
a is decreased. value
V When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm AE When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
b is increased. a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased. a is decreased.
W When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
a is decreased.
X When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased.
Y When the adjustment value is increased, the length of
Variation
a is increased. Item Content
0.1mm value
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
a is decreased. AF When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
a is increased.
Z When the adjustment value is increased, the length of
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is increased.
0.1mm a is decreased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased.

Variation
Variation Item Content
Item Content value
value AG When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
AA When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm b is increased.
b is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of b is decreased.
b is decreased.
AB When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased.

Variation
Item Content
value
AH When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
a is decreased.
Variation
Item Content
value
AC When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
a is decreased.

SIMULATION 6 – 17
3-50 4
Purpose Operation check
Function (Purpose) Decurler sensor check 4-2
Section Decurler Purpose Operation test/check
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
1) When each sensor is turned ON, the sensor name displayed sors and detectors in the desk/large capac-
on the screen is highlighted. ity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of
2) Use the touch panel scroll key to shift between pages. those.
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
No,/Sensor name (Display) Content
Operation/Procedure
1 DCS100 Decurler unit transport path sensor
2 DCTRS_MOT_FAULT Decurler transport motor driver IC error
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
detection signal played.
3 DCSW100 Decurler unit front cover switch The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
4 DCMOT_FAN_LOCK Decurler unit fan 3 alarm signal are highlighted.
5 DCTOP_FAN_LOCK Decurler unit fan 1 alarm signal
A4LCC sensor
6 DCBTM_FAN_LOCK Decurler unit fan 2 alarm signal
7 DCSW1-1 DIPSW1detection Display Content
8 DCSW1-2 DIPSW2 detection LPFD LCC transport detector
9 DCSW1-3 DIPSW3 detection LUD LCC tray upper limit detector
10 DCSW1-4 DIPSW4 detection LDD LCC tray lower limit detector
11 DCSW2 PUSHSW detection LPED LCC tray paper empty detector
12 PDPPD1 Finisher paper relay paper transport LCLD LCC tray open/close detector
detector 1 LDSW LCC upper open/close detection switch
13 PDPPD2 Finisher paper relay paper transport LRE LCC lift motor encoder
detector 2 L24VM LCC24V power monitor
14 PDOS Finisher paper relay cover open/close LLSW LCC upper limit switch
sensor LCCD LCC main unit connection detection
15 FFANLK Finisher fan motor lock detection
A3LCC sensor
Display Content
LPFD LCC transport detector
3-51
LUD LCC tray upper limit detector
Purpose Operation check LDD LCC tray lower limit detector
Function (Purpose) Decurler individual load check LPED LCC tray paper empty detector
Section Decurler unit LCLD LCC tray open/close detector
LDSW LCC upper open/close detection switch
Operation/Procedure
LRE LCC lift motor encoder
1) Press the name of the signal to which a load is applied with the L24VM LCC24V power monitor
touch panel key. LLSW LCC upper limit switch
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start the load operation. LPUSW LCC paper upper surface detection switch
3) Press [EXECUTE] key again to stop the operation. LRRSW LCC reverse winding detection switch
LTLSW LCC tray lift switch
[Display item]
LTLD LCC tray lock sensor
No./Display Content LIPSW LCC illegal paper detection SW
1 DCM100 Decurler transport motor LTOD LCC main unit connection detection
2 DCFAN100 Decurler unit fan 1
3 DCFAN101 Decurler unit fan 2
4 DCFAN103 Decurler unit fan 3
5 PDPTM Finisher paper relay paper transport motor 4-3
6 PDPGS Finisher paper relay paper gate solenoid Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and
the control circuit of those.
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
A4LCC
Display Content
LPFM LCC transport motor
LLM LCC lift motor
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid

SIMULATION 6 – 18
Display Content
LTRC LCC transport clutch 5
A3LCC
5-1
Display Content
Purpose Operation test/check
LPFM LCC transport motor
LLM LCC lift motor Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid cuit.
LTRC LCC transport clutch Section Operation panel
LTLED LCC tray LED lamp
Operation/Procedure
LTLS LCC tray lock solenoid
The LCD is changed as shown below.
LFAN LCC separation auxiliary fan
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX -
MIN - the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are
4-5 checked.
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the LCC
paper transport clutch (LTRC). ǂǂNO.05-01
ǂǂǂSIMULATION
7(67

Section Large capacity tray (LCC)


Operation/Procedure
Check the ON operation
Press the button of the code name for checking the ON operation.
Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
highlighted.
Check the OFF operation
Press the highlighted button which is ON.
When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
display is maintained.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67

Button Content
LTRC A4LCC, A3LCC, multi-stage LCT transport clutch

5-2
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater
lamp and the control circuit.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Heater lamp operation check method:
Remove the front cabinet upper and the paper exit tray, and the
lighting status of each heater lamp can be checked through the
clearance between the fusing pressure release drive gear and the
frame fusing section.

Display Content
HL_UM Heater lamp main (Front surface of paper heat roller)
HL_US Heater lamp sub (Front surface of paper heat roller)
HL_UW Upper assist heater lamp (Warm-up)

SIMULATION 6 – 19
5-3 Item display name Content
Purpose Operation test/check Transport/ PFM PS front motor
process RRM Registration motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
POMF Paper exit motor (normal rotation)(*1)
lamp and the control circuit.
POMR Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)(*1)
Section Scanner (reading) FUM Fusing motor
Operation/Procedure WTM Waste toner transport motor
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. PTRC1 Tray vertical transport clutch
PTRC2 Vertical transport clutch upper
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
PSPS Detachment solenoid
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec. HPFM Horizontal transport motor
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. TTRC Tandem transport clutch
Descriptions of loads (for DSPF) Paper feed CPFM Paper feed motor
T1LUM Tandem tray 1 lift motor
Display Content T2LUM Tandem tray 2 lift motor
OC COPY LAMP OC copy lamp C3LUM Tray 3 lift motor
DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF copy lamp C4LUM Tray 4 lift motor
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch
T1PUC Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch
T2PUC Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch
5-4 C3PUC Tray 3 paper feed clutch
Purpose Operation test/check C4PUC Tray 4 paper feed clutch
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis- MPFS Manual feed take-up solenoid
charge lamp and the control circuit. MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid
T1PUS Tray 1 pickup solenoid
Section Process
T2PUS Tray 2 pickup solenoid
Operation/Procedure C3PUS Tray 3 pickup solenoid
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key. C4PUS Tray 4 pickup solenoid
When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
*1: If "Normal rotation" and "Reverse rotation" of a same load are
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
displayed as different items, when the both are selected at the
The selected discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec. same time, "Normal rotation" is performed. In addition, a
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. change in the rotating direction is accepted only when the
operation is stopped.
Item name Content
DL1 Discharge lamp
DL2 After-transfer discharge lamp
PTDL Before-transfer discharge lamp 6-2
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan
motor and its control circuit.

6 Section Others
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
6-1
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Operation test/check
The selected load performs the operation.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
the paper transport system (clutches and
solenoids) and the control circuits. Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively.
Load operation check method:
Section Paper transport/Paper exit section
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
Operation/Procedure
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. sound.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Display Content
The selected load performs the operation.
POFM1 Paper exit section cooling fan motor 1
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
POFM3 Paper exit section cooling fan motor 3
Load operation check method: POFM4 Exit tray cooling fan motor
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, OZFM Ozone fan motor
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation PSFM Power source cooling fan motor
sound. LSUFM LSU fan motor
PROFM Process cooling fan motor
FUFM Fusing cooling fan motor 1,2
DVFM1 Development cooling fan motor 1
DVFM2 Development cooling fan motor 2
POFM56 Paper cooling fan motor F,R
HDDFM HDD fan motor

SIMULATION 6 – 20
WARMUP DISABLE Warming up ignoring setting
6-3
DV CHECK DISABLE Developing unit ignoring setting
Purpose Operation test/check SHADING DISABLE Shading correction operation omitting setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the transfer CCD GAIN FREE CCD gain adjustment omitting setting
unit and the control circuit.
Section Process (Transfer)
Operation/Procedure 7-6
1) Select the item to operation checked with the touch panel key.
Purpose Setting
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging
The selected load performs the operation. cycle.
When [EXCUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Section
Operation/Procedure
Button Content Remarks
PAGE1 JOINT Transfer unit pressure welding 1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10-
RELEASE Transfer unit estrangement key.
PAGE2 JOINT Transfer unit pressure welding Rotary 2) Press [OK] key.
movement The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
RELEASE Transfer unit estrangement
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec).
Rotary movement
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.

6-4 Item Display Setting range Default value


A CYCLE TIME(SEC) 1 - 900 3
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the cleaning operation of the 7-8
main charger.
Purpose Operation display
Section Process
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) When cleaner movement is finished normally, [OK] is dis-
played.When an error is finished, one of [NG] is displayed. Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for
warm-up is displayed
* When I stop it forcibly, [INTERRUPTION] is displayed.
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
* As for the counter level, cleaning movement is improved after
arrival by R → F.
7-12
6-90 Purpose Operation test/check
Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets
setting (for aging operation)
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the machine to the factory
setting. (The scanner is set to the lock Section DSPF
enable position) Operation/Procedure
Section Scanner 1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure (Setting range:0 - 255)
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
The scanner is shifted to the lock enable position and stopped. The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.

Setting Default
7 Item Display Content
range value
A ORIGINALS Document scan quantity 0 - 255 0
specification (for aging)
7-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
aging.
Section Others
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.

AGING Aging operation setup


INTERVAL Intermittent operation setting
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection ignoring setting
FUSING DISABLE Fusing unit ignoring setting

SIMULATION 6 – 21
*The low-speed setting is coordinated at the same time by doing
8 adjustment of middle speed.

8-1
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
the developing voltage in each print mode
and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
low speed are also adjusted simultane-
ously.
Section Process (Developing)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
panel.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
3) Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the
label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.

Setting Default
Button Item Display Content
range value
MIDDLE A MIDDLE K developing 0 - 700 506
SPEED bias set value at
DVB_K middle speed
LOW A LOW K developing 0 - 700 506
SPEED bias set value at
DVB_K low speed 1

*The low-speed setting is coordinated at the same time by doing


adjustment of middle speed.

8-2
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
low speed are also adjusted simultane-
ously.
Section Process (Charging)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
panel.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified
on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.

Item/ Setting Default


Button Content
Display range value
MIDDLE A MIDDLE K charging/grid bias set 150 - 850 673
SPEED value at middle speed
GB_K
LOW A LOW1 K charging/grid bias set 150 - 850 669
SPEED value at low speed 1
GB_K

SIMULATION 6 – 22
1 : ‘14/Dec

8-6
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
1 the transfer electric current and the control
circuit.
1 Section Process (Transfer)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.

Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content 65 cpm 75 cpm
range
machine machine
A TC PLAIN BW SPX Transfer bias reference value Standard paper Front surface 0 - 255 113 129
B TC PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 113 129
C TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX Heavy paper 1 Front surface 0 - 255 129 129
D TC HEAVY1 BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 129 129
E TC HEAVY2 BW SPX Heavy paper 2 0 - 255 113 113
F TC HEAVY3 BW SPX Heavy paper 3 0 - 255 113 113
G TC OHP BW OHP 0 - 255 113 113
H TC ENVELOPE BW Envelope 0 - 255 97 113
I TC THIN BW Thin paper 0 - 255 97 129
J TC GLOSSY BW Glossy paper 0 - 255 97 129
K TC ADSORPTION Transfer current value at adsorption 0 - 255 113 129
L TC INTERVAL BIAS MID Current value between papers Middle speed 0 - 255 113 129
M TC INTERVAL BIAS LOW Low speed 0 - 255 113 129
N TC FRONT EDGE MID Transfer front edge bias Middle speed 0 - 255 0 0
O TC FRONT EDGE LOW Low speed 0 - 255 0 0
P TC BACKEND MID Transfer rear bias Middle speed 0 - 255 0 0
Q TC BACKEND LOW Low speed 0 - 255 0 0
R TC CLEANING AC Transfer cleaning bias Cleaning in the normal operation mode 0 - 255 113 129
S TC CLEANING DC Cleaning in the process control mode 0 - 255 113 129
T PTDL SPX Discharges before transfer Front surface 0 - 255 129 129
U PTDL DPX operation Back surface 0 - 255 129 129

8-10
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Main charger total current output setting
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.

Current value
Setting Default
Button Item Display Content Minimum
range value Variable range
unit
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED MC_K Main charger total current (middle speed mode) K 50 - 100 70 -500 - -1000A 10A
LOW1 A LOW1 SPEED MC_K Main charger total current (low speed 1 mode) K 50 - 100 70 -500 - -1000A 10A

SIMULATION 6 – 23
1 : ‘14/Dec

8-17
1 Purpose Operation test / check /Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Check and adjust the operation of the
1 cleaning bias and the control circuit.
Section Transfer
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec. When [EXECUTE] key is
pressed during outputting, the operation is terminated.
Default
Item Display Content Content SPD Setting range
value
A TC CLEANING ROLLER+ Transfer cleaning roller output Print mode - 0 - 255 128
B TC CLEANING ROLLER- Cleaning mode - 0 - 255 128
C TC DRIVERROLL MID(FACE) Separation bias output (Front surface) MID 0 - 255 0
D TC DRIVERROLL MID(BACK) Separation bias output (Back surface) MID 0 - 255 0
E TC DRIVERROLL MID(FACE) Separation bias output (Front surface) LOW 0 - 255 0
F TC DRIVERROLL MID(BACK) Separation bias output (Back surface) LOW 0 - 255 0

8-30
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Check and adjust the operation of the drum
cleaning output.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.

Default value
Item Display Content Setting range 65 cpm 75 cpm Output range
machine machine
A DR CLEANING DC Drum cleaning 0 - 255 164 164 0:-700[V] -
(+200V) (+200V) 255:700[V]
B DR CLEANING DC INTERVAL Drum cleaning between papers 0 - 255 91 91 0:-700[V] -
(-200V) (-200V) 255:700[V]
C DR CLEANING AC Drum cleaning AC 0 - 255 51 51 0:0[V]
(100Vp-p) (100Vp-p) 51:100[V] -
255:3700[V]
D DR CLEANING AC INTERVAL Drum cleaning AC between papers 0 - 255 51 51 0:0[V]
(100Vp-p) (100Vp-p) 51:100[V] -
255:3700[V]

SIMULATION 6 – 24
10-2
9 Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
9-2 remaining quantity sensor and the control
Purpose Operation test/check circuit.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Section Toner supply section
sors and detectors in the paper reverse Operation/Procedure
section (duplex section) and its control cir- Press [EXECUTE] key to display "No toner remaining" or "Toner
cuit. remaining" in the toner hopper.
Section Duplex No toner remaining: Reversing display during practice -Normal dis-
Operation/Procedure play-turn into reversing display
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- Toner remaining: As reversing display during the practice
played.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active Display Content
are highlighted. TFSD Hopper remaining quantity sensor

APPD1 ADU paper transport detector 1


APPD2 ADU paper transport detector 2 13
DSW_ADU ADU paper guide open/close detector
13--
9-3 Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in Section
the paper reverse section (duplex section)
Operation/Procedure
and its control circuit.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Duplex
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
Target trouble code Content
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
U1-01 FAX Battery trouble
The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
14
Display Content
ADUM1 ADU motor 1 14--
ADUM2 ADU motor 2
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5
troubles.
10 Section
Operation/Procedure
10-1 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Operation test/check 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
supply mechanism (toner motor) and the Target trouble code Content
related circuit. H3-00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM)
H3-02 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US)
Section Toner supply section
H4-00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM)
Operation/Procedure
H4-02 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US)
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key. H4-30 Upper main thermistor differential input
When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected. abnormality (TH_UM)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. H4-32 Upper sub thermistor differential input abnormality
(TH_US1)
The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
NOTE: This simulation must be executed without installing the
toner cartridges. 15
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing
15--
unit, resulting in over toner.
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)

Display Content Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6" trouble.
TNHM1 Toner hopper motor (Supply) Section LCC
TNHM2 Toner hopper motor (Stirring) Operation/Procedure
TNM Toner motor (Bottle)
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
TNM_H Toner motor (Bottle) (High speed)
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.

SIMULATION 6 – 25
Display
Target trouble code Content Target Default range/
Display Description
U6-09 LCC lift motor trouble counter value No. of
F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble digits
F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble Print PRINT (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
print counter
Document DOC FIL (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
filing document filing
16 print counter
Other OTHER (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
other counter
16--
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
22-2
Section MFPC PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to check the total number of miss
feed and troubles. (When the number of
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
total jam is considerably great, it is judged
as necessary for repair.)
Section
21 Operation/Procedure
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
21-1
Purpose Setting Display Content Default value
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
RSPF/DSPF JAM SPFJAM counter 0
Section TROUBLE Trouble counter 0
Operation/Procedure
* Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance
counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing clean-
ing roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not 22-3
clarify. Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the
panel. misfeed count of each position.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. * Presumption of the faulty point by this
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) data is possible.
Section
Default Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Content Setting range
value The paper jam and miss feed history is displayed from the latest
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0: Default 400K one up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
COUNTER counter (Total) 1 - 500: 1K - 500K
(TOTAL) 999: Free

22-4
22 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his-
tory.
22-1
Section
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/
Check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.
section and each operation mode. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
Section
22-5
Operation/Procedure
Change the display page with scroll key on the touch panel. Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each
Display unit (section).
Target Default range/
counter
Display Description
value No. of
Section Firmware
digits Operation/Procedure
Total output TOTAL OUT Total output 0 Max. 8 The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed.
quantity (BW) quantity of black When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to
and white check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.
Total use TOTAL (BW) Total use quantity 0 Max. 8
quantity of color Display Content
TOTAL (COL) Total use quantity 0 Max. 8 S/N Serial No.
of black and white (The codes for November and December are "X" and
Copy COPY (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8 "Y" respectively.)
copy counter ICUM(MAIN) ICUM(MAIN)

SIMULATION 6 – 26
Display Content Number of
ICUM(BIOS) ICUM(BIOS) digits of Default
Display Content
ICU(MAIN) ICU1 (Main section) display or value
ICU(BOOT) ICU1 (Boot section) type
ICU(SUB) ICU1 Sub section (ARM9) PUNCHER Puncher counter 8 digits 0
LANGUAGE Language support data version STAMP Stamp counter 8 digits 0
UICONTENTS Content data for display SADDLE Saddle staple counter 8 digits 0
STAPLER
SIM_TEXT SIM display data
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold 8 digits 0
PCU PCU
counter
SCU SCU
COVER Cover open/close counter 8 digits 0
SPF SPF
HP_ON HP detection count 8 digits 0
FAX1(MAIN) FAX 1-Line (Main section)
TRIMMER Trimmer counter 8 digits 0
LCC Side LCC
FOLDING Paper folding counter 8 digits 0
FINISHER Finisher
INSERTER Inserter counter (Tray 1) 8 digits 0
SADDLE Saddle unit (Main section)
INSERTER2 Inserter counter (Tray 2) 8 digits 0
PUNCH Punch unit
INSERTER OFF Inserter offline counter 8 digits 0
TRIMMER Trimmer unit
DECURLER De-curler counter 8 digits 0
INSERTER Inserter
OC LAMP TIME Displays the total lighting *****:** 0
FOLDING UNIT Folding unit
time of the lamp in the OC
DECURLER Relay unit (Decurler) section.
NIC NIC DSPF LAMP Displays the total lighting *****:** 0
POWER-CON Power controller TIME time of the lamp in the
E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage) DSPF section.
WATER MARK Watermark (HDD storage)
ESCP ESCP font ROM The lamp lighting time is displayed in ** hours ** minutes.
ACRE(MAIN) ACRE (Main section) The lamp lighting time is accumulated in all the modes.
ACRE(DATA) ACRE (Data section)
EOSA embedded OSA
22-9
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
22-6 Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check quantity) of each paper feed section.
Function (Purpose) Used to output the setting/adjustment data Section Paper feed, ADU, LCC
(simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the Operation/Procedure
firmware version, and the counter list. The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.
Section
Display No. of Default
Operation/Procedure Content
item digits value
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter 8 digits 0
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing. TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter 8 digits 0
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.) TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter 8 digits 0
1) Select the print list mode with 10-key. TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter 8 digits 0
MFT Manual paper feed counter (*1) 8 digits 0
Item Print list mode Print content LCC Side LCC paper feed counter 8 digits 0
DATA PATTERN NO.1 Firmware version, counter data, etc. (A4LCCorA3LCC) (*1)
NO.3 Data related to the process control ADU ADU paper feed counter 8 digits 0
2SIDED PRINT 1-SIDED Simplex surface print (Default)
2-SIDED Duplex surface print

2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step 22-10
1).
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration
(option, internal hardware).
22-8
Section
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations
The system configuration is displayed.
(counter value) of the finisher, the DSPF,
and the scan (reading) unit. (The model names of the installed devices and options are dis-
played.)
Section
Operation/Procedure Item display
Display content Content
The counter values of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scanner name
related counters are displayed. MACHINE MX-M654N Main unit
MX-M754N
Number of SPF STANDARD Duplex single pass feeder
digits of Default STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp
Display Content
display or value LCC MX-LC15 A4 large capacity tray
type MX-LC16 A3 large capacity tray
SPF Document feed quantity 8 digits 0
SCAN Scan counter 8 digits 0
STAPLER Staple counter 8 digits 0

SIMULATION 6 – 27
Item display 22-12
Display content Content
name
PUNCHER MX-PN12A Punch module Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
MX-PN12B Function (Purpose) Used to check the DSPF misfeed positions
MX-PN12C and the number of misfeed at each posi-
MX-PN12D tion. (When the number of misfeed is con-
MX-PN13A siderably great, it can be judged as
MX-PN13B necessary for repair.)
MX-PN13C Section DSPF
MX-PN13D
Operation/Procedure
FINISHER MX-FN21 4K finisher (100 sheets staple)
MX-FN22 4K saddle finisher The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
(100 sheets staple) up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
MX-FN19 4K finisher (50 sheets staple)
MX-FN20 4K saddle finisher
(50 sheets staple)
INSERTER MX-CF11 Inserter
FOLDING UNIT MX-FD10 Folding unit
FAX1 MX-FX11 Facsimile expansion kit
PS STANDARD PS expansion kit
XPS MX-PUX1 XPS expansion kit
SECURITY MX-FR47 Data security kit (Authentication
version)
MX-FR47U Data security kit (commercial
version)
AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
SDRAM(SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
SDRAM(ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
HDD *****GB Hard disk capacity
SD *****GB SD capacity
NIC STANDARD NIC
BARCODE MX-PF10 Barcode font kit
INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
ACM(*1) MX-AMX2 Application communication module
EAM(*1) MX-AMX3 External account module
WEB MX-AM10 Web browsing expansion kit
BROWSING
ACRE STANDARD Enhanced compression kit (ACRE)
MIRRORING MX-EB12N Mirroring kit
CF *****MB CF card capacity
CURL MX-RB15 Curl correction unit
TRIMMING MX-TM10 Trimming module
(100 sheets saddle finisher)

*1: Option units are displayed only when they are installed.

22-11
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/
receive) of FAX.
(Only when FAX is installed)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
are displayed.

Default
Display Content
value
FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1) 0
FAX SEND FAX send counter 0
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter 0
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1) 0
SEND TIME FAX send time 0
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time 0

SIMULATION 6 – 28
22-13
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
cartridge) and the fusing unit
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The number of prints and the number of rotations in the process
section are displayed.

Number of Life meter (+/- Number of


Display item Content Counter RPM
use days 1% unit) remaining days
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
PRESSURE ROLLER Pressure roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
SEPARATE PAWL(U) Separation pawl upper Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
SEPARATE PAWL(L) Separation pawl lower Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
FUSING WEB UNIT(U) Fusing upper web unit Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
FUSING WEB UNIT(L) Fusing lower web unit Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
TC BELT Primary transfer belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
TC ROLLER Transfer roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
TC CL ROLLER Transfer cleaning roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
PS PAPER PS paper dust removing Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
OZONE FILTER Ozone filter Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DEVE CTRG(K) Developer cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DRUM(K) Drum cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
MAIN CHARGER(K) Main charger K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
MC CLEAN(K) MC cleaner (K) Not displayed Max. 8 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
DRUM BLADE(K) Drum blade K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
TONER CTRG(K) Toner cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) Not displayed

*1: For outside the range, "-----" is displayed.

22-14
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use status of the toner
cartridge.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The status of the toner cartridge is displayed.

Accumulated No. of Accumulated No. of near Accumulated No. of Remaining quantity


Display item Content installed cartridges (Unit) near end (Unit) end (Unit) (Unit: %)
INSTALL NN END END RESIDUAL
TONER (K) Toner cartridge use counter (K) 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0-25%
25-50%
50-75%
75-100%

22-18
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to display the user data delete history.

Operation/Procedure
The date and time of the user data delete are displayed.

Display item
Content
Item name Date
START Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time of operation start)
END Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time of operation end)

SIMULATION 6 – 29
22-19
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner
Change the display with scroll key.

No. of Default
Display Content
digits value
Network scanner NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity counter (B/W scan job) 8 0
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity counter (Color scan job) 8 0
Internet FAX INTERNET FAX OUTPUT Number of internet FAX output 8 0
INTERNET FAX SEND OP Number of internet FAX sending page 8 0
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE Number of internet FAX receive 8 0
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send 8 0
E-Mail MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send 8 0
FTP FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send 8 0
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send 8 0
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage 8 0
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job) 8 0
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) 8 0
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (Color) 8 0

22-40 22-41
Purpose Error contents display Purpose JAM contents display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the error code list and the Function (Purpose) Used to display the JAM code list and the
contents. contents.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select the main error code. 1) Select the main error code.
The sub error code and the contents are displayed. The sub error code and the contents are displayed.

22-42
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the JAM/trouble data

Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
2) Printable with [START] keys.

Counter Content Max.


JAM CODE/ number
Display data TOTAL TOTAL Remarks
Display Content TROUBLE DATE/TIME of
COUNT(BW) COUNT(CL)
CODE histories
PAPER JAM PAPER JAM Number of Generated Generated Total output Total output The head is the latest, and the
COUNT machine JAM JAM code date/time quantity of quantity of 50 bottom is the oldest. The max.
troubles (Machine) (YY/MM/DD black and color number of histories is 50.
SPF JAM SPF JAM Number of Generated HH:MM:SS) white When 50 is exceeded, the
COUNT SPF JAM JAM code 50 oldest one is not displayed
troubles (SPF) sequentially.
TROUBLE TROUBLE Number of Generated The head is the latest, and the
COUNT troubles trouble code bottom is the oldest. The max.
number of histories is 30.
30
When 30 is exceeded, the
oldest one is not displayed
sequentially.

SIMULATION 6 – 30
Detail display content of HISTORY1
22-43
Display Content
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
NON Inch series No paper size
Function (Purpose) JAM data details display WLG fixed form Double Legal
Section WLR Double Legal-R
Operation/Procedure LD Ledger
LDR Ledger-R (Double Letter)
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
LG Legal
When [COUNTER] key is pressed, the JAM counter, the paper LGR Legal-R
feed counter, and the paper feed retry counter are displayed. FC Foolscap
When [HISTORY1] key is pressed, the JAM history is dis- FCR Foolscap-R
played. LT Letter
When [HISTORY2] key is pressed, the temperature and LTR Letter-R
humidity data are displayed. IV Invoice (Mini)
2) Printable with [START] keys. IVR Invoice-R (Mini)
EC Executive
Display data and contents (COUNTER) ECR Executive-R
Item Content A3W A3W (12x18 in)
PAPER JAM COUNT Number of machine JAM troubles AWR A3W (12x18 in)-R
PAPER FEED COUNTER Paper feed counter (Similar with 012 22x17
SIM22-09 display content) 013 22x17R
PAPER FEED RETRY COUNTER Paper feed retry counter (Similar 014 22x34
with SIM27-18 display content) 015 22x34R
016 34x44
Display data and contents (HISTORY1) 017 34x44R
Item Content Description 018 44x68
NO No History number 019 44x68R
JAM CODE JAM Code Jam code main 01A 9x12
DATE/TIME Date/Time Occurrence date 01B 9x12R
TOTAL_BW Total Count (BW) Total counter (B/W) 01C 13x19
TOTAL_CL Total Count (CL) Total counter (color) 01D 13x19R
P_S (*1) Paper Size Paper size MLG Mexican-Legal
P_T (*1) Paper Type Paper type MLR Mexican-Legal-R
JOB (*1) Job Mode Job mode ALG Asian-Legal
JN Job No First after JOB start or not ALR Asian -Legal-R
OF Offset Paper exit: Offset EXT Other Extra (Special)
EP Exit Position Paper exit: Exit position A1 AB series A1
PC Punch Paper exit: Punch A1R fixed form A1R
SP Staple Paper exit: Staple A2 A2
A2R A2R
*1: Refer to the detail display content of HISTORY1. A3 A3
Display data and contents (HISTORY2) A3R A3R
A4 A4
Item Content A4R A4R
NO. History number A5 A5
DATE/TIME Occurrence date A5R A5R
TH_CL External air temperature sensor temperature/AD A6 A6
value
A6R A6R
HUD_CL External air humidity sensor humidity/AD value
B3 B3
TH_RA The room temperature sensor temperature/AD value
B3R B3R
HUD_RA The room humidity sensor humidity/AD value
B4 B4
TH_UM_DIF Fusing upper main thermistor (differential)
B4R B4R
temperature/AD value
B5 B5
TH_UM_CS Fusing upper main thermistor (compensation)
B5R B5R
temperature/AD value
B6 B6
TU_UM_D Fusing upper main thermistor (detection) AD value
B6R B6R
TH_US_DIF Fusing upper sub thermistor (differential)
temperature/AD value 054 A0x2
TH_US_CS Fusing upper sub thermistor (compensation) 055 A0x2 R
temperature/AD value A0 A0
TH_US_D Fusing upper sub thermistor (detection) AD value A0R A0R
TH_LM Fusing lower main thermistor temperature/AD value B0 B0
TH_US2 Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 temperature/AD value B0R B0R
B1 B1
B1R B1R
B2R B2
B2R B2R
K8 K8
K8R K8R
K16 K16
16R K16R
K32 K32
32R K32R

SIMULATION 6 – 31
Display Content Display Content
066 AB series SRA3 0DC Oversea Inch series panorama size
067 fixed form SRA3R 0DD special Inch series name card large
068 SRA4 0DE (Envelope) Inch series identification photo
069 SRA4R 0DF Inch series name card small
06A 318 x 469 mm 0EC Other Extra (Special large size)
06B 469 x 318 mm 0ED Extra (Special small size)
06C 234 x 318 mm 0EF Extra (Special/Not fixed)
06D 318 x 234 mm 0F0 Long size
06E 312 x 440 mm 0FF JAM (Used for canceling temporary charging in
06F 440 x 312 mm a coin vendor.)
070 220 x 312 mm
Display content detail: Paper type (P_T)
071 312 x 220 mm
082 Domestic DBL Postcard Display Content
083 special DBL Postcard-R UST User type
084 (Envelope) Postcard LHP Letter head paper
085 Postcard-R PNP Perforated sheet
087 119 x 277 mm RCL Recycled paper
089 120 x 235 mm COL Color paper
08B 90 x 205 mm PLN Standard paper
08D 90 x 185 mm PRP Pre printed
08F 240 x 332 mm OHP OHP Transparency
091 216 x 277 mm HV Heavy paper
093 197 x 267 mm LBL Label sheet
095 190 x 240 mm ENV Envelope
097 162 x 229 mm HG Postcard
099 142 x 205 mm TAB Tab sheet
09B 119 x 197 mm THN Thin paper
09D 120 x 176 mm US1 User type 1
09F 114 x 162 mm US2 User type 2
0A1 98 x 148 mm US3 User type 3
0A3 105 x 235 mm US4 User type 4
0A5 95 x 217 mm US5 User type 5
0A7 98 x 190 mm US6 User type 6
0A9 92 x 165 mm US7 User type 7
0AA AB series E-version HV2 Heavy paper 2
0AB AB series L-version PL2 Plain paper 2 (not used)
0AC AB series panorama size HV3 Heavy paper 3
0AD AB series name card size HV4 Heavy paper 4
0AE AB series identification photo GLS Glossy paper
0AF AB series name card small
0B0 Other A3 width Display content detail: Job mode (JOB)
0B1 B4 width Display Content
0B2 A4 width SHD Shading.
0B3 A3 width (Long size) PCL Process control
0B4 B4 width (Long size) SIM Test mode (Sim)
0B5 A4 width (Long size) ICP Interruption copy
0BC Custom (Large size) CP Copy
0BD Custom (Small size) FXS FAX send scan
0BF Custom AXS AXIS
0C2 Oversea Monarch FXP FAX reception print
0C3 special Monarch-R PR Printer
0C4 (Envelope) DL FXC FAX communication report print
0C5 DL-R 00A Zaurus print
0C6 C4 SLF Self/Test print
0C7 C4-R 00C Document counter
0C8 C5 RMT Remote maintenance
0C9 C5-R 00E SIM 52-01
0CA C6 00F Tandem (Cordless handset)
0CB C6-R CFP Confidential print
0CC C65 NET Network scanner
0CD C65-R PRF Proof print
0CE ISOB5
0CF ISOB5-R
0D0 Size6-1/2
0D1 Size6-1/2-R
0D2 Size9
0D3 Size9-R
0D8 Com-10
0D9 Com-10-R
0DA Inch series E-version
0DB Inch series L-version

SIMULATION 6 – 32
22-90 23-80
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed
Section and paper transport in the paper feed sec-
tion and the paper transport section. Used
Operation/Procedure
to output the list of the operation status of
1) Change the display with scroll key. the sensor and the detectors in the paper
2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel. feed section and the paper transport sec-
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list. tion.
Section Paper feed, Paper transport
All setting list (*1) ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST
Operation/Procedure
Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and
PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST paper transport is outputted.
PS FONT LIST Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors
PS KANJI FONT LIST (Japan) in the paper feed and transport section.
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the
NIC PAGE latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed.
Address registration list INDIVIDUAL LIST
Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending
(*1) GROUP LIST
on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen-
PROGRAM LIST (Output Disable)
sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ.
MEMORY BOX LIST
ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
Document filing list (*1) DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST JAM CODE JAM code
System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY) DATE / TIME JAM occurrence date/time
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT) MODE Printing mode when JAM occurs
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND) SIZE Paper size
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING) TYPE Paper type
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY) PIC TRAY Paper feed tray
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON) OUT TRAY Paper exit tray
ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST INF1 (ILLEGAL) Illegal detection information
Receive rejection ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST INF2(SENSOR) Sensor information
number table
Receive rejection/allow ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
address
domain table
24
To E-mail INBOUND ROUTING LIST
Transfer table list 24-1
To administrator DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST Purpose Data clear
Transfer list
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST
ble counter. (After completion of mainte-
Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
nance, clear the counters.)
*1: When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK Section
model, this setting is invalid.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.

23 3) Press [YES] key.


The target counter is cleared.

23-2 MACHINE Machine JAM counter


Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check SPF DSPF JAM counter
TROUBLE Trouble counter
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of
paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of
troubles of misfeed is considerably great,
the judgment is made that repair is
required.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print.
The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed.

Item Button display Content


DATA PATTERN NO.1 JAM/Trouble history print
NO.2 Paper feed counter, JAM history
details, and temperature/humidity
history print

SIMULATION 6 – 33
24-2 24-4
Purpose Data clear Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num- Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the
ber of prints) of each paper feed section. printer counters of the transport unit and
Section the fusing unit. (After completion of mainte-
nance, clear the counters.)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Section

2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure

3) Press [YES] key. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.

The target counter is cleared. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.


3) Press [YES] key.
Display Content The target counter is cleared.
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter Display Content
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter Maintenance MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total)
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter (Counter)
MFT Manual paper feed counter (*1) Maintenance counter (Total)
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC or A3 LCC) (Number of use days)
ADU ADU paper feed counter MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color)
(Counter)
*1: Displayed only when the option is installed. Maintenance counter (Color)
(Number of use days)
Fusing FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller (Counter)
Fusing roller (Number of use
24-3
days)
Purpose Data clear Fusing roller (Accumulated
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, DSPF, and the traveling distance)
scan (reading) unit counter. PRESS ROLLER Pressure roller (Counter)
Pressure roller (Number of use
Section days)
Operation/Procedure Pressure roller (Accumulated
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. traveling distance)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Separation SEPARATE PAWL(U) Upper separation pawl (Counter)
Upper separation pawl (Number
3) Press [YES] key. of use days)
The target counter is cleared. Upper separation pawl
(Accumulated traveling distance)
Display Display SEPARATE PAWL(L) Lower separation pawl (Counter)
SPF Document feed quantity Lower separation pawl (Number
SCAN Number of times of scan of use days)
STAPLER Staple counter Lower separation pawl
PUNCHER Puncher counter (Accumulated traveling distance)
STAMP Number of stamps FUSING WEB(U) Fusing upper web unit (Counter)
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter Fusing upper web unit (Number
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter of use days)
COVER Cover open/close counter Fusing upper web cleaning send
HP_ON HP detection count counter (Counter)
TRIMMER Trimmer counter FUSING WEB(L) Fusing lower web unit (Counter)
FOLDING Paper folding counter Fusing lower web unit (Number
INSERTER Inserter counter (Tray 1) of use days)
INSERTER2 Inserter counter (Tray 2) Fusing lower web cleaning send
counter (Counter)
INSERTER OFFLINE Inserter offline counter
Transfer TC BELT Primary transfer belt (Counter)
DECURLER De-curler counter
Primary transfer belt (Number of
OC LAMP TIME OC section lamp total lighting time
use days)
DSPF LAMP TIME DSPF section lamp total lighting time
Primary transfer belt
(Accumulated traveling distance)
TC ROLLER Transfer roller (Counter)
Transfer roller (Number of use
days)
Transfer roller (Accumulated
traveling distance)
TC CL ROLLER Transfer CL roller (Counter)
Transfer CL roller (Number of
use days)
Transfer CL roller (Accumulated
traveling distance)
Drum DRUM K Drum cartridge K (Counter)
Drum cartridge K (Number of use
days)
Drum cartridge K (Accumulated
traveling distance)

SIMULATION 6 – 34
Display Content 24-9
Main charger MAIN CHARGER K Main charger K (Counter)
Main charger K (Number of use
Purpose Data clear
days) Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter
Main charger K (Accumulated and the self print mode print counter.
traveling distance)
Section
MC CLEAN K MC cleaner K (RPM)
Drum blade DRUM BLADE K Drum blade K (Counter)
Operation/Procedure
Drum blade K (Number of use 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
days) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Drum blade K (Accumulated 3) Press [YES] key.
traveling distance)
Other PS PAPER PS paper dust removing
The target counter is cleared.
(Counter)
PRINT BW Print counter (B/W)
PS paper dust removing
(Number of use days) OTHER BW Other counter (B/W)
OZONE FILTER Ozone filter (Counter)
Ozone filter (Number of use
days)
24-10
* The winding counter for the fusing web cleaning is cleared by Purpose Data clear
being synchronized with the fusing web cleaning feed counter.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter.
* When "MAIN CHARGER K" is cleared, "MC CLEAN K" is also
(Only when FAX is installed)
cleared.
Section
Operation/Procedure
24-5 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Purpose Data clear 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter value
and the toner hopper remaining quantity The target counter is cleared.
counter. (After replacing developer, clear
FAX OUTPUT FAX Print quantity counter
these counters.)
FAX SEND FAX send counter
Section FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
Operation/Procedure SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. SEND TIME FAX send time
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time

3) Press [YES] key.


The target counter is cleared.
NOTE: When SIM25-2 is executed, the counters related to devel- 24-12
oper are automatically cleared. Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the document filing counter.
Button
Content
display Section
DV_K Developer cartridge print counter (K) Operation/Procedure
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K) 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Number of day that used developer (day) (K)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
NOTE: The "developer cartridge life meter" counter displayed in 3) Press [YES] key.
SIM22-13 is not displayed in this simulation, but it is not The target counter is cleared.
cleared when this simulation is executed.
Display Content
DOC FIL (BW) Black and white document filing print counter
24-6
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter. 24-15
Purpose Data clear
Section Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the
Operation/Procedure scan mode and the image send.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Section
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
The target counter is cleared. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
COPY BW Copy counter (B/W)
The target counter is cleared.

SIMULATION 6 – 35
Display Default
No. of Default Content
Display Content item value
digits value
LOW Process speed: Low speed Middle
Network NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner 8 0 speed
MIDDLE Process speed: Medium speed
scanner document read
quantity counter
(B/W scan job)
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner 8 0
document read
25-2
quantity counter Purpose Setting
(Color scan job)
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner
Internet INTERNET FAX Number of 8 0
density when replacing developer. (Auto-
FAX OUTPUT internet FAX
output
matic adjustment)
INTERNET FAX Number of 8 0 Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
SEND OUTPUT internet FAX ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
sending page Operation/Procedure
INTERNET FAX Number of 8 0
RECEIVE internet FAX
1) Confirm power supply OFF.
receive 2) Open the right door. Input the DV unit.
INTERNET FAX Number of 8 0 3) Power supply ON.
SEND internet FAX send
4) Enter the simulation mode and close the right door.
E-Mail MAIL COUNTER Number of times 8 0
of E-MAIL send 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
FTP FTP COUNTER Number of FTP 8 0 The developing motor rotates for 1 min 40 sec, and the toner den-
send sity sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB 8 0 is displayed.
send
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner
USB CNT Number of times 8 0 density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con-
of USB storage
trol level.
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode 8 0
counter (B/W & CAUTION: In case this adjustment stops before finish (by turning
COLOR scan job) the power off etc.), execute the adjustment again. Also
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD 8 0 when error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is dis-
record quantity played, the reference toner density level is not set nor-
(B/W) mally.
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD 8 0
record quantity CAUTION: Do not execute this simulation except when new devel-
(Color) oper is supplied. If it is executed in other cases, under-
toner or overtone may occur, causing a trouble.
24-35 CAUTION: The toner cartridge must be removed before executing
Purpose Data clear this simulation.

Function (Purpose) Used to clear the toner cartridge use status If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridge
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the develop-
data.
ing unit, resulting in overtoner and a trouble.
Section
CAUTION: Execute without insertion of the toner cartridge.
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Result display item name
2) Press [YES] key. Display item Content
Display Default
range value
The toner cartridge use status data (SIM22-14) are cleared.
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 120
adjustment value at
low speed
25 AT DEVE ADJ_M_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 120
adjustment value at
middle speed
25-1
AT DEVE VO_L_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128
Purpose Operation test/check adjustment control
voltage in low speed
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel-
AT DEVE VO_M_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128
oping section.
adjustment control
Section Process (Developing section) voltage in middle
Operation/Procedure speed

1) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] keys. Display during execution of the simulation
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Sensor
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3 name Sensor name
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis- (Display)
played. TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K)
TSG_K Toner sensor control voltage input value (K)
Sensor
name Sensor name
(Display)
TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K)
TSG_K Toner sensor control voltage input value (K)

SIMULATION 6 – 36
Error content Display
Item/Display Content
Error range
Error name Details of error display PROCON V0(L) Process control feedback correction -127 to
display
EE-EL EL abnormality The sensor output level is less than 26, or the amount +127
control voltage exceeds 197. AREA V0(L) Area correction amount -127 to
EE-EU EU abnormality The sensor output level exceeds 200, or the +127
control voltage is less than 49. PRINT RATE Print ratio correction amount -127 to
EE-EC EC abnormality The sensor output level is outside of 120 +/- V0(L) +127
5. ENV V0(L) Environment multiple correction amount -127 to
+127
PROFIT R V0(L) Difference conversion correction -127 to
+127
25-4
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the
toner supply quantity. (Not used in the mar- 26
ket.)
Section Process 26-1
Operation/Procedure Purpose Setting
The operation data of the toner supply quantity are displayed. Function (Purpose) Used to set Yes/No of installation of the
right paper exit tray.
Display
Item/Display Content
range Section Paper exit
DV CTRG Developer cartridge print counter 0 to Operation/Procedure
99999999
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
DV RANGE Developer cartridge accumulated 0 to
traveling distance (cm) 99999999 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
HUMIDITY Current humidity area 1 to 14 This setting is required to use the right paper exit tray unit.
AREA
ALL VREF All correction values for the toner density 0 to 255 Item/Display Content
reference value A 0 YES Paper exit tray: YES
DELTA_VREF Transition target correction amount -127 to 1 NO Paper exit tray: NO
+127
TONER Toner density output level 0 to 255
DEN_LT(M)
TONER Toner density standard level 0 to 255 26-2
DEN_ST(M)
Purpose Setting
AUTO DEVE Toner density sensor control voltage 0 to 255
VO(M) Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the large
ALL V0 All correction values for the control 0 to 255 capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size
voltage value is changed, this simulation must be exe-
HUM V0(M) Humidity correction amount -127 to cuted to change the paper size in software.)
+127 Section Paper feed
LIFE V0(M) Life correction amount -127 to
Operation/Procedure
+127
PROCON V0(M) Process control feedback correction -127 to Select a paper size and a weight system to be changed.
amount +127
AREA V0(M) Area correction amount -127 to Item Setting value Content
+127 TRAY1(TAMDEM) 0 8.5 x 11
PRINT RATE Print ratio correction amount -127 to 1 A4
V0(M) +127 2 B5
ENV V0(M) Environment multiple correction amount -127 to A4 LCC 0 8.5 x 11
+127 1 A4
PROFIT R Difference conversion correction -127 to 2 B5
V0(M) +127 G/LBS SET 0 GRAM
AUTO DEVE Humidity area 1 to 14 1 LBS
AREA(M)
ALL VREF(L) All correction value for the toner density 0 to 255
reference value Setting value
DELTA_VREF(L) Transition target correction amount -127 to Destination
TRAY1(TANDEM) A4 LCC G/LBS SET
+127 U.S.A 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
TONER Toner density output level 0 to 255 CANADA 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
DEN_LT(L)
INCH 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
TONER Toner density standard level 0 to 255
JAPAN B5 A4 GRAM
DEN_ST(L)
AB_B A4 A4 GRAM
AUTO DEVE Toner density sensor control voltage 0 to 255
EUROPE A4 A4 GRAM
VO(L)
U.K. A4 A4 GRAM
ALL V0(L) All correction values for the control 0 to 255
voltage value AUS. A4 A4 GRAM
HUM V0(L) Humidity correction amount -127 to AB_A A4 A4 GRAM
+127 CHINA A4 A4 GRAM
LIFE V0(L)) Life correction amount -127 to
+127

SIMULATION 6 – 37
Default
26-3 Item/Display Content
value
Purpose Setting PRINTER MODE1 All the items in OUTSIDE MODE
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor. CONTROL AUDITOR and VENDOR 1
(Setting must be made according to the MODE are allowed to
auditor use conditions.) select.
MODE2 (“OUTSIDE AUDITOR” is
Section Auditor always set to “P
Operation/Procedure VENDOR1”. Other buttons
Select an item to be set with the touch panel. are grayed out.
“VENDOR MODE” is
always set to “MODE3”.
Default
Item/Display Content Other buttons are grayed
value
out.)
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10
MODE3 (“OUTSIDE AUDITOR” is
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation.
always set to “P OTHER”.
OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
Other buttons are grayed
AUDITOR vendor is used.
out.
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode “VENDOR MODE” is
(Only the copy mode can always set to “MODE3”.
be controlled.) Other buttons are grayed
P VENDOR3 Vendor mode in which out.)
signals for the intercard
connected to the PCU are *1: Displayed only when EQUITRAC.
used for communication in *2: Details of the vendor mode
parallel I/F.
P OTHER Mode for an external Details of the vendor mode
auditor connected to the Completion Insufficient money during Completion
SCU. of the copy job of the
VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC specified specified
(*1) BW/Color Color
quantity. quantity.
VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job (no money (Money
(Money (No money
(MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode remaining) remaining)
remaining) remaining)
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1
document filing print MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
OFF No support for the auditor in MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3
document filing print
PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF Operation 1:
performed in the duplex Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
print mode. which can be changed in the system setting.
OFF Continuous printing is not
Operation 2:
performed in the duplex
print mode. Auto clear is not made.
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE Operation 3:
MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3 The display is shifted to the initial screen.
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
COUNTUP FUSER_IN Mode in which the detection EXIT_
TIMING timing of the paper lead OUT
26-5
edge by the sensor after the
paper passes the fusing Purpose Setting
section is used as the Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total
money charging timing.
counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/
FUSER_OUT Mode in which the detection
11x17 size)
timing of the paper rear
edge by the sensor after the Section
paper passes the fusing Operation/Procedure
section is used as the
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
money charging timing.
EXIT_OUT Mode in which the detection 2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
timing of the paper rear 1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
edge by the paper exit 3) Press [OK] key.
sensor of the right paper
The set value in step 2) is saved.
exit tray or of the after
process unit is used as the
Item/Display Content Default value
money charging timing.
A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 2
IMS ON There is some restriction in OFF
CONTROL the image send mode. C MAINTE (B/W) Maintenance counter (B/W) 2
OFF There is no restriction in the E DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)
image send mode.

26-6
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed
magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
Section

SIMULATION 6 – 38
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel. Default
Setting Default
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Item/Display Content value
range value
(Taiwan)
The selected set content is saved.
A TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
LONG Total counter (B/W)
U.S.A. United States of America
SIZE(S)
CANADA Canada
B MAINTE Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
INCH Inch series, other destinations (B/W) LONG Maintenance
JAPAN Japan SIZE(S) counter (B/W)
AB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinations C DEV(B/W) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
EUROPE Europe LONG Developer counter
U.K. United Kingdom SIZE(S) (B/W)
AUS. Australia D TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
AB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinations LONG Total counter (B/W)
CHINA China SIZE(L)
E MAINTE Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
(B/W) LONG Maintenance
SIZE(L) counter (B/W)
26-7 F DEV(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
LONG Developer counter
Purpose Setting SIZE(L) (B/W)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine ID.
Section 26-10
Operation/Procedure Purpose Setting
1) Enter the machine ID with the 10-key. Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network
Max. 30 digits of numerals and alphabetical characters can be scanner.
inputted. Section
To select a desired character, press the 10-key repeatedly. Operation/Procedure
Refer to the following list and enter characters. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Touch the "CONFIRM" section every time a character is input- 2) Press [OK] key.
ted.
The set value in step 1) is saved.
To modify an inputted character, delete it with "CLEAR" key
and enter the correct character.
TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting
2) Press [SET] key to set the contents entered in procedure 1). A
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 Trial mode cancel (Default)
NOTE:
The machine ID can be set also by the Web Page service mode 26-18
function.
Purpose Setting
Conventionally, the machine ID has been set by the Web Page
function. In this mode, this function is made available in the simula- Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner
tion mode. save mode operation.
(For the Japan and the UK versions.)
Number of times of key input Section
10-key
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Operation/Procedure
1 1 - - - - - - - - -
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2 A B C a b c 2 - - -
3 D E F d e f 3 - - - 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4 G H I g h i 4 - - - 3) Press [OK] key.
5 J K L j k l 5 - - - The set value in step 2) is saved.
6 M N O m n o 6 - - -
7 P Q R S p q r s 7 - Item/ Setting Default
Content
8 T U V t u v 8 - - - Display range value
9 W X Y Z w x y z 9 - A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode 0-3 0
0 0 - - - - - - - - - (0: OFF NOT available
1: SV1 1 Copy toner save mode 1
2: SV2 2 Copy toner save mode 2
3: SV3) 3 Copy toner save mode 3
26-8 B PRINTER 0 Printer toner save mode 0-3 0
(0: OFF NOT available
Purpose Setting
1: SV1 1 Printer toner save mode 1
Function (Purpose) Counter mode setting (Long scale) 2: SV2 2 Printer toner save mode 2
3: SV3)
Section 3 Printer toner save mode 3
Operation/Procedure C COPY TS 0 Setting of copy toner save 0-1 Linked with
DISPLAY is displayed. the set
1) Select a setting item with the scroll key. (0: YES value of
1 Setting of copy toner save
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1: NO) is not displayed. SIM26-6.
1 = 1 count up, 2 = 2 count up D PRINTER 0 Setting of printer toner 0-1 Linked with
TS save is displayed. the set
3) Press [OK] key.
DISPLAY 1 Setting of printer toner value of
(0:YES save is not displayed. SIM26-6.
1:NO)

SIMULATION 6 – 39
***
26-35
Destination Default value C Default value D
Purpose Setting
U.S.A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
CANADA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4
INCH 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) trouble history when a same trouble
JAPAN 1 (Not Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed) occurred repeatedly. There are two display
AB_B 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) modes: display as one trouble and display
EUROPE 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) as several series of troubles.
U.K. 1 (Not Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed) Section
AUS. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) Operation/Procedure
AB_A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
CHINA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
0 Only once display.
A
26-30 1 Any time display.
Purpose Setting 2) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre- The set value in step 1) is saved.
sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
standards). (For slow start to drive the fus-
ing heater lamp)
26-38
Section
Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
maintenance life is reached.
0 Control allowed Section
A
1 Control inhibited Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The set value in step 1) is saved. 2) Press [OK] key.
* Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due The set value in step 1) is saved.
to the power frequency, etc.
Default
Item/Display Content
U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported) value
CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported) A MAINTENANCE 0 Setting of Print Continue/ 0
LIFE OVER Stop when the maintenance
INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported)
(0: CONTINUE life is over (Print Continue)
JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported)
1: STOP) 1 Setting of Print Continue/
AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)
Stop when the maintenance
life is over (Print Stop)
B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 1
(0: CONTINUE when the fusing web is end
26-32 1: STOP) (Print Continue)
Purpose Setting 1 Continue/Stop setting of print
when the fusing web is end
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the fusing
(Print Stop)
cleaning operation.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
26-41
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Enable/Disable of the user fusing cleaning function is set. Purpose Setting
2) Press [OK] key. Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi-
cation ratio automatic select function (AMS)
Default in the center binding mode.
Item/Display Content Setting range
value Section
CLEANING User fusing cleaning 0 YES 0
PRINT SET function is Enable. (YES)
Operation/Procedure
A 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
User fusing cleaning 1 NO
function is Disable.
0 AMS Disable
A
1 AMS Enable

2) Press [OK] key.


The set value in step 1) is saved.
<Default value of each destination>
U.S.A 0 (Disable) EUROPE 1 (Enable)
CANADA 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable)
INCH 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable)
JAPAN 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable)
AB_B 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable)

SIMULATION 6 – 40
*3:
26-49
Target Target paper setting
Purpose Setting
paper 0 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards Inner Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1,"
mode. finisher envelope 10 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
Section discharged continuously. When, stopped when
however, different kinds of the paper exit
Operation/Procedure sheets are mixed and tray is full or
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW) discharged and 10 or less when 250
sheets of a kind are sheets are
Item Setting Default continuously discharged, the discharged.
Content
value value operation is stopped by the
LOW Postcard copy speed LOW LOW paper exit tray full detection.
POSTCARD
HIGH Postcard copy speed HIGH Label The operation is stopped when
sheet, 100 sheets of a same kind are
tab sheet, discharged continuously. When,
OHP however, different kinds of
26-50 sheets are mixed and
discharged and 100 or less
Purpose Setting sheets of a kind are
Function (Purpose) Used to set functions. continuously discharged, the
operation is stopped by the
Section paper exit tray full detection.
Operation/Procedure 1K Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1,"
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch Saddle envelope 30 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
panel. stitch discharged continuously. When, stopped when
finisher however, different kinds of the paper exit
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. sheets are mixed and tray is full or
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) discharged and 30 or less when 500
sheets of a kind are sheets are
Default continuously discharged, the discharged.
Item/Display Content
value operation is stopped by the
A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer to paper exit tray full detection.
1 BW reverse copy Enable *1 Label The operation is stopped when
B FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0 sheet, 100 sheets of a same kind are
FUNCTION The number of paper exit is Refer to tab sheet, discharged continuously. When,
limited. *3 OHP however, different kinds of
sheets are mixed and
1 Finisher special paper
discharged and 100 or less
The number of paper exit is
sheets of a kind are
not limited.
continuously discharged, the
C FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0
operation is stopped by the
COLOR ON during paper feed
paper exit tray full detection.
1 Paper feed tray color display
OFF during paper feed
D LONG SIZE PRINT 0 Long size print disable 0
1 Long size print enable
26-52
E WIRELESS SET 0 Disables wireless LAN 0 (NO)
setting. Purpose Setting
1 Enables wireless LAN Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
setting. (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
F POWER 0 Disables auto power shut-off 0 (NO) or not.
SHUT-OFF SET display setting.
Section
1 Enables auto power shut-off
display setting. Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.

0 Count up
Destination Default value A Default value F
1 No count up
U.S.A 1 1
CANADA 1 1 2) Press [OK] key.
INCH 1 1 The set value in step 1) is saved.
JAPAN 1 1
AB_B 1 1 Destination Default
EUROPE 1 0 U.S.A 0 (Counted)
U.K. 0 0 CANADA 0 (Counted)
AUS. 1 1 INCH 0 (Counted)
AB_A 1 1 JAPAN 1 (Not counted)
CHINA 1 1 AB_B 0 (Counted)
EUROPE 0 (Counted)
U.K. 0 (Counted)
AUS. 1 (Not counted)
AB_A 0 (Counted)
CHINA 0 (Counted)

SIMULATION 6 – 41
Setting Default
26-53 Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Setting B REMAINING 5% 0 Toner 0-9 4
Function (Purpose) User auto calibration Inhibit/Allow setting. TONER preparation at
LEVEL remaining toner
Section level of 5%
Operation/Procedure 10% 1 Toner
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. preparation at
remaining toner
Setting Default level of 10%
Item/Display Content
range value 15% 2 Toner
A COPY Copy Allow 1 1 preparation at
(1:YES 0:NO) mode Inhibit 0 remaining toner
level of 15%
B PRINTER Printer Allow 1 1
(1:YES 0:NO) mode 20% 3 Toner
Inhibit 0
preparation at
2) Press [OK] key. remaining toner
level of 20%
The set value in step 1) is saved.
25% 4 Toner
preparation at
remaining toner
26-65 level of 25%
30% 5 Toner
Purpose Setting preparation at
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode. remaining toner
level of 30%
Section
35% 6 Toner
Operation/Procedure preparation at
Use the touch key to set. remaining toner
level of 35%
Setting Default B REMAINING 40% 7 Toner 0-9 4
Item Content
range value TONER preparation at
LIMIT COPIES Number of sheets of stapling: ON or ON LEVEL remaining toner
Limited OFF level of 40%
Number of sets of stapling: Not 45% 8 Toner
Limited preparation at
SADDLE Number of sets loaded in the ON or ON remaining toner
COPIES saddle staple: Limited OFF level of 45%
Number of sets loaded in the 50% 9 Toner
saddle staple: Not Limited preparation at
remaining toner
* Limit load of folded paper on paper exit and limit load on 50- level of 50%
sheet staple saddle finisher are set in SADDLE COPIES. C TONER NEAR 0 The toner near 0-1 List of
END(0:YES 1:NO) end message is Default
displayed. values and
1 The toner near set values
26-69 end message is for each
Purpose Setting not displayed. destination
D TONER END 1 Operation 1-3 List of
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for
Enable in Default
toner near end. TONER END*1 values and
Section 2 Operation set values
Operation/Procedure STOP in for each
TONER END*2 destination
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
3 Operation
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. STOP in
3) Press [OK] key. TONER END*3
The set value in step 2 is saved. E TONER END 1 Remaining 1-2 1
JUDGMENT toner counter
Setting Default (accumulated
Item/Display Content rotation time of
range value
the toner
A TONER 0 The toner 0-1 List of
hopper)
PREPARATION preparation Default
(0:YES 1:NO) message is values and 2 Toner end
displayed. set values judgment by
for each ATC (Exhaust
1 The toner
destination use in the
preparation
intermediate
message is not
hopper)
displayed.

SIMULATION 6 – 42
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value Item/Display Content
range value
F TONER E-MAIL 0 E-mail alert 0-1 0
A OSA TRIAL MODE 0 Used to set the 0-1 1
ALERT Toner Low
(0: YES 1: NO) OSA trial mode.
status send
1 OSA trial mode is
timing near near
canceled.
toner end
1 E-mail alert
Toner Low
status send
timing near 26-78
toner end Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote
operation panel.
26-71 Section
Purpose Setting Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the web 1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits)
browsing function. The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW".
Section In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
Operation/Procedure to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Press [SET] key.
2) Press [OK] key.

Setting Default 26-79


Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Setting
A WEB 0 Web browsing trial 0-1 1
BROWSING mode setting Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display
TRIAL MODE 1 Web browsing trial of user data delete result.
(0: YES 1: NO) mode canceling Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
26-73 The value for the display operation specification after comple-
Purpose Setting tion of user data delete is set.
2) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide
copy mode image loss (shade delete quan-
Default
tity) adjustment Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Section A DISP SET User data delete result YES 1 0 (NO)
Operation/Procedure pop-up display ON
User data delete result NO 0
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
pop-up display OFF
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
(shade delete quantity) is increased.

Setting
Item/Display Content Default value
range
A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment
(M) (shade delete amount:
quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
SHADOW ADJ loss quantity (shade (Adjustment
(S) delete quantity) amount:
adjustment 0.1mm/step)

26-74
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key.

SIMULATION 6 – 43
27-2
27 Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
27-1 ber and the HOST server telephone num-
Purpose Setting ber. (FSS function)
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communica- Section
tion error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function) Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
Operation/Procedure [USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [SET] key.
0 Not detection The set value in step 2) is saved.
1 Detection
USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)
2) Press [OK] key.
SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
The set value in step 1) is saved. * If the connection process is not completed
normally when registering the FSS, calling to the
HOST may be continuously made every time when
the power is turned ON (from OFF) or rebooted.
In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the
HOST.

27-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range Remarks
value
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send in NE-B mode 0-3 0 1
NEB2 Send/Receive in NE-B mode 1
NFB1 Exclusive for send in NE-F mode 2 For convenience stores
NFB2 Send/Receive in NE-F mode 3 For convenience stores
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 0: No retry
C TIMER(MINUTE)_BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 0: No retry
E TIMER(MINUTE)_ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
F FAX RETRY Resend number setting when FAX initial connection 0 - 15 2 Unit: Number of times
G TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0- 0 1
TIMING(K) NEAR_END timing setting (K) Near end 11 1
5% 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
H TEMP HISTORY CYCLE Frequency of acquiring the temperature and humidity history 1 - 1440 60 Unit: min.
I LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU) Log output capacity 0 - 50 30 Unit: [KB]
J TONER ORDER TIMING Toner order timing Toner order alert send at the fixed 0-1 0 0
CONTROL control toner remaining quantity
Toner under alert send when 1
presuming the toner consumption
K TONER ORDER DELIVERY Toner order delivery setting OFF 0-1 0(OFF) 0(OFF)
SETTING Toner order delivery setting ON 1(ON)
L TONER ORDER DELIVERY Toner order delivery setting delivery threshold setting 1 - 15 3 Unit: min.
INTERVAL (DATE)

SIMULATION 6 – 44
27-5 27-9
Purpose Setting
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record-
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func-
tion allows the host computer to check the ing YES/NO threshold value and shading
gain adjustment retry number.
machine tag No.) (FSS function)
(FSS function)
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key.
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW".
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
3) Press [OK] key.
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
2) Press [SET] key.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
27-6 A FEED TIME2 Threshold value of paper 0 - 100 50(%)
transport time between
Purpose Setting
sensors (SPF)
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call. B GAIN Threshold value of the gain 0 - 20 11
(FSS function) ADJUSTMENT adjustment retry number (TIMES
Section RETRY )
C JAM ALERT Alert judgment threshold 1 - 20 10
Operation/Procedure value for occurrence of (TIMES
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. continuous jams )
Alert judgment threshold
Setting Default value for occurrence of
Item/Display Content
range value continuous jams
A (0:YES 1:NO) 0 Manual service call 0-1 0 (Setting of the number of
Enable times of continuous jams as
1 Manual service call the alert for continuous jams)
Disable D JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert period 0 - 99 30
PERIOD setting (DAYS)
2) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 1) is saved. * Items A, B: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;
100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper.
* Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of
retry is actually not registered.
27-7
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert call out. 27-10
(FSS function)
Purpose Data clear
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history
Operation/Procedure information. (FSS function)
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
Section
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
2) Press [YES] key.
Setting Default The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
Item/Display Content
range value
A FUNCTION FSS function enable 0 1 (NO) Target history Serial communication retry history
(0:YES 1:NO) FSS function disable 1 High density process control error history
B ALERT Alert call enable 0 0 (YES) Halftone process control error history
(0:YES 1:NO) Alert call disable 1 Scanner gain adjustment retry history
C CONNECTION FAX connection enable 0 0 (FAX) DSPF gain adjustment retry history
(0: FAX Not used. 1 Paper transport time between sensors
1: No Use HTTP connection enable 2
2: HTTP)

27-11
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert
Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached. Purpose Others
Service call When pressing Service call. Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication
Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is retry number and the scanner gain adjust-
reached. ment retry number history. (FSS function)
Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for
a new product) Section
Alert resend Operation/Procedure
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.

SIMULATION 6 – 45
Display item
Occurrence date Retry Content
Item name
(Display) number
LSU1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Serial
LSU2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits communication retry
DESK1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits number history
DESK2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits display
FINISHER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
FINISHER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
DSPF1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
DSPF2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain
ADJ1 adjustment retry
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history
ADJ2
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
ADJ3
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
ADJ4
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
ADJ5
DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF gain
ADJ1 adjustment retry
DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history display
ADJ2
DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
ADJ3
DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
ADJ4
DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
ADJ5

27-12
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the high density, halftone
process control and the automatic registra-
tion adjustment error history. (FSS Func-
tion)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The high density, halftone process control and the automatic regis-
tration adjustment error history is displayed.

Display item Content Occurrence date (Display) Error code (digits)


HV_ERR1 High density error history 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
HV_ERR2 High density error history 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
HV_ERR3 High density error history 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
HV_ERR4 High density error history 4 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
HV_ERR5 High density error history 5 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
H_TONE ERR1 Halftone error history 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
H_TONE ERR2 Halftone error history 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
H_TONE ERR3 Halftone error history 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
H_TONE ERR4 Halftone error history 4 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
H_TONE ERR5 Halftone error history 5 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits

27-14 Setting Default


Item/Display Content
Purpose Setting range value
A CONNECTION 1 The FSS connection test 0-1 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection TEST MODE mode is enable. (OFF)
test mode. (1: ON 0: OFF) 0 The FSS connection test
Section mode is disable. (*1)
*1: The FSS connection test mode can be changed only from Disable to
Operation/Procedure
Enable, and cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 1) is saved.

SIMULATION 6 – 46
27-15 27-17
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FSS connection status. Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
The FSS operating status is displayed. 1) Select an item to be set.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range The value for the FSS paper order alert operation specification
value
FSS CONNECTION Used to display the 0 Not 0 is set.
FSS connection operated 3) Press [SET] key.
status. 1 Operated
Item/ Setting Default
Content NOTE
Display range value
PAPER Setting of paper kind for 0-2 0 0: Standard
27-16 TYPE paper order alert paper and
SET recycled paper
Purpose Setting 1: Standard
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS alert send. paper only
Section 2: Recycled
paper only
Operation/Procedure A3 Paper order number 500 - 1250 Unit: No. of
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
The value for the FSS alert operation specification is set. sheets] (A3)
A4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
2) Press [OK] key.
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
sheets] (A4)
Setting Default
Item/Display Content B4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
range value
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance Alert send 0 0
sheets] (B4)
ALERT alert send Enable
B5 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
Disable
sheets] (B5)
B TONER Toner order Alert send 0 0
A3: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
ORDER ALERT alert send Enable
FIRST number setting (A3) 10000 sheets for the
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1 (Number of used first time
Disable sheets)
C TONER CTRG Toner Alert send 0 0 A4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
ALERT cartridge Enable FIRST number setting (A4) 10000 sheets for the
(0:YES 1:NO) replacement Alert send 1 (Number of used first time
alert send Disable sheets)
Enable setting
B4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
D JAM ALERT Continuous Alert send 0 0 FIRST number setting (B4) 10000 sheets for the
(0:YES 1:NO) JAM alert Enable (Number of used first time
send Enable Alert send 1 sheets)
setting Disable B5: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
E TROUBLE Trouble alert Alert send 0 0 FIRST number setting (B5) 10000 sheets for the
ALERT send Enable Enable (Number of used first time
(0:YES 1:NO) setting Alert send 1 sheets)
Disable
F PAPER ORDER Paper order Alert send 0 0
ALERT alert send Enable
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1 27-18
Disable
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry
counter.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be cleared.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.

Display Content
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed retry counter
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed retry counter
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed retry counter
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed retry counter
MFT Manual paper feed retry counter
LCC Side LCC paper feed retry counter

SIMULATION 6 – 47
C3SS2 Tray 3 paper size detection 2
30 C3SS3
C3SS4
Tray 3 paper size detection 3
Tray 3 paper size detection 4
C4PFD Tray 4 transport detection
30-1 C4LUD Tray 4 upper limit detection
Purpose Operation test/check C4PED Tray 4 paper empty detection
C4SPD Tray 4 paper remaining quantity detection
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
C4SS1 Tray 4 paper size detection 1
sors and the detectors in other than the
C4SS2 Tray 4 paper size detection 2
paper feed section and the control circuits.
C4SS3 Tray 4 paper size detection 3
Section C4SS4 Tray 4 paper size detection 4
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
lighted. 40
PPD2 Resist detector 40-2
POD1 Fusing rear detector
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
POD2 Main unit paper exit detector
POD3 Right tray paper exit detector Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
TFD2 Main unit paper exit full detector adjustment.
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detector Section Paper feed
DSW_R Right door open/close detector
Operation/Procedure
DSW_F1 Front door open/close detector
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX).
DSW_RL1 Right lower door open/close detector 1
WTFD Waste toner full detector 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
--------- Unused The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized.
LPPD LCC paper entry detector 3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4).
T2PPD1 Tandem tray 2 transport detector
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
T1PPD1 Tandem tray 1 paper entry detector 1
The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized.
PRTPD Right paper exit paper empty detector
WEB_END1 Web end detector 1 5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R).
WEB_END2 Web end detector 2 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
WTSD Waste toner shutter open/close detector The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
PTCMD PTC cleaner shift detector
7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
FPFD Fusing upper paper entry detector
8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
DSW_C2 Inner cover open/close detector
BESTD Belt estrangement sensor The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.

30-2 MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width


Purpose Operation test/check P1(A4)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
P2(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width
sors and the detectors in the paper feed
section and the control circuits.
Section
Operation/Procedure 40-7
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- Purpose Adjustment/Setup
played. Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high- manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
lighted. Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection
MPLD Manual feed paper length detection 1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
MTOP1 Manual paper fees tray pull-out position detector 1 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
MTOP2 Manual paper fees tray pull-out position detector 2 3) Press [OK] key.
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection (Detection at "1")
The set value in step 2) is saved.
TNDSET Tandem tray close detection
T1SPD Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Default
Item/Display Content
T1LUD Tray 1 upper limit detection value
T1PED Tray 1 paper empty detection A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 241
T2SPD Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection B P1 POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4) 231
T2LUD Tray 2 upper limit detection C P2 POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R) 140
T2PED Tray 2 paper empty detection D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 19
C3PFD Tray 3 transport detection
C3LUD Tray 3 upper limit detection
C3PED Tray 3 paper empty detection
C3SPD Tray 3 paper remaining quantity detection
C3SS1 Tray 3 paper size detection 1

SIMULATION 6 – 48
40-12 41-3
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the tray 4 width detection Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
level. ment size sensor and the control circuit.
Section Paper feed Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Set the tray 4 paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX). The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time.
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized. The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
3) Set to the tray 4 paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. Item/Display Content Detection level range
OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close)
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
PD2 Document detection 2 0 - 255
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
PD3 Document detection 3 0 - 255
PD4 Document detection 4 0 - 255
MAX POSITION Tray 4 max. width PD5 Document detection 5 0 - 255
MIN POSITION Tray 4 min. width PD6 Document detection 6 0 - 255
PD7 Document detection 7 0 - 255

41
43
41-1
Purpose Operation test/check 43-1

Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu- Purpose Setting
ment size sensor and the control circuit. Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
Section mode.
Operation/Procedure Section
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- Operation/Procedure
played. 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high- 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
lighted. 3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display
Close: Highlighted
Setting
PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
range * Default
sensor status Document present: Highlighted Display Content
(Button value
display)
41-2 PLAIN PAP&WUP&RDY Used to change the -10 0
Purpose Adjustment GR fusing temperature -5
setting of plain paper, 0
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor WUP, and Ready 5
detection level. series.
10
Section HEAVY PAPER GR Used to change the -10 0
Operation/Procedure fusing temperature -5
setting of heavy 0
1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without
paper series. 5
place a document on the document table.
10
The sensor level without document is recognized.
THIN PAPER GR Used to change the -10 0
2) Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table, and press fusing temperature -5
[EXECUTE] key. setting of thin paper 0
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed. series. 5
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed. 10
RECYCLED PAPER GR Used to change the -10 0
Sensor fusing temperature -5
Content Setting range Default value
name setting of recycled 0
PD1 Document sensor 1 0 - 255 128 paper series. 5
PD2 Document sensor 2 10
PD3 Document sensor 3 GLOSS PAPER GR Used to change the -10 0
PD4 Document sensor 4 fusing temperature -5
PD5 Document sensor 5 setting of gloss paper 0
PD6 Document sensor 6 series. 5
PD7 Document sensor 7 10
PAP CURL Change the fusing 0 0
IMPROVEMENT temperature setting 1
of paper curl 2
improvement. 3
4

SIMULATION 6 – 49
43-2
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing operation and pre-
heating.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.

Default value (SW A) Default value (SW B)


Setting
Item/Display Content Group Group Group Group Group Group
range
A B C A B C
A WARMUP FUMON HL_UM Fusing motor previous rotation start TH_US set value 30 - 200 160 100 100 100 100 100
T
B WARMUP FUMOFF Fusing motor previous rotation complete time 0 - 255 10 10 10 10 10 10
C WARMUP END TIME Warm-up complete time 1 - 255 10 10 10 10 10 10
D HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP FM preliminary rotation start TH_UM when warming up 30 - 200 160 100 100 100 100 100
at alpha degrees C or above
E HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-Up completion time when Warm-Up at alpha 0 - 255 10 10 10 10 10 10
degrees C or above
F LO_WARMUP_TIME Setting value applying time in warm-up of 120 degrees 0 - 255 10 10 10 10 10 10
C or below (Timer from Ready completion)
G HI_WARMUP_TIME Setting value applying time in warm-up of 120 degrees 0 - 255 10 10 10 10 10 10
C or above (Timer from Ready completion)
H HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value alpha to apply the setting value in 1 - 119 70 70 70 70 70 70
warm-up of alpha degrees C or above
I JOBEND_FUMON_TIME After-rotation time after completion of a job 0 - 255 5 5 5 5 5 5
J HL_UM E-STAR TH_UM set value when preheating 30 - 200 125 135 135 125 135 135
K HL_US E-STAR TH_US set value when preheating 30 - 200 100 90 100 100 90 100
L HL_UM PRE-JOB Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 170 180 180 180 180 185

Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.

List of destination groups

Group Destination
Group A JAPAN - - - - -
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH - - -
Group C AB_B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A CHINA

SIMULATION 6 – 50
43-20
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-2) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99)

Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49


Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99

Setting
Item/Display Content Default value
range
A WARMUP FUMON HL_US T Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 40
LL
B WARMUP FUMOFF LL Fusing motor prior rotation completion time under LL environment 1 - 99 50
C WARMUP END TIME LL Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL environment 1 - 99 80
D HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_LL Correction value for FM prior rotation start TH_UM in Warm-Up at alpha degrees C or 1 - 99 40
above under LL environment
E HI_WU_END_TIME_LL Correction value for Warm-Up completion time in Warm-Up at alpha degrees C or above 1 - 99 50
under LL environment
F LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value of the setting value applying time in warm-up of 120 degrees C or below 1 - 99 50
under LL environment (Timer from Ready completion)
G HI_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value of the setting value applying time in warm-up of 120 degrees C or above 1 - 99 50
under LL environment (Timer from Ready completion)
H HI_WARMUP_BORDER_LL Correction value of the threshold value alpha to apply the setting value in warm-up of 1 - 99 50
alpha degrees C or above under LL environment
I JOBEND_FUMON_TIME LL Correction value for the after rotation time when completing a job under LL environment 1 - 99 50
J HL_UM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
K HL_US E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
L HL_UM PRE-JOB LL Correction value for the set value of TH_UM when restoring from preheating under LL 1 - 99 55
environment

Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

SIMULATION 6 – 51
43-21
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99)

Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49


Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value


A WARMUP FUMON HL_US T HH Fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
B WARMUP FUMOFF HH Fusing motor previous rotation complete time 1 - 99 50
C WARMUP END TIME HH Warm-up complete time 1 - 99 50
D HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP HH FM preliminary rotation start TH_UM when warming up at alpha degrees C 1 - 99 50
or above
E HI_WU_END_TIME HH Warm-Up completion time when Warm-Up at alpha degrees C or above 1 - 99 50
F LO_WARMUP_TIME_HH Correction value for AF - AH application time (timer from Ready complete) 1 - 99 50
G HI_WARMUP_TIME HH Correction value for AJ - AL application time (timer from Ready complete) 1 - 99 50
H HI_WARMUP_BORDER_HH Threshold value alpha to which AN - AP is applied 1 - 99 50
I JOBEND_FUMON_TIME HH After-rotation time after completion of a job 1 - 99 50
J HL_UM E-STAR HH TH_UM set value when preheating 1 - 99 50
K HL_US E-STAR HH TH_US set value when preheating 1 - 99 50
L HL_UM PRE-JOB HH Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50

Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)

SIMULATION 6 – 52
43-24
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the tempera-
ture adjustment value of SIM 43-1.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99)

Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49


Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99

Default value
Item/Display Content Setting range
Group A Group B Group C
A COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool down time (Heavy paper) 1 - 60 5 5 5
B COOL_DOWN_OHP Cool down time (OHP) 1 - 60 10 10 10
C COOL_DOWN_ENVELOPE Cool down time (Envelope) 1 - 60 15 15 15
D FUS_MOTOR Fusing web motor operating interval (*1) 3 - 200 80 80 80
E POWER_SET Power voltage setting 1-3 1 2 3
1: 100V, 2: 110 - 120V, 3: 220V - 240V

*1: When the web feed amount is changed (increased), the web life will be shortened to cause the machine to stop by detecting "End" before
display of "Near End." In addition, the life meter of the fusing web unit in SIM22-13 will not be displayed normally.
List of destination groups

Group Destination
Group A JAPAN - - - - -
Group B U.S.A CANADA INCH - - -
Group C AB_B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A CHINA

43-31 43-32
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Check the operation of the fusing web Function (Purpose) Used to set various items related to the
cleaning motor. forcible operation of web cleaning when job
Section Fusing end.
Operation/Procedure Section Fusing
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
Perform the fusing web cleaning motor drive. 1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
2) When driving the fusing web cleaning motor is completed, 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
"COMPLETE" is displayed. 3) Press [OK] key.

NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an The set value in step 2) is saved.
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how- NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
trouble may be occur. ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
trouble may be occur.
Fusing web unit
installation detection Operation Remark Setting Default
state Item/Display Item
range value
Fusing web unit mot Not operate * During this operation A JOB END Fusing web motor Enable 0-1 0 1
installed the fusing web COMP ACT forcible operation Disable 1
Fusing web unit 10sec continuous cleaning feed counter CHECK condition when job end
installed rotation is not counted up. B JOB END Interval of the print quantity of 1 - 200 100
COMP ACT compulsory action of the fusing
INTERVAL web motor at job end
C JOB END Number of forcible operations of 1-5 1
COMP ACT the fusing web motor when job
CNT end

SIMULATION 6 – 53
43-34 43-35
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment and setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check the fusing lower web clean- Function (Purpose) Fusing nip operation check
ing motor operation. Section Fusing
Section Fusing Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Prepare a black-background image, and put it on the cassette
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. with the black background facing upward.
The fusing lower web cleaning motor is driven. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (The cassette is specified.)
2) When driving the fusing web cleaning motor is completed, 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
"COMPLETE" is displayed. 4) [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and printing is started.
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an When printing is executed, a jam is always generated. (As
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how- shown in the photo below.)
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a 5) Leave the jam paper for about 30sec, then remove the jam
trouble may be occur. paper.
6) Measure the width of the gloss change section (nip) of the jam
Fusing web unit
installation Operation Remarks paper, and check to confirm that it is in the range of about
detection state 10.5mm - 12mm.
Fusing lower web Does not operate * During this operation, the * If the difference between F and R is considerably great, the
unit not installed fusing web cleaning feed fusing pressure may be insufficient.
Fusing lower web Driven by a certain counter is counted up.
unit installed pulse numbers Setting Default
Item/Display item Content
range value
A PAPER MFT Cassette selection 1-5 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 2
CS2 3
CS3 4
CS4 5

"LACKBACKGROUND
0APERFEEDDIRECTION

'LOSSCHANGE
SECTION

.IPWIDTH

SIMULATION 6 – 54
Operation/Procedure
44 1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
(The selected item is highlighted.)
44-1 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Purpose Setting NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required.
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
tion in the image forming (process) section.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Setting Default
Display Content Remarks
range value
HV Normal operation high density process control Enable/ Black text Allow
Disable setting on white
HT Normal operation halftone process control Enable/Disable background Allow
setting (Inhibit:
PRT_HT Half tone process control printer correction feedback 0=NO) Allow
Enable/Disable setting White text
TC Transfer output correction Enable/Disable setting on black Allow The fluctuation in the transfer efficiency due to the
background temperature and humidity (absolute moisture) is
(Allow: corrected. Enable/Disable setting. Correction of the
1=YES) output voltage of the transfer high voltage
MD VG Membrane decrease grid voltage correction Enable/ Allow
Disable setting
MD EV Membrane decrease environment grid voltage correction Allow
Enable/Disable setting
MD LD Membrane laser power voltage correction Enable/Disable Allow
setting
MD EV LD Environment laser power correction for the OPC drum Allow
membrane decrease correction Enable/Disable setting
MD LD HV The process control laser power correction Enable/Disable Allow
setting
MD DL Membrane decrease discharge light quantity correction Allow
Enable/Disable setting
MD DL EV Membrane decrease environment discharge light quantity Inhibit
correction Enable/Disable setting
MD DL2 Enable/Disable setting of the discharge light quantity Allow
correction after transfer by membrane decrease
MD DL2 EV Enable/Disable setting of the discharge light quantity Allow
correction after transfer by environmental change
MD DL2 TC Enable/Disable setting of the discharge light quantity Allow
correction after transfer by the transfer current
MD DL2 GB Enable/Disable setting of the discharge light quantity Allow
correction after transfer by grid voltage
MD MC Enable/Disable setting of the MC total current correction by Allow
an increase in the resistance
MD MC EV Enable/Disable setting of the MC total current correction by Allow
environmental change
PTDL PTDL correction Enable/Disable setting Allow
TN_HUM Toner density humidity correction Enable/Disable setting Allow
TN_LIFE Toner density life correction Enable/Disable setting Allow When set to Disable, toner supply is not made by the
developer traveling distance.
TN_COV Toner density print ration correction Enable/Disable setting Allow
TN_FB FEEDBACK toner supply control Enable/Disable setting Allow When set to Disable, toner supply is not made by the
process control feedback.
TN_ENV Toner density environment correction Enable/Disable Allow
setting
TN_DRIP Toner density correction unconditional supply Enable/ Allow
Disable setting
TN_INT Toner density correction unconditional supply Enable/ Allow When set to Disable, toner supply is not made by the
Disable setting developer traveling distance.
TN_ABS Toner unconditional supply Enable/Disable setting Allow
TN_P_RET Toner difference return correction Enable/Disable setting Allow
TN_VREF V re correction Enable/Disable setting Allow
TN_DIS Toner density low print area correction Enable/Disable Allow
setting

SIMULATION 6 – 55
44-2
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image
density sensor (registration sensor).
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto-
matically.
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis-
played.
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.

Setting Default Memor


Classification Item/Display Content
range value y
PROCON A PCS_K LED ADJ Image density sensor sensitivity (light quantity) adjustment value 1 - 255 21 Yes
B PCS_K DARK Image density sensor dark voltage 0 - 255 0 No
C PCS_K GRND OPC drum surface detection level when the adjustment of item A is completed 0 - 255 0 No
D PCS_K DRUM MAX OPC drum surface detection level Max. value 0 - 255 0 No
E PCS_K DRUM MIN OPC drum surface detection level Min. value 0 - 255 0 No
F PCS_K DRUM DIF OPC drum surface detection level differential (Item D - Item E) 0 - 255 0 No

Error name Error content


Sensor adjustment abnormality PCS_K LED ADJ error
The adjustment target level is not reached by three times of retry operations.
Surface scanning abnormality PCS_K GRND error
The difference between the max. value and the min. value of the OPC drum surface detection level is out of
the specified range in detection of one circle of the OPC drum surface.

44-4 44-6
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high den- Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
sity process control operation. control forcibly.
Section Process Section Process
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
3) Press [OK] key. In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
(Refer to the table below.)
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required. In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.

Setting Default Result display Content description


Item/Display Content COMPLETE Normal complete
range value
A PCS_K TARGET Black sensor target value 1 - 255 210 ERROR Abnormal end
set value INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
B LED_K OUTPUT Black sensor light 1 - 255 21
emitting quantity set
Details of error display Content description
value
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black image sensor adjustment abnormality
C PCS ADJSTMENT Sensor adjustment target 1 - 255 10
K_HV_ERR K high density process control abnormality
LIMIT limit value
TIMEOUT_ERR Time out
D DRUM GROUND Effective difference 1 - 255 1
DIF between upper/loser
values of belt one-round
surface
E BIAS_BK Bias (for black) reference 0 - 255 0
STANDARD DIF calculation difference
F BIAS PATCH Patch bias output interval 1 - 255 45
INTERVAL
G K_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 50
value (black)
H HV BK_GROUND Surface light reception 1 - 255 29
LIMIT effective area value at the
patch position
I SDVB The most suitable 10 - 60 47
developing electric
potential

SIMULATION 6 – 56
44-9
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN], [OTHER] keys.

Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range


CPY/PRN P BLACK_P: GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control GB:150 - 1000
(*1) (PROCON) GB/DV data (K) DV:0 - 700
N(M) BLACK_M: GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal GB:150 - 1000
(NORMAL (display for middle speed) DV:0 - 700
(MIDDLE)) GB/DV data (K)
N(L) BLACK_L: GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal GB:150 - 1000
(NORMAL (display for low speed) DV:0 - 700
(LOW)) GB/DV data (K)
OTHER TN/TC TN HUD AREA Toner control display humidity area 1 - 14
TN HUD DATA Toner control display humidity AD value 0 - 1023
TC TMP AREA Transfer display temperature area 1 - 11
TC TMP DATA Transfer display temperature AD value 0 - 1023
TC HUD AREA Transfer display humidity area 1 - 10
TC HUD DATA Transfer display humidity AD value 0 - 1023
MD HUD AREA Membrane decrease display humidity area 1 - 14
MD HUD DATA Membrane decrease display humidity AD value 0 - 1023
DRUM MD K STEP Drum membrane decrease correction STEP display (K) 0-4
MD K DRUM COUNTER Membrane decrease drum traveling distance area (K) 0 - 30
VG_LIFE MD K REVISE(LIFE): L *** M *** LIFE grid voltage correction display (K) -255 - 255
VG_EV MD K REVISE(EV): L *** M *** Environment grid voltage correction display (K) -255 - 255
VG_DV MD K REVISE(DV): L *** M *** Developer life & Environment correction display (K) -255 - 255
VG_HV MD K REVISE(VG_HV): L *** M *** Electric field grid voltage correction display (K) -255 - 255
VG_MC MD K REVISE(VG_MC): L *** M **** Current grid voltage correction display (K) -255 - 255
VG_SL MD K REVISE(VG_SL): L *** M **** Vg degree of leaning revision for the OPC drum life (K) -255 - 255
VG_ALL MD K REVISE(ALL): L *** M *** Grid voltage correction ALL display (K) -255 - 255
MC MD K REVISE(MC): L *** M *** Current correction (K) by the MC discharge time -255 - 255
MC EV MD K REVISE(MC EV): L *** M *** Environment MC current correction (K) -255 - 255
MC ALL MD K REVISE(ALL): L *** M *** MC current correction ALL display (K) -255 - 255
LD LIFE MD K REVISE(LD LIFE): L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease laser power voltage -255 - 255
correction (K)
LD EV MD K REVISE(LD EV): L *** M *** Drum environment laser power voltage correction (K) -255 - 255
LD HV MD K REVISE(LD HV): L *** M *** Laser power voltage process control correction (K) -255 - 255
LD ALL MD K REVISE(LD EV): L *** M *** Laser power voltage correction ALL display (K) -255 - 255
DL MD K REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease discharge light quantity 0 - 100
correction (%)
DL EV MD K REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease environment discharge light -100 - 100
quantity correction (%)
DL ALL MD K REVISE COL (DL ALL): L *** M *** Discharge light quantity correction ALL display (%) -100 - 100
DL2 MD K REVISE COL (DL2): L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease after-transfer discharge light 0 - 100
quantity correction (%)
DL2 EV MD K REVISE COL (DL2 EV): L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease after-transfer environmental -100 - 100
discharge light quantity correction (%)
DL2 TC MD K REVISE COL (DL2 TC): L *** M *** After-transfer discharge light quantity correction (%) by -100 - 100
the transfer current
DL2 GB MD K REVISE COL (DL2 GB): L *** M *** After-transfer discharge light quantity correction (%) by -100 - 100
the grid bias
DL2 ALL MD K REVISE COL (DL2 ALL): L *** M *** After-transfer discharge light quantity correction ALL -100 - 100
display (%)
CNT PROCON COUNT HV High density process control execution number 0 - 99999999
PROCON COUNT HT Halftone process control execution umber 0 - 99999999

*1: The left of the correction value is the result of execution. The right is the reference value.

SIMULATION 6 – 57
44-12 44-14
Purpose Operation data display Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem-
high density process control and the image perature and humidity sensor.
density sensor (registration sensor). Section Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop- LSU
ing) Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys. temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.

Display Display Default Display item Description Display range


Item Content
item range value TH_CL Process temperature sensor Temperature:
TARGET ADK_SL(K) Development –9.99 - 0 Temperature 0 - 60.0 degrees C (+/-
characteristics gradient 9.99 Process temperature sensor 0.1 degrees C)
coefficient (K) AD value AD value: 0 - 1023
ADK_INT(K) Developing –999.9 - 0 HUD_CL Process humidity sensor Humidity:
characteristics intercept 999.9 humidity 0.0 - 100.0% (+/-0.1)
coefficient (K) Process humidity sensor
TARGET (K) Sensor target value set 0.00 - 0 AD value AD value: 0 - 1023
value 255.00 TH_RA Room temperature sensor Temperature:
PCS_K_ Black sensor dark 0 - 255 0 temperature 0 - 60.0 degrees C (+/-
DARK potential Room temperature sensor 0.1 degrees C)
PATCH n-1 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 A/D value AD value: 0 - 1023
1-5 patch 1 (n=1-5) HUM_RA Room humidity sensor Humidity:
n-2 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 humidity 0.0 - 100.0% (+/-0.1)
patch 2 (n=1-5) Room humidity sensor
n-3 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 A/D value AD value: 0 - 1023
patch 3 (n=1-5) TH_UM_DIF Fusing upper main Temperature:
n-4 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 thermistor temperature 0 - 255 degrees C (+/-1
patch 4 (n=1-5) Fusing upper main degrees C)
thermistor (differential) AD AD value: 0 - 1023
PATCH n-1 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
value
6-10 patch 1 (n=6-10)
TH_UM_CS Fusing upper main Temperature:
n-2 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
thermistor (compensation) 0.0 - 255.0 degrees C (+/
patch 2 (n=6-10)
temperature -0.1 degrees C)
n-3 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
Fusing upper main AD value: 0 - 1023
patch 3 (n=6-10)
thermistor (compensation)
n-4 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 AD value
patch 4 (n=6-10)
TH_UM_D Fusing upper main AD value: 0 - 1023
thermistor (detection) AD
value
TH_US_DIF Fusing upper sub thermistor Temperature:
temperature 0 - 255 degrees C (+/-1
Fusing upper sub thermistor degrees C)
(differential) AD value AD value: 0 - 1023
TH_US_CS Fusing upper sub thermistor Temperature:
(compensation) temperature 0.0 - 255.0 degrees C (+/
Fusing upper sub thermistor -0.1 degrees C)
(compensation) AD value AD value: 0 - 1023
TH_US_D Fusing upper sub thermistor AD value: 0 - 1023
(detection) AD value
TH_LM Fusing lower main Temperature:
thermistor temperature 0 - 255 degrees C (+/-1
Fusing lower main degrees C)
thermistor (differential) AD AD value: 0 - 1023
value
TH_US2 Fusing upper sub thermistor Temperature:
2 temperature 0 - 255 degrees C (+/-1
Fusing upper sub thermistor degrees C)
2 AD value

SIMULATION 6 – 58
44-15 44-22
Purpose Setting Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation. Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density
Section Process level in the halftone process control opera-
tion.
Operation/Procedure
Section Process
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) The toner patch density level made in the halftone process
3) Press [OK] key.
control operation is displayed.
The initial value must be set unless any special change is required.
Display item Content
Item/ Setting Default ID_n Patch data display (n = 1 - 12)
Content
Display range value BASE1 Substrate data (START)
A TIME Idle rotation interval (time interval 0- 6
between the previous OPC drum idle 255
rotation and the next one) setting (h)
B AREA1 Environmental area difference judgment 0-5 2 44-24
threshold value setting (difference Purpose Operation data display
between the previous OPC drum idle
rotation and the current one) Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and
C AREA2 Environmental area conditions (AND 1 - 15 1 the correction level in the halftone process
condition of the previous OPC drum idle control operation.
rotation and the current one)
Section Process
D CYCLE Previous rotation time setting (sec) in 0- 0
the process control when recovered 255
Operation/Procedure
from power ON, preheating/sleep mode. 1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key.
2) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
44-17
Category Display item Content
Purpose Setting
Coefficient EX-LOW Coefficient value of the
Function (Purpose) Process refresh execution approximate formula of the
minimum density
Section Process
LOW Coefficient of the approximation
Operation/Procedure formula of the low density
1) Select a refresh item with the touch panel key. CONNECT1 Coefficient of the approximation
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. formula of when connecting the
low density and the medium
3) The refresh operation is executed.
density
NOTE: Do not execute this simulation unless specially required. MID Coefficient of the approximation
formula of when connecting the
Display items and descriptions of contents low density and the medium
Display Content density
DEVE REFRESH Development refresh CONNECT2 Coefficient of the approximation
* DEVE REFLESH execution consume formula of when connection the
W-Letter A3 100% worth of toner. medium density and high
density
Display of results and descriptions of items HIGH Coefficient of the approximation
formula of the high density
Display Content CONNECT POINT Each density section connection
COMPLETE Normal completion output ratio
ERROR Abnormal end Reference SENSOR_TARGET Halftone process control
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption value reference value
Correction S_VALUE Half tone process control
value correction value
44-21
For copier PRINTER_S_VALUE Printer half tone process control
Purpose Adjustment/Setup correction value
Function (Purpose) Used to set the halftone process control tar- PRINTER_BASE_ Printer half tone process control
get. DITHER_VALUE reference dither value
PRINTER_AUTO_ Printer auto density adjustment
Section Process
HT_VALUE correction value
Operation/Procedure Previous BEFORE S_VALUE Previous half tone process
Press [EXECUTE] key. correction control value
value
The halftone process control target is set and the operation data
are displayed.

Display Content 44-25


COMPLETE Normal complete
Purpose Setting
ERROR COLOR SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity correction value for the halftone process
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error control.
[K] Halftone process control error [K] Section Process
OTHER Other errors

SIMULATION 6 – 59
Operation/Procedure
44-27
1) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the
touch panel. Purpose Data clear
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half-
tone process control.
3) Press [OK] key.
Section Process
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required. Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Setting Default 2) Press [YES] key.
Item Display Content
range value
The correction data of the halftone process control are cleared.
A LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 98
LOWER LIMIT approximate expression
data lower limit value
B LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 60
UPPER approximate expression
LIMIT data upper limit value
C MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 90
LOWER approximate expression
LIMIT data lower limit value
D MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 3
IPPER approximate expression
LIMIT data lower limit value
E HILIGHT Reference point of the 1-8 7
POINT highlight correction
amount
F HILIGHT 0 - 128 20
Highlight correction
VALUE
amount limit value
LIMIT
G MAX VALUE Maximum density value 0 - 128 0
LIMIT correction limit value
H HIGH FIELD High density 0 - 255 5
LOWER LIMIT approximate expression
data lower limit value
I HIGH FIELD High density 0 - 255 1
UPPER LIMIT approximate expression
data lower limit value

44-26
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the halftone process con-
trol compulsory.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key.
The halftone process control is performed and the operation data
are displayed.

COMPLETE Normal complete


ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
[K] Halftone process control error [K] error
OTHER Other errors

SIMULATION 6 – 60
44-28
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required.

Default
Item/Category Display Content Setting range
value
A Process INITIAL YES When warming up after clearing the Enable 0-1 0 0
control NO OPC drum and the developer unit Disable 1
Enable/ counters
B Disable SW ON When supplying the power (when Process control 1-3 1 2
setting canceling power shut-off) Disable
BK process 2
control Enable
Pixel count 3
judgment
C TIME After passing the specified time from Process control 1-3 1 2
leaving READY continuously (Time Disable
can be changed by INTERVAL BK process 2
TIME) control Enable
Pixel count 3
judgment
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is made when Process control 1-2 1 2
turning ON the power and after Disable
passing TIME. BK process 2
control Enable
E HUM The temperature and humidity in the Process control 1-2 1 2
machine are monitored in every 2 Disable
hours only during a job, and the BK process 2
change in the temperature/humidity control Enable
is above the specified level
compared with that in execution of
the previous process control.
F REV1 YES When a certain level of the Allow 0-1 0 0
NO accumulated traveling distance of Inhibit 1
BK or M position OPC drum unit is
reached after the power is supplied.
G REV2_BK YES When a certain level of the Allow 0-1 0 0
NO accumulated traveling distance of Inhibit 1
BK position OPC drum unit is
reached after execution of the
previous density correction.
H REFRESH MODE YES YES/NO setting of the display of the Key operation 0-1 0 1
manual process control key by key display YES
NO operations Key operation 1
display NO

SIMULATION 6 – 61
Default
Item/Category Display Content Setting range
value
I Process DAY After color job after passing a certain 0: Disable of the 0 - 999 0 1
control days from execution of the previous specified days
execution color process control. When next judgment
condition warming up if there is no color job. 1 - 999: 1 - 999 999
setting days passing
J HI-COV The average print ratio is monitored Process control 0-2 0 0
in a certain interval, and the high interval setting
print process control execution is for every 10
judged. pages
High print 1
judgment
disable
Judgment at the 2
30th paper
(continuous).
K LO-COV Low print document continuous Allow 0-1 0 1
printing process control execution Inhibit 1
judgment
L TonerCA-END When the toner cartridge remaining Allow 0-1 0 1
quantity reached 25% or below, the Inhibit 1
process control interval is changed.
M JOB STOP Enable/Disable setting of execution Allow 0-1 0 0
[REV2_BK], [REV2_CL], [HI-COV], Inhibit 1
and [LO-COV] judgment during a
job.
N AVERAGE-PAGE Average print ratio paper number 1: 10 pages - 1-5 1 5
setting 5: 50 pages
Corresponds to 5
1 step/
10 pages.
O LIMIT PAGE Setting of the job connection number 1: 10 pages - 1 - 10 1 10
of sheets/limitation of the number of 10: 100 pages
sheets Corresponds to 10
1 step/
10 pages.
P PIX_RATIO_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count 1 - 999 10
specified value
When 100 is entered, it corresponds to 1kp at 5% print.
Q INTERVAL TIME Setting of the leaving time when turning ON the power 1 - 255 2
(including the sleep recovery time) (h: hour) (1 - 255; 1 - 255h passed)
R HUM HOUR [HUM] temperature/humidity monitoring time 1 - 24 2
Interval setting (10 minutes unit)
S HUM_DIF Area difference specified value when compared with the 1-9 2
execution of the previous process control of "HUM"
T BK_RATIO [REV2_BK] BK position OPC drum traveling distance 1 - 999 40
value magnification ratio setting (%) (Entry of 20 corresponds to
10,000mm.)
U HT_DIF Used to judge the execution of HT process control. 1 - 255 60
V REV1_RATIO [REV1_BK] BK position OPC drum traveling distance 1 - 255 72
value magnification ratio setting (%) (Entry of 100 corresponds to
70,000mm.)
W MC cleaner MC_CLEAN_TIME MC automatic cleaning 0: Not executed 0 - 99 0 10
control execution interval 1 - 99: Executed 1 - 99
X MC_CLEAN_DURING_JOB MC automatic cleaning ON 0-1 0 0
execution setting during OFF 1
JOB
Y MC_DISCHARGE_TIME_1 Discharge time after auto 0: 0 - 999 0 0
cleaning Do not perform discharge
1 - 999: Discharge time 1 - 999
Z MC_DISCHARGE_TIME_2 Discharge time after 0: Not executed 0 - 999 0 0
cleaning in SIM 1 - 999: Executed 1 - 999
AA MC_DISCHARGE_TIME_3 Discharge time after 0: Not executed 0 - 999 0 0
cleaning at the power on 1 - 999: Executed 1 - 999
after dormancy or after
recovery from sleep mode
AB Process DRUM_REVERSE Drum reverse rotation Enable 0-1 0 1
control setting Disable 1

SIMULATION 6 – 62
44-29
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
process control during a job.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.

Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A COPY During copy 0- 0: No execution 2
job 2 1: HV only
B PRINTER During print 2: HV - HT 2
job
C FAX During FAX 2
print job
D SELF During self 2
PRINT print
E CPY TO Copier - 0- 0: CALCULATED 0
PRT printer 1 (Color balance
TABLE conversion calculation value
table select (Revised every time
when SIM46-74 is
executed.))
1: DEFAULT
(Default (Fixed value))

HV: High density process control


HT: Halftone process control

2) Select a target item with scroll keys.


44-37
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correc-
tion level in the continuous printing opera- NOTE: When the print density is varied in the continuous printing
tion. operation, this simulation is used.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a set target color with the touch panel.
Button Item Display Content Setting range Default value
K A DV_ADJ_K_L_DATA_1 DV bias correction data 1 in printing (low speed) 0-5 0
B DV_ADJ_K_L_DATA_2 DV bias correction data 2 in printing (low speed) 0-5 0
C DV_ADJ_K_L_DATA_3 DV bias correction data 3 in printing (low speed) 0-5 0
D DV_ADJ_K_M_DATA_1 DV bias correction data 1 in printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
E DV_ADJ_K_M_DATA_2 DV bias correction data 2 in printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
F DV_ADJ_K_M_DATA_3 DV bias correction data 3 in printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
G DV_ADJ_START_K_L_1 DV bias correction data 1 in printing (middle speed) 1 - 12 4
H DV_ADJ_START_K_L_2 DV bias correction data 2 in printing (middle speed) 1 - 12 3
I DV_ADJ_START_K_L_3 DV bias correction data 3 in printing (middle speed) 1 - 12 1
J DV_ADJ_START_K_L_4 DV bias correction data 4 in printing (middle speed) 1 - 12 1
K DV_ADJ_START_K_M_1 DV bias correction starting position data 1 in printing (middle speed) 1 - 12 4
L DV_ADJ_START_K_M_2 DV bias correction starting position data 2 in printing (middle speed) 1 - 12 3
M DV_ADJ_START_K_M_3 DV bias correction starting position data 3 in printing (middle speed) 1 - 12 1
N DV_ADJ_START_K_M_4 DV bias correction starting position data 4 in printing (middle speed) 1 - 12 1

SIMULATION 6 – 63
1) Select the execution frequency of the process control.
44-43
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Data display
3) Press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification informa-
NOTE:
tion of the developing unit.
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions.
Section Developing system
In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest ver-
Operation/Procedure sion.
The identification number and the identification signal level of the
developing unit are displayed.

Display
Item/Display Content
range
NOTE
46
A DVCH K developing unit 1-9 The model
KIND K identification number identification number
of the developing unit
46-2
which is backed up in Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode)
the EEPROM of the
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
machine.
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Content
1 MX-M654N / MX-M754N 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
9 There is no developing unit. panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
44-62 * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Purpose Setup/Adjustment
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions. To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
Section Process in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
Operation/Procedure adjustment value.
This simulation allows collective change in the set contents of When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
SIM44-4 and SIM44-28. increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
A suitable one is selected among a number of options depending sity is decreased.
on the condition.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Select an item to be set. A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
- To change the image density in the high density area, select HIGH 1 - 99 50
PROCON TARGET. B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
- To change the frequency of the process control operations, select HIGH 1 - 99 50
PROCON MODE. C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
Display/Item Content D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PROCON ID DOWN(-2) The registered value of the process PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
TARGET ID DWUN(-1) control reference value are E TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50
ID UP(+1) collectively changed Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50
ID UP(+2) F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
NORMAL(0) The registered values of the process HIGH 1 - 99 50
control reference values are G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
collectively changed to the default HIGH 1 - 99 50
value
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
CUSTOM The value set by SIM44-4 is restored
HIGH 1 - 99 50
PROCON
I AUTO1 (COPY TO Auto1 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
PROCON HIGH The values of the density correction
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
MODE QUALITY(+2) execution timing mode are
collectively changed J AUTO2 (COPY TO Auto2 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
QUALITY(+1)
PRINT K TEXT (COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
PERFORMANCE COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
(-1) L TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PRINT PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
PERFORMANCE COPY) document)
(-2) M PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
NORMAL The value of the density correction (COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
execution timing mode are document)
collectively changed to the default N LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
value HIGH 1 - 99 50
CUSTOM The value set by SIM44-28 is stored

When PROCON TARGET is selected.


1) Select the density level.
When PROCON MODE is selected.

SIMULATION 6 – 64
Setting Default
46-4 Item Mode Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) A HIGH AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
send mode. C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo
Section
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
panel. G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. H RIP - 1 - 99 50
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 46-8
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
increased, and vice versa.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color
Setting Default balance RGB.
Item Mode Display Content
range value Section
A LOW AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50 1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch
PHOTO Photo panel.
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 panel.
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
H RIP - 1 - 99 50
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density
A HIGH AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
area and the high density area.
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
PHOTO Photo target color is increased, and vice versa.
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
correction amount
H RIP - 1 - 99 50
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density 50
correction amount

46-5
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
send mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa.

Setting Default
Item Mode Display Content
range value
A LOW AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
H RIP - 1 - 99 50

SIMULATION 6 – 65
46-9 46-10
Purpose Adjustment (DSPF mode) Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy gray balance and
Section the gamma (for each gray copy mode).
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch Operation/Procedure
panel. 1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Select 600dpi or 1200dpi with the resolution select button.
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
mode, and the fax mode. When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa.
increased, and vice versa.
AUTO Text
Setting Default TEXT Text
Item Button Display Content
range value TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo
A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47 TEXT/ PHOTO Text
SIDEA: exposure adjustment PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo
LOW (Low density side) PHOTO Photograph + Text/Printed Photo
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47 MAP Map
SIDEA: exposure adjustment
LIGHT Light document
LOW (Low density side)
COPY ORG Copy document
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
LOW exposure adjustment
(Low density side) Density level
Item/Display Setting range Default value
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52 (Point)
SIDEA: exposure adjustment A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
HIGH (High density side) B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52 C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
SIDEA: exposure adjustment D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
HIGH (High density side) E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52 F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
HIGH exposure adjustment
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
(High density)
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
SIDEB: exposure adjustment
LOW (Low density side) J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47 K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
SIDEB: exposure adjustment L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
LOW (Low density side) M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47 N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
LOW exposure adjustment O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
(Low density side) P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50 Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
SIDEB: exposure adjustment
HIGH (High density side)
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: exposure adjustment
HIGH (High density side)
F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
HIGH exposure adjustment
(High density)
G BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: R R
H BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: G G
I BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: B B

SIMULATION 6 – 66
NOTE:
46-16
Purpose Adjustment MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the monochrome copy den- MODE 2 Normal gamma
sity and the gamma (for each monochrome STOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is
scanned, and the output image density is determined
copy mode).
according to the scanned density. (The output image
Section density is even for all the surface.)
Operation/Procedure REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned
sequentially, and the output image density is determined
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
according to the density in each area of document. (The
panel. output image density may not be even for all the
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. surface.)
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each PRESCAN The densities of the all surface of document are scanned
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. sequentially, and the output image density is determined
according to the average of the scanned densities. (The
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) output image density is even for all the surface.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is Furthermore, automatically judge the classification of the
increased, and vice versa. document and handle it with the most suitable document
mode.
Density level AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome
Item/Display Setting range Default value
(Point) FULL auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x the
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500 document width. This is not related to the PRESCAN
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500 mode.
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500 AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500 PART auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x
100mm width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
46-23
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500 Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500 high density section (High density tone gap
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500 supported).
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
Section
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.

0 Enable
1 Inhibit
46-19
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
density scanning (exposure) of mono-
A K 0 K engine highest density 0-1 1
chrome auto copy mode documents.
(0: ENABLE correction mode: Enable
Section 1: DISABLE) 1 K engine highest density
Operation/Procedure correction mode: Disable
Select an item to be set with touch panel. B BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET BLACK maximum density
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is correction
saved. C RATIO LOW High density correction ration 0 - 100 50
(LOW)
Default D RATIO HIGH High density correction ration 0 - 100 5
Item/Display Content Set value
value (HIGH)
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 MODE2 E DITHER Dither threshold 0 - 255 250
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ PRESCA THRESHOLD
Stop (for copy) STOP/ N F SLOPE Slope threshold 100 - 400
PRESCAN THRESHOLD 500
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON
Stop (for FAX) * When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set items A
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP to "0".
Stop (for scanner) STOP/
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
PRESCAN
gap is better.
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting NORMAL * To increase the density in the high density area further, set items
SHARP A to "1".
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL The tone gap may occur in high density part.
NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these
values are changed, the density in the high density area is
changed.

SIMULATION 6 – 67
46-24
An individual adjustment is available in each of the copy mode and
Purpose Adjustment the printer mode.
Function (Purpose) Copy gray balance adjustment
(Auto adjustment) Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Section
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 104
Operation/Procedure B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 819
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. C R-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 299
The gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. D G-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 587
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. B-Ratio Gray making setting (B)
(1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio)
The copy gray balance automatic adjustment is performed,
B-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (B)
then the adjustment result pattern is printed. (1000-R-Ratio RIP - G-Ratio RIP)
4) Press [OK] key.
The halftone correction target registration is processed. * B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained from
the formula below.
1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial
46-32 values (Default).
Purpose Adjustment/Setup When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is increased,
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background the copy density of red images is decreased. When the adjustment
density reproducibility in the monochrome value is decreased, the density is increased.
auto copy mode. When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is increased,
Section the copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjust-
Operation/Procedure ment value is decreased, the density in also decreased.
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 46-39
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Purpose Adjustment/Setup
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send
background and the low density image is increased. When the images.
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background Section
and the low density image is decreased. Operation/Procedure
Setting Default 1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
Item/Display Content
range value 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF front 1 - 250 196
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
(SIDE1) surface)
numeric value to decrease moire.
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF back 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) surface)
Setting Default
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 Item/Display Content
range value
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196 A 200 x 100 [DPI] OFF 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
(SIDE1) front surface) halftone OFF
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196 B 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
(SIDE2) back surface) halftone OFF
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 C 200 x 200 [DPI] ON 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode (for DSPF front 1 - 250 196 halftone ON
(SIDE1) surface) D 200 x 400 [DPI] OFF 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode (for DSPF back 1 - 250 196 halftone OFF
(SIDE2) surface) E 200 x 400 [DPI] ON 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone ON
F 400 x 400 [DPI] OFF 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
halftone OFF
46-37 G 400 x 400 [DPI] ON 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
Purpose Adjustment/Setup halftone ON
H 600 x 600 [DPI] OFF 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
halftone OFF
of monochrome mode color.
I 600 x 600 [DPI] ON 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
Section halftone ON
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
4) Press [YES] key.
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of red and yellow
images when copying color documents with red and yellow images
in the monochrome mode.

SIMULATION 6 – 68
46-40 46-42
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Collective adjustment of all the modes) (Fine)
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Set the document on the document table.
2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set. 2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.

Setting Default Setting Default


Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX send 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50
LEVEL(ALL) image density. (Collective B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
adjustment of all the modes) C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
46-41 G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Halftone
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone
(Normal)
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
Section Halftone
Operation/Procedure J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
1) Set the document on the document table. Halftone
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50
2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set. Halftone
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key Halftone
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1- 1 1
MODE EXP1 mode Fine/ 12 2 (AUTO)
and the scanned document image is outputted.
Exposure 1
Setting Default EXP2 Fine/ 3
Item/Display Content Exposure 2
range value
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 EXP3 Fine/ 4
Exposure 3
B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
EXP4 Fine/ 5
C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
Exposure 4
D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
EXP5 Fine/ 6
E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
Exposure 5
F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
AUTO Fine/ 7
G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1-6 1 1 H_TONE Automatic/
MODE EXP1 mode Exposure 1 2 (AUTO) halftone
EXP2 Exposure 2 3 EXP1 Fine/ 8
EXP3 Exposure 3 4 H_TONE Exposure 1/
EXP4 Exposure 4 5 Halftone
EXP5 Exposure 5 6 EXP2 Fine/ 9
H_TONE Exposure 2/
To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the docu- Halftone
ment and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F, EXP3 Fine/ 10
and press [EXECUTE] key. H_TONE Exposure 3/
Halftone
EXP4 Fine/ 11
H_ONE Exposure 4/
Halftone
EXP5 Fine/ 12
H_TONE Exposure 5/
Halftone

To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-


ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
and press [EXECUTE] key.

SIMULATION 6 – 69
46-43 46-44
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Super Fine) (Ultra fine)
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Set the document on the document table.
2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set. 2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.

Setting Default Setting Default


Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
Exposure 1 C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
Exposure 2 E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
Exposure 3 G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/ 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 Halftone
Exposure 4 H EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 1/Halftone
Exposure 5 I EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 2/Halftone
Auto/Halftone J EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 3/Halftone
Exposure 1/Halftone K EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 4/Halftone
Exposure 2/Halftone L EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 5/Halftone
Exposure 3/Halftone M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1- 1 1
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
Exposure 4/Halftone EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 1
Exposure 5/Halftone EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 3
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Super Fine/ 1- 1 1 Exposure 2
MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO) EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 4
EXP1 Super Fine/ 2 Exposure 3
Exposure 1 EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 5
EXP2 Super Fine/ 3 Exposure 4
Exposure 2 EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 6
EXP3 Super Fine/ 4 Exposure 5
Exposure 3 AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7
EXP4 Super Fine/ 5 H_TONE Auto/
Exposure 4 Halftone
EXP5 Super Fine/ 6 EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 8
Exposure 5 H_TONE Exposure 1/
AUTO Super Fine/ 7 Halftone
H_TONE Auto/ EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 9
Halftone H_TONE Exposure 2/
EXP1 Super Fine/ 8 Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 1/ EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 10
Halftone H_TONE Exposure 3/
EXP2 Super Fine/ 9 Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 2/ EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 11
Halftone H_TONE Exposure 4/
EXP3 Super Fine/ 10 Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 3/ EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 12
Halftone H_TONE Exposure 5/
EXP4 Super Fine/ 11 Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 4/
Halftone To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
EXP5 Super Fine/ 12 ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
H_TONE Exposure 5/ and press [EXECUTE] key.
Halftone

To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-


ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
and press [EXECUTE] key.

SIMULATION 6 – 70
46-45 46-46
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(600dpi). (RGB RIP)
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Select a target mode for adjustment.
2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set. 2) Set the document on the document table.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 4) Press [OK] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When the set value is increased, the density becomes higher.
and the scanned document image is outputted. When the set value is decreased, the density becomes lower.

Setting Default Setting Default


Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50 A STANDARD RIP For Normal/ 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 Halftone OFF
C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 mode
D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 B FINE RIP For Fine/Halftone 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 OFF mode
F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 C FINE RIP H_TONE For Fine/Halftone 1 - 99 50
ON mode
G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone 1 D SUPER FINE RIP For Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone OFF
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
mode
Halftone
E SUPER FINE RIP H_TONE For Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone ON
Halftone
mode
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
F ULTRA FINE RIP For Ultra fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone
Halftone OFF
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50
mode
Halftone
G ULTRA FINE RIP H_TONE For Ultra fine/ 1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone ON
Halftone
mode
M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/ 1- 1 1
H 600DPI RIP For 600dpi/ 1 - 99 50
MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
Halftone OFF
EXP1 600dpi/ 2 mode
Exposure 1
I 600DPI RIP H_TONE For 600dpi/ 1 - 99 50
EXP2 600dpi/ 3 Halftone ON
Exposure 2 mode
EXP3 600dpi/ 4
Exposure 3
EXP4 600dpi/ 5
Exposure 4 46-47
EXP5 600dpi/ 6
Exposure 5 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
AUTO 600dpi/ 7 Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy
H_TONE Auto/ and scan images (JPEG).
Halftone
Section
EXP1 600dpi/ 8
H_TONE Exposure Operation/Procedure
1/Halftone 1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
EXP2 600dpi/ 9 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
H_TONE Exposure
2/Halftone 3) Press [OK] key.
EXP3 600dpi/ 10 The set value is saved.
H_TONE Exposure
3/Halftone Operation Setting Default
Item/Display Content
EXP4 600dpi/ 11 mode range value
H_TONE Exposure FILLING A FILLING LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
4/Halftone (COLOR) (C) compres-
EXP5 600dpi/ 12 Filing sion
H_TONE Exposure (Color (Color)
5/Halftone mode) MIDDLE Medium 1
compres-
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- sion
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, (Color)
and press [EXECUTE] key. HIGH High 2
compres-
sion
(Color)

SIMULATION 6 – 71
Operation Setting Default Operation Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
mode range value mode range value
FILLING B FILLING LOW Low 0 0 (LOW) PUSH F SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1
(GRAY) (G) compres- SCAN (G) (*1) 1 compres- (MIDDLE
Filing sion (GRAY) sion mode 2)
(Mono- (Halftone) (Scanner 1
chrome MIDDLE Medium 1 mono- Low
halftone compres- chrome compres-
mode) sion halftone sion
(Mono- mode) MIDDLE Medium 1
chrome 2 compres-
halftone sion mode
mode) 2
HIGH High 2 Medium
compres- compres-
sion sion
(Mono- MIDDLE Medium 2
chrome 3 compres-
halftone sion mode
mode) 3
PRINT C PRINT LOW Low 0 0 (LOW) High
HOLD (C) compres- compres-
(COLOR) sion sion
Print hold (Color)
(Color *1: Setting of compression rate for images when the image
MIDDLE Medium 1
mode) compres- compression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode.
sion NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity
(Color) in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other
HIGH High 2 hand, however, the image quality of some documents may
compres-
be remarkably reduced.
sion
(Color)
PRINT D PRINT LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
HOLD (G) compres- 46-48
(GRAY) sion
Purpose Setting
Print hold (Halftone)
(Mono- MIDDLE Medium 1 Function (Purpose) Set the output resolution in each copy
chrome compres- mode.
halftone sion Section
mode) (Mono-
chrome Operation/Procedure
halftone 1) Select the output resolution of each copy mode with the key.
mode) In order to change the reproducibility of line images, change
HIGH High 2
compres-
this setting.
sion 600dpi mode: Line images becomes thicker. The reproducibility of
(Mono- line images is increased. 1200dpi mode: Line images are repro-
chrome duced finer than 600dpi mode.
halftone
mode) Item Button Content Default
PUSH E SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1 display value
SCAN (C) (*1) 1 compres- (MIDDLE AUTO 600DPI ED Automatic 600DPI ED
(COLOR) sion mode 2) 600DPI DT
(Scanner 1
TEXT/PRT 600DPI ED Text Printed 600DPI ED
color) Low
PHOTO 600DPI DT
compres-
sion 1200DPI DT
MIDDLE Medium 1 TEXT/PHOTO 600DPI DT Text photograph 600DPI DT
2 compres- 1200DPI DT
sion mode PRINTED PHOTO 600DPI DT Printed photo 1200DPI DT
2 1200DPI DT
Medium PHOTO 600DPI DT Photograph 1200DPI DT
compres- 1200DPI DT
sion
MIDDLE Medium 2 * ED: Error diffusion DT: Dither.
3 compres-
sion mode
3
High
compres-
sion

SIMULATION 6 – 72
46-51 Display Content
Dither HEAVYPAPER Copier heavy paper gamma
Purpose Adjustment/Setup B/W ED Monochrome error diffusion
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy B/W 1200 Monochrome dither(1200dpi)
mode heavy paper mode and the image WOVEN1 Watermark mode 1
process mode. WOVEN2 Watermark mode 2
Section WOVEN3 Watermark mode 3
WOVEN4 Watermark mode 4
Operation/Procedure
B/W 600DPI LOW Monochrome dither(600dpi LOW)
1) Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key
[PAPER/DITHER].
2) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. 46-54
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key. Purpose Adjustment
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is out- Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine halftone auto-
putted. matic density adjustment (dither).
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is Section
made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust Operation/Procedure
the image density.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Item/Display Content Color The high density process control is started to make 48 patch
HEAVY Copier heavy paper gamma K self print. (A4 (11" x 8.5") or A3 (11" x 17") paper in the paper
DITH1 Monochrome error diffusion K feed tray is used.)
DITH2 Monochrome dither(1200dpi) K 2) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press
DITH3 Monochrome dither(600dpi LOW) K [EXECUTE] key.
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started.
After scanning the 48 patch self print, the 17 patch self print is
Density level Default
Item/Display Setting range automatically printed.
(Point) value
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500 3) Press [OK] key.
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500 After completion of the correction amount registration, the
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500 screen shifts to the dither selection menu.
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500 4) Select an item (dither) to be adjusted.
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500 HEAVYPAPER Copier/gamma for heavy paper
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500 B/W ED Black edge
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500 B/W 1200 Monochrome dither 1200dpi
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500 WOVEN1 Watermark mode 1
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500 WOVEN2 Watermark mode 2
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500 WOVEN3 Watermark mode 3
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500 WOVEN4 Watermark mode 4
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500 B/W 600DPI LOW Monochrome dither 600dpi LOW
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500 The 48 patch self print is printed.
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 6) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press
[EXECUTE] key.
46-52 Scanning the 48 patch self print is started.
Purpose Data clear/Reset After scanning the patch, the screen automatically shifts to the
Function (Purpose) Used to set the gamma default for the copy dither selection menu.
mode heavy paper and the image process 7) After completion of the adjustment of all the density adjustment
mode. (After execution of either SIM46-54 items (dither), press [OK] key.
the adjustment value is reset to the initial
value.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key.
To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.

SIMULATION 6 – 73
46-55
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 46-59
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the drop out color in the Purpose Adjustment/Setup
image send mode (monochrome manual
text mode). Function (Purpose) Used to perform the copy mode pseudo
resolution image process adjustment.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
In the image send mode (monochrome manual text mode), the
1) Select the MAIN (main scanning direction) or the SUB (sub
range where color images are reproduced as monochrome images
is adjusted. scanning direction) button.

1) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. 2) Press the button of the adjustment value of the target copy
mode.
When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout
becomes easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the NOTE: This adjustment is valid when SIM46-58 Pseudo resolution
adjustment value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult setting is set to ON.
to widen the reproduction range. The thickness of images in the section processed by
smoothing is changed.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Positive: The image in the section processed by smoothing
range value
becomes thicker.
A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3
Negative: The image in the section processed by smoothing
2) Scan the document in the image send mode (monochrome becomes thinner.
manual text mode), and check the adjustment result.

Scanning Item (copy mode)/ Content/


NOTE
direction Adjustment button Default value
46-58
MAIN MONO (-)2 Mono- 0 Main scanning
Purpose Adjustment/Setup COPY K (-)1 chrome direction
Function (Purpose) Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolu- 0 copy For smoothing fine
tion. (Smoothing process) (+)1 BLACK adjustment
Negative (-)
Section (+)2
direction:
MONO (-)2 Mono- 0
Operation/Procedure The smoothing
PRINT K (-)1 chrome print
section becomes
1) Select an item (mode) to be set with the button and the scroll 0 For BLACK
thinner.
key. (+)1 Positive (+)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (+)2 direction:
3) Press [OK] key. The smoothing
section becomes
1(ON): 9600 (equivalent) x 600 dpi thicker.
0 (OFF): 600 x 600 dpi SUB MONO (-)2 Mono- 0 Sub scanning
The setting is reflected only the image edge area. COPY K (-)1 chrome direction
0 copy For smoothing fine
Content Setting Default (+)1 BLACK adjustment
Mode Item/Display Negative (-)
(copy mode) range value (+)2
MONO A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0 (OFF) direction:
MONO (-)2 Mono- 0
The smoothing
ON 1 PRINT K (-)1 chrome print
section becomes
B TEXT Text OFF 0 1 (ON) 0 For BLACK
thinner.
ON 1 (+)1 Positive (+)
C TEXT PRT Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF) (+)2 direction:
ON 1 The smoothing
D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF) section becomes
PHOTO ON 1 thicker.
E TEXT PHOTO Text photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
G MAP Map OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
H LIGHT Light document OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
I CPY TO CPY/ Auto (copy OFF 0 0 (OFF)
AUTO document) ON 1
J CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
TEXT document) ON 1
K CPY TO CPY/ Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
TXT PRT (copy document) ON 1
L CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO (copy document) ON 1

SIMULATION 6 – 74
46-60
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color
auto copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
2) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter
process mode).
3) Press [OK] key.
This is used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode
and the smoothness (roughness) in the dark area.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value


A CPY PUSH AUTO SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the automatic push scan SOFT 1 2 (CENTER)
FILTER LEVEL CENTER mode (Text, Printed Photo / Printed Photo images) CENTER 2
HIGH HIGH 3
B B/W COPY OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome copy mode OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON ON 1
C COLOR PUSH : RGB OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan color OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON mode ON 1
D B/W PUSH OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON monochrome mode ON 1
E B/W PRINT OFF Setting of ON/OFF of soft filter application to monochrome OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON print images ON 1

46-61 Setting Default


Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup G SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni- [CL TXT 1] adjustment: Color text
tion level. 1
H SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
Section [BK TXT 2, CL TXT 2] adjustment: Black text
Operation/Procedure 2, Color text 2
1) Select an adjustment mode. I SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
[TXT ON SCR 1] adjustment: Text 1 on
2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
dots
panel.
J SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. [TXT ON SCR 2] adjustment: Text 2 on
4) Press [OK] key. dots
K SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe- [TXT ON SCR AREA] adjustment: Detection
cially required. area of text on dots
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ- L SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
ent from the default value, image quality trouble may occur [HIGH LPI] adjustment: High line
for some documents. number judgment
M SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content [BK] adjustment: No
COLOR AUTO [Color/Gray] Auto chrome judgment
TPP [Color/Gray] Manual (Text print) N SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
COPY(TPP) [Color/Gray] Copy document (Text print) [CL] adjustment: Chrome
judgment
MONO AUTO [Monochrome] Auto
O SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
TPP [Monochrome] Manual (Text print)
[TXT ON BG] adjustment: Text on
COPY(TPP) [Monochrome] Copy document (Text print)
background
P SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
Setting Default [SCR 1 HIGH] adjustment: High
Item/Display Content
range value density dots
A SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 Q SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
[TXT ON SCR] Text on dot [SCR 1 MIDDLE] adjustment: Medium
B SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 density dots
[LINE SCR] line screen R SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
C SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 [SCR 1 LOW] adjustment: Low
[SMALL SCR] Dot in a small area density dots
D SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 S SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
[HIGH LPI] High line number [SCR 2] adjustment: Dot 2
judgment select T SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
E SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 [SCR 3] adjustment: Dot 3
[TXT ON SCR IMAGE Text on image send U SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
SEND] dots [LINE HALFTONE] adjustment: line
F SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50 screen
[BK TXT 1] adjustment: Black text
1

SIMULATION 6 – 75
46-62 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup R BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the LV_C adjustment (chroma)
ACS, the area separation, the background S MODE0_UNDER Mode 0 developing 0-6 0
image process, and the auto exposure paper mode select
mode. T MODE1_UNDER Mode 1 developing 0-6 0
paper mode select
Section U MODE5_UNDER Mode 5 developing 0-6 0
Operation/Procedure paper mode select
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch V MODE6_UNDER Mode 6 developing 0-6 0
panel. paper mode select
W SW_CHANGE_ Mode 0: Mode judgment 0-6 0
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
MODE0 select
3) Press [OK] key. X SW_CHANGE_ Mode 1: Mode judgment 0-6 1
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe- MODE1 select
cially required. Y SW_CHANGE_ Mode 2: Mode judgment 0-6 2
MODE2 select
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ-
Z SW_CHANGE_ Mode 3: Mode judgment 0-6 3
ent from the default value, image quality trouble may occur MODE3 select
for some documents. AA SW_CHANGE_ Mode 4: Mode judgment 0-6 4
MODE4 select
Setting Default
Item/Display Content AB SW_CHANGE_ Mode 5: Mode judgment 0-6 5
range value
MODE5 select
A SW_ACS ACS judgment 0-1 1
AC SW_CHANGE_ Mode 6: Mode judgment 0-6 6
reference area select
MODE6 select
B TEXT_IMAGE Text/Image judgment 0-6 3
priority level adjustment
C TEXT_BLANK Text/Blank judgment 0-6 4
priority level adjustment
46-63
D HT_LV Dot area judgment 0-6 1
threshold value Purpose Adjustment/Setup
adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low
E AE_AREA_LV Color AE judgment 0-6 3 density section.
target area adjustment
Section
F AE_LV_CC AE background 0-8 4
detection division result Operation/Procedure
adjustment: 1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
For color copy panel.
G AE_LV_MC AE background 0-8 4
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
detection division result
adjustment: 3) Press [OK] key.
For monochrome copy When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
H AE_LV_CS AE background 0-8 4 background and the low density image is increased. When the
detection division result adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
adjustment:
and the low density image is decreased.
For color scan
I AE_LV_MS AE background 0-8 4 Setting Default
detection division result Item/Display Content
range value
adjustment:
A COLOR PUSH: Text print 1-9 3
For monochrome scan
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
J AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0-4 0
B COLOR PUSH: TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3
_LV_L_U density threshold value
C COLOR PUSH: PRINTED Printed photo 1-9 5
adjustment (lower limit)
PHOTO (color PUSH)
K AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0 - 10 0
D COLOR PUSH: Photograph 1-9 5
LV_L_O density threshold value
PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
adjustment (upper limit)
E COLOR PUSH: Text/Photograph 1-9 3
L AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0 - 10 5
TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
LV_C detection level
adjustment (chroma) F COLOR PUSH: MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
M AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
_CC For color copy
N AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
_MC For mono-
chrome copy
O AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
_CS For color scan
P AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
_MS For mono-
chrome copy
Q BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
LV_L adjustment (value)

SIMULATION 6 – 76
46-66
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of watermarks in the copy/printer mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of watermarks in the
copy/printer mode.
1) Select the adjustment mode.
2) Select an adjustment item according to the necessity.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result.

Setting Default
Category Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
PATTERN A WOVEN DEN BK LOW Watermark density level (Black LOW) 0 - 255 15 The adjustment value is changed to
B WOVEN DEN BK MIDDLE Watermark density level (Black MIDDLE) 0 - 255 19 increase or decrease the density of
C WOVEN DEN BK HIGH Watermark density level (Black HIGH) 0 - 255 23 the watermark of background
documents (primary output).
To increase the watermark density,
increase the adjustment value.
To decrease the watermark density,
decrease the adjustment value.
NOTE:
When the adjustment value is
increased, the watermark area which
is originally not reproduced becomes
difficult to disappear.
When the adjustment value is
decreased, the watermark area
which is originally reproduced
becomes easy to disappear.
J CONTRAST Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2 This is used to adjust the variation in
the watermark density when the
adjustment value of the watermark
print/contrast adjustment in the
system setting is changed by 1.
When this value is increased, the
variation is also increased. When the
value is decreased, the variation is
also decreased.
When the adjustment value is 0, the
result of the contrast adjustment is
not reflected. (* The adjustment
value must be set to 1 or greater.)
K HT TYPE (POSI) For halftone index watermark type positive 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing
L HT TYPE (NEGA) For halftone index watermark type 42 - 43 42 characters of watermark copy
negative (secondary output) more clearly, set
to 43.
In that case, however, the containing
characters of the watermark
document (primary output) can be
easily reproduced.

SIMULATION 6 – 77
Setting Default
Category Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
COPY MODE A TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed Photo OFF 0-1 0 1 Normally set to the default.
mode select ON 1 No need to change in the market.
Enable/Disable
B TEXT Text mode select OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
C PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/ ON 1
Disable
D PHOTOGRAPH Photograph mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/ ON 1
Disable
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph OFF 0-1 0 1
mode select ON 1
Enable/Disable
F MAP Map mode select OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
G LIGHT Light density OFF 0-1 0 1
document mode ON 1
select Enable/
Disable
H TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Copy document: OFF 0-1 0 1
(CPY TO CPY) Enable/Disable of ON 1
selection of the text
print mode
I TEXT (CPY TO CPY) Copy document: OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable of ON 1
selection of the text
mode
J PRINTED PHOTO (CPY Copy document: OFF 0-1 0 1
TO CPY) Enable/Disable of ON 1
selection of the
printed photo mode
K AUTO Automatic mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/ ON 1
Disable
L DEFAULT MODE When the default TEXT/ 0-5 0 0
exposure mode PRINTED PHOTO
background is ON, TEXT 1
the exposure mode PRINTED PHOTO 2
to be set is PHOTOGRAPH 3
specified.
TEXT/PHOTO 4
MAP 5
POSITION A LINE SPACE 1 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 20
(24P - 36P)(*1)
B LINE SPACE 2 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 20
(37P - 48P)(*1)
C LINE SPACE 3 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 20
(49P - 64P)(*1)
D LINE SPACE 4 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 20
(65P - 80P)(*1)
E BLANK H/B 1 Upper margin/Lower margin in the 0 - 200 10
watermark print box (24P - 36P)(*2)
F BLANK H/B 2 Upper margin/Lower margin in the 0 - 200 10
watermark print box (37P - 48P)(*2)
G BLANK H/B 3 Upper margin/Lower margin in the 0 - 200 10
watermark print box (49P - 64P)(*2)
H BLANK H/B 4 Upper margin/Lower margin in the 0 - 200 10
watermark print box (65P - 80P)(*2)
I BLANK L/R 1 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 60
print box (24P - 36P)(*3)
J BLANK L/R 2 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 90
print box (37P - 48P)(*3)
K BLANK L/R 3 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 120
print box (49P - 64P)(*3)
L BLANK L/R 4 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 150
print box (65P - 80P)(*3)

*1: When the adjustment value is varied by +/-1, the line space is varied by 0.1mm.
*2: When the adjustment value is varied by +/-1, the upper and the lower margins are varied by 0.1mm.
*3: When the adjustment value is varied by +/-1, the left and the right margins are varied by 0.1mm.

SIMULATION 6 – 78
46-74 46-90
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Copy gray balance adjustment (Auto Function (Purpose) Used to set the process operation of high-
adjustment)/Printer gray balance adjust- compression PDF images.
ment (Auto adjustment) Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target adjustment mode.
This simulation is used to perform SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 contin- 2) Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key.
uously. 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
To perform both the copy gray balance adjustment (Automatic 4) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
adjustment) and the printer gray balance adjustment (Automatic
adjustment), use this simulation for efficient adjustment operations. Setting Default
Mode Item/Display Content
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the high density process control is range value
performed. Then, the copy gray balance adjustment pattern is TEXT A GLYPH Text handling 0-2 0
printed. SENSITIVITY selection
B BG SW FOR Line handling 0-1 0
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table.
FINDLINES selection
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy gray balance adjustment C HOR Line detection 0-2 0
is performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed. FINDLINES SW SW (H)
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer gray balance adjust- D VERT Line detection 0-2 0
ment pattern is printed. FINDLINES SW SW (V)
5) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table. E FGCOLOR Text color 0-3 0
INDEXING SEL number
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer gray balance adjust- adjustment SW
ment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the adjustment F FGCOLOR Text color 0-4 2
result pattern is printed. INDEXING ADJ adjustment
7) Press [OK] key, and the halftone correction target is registered. COLOR A LUMINANCE Luminance 0-4 2
8) When [EXECUTE] key is displayed, press it. ADJUSTMENT adjustment
B CHROMA Chroma 0-2 1
When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the adjust-
INTENT selection
ment is completed.
C NEUTRAL Neutral 0-2 0
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes effective only when the ADJUSTMENT adjustment
adjustment procedure for both copy and print mode have D R-RATIO Gray scale 0 - 1000 299
completed successfully. For example, when the copy gray ADJUSTMENT adjustment (R)
balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed E G-RATIO Gray scale 0 - 1000 587
and the simulation is canceled, the adjustment result is not ADJUSTMENT adjustment (G)
effective. BG LAYER A BG LAYER Speed priority 0-2 1
INTENT 1 setting
B BG LAYER Image quality 0-2 1
INTENT 2 priority setting

SIMULATION 6 – 79
46-91
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of black text.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set.
When COLOR key or MONO key is pressed, the adjustment value
is set and a copy is made simultaneously.

Setting Default
Item Display Content Description
range value
A SEGMENT PARAM COMMON Area separation setting select 0: Other than image send mode black text 0-1 0
SPECIAL emphasis (simple, high compression)
1: Image send mode black text
emphasis (simple, high compression)
B BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [COL: COMPACT] JPEG recompression level adjustment The JPEG compression ratio of the 0-2 1
[Color: High compression mode] background layer is selected.
C BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [COL: ULTRA FINE] JPEG recompression level adjustment 0: Low 0-2 1
[Color: Ultra fine mode] 1: Middle
D BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [GRY: COMPACT] JPEG recompression level adjustment 2: High 0-2 1
[Gray: High compression mode]
E BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [GRY: ULTRA FINE] JPEG recompression level adjustment 0-2 1
[Gray: Ultra fine mode]
F FG: TARGET AREA TYPE0 Front ground extraction area select 0: type0 0-2 0
TYPE1 1: type1
TYPE2 2: type2
G FG: TEXT DENSITY [COL] Front ground black text density The black text density in the front ground 0 - 10 5
adjustment [Color] layer is changed.
H FG: TEXT DENSITY [GRY] Front ground black text density 0: Dark - 5: Default - 10: Light 0 - 10 5
adjustment [Gray]
I ULTRA FINE MODE OFF High compression/Ultra Fine mode 0: High compression mode 0-1 0
ON select 1: Ultra fine mode

NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is specially required.
When the adjustment value is changed greatly from the initial value, an image quality trouble may occur.

48 Item/Display Content
Setting
range
Default
value
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
48-1 magnification ratio adjustment
(CCD)
Purpose Adjustment
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica- magnification ratio adjustment
tion ratio (in the main scanning direction (CCD)
and the sub scanning direction). C SPF (MAIN) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
Section
(Main scan)
Operation/Procedure D SPF (SUB) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch magnification ratio adjustment
panel. (Sub scan)
E SPFB (MAIN) DSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
magnification ratio adjustment
3) Press [OK] key. (Main scan)
The set value is saved.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification
ratio is increased.
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corre-
sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B or D corresponds
to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.

SIMULATION 6 – 80
When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,
48-5
change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there
Purpose Adjustment is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnifi- the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
cation ratio (in the sub scanning direction).
Setting Default
Section Scanner section Item/Display Content
range value
Operation/Procedure A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch B MR(MID) Scanner motor (Reference speed) 1 - 99 50
panel. C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
(High speed)
3) Press [OK] key. E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
The set value is saved. (Reference speed)
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is
adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci-
fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform
this adjustment.

48-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each
motor.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [MONO] [HEAVY] keys
on the touch panel.
2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.
When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased,
and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds
to a change of about 0.1% in the speed.

Setting
Item/Display Content Mode Default value
range
A RRM Resist motor correction value Monochrome MONO 1 - 99 53
Heavy paper HEAVY 53
B DM Drum motor correction value Monochrome MONO 1 - 99 49
Heavy paper HEAVY 49
C DVM Developing motor correction value Monochrome MONO 1 - 99 49
Heavy paper HEAVY 49
D FUM Fusing motor correction value Monochrome MONO 1 - 99 51
Heavy paper HEAVY 51
E PFM Paper transport motor correction value Monochrome MONO *1 1 - 99 50
F HPFM Paper feed motor correction value Monochrome MONO *1 1 - 99 50
G POM Paper exit motor correction value Monochrome MONO *1 1 - 99 50
H FUSER SETTING Fusing speed select timing Monochrome MONO 1 - 99 50
I Heavy paper HEAVY 50
J RRM START RPM acceleration start timing Heavy paper HEAVY 0 - 255 0
K RRM END RPM acceleration start timing Heavy paper HEAVY 0 - 255 200

*1: Common items for color, monochrome, and heavy paper. The items are displayed only when the color button is highlighted.

SIMULATION 6 – 81
Error
49 Display item Content
display
DSPF(MAIN) DSPF Main section DSPFM
FAX(BOOT) FAX1 Boot section FAXB
49-1
FAX(MAIN) FAX1 Main section FAXM
Purpose FAXOPT1(BOOT) FAX2 Boot section FX01B
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update. FAXOPT1(MAIN) FAX2 Main section FX01M
FAXOPT2(BOOT) FAX3 Boot section FX02B
Section
FAXOPT2(MAINÅj FAX3 Main section FX02M
Operation/Procedure
ACRE(BOOT) ACRE Boot section ACREB
1) Save the firmware to the USB memory. ACRE(MAIN) ACRE Main section ACREM
2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the ACRE_DATA ACRE table ACRED
operation panel section.)
3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel. 49-3
4) Select a target firmware. Purpose
Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively. Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. HDD.
6) Press [YES] key. Section
The selected firmware is updated. Operation/Procedure
When the operation is normally completed, "COMPLETE" is 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is dis- * When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E-
played. MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1.
Error
Display item Content 2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis-
display
ICUM(MAIN) ICUM Main ICUMM play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.)
ICUM(BOOT) ICUM BOOT ICUMT The current version and the update version are displayed.
ICUM(BIOS) ICUM BIOS ICUMB 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
ICU(MAIN) ICU Main section former half ICU1M [EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes
ICU(BOOTM) ICU Boot section main ICU1B active from gray out.
ICU(SUB) ICU Sub section (ARM9) ICU1S
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is
LANGUAGE Language support data program LANG
(General term)
updated.
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD SLIST When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
UICONTENTS Contents data for display UICON played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
SIM_TEXT SIM display data SIMT
EOSA embedded OSA EOSA 49-5
PCU(BOOT) PCU Boot section PCUB Purpose
PCU(MAIN) PCU Main section PCUM
A4LCC(BOOT) Side LCC (A4) Boot section LCC4B
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the watermark update.
A4LCC(MAIN) Side LCC (A4) Main section LCC4M Section
A3LCC(BOOT) Side LCC (A3) Boot section LCC3B Operation/Procedure
A3LCC(MAIN) Side LCC (A3) Main section LCC3M 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
INSERTER(BOOT) Inserter Boot section INSB
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark
INSERTER(MAIN) Inserter Main section INSM
update.
SADDLE(BOOT) Saddle Boot section SDLB
SADDLE(MAIN) Saddle Main section SDLM 3) The current version and the update version are displayed.
4KFIN(BOOT) 4K finisher Boot section FIN4B 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
4KFIN(MAIN) 4K finisher Main section FIN4M 5) Press [YES] key.
4KFIN100(BOOT) 100 sheets staple 4K finisher Boot 100FB The selected watermark is updated.
section
4KFIN100(MAIN) 100 sheets staple 4K finisher Main 100FM
section 49-10
4KPUNCH(BOOT) Punch module Boot section for 4K 4PUNB Purpose Install
finisher
Function (Purpose) Perform the ACU firmware update.
4KPUNCH(MAIN) Punch module Main section for 4K 4PUNM
finisher Section
SADDLE100(BOOT) 100 sheets staple saddle unit Boot S100B Operation/Procedure
section 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
SADDLE100(MAIN) 100 sheets staple saddle unit Main S100M
2) Press [YES] key.
section
TRIMMER(BOOT) 100 sheets staple trimmer unit Boot TRIMB
section
TRIMMER(MAIN) 100 sheets staple trimmer unit Main TRIMM
section
FOLDER(BOOT) Folding unit Boot section FOLDB
FOLDER(MAIN) Folding unit Main section FOLDM
DECURLER(BOOT) Relay unit (Decurling) Boot section DECB
DECURLER(MAIN) Relay unit (Decurling) Main section DECM
SCU(BOOT) SCU Boot section SCUB
SCU(MAIN) SCU Main section SCUM
DSPF(BOOT) DSPF Boot section DSPFB

SIMULATION 6 – 82
A.(RRC-A)
50 The timing of detection of the image lead edge after starting the
document scan is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
50-1 * When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When the
value is increased, the timing is delayed.
Purpose Adjustment
B- F. (RRC-B)
Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust-
Timing of paper (resist roller ON) for the image position on the
ment
transfer belt is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
Section
* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the
Operation/Procedure value is increased, the timing is advanced.
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch G. (LEAD)
panel.
The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
H. (SIDE)
default.
The side image loss amount is adjusted.
RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment
(0.1mm/step)
SIDE: Side image loss adjustment
I. (DEN-A)
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
Setting Default * When the value is increased, the void is increased.
Item/Display Content
range value J. (DEN-B)
A Lead edge RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
adjustment reference position
value (OC) * When the value is increased, the void is increased.
F.(FRONT/REAR)
B RRCB- Resist Standar 0 - 99 60 The void amount on the right and left edges of paper is adjusted.
CS12 motor ON d Tray
(0.1mm/step)
C RRCB- timing 0 - 99 60
CS34 adjustme * When the value is increased, the void is increased.
D RRCB-LCC nt LCC 0 - 99 60
E RRCB-MFT Manual 0 - 99 60
paper
feed
F RRCB-ADU ADU 0 - 99 60
G Image loss LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
area loss area setting
H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
value area adjustment
I Void area DENA Print lead edge 1 - 99 40
adjustment adjustment
J DENB Sub scanning 1 - 99 30
direction print range
adjustment
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
REAR area adjustment
L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjustment OC center adjustment
M Magnificati SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
on ratio SPEED_ magnification ratio
correction OC adjustment (CCD)
I Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
scanning correction value
J direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
K correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
value value
L DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
value
M DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
value
N DENB-LC LCC correction 1 - 99 50
value
O DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 55
value
P DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
correction value

SIMULATION 6 – 83
50-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
position. (PRINTER MODE)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with scroll key on the
touch panel.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard reference value: 4.0+/-2.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.

Default
Item/Display Content Setting range Remarks
value
A DEN-C Printer print lead edge adjustment 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value for fitting the print lead edge for the
printer.
When the adjustment value of this item is decreased
by 1, the printer print start position in the paper
transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by
0.1mm
B DEN-B Sub scanning direction print range 1 - 99 30 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge.
adjustment When the adjustment value of item B (DEN-B) is
decreased by 1, the print area adjustment value in
the sub scanning direction for the paper transport
direction is decreased by 0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area adjustment 1 - 99 20 The void amount made at the right and the left edges
of paper is adjusted. When the value is increased,
the void amount is increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed correction value 1 - 99 50
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction value 1 - 99 50
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction value 1 - 99 50
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction value 1 - 99 50
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction value 1 - 99 50
I DENB-LC LCC manual paper feed correction value 1 - 99 50
J DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 50
K DENB-HV Heavy paper correction value 1 - 99 50
L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
M PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2(CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC (*1) 6
N DUPLEX YES Duplex print Select 0-1 0 1(NO)
NO selection Not select 1

SIMULATION 6 – 84
50-6 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment F Image loss
LEAD_ Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 40
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and amount EDGE image loss amount
the image loss. (DSPF mode) setting (SIDE2) setting
G SIDE2 FRONT_ Back surface side 0 - 99 20
Section DSPF REAR image loss amount
Operation/Procedure (SIDE2) setting
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch H TRAIL_ Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 20
panel. EDGE image loss amount
(SIDE2) setting
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) document off-center
adjustment
Setting Default J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content
range value document off-center
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50 adjustment
document scan position K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
adjustment (CCD) surface magnification
B SIDE2 Back surface document 1 - 99 50 ratio (Sub scan)
scan position
adjustment (CCD) Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing
C Image loss LEAD_ Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20 is delayed.
amount EDGE image loss amount Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
setting (SIDE1) setting is increased.
D SIDE1 FRONT_ Front surface side 0 - 99 20
Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
REAR image loss amount
(SIDE1) setting increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
E TRAIL_ Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 40 All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
EDGE image loss amount *1: Displayed only when A4/A3 LCC is connected.
(SIDE1) setting
*2: Displayed only when 2-stage LCT is installed.
*3: Displayed only when two units of 2-stage LCT are connected.

50-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magni-
fication ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for
each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value


A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio BK 60 - 140 116
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment value (Manual paper feed) 1 - 99 52
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) 1 - 99 60
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) 1 - 99 60
E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) 1 - 99 60
F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) 1 - 99 60
G MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment value (LCC) 1 - 99 60
K MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment value (ADU) 1 - 99 42
O SUB-MFT Resist motor ON Manual feed (Main machine) 1 - 99 44
L SUB-CS12 timing adjustment Standard tray 1 - 99 44
M SUB-CS34 1 - 99 44
N SUB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 44
P SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 44
Y MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1

SIMULATION 6 – 85
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
Z PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual feed 1 - 999 1 2(CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
AA DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Select 0-1 0 1(NO)
NO Not select 1

50-12
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center
position adjustment. (The adjustment is
made separately for each scan mode.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side.
1step = 0.1mm

Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
B SPF (SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
C SPF (SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment

50-27
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment
of scanned images in the FAX or image
send mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER]
key.
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value


FAX send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
C TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
E amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)

SIMULATION 6 – 86
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
When image A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
send mode B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR(OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
(Except for C TRAIL_EDGE(OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
FAX and D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
copy) amount setting
E FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)

A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1step = 0.1mm

50-28 Item/Display Content Section


Purpose Adjustment SPF ALL SIDE1 MFT Document Image loss Scanner
ADJ (Front lead edge off-center
Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image (DSPF) surface) sub
loss, void area, image off-center, and image SIDE2 CS1 Document scanning
magnification ratio. (Back CS2 off-center direction
surface) Sub image
Section ADU
scanning magnifica-
Operation/Procedure CS3
magnifica- tion ratio
CS4
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with tion ratio adjustment
LCC Document (DSPF
SIM50-28.
lead edge mode)
* ADJ3 Print image position, image magnification ratio, void area,
Document
off-center adjustments (Manual adjustments) off-center
* ADJ 4 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Print engine) Sub
(Manual adjustment) scanning
magnifica-
* ADJ 8 Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)
tion ratio
* ADJ 10 Copy image position and the image loss
(Manual adjustments)
Item/Display Content Section
1) Select an adjustment item with the menu button.
SETUP/ ALL LEAD MFT Print off Print lead Engine
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed. PRINT CS1 center edge
3) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. ADJ CS2 Print lead adjustment,
OFFSET ADU edge image off-
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
center (each
CS3
5) Press [OK] key. paper feed
CS4
tray, duplex
Adjustment LCC mode)
Adjustment item list
menu adjustment
Scanner OC Document lead edge OC ADJ
Document off-center
Sub scanning
magnification ratio Item/Display Content Section
Gamma adjustment - BK-MAG MFT BK main scanning Main scanning Engine
ADJ CS1 magnification ratio direction image
DSPF SIDE1 Document lead edge SPF ADJ
CS2 magnification ratio
(Front) Document off-center (DSPF)
ADU adjustment
Sub scanning
magnification ratio CS3
SIDE2 Document lead edge CS4
(Back) Document off-center LCC
Sub scanning
magnification ratio RESULT Adjustment result display
Engine - BK main scanning BK-MAG DATA Adjustment operation data display
magnification ratio ADJ
MFT Print off-center adjustment SETUP/
Print lead edge PRINT ADJ
CS1 Print off-center adjustment
Print lead edge
CS2 Print off-center adjustment
Print lead edge
ADU Print off-center adjustment
Print lead edge
CS3 Print off-center adjustment
Print lead edge
CS4 Print off-center adjustment
Print lead edge
LCC Print off-center adjustment
Print lead edge

SIMULATION 6 – 87
When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF tim-
51 ing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is
increased, the timing is delayed.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed
51-1
by about 10ms. The setting range is -490 - +490ms.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the Item/Display item Content Setting Default
secondary transport voltage. range value
A TC ON TIMING Transfer voltage ON timing 1 - 99 48
Section setting
Operation/Procedure B TC OFF TIMING Transfer voltage OFF 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch timing setting
panel. C TC BACKEND Transfer tail edge vias 0 - 99 5
TIME output time
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
D TCEX ON Detachment 1 - 99 50
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) TIMING ON timing setting
E TCEX OFF Detachment 1 - 99 50
TIMING OFF timing setting

51-2
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec-
tion amount) on paper by the main unit and
the DSPF registration roller.
(This adjustment is performed when there
is a considerable variation in the print
image position on the paper or when paper
jams frequently occur.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or
[ENGINE] keys.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Content Transport Setting Default


Item/Button Display item
(Mode, document, paper feed speed) direction range value
A REGI1 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
A REGI2 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)

SIMULATION 6 – 88
Content Transport Setting Default
Item/Button Display item
(Mode, document, paper feed speed) direction range value
A ENGINE TRAY1 (S) Tray 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 66
(Plain paper/Small size) less
B TRAY2 (S) Tray 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 66
(Plain paper/Small size) less
C MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 66
(Plain paper/Small size) less
D MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 66
(Plain paper/Large size) above
E MANUAL HEAVY A PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 40
(Heavy paper A/Small size) less
F MANUAL HEAVY A PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 40
(Heavy paper A/Large size) above
G MANUAL HEAVY B PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 40
(Heavy paper B/Small size) less
H MANUAL HEAVY B PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 30
(Heavy paper B/Large size) above
I MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 40
J MANUAL LBL Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Label) - 1 - 99 40
K ADU PLAIN PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 66
(Plain paper/Small size) less
L ADU PLAIN PAPER (L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 66
(Plain paper/Large size) above
M ADU HEAVY A PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 40
(Heavy paper A/Small size) less
N ADU HEAVY A PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 40
(Heavy paper A/Large size) above
O TRAY3/4(S) Tray 3, 4/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 66
(Plain paper/Small size) less
P TRAY3/4 HEAVY A PAPER (S) Tray 3, 4/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 40
(Heavy paper A/Small size) less
Q TRAY3/4(L) Tray 3, 4/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 66
(Plain paper/Large size) above
R TRAY3/4 HEAVY A PAPER (L) Tray 3, 4/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 40
(Heavy paper A/Large size) above
S TRAY4 OHP Tray 4/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 40
T TRAY4 LBL Tray 4/deflection adjustment value (Label) - 1 - 99 66
U LCC (S) LCC, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 66
(Plain paper/Small size) less
V LCC HEAVY A PAPER (S) LCC, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 50
(Heavy paper A/Small size) less
W LCC (L) LCC, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Large size) above
X LCC HEAVY A PAPER (L) LCC, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 50
(Heavy paper A/Large size) above

Note on "Large size" and "Small size"


Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter than the LT size (216mm).
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer than the LT size (216mm).
* The adjustment unit is a distance of 0.1mm unit.
* The smaller the set value of the warp amount for each of the specified items is, the smaller the warp is. The greater the set value is, the
greater the warp is.
* DSPF REGI1 is the registration amount adjustment in the paper feed side. DSPF REGI2 is the registration amount adjustment at just before
scanning.

Adjustment value
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp amount is
decreased.
(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is changed by 0.1mm.)

SIMULATION 6 – 89
53-8
53
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge ref-
53-6
erence and the DSPF mode document
Purpose Adjustment scan position.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the Section
DSPF document width.
Operation/Procedure
Section Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key.
Operation/Procedure AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment
1) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width. (Auto adjustment)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document
The maximum width detection level is recognized. table.
3) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. adjustment value is saved.)
The A4R width detection level is recognized. Setting Default
Item/Display Content
5) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width. range value
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 -
DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit)
The A5R width detection level is recognized.
RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
7) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width. reference position
8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
MANUAL: DSPF mode document scan position adjustment
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally, 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
"COMPLETE" is displayed.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value range value
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value A ADJUST DSPF mode document scan 1 - 99 10
VALUE position adjustment (Scanner
3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
stop position adjustment)
4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
- When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop posi-
tion in the DSPF mode is shifted to the right.
- When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is
53-7
shifted by 0.1mm.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the DSPF document size
width sensor.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Setting Default
Item/Display
range value
A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 66
B AD_P1 Intermediate position (L) 0 - 1023 438
C AD_P2 Intermediate position (S) 0 - 1023 699
D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 893

SIMULATION 6 – 90
53-9
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) DSPF dirt detection setting
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.

Setting Default
Item/Display item, Details of display Content
range value
A SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_SET_START OFF DSPF front surface optimum scan position detection OFF 0-1 0 0
ON setting (when starting) ON 1 (OFF)
B SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_SET_JOB OFF DSPF front surface optimum scan position detection OFF 0-1 0 1
ON setting (After a job) ON 1 (ON)
C SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_LV WEAK DSPF front surface optimum scan position detection level Low 0-2 0 1
MIDDLE setting Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
D OC_DIRT_LV WEAK OC dirt level setting Low 0-2 0 1
MIDDLE Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
E SIDEA_DIRT_ALARM_LV WEAK DSPF front surface dirt alarm level setting Low 0-2 0 1
MIDDLE Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
F SIDEB_DIRT_ALARM_LV WEAK DSPF back surface dirt alarm level setting Low 0-2 0 1
MIDDLE Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
G SIDEA_DIRT_SHADING_SET OFF DSPF front surface streak delete shading setting OFF 0-1 0 1
ON ON 1 (ON)
H SIDEB_DIRT_SHADING_SET OFF DSPF back surface streak delete shading setting OFF 0-1 0 1
ON ON 1 (ON)
I SCAN_POSITION_PRIORITY_SET MVIEW DSPF front surface MVIEW/SCU priority setting MVIEW 0-1 0 1
SCU (Optimum scan position) SCU 1 (SCU)
J DIRT_ALARM_PRIORITY_SET MVIEW DSPF common MVIEW/SCU priority setting (Alarm) MVIEW 0-1 0 0
SCU SCU 1 (MVIEW)

53-10
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 55
Function (Purpose) DSPF dirt detection execution.
55-1
Section
Operation/Procedure Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.)
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine
Item Content control operations. (SOFT SW)
OC Forcible execution of OC/DSPF SIDE A and the result Section
display are made.
Operation/Procedure
DSPF Forcible execution of DSPF SIDE B and the result display
are made.
55-2
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan-
ner control operation. (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure

55-3
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control-
ler operation. (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure

SIMULATION 6 – 91
55-10
56
Purpose Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan
56-1
only)
Purpose Backup
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP
Operation/Procedure
PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the
1) Select an item to be set (digit, color, type) with the scroll key. PWB.)
2) Enter the value corresponding to the setting item with 10-key.
Section
3) Press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default 1) Select a target content of data transfer.
Item/Display Content
range value 2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
A 1ST DIGIT First digit (left edge) 1 - 90 1 Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
B 2ND DIGIT Second digit
32 [blank: When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
C 3RD DIGIT Third digit
20H] displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
D 4TH DIGIT Fourth digit
65 - 90
E 5TH DIGIT Fifth digit EEPROM - HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
[Alphabet:
F 6TH DIGIT Sixth digit (right edge) HDD - EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
41H("A") -
5AH("Z")]
48 - 57
[Numeral:
30H("0") - 56-2
39H("9")]
Purpose Data backup
G TYPE PATTERN Print Edging type 0 1
1 com- Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM.
PATTERN posing OR process 1 SD Card, and HDD (including user authen-
2 method type tication data and address data) to the USB
PATTERN No-delete- 2 memory. (Corresponding to the device
3 compo- cloning and the storage backup.)
sition type
Section
Input value Operation/Procedure
Print Blank A B C D E F 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Input value 32 65 66 67 68 69 70 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
<IMPORT>
Print G H I J K L M From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SD Card HDD
Input value 71 72 73 74 75 76 77
<EXPORT>
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD To USB MEMORY
Print N O P Q R S T
Input value 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed
Print U V W X Y Z 0 When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
Input value 85 86 87 88 89 90 48 displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
(Machine with the DSK installed)
Print 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Input value 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
Print 8 9 <IMPORT>
Input value 56 57 From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card HDD
<EXPORT>
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
3) Enter the password with 10-key.
4) Press [SET] key.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.

SIMULATION 6 – 92
<Data list outside the backup targets>
56-5
(EEPROM/SD Card)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
PWB Type Content NOTE Function (Purpose) Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB
Controller Machine serial No. memory in the TEXT format.
Product key information
Section
Various counter Copy counter/FAX
send counter etc. Operation/Procedure
Trouble history 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
PCU Machine serial No. 2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
Various counter Maintenance counter 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Machine adjustment execute
history
Procedure 2) The selected data are imported.
Trouble history When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
SCU Various counter Maintenance counter displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Trouble history

(HDD)
56-6
Classifi- Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Content NOTE
cation
Function (Purpose) Used to output the JAM/trouble data.
Japanese FEP User dictionary
Job end list Job end list display data Section
(The image send series include Operation/Procedure
the preserved job list.) 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Log Job log Read from WEB is
enable.
2) Select the output target item with the touch panel key.
New N/A - Print history information 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
- JAM history information 4) Press [YES] key.
- Trouble history information
- Same position continuous
jam count value
- Charging information 56-7
- Life information Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Operation E-manual
manual Function (Purpose) Import the syslog data to a USB memory.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
56-3
2) Select SYSLOG EXPORT to be imported.
Purpose Data backup
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to
4) Press [YES] key.
the USB memory.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. 60
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
<IMPORT>
60-1
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card, HDD
Purpose Operation test/check
<EXPORT>
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE Function (Purpose) Used to check the memory operations
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. (read/write) of the MFP PWB.
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. Section
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is Operation/Procedure
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Start the test.

Result display Description


56-4
OK Success
Purpose Data backup NG Fail
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the NONE Not installed (Including DIMM trouble)
USB memory. INVALID Execution disable
Section
Operation/Procedure SLOT Description
ICUM SLOT1 ICU standard 1 ON BOARD
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
ICUM SLOT2 ICU standard 2 DIMM
2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key.
ICU1 SLOT1 ICU1 standard ON BOARD
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. ACRE SLOT ACRE ACRE
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.

SIMULATION 6 – 93
61
61-1
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-
tion and laser detection.
Section LSU
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.

Display Content
LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)

61-3
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY], [PR600/
FAX], [PR1200] on the touch panel.
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are
increased, the print density is increased and the line width of
line images are increased.

Default value
Setting
Category Item/Display Content 65 CPM 75 CPM
range
machine machine
COPY600 A LASER POWER MIDDLE(BW) Laser power setting middle speed/BW 0 - 255 115 125
B LASER POWER LOW(BW) Laser power setting low speed /BW 0 - 255 115 115
C LASER POWER MIDDLE SAVE(BW) Laser power setting middle speed save mode/BW 0 - 255 115 125
D LASER POWER LOW SAVE(BW) Laser power setting low speed save mode/BW 0 - 255 115 115
E LASER DUTY MIDDLE(BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed/BW 0 - 255 0 0
F LASER DUTY LOW(BW) Laser DUTY select low speed /BW 0 - 255 0 0
G LASER DUTY MIDDLE SAVE(BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed save mode/BW 0 - 255 0 0
H LASER DUTY LOW SAVE(BW) Laser DUTY select low speed save mode/BW 0 - 255 0 0
I LASER POWER K1 Laser power setting correction value K1 0 - 255 100 100
J LASER POWER K2 Laser power setting correction value K2 0 - 255 100 100
K LASER POWER K3 Laser power setting correction value K3 0 - 255 100 100
L LASER POWER K4 Laser power setting correction value K4 0 - 255 100 100
COPY1200 A LASER POWER MIDDLE(BW) Laser power setting middle speed/BW 0 - 255 115 125
B LASER POWER LOW(BW) Laser power setting low speed /BW 0 - 255 115 115
C LASER POWER MIDDLE SAVE(BW) Laser power setting middle speed save mode/BW 0 - 255 115 125
D LASER POWER LOW SAVE(BW) Laser power setting low speed save mode/BW 0 - 255 115 115
E LASER DUTY MIDDLE(BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed/BW 0 - 255 0 0
F LASER DUTY LOW(BW) Laser DUTY select low speed /BW 0 - 255 0 0
G LASER DUTY MIDDLE SAVE(BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed save mode/BW 0 - 255 0 0
H LASER DUTY LOW SAVE(BW) Laser DUTY select low speed save mode/BW 0 - 255 0 0
PRINTER A LASER POWER MIDDLE(BW) Laser power setting middle speed/BW 0 - 255 115 125
600/FAX B LASER POWER LOW(BW) Laser power setting low speed /BW 0 - 255 115 115
C LASER POWER MIDDLE SAVE(BW) Laser power setting middle speed save mode/BW 0 - 255 115 125
D LASER POWER LOW SAVE(BW) Laser power setting low speed save mode/BW 0 - 255 115 115
E LASER DUTY MIDDLE(BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed/BW 0 - 255 40 40
F LASER DUTY LOW(BW) Laser DUTY select low speed /BW 0 - 255 40 40
G LASER DUTY MIDDLE SAVE(BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed save mode/BW 0 - 255 40 40
H LASER DUTY LOW SAVE(BW) Laser DUTY select low speed save mode/BW 0 - 255 40 40

SIMULATION 6 – 94
Default value
Setting
Category Item/Display Content 65 CPM 75 CPM
range
machine machine
PRINTER A LASER POWER MIDDLE(BW) Laser power setting middle speed/BW 0 - 255 115 125
1200 B LASER POWER LOW(BW) Laser power setting low speed /BW 0 - 255 115 115
C LASER POWER MIDDLE SAVE(BW) Laser power setting middle speed save mode/BW 0 - 255 115 125
D LASER POWER LOW SAVE(BW) Laser power setting low speed save mode/BW 0 - 255 115 115
E LASER DUTY MIDDLE(BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed/BW 0 - 255 0 0
F LASER DUTY LOW(BW) Laser DUTY select low speed /BW 0 - 255 0 0
G LASER DUTY MIDDLE SAVE(BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed save mode/BW 0 - 255 0 0
H LASER DUTY LOW SAVE(BW) Laser DUTY select low speed save mode/BW 0 - 255 0 0

SIMULATION 6 – 95
61-4 61-12
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to print the print image skew adjust- Function (Purpose) Laser power manual correction
ment pattern. (LSU unit) Section LSU
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure Press an item button to be adjusted.
1) Select a target item with scroll key on the touch panel. When [MEASURING INSTRUMENT] is pressed:
2) Enter the print conditions setting value with 10-key. 1) Select the adjustment density pattern.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The print image skew adjustment pattern is printed. 3) The adjustment pattern is printed out.
4) Enter the adjustment value by the density meter.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
range value
A MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Execute the manual correction of the laser power. Then the
B PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 adjustment result pattern is outputted and the data are dis-
selection paper feed (CS1) played.
CS1 Tray 1 2
6) To perform the correction again, press [RETRY] key.
CS2 Tray 2 3
When [VISUAL INSPECTION] is pressed:
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5 1) Select the adjustment density pattern.
LCC LCC 6 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) The adjustment pattern is printed out.
4) Press [4POINT CORRECTION] or [31POINT CORRECTION].
61-11 5) Enter an adjustment value.
Purpose Adjustment 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Execute the manual correction of the laser power. Then the
Function (Purpose) Used to correct the laser power automati-
adjustment result pattern is outputted and the data are dis-
cally.
played.
Section
7) To perform the correction again, press [RETRY] key.
Operation/Procedure
When [DATA] is pressed:
1) Select a target item with touch panel key.
The display is shifted to the manual adjustment result display
screen.
Items Contents Outline
AUTO Automatic correction Adjustment by scanner
Items Contents Outline
CORRECTION
MEASURING Density meter correction * Adjustment with the
DATA Data display screen Data display when
INSTRUMENT density meter.
executing the automatic
VISUAL Visual check adjustment Adjustment by visual
correction
INSPECTION check
2) Press [AUTO CORRECTION] key. DATA Data display screen Data display during
execution of the manual
3) Select the adjustment density pattern.
correction
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
5) The adjustment pattern is printed out. *: Since a special tool is required for measurement, this simulation
is executed only in the factory.
6) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table
(A4R direction), and press [EXECUTE] key.
The automatic correction of the laser power is performed, and
then the adjustment result pattern is outputted. 61-13
7) To perform the correction again, press [RETRY] key. Purpose Adjustment
8) When [DATA] key is pressed on the initial screen, the display is Function (Purpose) Used to clear the laser power correction
shifted to the automatic adjustment result display screen. value.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.

Reference value reset item


Laser power automatic correction amount (K) 32 data (point)
Laser power manual correction amount (K) 32 data (point)

SIMULATION 6 – 96
62-7
62
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics
62-1
error log.
Purpose Data clear
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk/SD Card.
Operation/Procedure
(HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and
the watermark data) (SD Card: User data) 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and
Section
the result is printed.
Operation/Procedure
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. normal display.
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to execute the HDD/SD Card format.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the 62-8
normal display.
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk/SD Card.
(HDD: Excluding the Operation Manual, the
62-2 watermark data, and the system area) (SD
Purpose Operation test/check Card: User data)
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk Section
(partial). Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure 2) Press [YES] key.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Used to execute the hard disk format.
2) Press [YES] key. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not
62-3 completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)
Purpose Operation test/check NG" is displayed.

Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk


(all areas).
62-10
Section
Purpose Data clear
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the job completion list data.
2) Press [YES] key. Section
Read/write operations are performed. Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
62-6 Used to delete the job log data.
Purpose Operation test/check When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the
hard disk.
Section
62-11
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Data clear
1) Select the self diag area.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.
The self diag operation is performed. Section
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD,
use this simulation to cheek the HDD. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
SHORT S.T Partial area diag Used to delete the document filing data.
EXTENDED S.T All area diag
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
normal display.
Normal completion - "OK (RESULT:0)" is displayed.
Abnormal end - "NG (RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.
* If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for
some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding sec-
tion.

SIMULATION 6 – 97
62-12 62-20
Purpose Setting Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the mirror-
in a hard disk trouble. ing hard disk.
Section Section Mirroring hard disk
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Enter the simulation mode, and the operation status of the HDD is
2) Press [OK] key. displayed.
The set value is saved. The status display is renewed in every second.
When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system
Display Content description
data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system
OK Normal operation
data storage area is cleared.
NONE Not connected
REBUILDING Data rebuilding
Item Content Default value
ERROR Error occurrence
A 0 Enable 1
TROUBLE Trouble
1 Disable

62-13
Purpose Data clear
63
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Operation
Manual, watermark data only) 63-1

Section Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check


Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction
result.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key. Section Scanner
The operation manual data are deleted. Operation/Procedure
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the 1) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch
normal display. panel.

Display
Button Description Remarks
item
62-14 OC ANALOG Analog gain
GAIN ODD adjustment value
Purpose Data clear
(odd number)
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing manage- ANALOG Analog gain
ment data. GAIN adjustment value
Section HDD EVEN (even number)
DIGITAL Digital gain
Operation/Procedure GAIN ODD adjustment value
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (odd number)
2) Press [YES] key. DIGITAL Digital gain
GAIN adjustment value
The document filing management data are cleared.
EVEN (even number)
At the same time, the job log data are also cleared. SMP AVE Reference plate
This simulation is executed in the following trouble cases. ODD sampling average
* The document filing function does not work normally. value (odd number)
SMP AVE Reference plate
* The job log is not recorded normally. EVEN sampling average
NOTE: value (even number)
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions. TARGET Target value
VALUE
In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest ver-
BLACK Black output level
sion.
LEVEL
ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 0: No error
CODE 1: STAGE1. Loop
number over
2: STAGE2. The
target value is less
than the specified
level.
3: STAGE3. The gain
set value is
negative.
4: END is not
asserted. (Gain
adjustment)
5: (reserve)
6: STAGE2.
Underflow

SIMULATION 6 – 98
Display Display
Button Description Remarks Button Description Remarks
item item
OC ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 7: Black shading error DSPF ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 11: END is not
CODE 8: Other error CODE asserted. (Light
9: END is not quantity correction)
asserted. (White 12: END is not
shading) asserted. (Scan)
10: END is not 13: Register check
asserted. (Black error (When
shading) starting/Gain)
11: END is not 14: Register check
asserted. (Light error (Before light
quantity correction) quantity correction)
12: END is not DSPF First scan DSPF
asserted. (Scan) BACK back surface white
13: Register check WHITE reference level
error (When LEVEL 1ST
starting/Gain) DSPF Second scan DSPF
14: Register check BACK back surface white
error (Before light WHITE reference level
quantity correction) LEVEL 2ND
DSPF First scan DSPF
FACE front surface white
WHITE reference level
LEVEL 1ST 63-2
DSPF Second scan DSPF Purpose Adjustment
FACE front surface white
WHITE reference level
Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading.
LEVEL 2ND Section
DSPF ANALOG Analog gain Operation/Procedure
GAIN ODD adjustment value
(odd number)
- DSPF-installed model
ANALOG Analog gain 1) Select [OC SHADING] key or [DSPF SHADING] key, and
GAIN adjustment value press [EXECUTE] key.
EVEN (even number) Used to perform shading.
DIGITAL Digital gain
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
GAIN ODD adjustment value
(odd number)
normal display.
DIGITAL Digital gain
GAIN adjustment value
EVEN (even number) 63-3
SMP AVE Reference plate
ODD sampling average
Purpose Adjustment
value (odd number) Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD) color bal-
SMP AVE Reference plate ance and gamma auto adjustment.
EVEN sampling average
Section Scanner
value (even number)
TARGET Target value Operation/Procedure
VALUE 1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)
BLACK Black output level on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the doc-
LEVEL ument table. For the DSPF mode, put the SIT chart backside
ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 0: No error up on the DSPF tray.
CODE 1: STAGE1. Loop 2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key.
number over
2: STAGE2. The
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
target value is less The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per-
than the specified formed.
level. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
3: STAGE3. The gain normal display.
set value is
negative. After completion of the operation, press [RESULT] key, and the
4: END is not adjustment data are displayed. At that time, the target color of data
asserted. (Gain display can be selected with [R] [G] [B] key.
adjustment)
5: (reserve)
6: STAGE2.
Underflow
7: Black shading error
8: Other error
9: END is not
asserted. (White
shading)
10: END is not
asserted. (Black
shading)

SIMULATION 6 – 99
63-4
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)
on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the doc-
ument table. For the DSPF mode, put the SIT chart backside
up on the DSPF tray.
2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The patch of the SIT chart is scanned.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
the normal display.
4) Select a data display mode.

GAMMA THROUGH SIT chart scan data


COPY GAMMA Copy mode gamma process data of the SIT chart
scan data
SCANNER GAMMA Image send mode gamma process data of the SIT
chart scan data
SIT CHECK SIT chart scan data/Check result

Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys.

63-5
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color
balance and gamma default setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key
2) The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the
default.

63-11
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target gray balance of the
copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the target gray balance with the touch panel.
Default DEF 1.

SIMULATION 6 – 100
64
64-2
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-1 1
(1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22,29,33-35) (* For details, refer to the below.) (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19,
21, 22, 29,33-35)
B DOT1 Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-1 1
(DOT1>=2 IF A: 2, 11) (Self print pattern: For m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2 - 255
except above: 1 - 255)
C DOT2 Space dot number setting (N parameter) 0-0 254
(DOT2>=2 IF A: 2, 11) (Self print pattern: For m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2 - 255
except above: 0 - 255)
D DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1-1 255
(FIXED "255" IF A:9) (Pattern 9: 255 Fixed
except above: 1 - 255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure mode No process (through) 1-9 1 8
CHAR/PIC specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17 - 19: 2 - 9 2 (STANDARD
CHAR/PRPIC Text/Photograph Pattern 33-35:2,3,5,6,8 3 DITHER)
CHAR Text except above: 1 - 9) 4
PRINT PIC Printed photo 5
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
AUTO AUTO 9
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1
NO selection No 1 (NO)
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-6 1 1
HEAVY Heavy paper 2 (PLAIN)
OHP OHP 3
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 4
GLOSSY Glossy paper 5
HEAVY3 Heavy paper 3 6

SIMULATION 6 – 101
Print pattern of Item A

M N
Pattern
Pattern Gradation Exposure parameter parameter
NO./Content generating
size select select Enable/ Enable/
section Default value Default value
Disable Disable
1 Grid pattern All surface LSU-ASIC  ×  1  236
* When the print width is 100 or above and all colors are selected, printing is made in the three colors
of CMY.
* Printing is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge.
* For the first writing, LD1 is fixed regardless of void.
2 Dot print All surface  ×  2  2
9 Each color 10% Fixed  ×  10  1
area (A4/4R) range * Each interval is 41.86mm (989dots).
density print * When m is out of the range of 1 - 13%, it is rounded.
* K printing is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt print Fixed  × × 1 × 1
range
11 4-color dot print All surface    2  2
(sub scan) (each * Each color is printed in 1/4 of the sub scan paper size.
color 1/4) * At N=0, 4 colors are printed in all the surface.
17 All background All surface Halftone   × 1 × 1
(halftone) (IMG-ASIC rear * When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
18 256 gradations Fixed process) ×  × 1 × 1
pattern (Other range * When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
dither) * 16 gradations are printed in the main scan direction, and the following 16 gradations are printed in
the next line. (16 x 16 patch print)
* Printing is started at 5mm from the paper lead edge.
* Printing is made from 255 gradation, and 0 - 254 gradations are printed.
19 256 gradations Fixed ×  × 1 × 1
pattern (Dither range Same as above.
for text)
21 4-point dot print All color LSU-ASIC  ×  2  2
(main scan) (each * Each color is printed in 1/4 of the main scan paper size.
color 1/4) * At N=0, 4 colors are printed in all the surface.
22 Slant line All surface LSU-ASIC  ×  1  254
29 Dot print All surface LSU-ASIC  ×  1  3
1200dpi * M=1 Fixation
* N=1 or 3
33 Halftone pattern Fixed Halftone ×  × 1 × 1
1200dpi (all over range (IMG-ASIC rear * 1200dpi dither
the page) process)
34 256 gradation Fixed ×  × 1 × 1
pattern 1200dpi range * 1200dpi dither
35 256 gradation Fixed ×  × 1 × 1
pattern (straight) range * 1200dpi dither
1200dpi

SIMULATION 6 – 102
64-4
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) The test print (self print) is performed.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value


A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-3 3
(* For details, refer to the description below.)
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray selection Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW Halftone Low line number 0 0
HIGH High line number 1 (LOW)
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard(600dpi, 1bit) 0 1
HIGHQUALITY High quality(600dpi, 4bit) 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
FINE Ultra fine(1200dpi, 1bit) 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 0 1
CALIB correction Calibration 1 (CALIB)
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1 (PLAIN)
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 2
HEAVY3 Heavy paper 3 3
GLOSSY Glossy paper 4

Print pattern of Item A


Pattern No. Content
1 256 gradations pattern (B/W)
2 Halftone pattern (B/W)
3 Background dot print

SIMULATION 6 – 103
64-5
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value


A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1-2 1
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 - 255 255
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0 0
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1 (LOW(IMAGE))
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0 1
HIGHQUALITY High quality (600dpi, 4bit) 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
FINE Ultra fine (1200dpi, 1bit) 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither 0: Straight 0 1(CALIB)
CALIB correction 1: Calibration 1
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1 (PLAIN)
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 2
HEAVY3 Heavy paper 3 3
GLOSSY Glossy paper 4
I TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1 (OFF)

SIMULATION 6 – 104
64-6
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value


A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1-2 1
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 - 255 255
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0 0
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1 (LOW(IMAGE))
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0 1
HIGHQUALITY High quality (600dpi, 4bit) 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
FINE Ultra fine (1200dpi, 1bit) 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither 0: Straight 0 1
CALIB correction 1: Calibration 1 (CALIB)
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1 (PLAIN)
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 2
HEAVY3 Heavy paper 3 3
GLOSSY Glossy paper 4
I TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1 (OFF)

SIMULATION 6 – 105
65-5
65 Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key
65-1 input.
Purpose Adjustment Section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis- Operation/Procedure
play section) detection coordinates. Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on
Section Operation panel section the screen.
Operation/Procedure If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
screen. is displayed.
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to <Check target key>
the simulation sub number entry menu.
10 Inch LCD model
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu. HOME

66
66-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2
- 150) on the LCD to allow changing the
soft SW while checking with the LCD.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value of [SW NO] is
cleared.
65-2 2) Press [DATA] key.
Purpose Operation check/test The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
* When [SW NO] key is pressed, the display returns to the ini-
Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD dis-
tial screen.
play section) detection coordinates.
3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
Section
10-key.
Operation/Procedure
* [1] - [0]
Touch the touch panel.
[0] - [1]
The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the set-
the touched position is displayed in real time.
ting is saved.

After saving the setting, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal
display.
;<
 
 ;< 



66-2

          
Purpose Setting

Function (Purpose) Used to enter a country code and set the
default value for the country code.
 Section FAX
 
 
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-02, the following

screen is displayed.
* When [DEST CODE] key is pressed, the display is shifted to
the country code list screen.
* The currently set country code is displayed in the column of
"PRESENT:".
2) Enter the country code (8 digits) with 10-key([0]/[1]). The
entered country code is displayed in the column of "NEW:" and
[SET] key becomes active.
* When [C] key is pressed, the column of "NEW:" is cleared.
3) When [SET] key is pressed after entering the country code,
[EXECUTE] key becomes active. The country code is dis-
played in the column of "PRESENT:", and the column of
"NEW:" is cleared.

SIMULATION 6 – 106
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and [YES] 3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the
and [NO] keys become active. The country name is displayed memory check of the selected item is started.
on the tile line. 4) After completion of memory check, [EXECUTE] key returns to
5) When [YES] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the soft SW the normal display and the result of memory check is dis-
corresponding to the country code is initialized. played.
6) After completion of initialization of the soft SW, [EXECUTE], Memory check status
[YES], and [NO] keys become inactive.
NO CHECK No check
CHECKING During checking
Operation/Procedure (Shifting to the country page) OK Check complete OK
* When [DEST CODE] key is pressed on the initial screen, the dis- NG A## Check complete NG Error occurring address or data
play is shifted to the country code list screen. line is displayed for each item.
Use scroll keys to select the country select page.
Check item
<Country code list>
Check memory item Remark
JAPAN 00000000 1 All Memory Device Check (once) All the items are checked
U.S.A. 10110101 once.
AUSTRALIA 00001001 2 MODEM EEPROM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1
U.K. 10110100 3 MODEM EEPROM <1> (repeat) Repeat check in LINE1
FRANCE 00111101 4 MODEM SDRAM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1
GERMANY 00000100 5 MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat) Repeat check in LINE1
SWEDEN 10100101
NEWZEALAND 01111110 The number in < > indicates the line.
CHINA 00100110
SINGAPORE 10011100
TW 11111110 66-4
MIDDLEANDNEAREAST 11111101
Purpose Operation test/Check
SLOVAKIA 11111100
OTHER3 11111011 Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signals to the
FINLAND 00111100 line and the main unit speaker. (Send level:
NORWAY 10000010 max.)
DENMARK 00110001 Section FAX
NETHERLANDS 01111011 Operation/Procedure
ITALY 01011001
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-04, the screen on the
SWITZERLAND 10100110
right is displayed. (Default, left upper selected.)
AUSTRIA 00001010
INDONESIA 01010100
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page.
THAILAND 10101001 2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high-
MALAYSIA 01101100 lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal
INDIA 01010011 display.
PHILIPPINES 10001001 3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signals
HONGKONG 01010000 are sent.
RUSSIA 10111000 4) To end signal send:
SOUTHAFRICA 10011111
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signal
SPAIN 10100000
send is interrupted.
PORTUGUESE 10001011
LUXEMBURG 01101001
<Signal send table>
BELGIUM 00001111
NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34
CZECH 00101110
26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34
HUNGARY 01010001
16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34
GREECE 01000110
7.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33
POLAND 10001010
12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17
BRAZIL 00010110
7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t
KOREA 01100001
2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100
0.3 V21 ANSam RINGER No RBT

66-3 DP MAKE DP BRK NO MSG

Purpose Operation test/Check


Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the EEPROM
and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller 66-5
and display the result. Purpose Operation test/Check
Section FAX Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal to the line
Operation/Procedure and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-03, the following SW setting) (For the kinds of send signals,
screen is displayed. refer to SIM66-04.)
* Select the page of memory check item with the scroll key. Section FAX
2) When the memory check item button is selected, the display is Operation/Procedure
shifted to the memory check screen. 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-05, the following
screen is displayed.

SIMULATION 6 – 107
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page.
66-9
2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high-
lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal Purpose Operation test/Check
display. Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound message
3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signals to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
are sent. Soft SW setting)
* For details of sound messages, refer to
4) To end signal send:
the sound message table of SIM66-08.
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signal
send is interrupted. Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-09, the following
66-6 screen is displayed.
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
Purpose Data output/Check
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
Function (Purpose) Used to print the confidential registration display.
check table (BOX NO., BOX name, pass-
3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and a sound
code. (If there is no confidential registra-
message is sent.
tion, no print is made.)
4) To end signal send:
Section FAX
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signal
Operation/Procedure
send is interrupted.
1) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the con-
fidential checkable is printed.
* If there is no confidential registration, no print is made even 66-10
though [EXECUTE] key is pressed.
Purpose Data clear
2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor-
mal display. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX and image send
image data. (The confidential data are also
cleared.)
66-7 Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Data output/Check
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to output all image data saved in the
image memory. (Confidential data are also 2) Press [YES] key.
outputted.) 3) After completion of clearing, press [CA] key to reboot the
machine.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and all
66-11
image data saved in the image memory are outputted.
2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor- Purpose Operation test/Check
mal display. Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps
to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
Max.)
66-8 Section FAX
Purpose Operation test/Check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound mes- 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-11, the following
sages to the line and the speaker. (Send screen is displayed.
level: Max.) 2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
Section FAX highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
display.
Operation/Procedure
3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and a sound
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-08, the following
message is sent.
screen is displayed.
4) To end signal send:
2) When the sound message button to be sent is selected, it is
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signal
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
display. send is interrupted.
<300bps send signal table>
<Sound message table>
NO SIGNAL 11111 11110 00000
NONE (Mute) PAUSE (Pause MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2
melody) (Message 1) (Message 2) 010101 00001
MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE6
(Message 3) (Message 4) (Massage 5) (Message 6)
ALARM (Alarm) RINGER EXT.TEL.RING
(Ringing sound ER (External
(Speaker)) telephone call)

SIMULATION 6 – 108
Operation/Procedure
66-12
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-15, the following
Purpose Operation test/Check screen is displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps 2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the dial
to the line and the speaker. (Send level: pulse is sent from the line in the set make time.
Soft SW setting)
* The dial pulse in this example is up to 20 digits registered
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps,
with SIM66-13.
refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal
table. 3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] key again. The button
returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-12, the following 66-16
screen is displayed.
Purpose Adjustment
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal Function (Purpose) Used to execute the DTFM signal send test
display. and to adjust the send level.
3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and a sound Section FAX
message is sent. Operation/Procedure
4) To end signal send: 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-16, the following
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signal screen is displayed.
send is interrupted. 2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the dial
pulse signal is sent from the line by the setting of high/low
group of the signal send level.
66-13 3) To terminate the dial test, press [EXECUTE] key. The button
returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-
14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be
registered.) 66-17
Purpose Operation test/Check
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-13, the following
screen is displayed. Section FAX
* The number saved in the memory is displayed in the column Operation/Procedure
of [PRESENT:]. (If there is no data, [-------] is displayed.) 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-17, the following
2) Enter a number with 10-key. screen is displayed.
The entered number is displayed in the column of [NEW:]. 2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
After entering 20 digits, 10-key is disabled (no response). Only the previously set button returns to the normal display.
[C] key is enabled. (10-key [0] to [9], [*], [#], [C] key (back by 3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signals
one digit)) are sent.
3) When [SET] key is pressed after completion of entry, the 4) To stop signal sending:
entered number is displayed (registered) in the column of When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it returns to the normal dis-
[PRESENT:]. The column of [NEW:] becomes blank. play and signal sending is interrupted.

66-14
Purpose Adjustment 66-18
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) Purpose Operation test/Check
send test and to adjust the make time. Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
Section FAX and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW set-
Operation/Procedure ting)
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-14, the following Section FAX
screen is displayed. Operation/Procedure
2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the dial 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-18, the following
pulse is sent from the line in the set make time. screen is displayed.
3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] key again. The button 2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
returns to the normal display and the test is terminated. the previously set button returns to the normal display.
3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signals
are sent.
66-15 4) To stop signal sending:
Purpose Adjustment When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it returns to the normal dis-
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS) play and signal sending is interrupted.
send test and to adjust the make time.
Section FAX

SIMULATION 6 – 109
66-21 66-24
Purpose Check Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to print the selected items (system Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAST save data.
error, protocol monitor). Section FAX
Section FAX Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) When an item button to be printed is selected, it is highlighted 2) Press [YES] key.
and the previously set button returns to the normal display.
The FAST save data are cleared.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] key returns to
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and printing is started. the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
3) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor-
mal display.
<FAX information print content table> 66-29
PROTOCOL LINE 1 SYSTEM ERROR LINE 1 Purpose Clear
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the telephone book data
(the one-touch registration table, the FTP/
Desktop expansion table, the group expan-
66-22 sion table, the program registration table,
Purpose Setting the interface memory box table, the meta
data, InboundRouting, and the Document
Function (Purpose) Used to set the handset sound volume.
Admin table).
(This simulation can be executed even
though the handset setting is set to NO. Section FAX
When, however, the handset is not Operation/Procedure
installed, the sound volume cannot be 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
checked.) (Japan model only)
2) Press [YES] key.
Section FAX
The telephone book data area cleared.
Operation/Procedure
3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] key returns to
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the number of the set the normal display and [YES] and [NO] keys gray out.
sound volume is displayed. (In this example, MIDDLE is set as
the default sound volume.)
2) Use 10-key to set the handset sound volume. (0: MIN 1:MID- 66-30
DLE 2:MAX)
Purpose Operation test/Check
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to deliver the selected on-hold tone.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the TEL/LIU status change,
* If, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume
The display is highlighted by status change.
cannot be checked. Execution is possible.
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and delivery Section FAX
of the on-hold tone is stopped. Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-30, the following
screen is displayed.
2) HS1, HS2, RHS, and EXHS are highlighted when the signal is
detected, and displayed normally when the signal is not
detected.
<TEL/LIU status change item description>
HS1 Polarity inversion signal
HS2 Polarity inversion signal
RHS Handset hook SW
EXHS External telephone hook SW

SIMULATION 6 – 110
66-31 66-34
Purpose Setting Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to Function (Purpose) Used to execute the send test and display
TEL/LIU. the time required for sending image data in
Section FAX the test. Used to execute send test and dis-
play. (Unit: ms)
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-31, the following Section FAX
screen is displayed. Operation/Procedure
2) Change the port setting. 1) FAX send is performed.
When a port is set to ON, the port display is highlighted. 2) Enter the SIM 66-34 mode.
3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the changed setting is The send time in procedure 1) is displayed.
reflected to the port which outputs to TEL/LIU.
4) To terminate the process, press [EXECUTE] key again. [EXE-
CUTE] key returns to the normal display. 66-36
<Port which outputs to TEL/LIU> Purpose Operation test/Check
CION MR EC S. Function (Purpose) Used to check send and receive data from
the MODEM controller to the MFP control-
ler or the data line or the command line
individually.
66-32 Section FAX
Purpose Operation test/Check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the fixed data received from 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-36, the following
the line and to display the result. screen is displayed.
Section FAX 2) Operation check
Operation/Procedure Select an item to be checked on the screen.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key to check the fixed data received from <MFP controller I/F check item table>
the line. At that time, [EXECUTE] key is highlighted.
MFP < MDMC (DATA once) MFP > MDMC (DATA once)
* Fixed data check procedure Data line Once Data line Once
- The data received from the line is checked of the following MFP < MDMC (DATA repeat) MFP > MDMC (DATA repeat)
fixed data status for minutes, then if they are in accord with Data line Repeat Data line Repeat
"OK" is displayed on LCD, if not "NG" is displayed. MFP < MDMC (CMD once) MFP > MDMC (CMD once)
Command line Once Command line Once
- The judgment is made in 2 minutes.
MFP < MDMC (CMD repeat) MFP > MDMC (CMD repeat)
Receive speed: 300BPS Command line Repeat Command line Repeat
Receive data: 00H
Judgment data: 100byte
2) After completion of check, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor-
66-39
mal display. The result is displayed as "OK" or "NG."
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check and change the destination
66-33 setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
Purpose Operation test/Check Section FAX
Function (Purpose) Used to execute detection of various sig- Operation/Procedure
nals with the line connected and to display 1) When the machine enters the simulation, the currently set des-
the detection result. When a signal is tination button is highlighted. (In the default state, JAPAN is set
detected, the display is highlighted. as the destination.)
Section FAX 2) Select a destination button to set the destination. (In this
example, USA/CANADA is selected.) The selected button is
Operation/Procedure
highlighted and the previously selected button returns to the
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-33, the following normal display.
screen is displayed.
* When the destination button is changed, the new destination
2) The signal to be checked can be selected from the two
setting is saved to EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
options: "FNET" and "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF."
<Destination setting table>
3) When a signal is detected, "FNET" and "BUSY TONE CNG
CED DTMF" are highlighted. When a signal is not detected, JAPAN U.S.A/CANADA EUROPE AUSTRALIA
they are normally displayed. CHINA ASIA&OTHERS
<Signal used for signal detection check>
(When "FNET" is selected)
FNET

(When "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF" is selected)


BUSY TONE CNG CED DTMF

SIMULATION 6 – 111
66-42 66-62
Purpose Setting Purpose Backup
Function (Purpose) Used to rewrite the program to power con- Function (Purpose) Used to import the FAX receive data into a
trol installed in the FAX BOX. USB memory in PDF file type.
Section FAX Section FAX
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
YES] and [NO] keys become active. 2) Select data to be imported.
2) Press [YES] key. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The power control program is rewritten. Execute import of data selected in procedure 2).
3) When rewriting of the power control program is normally com- When the operation is completed normally, [COMPLETE] is
pleted, "OK" is displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the displayed. In case of an abnormal end, [ERROR] is displayed.
normal display, and [YES] and [NO] keys gray out.
Error display Content
ERROR: NO USB MEMORY DEVICE No USB memory installed
66-43 ERROR: NO IMAGE DATA No image data
ERROR Other errors
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to write the adjustment value into the
power control installed in the FAX BOX.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
67
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-43, the following
screen is displayed. 67-17
* Use scroll keys to select the select item of the power control Purpose Reset
adjustment value. Function (Purpose) Printer reset
2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and writing Section Printer
to the power control is executed. When writing is normally
Operation/Procedure
completed, "OK" is displayed. When it is failed, "NG" is dis-
played. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) After completion of writing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor- 2) Press [YES] key.
mal display. The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the
NIC setting.)
<Set range and default value of each set value>
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
Item Set range Default value normal display.
A CI_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 6
B CI_CYCLE_MIN 1 to 254 10
C CI_CYCLE_MAX 2 to 255 142
67-24
D CI_COUNT 2 to 15 3
E RES_3.3V_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 15 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
F EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 225 240 Function (Purpose) Printer gray balance adjustment (Auto
G RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 2 adjustment)
H SON_TIMEOUT 1 to 127 20
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
66-61 The gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
Purpose Setting 2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing The printer gray balance auto adjustment is performed, and
the soft SW while checking with the LCD. the adjustment result is printed.
Section FAX 4) Press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure The halftone correction target registration is processed.
1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.
2) Press [DATA] key.
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
10-key.
* [1] - [0]
[0] - [1]
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the set-
ting is saved.

SIMULATION 6 – 112
67-25 67-31
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Printer gary balance adjustment (Manual Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value.
adjustment) Section Printer
Section Printer Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the 2) Press [YES] key.
touch panel.
The printer calibration data (Halftone correction data) are
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. cleared.
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each (The printer gray balance correction is canceled.)
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is 67-33
increased, and vice versa. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in Function (Purpose) Used to change the gamma of the printer
the gray balance and density corresponding to the adjustment screen.
value.
Section Printer
Item/Display Setting range Default value Operation/Procedure
A POINT1 1 - 999 500 1) Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key.
B POINT2 1 - 999 500
2) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key.
C POINT3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 1 - 999 500
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
E POINT5 1 - 999 500 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
F POINT6 1 - 999 500 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
G POINT7 1 - 999 500 the gray balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
H POINT8 1 - 999 500 value.
I POINT9 1 - 999 500
J POINT10 1 - 999 500 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
K POINT11 1 - 999 500 range value
L POINT12 1 - 999 500 A POINT1 Point 1 0 - 255 128
M POINT13 1 - 999 500 B POINT2 Point 2 0 - 255 128
N POINT14 1 - 999 500 C POINT3 Point 3 0 - 255 128
O POINT15 1 - 999 500 D POINT4 Point 4 0 - 255 128
P POINT16 1 - 999 500 E POINT5 Point 5 0 - 255 128
Q POINT17 1 - 999 500 F POINT6 Point 6 0 - 255 128
G POINT7 Point 7 0 - 255 128
H POINT8 Point 8 0 - 255 128
67-26
I POINT9 Point 9 0 - 255 128
Purpose Adjustment/Setup J POINT10 Point 10 0 - 255 128
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target gray balance of the K POINT11 Point 11 0 - 255 128
printer mode auto gray balance adjustment. L POINT12 Point 12 0 - 255 128
M POINT13 Point 13 0 - 255 128
Section Printer
N POINT14 Point 14 0 - 255 128
Operation/Procedure
O POINT15 Point 15 0 - 255 128
1) Select the target gray balance with the touch panel. P POINT16 Point 16 0 - 255 128
Default DEF 1. Q POINT17 Point 17 0 - 255 128

Display Content
HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper
SCREEN1 B/W 600dpi 1bit
SCREEN2 B/W 600dpi 4bit LOW (Photo)
SCREEN3 B/W 600dpi 4bit HIGH (Graphics)
SCREEN4 B/W 1200dpi 1bit LOW
SCREEN5 B/W 1200dpi 1bit HIGH

* When "600dpi 1bit SCREEN" is displayed, [EXECUTE] key is


grayed out, disabling the key operations.

SIMULATION 6 – 113
67-34 Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
Purpose Adjustment/Setup range value
A SHARPNESS: Monochrome 0-4 2 The greater
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction in the B/W PRINT print the set value
printer high density section. (Support for is, the
the high density section tone gap) stronger the
Section Printer filer
enhancement
Operation/Procedure is. The smaller
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. the set value
is, the
0 Enable stronger the
1 Disable filter
smoothness
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) is.
(0: Soft High,
Setting Default 1: Soft Low, 2:
Item/Display Content
range value Center, 3:
A K K engine highest density 0 1 Sharp Low, 4:
(0: ENABLE correction mode: Enable Sharp High)
1: DISABLE) K engine highest density 1 B BOLD B/W Bold text 0-4 1 The greater
correction mode: Disable PRINT the set value
C BLACK MAX Scanner target value 0 - 999 500 is, the
TARGET maximum density correction stronger the
trapping is.
D RATIO LOW Ratio value for high 0 - 999 50
(0: OFF, (Low)
density correction
1 < 2 < 3 < 4)
E RATION HIGH Ration value for high 0 - 999 5
(The target is
density correction
vector images.
F DITHER Dither threshold value 0 - 999 250 There is no
THRESHOLD effect for the
F SLOPE Slope threshold value 0 - 999 400 raster
THRESHOLD images.)
However, the
sharpness
also varies.
67-36
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 67-52
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the low den- Purpose Adjustment/Setup
sity section. Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the gamma of the
Section Printer printer screen.
Operation/Procedure Section Printer
1) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key. 1) Select a target default setting mode with the touch panel.
When the adjustment value is increased, the low density images Press [ALL] key to select all the modes.
are strongly reduced. When the adjustment value is decreased, the 2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
low density are images are weakly reproduced.
When the printer screen gamma was changed by SIM 67-33,
When tone gap is generated in the low density section (highlight SIM67-54, it is reset to the default.
section), changing this adjustment value may improve the trouble.
Display Content
Setting Default Screen HEAVYPAPER Heavy paper screen
Item/Display Content
range value Printer heavy paper automatic density
A A PATCH INPUT A patch input value 0 - 13 1 correction amount
600DPI_1BIT SCREEN1 (600dpi 1bit)
4BIT_HIGH SCREEN3 (600dpi 4bit HIGH (Graphics))
1200DPI_LOW SCREEN4 (1200dpi 1bit LOW (Photo))
67-45 1200DPI_HIGH SCREEN5 (1200dpi 1bit HIGH (Graphics)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the printer image filter and
trapping.
67-54
Section
Purpose Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Printer gray balance adjustment
1) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
(Automatic adjustment for each dither)
2) Enter the set value.
Section Printer
3) Press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure
This simulation is used to adjust the gray balance, the density, and
the gradation in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode,
the 1200dpi mode, and the 600dpi 1bit mode.
This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images.

SIMULATION 6 – 114
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
selected.)
The gray patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
2) Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 1) on the document table so that the thin lines on
the printed gray patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed gray
patch image (adjustment pattern).
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The gray balance adjustment is automatically performed.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
mality.
4) Press [OK] key.
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
5) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).

Select item (Mode) Content


Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the gray balance in
the heavy paper mode
1200dpi LOW Adjustment item to improve the gray balance in
1200dpi mode
1200dpi HIGH Adjustment item to improve the density and
gradation in the monochrome mode
4BIT_GRAPHICS Adjustment item to improve the gray balance in
600dpi, 4bit Graphic mode.

6) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically


selected.)
The gary patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
7) Set the gray patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 6) on the document table so that the thin lines on
the printed gray patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed gray
patch image (adjustment pattern).
8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The gray balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
the gray balance check patch image is printed out.
9) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
press [EXECUTE] key.
After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
tered.
10) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
NOTE: Use SIM67-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default
values.

SIMULATION 6 – 115
[7] TROUBLESHOOTING D. Self diag
Service operation
Manual
The machine always monitors its own state.
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
1. Error code and troubleshooting displays the trouble message.
A. General A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- nearly expired or is expired.
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user may not be stopped.
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the the LCD and lamp.
machine to minimize the damage. Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
B. Function and purpose ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
tion.
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
trouble.)
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is sages must be cleared by a simulation.
stopped on detection of a trouble.)
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair, Monitors the machine
conditions.
improving the repair efficiency.)
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This Detects/analyzes
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con- the content.
sumable part.)

C. Self diag message kinds


Warning
࠙࣬
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below. Trouble/Warning
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬

Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the


user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration, Trouble
Πρήσ
etc.)
Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by
൲ै೪গ
The machine is stopped.
a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Others -
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a ඤယͬນা
The content is displayed.
consumable part, etc.)
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
Others - Warning No
࠙࣬ A consumable OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime

Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬ಺औ the cause. ક࿍ΩȜΜ࢐۟¦༞‫ݯ‬
the consumable part.

ਘၑ
Repair

Cancel the self-diagnostic


ΘͼͺΈȪΞΑΠ΋ζϋΡȫ
message with the
൝ͤ͢ͅুࡨ૷౯ιΛΓȜΐ
diagnostic (test
ٜੰcommands).

Reset
໘‫ܦ‬

Standby
ఞ‫ેܥ‬ఠ state

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 1
E. Breakdown sequence
(1) Error code and operatable mode

Operatable mode
Copy scan FAST
Judgeme Scan-
Trouble content Trouble code (including Scan Scan List FAX FAX Notifi-
nt block To Print
interrup- (Push) (Pull) print Send print cation
HDD
tion) to host
FAX board FAX board MFPC F6(00,01,04,21,30,       1 1 1
trouble(1 line) breakdown(1 line) 97,98)
FAX board FAX board F7(00,01,04,21,30,       1 1 1
trouble(2 line) breakdown(2 line) 97,98)
FAX board FAX board F8(00,01,04,21,30,       1 1 1
trouble(3 line) breakdown(3 line) 97,98)
HDD trouble Compact flash E7 (A6) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
memory breakdown
SD card breakdown E7 (07) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
HDD breakdown E7 (03, A5) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
HDD-ASIC E7 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
Scanner SCU communication A0 (02) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
communication trouble E7 (80)
trouble
Engine PCU communication A0 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
communication trouble E7 (90)
trouble
Option ACU communication A0 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
communication trouble
trouble
Backup battery Backup battery U1 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
voltage fall voltage fall
trouble
Operation External U7 (50, 51) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
disable trouble 2 communication
disable (RIC)
Memory error U2 (00, 11, 40, 41, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 15
(included not installed 42)
the expansion RAM)
Connection trouble A0 (15,17,20,60,61) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(MFPC detection)
Serial number U2 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
discrepancy
HDD registration data U2 (50) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
check sum error
Operation Image memory E7(01,49,91,92,93, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
disable trouble 3 trouble, decode error 94)
Image memory E7 (42, 46, 47, 48) ✕ 17 ✕ ✕ ✕    
trouble, decode error
(related to ACRE, 1)
Operation Personal counter not- PC (-) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
disable trouble 4 installed trouble
Power controller Power controller L8 (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
trouble trouble
Special function Special function error P1 (00, 01, 02)         
trouble P3(00)
U2 (60)
Laser trouble LSU breakdown PCU L6 (10) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
*10
Engine trouble 1 Connection trouble A0 (21) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(PCU detection) E7 (50, 55)
F1 (50)

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 2
Operatable mode
Copy scan FAST
Judgeme Scan-
Trouble content Trouble code (including Scan Scan List FAX FAX Notifi-
nt block To Print
interrup- (Push) (Pull) print Send print cation
HDD
tion) to host
Engine trouble 2 PCU troubles (motor, PCU C1(01,10) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
fusing, etc.) C4(20) *10
F2(22,40,64,70,7
4,91)
H2(00,02,03,05,0
6,07)
H3(00,02)
H4(00,02,30,32)
H5(01)
H7(10)
L4(02,03,04,06,0
8,
17,29,31,32,34,3
5,
38,39,40,43,44,4
6, 50,56,58,64)
L8(01,02)
U2 (90, 91)
Paper feed tray Paper feed tray 1 F3 (12) 3    3 3  3 
1 trouble breakdown *10
Paper feed tray Paper feed tray 2 F3 (22) 3    3 3  3 
2 trouble breakdown *10
Paper feed tray Paper feed tray 3 F3 (22) 3    3 3  3 
3 trouble breakdown *10
Paper feed tray Paper feed tray 4 F3 (42) 3    3 3  3 
4 trouble breakdown *10
Paper feed tray Paper feed tray 5 U6 (09, 20, 21, 3    3 3  3 
5 trouble breakdown 22,23,24, 51) *10
Paper feed tray Paper feed tray other U6 (54) 11    11 11  11 
other trouble breakdown *10
Staple trouble Staple breakdown F1 (08, 10) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 
*10
Saddle stitch Saddle stitch section F1(41,42,43,44,45, 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 
section trouble breakdown 46,51) *10
Finisher trouble After-process F0(03,08,10,11,14, 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 
breakdown 15,18,19,20,23,25, *10
28,29,30,31,32,33,
34,37,40,41,42,43,
44,45,46,47,48,49,
51,52,53,54,55,56,
70,71,72,73,74,75,7
9,77,80,81,82,83,84
,86)
F1(00,03,15,19,20,2
1,22,23,30,32,33,34
,37,38,52,60,90,96,
97,98,99)
Other troubles Other troubles EE (EC, EL, EU)         
Process control Process control F2         
trouble breakdown (PCU (39,47,58,59,78,A0) *12
detection)

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 3
Operatable mode
Copy scan FAST
Judgeme Scan-
Trouble content Trouble code (including Scan Scan List FAX FAX Notifi-
nt block To Print
interrup- (Push) (Pull) print Send print cation
HDD
tion) to host
Operation Connection trouble SCU A0 (22) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble (SCU detection)
Color system SCU color system UC (02) 9 9 9 9   9  
trouble (SCU breakdown (SCU
detection) detection)
Anti-copy Anti-copy system UC (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
trouble
Scanner trouble EEPROM system U2 (80, 81) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
1
Scanner trouble Multi-touch panel U9(01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
2 abnormality
Scanner section L1 (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
breakdown (mirror L3 (00)
motor, lens, copy
lamp)
CCD trouble CCD breakdown E7 (10, 11, 14) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
(shading, etc.)
DSPF/DF DSPF/DF breakdown U5 (00, 16, 20, 30, 6 6 6 6   6  
trouble 31)
SPF back General troubles in E6 (10, 11, 14) 7 7 7 7   7  
surface trouble the SPF back surface
scanning section

Error where only history data are saved

Operatable mode
Judg- Copy scan FAST
Scan-
Trouble content ment Trouble code (including Scan Scan List FAX FAX Notifi-
To Print
block interrup- (Push) (Pull) print Send print cation
HDD
tion) to host
Error history MFPC E7 (02)         
U2 (05)

: Operation enabled ✕: Operation disabled


1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.
3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section. * However, it is valid
only when the escape tray setting has been made.
6: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode.
7: When detected in other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode/single surface scan mode.
9: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the black and white mode.
*10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred. (Noted in the list print category of the system setting screen operation
because it is an operation on the system setting screen.)
11: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK and the LCC.
*12: Trouble display message is displayed in 2 lines. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
15: When in U2-22, trouble notification cannot be made. When in U2-23, if either of the FAX soft SW or the FAST data cannot be restored,
the data are initialized, disabling trouble notification.
17: Job execution enable only in a format other than high compression PDF.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 4
(2) Trouble detection sequence and trouble cancel sequence when turning on the power

-&0EVENT %ACHBLOCK
MANAGER

0OWER/.SEQUENCE
( ( ( 5 5 5 &TROUBLECHECK 7HENTHEPOWERISTURNEDON
4ROUBLECHECKISPREFORMEDINEACHBLOCK CHECKISMADEINEACHBLOCK
ANDTHERESULTISSENTTOTHE-&0 #OMMUNICATIONOFTROUBLESTATUS
;4ROUBLECODE=;4ROUBLESTATUS=
( ( ( 3AVEDINTHE0#5
5 3AVEDINTHE-&0
5 3AVEDINEACHBLOCK
5 3AVEDINTHE0#5
& 3AVEDINTHE0#5

4ROUBLECANCELSEQUENCE
7HENEXECUTING3)-    SIMTASK

3)-5TROUBLECANCEL
3)-( ( (
#OLORMODEINHIBITION CANCEL
3)-5TROUBLECANCEL
&TROUBLECANCEL 4ROUBLECANCEL
3)-5TROUBLECANCEL 4ROUBLECANCELCOMMAND
4HETROUBLEMEMORYIS
INITIALIZED
4ROUBLECANCELSTATUS
ISCOMMUNICATED

The process has priority when the power is turned ON with the MFP.
When booting, two or more troubles in the list below may be detected. In this case, the trouble code of higher priority is displayed.

Process sequence Error code Content


U2 60 Watermark check error
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error
First 30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency
(Low priority) A0 15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP)
U2 11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error
00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
E7 48 Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC memory error
Last 42 Image data trouble (Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC)
(High priority) U1 01 Battery trouble
E7 60 Combination error between PWB and firmware (MFPC PWB detection)
A0 04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM error

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 5
F. Error code list
Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
A0 01 PCU ROM error MFPC 
02 SCU ROM error MFPC 
04 Scanner expansion ACU ROM error MFPC 
15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware MFPC 
17 Inconsistency between the UI data and the CPU firmware version MFPC 
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP) MFPC 
21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU) PCU 
22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU) SCU 
C1 01 Charger cleaner trouble PCU 
10 Main charger trouble PCU 
C4 20 Transfer high voltage output trouble PCU 
E6 10 Shading error (Black correction) (SPF) SCU 
11 Shading error (White correction) (SPF) SCU 
14 CCD-ASIC error (SPF) SCU 
E7 01 MFP image data error MFPC 
02 Mirroring HDD trouble MFPC 
03 HDD trouble MFPC 
03 HDD trouble MFPC 
04 HDD-ASIC error MFPC 
07 SD card error MFPC 
10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU 
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU 
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU 
20 LSU laser detection error (K) PCU 
21 LSU laser degradation error PCU 
24 LSU LD driver trouble (K) PCU 
28 Connection error between PCU and LSU PCU 
29 LSU-ASIC frequency error PCU 
42 Image data error (ACRE ASIC) MFPC 
46 Image data decode error (ACRE ASIC) MFPC 
47 Combination error between MFP and ACRE firmware (ACRE ASIC) MFPC 
48 Scanner expansion (ACRE ASIC) memory error MFPC 
49 Water Mark data error MFPC 
50 Combination error between PCU PWB and firmware PCU 
55 PWB information sum check error MFPC 
60 Combination error between MFP PWB and firmware MFPC 
61 Combination error between MFP and PCU MFPC 
80 Communication error between MFP and SCU MFPC 
90 Communication error between MFP and PCU MFPC 
91 FAX reception image data error MFPC 
92 Copy image data error MFPC 
93 Copy, image send, filing, print image data process error MFPC 
94 Image file data process error MFPC 
A0 LSU EEP-ROM/LD-Driver read write error (K) PCU 
A5 Installation error of HDD which was used in the mirroring kit MFPC 
A6 Compact flash memory trouble 
EE EC Automatic toner density adjustment error (Sampling abnormal) PCU 
EL Automatic toner density adjustment error (over toner) PCU 
EU Automatic toner density adjustment error (under toner) PCU 

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 6
Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
F0 03 Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble PCU 
08 Finisher stapler shift motor trouble PCU 
10 Finisher stapler motor trouble PCU 
11 Finisher bundle exit motor trouble PCU 
14 Finisher paper rear edge falling motor trouble PCU 
15 Finisher tray lift motor trouble PCU 
18 Finisher rear edge hold motor trouble PCU 
19 Finisher paper alignment motor F trouble PCU 
20 Finisher paper alignment motor R trouble PCU 
23 Shutter trouble PCU 
25 Finisher paper transport roller lift motor trouble PCU 
28 Finisher paper alignment roller lift motor trouble PCU 
29 Finisher pwb cooling fan trouble PCU 
30 Communication trouble between finisher and saddle PCU 
31 Finisher saddle folding motor trouble PCU 
32 Finisher paper pass unit transport motor trouble PCU 
33 Finisher punch shift motor trouble PCU 
34 Finisher punch motor trouble PCU 
37 Finisher backup RAM trouble PCU 
40 Communication trouble between the saddle and the trimmer PCU 
41 Finisher saddle lead edge stopper motor trouble PCU 
42 Finisher saddle folding roller guide motor trouble PCU 
43 Finisher saddle alignment motor trouble PCU 
44 Finisher saddle rear edge hold motor trouble PCU 
45 Finisher saddle staple motor trouble PCU 
46 Finisher saddle rear edge shift motor trouble PCU 
47 Finisher saddle flap motor trouble PCU 
48 Finisher saddle push motor trouble PCU 
49 Finisher saddle separation motor trouble PCU 
51 Trimmer cutter motor trouble PCU 
52 Trimmer registration motor trouble PCU 
53 Trimmer inlet port separation motor trouble PCU 
54 Trimmer paper exit separation motor trouble PCU 
55 Trimmer bundle press motor trouble PCU 
56 Paper remaining trouble in the trimmer PCU 
70 Communication trouble between finisher and folding unit PCU 
71 Folding unit lead edge holding guide motor trouble PCU 
72 Folding unit back up RAM trouble PCU 
73 Folding unit power supply fan trouble PCU 
74 Folding unit folding tray paper exit motor trouble PCU 
75 Folding unit upper stopper motor trouble PCU 
76 Folding unit 3-fold stopper motor trouble PCU 
77 Folding unit transport motor trouble PCU 
80 Finisher power cooling fan motor trouble PCU 
81 Finisher upper tray fan trouble PCU 
82 Finisher lower tray fan trouble PCU 
83 Finisher paper guide motor trouble PCU 
84 Finisher grip trouble PCU 
86 Finisher discharged paper hold motor trouble PCU 
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU 
03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble PCU 
08 Stapler shift trouble PCU 
10 Staple motor trouble PCU 
15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble PCU 

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 7
Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
F1 19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F PCU 
20 Finisher alignment operation trouble R PCU 
21 Finisher fan trouble PCU 
22 Finisher rear edge assist motor trouble PCU 
23 Finisher shutter trouble PCU 
30 Communication trouble between Finisher and Saddle PCU 
31 Finisher saddle motor trouble FAX PCU 
32 Communication error between Finisher and Punch unit PCU 
33 Punch unit shift operation trouble PCU 
34 Punching operation trouble PCU 
37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU 
38 Punch data backup RAM error PCU 
41 Saddle paper positioning operation trouble PCU 
42 Saddle guide motor trouble PCU 
43 Saddle alignment operation trouble PCU 
44 Saddle staple motor R trouble FAX PCU 
45 Saddle staple motor F trouble PCU 
46 Saddle pushing plate motor trouble PCU 
50 Combination error Finisher and Main unit PCU 
51 Saddle sensor switch trouble PCU 
52 Finisher micro switch trouble PCU 
60 Communication trouble between PCU 
64 No. 1 pickup motor trouble PCU 
65 No. 2 pickup motor trouble PCU 
66 No. 1 lift motor trouble PCU 
67 No. 2 lift motor trouble PCU 
90 Communication trouble between decurler and downstream unit PCU 
96 Decurler transport motor trouble PCU 
97 Decurler unit fan 1 trouble PCU 
98 Decurler unit fan 2 trouble PCU 
99 Decurler unit fan 3 trouble PCU 
F2 22 Discharge lamp trouble (K) PCU 
39 Process temperature sensor trouble PCU 
40 Toner density sensor trouble PCU 
47 Room temperature/humidity sensor trouble PCU 
58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble PCU 
59 Room temperature/humidity sensor trouble PCU 
64 Toner supply operation trouble PCU 
70 Improper toner cartridge detection PCU 
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error PCU 
78 Image density sensor adjustment trouble PCU 
91 High density process control high voltage error PCU 
A0 After transfer discharge lamp open trouble PCU 
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU 
22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble PCU 
32 Paper feed tray 3 lift operation trouble PCU 
42 Paper feed tray 4 lift operation trouble PCU 
F6 00 MFP - FAX communication trouble MFPC 
01 FAX EEPROM read/write error FAX 
04 FAX modem operation trouble FAX 
21 Combination error between TEL/LIU and FAX soft switch FAX 
30 FAX microprocessor access error FAX 
97 Incompatibility between FAX control and main machine MFPC 
98 Incompatible destination between FAX control and main machine MFPC 
F7 00 Communication trouble between MFP and FAX 2nd line MFPC 
01 FAX EEPROM read/write error(2nd line) FAX 
04 Fax modem operation trouble(2nd line) FAX 
21 Combination error between TEL/LIU and FAX soft switch (2nd line) FAX 
30 FAX microprocessor access error(2nd line) FAX 
97 Incompatibility between FAX control and main machine(2nd line) MFPC 
98 Incompatible destination between FAX control and main machine(2nd MFPC 
line)

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 8
1 : ‘14/Dec
Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
F8 00 Communication trouble between MFP and FAX 3rd line MFPC
01 FAX EEPROM read/write error(3rd line) FAX 
04 FAX modem operation trouble(3rd line) FAX 
21 Combination error between TEL/LIU and FAX soft switch (3rd line) FAX 
30 FAX microprocessor access error(3rd line) FAX 
97 Incompatibility between FAX control and main machine(3rd line) MFPC 
98 Incompatible destination between FAX control and main machine(3rd line) MFPC 
H2 00 Thermistor open trouble TH_UM PCU 
02 Thermistor open trouble TH_US PCU 
03 Thermistor open trouble TH_UM_AD1 PCU 
05 Non-contact upper sub thermistor open PCU 
06 Contact upper sub thermistor open PCU 
07 Contact lower main thermistor open PCU 
H3 00 Upper main high temperature trouble PCU 
02 Upper sub high temperature trouble PCU 
H4 00 Upper main low temperature trouble PCU 
02 Upper sub low temperature trouble PCU 
30 Upper main thermistor differential input abnormal PCU 
32 Upper sub thermistor differential input abnormal PCU 
H5 01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam PCU 
H7 10 Recovery error from low fuser temperature PCU 
12 Recovery error from low fuser temperature PCU 
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCU 
L3 00 Scanner return trouble SCU 
L4 02 Paper feed motor trouble PCU 
03 Fusing motor trouble PCU 
04 Developing motor trouble PCU 
1 06 Transfer unit pressure welding or estrangement trouble PCU 
08 Waste toner transport motor lock PCU 
17 Drum motor lock trouble (BK) PCU 
29 HDD Cooling fan motor trouble PCU 
31 Paper exit cooling fan motor 5 trouble PCU 
32 Power source cooling fan motor 1 trouble PCU 
34 LSU cooling fan motor trouble PCU 
35 Paper exit cooling fan motor 4 trouble PCU 
38 Paper exit cooling fan motor 3 trouble PCU 
39 Fuser cooling fan motor 1 trouble PCU 
40 Ozone fan motor 1 trouble PCU 
43 Paper exit cooling fan motor 6 trouble PCU 
44 Power source cooling fan motor 2 trouble PCU 
46 DV cooling fan motor 1 trouble PCU 
50 Process fan motor 1 trouble PCU 
56 Paper exit cooling fan motor 1 trouble PCU 
58 Fuser cooling fan motor 2 trouble PCU 
64 DV cooling fan motor 2 trouble PCU 
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU 
L8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU 
02 Full wave signal error PCU 
20 Communication error of MFP/Mother board MFPC 
P3 00 Scan accessory kit trouble MFPC 
PC - No personal counter installed MFPC 
U1 01 Battery trouble MFPC 
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFPC 
05 Erroneous detection of account management data MFPC 
11 MFP EEPROM counter check sum error MFPC 
30 MFP and PCU manufacturing No. data inconsistency MFPC 
40 SD card system storage data area error MFPC 
41 HDD system storage data area error MFPC 
42 Adjustment data error in system storage data area MFPC 
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error MFPC 
60 Watermark check error MFPC 
80 SCU EEPROM read write error SCU 
81 SCU EEPROM check sum error SCU 
90 PCU EEPROM read write error PCU 
91 PCU EEPROM check sum error PCU 

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 9
1 : ‘14/Dec
Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
U5 00 Document feed unit communication error SCU 
16 Document feed unit fan motor trouble SCU 
20 Document feed unit paper transport motor trouble SCU 
30 Document feed unit tray lift up trouble SCU 
31 Document feed unit lift down trouble SCU 
U6 09 LCC lift motor trouble PCU 
20 Communication error between PCU and LCC unit PCU 
21 LCC paper transport motor trouble PCU 
22 LCC 24V line power trouble PCU 
23 A3 LCC tray descending trouble PCU 
24 A3 LCC tray lock detection trouble PCU 
51 Combination trouble between LCC and main machine PCU 
54 Option installation combination trouble PCU
U7 50 MFP and vendor machine communication error MFPC 
51 Vendor machine error MFPC 
U9 01 Touch panel trouble SCU 
1 UC 02 IPDDOCC ASIC error SCU 
1 20 IPDDOCC ASIC error SCU 

G. Details of error codes and countermeasures

A0-01 PCU ROM error A0-15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program
firmware
Detail MFP
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
interruption of the power during the version-up Detail MFP
operation, etc. Cause Installation of the normal firmware was performed with
PCU PWB trouble. a security kit enable.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up Check & Remedy Stop installation of the normal firmware.
procedure again.
Replace the PCU PWB.
A0-17 Inconsistency between the UI data and
the CPU firmware version
A0-02 SCU ROM error
Trouble content
Detail MFP Detail MFP
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by Cause Combination error between the UI contents data and
interruption of the power during the version-up the CPU UI firmware version.
operation, etc.
Check & Remedy Install the firmware in the all-firmware version-up
SCU PWB trouble.
mode.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up
procedure again.
Replace the SCU PWB.
A0-20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (MFP)
A0-04 Scanner expansion ACU ROM error
Trouble content
Detail MFP Detail MFP
Cause Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM data Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and
error. the EEPROM data version.
An error occurs during firmware upgrading for some Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
reasons.
Check & Remedy Perform firmware upgrading again.
A0-21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (PCU)

Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 10
A0-22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data C4-20 Transfer high voltage output trouble
version (SCU)
Trouble content When the transfer output is delivered, the output
Trouble content voltage exceeds the specified level.
Detail SCU Cause Transfer unit abnormality.
Cause Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version and Transfer unit insertion trouble.
the EEPROM data version. TC output harness disconnection, breakage.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware. Transfer unit estrangement operation trouble.
OPC drum abnormality (Does not rotate.)
High voltage TC PWB trouble.
C1-01 Charger cleaner trouble PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB - high voltage TC PWB harness
disconnection, breakage.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Replace the transfer unit.
Detail PCU Reinsert the transfer unit.
Cause The main charger unit (K) is not installed properly. Check or replace the TC output harness.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (K). Replace the high voltage TC PWB.
Connector connection trouble of the drum unit (K) HP Replace the PCU PWB.
sensor, the discharge lamp, or the after-transfer Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the
discharge lamp. high voltage TC PWB, and replace as needed.
Harness disconnection of the drum unit (K) HP
sensor, the discharge lamp, or the after-transfer
discharge lamp. E6-10 Shading error (Black correction) (SPF)
HP sensor dirt.
Charger cleaner motor (K) trouble.
PCU PWB connector connection trouble/PWB trouble. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-4 to check the operation of the charger Detail SCU
cleaner. Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness.
Check disconnection of the main charger unit./ CCD unit trouble.
Replace. DSPF PWB trouble.
Check for disconnection of the connector of the drum Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness to the CCD
unit (K) HP sensor, the discharge lamp, and the after- unit.
transfer discharge lamp. Check the CCD unit.
Check the harness of the drum unit (K) HP sensor, the Check the DSPF PWB.
discharge lamp, and the after-transfer discharge lamp.
(Since the earth wire is common to them, check the
three positions.) E6-11 Shading error (White correction) (SPF)
Clean the HP sensor.
Check disconnection of the PCU PWB connector./
Replace PWB. Trouble content
Replace the charger cleaner motor (K). Detail SCU
Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness.
Copy lamp lighting trouble.
C1-10 Main charger trouble Dirt on the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
plate.
CCD unit trouble.
Trouble content DSPF PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Shading SIM not executed / Shading ROM
Cause The main charger unit (K) is not installed properly. abnormality.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (K). Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness the CCD unit.
The developer unit (K) is not installed properly. Check the installing state of the harness to the copy
There is an abnormality in the developer unit (K). lamp unit.
Disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB connector. Clean the mirror, the lens, or the reference white plate.
Breakage of the high voltage harness. Check the CCD unit.
High voltage MC PWB trouble. Check the DSPF PWB.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2.
Check the output of the developing bias with SIM8-1. E6-14 CCD-ASIC error (SPF)
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace.
Check disconnection of the developer unit./Replace.
Check disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB Trouble content
connector./Replace. Detail SCU
Replace the high voltage MC PWB. Cause DSPF PWB trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Check the DSPF PWB.

E7-01 MFP image data error

Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Image data transfer error in the MFPC PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of
the MFPC PWB.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 11
E7-02 Mirroring HDD trouble E7-04 HDD-ASIC error

Trouble content Trouble content


Detail MFP Detail MFP
Cause When installing the mirroring kit, the HDD of the Cause HDD-ASIC trouble. (MFPC PWB trouble.)
machine or the HDD of the mirroring kit breaks down An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when
or connection fails. booting.
? Defective installation of the mirroring kit Check & Remedy Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
? Breakdown of the HDD of the mirroring kit
? Defective connection between the HDD and the
mirroring kit harness E7-07 SD card error
? MFP PWB trouble
Check & Remedy ? Use SIM62-20 to check the trouble.
? Check installation of the mirroring kit (connector Trouble content
and harness), and replace if necessary. Detail MFP
? Replace the broken HDD. Cause SD card trouble or contact error
? Replace the mirroring kit. MFPC PWB trouble.
? Replace the MFP PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the SD card.
Check the SD card socket.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
E7-03 HDD trouble

Trouble content
E7-10 Shading error (Black correction)
Detail MFP
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFPC Trouble content
PWB and HDD. Detail SCU
HDD (error file management area) data abnormality Cause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the
(FAT breakage). scanner lamp is turned OFF.
MFPC PWB trouble. Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of CCD unit abnormality.
the MFPC PWB and HDD. SCU PWB abnormality.
Use SIM62-2, 3 to check read/write operations of the Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
HDD. Check the CCD unit.
Replace the HDD. Check the SCU PWB.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
Cause RAID PWB trouble.
(When the A HDD which has been used for mirroring is installed. E7-11 Shading error (White correction)
mirroring kit is Both HDD's go into trouble under the use environment
not installed) of mirroring.
Trouble content
Check & Remedy Check the RAID PWB, and replace if necessary.
(When the Replace the HDD. Detail SCU
mirroring kit is (For details, refer to the HDD and RAID PWB Cause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan
installed) replacement procedures under mirroring level when the scanner lamp is turned ON.
environment.) Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate.
Scanner lamp lighting trouble.
E7-03 HDD trouble Scanner lamp drive PWB trouble
CCD unit abnormality.
SCU PWB abnormality.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Detail MFP Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFPC unit.
PWB and HDD. Check or replace the scanner lamp.
HDD (error file management area) data abnormality Check or replace the scanner lamp drive PWB.
(FAT breakage). Clean or replace the mirror, the lens, and the
MFPC PWB trouble. reference white board.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of Check or replace the CCD unit.
the MFPC PWB and HDD. Check or replace the SCU PWB.
Use SIM62-2, 3 to check read/write operations of the
HDD.
Replace the HDD. E7-14 CCD-ASIC error
Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
Cause RAID PWB trouble.
Trouble content
(When the A HDD which has been used for mirroring is installed.
Detail SCU
mirroring kit is Both HDD's go into trouble under the use environment
installed) of mirroring. Cause SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the RAID PWB, and replace if necessary. Check & Remedy Check the SCU PWB.
(When the Replace the HDD. Replace the SCU PWB.
mirroring kit is (For details, refer to the HDD and RAID PWB
installed) replacement procedures under mirroring
environment.)

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 12
E7-20 LSU laser detection error (K) E7-42 Image data error (ACRE ASIC)

Trouble content Trouble content


Detail PCU Detail MFP
Cause Laser optical axis misalignment Cause An image data error occurs.
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode An image data send error occurs.
trouble. Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) connection trouble.
LSU harness, connector trouble Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) trouble.
BD board, LD board, LSUcnt board trouble MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. Check & Remedy Check connection of the scanner expansion PWB
Check or replace the LSU control PWB. (ACRE).
Check connection of the LSU harness and connector. Check the scanner expansion PWB (ACRE), and
Replace the LSU. replace if necessary.
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.

E7-21 LSU laser degradation error


E7-46 Image data decode error (ACRE ASIC))
Trouble content
Detail PCU Trouble content
Cause Power reduction due to laser deterioration. Detail MFP
Harness and connector disconnection/insertion Cause A decode error occurs while high compression PDF
trouble between the LD PWB and the LSU control images are made. (garbled data)
PWB. Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) trouble.
Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the MFPC PWB trouble.
LSU. Check & Remedy Check connection of the scanner expansion PWB
(ACRE).
Check the scanner expansion PWB (ACRE), and
E7-24 LSU LD driver trouble (K) replace if necessary.
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.

Trouble content The LSU LD is lighted, the initialization process of the


LD driver is not performed normally.
E7-47 Combination error between MFP and
Detail PCU
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
ACRE firmware (ACRE ASIC)
trouble.
LSU connector trouble. Trouble content
LD PWB/LSU control PWB trouble. Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-01 to check the operations of the LSU. Cause Connect to the scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) with
Check or replace the LSU control PWB. the firmware which does not support MFP PWB.
Check connection of the LSU harness. Check & Remedy Update the firmware on SIM49-1 or SIM49-10.
Replace the LSU.

E7-48 Scanner expansion (ACRE ASIC)


E7-28 Connection error between PCU and
memory error
LSU
Trouble content ? DDR calibration error
Trouble content
? DIMM insertion trouble, etc.
Detail PCU Detail MFP
Cause Communication error between the CPU in the PCU Cause Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) DIMM trouble,
PWB and the LSU control ASIC. memory slot trouble.
Improper connection of the communication connector Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) DIMM insertion
between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB trouble.
(interface PWB). Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) connection trouble.
Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the LSU Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) trouble.
control PWB (interface PWB) MFPC PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check insertion of the scanner expansion PWB
LSU control PWB trouble.
(ACRE) DIMM memory.
LSU trouble.
Check the scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) DIMM
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
memory, and replace if necessary.
between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB.
Check connection of the scanner expansion PWB
Replace the LSU control PWB.
(ACRE).
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check the scanner expansion PWB (ACRE), and
Replace the LSU.
replace if necessary.
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.

E7-29 LSU ASIC frequency error

Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Oscillation abnormality of the external oscillator used
in the LSU ASIC.
LSU ASIC abnormality on the LSU control PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the LSU control PWB.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 13
E7-49 Water Mark data error E7-90 Communication error between MFP
and PCU
Trouble content
Detail MFP Trouble content
Cause Watermark data trouble. Detail MFP
HDD trouble.
Cause PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the HDD. MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB and the MFPC
PWB.
E7-50 Combination error between PCU PWB Check the ground.
and firmware Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the MFPC PWB.

Detail PCU
Cause A PWB/firmware/LSU which is not compatible with the E7-91 FAX reception image data error
machine specifications is detected.
PCU PWB trouble
LSU trouble Trouble content An error of FAX reception image data process occurs.
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware. Detail MFP
Check or replace the LSU. Cause Image data process abnormality
Check or replace the PCU PWB. HDD trouble
SD card trouble or contact error
Image compression data corruption
E7-55 PWB information sum check error MFPC PWB trouble
DIMM memory trouble or contact error
FAX control PWB trouble
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
Cause EEPROM device trouble. the memory.
EEPROM device contact trouble. Replace the HDD.
Device access error due to noises. Replace or check installation of the SD card.
Check & Remedy Replace the PWB. Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
Replace the FAX control PWB.
E7-60 Combination error between MFP PWB
and firmware
E7-92 Copy image data error
Detail MFP
Trouble content An error of copy image data process occurs.
Cause A PWB/firmware which is not compatible with the
(In Non ERDH)
machine specifications is detected in the MFPC PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble. Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware. Cause Image data process abnormality
Check or replace the MFPC PWB. HDD trouble
Image compression data corruption
MFPC PWB trouble
DIMM memory trouble or contact error
E7-61 Combination error between MFP and
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
PCU the memory.
Replace the HDD.
Detail MFP Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
Cause Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the
PCU PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. E7-93 Copy, image send, filing, print image
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFPC PWB and data process error
the PCU PWB.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Detail MFP
Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause Image data process abnormality.
HDD trouble.
Image compression data corruption.
E7-80 Communication error between MFP MFP PWB trouble.
and SCU Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
the memory.
Detail MFP Replace the HDD.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Cause SCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
SCU PWB trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the SCU PWB and the MFPC
PWB.
Check the ground.
Replace the SCU PWB.
Replace the MFPC PWB.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 14
E7-94 Image file data process error EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment
error (Sampling abnormal)
Trouble content File image process error (backup restore error) when
importing filing data
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
Detail MFP adjustment is outside of 120 +/-5.
Cause Image data process abnormality Detail PCU
HDD trouble Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Image compression data corruption Developing unit trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble.
DIMM memory trouble or contact error
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
Replace the developing unit.
the memory.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the HDD.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment
error (Over toner)
E7-A0 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write
error (K) Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
adjustment is 26 or less or the control voltage is 198
or above.
Trouble content Write error in write sequence of the serial EEPROM/
Detail PCU
LD driver for Black
Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Detail PCU
Developing unit trouble.
Cause EEPROM/LD driver trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
EEPROM/LD driver access circuit trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of Replace the developing unit.
the LD PWB and the PCU PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.
If the above remedies cannot delete the trouble,
replace the LSU.
EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment
error (Under toner)
E7-A5 Installation error of HDD which was
used in the mirroring kit Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
adjustment is 201 or above or the control voltage is 48
or less.
Trouble content When a HDD which was used in the mirroring kit is
Detail PCU
installed to the MFP without the mirroring kit, its
Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
operation is restricted in order to prevent against
Developing unit trouble.
malfunction.
PCU PWB trouble.
Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Cause A HDD which was used in the mirroring kit is installed
Replace the developing unit.
to the MFP without the mirroring kit.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the HDD with one which has not been used
in the mirroring kit.
F0-03 Finisher paper exit roller lift motor
E7-A6 Compact flash memory trouble trouble

Trouble content A read/write access error in the compact flash Trouble content Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation abnormality.
memory occurs. Detail PCU
Detail Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Cause Compact flash memory trouble. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
MFPC PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
File system control area data trouble. roller lift motor.
Check & Remedy Replace the compact flash memory. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Replace the MFPC PWB. and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.

F0-08 Finisher stapler shift motor trouble

Trouble content The shift operation of the finisher stapler is abnormal.


Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 15
F0-10 Finisher stapler motor trouble F0-18 Finisher rear edge hold motor trouble

Trouble content The operation of the finisher staple is abnormal. Trouble content The operation of the paper hold arm in the staple
Detail PCU compiler of the finisher is abnormal.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Detail PCU
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper hold
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor motor.
and the sensor. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor and the sensor.
part. Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.

F0-11 Finisher bundle exit motor trouble


F0-19 Finisher paper alignment motor F
Trouble content The grip expansion arm drive motor of the finisher for trouble
staple bundle exit is abnormal. HP sensor abnormality.
Detail PCU Trouble content The operation of the front alignment plate in the staple
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB compiler of the finisher is abnormal.
trouble, HP sensor breakdown, disconnection of Detail PCU
harness or connector. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the gripper arm harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
motor (FNM116).
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
alignment motor F.
Replace the control PWB and the sensor part.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
F0-14 Finisher paper rear edge falling motor part.
trouble

Trouble content The rear edge falling operation in the staple compiler
F0-20 Finisher paper alignment motor R
of the finisher is abnormal. trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Trouble content The operation of the rear alignment plate in the staple
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. compiler of the finisher.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the rear edge Detail PCU
falling motor. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
and the sensor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
alignment motor R.
part.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
F0-15 Finisher tray lift motor trouble part.

Trouble content The operation of the lift motor for the upper and the
lower trays of the finisher is abnormal. F0-23 Shutter trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Trouble content The operation of the shutter open/close in the paper
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown, area exit section.
sensor breakdown. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the upper tray Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
lift motor and the lower tray lift motor. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the shutter
and the sensor.
clutch.
Replace the control PWB, and motor, and the sensor
Check connection from the control PWB to the clutch
part.
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the clutch, and the sensor
part.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 16
F0-25 Finisher paper transport roller lift F0-31 Finisher saddle folding motor trouble
motor trouble
Trouble content Saddle unit folding roller operation abnormality
Trouble content The separation operation of the transport roller in the Detail PCU
buffer section of the finisher or the path select Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
operation of the flapper is abnormal. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of paper folding motor.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
transport roller lift motor.
part.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part. F0-32 Finisher paper pass unit transport
motor trouble
F0-28 Finisher paper alignment roller lift Trouble content The operation of the paper transport in the paper relay
motor trouble unit of the finisher is abnormal.
Detail PCU
Trouble content The lifting operation of the paper takeup roller arm in Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
the staple compiler of the finisher is abnormal. trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the relay paper
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of transport motor.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Turn OFF/ON the power. Replace the control PWB
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
and the motor.
alignment roller lift motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor F0-33 Finisher punch shift motor trouble
part.
Trouble content The horizontal registration shift operation of the punch
unit in the finisher is abnormal.
F0-29 Finisher pwb cooling fan trouble Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Trouble content The operation of the PWB cooling fan in the finisher is harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
abnormal. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch shift
Detail PCU motor.
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector. and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the control PWB
part.
cooling fan.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Replace the control PWB and the fan motor.
F0-34 Finisher punch motor trouble

F0-30 Communication trouble between fin- Trouble content The punching operation of the punch unit in the
isher and saddle finisher is abnormal.
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Trouble content Communication trouble between the finisher and the
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
saddle
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch
No response for the command send from the saddle
motor.
unit
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Detail PCU
and the sensor.
Cause Noise on the communication line, control PWB Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
trouble, disconnection of connector or harness. part.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. Check the connector
between the finisher and the saddle. Replace the
control PWB of the saddle unit. F0-37 Finisher backup RAM trouble

Trouble content Data cannot be written into the backup RAM. The red
values are abnormal.
Detail PCU
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble, EEPROM chip
breakdown.
Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 17
F0-40 Communication trouble between the F0-44 Finisher saddle rear edge hold motor
finisher saddle and the trimmer trouble

Trouble content Communication trouble between the saddle unit and Trouble content The operation of the rear edge hold member of the
the trimmer unit. saddle unit is abnormal.
When a command is sent from the saddle unit to the Detail PCU
trimmer unit, no response is made by the trimmer unit. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Detail PCU harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Cause Noise on the communication line, control PWB Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle rear
trouble, disconnection of connector or harness. edge hold motor.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. Check the connector Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
between the saddle and the trimmer unit. Replace the and the sensor.
control PWB of the saddle unit. Replace the control Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
PWB of the trimmer unit. part.

F0-41 Finisher saddle lead edge stopper F0-45 Finisher saddle staple motor trouble
motor trouble
Trouble content The staple operation of the saddle unit is abnormal.
Trouble content The operation of the finisher saddle unit lead edge Detail PCU
stopper motor is abnormal. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Detail PCU harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. staple motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle lead
and the sensor.
edge stopper motor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
part.
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.
F0-46 Finisher saddle rear edge shift motor
trouble
F0-42 Finisher saddle folding roller guide
motor trouble Trouble content The operation of the rear edge shift motor of the
finisher saddle unit is abnormal.
Trouble content The operation of the saddle unit folding roller guide is Detail PCU
abnormal. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Detail PCU harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle rear
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. edge shift motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
and the sensor.
folding roller guide motor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
part.
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.
F0-47 Finisher saddle flap motor trouble

F0-43 Finisher saddle alignment motor Trouble content The operation of the rear edge flap unit of the saddle
section abnormality unit is abnormal.
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Trouble content The jogger shift operation in the staple compiler of the
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
saddle unit is abnormal.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle flap
Detail PCU
motor.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. and the sensor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
paper alignment motor. part.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 18
F0-48 Finisher saddle push motor trouble F0-53 Trimmer inlet port separation motor
trouble
Trouble content The pushing operation of the saddle unit is abnormal.
Detail PCU
Trouble content The separation operation of the inlet port roller of the
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
trimmer unit is abnormal.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle push
motor. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
and the sensor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer inlet
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor port separation motor.
part. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
F0-49 Finisher saddle separation motor trou- part.

ble
F0-54 Trimmer paper exit separation motor
Trouble content The operation of the take up separation roller of the trouble
saddle unit is abnormal.
Detail PCU
Trouble content The separation operation of the paper exit roller of the
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
trimmer unit is abnormal.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
separation motor. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
and the sensor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor paper exit separation motor.
part. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
F0-51 Trimmer cutter motor trouble part.

Trouble content The cutter operation of the trimmer unit is abnormal. F0-55 Trimmer bundle press motor trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Trouble content The nip and separation operations of the bundle press
roller of the trimmer unit are abnormal.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer
cutter motor. Detail PCU
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
and the sensor. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer
part. bundle press motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
F0-52 Trimmer registration motor trouble Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.

Trouble content PCU


Detail The operation of the registration taking unit of the F0-56 Paper remaining trouble in the trim-
trimmer unit is abnormal.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
mer
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer Trouble content Paper bundle remained in the trimmer is not
registration motor. discharged by the automatic paper exit operation.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Detail PCU
and the sensor. Cause Trimmer inlet port sensor breakdown
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor The paper bundle is bent and cannot be transported.
part. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer
transport motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.
Check the paper bundle can be transported or not.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 19
F0-70 Communication trouble between the F0-75 Folding unit upper stopper motor
finisher and the folding unit trouble

Trouble content Communication trouble between the finisher and the Trouble content The operation of the upper stopper of the folding unit
folding unit. is abnormal.
No response for a command from the folding unit. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Cause Noise on the communication line, control PWB harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
trouble, disconnection of connector or harness. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the folding unit
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. Check connection between upper stopper motor.
the finisher and the folding unit. Replace the control Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
PWB of the folding unit. and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.
F0-71 Folding unit lead edge holding guide
motor trouble
F0-76 Folding unit 3-fold stopper motor trou-
Trouble content The operations of the folding unit lead edge holding
ble
guide is abnormal.
Detail PCU Trouble content The operation of the 3-fold stopper in the folding unit
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of is abnormal.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the folding unit Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
lead edge holding guide motor. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Check & Remedy Use SIM3-41 to check the operation of the 3-fold
and the sensor. stopper motor in the folding unit.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
part. and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.
F0-72 Folding unit backup RAM trouble

Trouble content Data cannot be written into the backup RAM of the
F0-77 Folding unit transport motor trouble
folding unit. The red values are abnormal.
Detail PCU Trouble content The folding and transport operations of the folding unit
Cause Folding unit control PWB trouble, EEPROM chip are abnormal.
breakdown. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Replace the folding unit control PWB. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-41 to check the operation of the folding unit
F0-73 Folding unit power supply fan trouble transport motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
Trouble content Cooling fan abnormality in the power unit section of Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
the folding unit part.
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector. F0-80 Finisher power cooling fan motor
Check & Remedy Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
motor.
trouble
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor.
Trouble content The operation of the cooling fan in the power unit
section of the finisher is abnormal.
F0-74 Folding unit folding tray paper exit Detail PCU
motor trouble Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
Check & Remedy Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
Trouble content The paper exit operation to the folding unit is motor.
abnormal. Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor.
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. F0-81 Finisher upper tray fan trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the folding unit
folding tray paper exit motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Trouble content The operation of the cooling fan in the upper tray of
and the sensor. the finisher is abnormal.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor Detail PCU
part. Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the upper tray
fan.
Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
motor.
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 20
F0-82 Finisher lower tray fan trouble F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication
error
Trouble content The operation of the cooling fan in the lower tray of the
finisher is abnormal.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
between the finisher and the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the lower tray Finisher control PWB trouble.
fan. PCU PWB trouble.
Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
motor.
finisher and the PCU PWB.
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.

F0-83 Finisher paper guide motor trouble


F1-03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting opera-
Trouble content The operation of the paper lead edge guide unit at the tion trouble
paper exit port of the finisher is abnormal.
Detail PCU
Trouble content
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper guide Cause Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble
motor. Harness and connector connection trouble
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Home position sensor trouble
and the sensor. Finisher control PWB trouble
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
part. roller lift motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
position sensor.
F0-84 Finisher grip trouble Replace the paper exit roller lift motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the home position sensor.
Trouble content The bundle grip operation when discharging paper Replace the finisher control PWB.
bundle from the staple compiler of the finisher is
abnormal.
Detail PCU F1-08 Stapler shift trouble
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Trouble content
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the gripper
Detail PCU
motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Cause Stapler shift motor trouble.
and the sensor. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor Home position sensor trouble.
part. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
F0-86 Finisher discharged paper hold motor position sensor.
Replace the stapler shift motor.
trouble Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the home position sensor.
Trouble content The operation of the paper hold lever at the paper exit Replace the finisher control PWB.
port of the finisher is abnormal.
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
F1-10 Staple motor trouble
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the discharged Trouble content
paper hold motor. Detail PCU
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Cause Staple motor trouble.
and the sensor. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor Home position sensor trouble.
part.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple
motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
position sensor.
Replace the staple motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 21
F1-15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation F1-22 Finisher rear edge assist motor trou-
trouble ble

Trouble content Lift motor trouble. Trouble content


Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Paper exit tray lift motor trouble. Cause Motor harness short/open trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Control PWB trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Connection harness/connector connection trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit Check & Remedy Check the operation of the rear edge assist motor with
tray lift motor. SIM3-3.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
position sensor. Replace the control PWB.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the paper exit tray lift motor.
Replace the home position sensor. F1-23 Finisher shutter trouble

Trouble content
F1-19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock trouble.
Trouble content Control PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Home position sensor trouble.
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock. Connection harness/connector connection trouble.
Motor speed abnormality. Check & Remedy Check the operation of the bundle paper exit motor
Over-current to the motor. with SIM3-3.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Home position sensor trouble. Replace the control PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor F.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home F1-30 Communication trouble between Fin-
position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
isher and Saddle
Replace the paper alignment motor F.
Replace the home position sensor. Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Connector and harness connection trouble.
F1-20 Finisher alignment operation trouble Finisher control PWB trouble.
R Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Turn OFF/ON the power.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock. F1-31 Finisher saddle motor trouble
Motor speed abnormality.
Over-current to the motor.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Trouble content
Home position sensor trouble. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper Cause Saddle paper folding motor trouble.
alignment motor R. Saddle paper folding mechanism trouble.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home Finisher control PWB trouble.
position sensor. Folding plate home position sensor trouble.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Saddle paper folding motor rotation sensor trouble.
Replace the paper alignment motor R. Harness/connector connection trouble.
Replace the home position sensor. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
motor.
F1-21 Finisher fan trouble Check the saddle paper folding mechanism.
Check the finisher control PWB, and replace if
necessary.
Trouble content The operation of the relay unit fan motor inside the Check the folding plate home position sensor, and
machine is abnormal. replace if necessary.
Detail PCU Check the saddle paper folding motor rotation sensor,
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB and replace if necessary.
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector. Check connection of the harness/connector, and
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the relay unit replace if necessary.
fan inside the machine. Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary.
Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
motor.
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 22
F1-32 Communication error between Fin- F1-41 Saddle paper positioning operation
isher and Punch unit trouble

Trouble content Trouble content Abnormality in the folding positioning guide motor in
Detail PCU the saddle section.
Cause Connector/harness trouble between the finisher and Detail PCU
the punch unit. Cause Saddle paper positioning guide drive motor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Home position sensor trouble.
Malfunction due to noises. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the connector/harness between the finisher Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
and the punch unit, and replace if necessary. paper positioning motor.
Check the finisher control PWB, and replace if Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
necessary. Turn OFF/ON the power.
Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary. Replace the control PWB.
Replace the sensor.

F1-33 Punch unit shift operation trouble


F1-42 Saddle guide motor trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU Trouble content
Cause Punch shift motor trouble. Detail PCU
Finisher control PWB trouble. Cause Saddle roller guide motor trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch Harness and connector connection trouble.
shifting. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle roller
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home guide motor.
position sensor. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Replace the punch shift motor. Turn OFF/ON the power.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the control PWB.
Replace the home position sensor. Replace the sensor.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.

F1-43 Saddle alignment operation trouble


F1-34 Punch operation trouble
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Saddle alignment motor trouble.
Cause Punch motor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Home position sensor trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the Saddle
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home alignment motor (FSPAM).
position sensor. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch. Turn OFF/ON the power.
Replace the punch motor. Replace the control PWB.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the sensor.
Replace the home position sensor.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
F1-44 Saddle staple motor R trouble
F1-37 Finisher data backup RAM error Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause Saddle staple motor R trouble.
Detail PCU Finisher control PWB trouble.
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble. Home position sensor trouble.
Malfunction due to noises Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10, Finisher control staple motor R.
PWB DIP SW adjustment.) Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Turn OFF/ON the power.
Replace the control PWB.
F1-38 Punch data backup RAM error Replace the sensor.

Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Punch control PWB trouble.
Malfunction due to noises
Check & Remedy Replace the punch control PWB.
Set the punch unit specifications, and adjust the
sensor. (Punch unit control PWB DIP SW adjustment.)

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 23
F1-45 Saddle staple motor F trouble F1-60 Communication trouble between

Trouble content Abnormality of the staple unit drive motor in the saddle Trouble content Communication abnormality between the units
section. connected to the downstream of the inserter.
Detail PCU No response for a command from the inserter. Motor
Cause Saddle staple motor trouble. abnormality.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Detail PCU
Home position sensor trouble. Cause Noise on the communication line
Harness and connector connection trouble. Control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle Harness and connector connection trouble.
staple motor. Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. Check connection of the connector with the
Turn OFF/ON the power. downstream units of the inserter.
Replace the control PWB. Replace the control PWB of the downstream units of
Replace the sensor. the inserter.

F1-46 Saddle pushing plate motor trouble F1-64 No. 1 pickup motor trouble

Trouble content Trouble content Abnormality of the paper feed roller driving motor in
Detail PCU the upper side paper feed section of the inserter
Cause Saddle motor trouble. Detail PCU
Finisher control PWB trouble. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, home position
Home position sensor trouble. sensor breakdown, connection harness / connector
Harness and connector connection trouble. connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle Check & Remedy Use Sim. 3-31 to check the operation of the No. 1
motor. pickup motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Turn OFF/ON the power. Replace the control PWB and the sensor part.
Replace the control PWB.
Replace the sensor.
F1-65 No. 2 pickup motor trouble
F1-50 Combination error Finisher and Main Trouble content Abnormality of the paper feed roller driving motor in
unit the lower side paper feed section of the inserter
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, home position
Detail PCU sensor breakdown, connection harness / connector
connection trouble.
Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit
model is installed. Check & Remedy Use Sim. 3-31 to check the operation of the No. 2
Finisher control PWB trouble. pickup motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher.
Replace the control PWB and the sensor part.
Replace the finisher control PWB.

F1-51 Saddle sensor switch trouble F1-66 No. 1 lift motor trouble

Trouble content Abnormality of the tray lift-up driving motor in the


Trouble content
upper side paper feed section of the inserter.
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, home position
Home position sensor trouble.
sensor breakdown, connection harness / connector
Harness and connector connection trouble.
connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM03-02 to check the operations of the guide
Check & Remedy Use Sim. 3-31 to check the operation of the No. 1 lift
HP sensor and the push plate lead edge sensor.
motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the sensor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Replace the control PWB.
Replace the control PWB and the sensor part.
Replace the sensor.

F1-52 Finisher micro switch trouble F1-67 No. 2 lift motor trouble

Trouble content Abnormality of the tray lift-up driving motor in the


Trouble content
upper side paper feed section of the inserter.
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
Each micro switch trouble. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, home position
Harness and connector connection trouble. sensor breakdown, connection harness / connector
connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM03-02 to check the operations of the front
Check & Remedy Use Sim. 3-31 to check the operation of the No. 2 lift
door/upper door open detection and the oscillation
motor.
guide close detection.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the sensor.
Replace the control PWB and the sensor part.
Replace the control PWB.
Replace the sensor.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 24
F1-90 Communication trouble between F2-22 Discharge lamp trouble (K)
decurler and downstream unit
Trouble content When the discharge lamp open sensor is kept ON for
a certain time from turning ON the discharge lamp, it is
Trouble content Communication trouble between the decurler and the
detected as a trouble.
units connected to the downstream of the decurler.
Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Noise on the communication line, control PWB Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (K)
trouble, disconnection of connector or harness. and the PCU PWB.
Discharge lamp PWB (K) trouble.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check connection of the connector between the
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the discharge lamp
decurler unit and the downstream units of the decurler.
(K) [DL_K].
Replace the control PWB of the downstream units of
Check the discharge lamp PWB (K).
the decurler.
Check the harness and the connector.
Replace the PCU PWB.
F1-96 Decurler transport motor trouble
F2-39 Process temperature sensor trouble
Trouble content The transport operation of the decurler transport
motor is abnormal.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Motor driver IC overcurrent detection, overheat
detection. Cause Temperature/humidity sensor trouble.
Room temperature/ humidity sensor harness and
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-51 to check the operation of the decurler
connector connection trouble.
transport motor.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the control PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
Check connection of the temperature/humidity sensor
harness and the connector.
F1-97 Decurler unit fan 1 trouble Replace the PCU PWB.

Trouble content The operation of the fan in the decurler unit is


abnormal. F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
Trouble content
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-51 to check the operation of the decurler
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
unit fan 1 (Upper cooling fan).
Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
Developing unit trouble.
motor.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check connection of the sensor connector and the
harness.
F1-98 Decurler unit fan 2 trouble Replace the developing unit.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content The operation of the fan in the decurler unit is
abnormal.
Detail PCU F2-47 Room temperature/humidity sensor
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB trouble
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-51 to check the operation of the decurler
unit fan 2 (Lower cooling fan). Trouble content
Check connection from the control PWB to the fan Detail PCU
motor. Cause Temperature/humidity sensor trouble.
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor. Room temperature/ humidity sensor harness and
connector connection trouble on manual paper feed.
PCU PWB trouble.
F1-99 Decurler unit fan 3 trouble Check & Remedy Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
Check connection of the temperature/humidity sensor
harness and the connector.
Trouble content The operation of the fan in the decurler unit is Replace the PCU PWB.
abnormal.
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB F2-58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-51 to check the operation of the decurler
unit fan 3 (Transport motor cooling fan). Trouble content
Check connection from the control PWB to the fan Detail PCU
motor. Cause Process humidity sensor trouble.
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor. Harness and connector connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the process humidity sensor.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Replace the PCU PWB.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 25
F2-59 Room temperature/humidity sensor F2-78 Image density sensor adjustment
trouble trouble

Trouble content Trouble content Transfer belt substrate reflection rate abnormality
Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Process thermistor trouble. Cause Image density (registration) sensor trouble
Process thermistor harness connection trouble. (Sensor sensitivity adjustment trouble).
PCU PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the process thermistor. Image density (resist) sensor connector and
Check connection of the process thermistor harness
harness connection trouble
and the connector.
Image density (registration) sensor dirt.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Transfer belt dirt, scratch.
Check & Remedy Replace the image density (registration) sen-
F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble sor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the har-
Trouble content
ness of the image density (resist) sensor.
Detail PCU
Clean the image density (registration) sensor.
Cause Toner motor trouble.
Toner density sensor trouble.
Clean or replace the transfer belt.
Connector/harness trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble. F2-91 High density process control high
Developing unit trouble. voltage error
Tone hopper section trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Trouble content When executing the high density process control in
Replace the toner density sensor.
the toner cartridge-less production process, the
Connector and harness check.
developing bias exceeds 500V.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the toner cartridge. Detail PCU
Replace the developing unit. Cause * Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
Replace the toner hopper unit. trouble between the PCU PWB and the image
Check the toner hopper section. density sensor, dirt on the image density sensor,
transfer belt cleaning trouble.
* Eloping tank abnormality
F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection Check & Remedy * Use SIM44-02 to execute the gain adjustment of
the process control sensor.
When "Error" is displayed, it may be considered as
Trouble content breakdown. Check the sensor and the harness.
Detail PCU When the adjustment is normally completed, check
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main unit the drum surface and the belt surface.
detects a toner cartridge of a different specification.) * Replace the developing tank.
Toner cartridge trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. F2-A0 After transfer discharge lamp open
Replace the PCU PWB.
trouble

F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error Trouble content The after-transfer discharge lamp open sensor is kept
open for a specified time from turning ON the after-
transfer discharge lamp.
Trouble content Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Connection trouble between the after-transfer
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble. discharge lamp PWB and the PCU PWB
PCU PWB trouble. After-transfer discharge lamp PWB trouble
Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB PCU PWB trouble
and toner cartridge Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the after-transfer
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. discharge lamp (K) [DL2_K].
Replace the PCU PWB. Check the after-transfer discharge lamp PWB (K).
Check the connector and the harness between the Check the harness and the connector.
PCU PWB and the toner cartridge. Replace the PCU PWB.

F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble

Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause LUD1 is not turned ON within the specified time.
CLUD1 sensor trouble.
Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector of
LUD1.
Replace the lift unit.
Replace the PCU PWB.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 26
F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble F6-01 FAX EEPROM read/write error

Trouble content LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time. Trouble content FAX control PWB EEPROM access error (Read and
Detail PCU write)
Cause LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time. Section FAX
CLUD2 sensor trouble. Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM trouble
Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble. Check Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of
PCU PWB trouble. and EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble Remedy insure that EEPROM can be accessed.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of LUD2. Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Replace the lift unit. Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. and
Remedy

F3-32 Main body cassette 3 lift trouble


F6-04 FAX MODEM operation trouble
Trouble content C3LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
Detail PCU Trouble content FAX control PWB MODEM chip operation trouble
Cause C3LUD sensor trouble. Section FAX
Cassette 3 lift motor trouble. Case 1 Cause FAX MODEM chip operation trouble.
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB, Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
the lift unit, and the paper feed unit and
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of C3LUD. remedy
Check the lift unit. Case 2 Cause The FAX MODEM chip cannot be accessed.
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
and
F3-42 Main body cassette 4 lift trouble Remedy

Trouble content C4LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
Detail PCU F6-21 Improper combination of TEL/LIU
Cause C4LUD sensor trouble. PWB and FAX soft switch
Cassette 4 lift motor trouble.
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB,
the lift unit, and the paper feed unit Trouble content Incompatibility between the TEL/LIU PWB and the
FAX control PWB information (soft switch)
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of C4LUD.
Section FAX
Check the lift unit.
Case 1 Cause The destination of the TEL/LIU PWB installed is
improper.
F6-00 MFP - FAX communication trouble Check Check the destination of the TEL/LIU PWB.
and
Remedy
Trouble content MFP - FAX communication establishment error / Case 2 Cause TEL/LIU PWB trouble.
Framing / Parity / Protocol error Check Replace the TEL/LIU PWB.
Section MFP and
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB trouble. Remedy
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
and
Remedy F6-30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB - MFPC PWB connector and
harness trouble
error
Check Check the connector and the harness between the
and FAX control PWB and the MFPC PWB. Trouble content FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (Read and
Remedy write)
Case 3 Cause FAX control PWB - Mother board connector and Section FAX
harness trouble Case 1 Cause Program writing trouble to the 1-chip microprocessor,
Check Check the connector and the harness between the or no program data written.
and FAX control PWB and the mother board. Check Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor
Remedy and program.
Case 4 Cause FAX control PWB ROM trouble / ROM pin breakage Remedy
Check Check the ROM of the FAX control PWB. Case 2 Cause FAX 1-chip microprocessor circuit trouble.
and Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
Remedy and
Remedy

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 27
F6-97 Incompatibility between FAX control F7-04 FAX modem operation trouble(2nd
and main machine line)

Trouble content Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the Trouble content FAX control PWB MODEM chip operation trouble
main machine Section FAX
Section MFP Case 1 Cause FAX MODEM chip operation trouble.
Case 1 Cause The FAX control PWB installed is improper. Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
FAX control PWB trouble. and
Check Install a proper FAX control PWB. remedy
and Replace the FAX control PWB. Case 2 Cause The FAX MODEM chip cannot be accessed.
Remedy Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
and
Remedy
F6-98 Incompatible destination between FAX
control and main machine
F7-21 Combination error between TEL/LIU
Trouble content Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB and FAX soft switch (2nd line)
destination and the main machine destination
Section MFP Trouble content Incompatibility between the TEL/LIU PWB and the
Case 1 Cause Incompatibility between the destination information FAX control PWB information (soft switch)
written into the FAX control PWB EEPROM and that Section FAX
in the main machine (set with SIM26-6) Case 1 Cause The destination of the TEL/LIU PWB installed is
Check 1) Check the destination of the FAX control PWB. improper.
and 2) Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6) Check Check the destination of the TEL/LIU PWB.
Remedy and
Remedy
Case 2 Cause TEL/LIU PWB trouble.
F7-00 Communication trouble between MFP Check Replace the TEL/LIU PWB.
and FAX 2nd line and
Remedy

Trouble content MFP - FAX communication establishment error /


Framing / Parity / Protocol error
F7-30 FAX microprocessor access error(2nd
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB trouble. line)
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
and Trouble content FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (Read and
Remedy write)
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB - MFPC PWB connector and Section FAX
harness trouble Case 1 Cause Program writing trouble to the 1-chip microprocessor,
Check Check the connector and the harness between the or no program data written.
and FAX control PWB and the MFPC PWB. Check Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor
Remedy and program.
Case 3 Cause FAX control PWB - Mother board connector and Remedy
harness trouble Case 2 Cause FAX 1-chip microprocessor circuit trouble.
Check Check the connector and the harness between the Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
and FAX control PWB and the mother board. and
Remedy Remedy
Case 4 Cause FAX control PWB ROM trouble / ROM pin breakage
Check Check the ROM of the FAX control PWB.
and F7-97 Incompatibility between FAX control
Remedy
and main machine(2nd line)

F7-01 FAX EEPROM read/write error(2nd Trouble content Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the
main machine
line)
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause The FAX control PWB installed is improper.
Trouble content FAX control PWB EEPROM access error (Read and FAX control PWB trouble.
write) Check Install a proper FAX control PWB.
Section FAX and Replace the FAX control PWB.
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM trouble Remedy
Check Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of
and EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to
Remedy insure that EEPROM can be accessed.
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
and
Remedy

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 28
F7-98 Incompatible destination between FAX F8-21 Combination error between TEL/LIU
control and main machine(2nd line) and FAX soft switch (3rd line)

Trouble content Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB Trouble content Incompatibility between the TEL/LIU PWB and the
destination and the main machine destination FAX control PWB information (soft switch)
Section MFP Section FAX
Case 1 Cause Incompatibility between the destination information Case 1 Cause The destination of the TEL/LIU PWB installed is
written into the FAX control PWB EEPROM and that improper.
in the main machine (set with SIM26-6) Check Check the destination of the TEL/LIU PWB.
Check 1) Check the destination of the FAX control PWB. and
and 2) Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6) Remedy
Remedy Case 2 Cause TEL/LIU PWB trouble.
Check Replace the TEL/LIU PWB.
and
F8-00 Communication trouble between MFP Remedy
and FAX 3rd line
F8-30 FAX microprocessor access error(3rd
Trouble content MFP - FAX communication establishment error /
Framing / Parity / Protocol error line)
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB trouble. Trouble content FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (Read and
Check Replace the FAX control PWB. write)
and Section FAX
Remedy Case 1 Cause Program writing trouble to the 1-chip microprocessor,
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB - MFPC PWB connector and or no program data written.
harness trouble Check Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor
Check Check the connector and the harness between the and program.
and FAX control PWB and the MFPC PWB. Remedy
Remedy Case 2 Cause FAX 1-chip microprocessor circuit trouble.
Case 3 Cause FAX control PWB - Mother board connector and Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
harness trouble and
Check Check the connector and the harness between the Remedy
and FAX control PWB and the mother board.
Remedy
Case 4 Cause FAX control PWB ROM trouble / ROM pin breakage F8-97 Incompatibility between FAX control
Check Check the ROM of the FAX control PWB. and main machine(3rd line)
and
Remedy
Trouble content Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the
main machine
F8-01 FAX EEPROM read/write error(3rd Section MFP
Case 1 Cause The FAX control PWB installed is improper.
line) FAX control PWB trouble.
Check Install a proper FAX control PWB.
Trouble content FAX control PWB EEPROM access error (Read and and Replace the FAX control PWB.
write) Remedy
Section FAX
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM trouble
Check Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of F8-98 Incompatible destination between FAX
and EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to control and main machine(3rd line)
Remedy insure that EEPROM can be accessed.
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check Replace the FAX control PWB. Trouble content Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB
and destination and the main machine destination
Remedy Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Incompatibility between the destination information
written into the FAX control PWB EEPROM and that
F8-04 FAX modem operation trouble(3rd in the main machine (set with SIM26-6)
Check 1) Check the destination of the FAX control PWB.
line) and 2) Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6)
Remedy
Trouble content FAX control PWB MODEM chip operation trouble
Section FAX
Case 1 Cause FAX MODEM chip operation trouble.
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause The FAX MODEM chip cannot be accessed.
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
and
Remedy

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 29
H2-00 Thermistor open trouble H2-07 Contact lower main thermistor open
(TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content The thermistor is open.
Trouble content Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Thermistor trouble
Control PWB trouble
Cause Thermistor trouble
Fusing section connector connection trouble
PCU PWB trouble
AC power trouble
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Fusing unit not installed.
Fusing section connector connection trouble
Fusing unit not installed Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
from the thermistor to the control PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Replace the thermistor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the H3-00 Upper main high temperature trouble
harness.
Check the connector in the fusing section. Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
H2-02 Thermistor open trouble TH_US Thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Trouble content The thermistor is open. Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Detail PCU HL control PWB trouble
Cause Thermistor trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Control PWB trouble Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Fusing section connector connection trouble heater lamp.
AC power trouble Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Fusing unit not installed. Replace the thermistor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
from the thermistor to the control PWB.
harness.
Replace the HL control PWB.

H2-03 Thermistor open trouble TH_UM_AD1


H3-02 Upper sub high temperature trouble
Trouble content The thermistor is open.
Detail PCU
Trouble content
Cause Thermistor trouble
Detail PCU
Control PWB trouble
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Fusing section connector connection trouble
Thermistor trouble
AC power trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Fusing unit not installed.
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
HL control PWB trouble
from the thermistor to the control PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
H2-05 Non-contact upper sub thermistor Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
open Replace the thermistor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
Trouble content The thermistor is open.
harness.
Detail PCU Replace the HL control PWB.
Cause Thermistor trouble
Control PWB trouble
Fusing section connector connection trouble
AC power trouble
Fusing unit not installed.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
from the thermistor to the control PWB.

H2-06 Contact upper sub thermistor open

Trouble content The thermistor is open.


Detail PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble
Control PWB trouble
Fusing section connector connection trouble
AC power trouble
Fusing unit not installed.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
from the thermistor to the control PWB.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 30
H4-00 Upper main low temperature trouble H4-32 Upper sub thermistor differential input
abnormal
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
level within the specified time from turning ON the
Trouble content The upper sub compensation thermistor and the
power relay.
upper sub differential thermistor do not exceed the
Detail PCU specified value within the specified time from turning
Cause Thermistor trouble. ON the upper sub heater lamp.
Heater lamp trouble. Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble. Cause The upper sub heater lamp does not turn ON.
Thermostat trouble. Thermistor breakdown, harness trouble, PCU PWB
Connector, harness connection trouble. trouble
HL control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM05-02 to check the flashing operation of the
Power unit trouble.
heater lamp.
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
When the heater lamp flashes normally, check the
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
thermistor and its harness.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Check the thermistor input circuit section of the PCU
heater lamp.
PWB.
Replace the thermistor.
When the lamp does not light up, check for
Replace the heater lamp.
disconnection in the heater lamp and breakage of the
Replace the PCU PWB.
thermostat.
Replace the thermostat.
Check the interlock switch.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check the lamp control circuit of the AC PWB and the
Replace the HL control PWB.
PCU PWB.
Replace the power unit.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.

H4-02 Upper sub low temperature trouble H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach
jam
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
level within the specified time from turning ON the
power relay. Trouble content
Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble. Cause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper
Heater lamp trouble. remains.)
PCU PWB trouble. POD1 sensor trouble
Thermostat trouble. Fusing unit installation trouble
Connector, harness connection trouble. POD1 sensor connector and harness connection
HL control PWB trouble. trouble
Power unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Fusing unit, drive section trouble
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Check & Remedy Replace the POD1 sensor.
Use SIM05-02 to check the flashing operation of the Check installation of the fusing unit.
heater lamp. Replace the fusing unit.
Replace the thermistor. Check or repair the fusing drive section.
Replace the heater lamp. Check connection of the POD1 sensor connector and
Replace the PCU PWB. the harness.
Replace the thermostat. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Replace the HL control PWB.
Replace the power unit.
H7-10 Recovery error from low fuser temper-
ature
H4-30 Upper main thermistor differential
input abnormal Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
level within the specified time from stopping a job due
Trouble content The values of TH_UM_AD1 and TH_UM_AD2 do not to fall in the fusing temperature.
exceed the specified value within the specified time Detail PCU
from turning ON the HL_UM. Cause Thermistor trouble.
Detail PCU Heater lamp trouble.
Cause HL_UM does not turn on. PCU PWB trouble.
Thermistor trouble. Thermostat trouble.
Harness trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble HL control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM05-02 to check the flashing operation of the Power unit trouble.
heater lamp. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
When the heater lamp flashes normally, check the Replace the heater lamp.
thermistor and its harness. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check the thermistor input circuit section of the PCU Replace the thermostat.
PWB. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
When the lamp does not light up, check for Replace the HL control PWB.
disconnection in the heater lamp and breakage of Replace the power unit.
the thermostat. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Check the interlock switch. heater lamp.
Check the lamp control circuit of the AC PWB and
the PCU PWB.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 31
1 : ‘14/Dec

H7-12 Recovery error from low fuser temp L4-02 Paper feed motor trouble
(TH_US)
Trouble content A lock signal is not detected within the specified time
in ON operation of the paper feed motor after
Trouble content
warming-up or canceling a jam.
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble.
Cause Paper feed motor trouble
Heater lamp trouble.
Paper feed motor harness and connector connection
PCU PWB trouble.
trouble
Thermostat trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Connector, harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the paper feed
HL control PWB trouble.
motor.
Power unit trouble.
Replace the paper feed motor.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Check connection of the paper feed motor harness
Replace the heater lamp.
and the connector.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the thermostat.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the HL control PWB.
Replace the power unit. L4-03 Fusing motor trouble
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp. Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
fusing motor.
Detail PCU
L1-00 Scanner feed trouble Cause Fusing motor trouble
Fusing motor harness and connector connection
Trouble content Scanner feed is not completed within the specified trouble
time. PCU PWB trouble
Detail SCU Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the fusing
motor.
Cause Scanner unit trouble.
Replace the Fusing motor.
SCU PWB trouble.
Check connection of the fusing motor harness and the
Scanner control PWB trouble.
connection.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Scanner home position sensor trouble.
Scanner motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation. 1
Replace the scanner unit. L4-06 Transfer unit pressure welding or
Replace the SCU PWB. estrangement trouble
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Trouble content A change in the transfer position sensor cannot be
Replace the scanner motor.
detected within the specified time in lifting operation of
the transfer unit.
Detail PCU
L3-00 Scanner return trouble
Cause Transfer unit position sensor trouble
Dirt on the transfer unit position sensor.
Trouble content Scanner return is not completed within the specified PCU PWB trouble
time. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Detail SCU Transfer unit lift mechanism trouble
Cause Scanner unit trouble Transfer unit attachment trouble.
SCU PWB trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM6-3 to check the estrangement operation of
Scanner control PWB trouble the transfer unit.
Harness and connector connection trouble Replace the transfer unit position sensor.
Scanner home position sensor trouble Clean the transfer unit position sensor.
Scanner motor trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the scanner unit. Repair the transfer unit lift mechanism.
Replace the SCU PWB.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Replace the scanner home position sensor. L4-08 Waste toner transport motor lock
Replace the scanner motor.

Trouble content The waste toner lock sensor is detected during


rotation of the drum motor.
Detail PCU
Cause Waste toner transport motor trouble.
Waste toner transport pipe clogging
Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB
and the waste toner transport motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the waste toner
transport motor (WTM).
Check the waste toner transport pipe for clogging.
Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the waste toner transport motor.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 32
L4-17 Drum motor lock trouble (BK) L4-35 Paper exit cooling fan motor 4 trouble

Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is
drum motor (K). not detected within the specified time.
Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Drum motor trouble Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB the fan connector or other trouble.
and the drum motor Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
Control circuit trouble PCU PWB and the fan.
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-01 to check the operation of the drum Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
motor.
Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the developing motor. L4-38 Paper exit cooling fan motor 3 trouble
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the drum motor.

Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of


the cooling fan motor.
L4-29 HDD Cooling fan motor trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the and the fan motor.
HDD fan motor. PCU PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Fan motor trouble.
Cause Fan motor trouble. The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble.
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB (No power supply to the fan motor)
and the fan motor. Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
Control circuit trouble. PCU PWB and the fan.
Check & Remedy Use Sim. 6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the fan motor.
L4-39 Fuser cooling fan motor 1 trouble
L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan motor 5 trouble Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is
not detected within the specified time.
Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected within the Detail PCU
specified time in the paper delivery cooling fan 5 Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
operation. the fan connector or other trouble.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of PCU PWB and the fan.
the fan connector or other trouble. Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the fan.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating. L4-40 Ozone fan motor 1 trouble

Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the


L4-32 Power source cooling fan motor 1 ozone fan motor 1.
trouble Detail PCU
Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB
Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected within the and the fan motor.
specified time in the power cooling fan 1 operation. PCU PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Fan motor trouble.
The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble.
Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
(No power supply to the fan motor)
the ozone exhaust fan or other trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the fan.
PCU PWB and the fan motor.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the fan motor.
L4-34 LSU cooling fan motor trouble
L4-43 Paper exit cooling fan motor 6 trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is
Cause When the LSU cooling fan is operated, the fan not detected within the specified time.
operation signal is not detected within the specified
Detail PCU
time.
LSU fan trouble. Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
Harness, connector trouble. the fan connector or other trouble.
LSU control PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the fan.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the fan operation.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Check the LSU fan, and replace if necessary.
Check the harness/connector, and replace if
necessary.
Check the LSU control PWB, and replace if
necessary.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 33
L4-44 Power source cooling fan motor 2 L4-64 DV cooling fan motor 2 trouble
trouble
Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the ADU
transport cooling fan motor F.
Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the
power source cooling fan 2. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB specified time in the developing section cooling fan
and the fan motor. operation.
PCU PWB trouble. Developing section cooling fan trouble.
Fan motor trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
(No power supply to the fan motor) Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Replace the developing section cooling fan.
Check the harness and the connector between the
Replace the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB and the fan motor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the fan motor.
L6-10 Polygon motor trouble

L4-46 DV cooling fan motor 1 trouble Trouble content The polygon motor does not reach the specified RPM
within the specified time after starting rotation of the
polygon motor.
Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the ADU
transport cooling fan motor F. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Polygon motor trouble.
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the LSU control PWB trouble.
specified time in the developing section cooling fan Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
operation. Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
Developing section cooling fan trouble. motor.
PCU PWB trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Replace the LSU.
Replace the LSU control PWB.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Replace the developing section cooling fan.
Replace the PCU PWB. L8-01 Full wave signal detection error

Trouble content The full wave signal is not detected.


L4-50 Process fan motor 1 trouble Detail PCU
Cause PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the ADU Power unit trouble.
transport cooling fan motor R. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the Replace the power unit.
specified time in the process cooling fan operation. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Process cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. L8-02 Full wave signal error
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. Trouble content
Replace the process cooling fan.
Detail PCU
Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause An abnormality in the full wave signal frequency is
detected.
(The frequency is detected as 65Hz or above, or
L4-56 Paper exit cooling fan motor 1 trouble 45Hz or less.)
PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is Power unit trouble.
not detected within the specified time. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Detail PCU harness.
Power frequency, waveform abnormality.
Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
the fan connector or other trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the power unit.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
PCU PWB and the fan.
Check the power waveform.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.

L4-58 Fuser cooling fan motor 2 trouble

Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is
not detected within the specified time.
Detail PCU
Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
the fan connector or other trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the fan.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 34
L8-20 Communication error of MFP/Mother U2-11 MFP EEPROM counter check sum
board error

Trouble content Trouble content


Detail MFP Detail MFP
Cause SCN mother board PWB - MFPC PWB connection Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
trouble. EEPROM socket contact trouble
MFPC PWB trouble. MFPC PWB trouble
SCN mother board trouble. Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Check connection between the SCN mother board Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The previous writing
PWB and the MFPC PWB. data (about the latest 8 sheets) are written into the
Check the ground of the main unit. EEPROM.)
Replace the MFPC PWB. Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace the SCN mother board. (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
perform the works.)
P3-00 Scan accessory kit trouble

Trouble content
U2-30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB
Detail MFP manufacturing No. data inconsistency
Cause Scan accessory kit HDD trouble.
Communication error between Scan accessory kit Trouble content Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved
and the serial I/F. in the PCU PWB and that in the MFPC PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace Scan accessory kit HDD. Detail MFP
Replace Scan accessory kit. Cause When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFPC PWB,
the EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before
replacement is not mounted on the new PWB.
U1-01 Battery trouble MFPC PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Trouble content RTC backup battery voltage fall Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was
Detail MFP
mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted
Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life
on the new PWB.
2) Battery circuit abnormality
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Check Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
and 2.5V or above. replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
Remedy Replace the battery. perform the works.)
Replace the PCU PWB.

U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error


U2-40 SD card system storage data area
Trouble content error
Detail MFP
Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
Trouble content
EEPROM socket contact trouble
Detail MFP
MFPC PWB trouble
Strong external noises. Cause A file error occurs in the SD card system storage data
partition.
Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC PWB EEPROM.
SD card trouble
Replace the MFPC PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power, and the backup data in the
perform the works.) HDD are written into the SD card and the machine is
Check the power environment. automatically booted.
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
Check the SD card, and replace if necessary.
U2-05 Erroneous detection of account
management data

Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Breakage of the authentication DB is detected.
Check & Remedy When breakage of the authentication DB is detected,
the MFP is rebooted and the DB tables are
reconstructed, generating "U2-05".
The message, however, is not displayed and only the
trouble history is saved.
The authentication data are cleared.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 35
U2-41 HDD system storage data area error U2-80 SCU EEPROM read write error

Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Detail MFP
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble
Cause A file error occurs in the HDD system saved data
SCU PWB trouble
area, disabling backup of the saved file of the
SCU PWB EEPROM socket connection trouble
machine adjustment values in the SD card.
HDD trouble Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
MFPC PWB trouble Replace the SCU PWB.
Check connection of the SCU PWB EEPROM socket.
Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary.
Check the SIM adjustment value of the following
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
items, and adjust again if they are improper.
When replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB, refer
? Scanner-related adjustments
to the chapter of "Necessary works and procedures
? Touch panel-related adjustments
of HDD and MFPC PWB replacement."
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.

U2-42 Adjustment data error in system stor- U2-81 SCU EEPROM check sum error
age data area
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail SCU
Detail MFP Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Cause The saved file of the machine adjustment values in Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
the SD card and the HDD cannot be found or is SCU PWB trouble.
broken. EEPROM socket contact trouble.
Both of the SD card set data and the HDD system Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
saved data area are broken. Replace the SCU PWB.
HDD trouble Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
MFPC PWB trouble Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum
SD card trouble error detection data are calculated again to reset the
Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary. proper check sum data.)
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
Check the SD card, and replace if necessary.
When replacing the HDD, the MFPC PWB, and the U2-90 PCU EEPROM read write error
SD card, refer to the chapter of "Necessary works
and procedures of HDD, MFPC PWB, and SD card
replacement. Trouble content
Use SIM to adjust the machine again and set the Detail PCU
adjustment values. Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
PCU PWB trouble
EEPROM socket contact trouble
U2-50 HDD user authentication data check Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
sum error Check the SIM adjustment values of the engine, and
adjust again if they are improper.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Detail MFP Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Cause HDD trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Strong external noises. U2-91 PCU EEPROM check sum error
Check & Remedy Check the data related to the check sum error
(address book, image send system registration data
Trouble content
(senders record, meta data)) and register again.
Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble. Detail PCU
Replace the HDD. Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
Replace the MFPC PWB. PCU PWB trouble
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after EEPROM socket contact trouble
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
Manual, and perform the works.) Replace the PCU PWB.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum
U2-60 Watermark check error error detection data are calculated again to reset the
proper check sum data.)

Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Watermark data trouble
HDD trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data.
Replace the HDD.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service
Manual, and perform the works.)

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 36
U5-00 Document feed unit communication U6-09 LCC lift motor trouble
error
Trouble content No variation in the motor rotation sensor signal
(encoder sign) is detected within the specified time
Trouble content
after booting or stopping the LCC lift motor.
Detail SCU
Detail PCU
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble.
Cause LCC lift motor rotation sensor trouble
SCU PWB trouble.
LCC control PWB trouble
DSPF PWB trouble.
LCC lift mechanism trouble
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power.
LCC lift motor trouble
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the LCC
Replace the SCU PWB.
sensor and the lift motor.
Replace the DSPF PWB.
Check the LCC lift motor rotation sensor, and replace
if necessary.
Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if
U5-16 Document feed unit fan motor trouble necessary.
Check the LCC lift mechanism, and repair if
Trouble content necessary.
Detail SCU Check the LCC lift motor, and replace if necessary.
Cause When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is Use SIM15 to cancel the trouble.
not detected within the specified time.
Fan motor trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. U6-20 Communication error between PCU
DSPF PWB trouble. and LCC unit
Check & Remedy Use SIM2-3 to check that the fan is rotating.
Replace the fan motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Trouble content
Replace the DSPF PWB. Detail PCU
Cause Communication error between the LCC control PWB
and the PCU PWB.
U5-30 Document feed unit tray lift up trouble Connection trouble of the harness and the connector
between the machine and the LCC and those of the
LCC control PWB.
Trouble content LCC control PWB trouble
Detail SCU PCU PWB trouble
Cause STUD does not turn ON 5 times continuously within Malfunction due to noises.
the specified time. Check & Remedy Check to confirm the LCC model.
STUD/STLD sensor trouble. Check the connection of the harness and the
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. connector between the machine and the LCC and
DSPF PWB trouble. those of the LCC control PWB, and replace if
Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor. necessary.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if
Replace the DSPF PWB. necessary.
Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary.

U5-31 Document feed unit lift down trouble


U6-21 LCC transport motor trouble
Trouble content
Detail SCU Trouble content Transport motor abnormality
Cause STLD does not turn OFF within the specified time. Detail PCU
STUD/STLD sensor trouble. Cause Motor lock
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Motor RPM abnormality
DSPF PWB trouble. Overcurrent to the motor
Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor. LCC control PWB trouble / A3 2-stage LCT control
Check connection of the connector and the harness. PWB trouble
Replace the DSPF PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM04-03 to check the operation of the transport
motor.
Replace the motor
Replace the LCC / A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.

U6-22 LCC 24V line power trouble

Trouble content The DV 24V power is not supplied to the LCC / A3 2-


stage LCT.
Detail PCU
Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector
and the harness.
LCC control PWB trouble / A3 2-stage LCT control
PWB trouble
Power unit trouble
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness of the power
line.
Check the 24V voltage with the power unit, the LCC
control PWB, and the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 37
1 : ‘14/Dec

U6-23 A3 LCC tray descending trouble U7-50 MFP and vendor machine communica-
tion error
Trouble content It is detected that the wire of the LCC tray is reversely
wound. (A3 LCC / A3 2-stage LCT)
Trouble content Communication error between the MFP and the serial
The lower limit position (full state) is not detected
vendor.
within the specified time (A4: 10sec, A3: 8sec) from
Detail MFP
the start of descending the LCT1 tray.
(A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT) Cause Improper setting of the vendor machine specifications
(SIM26-3).
Detail PCU
Vendor machine trouble.
Cause Reverse winding detection SW ON
MFPC PWB trouble.
The wire is reversely wound.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
Reverse winding detection SW trouble
Strong external noises.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
LCC control PWB trouble. (A3 LCC)
Check the connector and the harness in the
A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble (A3 2-stage LCT)
communication line.
Remaining quantity sensor abnormality, LCT1 tray lift
Change the specifications of the vendor machine
motor lock, connector and harness connection
(SIM26-3).
trouble, PWB trouble
Replace the MFPC PWB.
(A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
Check & Remedy Check the wire.
Replace the reverse winding SW and the LCC control
PWB. / Replace the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
U7-51 Vendor machine error
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
(A3 LCC / A3 2-stage LCT) Trouble content
Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operations Detail MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor)
of the remaining quantity sensor and the LCT1 lift Cause Serial vendor machine trouble.
motor. Check the wiring. Connector, harness connection trouble.
(A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
Check & Remedy Err.XX is displayed on the operation panel of the
vendor. (XX is the detail code.)
Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail
U6-24 A3 LCC tray lock detection trouble code.
Check the connector and the harness in the
Trouble content The LCC / A3 2-stage LCT tray lock mechanism communication line.
malfunctions.
Detail PCU
Cause Tray lock mechanism breakdown U9-01 Touch panel trouble
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
Tray lock sensor trouble Trouble content
LCC control PWB trouble / A3 2-stage LCT control Detail SCU
PWB trouble
Cause SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the tray lock mechanism.
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the tray lock sensor.
Replace the LCC control PWB. / Replace the A3 2-
stage LCT control PWB.
UC-02 IPDDOCC ASIC error 1

Trouble content
U6-51 Combination trouble between LCC Detail SCU
and main machine Cause SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.

Trouble content An LCC of a different model which is not supported by


the machine is installed. (Improper combination of the
machine and the LCC model code.)
UC-20 IPDDOCC ASIC error 1
Detail PCU
Cause LCC control PWB trouble Trouble content
PCU PWB trouble Detail SCU
Check & Remedy Check to confirm the LCC model. Cause SCU PWB trouble.
Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
necessary.
Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary.

U6-54 Option installation combination trou-


ble

Trouble content Optional wearing pair trouble.


Detail PCU
Cause Lower limit sensor trouble.
Manual feed tray lift motor lock.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 38
2. JAM and troubleshooting JAM code JAM content
PPD2_N1 PPD2 not-reached JAM
A. JAM code list (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
(1) PCU JAM cause (Some parts are overlapped with PPD2_N2 PPD2 not-reached JAM
(tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
the SCU code table.)
PPD2_N3 PPD2 not-reached JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper)
Main unit PPD2_N4 PPD2 not-reached JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper)
JAM code JAM content PPD2_NL PPD2 not-reached JAM
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (MPFD not-reached) (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
MPFD_S MPFD remaining JAM PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
MFT_L Manual feed tray paper feed JAM PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
(100K for the paper feed counter)*1 PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
TRAY1_L Tray 1 paper feed JAM PPD2_S2 PPD2 remaining JAM (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
(100K for the paper feed counter)*1 PPD2_S3 PPD2 remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper)
TRAY2_L Tray 2 paper feed JAM PPD2_S4 PPD2 remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper)
(100K for the paper feed counter)*1 PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM
TRAY3_L Tray 3 paper feed JAM (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
(100K for the paper feed counter)*1 PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
TRAY4_L Tray 4 paper feed JAM PPD2_NM_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
(100K for the paper feed counter)*1 (manual paper feed tray paper)
LCC_L Side A4LCC paper feed JAM (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
(100K for the paper feed counter)*1 PPD2_N1_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
LCC_L Side A3LCC paper feed JAM (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
(100K for the paper feed counter)*1 (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
INSTR1_L Inserter tray 1 paper feed JAM PPD2_N2_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
(100K for the paper feed counter)*1 (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
INSTR2_L Inserter tray 2 paper feed JAM (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
(100K for the paper feed counter)*1 PPD2_N3_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
TRAY1 Tandem tray 1 (cassette 3 paper feed paper)
T1PPD1_S1 T1PPD1 remaining JAM (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
T1PPD2_N1 Tandem tray 1 paper feed JAM PPD2_N4_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
(T1PPD2 not-reached JAM) (cassette 4 paper feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
T1PPD2_S1 T1PPD2 remaining JAM
PPD2_NL_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
TRAY2 Tandem tray 2 paper feed JAM
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
(T2PPD1 not-reached JAM)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
T2PPD1_N3 T2PPD1 not-reached JAM (cassette 3 paper feed
PPD2_NA_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
T2PPD1_N4 T2PPD1 not-reached JAM (cassette 4 paper feed
PPD2_SM_D PPD2 remaining JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
T2PPD1_S2 T2PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 2 paper feed paper)
PPD2_S1_D PPD2 remaining JAM
T2PPD1_S3 T2PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper)
(tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
T2PPD1_S4 T2PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS)*2
TRAY3 Cassette 3 paper feed JAM (C3PFD not-reached JAM) PPD2_S2_D PPD2 remaining JAM
C3PFD_N4 C3PFD not-reached JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
C3PFD_S3 C3PFD remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper) (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS)*2
C3PFD_S4 C3PFD remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) PPD2_S3_D PPD2 remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper)
TRAY4 Cassette 4 paper feed JAM (C4PFD not-reached JAM) (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
C4PFD_S4 C4PFD remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) PPD2_S4_D PPD2 remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper)
LPPD1_NL LPPD not-reached JAM (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper) PPD2_SL_D PPD2 remaining JAM
LPPD1_NL11 LPPD not-reached JAM (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
(large capacity paper feed tray 1 paper feed paper) (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
LPPD1_SL LPPD remaining JAM PPD2_SA_D PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper) (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
PPD1_NM PPD1 not-reached JAM (manual paper feed tray paper) P_FPFD_NM FPFD not-reached JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
PPD1_N1 PPD1 not-reached JAM P_FPFD_N1 FPFD not-reached JAM
(tandem tray 1 paper feed paper) (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
PPD1_N2 PPD1 not-reached JAM P_FPFD_N2 FPFD not-reached JAM
(tandem tray 2 paper feed paper) (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
PPD1_N3 PPD1 not-reached JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_N3 FPFD not-reached JAM (tray 3 paper feed paper)
PPD1_N4 PPD1 not-reached JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_N4 FPFD not-reached JAM (tray 4 paper feed paper)
PPD1_NL PPD1 not-reached JAM P_FPFD_NL FPFD not-reached JAM
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper) (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper) P_FPFD_NA FPFD not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM (manual paper feed tray paper) P_FPFD_SM FPFD remaining JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
PPD1_S1 PPD1 remaining JAM (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_S1 FPFD remaining JAM (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
PPD1_S2 PPD1 remaining JAM (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_S2 FPFD remaining JAM (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
PPD1_S3 PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_S3 FPFD remaining JAM (tray 3 paper feed paper)
PPD1_S4 PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_S4 FPFD remaining JAM (tray 4 paper feed paper)
PPD1_SL PPD1 remaining JAM P_FPFD_SL FPFD remaining JAM
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper) (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper) P_FPFD_SA FPFD remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM (manual paper feed tray paper) POD1_NA POD1 not-reached JAM
(In the case of a jam at the second surface)

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 39
JAM code JAM content MX-RB13
POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM JAM code JAM content
POD1_SA POD1 remaining JAM PIS150_N Transport unit pass sensor not-reached JAM
(In the case of a jam at the second surface) PIS150_S Transport unit pass sensor remaining JAM
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM
POD2_NB POD2 not-reached JAM MX-FN21/22
(In the case of a jam before switchback)
JAM code JAM content
POD2_SB POD2 remaining JAM
(In the case of a jam before switchback) FNM107 Stapler shift motor JAM
POD2_NA POD2 not-reached JAM FNM119 Paper transport roller motor JAM
(In the case of a jam after switchback) FNM120 Paper guide motor JAM
POD2_SA POD2 remaining JAM FNCL102 Shutter clutch JAM
(In the case of a jam after switchback) FNS101_N Inlet port not-reached JAM (FN pass)
POD3_N POD3 not-reached JAM FNS101_S Inlet port remaining JAM (FN pass)
POD3_S POD3 remaining JAM FNS102_N Paper exit not-reached JAM
APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM FNS102_S Paper exit remaining JAM
APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM FNM110 Paper exit roller lift motor JAM
APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM FNM117 Gripper motor JAM
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM FNM115 Staple JAM
LCC A4/A3LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached JAM) FNM114 Discharged paper HOLD motor JAM
LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM FNM113 Paper rear edge fall motor JAM
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper) FNM116 Gripper arm motor JAM
DRUM (Drum lock detection) FNM112 Paper alignment roller lift motor JAM
FUSER (Fusing winding detection) FNM118 Paper rear edge hold motor JAM
PRI_JAM (Image preparation wait time-out) FCM102 Punch JAM
LCC_ERR (LCC communication abnormality detection) FNPAOF Paper attribute data reception overflow
FIN_ERR (Finisher communication abnormality detection) FNTIME Early reaching JAM
MTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAM FNM105 Loading tray upper motor JAM
SIZE_ILG Size illegal JAM FNM106 Loading tray lower motor JAM
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request) FCM101 Punch shift motor JAM
NO_MATCH Parameter inconsistency FSS201_N Saddle inlet port pass sensor delay JAM
FSS201_S Saddle inlet port pass sensor remaining JAM
*1: In SIM22-41, the descriptions are abbreviated on the
FSS203_N Saddle vertical pass sensor delay JAM
screen because of the limitation on the number of characters
FSS226_N Saddle transport paper pass sensor 1 delay JAM
(100K for the paper feed counter).
FSS226_S Saddle transport paper pass sensor 1 remaining JAM
*2: In SIM22-41, the description of "(Delay of paper just before the FSS227_N Saddle paper exit pass sensor 2 delay JAM
JAM from PS)" is omitted because of the limitation on the number FSS227_S Saddle paper exit pass sensor 2 remaining JAM
of characters. FSM202 Saddle section saddle alignment motor JAM
FSM203 Saddle section lead edge stopper motor JAM
FSM204 Saddle section folding roller guide motor JAM
MX-FN19/20
FSM210 Saddle section rear edge hold motor JAM
JAM code JAM content FSM211 Saddle section rear edge shift motor JAM
FED_N Finisher inlet port not-reached JAM FSM213 Saddle section SADDLE flapping motor JAM
FED_S Finisher inlet port remaining JAM FSM214 Saddle section SEPARATION motor JAM
FFPD_N Saddle section not-reached JAM FSM206 Saddle section folding motor JAM
FFPD_S Saddle section remaining JAM FSM205 Saddle section PUSH motor JAM
FIN_TIME Finisher paper early reaching JAM
FHS_N Finisher paper exit not-reached JAM MX-TM10
FHS_S Finisher paper exit remaining JAM
JAM code JAM content
FSHS_N Saddle transport not-reached JAM
FTS103_N Trimmer paper exit sensor delay JAM
FSHS_S Saddle transport remaining JAM
FTS103_S Trimmer paper exit sensor remaining JAM
FSFS_N Saddle paper exit not-reached JAM
FTS101_N Trimmer inlet port sensor relay JAM
FSFS_S Saddle paper exit remaining JAM
FTS101_S Trimmer inlet port sensor remaining JAM
FSTPLJ Finisher staple JAM
FTM103 Trimmer section inlet port separation motor JAM
FPNCHJ Finisher punch JAM
FTM104 Trimmer section paper exit separation motor JAM
FSSTPLJ Saddle staple JAM
FTM102 Trimmer section registration motor JAM
PDPPD1_N Finisher interface inlet port not-reached JAM
FTM106 Trimmer section CUTTER motor JAM
PDPPD1_S Finisher interface inlet port remaining JAM
FTM105 Trimmer section bundle press motor JAM
PDPPD2_N Finisher interface outlet port not-reached JAM
PDPPD2_S Finisher interface outlet port remaining JAM MX-FD10
FSSMJ Finisher stapler shift motor JAM
JAM code JAM content
FDRLMJ Finisher paper exit roller lift motor JAM
FLS30_N Speed reduction timing sensor delay JAM
FSDMJ Finisher saddle motor JAM
FLS30_S Speed reduction timing sensor emaining JAM
FGMJ Finisher gripper motor JAM
FLS31_N Separation timing sensor delay JAM
FSPTMJ Finisher saddle paper transport motor JAM
FLS31_S Separation timing sensor emaining JAM
FIN_PAOF Finisher paper attribute data reception overflow
FLS32_N Folding position adjustment sensor delay JAM
MX-RB15 FLS32_S Folding position adjustment sensor remaining JAM
FLS33_N Upper stopper section paper detection sensor delay
JAM code JAM content JAM
DCS100_N Decurler unit transport pass sensor not-reached JAM FLS33_S Upper stopper section paper detection sensor
DCS100_S Decurler unit transport pass sensor remaining JAM remaining JAM
DCTIME Early reaching JAM FLS22_N Outlet port 1 sensor delay JAM
DCPAOF Paper attribute data reception overflow

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 40
JAM code JAM content
FLS22_S Outlet port 1 sensor remaining JAM
FLS27_N Folding tray empty sensor delay JAM
FLS27_S Folding tray empty sensor remaining JAM
FLS20_N Inlet port sensor delay JAM
FLS20_S Inlet port sensor remaining JAM
FLS21_N Outlet port 2 sensor delay JAM
FLS21_S Outlet port 2 sensor remaining JAM
FLM8 Folding section upper stopper motor JAM
FLM9 Folding SECTION 3-fold stopper motor JAM
FLM10 Folding section lead edge hold guide motor JAM
FLM7 Folding section folding tray paper exit motor JAM
FLENT_ERR EntryStart time out JAM
FLEJT_ERR EjectStartAck time out JAM

MX-CF11
JAM code JAM content
INSFED1_N No. 1 paper feed sensor not-reached JAM
INSFED1_S No. 1 paper feed sensor remaining JAM
INSFED2_N No. 2 paper feed sensor not-reached JAM
INSFED2_S No. 2 paper feed sensor remaining JAM
INSPL1_N No. 1 pull-out sensor not-reached JAM
INSPL1_S No. 1 pull-out sensor remaining JAM
INSPL2_N No. 2 pull-out sensor not-reached JAM
INSPL2_S No. 2 pull-out sensor remaining JAM
INSVTR1_N No. 1 vertical transport sensor not-reached JAM
INSVTR1_S No. 1 vertical transport sensor remaining JAM
INSVTR2_N No. 2 vertical transport sensor not-reached JAM
INSVTR2_S No. 2 vertical transport sensor remaining JAM
INSOUT_N Paper exit sensor not reached JAM
INSOUT_S Paper exit sensor remaining JAM
INSENT_N Inlet port sensor not-reached JAM
INSENT_S Inlet port sensor remaining JAM
INSEXT_N Outlet port sensor not-reached JAM
INSEXT_S Outlet port sensor remaining JAM
INSLUP1J No. 1 lift motor JAM
INSLUP2J No. 2 lift motor JAM
INSPICM1J No. 1 pickup motor JAM
INSPICM2J No. 2 pickup motor JAM

(2) SCU JAM case (Some parts are overlapped with


the PCU code table.)

JAM code JAM content


STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM
SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM
SPPD2_N SPPD2 not-reached JAM
SPPD2_S SPPD2 remaining JAM
SPPD3_N SPPD3 not-reached JAM
SPPD3_S SPPD3 remaining JAM
SPPD4_N SPPD4 not-reached JAM
SPPD4_S SPPD4 remaining JAM
SPPD5_N SPPD5 not-reached JAM
SPPD5_S SPPD5 remaining JAM
SPOD_N SPOD not-reached JAM
SPOD_S SPOD remaining JAM
SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification timer end
P_SHORT Short size JAM
SDFS_S Double feed detection JAM/Accompanied feed JAM
ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 41
3
3. Image send communication report code
A. Outline and code system descriptions B. Details
After completion of communication, the communication report (1) Communication report main code
table, the communication management table, and the protocol are
described on the communication report column. Report Final receive signal
Final receive signal (Receive side)
The communication report code is composed as follows: code (Send side)
0 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
Communication report: XX (XXXX)
1 NSF, DIS (SID), (SUB), NSS, DCS
The upper 2 digits of the communication report code:
2 CFR (PWD), (SEP), NSC, DTC
Communication report code of 00 ? 99 (Refer to communication
3 FTT EOP
report main code.)
4 MCF EOM
The lower 4 digits of the communication report code: 5 PIP, PIN MPS
Used by the serviceman. 6 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
The upper 2 digits: Communication report sub code 1 (Refer to 7 No signal, DCN DCN
3 communication report sub code 1.) 8 PPR PPS-EOP
The lower 2 digits: Communication report sub code 2 (Refer to 9 PPS-EOM
communication report sub code 2.) 10 PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
11 RNR RR
CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 and sub code 2
12 CTR CTC
are in hexadecimal notation. (The others are in decimal
13 ERR EOR-Q
notation.)
14 PPS-PRI-Q
CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 is not used in the 16 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
these models. 17 NSF, DIS SID, SUB, NSS, DCS
18 CFR PWD, SEP, NSC, DTC
19 FTT PPS-EOP
20 MCF PPS-EOM
21 PIP, PIN PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
22 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
23 No signal, DCN DCN
24 PPR
25 RNR RR
26 CTR CTC
27 ERR EOR-Q
28 PPS-PRI-Q
29 V.8 Phase-1 V.8 Phase-1
30 V.8 Phase-2 V.8 Phase-2
31 V.8 Phase-3 V.8 Phase-3

CAUTION: For report codes 16 ? 31, V.34 MODE COMMUNICA-


TION.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 42
Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
0- 31 Refer to “previous table”. Depends on the point of communication interruption. For 16 or later, V.34 mode communication.
33 BUSY The calling side cannot establish connection with the remote party.
34 CANCEL A communication interruption command is made during sending/receiving. The interruption key is pressed for
interruption of input. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
35 NG35 XXXX Power is failed during sending/receiving. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
36 (No record paper)
37 (Record paper jam)
38 MEM. FULL Memory over during reception. <Receive/Polling>
Print is not made during reception in acting reception inhibit. <Receive/Polling>
39 (Number of paper
unmatched)
40 (Relay not received)
41 LENGTH OVER The send data length of one page exceeds the limit (2m) in sending. <Send/Bulletin board>
42 LENGTH OVER The receive data length of one page exceeds the limit. <Receive/Polling>
43 (Communication) (OK) Speaking before data transmission
44 ORIGINAL ERROR A document jam occurs in direct sending. <Send>
45 (Picture quality error)
46 NO RESPONSE The FAX signal from the remote party is not detected within T1 time. <Send/Polling>
(When in recall, however, the recall setting in case of a communication error is valid.)
47 TX DECODE ERROR A decode error occurs in the FAX board. <Send/Bulletin board>
48 OK Normal end of communication
OK REPLY RECEIVE OK in Internet FAX send with reception confirmation.
49 NO RX POLL The called side does not have polling function in polling reception. <Polling>
The called side has no data to send. <Polling>
50 RX POLL FAIL In polling reception, DCN is received for DTC. <Polling>
In polling sending, there is no send data. <Bulletin board>
51 PASS # NG In poling sending, the allow number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
In polling sending, the system number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
52 (No confidential function in In confidential sending, the remote party does not have confidential function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machines)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
53 (Confidential not received) 1) In confidential sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
54 (Confidential BOX NO NG) 1) In confidential reception, a confidential box number which is not registered is specified.
55 (No relay function in In relay command sending, the remote machine has no relay function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machine)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
56 NO REL RX 1) In relay command sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
2) In relay command reception, a remote station number which is not registered is specified. <Receive>
3) In F code relay broadcasting, an F code relay command is received.<Receive>
57 (Relay ID unmatched) 1) In relay command reception, the relay ID does not match. <Receive>
58 REJECTED In reception, data are sent from a remote machine of receive inhibit number. <Receive>
(Not rejected in the bulletin board send or the F code bulletin board send.)
59 RX NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), the remote machine has no DIS bit 47 (polling function). <Polling>
In F code polling (calling), the called side has no send data. (DIS bit 9 is 0.)<Polling>
60 NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), DCN is received for SEP. <Polling>
In bulletin board, there is no send data for SEP. <Bulletin board>
61 RX POLL # NG In bulletin board, the sub address (bulletin board number (SEP)) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
62 F POLL PASS # NG In bulleting board, the pass code (PWD) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
63 NO F FUNC In F code sending, the remote machine has no DIS bit 49 (sub address function). <Send>
(Check that the remote machine conforms to F code.)
64 NO F-CODE In F code sending : <Send>
1) DCN is received for SUB. --- Check the box number.
2) DCN is received for SID. --- Check the box number and pass code.

In F code receiving : <Receive>


"F code relay broadcasting" or "F code confidential reception" is "Inhibited with soft SW."
67 F PASS # NG In F code receiving, the pass code (SID) is not matched. <Receive>
68 BOX NO. NG In F code reception, a box number which is not registered is specified. (SUB is not matched.) <Receive>
69 MEMORY OVER Memory over in quick online sending <Send>
70 (JOB MEMORY OVER) In PC-FAX reservation, the number of remote parties is exceeded. <Send>
71 NG71 XXXX *1 In PC-FAX reservation, data sent from PC includes some errors. <Send>
72 (NG72 XXXX) *1 In department management setting on the machine side:
* In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, a department number which is not registered on the
machine side is specified. <Send>
* In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the department number is not specified. <Send>
73 NG73 XXXX *1 In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the use quantity limit is exceeded. <Send>

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 43
Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
74 NG74 XXXX *1 When reserving specified filing in document filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX;
* The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and the pass-code from PC-XXX does not match
with it. <Send>
* The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and no pass-code is specified by PC-XXX. <Send>
75 NG75 XXXX *1 * Reservation cannot be made due to machine busy. (Reservation of PC-FAX cannot be accepted.)
* When "PC-FAX or PC-internet FAX send inhibit" is set on the machine side.
76 NG76 XXXX *1 Reserved with receive confirmation request in PC-Internet FAX, but the Internet FAX sender is not registered
on the machine side. <Send>
77 NG77 XXXX *1 In reserving specified filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the machine has no filing function.
78 NG78 XXXX *1 The filing function is inhibited on the machine side when filing specification is reserved by PC-FAX or PC-
Internet FAX.
79 NG79 XXXX *1 An authentication error occurs when PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX is reserved.
80 NG80 XXXX *1 NIC connect failure (network abnormality)
* Check for disconnection of cables.
* A network trouble (CE-XX) occurs.
* The port is set to DISABLE.
* Authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled.
* When an error other than the communication result code 93 or 94 in D-SMTP send (including error
response of 5XX)
81 NG REPORT In Internet FAX send, reply of receive confirmation of the remote machine is not normal. (Including PC-Internet
FAX).
* Error of the disposition-modifier.
* The disposition modifier is not in an error, and the disposition type is other than displayed, dispatched, or
processed.
82 NO REPORT In Internet FAX send, time-out occurs in waiting for receive confirmation from the remote machine. (Including
PC-Internet FAX).
* In a case where send confirmation wait time-out time is other than 0, when send confirmation reply from an
Internet FAX destination is not received.
* Recalls of the set number of recalls are performed, but send confirmation reply from an internet FAX
destination is not received.
83 NG LIMIT In E-mail/FTP, Internet FAX send, the send data size exceeds the upper limit of send data.
84 REJECTED In e-mail receive, a sender is registered in receive reject address/domain. <Receive>
85 NG85 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with POP3 server.
* Header acquisition error.
* Time-out during mail receive
86 RECEIVED In e-mail receive, an unsupported attached file is received.
Only the TIFF-F type is supported for attached files.
* The TIFF-F type of the attached file cannot be recognized.
* There is no attached file.
87 NG87 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
* Memory over
88 NG88 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
* Cannot be stored in memory.
* The number of items of acting receive data is the maximum, and an additional data cannot be stored.
89 NG89 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with the mail server.
* Time-out occurs during e-mail receive.
90 NG90 XXXX *1 When image conversion for image send cannot be made after send reservation.
91 NG91 XXXX *1 *2 Data cannot be written to the memory device when Scan To USB is executed.
* The memory device is disconnected during writing to the memory device.
* An error occurs due to a memory device trouble.
92 NG92 XXXX *1 *2 The USB device memory overflows during writing data into the memory device when "Scan to USB" is
executed.
93 NG93 XXXX *1 When error in D-SMTP send (with recall)
* An error response of 4XX occurs during communication with the SMTP server.
* Time out occurs after establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
94 NG94 XXXX *1 When busy in D-SMTP send
Time out occurs during establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
95 NG95 XXXX *1 When the path is too long in execution of Scan To USB.
96 NG96 XXXX *1 When the normal process is not executed in the secure mail sending.
98 NG98 XXXX *1 The copy inhibit pattern is detected when scanning a document.
99 NG99 XXXX *1 A document which is inhibited to be copied such as a banknote is scanned.

*1: For a job status result in "Display in the column of result," "NG XXXX" is displayed. " " is the code number.
For a communication result, "Communication error (XXXX)" is displayed.
*2: The error code of Scan To USB is specified only in the job log.
* When the communication result is OK, the communication sub code 1 and the communication sub code 2 are "0000."
* Errors in ( ) are not used.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 44
(2) Communication report sub code 1
The communication report sub code 1 (upper 2 digits) are always indicated as "00."
(3) Communication report sub code 2

Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive


00 When the conditions after 01 do not apply. Send/Receive
01 Send length over Send
02 EOL time up Receive
03 Carrier detection time up Receive
04 Time up of the communication start command from the machine side Receive
05 Time up in phase C (8 min) Send
06 Memory image decode error Receive
07 Memory image decode error Send
08 Time up between frames in phase C (Report code is 0 or 16.) Send/Receive
09 Not used -
10 Not used -
11 Polarity reversion detection Receive
12 Invalid command reception Receive
13 Time up (1-minute timer/6-second time) Receive
14 PUT error Receive
15 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Receive
16 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Receive
17 Command receive time-up from MFP controller Receive
18 Not used -
19 Not used -
20 Polarity reversion detection Send
21 Invalid command reception Send
22 Fallback retry number over Send
23 Command retry number resend over Send
24 Time up (T5 timer) Send
25 Time up (T5 timer) in V.34 mode Send
26 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Send
27 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Send
28 When sending the FSK signal, no response of send completion is sent back from the MODEM chip within a certain time. Send
(V.34, other than V.34)
29 Not used -
30 A communication error is generated between MFP controller and Modem controller. (Report code is 0 or 16.) -
31 DC current not detected (busy) Send
32 Dial tone not detected (busy) Send
33 Busy tone detection (busy) Send
34 T0 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
35 T1 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
36 In dialing, polarity reversion detection (Remote machine not responding) Send
37 Calling is not made (busy)<Collision detected (including CNG detection)> Send
38 Not used -
60 In resend of document filed data, an error occurs in decoding or coding. Resend
61 In resend of document filed data, setting to inhibit resolution conversion is made. (The resolution after resend is set to be Resend
Enlarged.)
62 In resend of document filed data, rotation setting is made for data which cannot be rotated. Resend
63 In resend of document filed data, data cannot be stored in HD after conversion of resolution for resend. Resend
64 In conversion for sending, the number of the IMS management pages exceeds the upper limit (1 communication Send
reservation: 999 sheets, Total communication reservation: 5,000 sheets). (This trouble occurs also in OSA scan, resulting OSAScan
in memory over.)
70 E-mail header acquisition error E-mail receive
71 Time out occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
72 Receive reject occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
73 Network communication cannot be made due to port disable. Network send
74 An authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled. Network send
75 In the setting of SSL communication, when SSL communication is tried but the server side does not support SSL. Network send
76 There is no image in network communication (transfer). Network send
80 There is no attached file in received e-mail. E-mail receive
81 The attached file of received e-mail is not of TIFF type which is supported. E-mail receive
82 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
ID error
83 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Endian error
84 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Version error
85 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Tag data error
86 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Tag parameter error

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 45
Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive
87 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Header size error
88 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Data error
90 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Memory over.
Cannot be stored in memory.
91 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
The file size is too great to be stored in memory.
92 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Cannot be stored in memory.

When the sub code 2 is "08" or "30" and the communication report is "OK," the report code is "00" or "16."

4. Dial tone
When shipping from the factory, the dial tone detection when sending is set to Enable (changed from OFF to ON). When installing this machine,
be sure to check and confirm that the dial tone is properly detected and the auto dial sending is enabled.

Check to confirm that the continuous buzzer sound is heard when the on-hook key is pressed. (Press the on-hook key again to cancel the
buzzer sound.)
If facsimile communication cannot be executed normally through the IP telephone line, try the general telephone line.

TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 46
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE Service Manual

1. Outline
A. Cases where update is required C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware
ROM update is required in the following cases: There are following methods of update of the firmware.
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. 1) Update method using SIM 49-1
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the 2) Update method using FTP
machine. 3) Update method using the Web page
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for 4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three
repair to the machine. methods.)
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.
repaired.
When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as
B. Notes for update power-off during updating, etc., and when retries of these
methods are failed, the method 4) is employed.
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update Firmware types
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s The firmware type can be displayed by SIM22-5.
installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations
Use SIM22-5 to check the firmware type.
of each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.

2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or
USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.

Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter

USB Host

Firmware.sfu +

Firmware.sfu USB memory

Firmware.sfu The machine detects the media


and executes the program automatically.

*1:
* Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.
* The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for storing the firmware data.
* The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.

FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 1
Execution of the firmware by SIM49-01 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. “ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]”
1) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware becomes clear. Press [YES] key to start the update of selected
into the main unit. (Be sure to use the USB I/F on the operation firemware.
panel.)
2) Enter the SIM49-01.
Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to
the update screen.


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5

The progress is displayed on right side of "FIRMWARE


UPDATE" title by 20 steps.

  
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(

* The number of key changes according to the number of the ),50:$5(83'$7(


6 (

sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted. 5(0$,16)25 0,187(6


&$87,21'212732:(52))7+(0)3),50:$5(83'$7(,1352*5(66
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to
the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE
CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on the
screen. Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK]
key to open the file. If the media have not been inserted and
[OK] key is pushed, the next screen does not appear and the
screen waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB
memory is pulled out on the file list screen, the error is
detected by the [FILE] key pressing, and the first screen
appears. At this time, only the progress gauge is displayed on the
screen, and the version and the firmware selection key are not
3) Current version number and the version number to be updated
displayed.
will be shown for each firmware respectively.
6) If the update is normal completion, following screen is dis-
played.


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
&203/(7(3/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+

4) Press [ALL] key. 2.

All the firmware programs are selected.


Press [OK] key. (The machine is rebooted.)
Go to SIM22-05 and confirm the firmware has upgraded suc-
cessfully.
7) If the update is not normal completion, following screen is dis-
played.


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
(55253/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
,&803&806&8%

* Normally select all the firmwares and execute updating.


* In this case, firmwares which do not exist on the machine
side are ignored.
To update a certain firmware only, select the firmware with 2.

the firmware display key.


* If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] key is gray out
and cannot be pressed.

FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 2
B. Firmware update using FTP
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-
fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.

Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84

Firmware.sfu

Machine 2 Machine 4

FTP Client

10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53

C. Firmware update using the Web page 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
An Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
[Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
the firmware.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.

MX-XXXX

"Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-


tion." will be displayed.
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.

3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firm-
ware to the machine. Update processing begins. While pro-
cessing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..."
appears.

FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 3
D. Firmware update using the CN update function d. Keys used in the CN update mode
(There are three methods.) The following five keys are used for operations in the CN update
mode. Be careful that the functions of the keys differ those in the
(1) Outline normal mode.
The update method using the DIP SW of the MFP PWB is called
the CN update. [UP] [BACK]
a. Function
There are the following three functions in the CN update mode.
1) Firmware update function
This function is used to update the firmware by transferring
data from the PC which is connected to the MFP PWB, the
SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and various options
by means of a USB memory or USB cable.
This is basically the same as SIM49-01, but differs in the fol-
lowing points:
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a [MENU]
section other than the boot program for some reasons during [DOWN] [OK]
firmware update operation of other method than the CN
update, this method can be used to update the firmware.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the SD Key name Functions in the CN update mode
card and CompactFlash must be replaced with a new one hav- [OK] key Executes the selected function or item.
ing the normal boot program. [MENU] key Selects a menu.
[BACK] key Selects a menu.
If the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality
(Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)
in the boot program. [UP] key Selects an item.
If the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is [DOWN] key Selects an item.
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormal-
ity in the main program. (2) Operating procedures
2) Firmware version check function a. Firmware update function
(The method to check the firmware version by using SIM22-5 This function is used to revise the firmware by using the USB mem-
is easier than this method. Therefore, it is not described in this ory for the MFP PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX
manual.) PWB, and each option.
b. Purpose It is basically same as SIM 49-01, but differs in the following points.
This function is used in the following cases: 1) The update target ROM is automatically selected.
1) When an error occurs during firmware update operation other 2) When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a
than the CN update. section other than the boot program for some reasons during
2) When the power is shut down or an error occurs in a section firmware update operation of other method than the CN
other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware update.
update operation of other method than the CN update, this If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, this method
method can be used to update the firmware. cannot be used. On that case, the SD card and CompactFlash
If an error occurs in the boot program, this method cannot be used. must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot program.
In such a case, the SD card and CompactFlash must be replaced When the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
with a new one having the normal boot program. not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in
the main program (SD card or CompactFlash).
c. DIP-SW used in the CN update mode
To enter the CN update mode, turn ON the UPDATE DIP-SW on a-1. Necessary items
the MFP PWB and boot the machine. 1) Insert the SD card and CompactFlash to the MFP PWB of the
When terminating the CN update mode, reset UPDATE DIP-SW to machine.
OFF (normal mode). 2) USB memory with the firmware file (SFU) saved in it.
NOTE: Save the firmware file in the main directory or in a one-level
lower directory.

FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 4
a-2. Procedures 9) Press [OK] key.
1) Turn OFF the power, and remove the cabinet and the MFP The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. It takes about one
PWB cover. minute.
2) Turn ON the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. Display of file reading
3) Install the USB memory into the USB port.
USB memory installing position Firm Update
Reading Data

10) After completion of reading, the firmware update process is


continued.
Display of the firmware update process

Firm Update IcuM


Writing Data

4) Turn ON the power. * The abbreviated name of the firmware which is under
5) Check to confirm that the machine starts booting. (It takes update process is indicated on the right upper corner of the
more than ten seconds to display the menu.) display.
Display when booting is completed * During the update process, the display may flash instanta-
neously. It is a normal operation.
Update Program Init 11) Check the update result.
Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to display the results of all the
Please wait firmware programs.
Display of the firmware update result

Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM


Version Check Result : OK Result : Not Update Result : NG

Conf : 00050000
* OK: Update is completed successfully.
* NG: Update is failed.
6) Select the firmware update mode.
* Not Update: Update is not executed.
Select the update mode with [MENU] key and [BACK] key.
12) Turn OFF the power.
Display of the firmware update mode
13) Turn OFF the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. (Set the
DIP-SW to the normal mode.)
Firm Update 14) Turn ON the power, and check to confirm that the machine
boots up normally.
From USB Memory
Check to confirm that the boot animation is displayed.
Check to confirm that "Copying is enabled" is displayed on the
7) Press [OK] key. copier basic menu.
The firmware file saved in the USB memory is retrieved, and 15) Check to confirm the version of each firmware with SIM22-5.
the file selection menu is displayed. 16) Attach the MFP PWB cover and the cabinet.
Display of file selection

Firm Update
> F 0100P000.sfu

8) Select the firmware file (SFU).


Select the target firmware file (SFU) with [UP] key and
[DOWN] key.
When [OK] key is pressed with a directory name (the head: ">
D") displayed, the menu goes to the one-stage lower directory.
When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower-stage directory, the
menu returns to the original upper directory.

FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 5
[9] MAINTENANCE Service Manual

1. Works necessary when executing the maintenance


A. Execution items before maintenance and servicing
To perform the procedures safely, refer to "NOTE FOR SERVICING" on the first page of this service manual.

Item Simulation
Check the developer counter value. 22 13
Check the OPC drum counter value. 22 13
Check the print count mode in each section and each operation mode. 22 1
Check the number of paper jam troubles. 22 2
Check the positions and contents of paper jams. 22 3
Check the positions and contents of paper jams (DSPF section). 22 12
Check the contents of troubles. 22 4
Print the setting values and the adjustment values. 22 6
Check the number of use of the DSPF, the scanner, the finisher, the stapler, and the punch. 22 8
Check the number of use of each paper feed section. 22 9
Check the ROM version. 22 5

B. Necessary execution items in maintenance and servicing


Perform the work items listed in the maintenance list (parts) and details of works as well as the items described below.
(The necessary execution items are marked with "" in the table below.)

When repairing (replacing consumable parts) / maintenance


When
When When After cleaning
No. Work item Simulation replacing the Periodic
Installation replacing the replacing the scanner
fusing web maintenance
OPC drum developer (read) section
roller
1 Toner concentration reference control 25-2 
level setting
2 The photo-conductor counter is 24-4 
cleared.
3 Clear the fusing web cleaning send 24-4 
counter.
4 Copy/Printer image quality check and 46-24     
adjustment

C. Execution items after maintenance and servicing


Item Simulation
The paper jam / trouble data are cleared. 24 1
The use quantity counter of each paper feed section is cleared. 24 2
The numbers of use of the DSPF, the scanner, the finisher, the stapler, and the punch are cleared. 24 3
The maintenance counter is cleared. (Select MAINTENANCE ALL) 24 4
The list of setting values and adjustment values is printed. 22 6

2. Display of maintenance execution timing


The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the specified value.
The relationships between the kinds of messages and counters are as shown below.

A. Maintenance counter After completion of maintenance, clear the maintenance counter of


SIM24-4.
Message when near end over
Near end Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
B. Transfer unit section counters
Counter name
conditions “0” “1”
Print Enable Print Stop Message when near end over
Maintenance 90% of Sim.21-1 Message (1) Near end Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name
counter (Total) set value conditions “0” “1”
Print Enable Print Stop
Waste toner After near end Message (3) Message (3)
Message when end over detection
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name End conditions
“0” “1”
Print Enable Print Stop Message when end over
Maintenance Sim.21-1 set value Message (1) Message (4) Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name End conditions
counter (Total) “0” “1”
Print Enable Print Stop
Transfer belt print 400K sheets Message (1) Message (1)
Message Print job counter
Message
No. Enable/Disable Transfer unit 1083K rotations Message (1) Message (1)
(1) Maintenance required.Code: TA Enable accumulated
(4) Maintenance required.Code: TA Disable rotation number
(With parentheses)

MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
Message when end over C. Fusing section counters
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name End conditions
“0” “1” Message when near end over
Print Enable Print Stop Sim.26-38B Sim.26-38B
Counter name Non-wearing
Transfer roller 400K sheets Message (2) Message (2) “0” “1”
print counter Print Enable Print Stop
Transfer roller 4498K sheets Message (2) Message (2) Fusing unit Message (11) Message (11)
accumulated
rotation number
Message when end over
Waste toner After end Message (4) Message (4)
Near end Sim.26-38B Sim.26-38B
detection Counter name
conditions “0” “1”
Print Enable Print Stop
Message Print job Fusing upper web 40 K rotations Message (7) Message (7)
Message
No. Enable/Disable cleaning send
(1) Maintenance required Code: TK1 Enable counter
(2) Maintenance required Code: TK4 Enable Fusing lower web 49.5 K rotations Message (9) Message (9)
(3) Please confirm the toner collection Enable cleaning send
container. (with OK key) counter
(Displayed with parentheses)
(4) Please confirm the toner collection Disable
Message when end over
container. (Displayed with parentheses)
Sim.26-38B Sim.26-38B
Counter name End conditions
After completion of maintenance, clear the transfer unit counter of “0” “1”
Print Enable Print Stop
maintenance counter of SIM24-4(transfer unit print counter, transfer
Fusing roller print 400 K sheets Message (5) Message (5)
unit accumulated traveling distance and transfer unit usage days).
counter
Fusing pressure 400 K sheets Message (6) Message (6)
roller print counter
Fusing upper web Judged by the Message (7) Message (8)
cleaning send fusing web life end
counter detection signal,
Fusing lower web Judged by the Message (9) Message (10)
cleaning send fusing web life end
counter detection signal,

Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the fusing web print coun-
ter or the web life end detection.

Message Print job


Message
No. Enable/Disable
(5) Maintenance required.Code: FK1 Enable
(6) Maintenance required.Code: FK2 Enable
(7) Maintenance required.Code: FK3 Enable
(8) Maintenance required.Code: FK3 Disable
(Displayed with parentheses)
(9) Maintenance required.Code: FK4 Enable
(10) Maintenance required.Code: FK4 Disable
(Displayed with parentheses)
(11) Please set the fusing unit definitely. Enable

After completion of maintenance, clear the fusing unit counter of


SIM24-4 (fusing roller, pressure roller, separation pawl, fusing web).

D. OPC drum section counters


Message when end over
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name End conditions
“0” “1”
Print Enable Print Stop
Drum print counter 800K sheets Message (1) Message (1)
Drum accumulated 2000K rotations Message (1) Message (1)
rotation number
Main charger print 400K sheets Message (2) Message (2)
counter
Main charger 1000K rotations Message (2) Message (2)
accumulated
rotation number

Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the drum print counter or


the drum rotations accumulated number counter.

Message Print job


Message
No. Enable/Disable
(1) Maintenance required.Code: DK Enable
(2) Maintenance required Code: MC Enable

MAINTENANCE 9 – 2
1 : ‘14/Dec
After completion of maintenance, clear the drum counter of SIM24-
Message when near end over
4 (drum print counter and drum accumulated traveling distance).
Sim.26-69B
Near end Sim.26-69B
E. Developer section counters Sensor name
conditions “0”
“1”
Not
Displayed
Message when end over displayed
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A Toner remaining When a low toner Message (4)
Counter name End conditions quantity sensor state continues for
“0” “1”
Print Enable Print Stop more than the
Developer print 800K sheets Message (1) Message (1) specified time
counter
Developer 2000K rotations Message (1) Message (1) Message when end over
accumulated Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
rotation number Counter name End conditions
“0” “1”
Print Enable Print Stop
Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the developer print coun-
Toner remaining When the pixel Message (2) Message (2)
ter or the developer accumulated rotation number counter. quantity sensor count value
The developer rotation number is synchronized with the drum reaches the
motor rotation number. specified level
from the near end
Message Print job condition
Message
No. Enable/Disable
(1) Maintenance required.Code: VK Enable
Message Print job
After replacement of developer, use SIM25-2 to set the toner den- Message
No. Enable/Disable
sity control level. By this setting, the developer counters (the devel- (1) Toner low. (Do not replace cartridge until Enable
oper print counter and the developer accumulated traveling requested.)
distance counter) are cleared. (2) Change the toner cartridge Disable
(4) Ready to scan for copy. (Change the toner Enable
F. Toner cartridge section counters cartridge.)

Toner preparation message


Sim.26-69A
Near near end Sim.26-69A
Sensor name “1”
conditions “0”
Not
Displayed
displayed
Toner remaining Detect it in the Message (1)
quantity sensor rotary time for
toner motor

3. Maintenance list
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate

When
Section No. Part name 400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2000K 2400K 2800K 3000K Remark
calling
DSPF section 1 Paper feed roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Replace according to SPF
2 Pickup roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ counter value: Replace at 100K 1
or after one-year use.
3 Separation roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 Torque limiter SPF × × × × × × × × ×
(for separation) 1
5 Transport rollers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 Scanning plate ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 The back side ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
scanning glass
upper
8 The back side ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
scanning glass
lower
9 CCD PWB ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 LED PWB ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Air-blow the LED section.
11 Reflector ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 Paper exit roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 Discharge brush × × × × × × × × × Replacement reference:
When the brush bundle is
remarkably deformed.
14 OC mat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15 Belts × × × × × × × ×
16 Gears (Grease) × × × × × × × × × UKOG-0299FCZZ

MAINTENANCE 9 – 3
1 : ‘14/Dec
When
Section No. Part name 400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2000K 2400K 2800K 3000K Remark
calling
Scanner section 1 Lens ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
CCD ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Mirror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Reflector ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 Table glass ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The surface SPF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
glass
3 Scanner lamp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Air-blow the LED section.
4 Rails (Grease) oil the designation place 1
5 Drive belt × × × × × × × × ×
Drive wire × × × × × × × × ×
6 Sensors × × × × × × × × × For the reflection-type sensor,
the other side must be also
cleaned.
Paper feed 1 Paper pick-up roller × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Replace according to each
section 2 Paper feed roller × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ paper feed counter value:
Replace at 100K or after one-
3 Separation roller × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
year use.
4 Torque limiter × × × × × × × × ×
5 Transport rollers × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 Shaft (Grease) × × × × × × × × × UKOG-0012QSZZ
Developing sec- 1 Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. The storage period is 2 years.
tion 2 Developer × × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ Replace when the specified
rotation number is reached. 1
The storage period is 2 years.
3 DV seal × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
4 DV side seal F/R × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
5 DV filter AS × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 1
Photo conductor 1 Drum × × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ Replace when the specified
section rotation number is reached. 1
The storage period is 3 years.
2 Drum gear × × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲
3 Cleaner blade × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
4 Toner reception seal × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
5 Toner reception side × × × × × × × × ×
sheet F/R
6 Drum separation × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
pawl unit
7 MC unit × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
8 Procon sensor × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
Photo conductor 9 MC unit × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
section 10 Discharge lamp × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
11 Cleaning brush × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
roller
12 Before-transfer × × × × × × × × × Wipe it with a dry waste. The
discharge lamp alcohol cleaning prohibits it
strictly.
13 Process intake filter × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
Transfer section 1 Transfer roller ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ When 300K is reached, replace
together with the primary
transfer belt.
2 Transfer roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
bearings
3 Transfer CL roller ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
4 Transfer belt ○ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Never use alcohol or solvents
for cleaning. 1
5 Pre transfer paper ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
guide
6 Transfer drive gear ○ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 1
Filter section 1 Ozone filter × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ After six months use.
2 Toner filter × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ After six months use. 1
3 DV ozone filter × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ After six months use.
Waste toner 1 Waste toner box Replacement is made by the user every time when the waste toner box is full. Check when a serviceman calls.
section When a serviceman calls, be sure to check. It is advisable to replace in
advance if necessary.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 4
1 : ‘14/Dec
When
Section No. Part name 400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2000K 2400K 2800K 3000K Remark
calling
Fusing section 1 Upper heat roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease(UKOG-
2 Upper heat roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 0235FCZZ) to specific position.
bearing
3 Upper heat roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
insulation bush
4 Heat roller gear × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
5 Upper separation × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Clean when a foreign material is
pawl/Pawl spring attached.
6 Non-contact × × × × × × × × ×
thermistor (Main)
7 Non-contact × × × × × × × × ×
thermistor (Sub)
8 Sub thermistor × × × × × × × × × Clean when a foreign material is
attached.
9 Lower heat roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease(UKOG-
10 Lower heat roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 0235FCZZ) to specific position.
bearing
11 Lower separation × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Clean when a foreign material is
pawl/Pawl spring attached.
12 Lower thermistor × × × × × × × × × Clean when a foreign material is
attached.
13 Upper web roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
14 Upper web back-up × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller
15 Upper web back-up × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller bearing/
Pressure spring
16 Lower web roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
17 Lower web back-up × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller
18 Lower web back-up × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller bearing/
Pressure spring
19 Sensors × × × × × × × × × For the reflection-type sensor,
the other side must be also
cleaned.
20 Paper guides ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Paper transport / 1 PS follower roller × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Paper exit 2 Transport rollers × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
section
3 Transport paper ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
guides
4 Sensors ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ For the reflection-type sensor,
the other side must be also
cleaned.
5 Shafts (Grease) × × × × × × × × × UKOG-0012QSZZ
6 Paper dust remove ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
unit
7 Gears × × × × × × × × ×
8 Discharge brush × × × × × × × × ×
Drive section 1 Gears (Grease) X X X X X X X X X UKOG-0307FCZZ(When
2 Shafts (Grease) X X X X X X X X X checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
3 Grounding shaft X X X X X X X X X UKOG-0012QSZZ(When
(Grease) checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
4 Gears (Conduction X X X X X X X X X UKOG-0299FCZZ(When
grease) checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
5 Belts X X X X X X X X
6 Belts X X X X X X X X X
7 Gears X X X X X X X X X UKOG-0013FCZZ(When
checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
8 Gears X X X X X X X X X UKOG-0299FCZZ(When
checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
9 Belt X X X X X X X X X
LSU section 1 Protection against ○ × × × × × × × ×
dust glass 1

MAINTENANCE 9 – 5
A. DSPF section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate

When
Section No. Part name 400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2000K 2400K 2800K 3000K Remark
calling
DSPF section 1 Paper feed roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Replace according to SPF
2 Pickup roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ counter value: Replace at 100K
or after one-year use.
3 Separation roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 Torque limiter SPF × × × × × × × × ×
(for separation)
5 Transport rollers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 Scanning plate ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 The back side ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
scanning glass
upper
8 The back side ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
scanning glass
lower
9 CCD PWB ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 LED PWB ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Air-blow the LED section.
11 Reflector ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 Paper exit roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13 Discharge brush × × × × × × × × × Replacement reference:
When the brush bundle is
remarkably deformed.
14 OC mat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15 Belts × × × × × × × × ×
16 Gears (Grease) × × × × × × × × × UKOG-0299FCZZ

5 2

3
5

6
5
15
5
13
14

9
16
11

12
7
10 17
16

MAINTENANCE 9 – 6
(1) Pickup roller, paper feed roller replacement (2) Separation roller replacement
1) Open the upper door.Remove the screw and the paper feed 1) Remove the screw and the paper feed PG lower cover.
cover.

2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the reverse pressure release


lever and separation roller.
Maintenance: Replace at every 100K of SPF counter.
2) Remove the pawl and the paper feed PG upper cover.

(3) Scanning plate, scanning glass and white


reference glass cleaning
1) Open the DSPF unit, and clean the No.1 scanning plate.
3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the holder guide, the pickup Maintenance: Clean at every 400K.
roller and the paper feed roller.
Maintenance: Replace at every 100K of SPF counter.

2) Open the lower door.


4) Remove the paper feed roller.
Maintenance: Replace at every 100K of SPF counter.
1

3) Remove the cleaner.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 7
2) Remove the pawl, and remove the front cabinet.

2 3

1
4) Use the cleaner to clean the scanning glass (surface).
Maintenance: Clean at every 400K.

3) Remove the screw. Remove the pawl. Remove the rear cabi-
net.

5) Use the cleaner to clean the white reference glass.


Maintenance: Clean at every 400K.

4) Open the DSPF unit, and remove the OC mat from the left
edge.
Maintenance: Clean at every 400K.

(4) Mirror, Lens/CCD, scanner lamp, OC mat cleaning


1) Open the upper door, and remove the screw.

* When assembling, place the OC mat on the document table


to fit with the reference and close the DSPF unit.
1

MAINTENANCE 9 – 8
5) Remove the connector from the DSPF CL inverter PWB. 9) Remove the screw, and remove the lamp mounting plate.

6) Remove the screw, and remove the intersecting point plate.


Remove the lower door.

2
10) Clean the scanning glass (back surface).
1 Maintenance: Clean at every 400K.

7) Remove the screw, and remove the intersecting point plate.


Remove the white reference plate.
11) Remove the screw, and remove the reflector and the DSPF
copy lamp.
Maintenance: Clean at every 400K.

8) Remove the screw, and remove the scanning section cover.


Remove the screw, and remove the lamp unit.

2
3

MAINTENANCE 9 – 9
1 : ‘14/Dec

12) Remove the screw, and remove the transport PG upper. 16) Remove the pawl, and remove the lens cover.

17) Clean the lens (a) and the CCD (b).


1 13) Remove the screw. Disconnect the connector. Maintenance: Clean at every 400K.
* When assembling, arrange the harness so that it is placed in
the lower position than the rib height.

18) Remove the screw, and remove the mirror base cover.

14) Remove the step screw, and remove the screw. Remove the
optical fixing plate. Remove the optical unit.

2
3

19) Clean the mirror.


Maintenance: Clean at every 400K.
15) Remove the pawl. Remove the dust-proof cover. Remove the
screw, and remove the dark box.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 10
B. Scanner section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate

When
Section No. Part name 400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2000K 2400K 2800K 3000K Remark
calling
Scanner section 1 Lens ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
CCD ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Mirror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Reflector ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 Table glass ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The surface SPF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
glass
3 Scanner lamp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Air-blow the LED section.
4 Rails (Grease) UKOG-0158FCZZ
5 Drive belt × × × × × × × × ×
Drive wire × × × × × × × × ×
6 Sensors × × × × × × × × × For the reflection-type sensor,
the other side must be also
cleaned.

2 4

6
2

4 5

1
5

1
3

MAINTENANCE 9 – 11
4) Clean the both surfaces of the table glass, and the SPF glass.
(1)Table glass, SPF glass
1) Loosen the screw, and lower the angle adjustment plate.

(2) Rails
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Grease each rail.
Important
2) Open the DSPF unit to put it straight up, and remove the
Be careful not to allow grease to come in contact with drive
screw.
wires.
If grease contacts drive wires, clean wires thoroughly.

(3) Drive belt, Drive wire


3) Remove the glass holder. and the table glass. Remove the 1) Remove the table glass.
table glass, and the SPF glass. 2) Check the tension of the drive belt and the drive wire. Check to
confirm that the drive wire in the winding pulley is wound with-
out clearance.


OK NG

MAINTENANCE 9 – 12
(5)Lens, CCD
1) Remove the table glass.
Important
2) Remove the dark box, and the cover.
Wind the drive wire in the sequence of 1 to 7 as shown in the
figure below and secure it.

When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift the mirror
unit to the vicinity of the home position, and wind 7 turns as ①
shown in the figure, and fix the 8th turn with a screw. Then ②
wind two turns furthermore around the pulley.


⑥ ③
④ ②


⑥ 3) Clean the lens, and the CCD.
④ 1 7 8 9 10


② ②
① ①

10 9 8 7 1

(4) Mirror, Reflector, Scanner lamp


1) Remove the table glass.
2) Clean the No. 2 mirror, and the No. 3 mirror. (6) LED PWB, LED driver PWB
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Shift the lamp unit to the notch section of the scanner base
plate.

3) Clean the reflector, the scanner lamp, and the No. 2 mirror.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 13
3) Turn over the sheet.

Important
When attaching the sheet to the original position, insert the L-
shape sections into the inside of the metal plate and attach the
center portion to the metal plate with double-stick tape.

4) Remove the lamp guide. Disconnect the connector from the


LED driver PWB.


5) Remove the scanner lamp, and the LED PWB. Disconnect the
connector from the LED PWB.

① ②

6) Remove the harness holder, and remove the flat cable from
the LED driver PWB. Remove the LED driver PWB.

2
4
3

MAINTENANCE 9 – 14
1 : ‘14/Dec
C. Paper feed section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate

When
Section No. Part name 400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2000K 2400K 2800K 3000K Remark
calling
Tandem paper 1 Paper pick-up roller × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Replace according to each
feed tray 2 Paper feed roller × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ paper feed counter value:
Replace at 100K or after one-
3 Separation roller × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
year use.
4 Torque limiter × × × × × × × × ×
5 Sensors × × × × × × × × ×

Tray paper feed 6 Paper pick-up roller × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Replace according to each


unit 7 Paper feed roller × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ paper feed counter value:
Replace at 100K or after one-
8 Separation roller × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
year use.
9 Torque limiter × × × × × × × × ×
10 Transport rollers × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 Sensors × × × × × × × × ×
- Shaft (Grease) × × × × × × × × × UKOG-0012QSZZ
Paper feed tray 12 Sensors × × × × × × × × × For the reflection -type sensor,
the other side must be also 1
cleaned.

1 2
3
4
5

1
2
5

4
3
10
7

11
12

9
12
12
8
10
10
7

11

9
12
8
10

MAINTENANCE 9 – 15
(1) Tandem paper feed tray
1) Pull out the tray. 4) Remove the paper guide (a).

2) Check the paper pickup roller (a), the paper feed roller (b), and
the separation roller (c) at every calling. 5) Open the paper feed unit (a), and replace the paper pickup
roller (b) and the paper feed roller (c) (when each paper feed
counter value reaches 100K or 1 year from the beginning of
use).

a b

b a
c
c

3) Check the torque limiter (a) at every 800K.


6) Remove the screw (a), and remove the paper guide (b).

b a

MAINTENANCE 9 – 16
7) Replace the separation roller (a) (when each paper feed coun- 11) Remove the trays 3 and 4.
ter value reaches 100K or 1 year from the beginning of use).

8) Remove the screw (a), and remove the separation roller unit
12) Remove the paper guide (a) of the tray 3 and 4 paper feed
(b).
unit.

b a

9) Replace the torque limiter (a) (when each paper feed counter
value reaches 800K from the beginning of use).

13) Check the paper pickup roller (a) and the paper feed roller (b)
at every calling, or replace them (when each paper feed coun-
ter value reaches 100K from beginning of the use or 1 year).

a
10) Pull out the tray 3 and the tray 4.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 17
14) Remove the separation roller (a). Check at every calling, or 17) Remove the screw (a), and remove the arm (b) and remove
replace (when each paper feed counter value reaches 100K the right lower unit. (c)(d). Remove the arm (e).
from beginning of the use or 1 year.)

b
a a
d

15) Open the right lower door unit.


18) Remove the screw (a), and remove the paper guide (b).

16) Clean the transport roller 4 (a) and the transport roller 2 (b) at 19) Disconnect the connector (a). Remove the screw (b), and
every 500K. remove the tray 3 and 4 paper feed unit (c).

MAINTENANCE 9 – 18
20) Clean the cassette 3 and 4 paper presence detection (a) and 23) Remove the E-ring (a), the gear (b), the parallel pin (c), the E-
the cassette 3 and 4 paper entry detection (b) at every 500K. ring (d), and the bearing (e). Remove the screw (f), and
remove the paper guide unit (g).

a
f

d b f
c
a
e g

b f

21) Remove the E-ring (a), and remove the belt (b), the pulley (c),
and the parallel pin (d). Remove the E-ring (e) and the bearing
(f).

24) Remove the spring (a). Remove the screw (b) and the stay (c).
f Remove the spring (d) and the separation pressure release
e plate (e).
d
c
b b
b

a
c
a b

22) Remove the E-ring (a), the bearing (b), and replace the trans-
port roller 2 and 4 (c).

25) Check the torque limiter (a) at every 500K.

b a

c
a

MAINTENANCE 9 – 19
26) Remove the E-ring (a). Slide the shaft (b) and remove the
bearing (c). Remove the shaft (b). 29) Remove the screw (a), and remove the paper guide (b).

b
b

c
b
a

27) Remove the E-ring (a), and remove the coupling (b). Remove
30) Remove the screw (a), the screw (b), and the cover (c).
the shaft (c), and replace the torque limiter (d) (when each
paper feed counter value reaches 800K from the beginning of
use).

a
b b
a b
b

c a
a
b

28) Clean the transport roller 1 and 3 (a) at every 500K. 31) Remove the E-ring (a), and remove the gear (b), the pulley (c),
and the parallel pin (d). Remove the E-ring (e), and remove the
bearing (f).

a
f
e
d
c

MAINTENANCE 9 – 20
32) Remove the E-ring (a), the bearing (b), and replace the trans-
port roller 1 and 3 (c).

b a
c

MAINTENANCE 9 – 21
D. Manual paper feed section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate

When
Section No. Part name 400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2000K 2400K 2800K 3000K Remark
calling
Paper feed 1 Paper pick-up roller X O O O O O O O O Replace according to each
section 2 Paper feed roller X O O O O O O O O paper feed counter value:
Replace at 100K or after one-
3 Separation roller X O O O O O O O O
year use.
4 Torque limiter X X X X X X X X X Replace according to each
paper feed counter value: 800K
5 Transport rollers X O O O O O O O O
6 Sensors X X X X X X X X X For the reflection-type sensor,
the other side must be also
cleaned.

1
2

5 6

6
6
6
6
6
3

MAINTENANCE 9 – 22
1) Remove the pickup cover.

2) Remove the paper pickup roller (A) and the paper feed roller
(B).
Maintenance: Clean at every 100K.

3) Open the maintenance cover, remove the separation roller.


Maintenance: Clean at every 100K.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 23
E. Paper transport section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate

When
Section No. Part name 400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2000K 2400K 2800K 3000K Remark
calling
PS unit / 1 PS roller (Idle) X O O O O O O O O
PS lower unit 2 Paper dust remove O O O O O O O O O
unit
3 Transport rollers X O O O O O O O O
4 Sensors O O O O O O O O O For the reflection-type
sensor, the other side
must be also cleaned.
5 Transport paper O O O O O O O O O
guides
6 Shafts (Grease) UKOG-0012QSZZ

1
3
4
Apply grease

(1) Resist roller (idle), and each transport roller


cleaning
1) Open the right door.
2) Clean the resist roller (Idle) (A), resist roller (Drive) (B) and the
transport roller (Drive) (C).
• Maintenance
Clean at every 400K.

B C

(2) Resist roller (idle), and transport roller applying


grease
1) Open the right door.
2) Apply grease the resist roller (Idle), resist roller (Drive) and the
transport roller (Drive).
• Maintenance
Apply grease at every 400K.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 24
F. Toner supply section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate

When
Section No. Part name 400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2000K 2400K 2800K 3000K Remark
calling
Toner supply 1 Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. The storage period is 2
section years.

(1) Toner cartridge replacement


1) Open the front cover. NOTE:
2) Pull out the toner cartridge to remove. When installing, hold the toner cartridge horizontally and
Maintenance: Replace every-time when toner empty. (By the inset it slowly.
user) NOTE:
Shake the toner cartridge several times.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 25
G. Developing section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate

When
Section No. Part name 400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2000K 2400K 2800K 3000K Remark
calling
Developing 1 Developer × × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ Replace when the specified
section rotation number is reached.
The storage period is 2
years.
2 DV seal × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
3 DV side seal F/R × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
4 DV filter AS × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
5 Connector × × × × × × × × ×

1
3
5

MAINTENANCE 9 – 26
(Note for servicing the DV roller) 2) Remove the 3 screws.
1. Prevent roller contamination 3) Remove the inner cover right.
[Note]
* Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the DV roller
surface.
* When rotating the DV roller manually, hold the drive gear section
to rotate it. and it is difficult to rotate, use handle (UKOG-
0341FCZZ)

A
B

4) Remove the screw -A and remove the Drum fixing sleeve -B.

[Countermeasures]
B
If a fingerprint is attached to the DV roller surface erroneously, per-
A
form the following countermeasures.
1) Remove developer material from the developer unit and the
developer mag roller.
2) Remove oily dirt on the DV roller with alcohol.
3) When alcohol dries completely, supply developer and perform
SIM 25-02.
[Check method]
Check to confirm that the DV roller is free from fingerprints or oily
dirt and that cleaning is completely executed or not by the following 5) Remove the blue screw -A, and pull the developing unit to
method. remove -B. Push the DV lever -C and remove the developing
* Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x unit -D.
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
the image.
(1) Developing unit removal
1) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door.
Remove the front cabinet upper -A. A

B,D
A

MAINTENANCE 9 – 27
2) While rotating the mixing roller, discharge developer from the
(Note for cleaning the developing unit) unit.
If the developing unit is cleaned with a cleaner or an air blower
with much developer in the developing unit, static electricity
may be accumulated in the unit.
* Metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller sur-
face when transporting developer or removing foreign mate-
rial from the magnet roller, developer may adhere to the
magnet roller surface. Be careful to avoid this when handling
the magnet roller.
* Remove developer in the development unit as well as devel-
oper attached to the magnet roller as far as possible.
NOTE:
Before cleaning with a vacuum, remove ground the magnet
roller rear side cored bar as shown in the figure below and
clean the unit with a vacuum. (Do not pinch the grounding
wire with a crocodile clip connector in order to prevent
against damage on the cored bar.)

3) Supply new developer.


* Maintenance
Replace at every 800K.
NOTE:
When supplying developer, use care not to spill it. Espe-
cially, take a great care not to spill developer on the drive
section.
NOTE:
After supplying developer, do not tilt the developing unit.

(2) Developer replacement


NOTE:
Supply of developer must be performed after completion of
all the maintenance works of the developing unit.
1) Remove the screw, and hold the rib to remove the cover -C.
NOTE:
After installing, check to confirm that the cover is securely
engaged with the frame pawl.
Order shown in the following figure.(A, B)

B C (3) Toner filter replacement


1) Remove the cover and the toner filter.
* Maintenance
Replace at every 800K.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 28
2) When installing, shown in the following figure.

0.5mm 0.5mm

0mm 0mm
0mm 0.5mm 0.5mm 0mm

OK

NG

(4) DV seal replacement


1) Remove the DV seal.
* Maintenance
Replace as needed.
NOTE:
Attach the seal according to the reference, and press and
hold securely after attachment.

0mm

0.5mm
0.5mm 0mm

(5) DV side seal F and R replacement


1) Remove the DV side seal F and R.
* Maintenance
Replace as needed.
NOTE:
Attach the seal according to the reference, and press and
hold securely after attachment.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 29
1 : ‘14/Dec

H. OPC drum section


X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate

When
Section No. Part name 400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2000K 2400K 2800K 3000K Remark
calling
Photo conductor 1 Drum × × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ Replace according to the
section drum counter value or
when the specified rotation
number is reached.
The storage period is 3
years.
2 Drum gear × × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲
3 Cleaner blade × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
4 Toner reception seal × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
5 Toner reception side × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
sheet F/R
6 Drum separation × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
pawl unit
7 MC unit × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
8 Procon sensor × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
1
9 MC unit × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
10 Discharge lamp × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
11 Cleaning brush × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
roller
12 Before-transfer × × × × × × × × × Wipe it with a dry waste.
discharge lamp The alcohol cleaning
prohibits it strictly.
13 Process intake filter × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.

11 5
3

10
5
7
9
13

2
1
6
12
8
6

(Note for servicing the OPC drums) 2) Apply stearic acid powder to prevent blade flip.
1. Prevention of oily dirt attachment [Check method]
[Note] Check to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oily
* Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC drum dirt and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the follow-
surface. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.) ing method.
* When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum with the * Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
protection sheet and hold the protection sheet. 8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
the image.
If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough care
not to touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from both
edges of the OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached to
the cleaning blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning blade
may flip.)
[Countermeasures]
If a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously,
perform the following countermeasures.
1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 30
2. Prior exposure prevention
[Note] 3) Remove the screws. Remove the inner cover right.
* Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.
* Do not expose the unit to light for a long time.
* Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using
paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)
[Countermeasures]
If the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior
exposure), perform the following countermeasures.
1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular density A
area in the previously exposed section.
2) Damages due to prior exposure may be recovered by keeping
A
the OPC drum for several hours. If, however, image are not
recovered, replace the OPC drum.
A
(1) Photo-conductor unit removal
B
1) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door.

4) Remove the screw. Remove the drum fixing sleeve.


(Clockwise direction)

B
A

2) Open the front cabinet. Remove the front cabinet upper.

5) Remove the blue screw -A, and pull the developing unit to
remove -B. Push the DV lever -C and remove the developing
unit -D.


A A

B C

B,D

MAINTENANCE 9 – 31
6) Pull the connector.
(3) Drum replacement
1) Remove the screw, and open the frame.Remove the drum.

D C B A
A
A

7) Remove the blue screws. Remove the Photo-conductor unit.

1) When replacing OPC drum, turn the inner cover right removed
at Step. (1) - 3) upside down.

(2) MC unit replacement


1) Remove the blue screw, and remove the MC unit.
* Maintenance
Replace at every 400K.
NOTE: 1) Place OPC drum unit on it.
When inserting the MC unit, be careful not to scratch the
drum.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 32
Assembling:
1) Remove the blue screw, and remove the drum transfer drive
Screw hole
gear. Remove the drum flange R. Pull the drum. DR flange fixing stay
* Maintenance
Replace at every 800K.

Drum

F Boss

Lot Number
D
R

A B

NOTE:
When installing, lot number listed inside of a drum makes
the position of the F side.
When removing and installing, be careful not to scratch the
drum by making it into contact with the separation pawl.
Use the stearic acid powder (UKOG-0312FCZZ) when
there is the part which steric acid powder is not applied.
After installing OPC to the unit, insert the drum fixing Align the oval holes of DR flange
R to the bosses of DR flange
sleeve from unit F side, and then turn it around 360 fixing stay.
degrees in the normal rotating direction.
Use the stearic acid powder (UKOG-0312FCZZ) when
there is the part which steric acid powder is not applied.
Do not apply any other powder than the stearin acid.
Without cleaning the setting powder applied to the replace-
Align the convex holes of DR
ment OPC drum in advance, apply the stearic acid powder
transfer drive gear to the screw
over the setting power. holes of DR flange fixing stay.
For the sections located in 30mm proximity to both ends of
OPC drum which contacts the cleaning blade edge,
securely apply stearic acid powder (a) with particular care.

(a)

Check that there is no clearance between the flange F/


flange R and the OPC drum ends. Blue screw
No clearance between the flange and the drum

Insert the blue screws into the


screw holes of DR flange fixing
stay and tighten them.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 33
After replacing OPC drum and also during other works, turn
the inner cover right removed at Step. (1) - 3) upside down,
and then place the drum unit on it.

For exposure prevention, cover the OPC drum with paper


(about 10 sheets).
(4) Drum separation pawl unit replacement
1) Remove the washer, stopper and remove the drum separation
pawl.
* Maintenance
Replace at every 400K.
NOTE:
Be careful not to scratch or put dirt on the tip of the separa-
tion pawl.

C
B

MAINTENANCE 9 – 34
(5) Toner reception seal, toner reception side seals F
Fiber of the side seal F/R must securely
and R replacement touch the blade edge.
1) When replacing the toner receive sheet, remove the toner
Side seal F/R should be
receive sheet and affix it according to the reference.
attached based on the blade
NOTE: edge as the reference but
When cleaning the affixation side with alcohol, eliminate Side seal F/R should be
the toner, dirt, and dust. attached based on the blade
Slide your finger in the direction of arrow to attach the toner edge as the reference but
receive sheet. PET material of the seal
should not be jammed and it
It must not ride on the step. should not hinder the
Replace the toner receive sheet while the side seal F/R are movement of the blade itself.
attached because the toner receive sheet covers a parts of
the side seal F/R.
Clearance of 0.3mm or Entanglement of the
2) When replacing the side seal F/R, remove the side seal F/R
more: NG fiber: NG
and clean the affixation side with alcohol, and then affix it
according to the reference while the cleaning blade is placed
to F side.
NOTE:
Before attaching the side seal F/R, the cleaning blade must
be installed as those will be attached based on the cleaning
blade edge as the reference. NOTE:
When cleaning the affixation side with alcohol, eliminate Attach the toner reception side sheet F/R according to the
the toner, dirt, and dust. reference.
After attaching the side seal F/R, push the blade edge and Attach with the cleaner blade edge as the reference so that
then check that it does not ride on the side seal F/R and the clearance is within 0 - 0.3mm. Press to secure attach-
can smoothly move. ment.
Do not touch the blade edge except the corner.
When replacing the side seal F/R, replace the toner receive Align the direction of fiber with jig. (5times)
sheet as well. (This is because the toner receive sheets
covers a part of side seal F/R.)
* Maintenance
Check at every 400K. R side F side

0.3mm

0mm
0.3mm 0mm
② Be careful of the blade edge.

0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm


0mm 0mm

0.3mm 0.3mm

MAINTENANCE 9 – 35
NOTE:
After replacing the side seal F/R, apply the steric acid (UKOG- When installing, tighten the blue screws in the sequence of
0309FCZZ) to the side seal F/R with micro-spatula (UKOG- C -> D -> E.
0311FCZZ).
NOTE:
Be careful not to be adhered to the peripheral parts.

Application amount of
steric acid: 2 dosages
with the micro-spatula
for each F/R.

Spread the steric acid


across the exposure
section of side seal.

(6) Cleaner blade replacement


1) Remove the screw, discharge cover. Remove the blue screw,
and the cleaner blade.
* Maintenance
Replace at every 400K.

A
B

A
C
F
D

NOTE:
Before removing the cleaner blade, remove the side seals
F and R in advance. When, therefore, the cleaner blade is
replaced, replace the side seals F and R with new ones as
well.
If this note is ignored, a trouble such as improper cleaning
or toner leakage may occur.
NOTE:
Be careful not to touch or scratch the tip of the cleaner
blade.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 36
1 : ‘14/Dec
I. Transfer section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate

When
Section No. Part name 400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2000K 2400K 2800K 3000K Remark
calling
Transfer section 1 Transfer belt O        
2 Transfer rollers        
3 Transfer roller X        
bearings
4 Transfer CL roller        
5 Pre transfer paper O O O O O O O O O
guide
6 Transfer drive O        
gear 1

2 6

3
2 5

MAINTENANCE 9 – 37
(1) Transfer unit removal (2) Transfer belt unit removal
1) Power on. 1) Remove the transfer drive spring.
Order shown in the following figure.(A, B)
* Installing to order shown.(B, A)
Next remove the screws.

2) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door. B

C A

2) Remove the transfer belt unit.

3) Push the holder -A. And pull the Secession lever -B and sepa-
rate a hand from the holder-A.

B (3) Pre-transfer paper guide cleaning


A
1) Clean the pre-transfer paper guide-A.
* Maintenance
Clean at every 400K.

4) Remove the transfer unit.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 38
(4) Transfer cleaning roller replacement
1) Remove the transfer cleaning roller.
* Maintenance Lot Number
Replace at every 400K.

C
A

B
F

F
(6) Transfer roller and Transfer roller bearings
replacement
E 1) Remove the transfer roller.
D
* Maintenance
Replace at every 400K.
(5) Transfer belt and transfer idle roller replacement
H
1) Remove the screw and the transfer idle roller holder.

G
I
F
B E
D

C
B
A
A
A

2) Remove the transfer idle roller and the transfer belt.

A B

NOTE:
At the time of the installation, make the inside batch num-
ber of the belt the R side.
B
The salient of the belt do not run onto each roller end.
Being careful about the handling in particular, and there not
being a wound, a dirt.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 39
(7) Transfer roller bearing replacement
1) Remove the transfer roller bearing.
• Maintenance
Replace at every 400K.

D
E

B
A
C

MAINTENANCE 9 – 40
1 : ‘14/Dec
J. Filter section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate

When
Section No. Part name 400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2000K 2400K 2800K 3000K Remark
calling
Filter section 1 Ozone filter X ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ After six months use.
2 Toner filter X ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ After six months use.
1
3 DV ozone filter X ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ After six months use.

1
2
3

(1) Ozone filter replacement


1) Remove the screw-A, and the cover-B. Remove the ozone fil- (2) Toner filter and DV ozone filter replacement
ter-C.
1) Remove the screw-A, and the cover-B.
Remove the two screws-C. Remove the DV filter box-D.
Remove the toner filter-F and DV ozone filter-E.

F
E

C
C

B A C

B A

MAINTENANCE 9 – 41
K. Waste toner collection section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate

When
Section No. Part name 400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2000K 2400K 2800K 3000K Remark
calling
Waste toner 1 Waste toner box Replacement is made by the user every time when the waste toner box is full. Check when a serviceman calls.
section When a serviceman calls, be sure to check. It is advisable to replace in
advance if necessary.

(1) Waste toner box replacement


1) Remove the waste toner door.
Remove the waste toner box.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 42
L. Fusing section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate

When
Section No. Part name 400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2000K 2400K 2800K 3000K Remark
calling
Fusing section 1 Upper heat roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease(UKOG-
2 Upper heat roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 0235FCZZ) to specific
bearing position.
3 Upper heat roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
insulation bush
4 Heat roller gear × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
5 Upper separation × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Clean when a foreign
pawl/Pawl spring material is attached.
6 Non-contact × × × × × × × × ×
thermistor (Main)
7 Non-contact × × × × × × × × ×
thermistor (Sub)
8 Sub thermistor × × × × × × × × × Clean when a foreign
material is attached.
9 Lower heat roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease(UKOG-
10 Lower heat roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 0235FCZZ) to specific
bearing position.
11 Lower separation × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Clean when a foreign
pawl/Pawl spring material is attached.
12 Lower thermistor × × × × × × × × × Clean when a foreign
material is attached.
13 Upper web roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
14 Upper web back-up × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller
15 Upper web back-up × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller bearing/
Pressure spring
16 Lower web roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
17 Lower web back-up × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller
18 Lower web back-up × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
roller bearing/
Pressure spring
19 Sensors × × × × × × × × × For the reflection-type
sensor, the other side must
be also cleaned.
20 Paper guides ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

MAINTENANCE 9 – 43
19 15
7
5
6
13
14
4
5 2
19 3
15 10
8
18

20

11
16
17
9
1
2 12
3 11
10 19
18
19

20

U K O G -0 2 9 9 F C Z Z

U K O G -0 2 3 5 F C Z Z

U K O G -0 2 3 5 F C Z Z
U K O G -0 2 3 5 F C Z Z

U K O G -0 0 1 2 Q S Z Z

U K O G -0 2 3 5 F C Z Z

Y S IL C Z M P 0 1 0 F C

U K O G -0 2 3 5 F C Z Z
U K O G -0 2 3 5 F C Z Z

MAINTENANCE 9 – 44
(1) Fusing unit replacement
1) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door. 2) Remove the web spring, the screw and the holder. Draw the
web tension rollers.

E
D

C
A B

3) Remove the web pressure roller bearing.Remove the web


roller and the cleaning roller.

2) Remove the blue screw. Pull the lock lever and remove the
fusing unit.

C

B
D

A
A
* Maintenance
Replace at every 400K. and life end

B B

(2) Upper web roller replacement


1) Remove the screw, and remove the web unit.

[Route diagram]

MAINTENANCE 9 – 45
(3) Lower web roller replacement
1) Remove the screw, and remove the lower web frame.

B
A

[Route diagram]

2) Remove the web spring, the screw and the holder. Draw the
web tension rollers.

(4) Upper heat roller, upper heat roller gear, upper


C
B heat roller insulation bush, upper heat roller
bearing, and heater lamp replacement
3) Remove the web pressure roller bearing.Remove the web 1) Remove the screw, and the fusing cover F/R.
roller and the cleaning roller.

D
A

B
D B
C
A
* Maintenance
Replace at every 400K. and life end

MAINTENANCE 9 – 46
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, the lamp holder, 5) Remove the stopper and upper heat roller unit. Remove the
and the heater lamp. roller stopper from the upper heat roller, and remove the upper
heat roller gear, the upper heat roller insulation bush, and the
upper heat roller bearing. When make the fusing unit, apply
grease to specific position.

⑤ B

D
A
C

3) Remove the screw, and release the pressure of the heat roller
and open the fusing unit.

* Maintenance
Replace at every 400K.
C 6) When replace an upper heat roller, take off a protection sheet
and soak alcohol into cloth enough and clean the heat roller
A surface well.
(5) Lower heat roller and lower heat roller bearing
replacement
1) Remove the lower heat roller unit. Remove the lower heat
roller bearing from the lower heat roller.
When make the fusing unit, apply grease to specific position.
A
* Maintenance
B Replace at every 400K.
B

4) Put the screw to keep opened.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 47
(6) Upper separation pawl replacement
1) Remove the screw, the upper separation pawl unit, and the
upper separation pawl.

D B

E C

C B

A
B
A
C
B
A

2) Remove the fusing front upper paper guide.


Remove the screw and the thermistor.

* Maintenance D
Replace at every 400K.
(7) Lower separation pawl replacement C
1) Release the spring edge on the paper guide side from the
paper guide spring stopper. Precisely speaking, slide the
spring edge and push it down to the back surface of the paper
guide. In addition, disengage the lower separation pawl from
the lower separation pawl shaft side where the spring is
attached. Remove the spring from the lower separation pawl.

D
C A
B
3) Remove the screw, the fusing paper feed paper guide, and the
fusing lower harness holder.
Remove the screw and the thermistor.

B A
* Maintenance A
Replace at every 400K.
NOTE: When installing the spring, pass the spring hook through
the hole in the lower separation pawl. * Maintenance
Replace at every 400K.
NOTE:
When installing the lower separation pawl, first install the NOTE:
shaft which is not provided with the spring to the paper When installing, be sure to insert into the thermistor boss.
guide.
(8) Thermistor replacement
1) Remove the screw, the thermistor cover, and the non contact
thermistor.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 48
M. Duplex / Paper exit section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate

When
Section No. Part name 400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2000K 2400K 2800K 3000K Remark
calling
Duplex unit / 1 Discharge brush X X X X X X X X X
Paper exit unit 2 Transport rollers X O O O O O O O O
3 Sensors O O O O O O O O O For the reflection-type
sensor, the other side
must be also cleaned.

2
1
3

1
2

3
2

MAINTENANCE 9 – 49
(1) Each transport roller cleaning
1) Clean the paper exit roller 2 (Drive). 4) Open the right door.
* Maintenance
Clean at every 300K.

2) Open the ADU open/close door.

5) Remove the reverse PG unit.

6) Clean the transport roller (Drive).


* Maintenance
Clean at every 400K.
3) Clean the transport roller (Drive) (A), and the transport roller
(Drive) (B).
* Maintenance
Clean at every 400K.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 50
7) Clean the transport roller (Drive).
* Maintenance
Clean at every 400K.

MAINTENANCE 9 – 51
1 : ‘14/Dec
N. Drive section
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate

When
Section No. Part name 400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2000K 2400K 2800K 3000K Remark
calling
Main drive unit 1 Gears (Grease) X X X X X X X X X UKOG-0307FCZZ(When
checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
2 Shafts (Grease) X X X X X X X X X UKOG-0307FCZZ(When
checking, apply to the 1
necessary positions.)
3 Grounding shaft X X X X X X X X X UKOG-0012QSZZ(When
(Grease) checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
Tandem paper 4 Gears (Conduction X X X X X X X X X UKOG-0299FCZZ(When
feed drive unit grease) checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
5 Belts X X X X X X X X
Multiple steps 6 Belts X X X X X X X X X
drive unit
Web drive unit 7 Gears X X X X X X X X X UKOG-0013FCZZ(When
checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
PS drive unit 8 Gears X X X X X X X X X UKOG-0299FCZZ(When
checking, apply to the
necessary positions.)
9 Belt X X X X X X X X X
Drive units - Torque limiter X X X X X X X X X
- Clutches X X X X X X X X X

7
Grease
FLOIL GP-501MR

8
Grease
UKOG-0299FCZZ

4
Grease
UKOG-0299FCZZ

1
Gease
5 UKOG-0307FCZZ

2
Gease
UKOG-0307FCZZ

6
3
Gease
UKOG-00012QSZZ

MAINTENANCE 9 – 52
1 : ‘14/Dec

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Service Manual

1. Disassembly of Units
(2) Upper cabinet rear cover
A. Exteriors section
1) Remove four screws (A) and remove the upper cabinet rear.
(1) Part name

No. Unit name A


a Upper cabinet front right
b Upper cabinet front left
c Upper cabinet cover
d Front cabinet right upper
e Front cabinet upper
f Front cabinet
g Right cabinet front upper
A
h Right cabinet front lower
i Upper cabinet right
j Right cabinet rear upper
k Right cabinet rear lower
l Waste toner door
m Right cabinet lower
n Upper cabinet rear
o Rear cabinet upper
p Rear cabinet
q Upper cabinet left
r Left cabinet upper
s Left cabinet rear
t Left cabinet
u Left cabinet lower
v Delivery tray cabinet

(3) Rear cabinet


1) Loosen the screws in the lowest part of rear cabinet. Remove
a the screw and remove the rear cabinet.
b
i
c
d
e j
A
f
k

A
l A
g
h

A
m A
A

A A

A
n v
A
q
o r

s
p
t

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 1


1 : ‘14/Dec
(4) Front cabinet upper (6) Paper exit tray cabinet
1) Open the front cabinet (A). Remove the screws (B) and shift 1) Remove the paper fixture and the actuator.
the front cabinet upper toward left and then remove it (C).

A
C

(5) Front cabinet right upper


1) Open the right door.

2) Remove the screws and remove the paper exit tray

2) Remove the screws and remove the front cabinet right upper.

A A

A
B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 2


1 : ‘14/Dec
(7) Left cabinet upper 3) "Shift the hooks (8 pcs.) toward front side and remove from the
1) Remove the screw. Uplift and unhook the left cabinet upper main unit. Remove the left cabinet.
and remove it. *Make sure to insert the hooks to main unit completely when
attaching the cabinet to the main unit."

B
(9) Left cabinet rear
(8) Left cabinet
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
1) Pull out the tandem paper feed tray.
2) Remove the screws and remove the left cabinet rear.

2) Remove the screw and pull out the handles.


(10) Left cabinet lower
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the screw and remove the left cabinet lower.

B
B
B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 3


1 : ‘14/Dec
(11) Upper cabinet cover (14) Upper cabinet right, Upper cabinet left
1) Remove the screws and remove the upper cabinet cover. 1) Remove the screws and remove the glass holder right.

A
2) Remove the screws and remove the upper cabinet right.

(12) Upper cabinet front left


1) Remove the screws and remove the upper cabinet front left.
Disconnect the connector from the USB HUB PWB.

B
B
C A
C

A
3) Remove the table glass.
(13) Upper cabinet front right
1) Remove the screws.
A

4) Remove the screws and remove the glass holder left.

A
2) Remove the upper cabinet front right.

B
A

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 4


1 : ‘14/Dec
5) Remove the screws and remove the upper cabinet left. (18) Right cabinet rear
1) Remove the screws and remove the right cabinet rear.

A B A

(15) Rear cabinet upper


1) Remove the screws and remove the rear cabinet upper. C

(19) Waste toner door


A
1) Remove the pawls from main unit and remove the waste toner
door.
B

A
(16) Upper cabinet rear
1) Remove the DSPF unit, disconnect the connector (A) and
remove the screw (B). Remove the screw (c) and the rear cab-
inet upper (D).

C
B
D

(20) Front cabinet


1) Remove the band, shift the shafts and remove the front cabi-
net.
A B
A

(17) right cabinet rear upper


1) Remove the screw and remove the Right cabinet rear upper.

C
B

A
B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 5


1 : ‘14/Dec
B. Operation panel section 3) Remove the screws and remove the front cabinet right upper.

No. Unit name


a Operation Panel unit

a A
B

4) Remove the screws and remove the upper cabinet cover.

B
(1) Operation panel unit
1) Open the front cabinet (A). Remove the screws (B) and shift
the front cabinet upper (C) toward left and then remove. A

5) Remove the upper cabinet cover and remove the screw on


earth wire.

2) Open the right door.

6) Remove the screws and remove the upper cabinet front left.
Disconnect the connector.

B
C A
C

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 6


1 : ‘14/Dec
7) Remove the screw and remove the cover. 10) Disconnect the connectors from the operation panel. Remove
the harness from the wire saddle.
A

Disconnect the connectors.

Remove the harness from the wire saddle.

8) Remove the screws.

Remove the harness


inside the guide
to the outside.
Remove the
wire saddle.

11) Remove the screws and remove the operation panel unit.

A
9) Remove the upper cabinet front right.

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 7


1 : ‘14/Dec
C. DSPF section 3) Loosen the screws and lower the angle adjustment plate.

No. Unit name


1 DSPF unit ②
2 Front cabinet
3 Rear cabinet ①
4 Upper door unit
5 Paper feed tray unit
6 Paper feed unit
7 Lamp unit ①
8 Optical unit
9 Delivery drive unit
10 Paper feed drive unit

4 3

4) DOpen the DSPF unit until it is placed in upright position and


remove the screws.

2
1

10
6
9

8
5
7

(1) DSPF unit


1) Remove the rear cabinet upper.

2) Remove the screw-1 and disconnect earth wire-2. Disconnect
the connector-3 from the SCN Mother PWB.

2 5) Shift the DSPF unit toward rear side. Fit the step screw with
the key hole of the hinge and remove the DSPF unit holding
upright.
3

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 8


1 : ‘14/Dec
(2) Front cabinet (4) Upper door unit
1) Open the upper door, and remove the screw. 1) Remove the front cabinet.
2) Remove the spring, pressure release axis holder, screw and
① pressure release link lever.

④ ②


2) Remove the front cabinet.


3) Disconnect the connector.


④ ⑦


(3) Rear cabinet
4) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the upper door unit.
1) Open the upper door. Remove the screw and remove the rear
cabinet.




DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 9


1 : ‘14/Dec
(5) Paper feed tray 5) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed unit.
1) Remove the front cabinet.

2) Remove the rear cabinet.
3) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
paper feed tray.


① ①


(7) Lamp unit

1) Remove the front cabinet.
2) Remove the rear cabinet.
3) Open the OC mat.

(6) Paper feed unit


1) Remove the front cabinet.
2) Remove the rear cabinet.
3) Remove the screw and remove the paper feed cover.

① 4) Disconnect the connector for lamp unit from the control PWB.

4) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle and remove


the snap band.

5) Open the lower door and remove the screw, fulcrum plate, and
③ lower door.

② ①

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 10


1 : ‘14/Dec
6) Remove the screw, fulcrum plate, and white standard plate. 5) Remove the screw and cushion. Remove optics fixing plate
and optical unit.




① ②

7) Remove the screw and lamp unit. (9) Paper feed drive unit
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Disconnect the connector and open the edge saddle. Remove
the snap band.





(8) Optical unit

1) Remove the upper door.
2) Remove the lamp unit.
3) Remove the screws and paper guide.

3) Remove the screws and the drive unit.

4) Remove the CCD FFC from the CCD PWB.


DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 11


1 : ‘14/Dec
(10) Paper feed drive unit (11) Attachment of belts
1) Remove the rear cabinet. 1) Loosen the screw. Tighten the screw while applying tension.
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove clutch stopper and separa-
tion clutch.
NOTE: make sure that stopping section in the clutch is fit into the
plate during the assembly.



2) Loosen the screw. Tighten the screw again after reapplying


tension in the direction of the arrow.

3) Disconnect the connector. Remove resign E-ring and transport


clutch.
NOTE: make sure that stopping section in the clutch is fit into the
plate during the assembly.

(12) DSPF driver PWB


1) Remove the rear cabinet.
4) Disconnect the connector. Remove screws and the feed drive
unit. 2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screws. Remove
the DSPF driver PWB.

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 12


1 : ‘14/Dec
(13) DSPF control PWB D. Scanner section
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
No. Part name
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws. Remove
1 Drive belt
the control PWB unit.
2 Drive wire
3 Rails
4 Mirror
5 Reflector
6 Scanner lamp
7 Lens
8 CCD
9 Table glass
10 SPF glass
11 LED PWB
12 LED driver PWB

10 3
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws. Remove
the DSPF control PWB. 9
1
7

8
2

5
4 6
4

11
12

(1) Drive belt, Drive wire


1) Remove the table glass.
2) Check the tension applied on the drive belt and the drive wire.
Also check whether the drive wire is winded around the wind-
ing pulley without any space between wires.

OK NG

Important:
Drive wire must be tensioned and fixed in the order of 1 to 7 as
shown below.
When winding the drive wire around pulley, move the mirror
unit toward home position, wind the wire seven times (as
shown in the figure) and screw the wire on eighth. Then wind
the wire around the pulley twice.

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 13


1 : ‘14/Dec
3) Clean the reflector, the scanner lamp and the mirror No. 1.
⑦⑥

④ ②



④ 1 7 8 9 10



③ 10 9 8 7 1
(4) Lens and CCD
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the dark box and cover.


(2) Rails ①
1) Remove the table glass. ②
2) Apply grease to each rail.
Make sure not to apply grease to the drive wire.
If applied, wipe off the grease completely. ③

3) Clean the lens and CCD.

(3) Mirror, Reflector, Scanner lamp


1) Remove the table glass.
2) Clean the mirror No. 2 and the mirror No. 3.

(5) Table glass and SPF glass


1) Remove the glass holder, the table glass, and the SPF glass.



① ②

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 14


1 : ‘14/Dec
2) Clean both surfaces of table glass and SPF glass. 5) Remove the scanner lamp and LED PWB. Disconnect the con-
nector from the LED PWB.

① ②

(6) LED PWB, LED driver PWB


1) Remove the table glass.
2) Move the lamp unit to the notch on the scanner baseplate.

6) Remove the harness holder, and Disconnect the flat cable


from the LED driver PWB. Remove the LED driver PWB.



3) Turn up the sheet.


When returning the sheet to the original position, put the L-
shape sections on the both ends into the inside of the plate
and attach the center portion to the plate with double-stick
tape.

4) Remove the lamp guide, and disconnect the connector from


the LED driver PWB.


DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 15


1 : ‘14/Dec
E. Paper feed tray section 3) Remove the pick up roller (a), paper feed roller (b), separation
roller (c) and torque limiter (d).
No. Unit name
a Tandem paper feed tray a b
c
b Paper feed tray d
c Paper feed tray unit

a
b
cd

a 4) Remove the tandem support PG upper.

b
c

(1) Tandem paper feed tray


1) Pull out the tandem paper feed tray.

5) Remove the pick up roller and paper feed roller.

① ③

2) Remove the screws and remove the tandem paper feed tray.

① 6) Remove the screw and remove the tandem support PG lower.



DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 16


1 : ‘14/Dec
7) Remove the separation roller. 2) (1) Remove the screw. (2) Remove the PF movable paper
guide lower.

8) Remove the screws and remove the bearing holder unit.

3) Remove the paper guide.


9) Remove separation roller.

4) Remove the paper pick up roller and the paper feed roller.

(2) Paper feed tray unit


1) (1) Open the right lower door. (2) Remove the screw. (3)
Remove ADU open/close arm from the right lower door. (4)
While pressing the arm, (5) remove right lower door from the
main unit. (6) Remove ADU open/close arm from the main ① ②
unit.

⑥ 5) Remove the separation roller.



DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 17


1 : ‘14/Dec
6) Remove the E-ring, gear, parallel pin, and bearing. Remove 10) (1) Remove the E-ring. (2) Remove the coupling. (3) Remove
the screws and paper feed lower unit. the separate shaft. (4) Remove the torque limiter.





① ③


F. Manual paper feed section


7) (1) Remove the spring. (2) Remove the screw. (3) Remove the No. Unit name
reinforcing plate. (4) Remove the spring. (5) Remove the lever. a Manual paper feed tray
b Multi paper feed unit





8) (1) Upon removal of the separation roller in step 5), (2) remove
the E-ring.

② (1) Manual paper feed tray and manual paper feed unit
1) Open the right door unit.
2) Remove the screws and remove the right delivery upper cover.

① ①

9) (1) Shift the separate shaft. (2) Remove the bearing. (3)
Remove the separate shaft.



DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 18


1 : ‘14/Dec
3) Remove the screws and remove the ADU inner cover R. 6) Remove the screws and remove the ADU cabinet F.

① ①

① ①



4) Remove the screws and remove the ADU cabinet R. 7) Disengage the pawl and remove the harness cover. Discon-
nect the connector.




① 8) Remove the shaft, screws, and manual paper feed tray.

5) Remove the screw and disengage the right door lock pawl.
Remove the E-ring.


9) Remove the screws.

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 19


1 : ‘14/Dec
10) Remove the screws. Disconnect the connector and remove (2) PS unit
the manual paper feed unit. 1) Remove the screw and remove the PS harness cover. Discon-
nect the connector.


① ①

G. Paper transport section


(1) LCC transport unit
1) Remove the screw and LCC transport cabinet.

① 2) Remove the screws and remove the PS unit.


2) Remove the screws and remove the LCC transport cabinet


paper guide. ③


(3) PS lower unit


1) Remove the screw and remove the PS lower unit.

③ ②
3) Remove the screws and remove the dowel pin out of a hole.
Disconnect the connector and remove the LCC transport unit.

② ②



DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 20


1 : ‘14/Dec
H. LSU section 3) Remove the screw and remove the paper exit tray cabinet.
(When attaching the cabinet, ensure that paper fixture is not
No. Unit name caught at the back side of the tray.)
1 LSU

4) Remove the screw and remove the left cabinet upper. (When
attaching the left cabinet upper, hook the pawl from above.)

(1) LSU
1) Open the front cabinet and remove the front cabinet upper.




② 5) Pull out the tandem cassette.


2) Remove the screws and remove the front cabinet right upper.


DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 21


1 : ‘14/Dec
6) Remove the screw which is fixing the left cabinet. Pull out the 9) Put a marking on the current adjustment position.
handles.

10) Disconnect the connectors.



7) Pull out the left cabinet and remove. (When attaching the cabi-
net, make sure to hook the pawl.)

11) (1) Remove the screw. (2) Remove the LSU rotation shaft. (3)
Remove the screws. (4) Remove the LSU unit.



8) Remove the screws and remove the LSU left plate. I. Toner replenishment section
No. Unit name
a Toner cartridge

② ④


DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 22


1 : ‘14/Dec
(1) Toner cartridge 2) Open the front cabinet and remove the front cabinet upper.
1) Open the cover. Pull out the toner cartridge and remove.


J. Development section

No. Unit name
a DV unit

3) Remove the screws and remove the inner cover right.

A
a

A
B

4) Turn the screw clockwise and remove it. Remove the drum fix-
ing sleeve.
*Fix the drum fixing sleeve to remove the screw so that the it
does not rotate.

(1) DV unit
1) Open the right door.

B
A

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 23


1 : ‘14/Dec
5) Remove the blue screw and pull out the DV unit. The unit K. Drum section
stops on the way, so remove the unit while pressing the DV
lever. No. Unit name
*Hold the DV unit with both hands securely. a Process unit
*When placing the DV unit, place it on a level place carefully.

B,D

(1) Drum unit


1) Open the right door.

2) Remove the DV unit. Refer to 10. Development section.


3) Disconnect the connector and remove it from the clamp and
wire saddle.

Remove from the clamp.

Disconnect the connector.

Remove from the wire saddle.

Turn the opening on the


downside for attachment.

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 24


1 : ‘14/Dec
4) Remove the screw (A) and MC unit (B). L. Transfer section
*Remove MC unit first when removing the drum unit. Ensure
that the MC unit is not contaminated with toner. No. Unit name
a Transfer unit

5) Loosen the blue screw and pull out the drum unit (B).
*Hold the drum unit with both hands securely.
*When placing the drum unit, place it on a level place carefully.

A (1) Transfer unit


1) Turn on the power. Go into Sim 6-3, select JOINT and PAGE1
and then press EXECUTE so that the transfer belt contacts
drum.

2) Press up the lock lever and open the right door.

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 25


1 : ‘14/Dec
3) Pull the transfer leave lever while holding the holder.

N. Waste toner collection section


4) Release the lock while pulling the transfer leave lever, release
your hand and remove the transfer unit. No. Unit name
a Waste toner transport unit
b Waste toner drive unit

M. Toner hopper section


No. Unit name
a Toner hopper unit

1) Open the right door.


2) Remove the DV unit.
3) Remove the MC unit.
4) Remove the Drum unit.
(1) Waste toner transport unit
5) Disconnect the connector. (*Make sure to connect the connec-
1) Open the right door.
tor when mounting the toner hopper.)

Disconnect the connector.

6) Remove the screw and pull out the toner hopper unit.

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 26


1 : ‘14/Dec
2) Open the front cabinet and remove the front cabinet upper. 5) Remove the blue screw and pull out the DV unit. The unit
stops on the way, so remove the unit while pressing the DV
lever.
*Hold the DV unit with both hands securely.
*When placing the DV unit, place it on a level place carefully.

A

② B,D

3) Remove the screws and remove the inner cover right.

A 6) Disconnect the connector and remove it from the clamp and


wire saddle.
A
Remove from the clamp.
A
Disconnect the connector.
B

4) Turn the screw clockwise and remove it. Remove the drum fix-
ing sleeve.
*Fix the drum fixing sleeve to remove the screw so that the
drum fixing sleeve does not rotate.

Remove from the wire saddle.

Turn the opening on the


downside for attachment.

B
7) Remove the screw (A) and the MC unit (B).
*Remove the MC unit first when removing the drum unit.
A
Ensure that the MC unit is not contaminated with toner.

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 27


1 : ‘14/Dec
8) Loosen the blue screw and pull out the drum unit (B). 11) Remove the screws and remove the right cabinet rear lower.
*Hold the drum unit with both hands securely.
*When placing the drum unit, place it on a level place carefully.

A
A

B 12) Remove the screws and remove the rear cabinet upper (B)
and the rear cabinet (D).

9) Remove the screw and the right cabinet rear.


A

B
C

A C
C
D
B
C
C
C

C C

A C

13) Remove the screws.

10) Remove the waste toner door. A

A
A
A

14) Pull up the controller box unit. Hook the handle on the control-
ler to the main unit to secure the unit.

B
A

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 28


1 : ‘14/Dec
15) Remove the screw and open the waste toner box. 20) Remove the screws and remove the connection to the waste
toner transport section.

A
B
A A

B A

16) Follow the steps in 17.3 "Main drive unit" and remove the main
drive unit.
17) Disengage the handle on the controller and remove the (2) Waste toner drive unit
screws. Remove the waste toner pipe guide plate. Be careful 1) Remove the screws, waste toner full detecting spring and
while handling this area. detecting sensor mounting plate. Disconnect the connector
and remove the photo sensor.

C
B

A D
A A
E

C
18) Remove the screws.

B B

2) Remove the screw and waste toner motor protection plate.

19) Disconnect the connector, screws, and HDD fan. A

C
A

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 29


1 : ‘14/Dec
3) Remove the screws and disconnect the connector. Remove (1) Fusing unit removal
the waste toner insert guide upper. 1) Press up the lock lever and open the right door.
D F
C

B
E G

A
2) Remove the blue screw (1), press down the lock lever (2) and
remove the fusing unit.
4) Remove the screws and the waste toner motor.


Handle

Handle

A
B

A ② ②

O. Fusing section
No. Unit name NOTE: Do not turn the gear in the opposite direction of what
a Fusing unit engraved mark indicates on the cover while fusing unit is
detached. Otherwise, the web sheet may sag and twine
around the roller.
NOTE: Make sure to use handles to hold the fusing unit. (Do not
use the lock lever to hold.)
NOTE: Do not hit the drawer connector on main unit while remov-
ing (and installing) the fusing unit.
(2) Upper web roller
1) Remove the screw and the web unit.

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 30


1 : ‘14/Dec
2) Remove the spring, screws, holder and pull out two web ten- 2) Remove the spring, screw, holder and pull out a web tension
sion rollers. roller.
*When assembling the unit, make sure the web sheet follows *When assembling the unit, make sure the web sheet follows
the path marked on the holder. the path marked on the holder.

D

C
③ B
① ②
3) Remove the pressure bearing and remove the web roller and
3) Remove the pressure bearing and remove the web roller and backup roller.
backup roller.

A
C

B
D
B A
D
(4) Heater lamp
A 1) Remove the screws and remove the fusing cover F/R.

(3) Lower web roller


1) Remove the screws and remove the lower web frame.

B
A


A ③

2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, lamp holder and


heater lamp. When mounting the heater lamp, insert the con-
vex portion on the lamp into the groove on the holder.

⑤ ②



DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 31


1 : ‘14/Dec
(5) Upper heat roller 4) Disengage the Upper separate pawl (D).
1) Remove the screws releasing the pressure out of the heat
roller and open the fusing unit. (When assembling the unit, fas-
ten the screw to apply pressure.)

A
F G
③ C

E
B



② D

5) Remove the upper heat roller unit.


2) Mount the screw removed in the step 1) - (2) to the location
shown in the illustration below so that the unit keeps opening.
(Remove the screw for assembly.)

3) Remove the spring (1), screws (2), Fusing rear upper paper
guide B unit (3). Remove the screws (4) and disengage the
upper separate pawl unit (5).
6) Remove the roller stopper from the upper heat roller. Remove
④ ②
the upper heat roller gear, upper heat roller insulate bush,
⑤ ③
upper heat roller bearing. Apply designated grease to the pre-
scribed position for assembly.
7) When replacing the upper heat roller, remove the protecting
sheet, saturate a cloth with sufficient amount of alcohol and
clean the surface of heat roller thoroughly.


DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 32


1 : ‘14/Dec
(6) Lower heat roller (8) Thermistor
1) Remove the lower heat roller unit. Remove lower heat roller 1) Remove the screws, the thermistor cover, and the un-contact-
bearing from the lower heat roller. ing thermistor from the fusing upper frame.

C B

C
B
A
(7) Separate pawl lower
2) Remove the screw and the fusing front upper paper guide from
1) Open the paper guide. Release the edge of spring on paper
the fusing upper frame. Remove the screw and the thermistor.
guide side from the paper guide spring stopper.
Specifically, slide the edge of the spring and then press down
toward the back side of the paper guide. Then remove the sep-
arate pawl lower from the shaft side of the separate pawl lower
where the spring is hooked. Remove the spring from the sepa-
rate pawl lower. D



A
3) Remove the screws, fusing paper enter paper guide and the
lower harness holder from the fusing lower frame.

C

NOTE: When attaching the spring, make sure the spring hook
goes through the hole on the separate pawl lower.
NOTE: When attaching the separate pawl lower, make sure to
attach the shaft without spring to the paper guide first.

B A
A

NOTE: Insert the boss on the thermistor to a hole when attaching


the thermistor.

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 33


1 : ‘14/Dec
P. Paper exit section 5) Open the front cabinet and remove the front cabinet upper.

(1) Paper exit unit


1) Remove the paper fixture.




A


6) Remove the screws and remove the front cabinet right upper.
2) Remove the actuator.

7) Remove the screws.


3) Remove the screw and the delivery follower block.

4) Release the lock and open the right door unit.


8) Remove the upper cabinet front right.

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 34


1 : ‘14/Dec
9) Remove the screws and remove the glass holder right. 12) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw and the delivery
upper duct.





13) Remove the screw, delivery drive cover and disconnect the
connectors.


10) Remove the screws and remove the upper cabinet right.

Remove from the wire saddle.


11) Remove the blue screw (1), press down the lock lever (2) and
remove the fusing unit. Disconnect
the connector.


Handle

Handle

Remove the band from the main unit.



14) Remove the screw and remove the paper exit unit.

② ②

NOTE: Do not turn the gear in the opposite direction of what


engraved mark indicates on the cover while fusing unit is
detached. Otherwise, the web sheet may sag and twine
around the roller.
NOTE: Make sure to use handles to hold the fusing unit. (Do not
use the lock lever to hold.)
NOTE: Do not hit the drawer connector on main unit while remov- ③ ①
ing (and installing) the fusing unit. ②

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 35


1 : ‘14/Dec
Q. Drive section 4) Remove the screws and remove the rear cabinet upper (B)
and the rear cabinet (D).
(1) Tandem drive unit
1) Remove the screw and remove the right cabinet rear.
A

B
C

A C
C
B D

C
C
C

C C

C
A
C

5) Remove the screws.

2) Remove the waste toner door.

A
A

B A

6) Pull up the controller box unit. Hook the handle on the control-
ler to the main unit to secure the unit.

3) Remove the screws and remove the right cabinet rear lower.

C A

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 36


1 : ‘14/Dec
7) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw and the DV duct. 10) Remove the screws and the tandem drive unit.

C
A

8) Remove the screws, the tandem multiple steps joint plate and
the belt.
(2) Multiple steps drive unit
1) Remove the screw and open the waste toner box.

B
A

B A

9) Disconnect the connectors and remove the harnesses.

2) Remove the screws and the tandem multiple steps joint plate.
Remove the belt.

B
A

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 37


1 : ‘14/Dec
3) Disconnect the connectors and remove the band. 3) Disconnect the connectors.

Disconnect
the connector.
Remove the band.

4) Remove the screws and the multiple steps drive unit. 4) Remove the screws and remove the main drive.
*Ensure that drum drive shaft won't be damaged.
*Ensure that each gear on the drive unit won't be damaged.
*Mount the screws in the order of A, B, C, and B as shown in
the illustration below.

C D

A
A B C

(3) Main drive unit D


1) Remove the DV unit, the MC unit, and the drum unit prelimi-
narily. 5) Remove the connector and the band.
2) Remove the screw and the main flywheel.

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 38


1 : ‘14/Dec
6) Remove the screw and the MC cleaning holder. 10) Remove the screw and remove the drive main frame.

A
B
A
7) Remove the MC cleaning coupling (A) (Remove it as show in B
the illustration with "" mark below. Change the condition as
C A
shown in the illustration with "✕" mark after the attachment.)
Remove the screw (B) and lift up motor unit (C). B

Grease
U K O G -0 3 0 7 F C Z Z

11) Remove the bearings, the shafts, and the gears.

Grease
C U K O G -0 3 0 7 F C Z Z

C
8) Remove the screws (A) and drum motor (B). Remove the
D
screw (C) and the DV motor (D).
B
A
B

A
A

A
A
D

C
9) Remove the screws and the drive shaft ground spring.

B
Conductive A
grease

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 39


1 : ‘14/Dec
R. PWB section 2) Remove the screws. Pull out the MFPC PWB mounting plate
and remove.
No. Unit name
a MFPC PWB
b ACRE PWB
c HDD
d Scan Mother PWB
e PCU PWB
f HV MC PWB

a
B
b
c

e
f A

3) Remove the screws and remove the ACRE PWB and MFPC
PWB.

C
D

(1) MFPC PWB and HDD B


C
1) Remove the screw and remove the right cabinet rear upper.

C
A
C
B

C
A

4) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screws and the HDD.

C B

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 40


1 : ‘14/Dec
5) Remove the screws and remove the HDD mounting plate. 4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screws. Remove
the HV MC PWB.
B
A

0 0 GB + 0 0
0 0 GB + 0 0
X X X :0 0 0
XXXX:XXX
A A

XX/XX/XX
X X -:0 0 0
B

N o . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
XXXXXXXXXXX
B

A
A
A

(2) Scan Mother PWB


1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the screws and remove the Scan Mother PWB.

A
A
No. Unit name
A
a AC/WH PWB
b DC power supply PWB

A
B
A
A

(3) PCU PWB, HV MC PWB


1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the rear cabinet.
2) Open the controller box.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screws. Remove (4) AC/WH PWB, DC power PWB
the PCU PWB.
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the
AC/WH PWB.

A B

B
A

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 41


1 : ‘14/Dec
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screws. Remove 2) Remove the rear cabinet upper and the rear cabinet.
the DC power PWB. 3) Open the controller box.
4) Disconnect the connector, remove the screws and the FAX
PWB.
Remove the screw and the TEL/LIU PWB.

A
B

A A
B

No. Unit name


a TEL/LIU PWB
b FAX PWB
c HV TC PWB 5) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw and the earth ter-
d HL PWB minal. Remove the screw and the AC cord mounting plate.

b B

c A

(5) TEL/LIU PWB, FAX PWB, HV TC PWB


1) Remove the screw and remove the right cabinet rear upper. 6) Remove the screws and remove the right cabinet rear lower.

A
C

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 42


1 : ‘14/Dec
7) Remove the screw and open the waste toner box. (6) HL PWB
1) Open the right door a little.

B A

8) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw and the HV TC


PWB.

2) Open the front cabinet. Remove the front cabinet upper.


B



3) Remove the screws and remove the front cabinet right upper.


4) Remove the screw and remove the paper exit tray cabinet.
(When attaching the cabinet, ensure that paper fixture is not
caught at the back side of the tray.)

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 43


1 : ‘14/Dec
5) Remove the screw and remove the left cabinet upper. (When 8) Pull out the left cabinet and remove. (When attaching the cabi-
attaching the left cabinet upper, hook the pawl from above.) net, make sure to hook the pawl.)

6) Pull out the tandem cassette.

9) Remove the screws and remove the LSU left plate.

② ④


10) Remove the screws and remove the LSU fan.

7) Remove the screw which is fixing the left cabinet. Pull out the
handles.


A
① B
A

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 44


1 : ‘14/Dec
11) Remove the screws and remove the left side reinforce plate
upper.

A C

12) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw and the HL PWB.

A C

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 45


[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING
Service Manual

1. HDD/SD card/CF card memory map


A. HDD partition
HDD size = 320GB (Actual size 289GB)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 [GB]
0 [L-1] 0.3GB [S-1] 7GB [I-1] 100GB
Outer
track
10

90

100 [I-2] 10GB

110 [I-3] 10GB

[S-2]
120 [I-4] 1GB [L-2] 1GB
0.2G
[S-5] B
130 [S-3] 4GB [S-4] 2GB
0.5G
[S-6] 2GB [S-7] 2GB
B
140 [S-8] 16GB

150 [S-9] 4GB

160 [S-10] 4GB [S-11] 120GB

170

270

280 [S-12] 8GB

Inner 290 [L-3] 1GB


track
[GB]

B. HDD data contents


No File system Stored data NOTE
L-1 Not available UI content data
e-manual / html
S-1 Universal
Watermark
I-1 Image data Image data (ERDH / Document filing) 3000 documents,20000 images
I-2 Image data Image data (Temporary storage) 1000 documents,10000 images
I-3 Image data User watermark / Stamp 1000 documents,10000 images
I-4 Image data FAX / Internet FAX receive images 3000 documents,5000 images
L-2 Not available System storage data
L-3 Not available RAID system information
S-2 Universal System storage data (for backup)
Download font
User profile
S-3 Universal User macro
storage data
System setting data
S-4 Universal System log
Document filing (Database)
S-5 Universal Job log (Database)
Job completion list
Address book (Database)
Account management information (Database)
S-6 Universal
Individual setting information for direct WEB browsing
Coolie file for OSA application
S-7 Universal Database file
S-8 Universal Spool area for printer
S-9 Universal Application work area (User file used in SMB direct print
S-10 Universal OSA application file

VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 1


No File system Stored data NOTE
S-11 Universal User file saved in the SMB server
User data of set value etc which must not be erased when installing the DSK.
S-12 Universal
(Address book, account information)

C. CF card partition
CF card size = 8GB (Actual size 7.8GB)

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 [MB]
0 [L-201] 7080MB

7 [S-201] 512MB [S-203] 200MB

[GB]

D. CF card data contents


No. File system Stored data NOTE
ICU firmware (Boot/Main)
Log data
L-201 Universal
Snapshot
Swap area
font
web help
S-201 Universal
spdl
Option Font ROM
S-203 Universal System setting value data file

E. SD card partition
SD card size = 4GB (Actual size 3.6GB)

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 [MB]
0 [L-101] 500MB [I-101] 1GMB

[GB]

F. SD card data contents


No. File system Stored data NOTE
L-101 Not available ICU (Reus) firmware (Boot/Main)
I-101 Image data FAX/Intermet FAX receive images

VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 2


2. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB, HDD, the SD Card and the CF Card
A. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)

Important:
Registered user information will not be recovered if the MFP PWB is affected by U2-05 trouble. (*1)
1) Attach the memory, the EEPROM, the SD card, CF card etc. of the MFP PWB on the service parts MFP PWB and install it to the main unit.

Important:
Ground your body with grounding band during the work.
2) When U2 trouble occurs, use SIM16 to cancel it.
3) Set as follows after restarting the main unit.
At this time, F6-21 may occur. Whether it may occur or not, go to execute procedure 1.
(1) Set the appropriate country code by Sim66-2 (clear the software switches related to FAX).

Important:
Make sure to execute even if the fax option is not installed on the machine.

Note for the handling of EEPROM


WARNING:
Never execute Sim16 to clear U2 trouble WITHOUT investigating the root cause of U2 trouble using the following note.
1) Make sure to put an earth band while handling PWB. EEPROM data may be garbled due to the static charge.
(It is mentioned in Note for Serving.)
2) Never to insert EEPROM to the socket in reverse. U2 trouble occurs 100% of the time if the machine is turned on after inserting the
EEPROM in reverse.
Execution of Sim16 to clear this U2 trouble will lead to the garbled data. Data won’t recover once the data is garbled.
3) Make sure that PCU, MFP, SCAN EEPROMs will not be switched. U2 trouble occurs 100% of the time if the machine is turned on while the
EEPROMs are being switched. Execution of Sim16 to clear this U2 trouble will lead to the garbled data. Data won’t recover once the data
is garbled. To prevent
such troubles, put a mark such as “MFP” to each EEPROM before removing from PWB so that it is easy to distinguish.
4) Please handle EEPROMs with care to prevent bending of pins.
They will be broken if bent several of times. (This type of trouble has been reported many times.).
5)
Do not use foamed styrol etc. for packing during the transportation of EEPROM. Foamed styrol easily generates static charge. In some
cases, EEPROM is damaged just by sticking it into foamed styrol. Make sure to use the black sponge for packing during transportation.
The black sponge is used to pack EEPROM provided as service parts.Special material is used for this black sponge so that it will not gen-
erate a static charge. Make sure that PCU, MFP, SCAN EEPROMs won’t be switched. U2 trouble occurs 100% of the time if the machine
is turned on while the EEPROMs are being switched. Execution of Sim16 to clear this U2 trouble will lead to the garbled data. Data won’t
recover once the data is garbled. To prevent such troubles, put a mark such as “MFP” to each EEPROM before removing from PWB so
that it is easy to distinguish.
CAUTION: Please note that counter data and machine adjustment values are recorded in the EEPROM.
If the data in EEPROM is garbled, it is impossible to recover. In such cases, the only solution will be the initialization of the EEPROM.
Counter data and adjustment values will be reset to “0” or “default” once the data are initialized.
Once all the adjustment values are set to default, it will be necessary to readjust all the adjustment values, which requires tremendous
workload.

Caution to prevent damage on EEPROM


* In case any trouble other than U2 trouble occurs to the machine, replace PWB (remove and install EEPROM) to fix, and U2 trouble
occurs right after power on, never execute Sim16 under the condition.
As previously mentioned, the data in EEPROM will be garbled after the execution of Sim16.
* In such cases, EEPROM may have been inserted in reverse or MFP and PCU EEPROM may have been switched.
* Turn off the machine without execution of Sim16, install proper EEPROM in proper position (on PWB), turn on the machine again, and
then execute Sim16. This way U2 error will be cleared.
* Sim16 is executed to clear U2 errors if it occurred without performing any services (such as machine repair or maintenance).
As previously mentioned, execution of Sim16 won’t clear artificially-generated U2 errors. Instead, it actually damages the
EEPROM.HDD storage data and backup

VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 3


B. Procedures necessary for HDD replacement
Note for HDD replacement - Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data
back up is possible before
replacement. perform data back up and then replace the HDD.
- If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up.
- The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD.
Contents of this chapter
- HDD storage data and back up.
- Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be back up.
- Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD.
- Re-install and update procedures of operation manual data saved in HDD.
- Re-install and update procedures of watermark data.
(1) HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other data cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other storage
data cannot.
If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the
HDD storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD.
a. HDD storage data list

Before installation After installation Enable/ Enable/


Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (When shipping (After use by Disable of Backup means Disable of
procedures operator
from the factory) users) data backup data reinstall
1 e-Manual Available Available Disable *1 Enable Sim49-3 Service
2 Address book Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
3 Image send series Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
registration data (Sender’s Device cloning / Device cloning /
information, meta data, etc.) Storage backup Storage backup
4 User authentication Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 Enable Sim56-2 Service
Account management
5 Japanese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
6 Chinese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
7 JOB LOG Not available Available Enable Perform with Disable —
WEB PAGE.
8 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
9 New N/A (FSS) information Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
10 User font (Added) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
11 User macro Not available Available Disable Not available Enable WEB PAGE. or User
12 Document filing Not available Available Enable Perform with Enable
WEB PAGE.
13 Some of system setting Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
data Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
14 Watermark Available Available Disable *2 Enable Sim49-5 Service
15 Mirroring information (When Not available Available Disable Not available Enable The mirroring Service
the mirroring kit is installed, (After installation information is
the mirroring information is of the mirroring erased by
written.) kit) forcible build or
RIB BUSTER.
16 Individual setting Not available Available Disable Disable Service
information for direct WEB
browsing
17 Cookie file for OSA Not available Available Disable Disable Service
application
18 eOSA application file Not available Installation of Disable Enable Reinstallation of Service
application application
19 User file saved in the SMB Not available Available Disable Disable Service
server (NAS)

*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-3 and USB memory.
*2: Watermark data cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-5 and USB memory.

VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 4


(2) Replacement procedures when HDD data can be (3) Replacement procedures when the HDD storage
backed up data cannot be backed up due to breakdown
a. Work contents and procedures a. Display when HDD breakdown
When a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03
When a new HDD
is appears.
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD
is normal but a program model) is used * must be replaced.
error occurs in it is used.
b. Work contents and procedures
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement.
(Servicing) When a new HDD
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup (blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same
memory.) is normal but a program model) is used *
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 error occurs in it is used.
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
Step 1 Install a HDD to the machine, Install a HDD to the
authentication data))
and boot the complex machine. machine, and boot the
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User Formatting is automatically complex machine.
or servicing). performed.
Back up the data to PC with Web page.
Step 2 The trouble code, U2-05,
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 7, 10, 14
is displayed. Cancel
(Document filing data, JOB LOG data))
with SIM16.
Step 3 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use
Step 3 Since a blank HDD is Use Sim62-1 to format
SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to
automatically formatted, there the HDD.
the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file
is no need to perform
type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup
formatting procedure with SIM.
data are given to the user.)
Step 4 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use
Step 4 Replace the HDD.
SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to
Step 5 Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file
Formatting is automatically machine. type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup
performed. data are given to the user.)
Step 6 The trouble code, U2-05, Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The
is displayed. Cancel memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
with SIM16. the HDD data and the image related memory and to
Step 7 Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
automatically formatted, there the HDD. only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet
is no need to perform Fax models.)
formatting procedure with SIM. Step 6 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
Step 8 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The Step 7 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed. Use SIM49-5 to
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between install the watermark data to the HDD. After booting the
the HDD data and the image related memory and to machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
Fax models.) shipping.
Step 9 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
Step 10 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed. Use SIM49-5 to
install the watermark data to the HDD. After booting the
machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
Step 11 Import the data backed up in Step 1.
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup
to import.
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
authentication data))
Step 12 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in
Step 2.Import enable data: Document filing data, User font,
Use macro
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
imported.)

VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 5


(4) Reinstall and update procedures of the HDD (5) Watermark data reinstall and update procedures
storage Operation Manual data 1) Obtain the watermark data.
1) Obtain the Operation Manual data. Download the watermark data from the utility menu on the web
Download the Operation Manual data (**.uar) from the utility site (Tech-DS home page).
menu on the web site (Tech-DS home page). Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing
Copy the downloaded file to the USB device without changing the file hierarchy.
the file hierarchy. Note:
2) Enter the SIM49-3 mode. When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if
there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are
compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which
satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 12 &/26(
- The file size is different.
(0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@ - The time stamp is different
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
- The file exists only in the USB memory.
),/( ',5!)2/'(5

',5!0$18$/ 2) Enter the SIM49-5 mode.


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
:$7(50$5.83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5

',5!:0

 

3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.


- When the USB memory is not inserted, “INSERT A STOR-
AGE E-MANUAL STORED ON” is displayed. When [OK] but-
ton is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu 1.  

4) Select the file of the Operation Manual data. (The screen shifts
to the Operation Manual data install menu.)
3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.
The current version and the update version are displayed. - When the USB memory is not inserted, “INSERT A STOR-
5) Press [EXECUTE] button. AGE E-MANUAL STORED ON” is displayed. When [OK] but-
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons ton is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu 1.
are changed from gray-out to active display. 4) Select the folder of the watermark data. (The screen shifts to
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected Operation Manual the watermark data install menu.)
is installed. The current version and the update version are displayed.
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case 5) Press [EXECUTE] button.
of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
are changed from gray-out to active display.
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected watermark data
are installed.
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case
of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.

VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 6


C. Procedures necessary for SD card replacement
(1) SD card data and backup
Some SD card storage data can be backed up, and some other cannot. Some SD card storage data can be reinstalled, and some other cannot.
If the SD card operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the SD card referring
to the storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the SD card.
The SD card includes the following data.
SD card backup

Partition Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Data reinstall


Stored data Backup means
number of data backup of data reinstall procedures
L-101 ICU firmware data ICU firmware (Boot/Main) Disable Enable SIM49-1
ARM9 firmware (BOOT cannot be
installed again.)
I-101 FAX reception data FAX/Internet Fax reception image Enable SIM66-62 Disable
data

1) Use SIM56-2 to backup the SD card data to the USB memory.


2) When the operation panel home screen has been customized, Important:
backup the SD card data by using the device cloning function. When replacing the SD card, be sure to use only the specified SD
3) When there are some FAX/Internet Fax data received, use card supplied as a service part.
SIM66-62 to backup the image data to the USB memory in the The firmware required for booting must be included in the SD
PDF file type, and give the PDF file to the user. (The data can- card used in this machine. The commercially available SD
not be restored to the machine.) cards have no such data.
4) Replace the SD card with a new one.
5) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. Note:
6) Use SIM66-10 to clear the image send memory. (This is in When U2-40 error occurs, if the error cannot be canceled by
order to obtain consistency between the HDD data and the SIM16, or when E7-07 error occurs, there may be some trouble in
image related memory.) the SD card.
7) Use SIM56-2 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).
Important:
8) Restore the data backed up in procedure 2) by using the
device cloning function. The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installed to another
machine. If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a
trouble may be generated.

D. Procedures necessary for CF card replacement


(1) CF card data and backup
Some CF card storage data can be backed up, and some other cannot. Some CF card storage data can be reinstalled, and some other cannot.
If the CF card operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the CF card referring
to the storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the CF card.
The CF card includes the following data.
CF card backup

Partition Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Data reinstall


Stored data Backup means
number of data backup of data reinstall procedures
L-101 ICU firmware data ICU firmware (Boot/Main) Disable Enable SIM49-1
ARM9 firmware (BOOT cannot be
installed again.)
S201 ICU firmware fixed data font Disable Enable SIM49-1
web help
spdl
UI content file
lang (message data)
Graph (graphic data)
eOSA delegator
Option font ROM
S-203 System data Setting value data (system setting/ Enable SIM56-2 Enable SIM56-2
SIM setting data)

1) Use SIM56-2 to backup the CF card data to the USB memory.


2) When the operation panel home screen has been customized, Important:
backup the CF card data by using the device cloning function. When replacing the CF card, be sure to use only the specified CF
3) Replace the CF card with a new one. card supplied as a service part.
4) Update the firmware to the latest version. The firmware required for booting must be included in the CF
card used in this machine. The commercially available CF
5) Use SIM56-2 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).
cards have no such data.
6) Restore the data backed up in procedure 2) by using the
device cloning function. Note:
When E7-A6 error occurs, there may be some trouble in the CF
card.

VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 7


3. Necessary procedure and notes for replacement of the mirroring kit HDD
NOTE:
Terminology and contents
Mirroring information: When the mirroring kit is installed and the power is turned ON, the mirroring information is written into the L-2 partition of
the both HDD's.
Rebuilding: Copying operation of the whole contents of one HDD to the other HDD.
Forcible rebuilding: Erasing the mirroring information in the HDD and rewriting new information.
When the mirroring kit is installed, the two HDD's are named HDD1 and HDD2.
HDD1: Mirroring kit HDD
HDD2: Standard HDD for the machine
The status of each HDD can be checked with SIM62-20.
Outline / Description Items
Kinds of errors and remedies A. Causes and remedies when the icon of HDD trouble is displayed
B. Causes and remedies when the E7-03 error display is popped up
Specified remedies for each error C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the mirroring kit or that of the machine
(Details of remedies and procedures) D. Replacement procedures of both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the machine
E. Note for reuse of HDD

Mirroring kit status and status icons


When the mirroring kit is installed, one of the following icons is displayed on the operation panel.

Icon Mirroring kit status

Mirroring kit installed

Mirroring kit/HDD trouble

Mirroring kit/Rebuilding

A. Causes and remedies when the icon of HDD trouble is displayed


(When the icon shown below is displ

Display screen

1) When one HDD goes into trouble, the UI icon which indicates HDD trouble of the mirroring kit is displayed.
2) Use SIM62-20 to check the HDD status, and refer to the table below to confirm the relation between the HDD status and the remedy.
SIM62-20 status and causes of troubles (When the icon of HDD trouble is displayed)

HDD2
OK NONE REBUILDING ERROR TROUBLE
HDD1 OK - A - A A
NONE A - - - -
REBUILDING - - - - -
ERROR A - - - -
TROUBLE A - - - -

3) Refer to the table below and check to confirm the remedy.


Table: Causes of troubles and remedies when the icon of HDD trouble is displayed

Case State Cause Remedy


A One HDD status is OK. * The HDD which indicates the status other than * Replace the HDD. (Perform "C. Replacement procedures of the
The other HDD status is other OK is in trouble. HDD of the mirroring kit or that of the machine")
than OK. * Connection failure of the connectors and * Replace the mirroring kit. (Perform "C. Replacement procedures
harness of the mirroring kit of the HDD of the mirroring kit or that of the machine")

4) Refer to the details of the remedy and perform the necessary procedures.

VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 8


B. Causes and remedies when the E7-03 error display is displayed
1) Use SIM62-20 to check the HDD status, and refer to the table below to confirm the relation between the HDD status and the remedy.
Refer to the table of "Causes of troubles and remedies when the E7-03 error occurs" and perform the necessary procedures.
Backup the data from the HDD without trouble first.
SIM62-20 status and causes of troubles

HDD2
OK NONE REBUILDING ERROR TROUBLE
HDD1 OK B B or C B B B
NONE B or C C C C C
REBUILDING B C F F F
ERROR B C F F F
TROUBLE B C F F D or E

2) Refer to the table below, and check to confirm the remedy.


Causes of troubles and remedies when the E7-03 error occurs

Case State Cause Remedy


B When at least one HDD is * Communication trouble through the SATA * Replace the cable. Remove and connect.
OK. harness of HDD. * Replace the HDD which indicates other than OK. (Perform
* Trouble of HDD which indicates the status procedures of "C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the
other than OK. mirroring kit or that of the machine.")
* Broken data in HDD * Replace both of the HDD’s of the mirroring kit and that of the
* The mirroring side HDD is normal. The machine. (Perform procedures of "D. Replacement procedures of
machine side HDD is in trouble or rebuild both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the machine.")
operation is not completed.
* RAID PWB trouble
C When at least one HDD is * Communication trouble through the SATA * Replace the cable. Remove and connect.
NONE. harness of HDD. * Check connection between the mirroring kit and the HDD.
* Connection failure between the RAID PWB * Replace the HDD which indicates NONE. (Perform procedures of
and the HDD. "C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the mirroring kit or
* HDD trouble that of the machine.")
* HDD SATA harness and connector trouble * Replace the mirroring kit. (Perform procedures of
* Both the mirroring side HDD and the machine "C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the mirroring kit or
side HDD are in trouble. that of the machine.")
* RAID PWB trouble * Replace both of the HDD’s of the mirroring kit and that of the
machine. (Perform procedures of "D. Replacement procedures of
both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the machine.")
D When in TROUBLE- * RAID PWB trouble * Replace the mirroring kit. (Perform procedures of
TROUBLE. * (Both or one) HDD trouble "C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the mirroring kit or
* Raid PWB is in trouble. The mirroring side that of the machine.")
HDD is normal. The machine side HDD is * Replace both of the HDD’s of the mirroring kit and that of the
other than OK. machine. (Perform procedures of "D. Replacement procedures of
both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the machine.")
E When in TROUBLE- * The mirroring kit is composed of HDD's which * Replace both of the HDD’s of the mirroring kit and that of the
TROUBLE. (Occurring when have different mirroring information each other. machine. (Perform procedures of "D. Replacement procedures of
replacing the HDD) (A HDD which has been used in the mirroring both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the machine.")
kit of another machine is used.)

3) Refer to the details of the remedy and perform the necessary procedures.
Causes and remedies when cases B, C, D, and E are not applicable

Case State Cause Remedy


F Other than cases B, C, D, * RAID PWB trouble * Replace the mirroring kit. (Perform procedures of
and E * Both HDD's trouble "C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the mirroring kit or
that of the machine.")
* Replace both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the
machine. (Perform procedures of "D. Replacement procedures of
both of the HDD of the mirroring kit and that of the machine.")

VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 9


C. Replacement procedures of the HDD of the D. Replacement procedures of both of the HDD of
mirroring kit or that of the machine the mirroring kit and that of the machine
(Details of the remedies and the procedures) (Details of the remedies and the procedures)
* When replacing the mirroring kit, follow the replacement proce- (1) Work contents and procedures
dures of the HDD of the mirroring kit only.
Data backup
(1) Work contents and procedures
Step 1 When there is some received data of FAX and Internet FAX,
Data backup use SIM66-62 to back up the image data from the SD card
NOTE: to a USB memory. (The backed up image data are in the
When E7-03 error code is displayed, procedures of Step 1 and PDF file type and cannot be returned to the machine.) Give
the backed up data to the use.
Step 2 are nor required.

Step 1 Back up the data in the HDD before replacement. (By HDD replacement procedures
servicing) Procedure Procedure
Use SIM56-2, the device cloning, or the storage backup Condition When two new HDD's (blank)(*1) (service part) are used for
function to save the data. (Back up the data to the PC or a the both.
USB memory.)
Step 2 Replace the both HDD's (as well as the RAID PWB if
(Data which can be backed up: Address book data, image
necessary). (*2)
send registration data, user authentication data)
Step 3
Step 2 Back up the data in the HDD before replacement. (By the
Set DIPSW2 of the mirroring kit
user or by servicing)
to ON, and turn on the main
Back up the data to the PC by Web page.
power of the machine.
(Data which can be backed up: Document filing data, JOB
→ Forcible rebuilding is
log data)
executed.
Step 3 When there is some received data of FAX and Internet FAX, → Check to confirm that the
use SIM66-62 to back up the image data from the SD card E7-03 error (HDD trouble) does
to a USB memory. (The backed up image data are in the not occur and that the UI icon which indicates installation of
PDF file type and cannot be returned to the machine.) Give the mirroring kit is displayed. Use SIM62-20 to confirm that
the backed up data to the use. the HDD status is displayed as HDD1/HDD2=OK/OK.
Step 4
HDD replacement procedures
Turn OFF the main power of
Procedure Procedure the machine, and set DIPSW2
Condition When a new HDD (blank)(*1) (service part) is used. to OFF. Then, turn ON the main
Step 4 If HDD1 is in trouble, replace the HDD of the mirroring kit. If power of the machine again.
HDD2 is in trouble, replace the HDD of the machine. (*2)
Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory
Step 5 Boot the machine. is cleared in order to ensure consistency between the HDD
→ Rebuilding is automatically executed. data and the image memory and to prevent against
→ Check to confirm that E7-03 error (HDD trouble) does not malfunctions. (Not only the FAX model, but also the scanner
occur, and that the UI icon which indicates rebuilding of the and the Internet FAX models require memory clearing.)
mirroring kit is displayed. Use SIM 62-20 to confirm that the
Step 6 Use SIM49-3 to install the e-Operation Manual data to the
status of the replaced HDD is displayed as REBUILDING.
HDD.
Step 6 It takes about one hour to complete rebuilding.
Step 7 The trouble code "U2-60" is displayed.
Step 7 Check to confirm that the UI icon which indicated installation → Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data to the HDD.
of the mirroring unit is displayed. Use SIM62-20 to confirm → Use SIM16 to cancel the U2-60 error.
that the HDD status is displayed as HDD1/HDD2=OK/OK.
E. Note for reuse of HDD
When replacing the HDD for the mirroring kit, be sure to use a new
HDD.
If a HDD which has been used in a mirroring kit is used for replac-
ing the HDD, the operations and the data cannot be assured.
If a HDD which has been used in a mirroring kit is installed, the
original data may be erased.
If, however, the mirroring information of the HDD is erased by RIB
Buster as described later, it can be used. (*1) In addition, if the both
HDD's are replaced with HDD's which have been used, SIIM62-1
must be executed to format HDD's in addition to erasing the mirror-
ing information.
When removing the HDD after installing the mirroring kit, be sure to
remove the both HDD's together.
If only one HDD is removed then it is reinstalled, the data of both
HDD's may not be identical, causing an error.
When removing the HDD and performing some work, first discon-
nect the HDD SATA connector of the MFP PWB and perform the
work.
With the above procedure, the both HDD's are brought into the sta-
tus disconnected from the machine.
Put mark on the mirroring kit HDD and the machine HDD to indi-
cate that they have been used. (*2)
*1: Refer to "5-C. Deleting the HDD mirroring information."
*2: Refer to "5-B. How to check the usage history of a HDD in a
mirroring kit."

VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 10


4. Note for installing and repairing the mirroring kit
When installing or repairing the mirroring kit, fully understand the following descriptions to avoid erroneous handling and procedures. When a
HDD which has once been used for the mirroring kit is reused without proper preparation, it may cause an error and destruction of user data, or
other troubles.
The following three cases must be strictly avoided.
- When newly installing a mirroring kit, do not use one which has been previously used.
- When replacing the HDD because of a HDD trouble, do not replace it with a HDD which has been previously used in a mirroring kit.
- When replacing the HDD because of a HDD trouble in the machine, do not replace it with a HDD which has been previously used in a
mirroring kit.

NOTE:
When a HDD is once used in a mirroring kit, the mirroring information is written into the HDD. This causes a trouble by erroneous using.

The details of inhibited items, results of erroneous procedures, and precautions for avoiding those errors are described below.

A. Details of inhibited items


(1) When newly installing a mirroring kit, do not use one which has been previously used.
Trouble contents
If HDD1 which has been previously used is used for new installation of a mirroring kit, the data in HDD1 will be written into HDD2. This causes
erasure of the original user data, freeze of the machine, or other troubles. The "HDD which has been previously used" includes a HDD which
was just installed and connected only.

Before installation of the mirroring kit Rebuild

Mirroring kit which has been once used


MFP control RAID PWB
PWB MFP control RAID
PWB controller

Data
User data overwriting
Rebuild start during
rebuilding

No mirroring Mirroring Mirroring


information information A information A

HDD1 HDD2
HDD
Mirroring kit side Machine side
Machine side

Approx. after 1 hour

Installation of a mirroring kit which has been once used


Rebuild complete o The HDD1 data is overwritten into the user data
Mirroring kit which has been once used area of HDD2.
RAID PWB Mirroring kit which has been once used
MFP control RAID RAID PWB
PWB controller MFP control RAID
PWB controller

User data

Mirroring No mirroring
information A information Mirroring Mirroring
information A information A
HDD1 HDD2 HDD1 HDD2
Mirroring kit side Machine side Mirroring kit side Machine side

Boot o The mirroring information is written.

Since HDD1 acts as the master, the HDD1


Mirroring kit which has been once used
data is overwritten into HDD2, erasing the
RAID PWB
MFP control user data of HDD2.
PWB RAID
controller

Since the mirroring User


information area in data
HDD2 is empty, the write
mirroring information is
Mirroring Mirroring
written into it. information A information A

HDD1 HDD2
Mirroring kit side Machine side

Countermeasures
Use a new mirroring kit for installation.
If there is no choice but to use a mirroring kit which has been previously used, be sure to erase the mirroring information in the HDD before
installation. (For details, refer to "5-C. Deleting the HDD mirroring information.")

VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 11


(2) When replacing the HDD in case of a trouble in the HDD, do not use a HDD which has been used in another
mirroring kit of another machine.
Trouble contents
If a HDD which has been used in another mirroring kit, the RAID controller cannot recognize the HDD, causing E7-03 error, and the necessary
data may be destroyed in some cases.

A HDD which has been used in a


HDD trouble mirroring kit is installed.
Mirroring kit
Mirroring kit RAID PWB
RAID PWB
MFP control RAID
MFP control RAID PWB controller
PWB controller

User data User data


Used
User data
Trouble
Mirroring Mirroring
Mirroring Mirroring information X information A
information A information A

HDD1 HDD2 HDD1 HDD2


Mirroring kit side Machine side Mirroring kit side Machine side

Removing the HDD in trouble The RAID controller cannot recognize both HDD's.

Mirroring kit Mirroring kit


RAID PWB RAID PWB

MFP control MFP control RAID


RAID
PWB controller PWB controller

??????
Remove.

User data
User data User data
Trouble
Mirroring Mirroring Mirroring Mirroring
information A information A information X information A
HDD1 HDD2
HDD1 HDD2
Mirroring kit side Machine side
Mirroring kit side Machine side

Since the mirroring information of both HDD's


does not synchronize each other, the RAID
controller cannot recognize both HDD's.
oE7-03 error occurs.
The user data may be erased and the machine
may freeze in some cases.

Countermeasures
Use a new mirroring kit for installation.
If there is no choice but to use a mirroring kit which has been once used, be sure to erase the mirroring information in the HDD before installa-
tion. (For details, refer to "5-C. Deleting the HDD mirroring information.")

VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 12


(3) When the HDD is replaced because of a HDD trouble, do not use a HDD which has been used in a mirroring kit of
another machine.
Trouble contents
In the case of a machine produced before March/2011
If a HDD which has been used in another mirroring kit is installed, the operation and the data safety cannot be assured. If a HDD which has
been used in another mirroring kit is installed, the original data may be erased.
Support from production of May/2011.
E7-A5 error occurs. If a HDD which has been used in a mirroring kit is used as the machine HDD, the machine does not operate normally.
In this case, the trouble of erasing the original data is avoided.

Remove the mirroring kit from the machine.

Mirroring kit
RAID PWB
MFP control RAID
PWB controller

Remove. User data User data

Mirroring Mirroring
information A information A
HDD1 HDD2
Mirroring kit side MFP main unit side

Boot o The error message is displayed.

MFP control
PWB

User data
E7-A5 error occurs.
Mirroring The machine cannot be operat ed.
information A

HDD
MFP main unit side

Countermeasures
Use a new mirroring kit for installation.
If there is no choice but to use a mirroring kit which has been once used, be sure to erase the mirroring information in the HDD before installa-
tion. (For details, refer to "5-C. Deleting the HDD mirroring information.")
When a HDD is used without any other HDD, the mirroring information must be erased before executing SIM62-1 to format.
This procedure allows the HDD being treated as a new HDD.
When removing the HDD after installation of the mirroring kit, remove both HDD's simultaneously. If only one HDD is removed and then
installed again, the data of both HDD's may not match, causing a trouble.
[Simultaneous removal of both HDD's] Disconnect the HDD SATA connector of the MFP PWB, and both HDD's are brought into disconnected
state from the machine.

VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 13


B. How to check the usage history of a HDD in a When removing or attaching a HDD to the HDD case, be sure
mirroring kit to disconnect the USB cable from the PC in advance.
As stated before, when installing a mirroring kit or replacing a HDD, If this precaution is ignored, the HDD may be damaged.
be sure to check the usage history of a HDD or a mirroring kit which 2) Copy the RIB Buster software files (RIB Buster {YYYYM-
is to be used. MDD}.exe and Setup.ini) to a same directory of the PC.
For convenience of checking the usage history, put a mark on the * RIB Buster{YYYYMMDD}.exe
mirroring kit HDD and the machine HDD when installing them to * Setup.ini
indicate that they have been used. 3) Connect the PC and the USB HDD case unit assembled in
procedure 1) with the USB cable.

4) Double-click RIB Buster {YYYYMMDD}.exe to boot the RIB


C. Deleting the HDD mirroring information Buster software.
Be deleting the HDD mirroring information, the HDD can be used If the user account control is ON in VISTA or Windows 7 set-
under the mirroring kit environment. ting, the user account control menu is displayed. Click [Allow]
on this menu.
(1) Necessary tools
* RIB Buster software
The software is composed of the following two files. (They can be
downloaded from Tech DS Web site.)
* RIB Buster{YYYYMMDD}.exe
* Setup.ini
* Commercially available USB HDD case unit (SATA support)

5) Select the target HDD to delete the mirroring information.

* USB cable
* Windows PC
(Support OS: Windows XP, Windows VISTA, Windows 7 (32/
64bit)
(2) Procedures
1) Assemble the HDD (the mirroring information of which is to be
deleted) to the USB HDD case unit (SATA support), and con-
nect the USB cable.

IMPORTANT:

VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 14


6) Click [Clear RIB in HDD] button. Phenomenon 2
The mirroring information has not been deleted normally.

Cause Temporary communication trouble, cable or other


device trouble, HDD trouble
Countermeasures 1. Click [Clear RIB in HDD] button again.
2. If the trouble is not solved by procedure 1. ,
disconnect and connect the cable, change the
devices, and reboot the RIB Buster. Then execute
procedure 1. .

7) Click [OK] button. (The mirroring information is deleted.)

8) After completion of deleting the mirroring information, "OK" is


displayed.

Phenomenon 3
Though the target HDD is connected, it is not displayed.

Cause The target HDD is not registered in the Setup.ini file.


Cable or other device trouble, HDD trouble
Countermeasures 1. Reboot RIB Buster, and click the frame section.
2. If the trouble is not solved by procedure 1. , replace
the Setup. ini file and the RIB Buster {YYYYMMDD}
with the latest version, and execute procedure 1. .
3. If the trouble is not solved by procedure 2. ,
disconnect and connect the cable, change the
(3) Kinds of errors, causes and remedies devices, and reboot the RIB Buster. Then execute
Phenomenon 1 procedure 1. .
An error indicating an abnormality in the Setup.ini file when booting
the RIB Buster software.

Cause Setup.ini file does not exists, or there is any


abnormality in the file.
Countermeasures Check to confirm that there is Setup.ini file in the
proper directory and that there is no abnormality in
the descriptions.

VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 15


[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE Service Manual

1. General
The following functions are available on the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
Menu/Item Function and content
Menu/Item Function and content
User Control 2 Used to set the Pages Limit Group and the
Password Setting Used to set the password to enter the Hidden
Favorite Operation Group by authority of the
Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
serviceman. (Select among preset items.)
Output of Test Page Used to print out the test page (system setting
Job Save Job Log Used to save the Job Log.
contents).
Log View Job Log Used to display the Job Log.
Font/Form Download Used to download Font/Form.
Font/Form of PCL and PostScript, macro, and Update of Firmware Used to update the firmware version.
other resources are downloaded to the HDD Syslog Administration Used to set the Log Type. (Set to the default.)
and controlled. (PS, PCL5 only) *1 Settings
Device Cloning Used to import/export the system setting Storage/Send Keep all the items selected.
information in XML format. By importing the Settings
export file to the other device, the setting values Save/ Delete Used to save or delete the log data.
and setting contents of the device can be Syslog
copied to another device. This function is useful View Syslog Used to display the log data.
to set the same setting to two or more machines
efficiently. *1: This may be useful for troubleshooting when a trouble occurs.
Filing Data Backup Used to import/export the document filing data When submission of the log data file is requested in order to
in the unit of folder. troubleshoot, use the log file save mode to export the log data
User Control Used to shift to the user mode. After log in, the file to the client PC.
screen is shifted to the setting screen of user
management.

2. Details and operation procedures


A. Procedures to enter the Hidden Web page B. Password Setting
exclusively used for the serviceman
1) Boot a browser program.
2) Enter the specified
URL (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/service_login.html) and enter the
servicing page menu. MX-XXXX

Default password: "service"

MX-XXXX

* The password can be optionally changed in the following proce-


dures.
1) Enter a new password.
2) Enter the new password again to make confirmation.
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button.

NOTE: The password can be optionally changed in the Password


Setting menu.

SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 1


C. Output of Test Page E. Device Cloning

MX-XXXX MX-XXXX

1) Click "Print" button of an item or report to be printed.


When there is a list of items for selection, select one of the
items in the pull-down menu list, and click "Print" button.
The list is printed out. (1) Export
D. Font/Form Download 1) Select an item to be backed up.
2) Click "Execute" button.
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file.
(File name: *****.bin)
When the password is set, the set password must be entered
MX-XXXX
when importing.
(2) Import
1) Import from a file: Click "Refer" button to select the back-up
file. (File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button to execute import.
If the password is set when exporting, the password must be
entered.
3) Reboot the machine.

F. Filing Data Backup

(1) Download of Font, Form, and Macro


1) Select "Resource Type" from the pull-down menu list. MX-XXXX

(Example: PCL/PostScript Font/Form or Macro)


2) Click "Refer" button to select a target file.
3) Click "Download" button.
4) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
The file is downloaded to the HDD.
The list of the downloaded files and the use percentage of the
HDD are displayed.
(2) Delete of downloaded font
(Procedures to delete a file separately)
1) Select a file to be deleted from the list of the downloaded files,
and click "Delete" button.
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press (1) Export
Yes key. 1) Select the folder to be backed up.
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button. The list display conditions can be specified by changing the
The file in the HDD is deleted. index and the number of display items on the pull-down menu.
2) Click "Execute" button.
(3) Procedures to delete all the files at a time
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (File
1) Click "Initialize" button. name: *****.bin)
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press 3) Click "Update" button.
OK key.
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button. (2) Import
1) Click "Refer" button to select a target file. (File name: *****.bin)
NOTE: By the Write-Protect Setting function, the downloaded files
can be set to write protect. 2) Click "Execute" button.
The target file is imported.
3) Click "Update" button.

SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 2


G. User Control (2) View Job Log

MX-XXXX MX-XXXX

1) Enter the password to log in.


Default Password: admin
The screen is shifted to the setting menu of user management.

H. User Control 2

MX-XXXX

1) Select a Jog Log item to be displayed. (In the default setting,


all the items are selected. Remove check marks of the items
which are not to be displayed.)
2) Click "Show" (display) button.
The Jog Log is displayed.
1) Select the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation
Group. (The Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation
Group must be set in advance.) J. Update of Firmware
(Example of use)
The use sets the conditions for servicing work by using the
Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group functions
in advance, and the serviceman selects the set conditions in MX-XXXX
this mode for servicing work.

I. Job Log
(1) Save Job Log

MX-XXXX

1) Click "Refer" button to select a firmware file.


2) After selecting a firmware file, click "Execute" button.
The firmware data are sent to the machine, and update of the
firmware is processed.
During the process, the message of "Firmware Update, now pro-
cessing..." is displayed.

1) Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the Job
Log to save it.

SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 3


K. Syslog (2) Storage/Send Settings
There are following functions in the Syslog mode. Keep all the items selected.
This function is provided to acquire the detailed Syslog to trouble-
shoot when a trouble occurs.
When submission of the log data file is requested for troubleshoot-
ing, use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the cli- MX-XXXX

ent PC.

Syslog Administration Settings Log Type Setting (Set to the default.)


Storage/Send Settings Set all the items selected.
Save/ Delete Syslog Log data save, delete
View Syslog Log data display

MX-XXXX

(3) Save/ Delete Syslog

MX-XXXX

(1) Administration Settings/ Log Type Setting


Set to the default.

MX-XXXX

When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the save
position and save it.
When deleting, click "Delete" button.
Check to confirm that the confirmation message is displayed, and
press OK key.
(4) View Syslog

MX-XXXX

1) Select a Syslog item to be displayed.


2) Click "Show" button.
The Syslog is displayed.

SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 4


L. Machine ID Setting

MX-XXXX

1) Enter the machine ID.


Max. 30 digits of numeral figures and characters can be
entered.
2) Press the registration button.
NOTE: The machine ID can be set with SIM26-7 as well as this
function.

M. Administration Settings (Menu display setting)


This setting is to select whether to display all the menus of Web
Page on the machine display or to display only the restricted sys-
tem setting menu of the default.
Setting must be executed according to the user request.
1) Press the setting execution button corresponding to the dis-
play mode.

MX-XXXX

SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 5


[13] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS Service Manual

1. Operation panel section


A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram

2 OCSW

1
4

6
PWRSW

7
8

Signal name Name Function/Operation


OCSW Document size detection trigger sensor Generates the document size detection trigger signal.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Turns ON/OFF the power on the secondary side.

No. Name Function/Operation


1 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal. / Controls the touch panel.
2 Document size detection PWB (Light emitting) Drives the LED for the document size detection.
3 Document size detection PWB (Light receiving) Outputs the document size detection signal.
4 USB I/F PWB USB Interface
5 KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
6 KEY PWB 2 Outputs the key operation signal.
7 Touch panel Touch panel
8 LCD LCD

B. Operational descriptions
The operation panel unit is composed of the LCD unit, the LVDS PWB, the USB I/F PWB, and the KEY PWB. It displays the machine operation.
It is provided with the USB I/F which is used for the firmware update, USB print, and Scan to USB.
In addition, the USB I/F line is provided inside the operation panel to connect with the keyboard and the IC card reader.

A document size is detected by the document size detection PWB (light emitting) and the document size detection PWB (light receiving).
The detection timing of document size is determined according to the document size detection trigger sensor signal.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 1
2. DSPF section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
(1) Paper feed section

SPUFM

SPFC
SCOV

SPPD1 SPED1
SLUM
2 STUD 4
SPRDMD

SPED2

STLD
1 SPLS1
3
SPWS SPLS2

Signal name Name Function/Operation


SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the upper door.
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor Lifts up or moves down the document feed tray.
SPED1 DSPF document empty sensor Detects document empty in the document feed tray.
SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor Detects document empty in the document feed tray.
SPFC DSPF document feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the rollers in the document feed section.
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1 Detects pass of the document.
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor Detects the document size in random document feed.
SPUFM DSPF document feed motor Drives the rollers and transport rollers in the document feed section.
SPWS DSPF document width sensor Detects the document width of the document feed tray upper.
STLD DSPF document feed tray lower limit sensor Detects the lower limit of the document feed tray.
STUD DSPF document feed tray upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the document feed tray.

No. Name Function/ Operation


1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the document feed roller.
2 Document feed roller Performs the document feed operation of documents.
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double-feed.
4 Torque limiter A fixed level of resistance is always provided for rotation of the separation roller to prevent double feed.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 2
(2) Upper transport section

SPUFM

STRC

STRRC
SPPD2

Signal name Name Function/Operation


SPPD2 DSPF document pass sensor 2 Detects pass of the document.
SPUFM DSPF document feed motor Drives the rollers, transport rollers and transport rollers in the document feed section.
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 1.
STRRC DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 1 registration roller.

No. Name Function/ Operation


1 No. 1 registration roller (Drive) (DSPF) Provides deflection between the paper feed roller and this roller to correct the document skew.
2 Transport roller 1 (Drive) (DSPF) Transports document from No. 1 registration roller to No. 2 registration roller.

(3) Lower transport section

SPUFM

SRRC

SPPD3

SPPD5
SPPD4
1

2
3

Signal name Name Function/Operation


SPUFM DSPF transport motor Drives the transport roller.
SPPD3 DSPF document pass sensor 3 Detects pass of the document.
SPPD4 DSPF document pass sensor 4 Detects pass of the document.
SPPD5 DSPF document pass sensor 5 Detects pass of the document.
SRRC DSPF No.2 registration roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 2 registration roller.

No. Name Function/ Operation


1 No. 2 registration roller (Drive) (DSPF) Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts the document scanning timing.
2 Transport roller 2 (Drive) (DSPF) Transports document from the No. 1 scan section to the No. 2 scan section.
3 Transport roller 3 (Drive) (DSPF) Transports document from the transport roller 2 to the document exit roller.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 3
(4) Optical section

DSPF COPY LAMP

Signal name Name Function/Operation


DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF copy lamp Radiates light onto a document to allow the CCD to scan document images.

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Reflector Converges lights from the copy lamp.
2 Mirror Sends the document image to the lens.
3 Lens Reduces the document image (light) and reflects it onto the CCD.
4 DSPF CCD PWB Scans the document image (optical signals) and converts it into electrical signals.

(5) Paper exit section

SPOM

SPOD

STMPS

Signal name Name Function/Operation


SPOD DSPF document exit sensor Detects document exit of the document.
SPOM DSPF document exit motor Drives the document exit roller.
STMPS Stamp solenoid Drives the stamp solenoid.

No. Name Function/ Operation


1 Paper exit roller (Drive) (DSPF) Discharges document.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 4
B. Operational descriptions
(1) Document size detection
Size detection on the document tray
The document size is detected by the DSPF document width sen-
sor (SPWS), and the document length is detected by the DSPF
document length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is
SPWS
judged from the document width and the document length as
shown in the table below. SPLS1
When, however, documents of different sizes are mixed and set on
the document tray, the largest size is detected. SPLS2

Document length sensor


Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF
B5 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
B5R ON OFF
A4R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
B4 ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
8.5" x 13.5" ON ON
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON

(2) Timing chart


To increase the document replacement speed, pre-feed of the second and the later documents is performed for documents of A4/Letter or
smaller sizes. Therefore, a clutch is provided for each transport roller to perform individual control.

6FDQWUDQVSRUWVSHHGGSLࠉOHWWHUVLQJOHWUDQVSRUW

63)0
'63)WUDQVSRUWPRWRU

6320
'63)GRFXPHQWH[LWPRWRU

63)&
'63)GRFXPHQWIHHGFOXWFK 

6755&
'63)1RUHJLVWUDWLRQ
UROOHUFOXWFK 
675&
'63)WUDQVSRUWUROOHUFOXWFK

655&
'63)1RUHJLVWUDWLRQ 
UROOHUFOXWFK
635'0'
'63)GRFXPHQWUDQGRPVHQVRU
633'
'63)GRFXPHQWSDVVVHQVRU
633'
'63)GRFXPHQWSDVVVHQVRU
633'
'63)GRFXPHQWSDVVVHQVRU
633'
'63)GRFXPHQWSDVVVHQVRU
633'
'63)GRFXPHQWSDVVVHQVRU
632'
'63)GRFXPHQWH[LWVHQVRU

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 5
3. Scanner section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

MHPS

5 3 9
MIM
7 8

6
3
1
2

CLI 4

Signal name Name Function/Operation


CLFM Scanner cooling fan Cools the scanner unit.
CLI Scanner lamp Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit.
MIM Scanner motor Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.

No. Name Function/Operation


1 CCD PWB Scans document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal.
2 SCU PWB Controls the scanner and the operation section.
3 Scanner lamp drive PWB Drives the scanner lamp.
4 Lens Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD.
5 No. 1 mirror Reflects the document image into the lens.
6 No. 2 mirror
7 No. 3 mirror
8 Reflector Converges scanner lamp lights to radiate onto the document.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 6
B. Operational descriptions
(1) Outline
This section performs the following functions.
1) Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the
B
G
contrast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of
R
three lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (ana-
log).
2) The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital sig-
nals by the A/D converter.
3) The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process sec-
tion (scanner control PWB).
(2) Detail description
a. Optical section drive R
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner G
motor (MIM) to the drive pulley and the wire through the belt, to
B
drive the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by
the drive wires.
(Image data for 1 line)
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
b. Scanner lamp drive
The scanner lamp (CLI) is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage R G B
generated in the CL inverter PWB according to the control signal Red component Green component Blue component
sent from the scanner control PWB. image data image data image data

c. Image scan/color separation


d. Image signal A/D conversion
Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the con-
trast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of three 1) The image signal (analog) for each of R, G, and B is converted
lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (analog). into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
The color components of document images are extracted to R, G, Each color pixel has 10bit information.
and B separately by the three kinds of CCD elements (R,G,B). 2) The 10bit digital image signals of R, G, B are sent to the image
The red CCD extracts the red component of document images, the process section.
green CCD green the components, and the blue CCD the blue
components. This operation is called the color separation. CCD PWB
Analog IC
The CCD unit looks like one unit, but it includes three kinds of CCD CCD
elements, R, G, and B. AFE ADC LVDS
(6 Lines) R
The document scan in the main scanning direction is performed by G
the CCD element. The document scan in the sub scanning direc- B
tion is performed by shifting the scanner unit with the scanner
Buffer
motor. Document images are optically reduced by the lens and
reflected to the CCD. Timing
The scan resolution is 600 dpi. Generator

e. Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically,
but performed with the image process technology (by the software).

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 7
4. Paper feed section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
(1) Manual paper feed section

HPFM

CPFM

MPUC
1 4

MPFS
TH_D/HUD_M
MPED 3
2
5 MTOP1
MTOP2
MPLD
MPWD
MPGS

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 8
Signal name Name Function/Operation
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
MPED Manual feed paper empty detector Detects presence of paper in the manual paper feed tray.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) Controls pickup of paper. (Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Controls open/close of the manual paper feed gate.
MPLD Manual paper feed length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the manual paper feed section.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
Manual paper fees tray pull-out position
MTOP1 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position (storing position).
detector 1
Manual paper fees tray pull-out position
MTOP2 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position (pull-out position).
detector 2
HPFM Horizontal transport motor Transport paper from the paper feed section to the transport motor drive system.Transport paper
from the right door section to the transport motor drive system.
HUD_M/
Temperature/humidity sensor Detects the temperature and the humidity.(For the process control)
TH_M

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double feed.
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Picks up paper to send to the paper feed roller.
4 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to prevent
double feed.
5 Transport roller 11(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 15 to the transport roller 12.
6 Transport roller 10(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 9 to the transport roller 12.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 9
(2) Tandem paper feed tray unit

T1PUC
T1SPD CPFM
5 T1PUS
2
T1LUD
T1PED T2SPD
1 T1LUM T2PUS
T2PUC

3
T2LUD
T2PED
4

5 T2LUM

TNDSET

4
2
3
1

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 10
Signal name Name Function/Operation
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section and the transport section.
T1LUD Tandem tray 1 upper limit detector Detects the upper limit position of the upper limit tandem tray 1.
T1LUM Paper tray lift motor (Tandem tray 1) Drives the lift of the paper tray.
T1PED Tandem tray 1 paper empty detector Detects presence of paper in tandem tray 1
T1PUC Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tandem tray 1 paper feed section.
T1PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1) Controls the paper pickup.
T1SPD Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity detector Detects the remaining paper quantity in tandem tray 1.
T2LUD Tandem tray 2 upper limit detector Detects the upper limit position of tandem tray 2.
T2LUM Paper tray lift motor (Tandem tray 2) Drives the lift of the paper tray.
T2PED Tandem tray 2 paper empty detector Detects paper presence in tandem tray 2.
T2PUC Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tandem tray 1 paper feed section.
T2PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 2) Controls the paper pickup.
T2SPD Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity detector Detects the remaining paper quantity in tandem tray 2.
TNDSET Tandem tray installation detector Detects installation of tandem tray.

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Paper pickup roller (Tandem 1, 2 paper feed tray) Picks up paper to send to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller (Tandem 1, 2 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
3 Separation roller (Tandem 1, 2 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
4 Torque limiter Applies a certain level of resistance power to rotation of the separation roller in order to
prevent against double feed.
5 Lift wire Transmits the drive power of the paper tray lift motor to the paper feed tray.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 11
(3) Tray paper feed section

CPFM

C3PUS
4
C3LUD C3LUM
C3PUC
C3PED

2 1 C4LUM
3 C3PFD
5
6 CPFC
C3SS1 C4PUC
C3SS3 C3SS2
C3SS4

C3SPD

7 C4PUS
11
C4LUD
C4PED

9 8
10 C4PFD
12
13
C4SS1
C4SS3 C4SS2
C4SS4

C4SPD

14

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 12
Signal name Name Function/Operation
C3LUD Tray 3 upper limit detector (Lift Detects the upper limit position of tray 3.
home position detection)
C3LUM Paper tray lift motor (Tray 3) Drives the lift of the paper tray.
C3PED Tray 3 paper empty detector Detects paper presence in tray 3.
C3PFD Tray 3 paper entry detector Detects paper entry from tray 3.
C3PUC Tray 3 paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tray 3 paper feed section.
C3PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 3) Controls pickup of paper.
C3SPD Tray 3 remaining quantity detector Detects the remaining paper quantity in tray 3.
C3SS1 Tray 3 rear edge detector 1 Either of rear edge 1 - 4 of tray 3 is detected to detect tray insertion.
C3SS2 Tray 3 rear edge detector 2 The paper size of tray 3 is detected.
C3SS3 Tray 3 rear edge detector 3
C3SS4 Tray 3 rear edge detector 4
C4LUD Tray 4 upper limit detector (Lift Detects the upper limit position of tray 4.
home position detection)
C4LUM Paper tray lift motor (Tray 4) Drives the lift of the paper tray.
C4PED Tray 4 paper empty detector Detects paper presence in tray 4.
C4PFD Tray 4 paper entry detector Detects paper entry from tray 4.
C4PUC Tray 4 paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tray 4 paper feed section.
C4PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 4) Controls pickup of paper.
C4PWD Casette 4 width detection Casette 4 width detection
C4SPD Tray 4 remaining quantity detector Detects the remaining paper quantity in tray 4.
C4SS1 Tray 4 rear edge detector 1 Either of rear edge 1 - 4 of tray 4 is detected to detect tray insertion.
C4SS2 Tray 4 rear edge detector 2 The paper size of tray 4 is detected.
C4SS3 Tray 4 rear edge detector 3
C4SS4 Tray 4 rear edge detector 4
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
PTRC1 Casette Vertical transport clutch Casette Vertical transport clutch control

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 3, 4) Picks up paper to send to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 3, 4) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
3 Separation roller (Paper feed tray 3, 4) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
4 Torque limiter Applies a certain level of resistance power to rotation of the separation roller in order to prevent against
double feed.
5 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 4 to the transport roller 2.
6 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 to the transport roller 4.
7 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 3 to the transport roller 4.
8 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 2 and the transport roller 3 to the transport roller 5.
9 Paper size detection plate This plate shifts its position in conjunction with the rear edge plate, and the rear edge is detected to detect
the paper size.
10 Lift plate Lifts paper to maintain the paper feed position at a certain level.
11 Regulation plate Regulates paper in the transverse direction.
12 Rear edge plate Regulates paper in the longitudinal direction.

B. Operational descriptions
(1) Bypass
The pickup roller moves up and down to press the paper surface,
separating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and sending it
to the paper feed roller section.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to pre-
vent against double feed with the separation roller. The manual
paper feed clutch controls ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the
paper feed roller. Paper is sent to the registration roller by the man-
ual transport roller.
(2) Tandem paper feed
a. Paper size for each paper feed tray
Paper tray 1 accepts paper of A4, 11” x 8.5”, or B5. Paper tray 2
accepts paper of A4 (11” x 8.5”) only.
b. Paper feed operation
1) When the copy/print operation is started, the motor (CPFM)
and the clutch (T1PUC) are turned ON to turn ON the solenoid
(T1PUS) at the timing of paper pickup. This rotates the takeup
roller and lowers it to pick up paper.
2) At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to feed paper to
the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates
to prevent double feed of paper.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 13
(3) Tray paper feed
a. Paper feed front operation
1) Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller
falls to turn ON the paper feed tray sensor.
2) The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up.
3) The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate
stops at the specified position.
b. Paper feed operation
1) When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch
are turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup
timing, feeding paper.
2) At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport
paper to the transport section. At that time, the separation
roller rotates to prevent against double feed of paper.
c. Paper remaining detection
1) The notifying levels of paper remaining quantity are 4 steps in
total; 3 steps of paper remaining quantity and 1 step of paper
empty. The result is displayed.
d. Paper remaining quantity detection method
1) The paper remaining quantity is judged from the number of
rotations of the remaining quantity sensor from starting the lift-
up operation of the paper feed tray to turning ON the upper
limit sensor.

(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)

The no-paper detection sensor detects CPED


the state of no remaining paper. (paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
During no-paper detection Detection Actuator

CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low

Remaining paper 1/3 position

2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi

Remaining paper 2/3 position

3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

Remaining paper 3/3 position

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 14
5. Paper transport section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
(1) Interface pass unit

TTRC
CPFM

1
PTRC2

T1PPD1

DSW_RL1
T2PPD1

Signal name Name Function/Operation


CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
DSW_RL1 Right lower door open/close detector 1 Detects open/close of the right lower door.
PTRC2 Paper vertical transport clutch (Upper) Turns ON/OFF the transport roller in the upper section of the vertical paper transport section.
T1PPD1 Tandem tray 1 transport sensor 1 Detects paper entry from tandem tray 1.
T2PPD1 Paper pass sensor (Tandem tray 2) Detects the tandem tray 2 paper pass.
TTRC Transport clutch (Tandem tray 1, 2) Turns ON/OFF the transport roller of the Tandem tray.

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Horizontal transport roller left (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed roller to the horizontal roller Right.
2 Transport roller 9(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 2 to the transport roller 10.
3 Transport roller 7(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 6 to the transport roller 9.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 15
(2) Vertical transport unit

RRM

PFM

HPFM

1
2

PPD2

3
4

Signal name Name Function/Operation


CPFM Paper feed/Transport motor Drives the paper feed section and the transport section.
DSW_CS Transport cover open/close sensor Detects open/close of the vertical transport cover.
DSW_RL Right lower door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the right lower door.
PTRC2 Paper feed vertical transport clutch upper Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper feed tray section.
T2PPD1 Tandem tray 2 transport sensor Detects the tandem tray 2 paper pass.

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports paper to the transport roller 12.
2 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports paper to the transport roller 13.

B. Operational descriptions
Transport paper from each paper feed section to the registration roller with two or more transport rollers. The paper transport clutch controls
ON/OFF of each transport roller. The registration roller controls the relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images.
The registration roller controls the relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images. The registration roller is driven by the trans-
port motor. The relative positions of the paper and the transfer images are determined by the ON timing of the transport motor.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 16
6. LSU section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

2
PGM 5 6
7

8
9

LSUCFM

3
10

4
11

Signal name Name Function/Operation


LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor Cools the section LSU.
PGM Polygon motor Reflects the laser beams at constant-speed rotating.

No. Name Function/Operation


1 LSU control PWB Laser beams are controlled and the polygon motor control signal is generated according to the PCU PWB control
signal and the MFPC PWB image data.
2 LD PWB Controls drive and power of the laser diode.
3 Reflection mirror 2 Assures the optical path for laser.
4 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams, and focuses on the polygon mirror. (sub scanning direction)
5 f lens 1 Converges laser beams on the OPC drum, making the laser scan speeds at both ends and the center the same.
6 Lapel mirror Arranges laser beams.
7 Lapel mirror Arranges laser beams.
8 f lens 2 Converges laser beams on the OPC drum, making the laser scan speeds at both ends and the center the same.
9 BD mirror Converges laser beams to the BD PWB.
10 Collective lens for BD Converges laser beams to the BD PWB.
11 BD PWB Detects the timing for starting laser scanning.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 17
B. Operational descriptions (3) Outline of LSU specifications
(1) Outline a. On the polygon motor
Image data sent from the image process circuit are converted into Model Resolutio Laser Rotatin Bearin Number of
laser beams which are radiated to the surface of the OPC drum.In n (dpi) g speed g mirror surface
this model, the 4-laser system is employed which radiates two laser (rpm)
beams. The LSU unit is composed of the primary system from the 75cpm 1200 4beam 42520 Oil 6
laser to the polygon mirror and the scanning system of the optical s
elements including the polygon mirror. 65cpm 1200 4beam 38976 Oil 6
s
(2) Composition
Primary system

Scanning system

* Though four laser beams are actually radiated for one color, they
are illustrated as one beam.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 18
7. OPC drum section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

CCM

DM
CCMD

2 3

MC
HUD-DV 1
TH-DV PTDL 4

DL2
CCHPD

PCS

DL1

PSPS

Signal name Name Function/Operation


CCHPD MC cleaner HP sensor Detects the MC cleaner home position.
CCM MC cleaner motor Drives the MC cleaner.
CCMD MC cleaner shift sensor Detects the shift distance of the MC cleaner.
DL1 Discharge lamp 1 Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL2 Discharge lamp 2 Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum immediately after transfer operation.
DM Drum motor Drives the drum.
HUD_DV/
Temperature/humidity sensor Detects the temperature and the humidity.(For the process control)
TH_DV
MC Main charger The OPC drum surface is charged negatively.
PCS Process control sensor Detects the ID density.
PSPS Detachment solenoid Exfoliates the paper of the drum part.
PTDL Discharge lamp Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum immediately before transfer operation.

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Toner transport roller Transports toner to the toner supply roller.
2 Toner transport roller Transports toner to the developing section.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 19
B. Operational descriptions 3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger. cleaning blade.
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images. the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main
charger.

Main corona unit

Screen grid

High voltage unit


OPC drum
CTL
CGL

Aluminum layer

The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt- 4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
age applied to the screen grid.
2) Laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
Aluminum Aluminum
layer layer
CGL CGL
CTL CTL

OPC drum OPC drum

.CUGTDGCO Lens

When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum


Aluminum layer CGL, positive and negative charges are generated. Positive
CGL charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the negative
CTL charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand, nega-
When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative tive charges are attracted by the positive charges in the alumi-
and positive charges are generated. num layer of the OPC drum. Therefore, positive and negative
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the charges are balanced out on the OPC drum surface and in the
negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other aluminum layer, reducing positive and negative charged to
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in decrease the surface voltage of the OPC drum.
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser lights are not
radiated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 20
5) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.

Aluminum Aluminum
layer layer
CGL CGL
CTL CTL

Lens

By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens,


light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the
negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing
positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
of the OPC drum.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 21
8. Toner supply section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
(1) Toner supply section

TNM

CRUM

TNHM1

TNHM2

TFSD

Signal name Name Function/Operation


CRUM CRUM chip Stores the toner bottle information
TFSD Toner remaining quantity sensor Detects the remaining toner quantity.
TNHM1 Toner hopper motor 1 Transports toner.
TNHM2 Toner hopper motor 2 Transports toner.
TNM Toner motor Transports toner from the toner bottle to the toner hopper unit.

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Toner transport roller Transport a toner in toner hopper to the toner supply roller.
2 Toner supply roller Supply a toner in toner hopper to a developing section.

B. Operational descriptions
(1) Outline
Adoption of the rotating toner bottle enables large capacity with a compact toner cartridge size.
When the remaining toner detection sensor in the toner hopper unit detects no toner, the toner bottle turns to supply toner to the toner hopper.
After supplying, full or empty status is detected at the toner hopper inside. Therefore even if the toner cartridge becomes empty, copying is not
immediately suspended because toner inside the toner hopper is used.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 22
9. Developing section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

DVM

2
TCS

Signal name Name Function/Operation


DVM Developing drive motor Drives the developing section.
TCS Toner density sensor Detects the toner density.

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Developer roller Latent electrostatic images on the OPC drum are changed to visible images.
2 Mixing roller Mixing of developer
3 DV filter AS Prevents dispersing of toner

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 23
B. Operational descriptions
This converts the electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum gen-
erated by the laser (writing) unit into visible images with toner.

OPC drum

Toner
Carrier
Developing roller

Non-developing Developing mode


mode

Toner and carrier in the developing unit are stirred and transported
by the mixing roller.
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively
charged due to mechanical friction.
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC
component) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.

OPC drum

Toner
Carrier
Developing mode

Non-developing Developing mode


mode

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 24
3

10. Transfer section


A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
(1) Transfer section

DM

1 TC

TC_CL

2
3
4 TURM
5

7
6
8 BESTD

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 25
Signal name Name Function/Operation
BESTD Belt estrangement sensor Detects the estrangement of the belt.
DM Drum motor Drives the drum.
TURM TC unit estrangement motor Pressure welding or estrangement the transfer unit to the drum.
TC TC roller output TC roller high voltage
TC_CL TC cleaning roller output TC cleaning roller high voltage

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Transfer belt Toner on the drum is transferred to form toner images on the belt.
2 Transfer drive roller Drives the transfer belt.
3 Transfer roller Transfers toner images on the OPC drum to the transfer belt.
4 Back up roller Holds the belt position in the registration section in the process control.
5 Transfer follower roller Transfer belt follower.
6 Transfer idle roller Transfer belt follower.
7 Belt cleaning roller Transfer belt back surface cleaning.
8 Transfer front paper guide Transfer front paper guide

B. Operational descriptions
(1) Transfer operation
1) A toner image on photoconductor drum is transferred to trans-
fer belt by applying positive high voltage on transfer roller.

7UDQVIHUUROOHULVSRVLWLYHO\FKDUJHGDQG
QHJDWLYHFKDUJHGWRQHURQGUXPLVWUDQVIHUUHG
WRDSDSHU
-

- 7UDQVIHUFOHDQLQJUROOHULVSRVLWLYHO\FKDUJHG
- DQGZDVWHWRQHURQWKHEHOWLVFROOHFWHGRQ
-
WUDQVIHUFOHDQLQJUROOHU
-
- +
- -
- -
-
+

7RQHU

(2) Cleaning operation


1) For cleaning, the polarity of voltage applied to transfer roller is
set to negative first. Then waste toner on the transfer belt is
transferred to photoconductor drum next. Lastly the toner is
cleaned off by a cleaning blade so that the toner is transferred
to waste toner section.

7UDQVIHUUROOHULVQHJDWLYHO\FKDUJHGDQG
ZDVWHWRQHURQWKHEHOWLVWUDQVIHUUHGWR
-

-
7UDQVIHUFOHDQLQJUROOHULVQHJDWLYHO\FKDUJHG
-
DQGZDVWHWRQHULVVSUHDGWRWKHEHOW
-

- -

-
-

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 26
11. Waste toner section

WTM

WTSD

WTFD

Signal name Name Function/Operation


WTFD Waste toner full detector Detects full of waste toner.
WTM Waste toner motor Transport waste toner.
WTSD Waste toner shutter open/close detection Detects open/close of the waste toner shutter.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 27
12. Fusing section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

FUM

WEBEND1

TH_US

TH_UM
5
TS_M
1 5
TS_S
WEBS
TH_LM
WEBM1 POD1
FPFD
HL_UM/HL_US/HL_UW
2

4
WEBEND2

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 28
Signal name Name Function/Operation
FPFD Fusing front paper pass detector Detects paper pass in front of the fusing section.
FUFM Fusing cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing section.
HL_LM/US/UW Heater lamp lower main Heats the fusing roller.
POD1 Fusing paper exit detector Detects paper pass in the fusing section.
TH_LM Fusing temperature sensor lower Detects the surface temperature at the center of the fusing roller.
TH_UM Fusing temperature sensor upper (Main) Detects the surface temperature at the center of the fusing roller.
TH_US Fusing temperature sensor upper (Sub) Detects the suffered temperature at the edge section of the fusing roller.
TS_M Thermostat upper (Main) Shuts down the heater lamp circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
TS_S Thermostat upper (Sub) Shuts down the heater lamp circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
WEBEND1 Web end detector Detects web end of the fusing unit.
WEBEND2 Web end detector Detects web end of the fusing unit.
WEBM1 Fusing web motor Drives the fusing web roller.
WEBS WEB drive control solenoid Drives the WEB.

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Fusing roller (Heating) Applies heat and pressure to toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
2 Fusing roller (Pressing) Presses toner on paper to fuse.
3 Fusing web roller1 Cleans the fusing roller (Heating).
4 Fusing web roller2 Cleans the fusing roller (Pressing).
5 Separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the fusing roller.

2. Operational descriptions
2.1. Fusing unit drive
1) For driving the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted
from the drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the
upper heat roller gear.
Driving by the drive motor (DC Brush-less motor) is per-
formed according to the control signal sent from the PCU.

PCU FUM

2.2. Heater lamp drive


1) The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the
thermistor is sent to the PCU. When the temperature is lower
than the specified level, the heater lamp ON signal is sent from
the PCU to the heater lamp drive circuit on the HL PWB. (WUKPITQNNGT
*GCVKPI
(WUKPITQNNGT
2TGUUKPI
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and
the AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp
and heating the heat roller.
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller,
the thermostat is provided for safety.
When the thermostat is opened, the power supply (AC line)
to the heater lamp is cut off.

2.3. Fusing operation


1) Toner on paper is heated and pressed to be fused by the
heat roller.

The fusing heat roller (heating) is provided with three/two heater


lamps, which heat the fusing roller to fuse toner onto paper.
The fusing rollers (pressing) are made of silicon rubber because
of the following reasons and purpose.
a) Paper is separated upward. (Since the fusing roller (heating)
is of higher hardness, the fusing roller (pressing) is deformed
to separate paper upward.)
b) The nip quantity is increased to increase heat capacity for
paper.
c) By pressing paper with the flexible roller, toner is fused with-
out deformation.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 29
2.4. Fusing temperature control
1) The temperature sensor is provided at the center of the fus-
ing roller (heating).
The roller temperature is detected by the thermistor sensor,
and the heater lamp is controlled so that the temperature is
maintained at the specified level.

2.5. Roller cleaning


1) The fusing roller is cleaned by the web.
Remaining toner on the upper fusing roller is cleaned by the
web with silicon included.
The web unit is provided in the upper section of the fusing roller,
and is composed of the feeding section of the web sheet, the
winding section, and the backup roller which pressed the web
sheet onto the fusing roller.

:HEUROOHU

(WUKPITQNNGT
*GCVKPI
(WUKPITQNNGT
2TGUUKPI

(WUKPITQNNGT
*GCVKPI
(WUKPITQNNGT
*GCVKPI
:HEUROOHU

2.6. Web end detection


1) The judgment of web end is made by the fusing web send coun-
ter for near end, and the web life end detection, whichever is
earlier.
When the web life end is detected, the warning display is made,
and the machine is stopped the operation.
Warning display content: Maintenance required. Code: FK3
When the web is replaced with a new one and the web counter
is cleared, the warring display disappears.
The new web is not automatically detected.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 30
13. Duplex/paper exit section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
(1) Duplex section

ADUM1

POD3
1 TFD3
2 ADUGS

PRTPD
DSW_ADU
APPD1
3
4
ADUM2

APPD2

Signal name Name Function/Operation


ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate.
ADUM1 ADU motor lower Drive the transport roller 19, 20 and the paper exit roller 2.
ADUM2 ADU motor upper Drive the transport roller 21, 22.
APPD1 ADU paper pass detector 1 Detects paper pass in the upstream of the duplex (ADU).
APPD2 ADU paper pass detector 2 Detects paper pass in the midstream of the duplex (ADU).
DSW_ADU ADU open/close detector Detects open/close of the duplex (ADU) cover.
POD3 Right paper exit detector Detects the paper exit into the right tray.
PRTPD Paper exit tray paper detector (Right paper exit tray) Detects paper empty in the paper exit tray (Right paper exit tray).
TFD3 Paper exit tray full detector (Right paper exit tray) Detects the right tray paper exit full.

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Transport roller 16 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the exit roller 1 to the transport roller 14 and the exit roller 2.
2 Right exit gate Selects the paper path: to transport paper to the ADU section or to the right tray.
3 Paper exit roller 2(Drive) Discharges paper to the right side.
4 Transport roller 14(Drive) Transports paper transported from the switchback section to the transport roller 15.
5 Transport roller 15(Drive) Transports paper fed from the transport roller 14 to the transport roller 11.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 31
(2) Paper exit section

POM
TFD2

POD2

POFM_6
1

POFM_5

Signal name Name Function/Operation


POD2 Paper exit tray detector Detects paper exit to the paper exit tray.
POFM_5 Paper exit cooling fan motor F Cools paper after fusing.
POFM_6 Paper exit cooling fan motor R
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller.
TFD2 Paper exit full detector Detects paper full in the paper exit tray.

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Paper exit roller 1(Drive) Discharges paper to the left side.

B. Operational descriptions (2) Paper exit


(1) Duplex * Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans-
port roller 16 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
* Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans- paper exit roller 1, and discharged to the inner tray.
port roller 16 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
* When paper is discharged to the right tray, paper is sent to the
paper exit roller 1. At that time, paper is passed under the ADU
paper exit roller 1. The paper exit drive motor rotates reversely.
reverse gate guide.
* When the specified time passes from detection of the paper lead Paper is passed through the right paper exit gate, and dis-
edge by POD1, the paper exit drive motor rotates normally, and charged to the right tray.
rotates reversely after the specified time..
* By the reverse rotation of the paper exit drive motor, paper is
sent to the reverse section. At that time, paper passes on the
upper side of the Ado gate which lowers by its own weight.
* The transport rollers 15 are driven by the ADU motor 2 to trans-
port paper to the duplex paper feed position.
* Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and then
transported to the machine again.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 32
DERIVERY UNIT DSPF UNIT SPOD STRC SPFC SPED1 SPLS1
POFM1 WEBM FUFM1 SPPD5
STUD STRRC SRRC SPED2 SPLS2
POD2 POFM3 FUFM2 TNM TFSD SPPD4
TONER UNIT STLD OPTION SLUM SWD-AD SCOV
TFD2 POFM4 POM POFM5 CRUM TNHM1 SPPD3 STMPS
SPPD1 SPOM CCD PWB
FUM PFM POFM6 TNHM2 SPPD2
SPRDMD DSPF DRIVER PWB LED PWB
SOCD
SLCOV
1. Block diagram

DVFM1
DM SPFFM DSPFcnt PWB
FUSER UNIT SPUFM
DVFM2 DVM
A. System block diagram

FPFD WEBEND1
CCM SCANNER UNIT
TH_UM WEBEND2 SCN-MOTHER PWB MM
CCMD
TH_US1 WEBS LED DRIVER PWB LED PWB
MAIN DRIVE UNIT OCSW
TH_US2 CCD PWB
OPERATION UNIT
MHPS
HL_UM PROCESS UNIT
TH_LM ORS_LED TOUCH
TH-DV TP-IF PWB
HL_US PANEL OPTION AUDITOR
POD1 HUD-DV ORS_PD PNC
[14] ELECTRICAL SECTION

OZFM
HL_UW PSPS PTDL LVDS PWB LCD
PROFM OPTION
CCHPD DL1 KEY PWB
WH_SCN
DSW_F1
PCS DL2 KEYBORD
RRM DRIVER PWB
DSW_R OPTION
HPFM DRIVER PWB DSW_F2 TC PWB
DV UNIT
DSW_RL1 PCU PWB WIRELESS LAN OPTION
WTM
TCS
PS UNIT TNDSET WTSD IC CARD READER
DVCH
FAX1
C4PWD
MC PWB
PPD2 LPPD WTFD HDD RAID PWB HDD

ACRE
4rd CASSETTE 3rd CASSETTE TANDEM TANDEM MFPC PWB
2nd TRAY 1nd TRAY
FAX2
C4SS1_4 C3SS1_4 CPFM
ADUM1 OPTION
FAX3

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 1
C4PUC C3PUC T2PPD1 T1PPD1 PTRC1 LSU UNIT For Japan
ADUM2
C4LUM C3LUM PTRC2 LSU cnt PWB
RIGHT DOOR UNIT
BESTD C4SPD C3SPD T2SPD T1SPD TTRC BD PWB
TURM T1PUC HDDFAN LD PWB PGM
OPTION C4PFD C3PFD
Service Manual

RD I/F T1LUM LSUFAN OPTION


POD3 PWB C4PUS C3PUS T2PUS T1PUS
PSFM2 WH_LSU
TFD3 DSW_ADU HL PWB C4LUD C3LUD T2LUD T1LUD T2PUC

T2LUM PSFM1
PRTPD ADUGS C4PED C3PED T2PED T1PED
PAPER FEED 4 UNIT PAPER FEED 3 UNIT PAPER FEED 2 UNIT PAPER FEED 1 UNIT
MPED APPD1 MPUC COINVENDER
STATUS
MPFS APPD2 LCC FINISHER INDICATOR

LCC 4k FINISHER
MTOP1 MTOP2 WH_LCC
DCPS OPTION

MPLD1 MPFD
WH_PWB
MPWD MPGS
TH-M OPTION OPTION AC PWB
HUD-M MSW
MANUAL PAPER FEED UNIT WH_CS3 WH_TND WH_SW
OPTION
㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻔㻞㻡㻢㼗㼎㼕㼠㻕
B. PCU PWB

㻭㼐㼞㼑㼟㼟㻌㼎㼡㼟
㻾㻱㻿㻱㼀㻌㻵㻯 㻲㼘㼍㼟㼔㻾㻻㻹
㻰㼍㼠㼍㻌㼎㼡㼟
㻔㻝㻢㻹㼎㼕㼠㻕

㼄㻓㼠㼍㼘㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠 㻿㻾㻭㻹
㻝㻠㻚㻣㻠㻡㻢㻹㻴㼦 㻔㻝㻹㼎㼕㼠㻕 㻰㻯㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻯㻯㻹㻛㼀㼁㻾㻹
㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㻲㻭㻺 㼃㻱㻮㻱㻺㻰㻝㻛㼃㻱㻮㻱㻺㻰㻞㻛㻼㻻㻰㻝㻛㻼㻻㻰㻞㻛㼀㻲㻰㻞㻛㻼㻾㼀㻼㻰㻛
㻼㻻㻲㻹㻝㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻟㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻠㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻡㻛㻲㼁㻲㻹㻝㻛 㻼㻻㻰㻟㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻲㻞㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻾㻛㻼㻼㻰㻞㻛㻹㻼㻲㻰㻛㻭㻼㻼㻰㻝㻛㻭㻼㻼㻰㻞㻛
㻛 㻛
㻲㼁㻲㻹㻞㻛㻰㼂㻲㻹㻝㻛㻻㼆㻲㻹 㻮㻱㻿㼀㻰㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻭㻰㼁㻛㼀㻲㻰㻟㻛㻹㼀㻻㻼㻝㻛㻹㼀㻻㻼㻞㻛㻹㻼㻸㻰㻝㻛㻹㻼㻱㻰㻛
㻯㻾㼁㻹
㻯㻯㻹㻰㻛㻯㻯㻴㻼㻰㻛㼀㻲㻿㻰㻛㻰㼂㻯㻴㻝㻛㻰㼂㻯㻴㻞㻛㻰㼂㻯㻴㻟
㻹㻲㻼㼏 㻯㻾㼁㻹

㻰㼞㼡㼙㻌㻸㼍㼙㼜㻌㻻㼜㼑㼚㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻰㻸㻝㼋㻻㻼㻱㻺㻛㻰㻸㻞㼋㻻㻼㻱㻺
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻿㻯㻺㻙㻹㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞 㻼㻹㻯㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻌㻝 㻿㼠㼑㼜㼜㼕㼚㼓㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻿㻯㻵 㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻛㻲㼍㼚㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻼㻹㻯 㻼㻻㻹㻛㻭㻰㼁㻹㻝㻛㻭㻰㼁㻹㻞㻛㻼㻲㻹㻛㼃㻱㻮㻹㻛㼀㻺㻹㻛㼀㻺㻴㻹㻝㻛㼀㻺㻴㻹㻞
㻲㼁㻲㻹㻝㼋㻸㻰㻛㻲㼁㻲㻹㻞㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻝㼋㻸㻰㻛
㻼㻻㻲㻹㻟㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻠㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻡㼋㻸㻰㻛
㻸㼛㼍㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼛㼞㼘㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠 㻼㻻㻲㻹㻢㼋㻸㻰㻛㻰㼂㻲㻹㻝㼋㻸㻰㻛㻻㼆㻲㻹㼋㻸㻰
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻸㻿㼁 㻹㻼㻲㻿㻛㻹㻼㻳㻿㻛㻭㻰㼁㻳㻿㻛㼃㻱㻮㻿㻛㻼㻿㻼㻿㻛㼀㻝㻼㼁㻿㻛㼀㻞㻼㼁㻿

㻼㼃㻹 㻰㼞㼡㼙㻌㼘㼍㼙㼜
㻰㻸㻝㻛㻰㻸㻞㻛㻼㼀㻰㻸
㻲㼡㼟㼑㼞㻌㼁㼚㼕㼠
㻴㻸㼏㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻴㼂
㻴㻸㼋㼁㻹㻛㻴㻸㼋㼁㻿㻛㻴㻸㼋㻸㻹 㻹㻯㻛㻴㼂㼋㻾㻱㻹㻛㼀㻯㼋㻰㻾㻛㼀㻯㼋㻯㻸㻛㼀㻯㼋㻭㻯㻛㼀㻯㻗㻛㼀㻯㻙
㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㼀㻝㻼㻱㻰㻛㼀㻞㻼㻱㻰㻛㻯㻠㻼㻲㻰㻛㻯㻠㻼㻱㻰㻛㻯㻟㻼㻲㻰㻛㻯㻟㻼㻱㻰㻛
㻲㻭㻺 㻯㻟㻿㻼㻰㻛㻯㻠㻿㻼㻰㻛㼀㻝㻼㻼㻰㻝㻛㼀㻞㻼㻼㻰㻝㻛㼀㻝㻿㻼㻰㻛㼀㻞㻿㻼㻰㻛
㻰㼂㻲㻹㻞㻛㻸㻿㼁㻲㻹㻛㻼㻾㻻㻲㻹㻛㻼㻿㻲㻹㻝㻛㻼㻿㻲㻹㻞㻛㻴㻰㻰㻲㻹 㻰㻿㼃㼋㻾㻸㻝㻛㻯㻠㻿㻿㻝㻙㻿㻿㻠㻛㻯㻟㻿㻿㻝㻙㻠㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻲㻝㻛㼀㻝㻸㼁㻰㻛
㼁㻭㻾㼀 㼀㻞㻸㼁㻰㻛㻯㻟㻸㼁㻰㻛㻯㻠㻸㼁㻰㻛㼃㼀㻲㻰㻛㼃㼀㻿㻰㻛㼀㻺㻰㻿㻱㼀㻛㻸㻼㻼㻰
㻸㻯㻯

㻿㼠㼑㼜㼜㼕㼚㼓㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻼㻹㻯 㻴㼂㻌㻱㼞㼞㼛㼞
㼁㻭㻾㼀 㻴㻼㻲㻹
㻹㻯㼋㻱㻾㻾㻛㼀㻯㼋㻱㻾㻾
㻲㻵㻺
㻯㻼㼁
㻼㻹㻯㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻌㻞 㻸㼍㼍㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼛㼞㼘㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠 㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻛㻲㼍㼚㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻴㻤㻿㻛㻞㻟㻣㻟
㼀㻝㻼㼁㻯㻛㼀㻞㻼㼁㻯㻛㻼㼀㻾㻯㻝㻛㻼㼀㻾㻯㻞㻛㼀㼀㻾㻯 㼃㼀㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㻯㻼㻲㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㻴㻰㻰㻲㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㻰㼂㻲㻹㻞㼋㻸㻰㻛㻸㻿㼁㻲㻹㼋㻸㻰
㻛㻹㻼㼁㻯㻛㻯㻟㻼㼁㻯㻛㻯㻟㻼㼁㻿㻛㻯㻠㻼㼁㻯㻛㻯㻠㻼㼁㻿 㻛㻼㻿㻲㻹㻝㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻿㻲㻹㻞㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻾㻻㻲㻹㼋㻸㻰
㻯㻸㻷 㻰㻯 㻮㼘㼡㼟㼔㼘㼑㼟㼟㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻯㻼㻲㻹㻛㼃㼀㻹

㻰㻯㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㼀㻝㻸㼁㻹㻛㼀㻞㻸㼁㻹㻛㻯㻟㻸㼁㻹㻛㻯㻠㻸㼁㻹

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 2
㻯㼛㼕㼚㻌㼂㼑㼚㼐㼛㼞
㻯㼂㼋㻯㻻㻼㼅㻛㻯㼂㼋㻯㻸㻯㻻㻼㼅
㻯㻼㻸㻰
㻯㼛㼕㼚㻌㼂㼑㼚㼐㼛㼞
㻯㼂㼋㻿㼀㻭㻾㼀㻛㻯㼂㼋㻯㻻㼁㻺㼀㻛㻯㼂㼋㻯㻻㻸㻻㻾㻝㻛㻯㼂㼋㻯㻻㻸㻻㻾㻜㻛
㻯㼂㼋㻯㻭㻛㻯㼂㼋㻿㻵㼆㻱㻜㻛㻯㼂㼋㻿㻵㼆㻱㻝㻛㻯㼂㼋㻿㻵㼆㻱㻞㻛㻯㼂㼋㻿㻵㼆㻱㻟㻛
㻯㼂㼋㻿㼀㻭㻼㻸㻱㻛㻯㼂㼋㻰㼁㻼㻸㻱㼄

㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㻲㻼㻲㻰

㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻛㻲㼍㼚㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻲㼁㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㻰㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㻰㼂㻹㼋㻸㻰

㻯㻸㻷 㻰㻯 㻮㼘㼡㼟㼔㼘㼑㼟㼟㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻰㻹㻛㻰㼂㻹㻛㻲㼁㻹㻛㻾㻾㻹

㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠
㻼㻯㻿㼋㻸㻱㻰㻛㼀㻿㻳 㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㼁㻹㼋㻯㻿㻛㼁㻹㼋㻰㻛㼁㻹㻛㼁㻿㻝㼋㻯㻿㻛㼁㻿㻝㼋㻰㻛㼁㻿㻝㻛㻸㻹㻛㼁㻿㻞㻛
㻼㻯㻿㻛㼀㻯㻿㻛㻯㻠㻼㼃㻰㻛
㼀㻴㼋㻰㼂㻛㻴㼁㻹㼋㻰㼂
㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓 㼀㻴㼋㻹㻛㻴㼁㻰㼋㻹㻛㻹㻼㼃㻰
㻿㼃
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻷㼑㼥㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐 㼃㼕㻲㼕㻌㻯㻺 㼁㻿㻮㻌㼃㼕㼞㼑㼘㼑㼟㼟
㻔㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻕 㻔㻲㼞㼛㼚㼠㻕 㻸㻭㻺

㻴㻰㻰㻌㻞㻚㻡㻓 㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠
㻴㻰㻰㻌㻞㻚㻡㻓 㻵㻯㻌㻯㻭㻾㻰㻌㻾㼑㼍㼐㼑㼞
㻟㻞㻜㻳㻮㻌㼛㼞㻌 㻾㼍㼕㼐㻌㻼㼃㻮㻌 㼀㼅㻼㻱㻙㻭㻌㻯㻺 㻸㻯㻰㻌㻼㼍㼚㼑㼘㻌
㻟㻞㻜㻳㻮㻌㻔㻠㻷㻕 㻔㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻕
㻴㼕㼓㼔㼑㼞 㻔㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕 㻔㻲㼞㼛㼚㼠㻕 㻿㻯㼁㻌㻼㼃㻮
㼛㼞㻌㻴㼕㼓㼔㼑㼞
㻔㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕 㻸㼂㻰㻿

㻡㼜㼕㼚 㻿㻭㼀㻭
㻯㻺 㻯㻺
㻡㼂㻻㻌㼟㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟 㻡㼂㻸㻌㼟㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟
㻿㻼㻰 㻳㻴㻙㻡㼜㼕㼚
㻿㼘㼕㼐㼑 㻿㻰 㻿㻯㻝㻥㻢 㻵㻿㻸㻤㻜㻝㻢 㻯㻺
㻿㼃 㻠㻳㻮 㼒㼛㼞㻌㻻㼚㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕

㻝㻚㻞㻣㼂 㻝㻚㻞㻣㼂

㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻯㻰㻕
㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻻㼚㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻿㼏㼍㼚㻕
㻿㻰 㻝㻳㻮㻌 㻿㻯㻝㻥㻢 㻿㻯㻝㻤㻡㻴
㻿㼛㼏㼗㼑㼠 䠄㻞㻳㼎㼇㼤㻝㻢㼉㻌㼤㻌㻠㼜㼏㼟䠅 㻝㻚㻤㼂 㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻝㻚㻡㼂 㻼㻯㻵㼑㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻳㼑㼚 㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼁㻮
㻥㻲㻳㻝㻜㻤
㻿㻯㻝㻥㻢 㻿㻯㻝㻤㻡㻽 㻠㼜㼛㼞㼠
C. MFP control PWB

㻰㻰㻾㻟㻙㻤㻜㻜 㻟㻚㻟㼂 㻟㻚㻟㼂 㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻳㼑㼚


㻿㻸㻟㻤㻜㻜㻜

㻢㻹㻮㻛㻿㼑㼏
㻰㻰㻾㻞㻛㻟
㻿㻼㻵㻛㻿㻰 㻿㻭㼀㻭㻌㻵㻲

㻿㻰㻴㻯㻌㻯㼘㼍㼟㼟㻢
㻵㻲

㻯㻺㻌㼁㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠
㼁㻿㻮㻞㻚㻜㻌㻵㻲 㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟
㻳㻼㻵㻻
㻴㼛㼟㼠

㻝㻳㼎㼜㼟
㻸㻭㻺㻌㻶㻭㻯㻷 㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㻾㻶㻠㻡 㻺㼛㼚㻙㼕㼚㼠㼑㼞㼞㼡㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼍㼞㼑㼍 㻸㻯㻰㻯㻌㻵㻲 㼀㼞㼍㼚㼟㼙㼕㼠㼠㼑㼞
㻔㻻㻺㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㻸㻭㻺㻌㼟㼠㼍㼚㼐㼎㼥㻕
㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻼㻴㼅 㻳㻹㻵㻵 㻿㻯㻺㻌㻵㻲
㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻹㻭㻯 㻾㼑㼏㼑㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻿㼏㼍㼚㻕
㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳
㻔㻾㼀㻸㻤㻞㻝㻝㻱㻳㻕
㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑 㼁㻿㻮㻞㻚㻜㻌㻵㻲 㼀㼞㼍㼚㼟㼙㼕㼠㼠㼑㼞 㻸㻿㼁
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻿㼁㻕
㼀㼅㻼㻱㻙㻮㻌㻯㻺 㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑 㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑 㻾㼑㼡㼟 㻸㻿㼁㻌㻵㻲
㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟 㻸㼂㻰㻿 㻭㻿㻵㻯
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕 㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻾㼑㼏㼑㼕㼢㼑㼞
㼁㻭㻾㼀 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻿㼁㻌㻯㻸㻷㻒㻿㼅㻺㻯㻕
㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻵㻺㼀
㻵㻺㼀 㻔㻝㻛㻠㼏㼔㻕
㻔㼚㻲㻭㼄㻝㻞㼋㻼㻵㻯㼋㻵㻺㼀㻕 㻼㻻㻲
㻵㻺㼀 㻵㼚㼠㼑㼞㼞㼡㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼍㼞㼑㼍
㻔㻝㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕 㻵㻞㻯㻔㻝㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻯㻰㻕
㻔㻻㻲㻲㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㻸㻭㻺㻌㼟㼠㼍㼚㼐㼎㼥㻕
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞 㻵㻞㻯㻌㻥㻡㻷㻴㼦
㻵㻺㼀㻔㼃㼍㼗㼑㼁㼜㻕
㻵㻺㼀
㻔㻞㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕 㻵㻞㻯㻔㻞㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕
㻾㼀㻯

㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼛㼞
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞
㻼㻵㻯 㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻵㻞㻯 㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻵㻺㼀㻔㻿㼘㼑㼑㼜㻕 㻟㻢㻜㻷㻴㼦 㼚㻲㻭㼄㻝㻞㼋㻼㻵㻯㼋㻵㻺㼀
㻵㻺㼀 㻹㼕㼏㼛㼚㻚
㻔㻟㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕 㻵㻞㻯㻔㻟㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕 㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞 㻵㻞㻯 㻞㻡㻢㼗㼎
㻟㻢㻜㻷㻴㼦 㻲㻭㼄㻔㻝㼟㼠㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻞㼏㼔㻕
㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻹㻭㻯 㼁㻭㻾㼀 㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲 㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲 㻸㼛㼏㼍㼘㻌㻮㼡㼟 㻯㻼㻸㻰
㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳 㻔㻝㻝㼏㼔㻕 㻔㻠㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕 㻔㻝㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕 㻵㻲 㻸㼛㼏㼍㼘㻌㻮㼡㼟 㻱㻼㻹㻞㻠㻜
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕

㻰㻿㼁㻮㻌㻯㻺
㻔㻾㻵㻯㻌㻒㻌㻼㻯㻵㻌㻒㻌
㼂㼑㼚㼐㼑㼞㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻾㻿㻞㻟㻞㻯
㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘
㻯㼛㼚㼢㼑㼞㼠㼑㼞 㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕 㻲㻸㻭㻿㻴㻌㻰㻵㻹㻹
㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㼤㻠㻌㼓㼑㼚㻝 㻲㻸㻭㻿㻴㻌㻰㻵㻹㻹
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㻯㻺㻝 㻞㻚㻡㻳㼎㼜㼟 㻟㻞㻹㻮
㻿㻻㻯㻷㻱㼀
㻔㼂㼑㼚㼐㼑㼞㻌㻒㻌 㼁㻭㻾㼀 㻔㻰㻿㻷㻌㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕
㻼㻯㻵㻕 㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㻯㻺㻞
㻔㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻕 㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕 㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㼤㻝㻌㼓㼑㼚㻝㻌㻞㻚㻡㻳㼎㼜㼟 㻭㻯㻾㻱㻌㻻㼜㼠 㻭㻯㻾㻱
㻯㻺
㻿㻯㻺㻌㻹㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞㻌㻼㼃㻮

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 3
㻼㼃㻮㻌㻔㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕
㻲㻭㼄㻔㻞㼚㼐㻕 㻲㻭㼄㻔㻞㼚㼐㻕㻌
㻔㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕 㻯㻺 㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻞㼏㼔㻕

㻲㻭㼄㻔㻟㼞㼐㻕 㻲㻭㼄㻔㻟㼞㼐㻕
㻔㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕 㻯㻺 㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻞㼏㼔㻕
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠 㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟 㼜㼛㼞㼠㻌㻤
㼀㼅㻼㻱㻙㻭㻌㻯㻺
㻔㻾㼑㼍㼞㻕 㼜㼛㼞㼠㻌㻝

㻸㼍㼚㼑㻌㻝㻙㻠
㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲
㼂㻳㻭㻌 㼁㻿㻮㻌㼤㻝㻜 㻿㻼㻵
㻔㻠㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕
㻭㼐㼍㼜㼠㼑㼞㻌㻯㻺 㼂㻳㻭
㻔㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻕 㻿㻭㼀㻭
㻰㻹㻵 㻰㻹㻵 㻿㻭㼀㻭 㻯㻺
㻔㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻕
㻵㼚㼠㼑㼘 㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲
㻵㼚㼠㼑㼘 㻔㻝㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕
㻼㼕㼚㼑㼢㼕㼑㼣
㻵㻯㻴㻤 㻯㻲
㻸㼂㻰㻿
㻰㻡㻞㻡 㻼㻭㼀㻭
㻯㻲㻌㻯㻺

㻯㻲
㻡㼂㻸㼋㻞㻌㼟㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟
㻤㻳㻮
㻰㻰㻾㻞㻛㻟 㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲 㻔㻭㼀㻻㻹㻌㻼㼞㼛㼓㼞㼍㼙㻕 㼂㻾㻰㻝㻝 㻵㻿㻸㻤㻜㻝㻢
㻵㻲 㻿㻹㼎㼡㼟 㻸㻼㻯
㻔㻝㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕 㻵㻿㻸㻢㻟㻝㻠 㻵㻯㻴㻌㻝㻚㻜㻡㼂

㻟㻜㼜㼕㼚㻌㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻌㻯㻺 㻿㻯㻝㻤㻡㻶 㻵㻿㻸㻤㻜㻝㻢


㻰㻰㻾㻟㻙㻤㻜㻜 㻿㻼㻰 㻔㻿㼡㼜㼑㼞㻌㻵㻻㻘㻌㻣㻿㼑㼓㻕 㻼㻸㻸㻌㻝㻚㻤㼂 㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻝㻚㻡㼂
㼒㼛㼞㻌㻻㼚㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐

㻵㻞㻯㻌㻥㻡㻷㻴㼦
㻯㻼㻸㻰 㻿㻯㻝㻤㻡㻽
㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻻㼚㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
㻱㻼㻹㻞㻠㻜
㻞㻳㻮 㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㼤㻌㻝㻿㼘㼛㼠 㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻔㻞㻳㼎㼇㼤㻤㼉㼤㻤㼜㼏㼟䠅 㻯㻷㻡㻜㻡
㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻳㼑㼚 㻮㻵㻻㻿
㻝㻳㻮㻌㻿㻻㻙㻰㻵㻹㻹 㻿㻼㻵㻌㻞㻹㻮
㻻㼜㼠㻚㻌㻔㼀㻮㻰㻕
D. Scanner control PWB
Scanner control PWB (1/2)

DSPFcnt PWB
IPD/DOCC ASIC
CCD-R PWB
(DSPF side) Tr R-RGB Rx FPD Link
Tr 35bit
Tr Timing
Tr AFE generator SCN LVDS IC Tx
3line color CCD
Tr CLK ASIC 28bit
Power supply 10V/5V/3V 19.661MHz
Tr DRIVER
CS3
Serial system

CS2 CS0orCS1
DRIVER
(74VHCT SRAM F-ROM
DRIVER PWB motor 244) CPU (On-board)
various sensors H8S/2373 CS4
F-ROM
(For saving Shading DATA)

Scanner light source LED LED


DRIVER

MFPC PWB
24VPD
12V
5V Communication, etc.
3.3V
5VO

SCN-MotherCNT PWB
to CPU Back REUS
CCD-F PWB
(Main unit side)
Tr
Tr
Tr Timing F-RGB F-clk line buf
AFE generator Rx FPD Link 16 (8Mx16bit)
Tr
3line color CCD Tr 35bit line buf
(8Mx16bit)
Tr 16
Power supply10V/5V/3V

32bit bus
19.661MHz
LVD
S IC
Tx Front REUS
28bit
CLK
DRIVER SCAN
ASIC

Serial system
IPD/DOCC ASIC
CLFM
(OC cooling FAN) CS3

Document size
sensor CS4
FlashROM
(On-board)
Mirror CS0orCS6
Motor MOTOR
DRIVER

LED CS2
LED
DRIVER CPU SRAM
H8S/2373

MHPsensor E2PROM

OCSW

uart, etc.
TP-IF PWB to CPU
Touch panel

KEY PWB
CS5
Buzzer

HOME KEY
12V
HOME LED LED selector

LED lighting Recovery trigger

Power-saving Power-saving
LED SW
Power SW
Power LED
green 5Vo
Power LED
orange

IO ASIC

PIC

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 4
Scanner control PWB (2/2)

MFPC PWB

SCN-MotherCNT PWB

Recovery trigger
POF
SPED to CPU IO ASIC

PIC
Right tray

LANcnt signal/Communication request/POF

POF signal

Rycnt/OFFcnt signal

LED lighting
FAX reception notifying LED

Recovery trigger
Recovery trigger from FAX Orditor
(TBD)

10.1inch LCD LVDS PWB LCDSEL0, LCDSEL1

24V/5V/3.3V
from CPU
CCFT
LED backlight

Image data
LCD display
LCD_DISP

Image data
LSUcnt PWB TxFPD link RxFPD link
SYNC

24VM5, 5V, 3.3V

12VL
HDD

USB
USB HUB

IC CARD USB CN PWB


Reserve KEYBOARD PWB
READER (Front USB)

FAN
SUB power
FAN 12VL

24V
MFPC
FAN
HDD
FAN 12VL

FAX
Recovery trigger TxFPD link
FAX main
RxFPD link
PWB
24V, 5VL, 5Vo, 3.3V

FAX reception lamp


PWB

LED lighting FAX 5Vo 24V/5Vo/5VL/3.3V


reception LED

5VL 24V/12VL 24VM5/12V/5Vo/5V/3.3V 5Vo

Power supply

Rycnt/OFFcnt signal DCCNT SUB DC SUB DC


DC PWB Communitarian,
PWB PWB2 PWB1 etc.

POF signal
PCU PWB

LANcnt signal/Communication request/POF

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 5
10.1 LCD UN

Hsync
E. Operation unit

Vsync
ENAB

/YL(Y1) /YL(Y1)
XH(X1) XH(X1)
Touch panel /XL(X2) /XL(X2)
YH(Y2) YH(Y2)

Home KEY

Home LED

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 6
Buzzer

Power SW

Power LED

Power save SW

Power save LED

Keyboard

IC card reader
F. LSU PWB

SCLK/TXD/RXD 3
Micro Wire BUS
CS_AK1/CS_AK2 2
Chip select(LDD)
CS_EEP_AK1/CS_EEEP_AK2 2
Chip select(EEP-ROM)

ID[0:0]
Reset Input Reset IC Reset

Motor Control PGM_CK


PCU PGM_START
JOBEND_INT Polygon (PGM_BRAKE) 3
O.C. Polygon
PCU I/F Motor
Control
PGM_LOCK Motor
PCU_TRG
Register
SCK etc...
RSV_DAT
3 TRANS_RST
FAN
Control
Synchronous Serial
communication SCL
SDA
TRANS_DAT WP I2C BUS 3
COM_FIFO

LSU_ASIC MSET_AK1
MSET_AK2 2
(Racoon)
LDERR AK1
OSC SYSCLK
(System CK) 2 INT_AK1/INT_AK2
LD Control

Serial P4_AK1(ENB)
D/A I/F P4_AK2(ENB)
LD
P3_AK1(WAIT) PWB
ECLK ECLK
P3_AK2(WAIT) 4
LVDS/Driver

P2(SH)
HSYNC HSYNC
P1(CH)
2 VSYNC_K/C
P0(SEL) 3
2 VSYNC LD Control
Horizontal Scan (APC
/Vertical Scan /ENB)
VIDEO I/F CK ECLK Timing Control BD

HSYNC HSYNC BD
CLK_C_EN
FPD-LINK/Reciver
FPD-LINK/Reciver

CLK_M_EN
CLK_A_EN

MFP 35:5 chA DT_K1+- 2


8
Channel A:K1
chB 8 DT_K2+- 2
Channel B:K2
chC 8 2
DT_K3+-
Channel C:K3
chD 8 2
DT_K4+-
Channel D:K4

VIDEOIF_ACT

OSCCLK_C OSC CLK_C_EN


(CK C)

OSCCLK_M OSC CLK_M_EN


(CK M)

OSCCLK_A OSC CLK_A_EN


(CK A)

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 7
LIU EX PWB Voltage FAX MAIN PWB
TEL/LIU Regulator
Silicon DAA Connector 3.3V 1.8V MDM3.3V
NJU7772F
Si3056 CHIP SET 18
AFE_CLK
(1) MX-FX11

AFE_RES- STATUS LED_0

ASPCLK PROGRAM
ABITCLK 16bit
G. FAX section

MJ1 ARXD FLASH ROM


Si3019 Si3056 ATX D
(LINE) 16Mb
SPK(analog) MODEM STATUS LED_1
16bit (Not mount)
MMD5020

Crystal
Resonator WORK
24.576MHz 16bit MEMORY RESET- 3.3V
BSPCLK
RESET IC
BBITCLK SDRAM
BRXD 64Mbit
BTXD

+5VA +5V
+5VA
Filter

+5VA FAX IMAGE MFP IF


Speaker
MEMORY Connector
BZ 16bit MDM3.3V +3.3V
(Not mount) Filter
Volume
Power Change EN_SPKON- FLASH ROM With secure
Speaker Amplifier EN_BZON- 16Mbit
Connector 16bit locking
S02B- BU4066 VOLA device
PA SK
LM4819 NJM3414 VOLB +24V
VOLC
VOLD +5V BM30B-
SHLDS
SPMUTE- +3.3V
RGDT-
(CI detection) +5V2
HDMUTE-
RHS- MON_24V- +24V +24V
SI3_RES- Detection
CI2- RES_FAX-

FAX_RXD(D)+
FAX_RXD(D)-
CI
CI- FAX_TXD(D)+
Detection FAX_TXD(D)-

Polarity FAX_CTS(D)-
HS1-
inversion
FAX ASIC FAX_RTS(D)-
Detection HS2-
(Not mount) FAX_RXD(CS)+
MB87F4930 FAX_RXD(CS)-

CION FAX_TXD(CS)+
FAX_TXD(CS)-

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 8
150VON FAX_CTS(CS)-
S relay
+5V2 FAX_RTS(CS)-

FLV PP
MJ2
(TEL) MSGMUTE

OFF fock 16bit Version ID voltage


detection level
ECON

EXHS- CNCT_FAX-
JTAG JTAG
MRON
Connector
14pin
SON1 (Not mount)
CPU
CID-
Download Log SH7706 Voltage
UART 1.9V Regulator 3.3V
Connector
+24V (Not mount) R1173S001B
PIC +12 PICPGM_EN
+12V +24
CI Fi ter microcomputer Spred
UART Crystal
CI Fi ter PIC16F690 Spectrum Resonator
+5V2
CY25811SXCT 14.7456MHz
SON2
WUP_FAX-

voltage TELID
Operation in 1W/7W level
energy-save mode voltage TELID2
level
PCU DSPFcnt SCN-MOTHER MFPC
P.U. TxD P.U. P.U.
RxD RxD UARTB_TXD6
TxD_DSPF RB_TXD_SCN
O.C. P.D. Schmit Inv. O.C.
Schmit Inv.
P.U. RxD P.U.
TxD TxD UARTB_RXD6
CPU RxD_DSPF CPU RB_RXD_SCN
(P.D.) Schmit Inv. P.D. (P.D.) O.C. Schmit Inv.
O.C. A[4:0]
H8S/2373 H8S/2373 P.U. P.U. UARTB_RTS_N6
I/O P.U. I/O ASIC
RTS_DSPF D[15:8] RB_RTS_SCN
P.D.
μPD65892GC O.C.
Schmit Inv. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U. P.U. UARTB_CTS_N6
I/O
CTS_DSPF RB_CTS_SCN
(P.D.) P.U. Schmit Inv.
(P.D.) O.C. Schmit Inv. P.D.
TxD0 P.U.
UARTB_RXD7
nPCU_RxD RB_RXD_PCU
(P.D.) O.C. Schmit Inv.
RxD0 P.U. P.U. UARTB_TXD7
nPCU_TxD RB_TXD_PCU
Schmit Inv. O.C.
P.U.
UARTB_CTS_N7
nPCU_CTS RB_CTS_PCU
(P.D.) O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U. P.U.
UARTB_RTS_N7
nPCU_RTS RB_RTS_PCU
Schmit Inv. O.C.
P.U. RxD
TxD2
TRANS_DAT
(P.D.) Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv.
RxD2 P.U. TxD
H. SERIAL COMMUNICATION

RSV_DAT
Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. (PD)
P.U.
LSU ASIC
/IRQ2 SCK
SCK_LSU (Racoon)
(P.D.) Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv.
CPU MPFC REUS ASIC
H8S/2373 LSU
P.U.
P.U. UARTC_TXD
RC_TXD_PIC
Schmit Inv. O.C.
P.U. UARTC_RXD
RC_RXD_PIC
PICマイコン (P.D.) O.C. Schmit Inv.
PIC16F882 P.U.
PORTC15
RC_CLR_PIC
O.C. P.D.
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
P.U. P.U.
PORTC11
TxD3 RxD RC_REQ_PIC
TxD_FIN (P.D.) O.C. Schmit Inv. P.D.
(P.D.) O.C. O.C.
RxD3 P.U. P.U. P.U. TxD P.U.
UARTB_TXD0
RxD_FIN RB_TXD_FAX1D
O.C. O.C. TxD_FAX(D)+
CPU FINISHER TxD_FAX(D)- 244 UARTB_RXD0
P.U. P.U.
I/O M30843FWGP RB_RXD_FAX1D
RxD_FAX(D)+ P.U.
DTR_FIN (Optional) RxD_FAX(D)- LVDS P.D. 244 UARTB_TXD3
(P.D.) O.C. O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
TxD_FAX(CS)+ RB_TXD_FAX1CS
I/O TxD_FAX(CS)- 244 UART_RXD3
DSR_FIN RxD_FAX(CS)+ RB_RXD_FAX1CS
O.C. O.C. P.D.
RxD_FAX(CS)- 244
P.U. P.U.
UARTB_RTS0
TxD4 P.U. P.U. RxD RB_RTS_FAX1D
TxD_LCC Schmit Inv. O.C P.U. Schmit Inv.
(P.D.)
UARTB_CTS0
O.C. O.C. RB_CTS_FAX1D
RxD4 P.U. P.U. P.U. TxD (P.D.) O.C. P.U. 244 P.U.
RxD_LCC UARTB_RTS3
O.C. RB_RTS_FAX1CS
O.C. CPU LCC/LCT Schmit Inv. P.U. Schmit Inv.
P.U. P.U. I/O H8S/3687 O.C UARTB_CTS3
DTR_LCC (Optional) RB_CTS_FAX1CS
(P.D.) (P.D.)
O.C. O.C. FAX ASIC O.C. 244
P.U.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
UARTB_TXD1
I/O MB87F4930
RB_TXD_FAX2D
DSR_LCC P.U.
O.C. UARTB_RXD1
O.C. RB_RXD_FAX2D
LVDS P.U.
UARTB_TXD4

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 9
RB_TXD_FAX2CS
P.U.
TxD PIC Optional UART_RXD4
CPU RB_RXD_FAX2CS
PIC16F690 FAX2 P.U.
SH7706 RxD UARTB_RTS1

D[15:8]
( Same as 1st FAX ) RB_RTS_FAX2D
1st FAX P.U. O.C. Schmit Inv.
UARTB_CTS1

A[9:0]
RB_CTS_FAX2D
CPLD Schmit Inv Schmit Inv P.U.
UARTB_RTS4
EPM240T100C5 RB_RTS_FAX2CS
P.U. Schmit Inv.
O.C. UARTB_CTS4
RB_CTS_FAX2CS
Schmit Inv Schmit Inv P.U.
UARTB_TXD2
RB_TXD_FAX3D
P.U.
UARTB_RXD2
RB_RXD_FAX3D
LVDS P.U.
UARTB_TXD5
PMC ASIC 2 RB_TXD_FAX3CS
P.U.
Optional UART_RXD5
UPD65946GN-178 RB_RXD_FAX3CS
FAX3 P.U.
UARTB_RTS2
( Same as 1st FAX ) RB_RTS_FAX3D
P.U. O.C. Schmit Inv.
UARTB_CTS2
RB_CTS_FAX3D
Schmit Inv Schmit Inv P.U. UARTB_RTS5
RB_RTS_FAX3CS
P.U. O.C. Schmit Inv.
UARTB_CTS5
RB_CTS_FAX3CS
Schmit Inv Schmit Inv
P.U.
RB_GPI_CTS_PCI PORTB7
P.U.
RB_GPO_RTS_PCI PORTB8
Optional P.U.
RB_TXD_PCI UARTB_TXD8
PCISUB RB_RXD_PCI UARTB_RXD8
P.U.
RB_DTR_PCI PORTB2
P.U.
RB_DSR_PCI PORTB3

P.U.
RB__CTS_RIC UART_CTS_N10
P.U.
RB__RTS_RIC UART_RTS_N10
Optional RS232C P.U.
RS232C RB_TXD_RIC UARTB_TXD10
Coin Vendor/PCI RB_RXD_RIC UARTB_RXD10
Driver RB_DTR_RIC PORTB0
Driver P.U.
RB_DSR_RIC PORTB1
5 4 3 2 1

DC POWER SUPPLY (SANKEN:1H641L)


F301
Voltage
AC PWB Conversion
T5AH/250V +24V1
+24V2
+24V3
+24V4
RC102 +24V5
D +12V D

+
Not Mount +5VN
AC IN F1 F101
+3.3V
L

20A/250V 15A/250V

-
A1 VR1
N/F
A. AC power line diagram
2. Power line diagram

F102
T3.15AH/250V

MAIN POWER SW
(1) AC power line diagram (100V series)

WH PWB (OPTION) FW
Generating
NR101 Circuit F401

Voltage
T3.15AH/250V Conversion
F3 F4 + 5Vo
T2.0AH/250V T2.0AH/250V + 5VL

C C
RY1
NC
WH_CNT
NO

24V3

WH-SW (OPTION) HL PWB

L2

WARM HEATER
RY1
INT24V2

B B

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 10
TD1 TD2 TD3 /HL_PR
LCC TAN CSS CSS SCN T1 G T1 G T1 G
HEATER HEATER HEATER2 HEATER1 HEATER
(OPTION) (OPTION) (OPTION) (OPTION) (OPTION) T2 4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3
10W 18W 10W 10W 10W 1 1 1
HLOUT_US HLOUT_UM HLOUT_UW
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
LCC(OPTION) SCN UNIT
6 6 6

drawer

HL_UM

HL_UW

A HL_US
A
THERMOSTAT TS_UM

THERMOSTAT TS_US

FUSING UNIT

5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1

DC POWER SUPPLY (SANKEN:1H641H)


F301
Voltage
AC PWB Conversion
T5AH/250V
+24V1
+24V2
+24V3
RC102 +24V4
D D

+
Not Mount +24V5
AC IN F1 F101
L +12V
+5VN
T10AH/250V T8AH/250V +3.3V

-
A1 VR1
N/F

F2

N
T10AH/250V

F102
T3.15AH/250V

MAIN POWER SW
(2) AC power line diagram (200V series)

WH PWB (OPTION) FW
Generating
NR101 F401
Circuit
Voltage
T3.15AH/250V Conversion
F3 F4
T2.0AH/250V T2.0AH/250V + 5Vo
+ 5VL

C C
RY1
NC
WH_CNT
NO

24V3

WH-SW (OPTION) HL PWB

L2

L1
WARM HEATER
RY1
INT24V2

B B

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 11
TD1 TD2 TD3 /HL_PR
LCC TAN CSS CSS SCN T1 G T1 G T1 G
HEATER HEATER HEATER2 HEATER1 HEATER
(OPTION) (OPTION) (OPTION) (OPTION) (OPTION) T2 4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3
10W 18W 10W 10W 10W 1 1 1
HLOUT_US HLOUT_UM HLOUT_UW
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
LCC(OPTION) SCN UNIT
6 6 6

drawer

HL_UM

HL_UW

A HL_US
A
THERMOSTAT TS_UM

THERMOSTAT TS_US

FUSING UNIT

5 4 3 2 1
㼃㻱㻮㻹㻌
3&83:% $
DC POWER PWB
9
㼀㼁㻾㻹㻌
$
9

$ $ 㻰㼂㻲㻹㻝㻌


9
'ULYHU 99
㻭㻰㼁㻹㻝㻌 㻼㻻㻲㻹㻝㻌
,F

'ULYHU 99
㻭㻰㼁㻹㻞㻌 㻼㻻㻲㻹㻟㻌
,F
B. DC power line diagram

'ULYHU 99
,F 㻼㻲㻹㻌 㻼㻻㻲㻹㻠㻌

'ULYHU 99
,F 㻼㻻㻹㻌 㻼㻻㻲㻹㻡㻌

99
(1) DC power line diagram (24V)

SOLENOIDO㽢3 㻼㻻㻲㻹㻢㻌
,179
9
)(7 99
'6:5 0&3:% 㻲㼁㻲㻹㻝㻌
$ ,G$
㻲㼁㻲㻹㻞㻌
99
7&3:%
'6:)

㻴㻼㻲㻹㻌
$
㻰㻹㻌 '5,9(53:%

+/3:%

㻲㼁㻹㻌

CLUTCH
9 9
㻾㻾㻹㻌
$ $
㻯㻼㻲㻹㻌 㻯㻯㻹㻌
$ '5,9(53:%

㻼㻿㻲㻹㻝㻌
99
㻰㼂㻹㻌
$
㻼㻿㻲㻹㻞㻌
99
㼀㻺㻹㻌
$
99 99
㼀㻺㻴㻹㻝㻌 㻻㼆㻲㻹㻌 㻼㻾㻻㻲㻹㻌
$
99
㼀㻺㻴㻹㻞㻌 㻸㻿㼁㻲㻹㻌 㻰㼂㻲㻹㻞㻌
$

㼀㻝㻸㼁㻹㻌 SOLENOIDO㽢6 CLUTCH㽢7


$

㼀㻞㻸㼁㻹㻌 :+3:%
$
㻯㻟㻸㼁㻹㻌 㼃㼀㻹㻌
$
㻯㻠㻸㼁㻹㻌 㻴㻰㻰㻲㻹㻌
99
$
/683:% /'3:% 㻼㻳㻹㻌

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 12
6&1027+(53:% 93'
9 '63)&173:% '63)'5,9(53:%
)(7
SOLENOIDO
$ ,G$
$
99
/(''5,9(53:% 㻿㻼㻲㻲㻭㻺㻌 㻯㻸㼁㼀㻯㻴 X4
9 $
'&'&
৒ਗ਼૴ /('3:% 㻿㻸㼁㻹㻌
$ $ $
'ULYHU
㻿㻼㼁㻲㻹㻌 ,F
㻿㻼㻻㻹㻌
$
㻹㻵㻹㻌
9 9
'&'&
/&& ৒ਗ਼૴ /('3:%
9/9'6 9
/9'63:%
/'2 /&'
9 $
),1,6+(5
$
237,21
256/('3:%

0J(1608)

)$;3:%

0)3&3:% )$;3:%

0J(1608)

)$;3:%
DC POWER PWB
6&1027+(53:%
9 '63)&173:% '63)'5,9(53:%

/'2 /'2
㻜㻚㻡㻭㻌 㻜㻚㻡㻭㻌
/'2 /'2

9 㻜㻚㻡㻭㻌 㻜㻚㻡㻭㻌
SENSOR
㽢7
$9
(2) DC power line diagram (12V)

/'2 /'2
&&'3:% $9
㻝㻚㻡㻭㻌 $9 㻝㻚㻡㻭㻌
SENSOR
⁷8
$9 &&'3:% 200Ω
$9

$9
91

2563'3:%

9/9'6
/9'63:% 9
/'2 /&'
$

9

㻿㻼㼃㻿㻌

9
/'2
9
)$;3:%
'&'
9
'&'

0)3&3:%

9
)$;3:%
'&'
91 9
'&'

59B(&2

9
)$;3:%
'&'
9
'&'

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 13
9
/683:% /'3:%
3&83:%
91
%'3:%
9

,179
)(7
㻡㻭㻌
91

'5,9(53:%

91
5',)3:%
):

SENSOR
91

SENSOR

91

/&&

91

),1,6+(5

237,21
DC POWER PWB '63)'5,9(53:%
92 6&1027+(53:% '63)&173:%

$
92
+20(.(<3:%
3,&

92
(3) DC power line diagram (5V)

)$;,1)2
/('3:%
)(7

,G$
)URQW86% 

92GXW\

SENSOR
㻌㻞㻜㻜Ω
3&8
SENSOR

9/
9/
0J(3216)
+''
0J(3216)

5$,'3:% +''

92
)$;3:%
7(//,83:%

9/

$

92
0)3&3:% )$;3:% 7(//,83:%

SC196
9/

SC196
ISL8016IRAJZ 9B(&2 9B21
'&' '&'

SC185HULTRT 9B21
'&' 9B(&2 '&'
)$;3:% 7(//,83:%
SC185QULTRT 9B(&2
'&'

9B$720
)(7
ISL6314
'&'
9B$720

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 14
ISL8016IRAJZ 9B$720 $&5(3:%
'&'

ISL8016IRAJZ 9B3&,
9B$720
'&' )(7 +66:

SC185JULTRT 9B$720 &/$


'&'

SC185QULTRT
5HDU86%
9B$720)(7 9B6
'&'
$

+66: )URQW86%

&/$ $
+66: .(<%2$5'

&/$ $
+66: :L)L

&/$

+66: &$5'5($'(5

&/$
㻤㻌 㻣㻌 㻢㻌 㻡㻌 㻠㻌 㻟㻌 㻞㻌 㻝㻌
A. MFP

㻝㻛㻝㻝㻌
㻲㻌

6&1027+(53:% 0)3&3:%

㻲㻌
CN11 CN15
LCD_DATA0- 1 1 LCD_DATA0- CN7
LCD_DATA0+ 2 2 LCD_DATA0+
LCD_DATA1- 3 3 LCD_DATA1- +5V 1 86%
LCD_DATA1+ 4 4 LCD_DATA1+ D- 2
LCD_DATA2- 5 5 LCD_DATA2-
LCD_DATA2+ 6 6 LCD_DATA2+ D+ 3 7<3($+267 
LCD_CLK- 7 7 LCD_CLK- GND2 4
LCD_CLK+ 8 8 LCD_CLK+
LCD_DATA3- 9 9 LCD_DATA3-
8$5.-
LCD_DATA3+ 10 10 LCD_DATA3+ CN8 VFDQQHUH[SDQVLRQ$&5(
nLCD_DISP 11 11 nLCD_DISP +5V 1
LCD_REFCLKIN 12 12 LCD_REFCLKIN
86%
SCAN_DATA3+ 13 13 SCAN_DATA3+ D- 2
SCAN_DATA3- 14 14 SCAN_DATA3- D+ 3 7<3(%'(9,&( 
SCAN_CLKOUT+ 15 15 SCAN_CLKOUT+
SCAN_CLKOUT- 16 16 SCAN_CLKOUT-
GND2 4
SCAN_DATA2+ 17 17 SCAN_DATA2+ 8%5.
SCAN_DATA2- 18 18 SCAN_DATA2- CN9
SCAN_DATA1+ 19 19 SCAN_DATA1+
SCAN_DATA1- 20 20 SCAN_DATA1- TRP1+ 1 0)3&3:% $&5(3:%
SCAN_DATA0+ 21 21 SCAN_DATA0+ TRP1- 2
SCAN_DATA0- 22 22 SCAN_DATA0- CN1
CH0_N 23 23 CH0_N
TRP2+ 3 CN2
CH0_P 24 24 CH0_P TRP2- 4 NC 31 GND 1 1 GND 31 NC
CH1_N 25 25 CH1_N TRP3+ 5 /$1 NC 32 NC 2 2 NC 32 NC
3. Actual wiring chart

CH1_P 26 26 CH1_P
CH2_N 27 27 CH2_N TRP3- 6 NC 33 NC 3 3 NC 33 NC
CH2_P 28 28 CH2_P TRP4+ 7 NC 34 NC 4 4 NC 34 NC
CLK_N 29 29 CLK_N TRP4- 8 NC 35 NC 5 5 NC 35 NC
CLK_P 30 30 CLK_P
8 NC 36 NC 6 6 NC 36 NC
㻱㻌

CH3_N 31 31 CH3_N

㻱㻌
CH3_P 32 32 CH3_P NC 37 NC 7 7 NC 37 NC
CH4_N 33 33 CH4_N CN10
CH4_P 34 34 CH4_P NC 38 NC 8 8 NC 38 NC
㼞㼛ECLK_LSU_N 35
㼠㼏㼑㼚㼚㼛㻯㻌㻰㻾㻭㻻㻮㻌㻻㼀㻌ECLK_LSU_N
㻰㻾㻭㻻㻮 35 CD 1 NC 39 NC 9 9 NC 39 NC
ECLK_LSU_P ECLK_LSU_P
36 36 RXD 2 NC 40 NC 10 10 NC 40 NC
HSYNC_LSU_P 37 37 HSYNC_LSU_P
HSYNC_LSU_N 38 38 HSYNC_LSU_N TXD 3 NC 41 NC 11 11 NC 41 NC
VSYNC_K_N 39 39 VSYNC_K_N REUS_PCIE1_TX0N REUS_PCIE1_RX0P REUS_PCIE1_RX0P REUS_PCIE1_TX0N
DTR 4 42 12 12 42
VSYNC_K_P 40 40 VSYNC_K_P REUS_PCIE1_TX0P REUS_PCIE1_RX0P REUS_PCIE1_RX0P REUS_PCIE1_TX0P
VSYNC_C_P 41 41 VSYNC_C_P
GND2 5 56& 43 13 13 43
VSYNC_C_N 42 42 VSYNC_C_N DSR 6 NC 44 NC 14 14 NC 44 NC
VSYNC_M_N 43 43 VSYNC_M_N RTS 7 RB_TXD_DEBUG 45 NC 15 15 NC 45 RB_TXD_DEBUG
VSYNC_M_P 44 44 VSYNC_M_P
CTS 8 RB_RXD_DEBUG 46 NC 16 16 NC 46 RB_RXD_DEBUG
VSYNC_Y_P 45 45 VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N 46 46 VSYNC_Y_N RI 9 NC 47 NC 17 17 NC 47 NC
LCDSEL0 47 47 LCDSEL0 ACRE_REF_CLKP ACRE_REF_CLKP
LCDSEL1 48 48 LCDSEL1
'%5) 48 NC 18 18 NC 48
+5VL 49 49 +5VL ACRE_REF_CLKN 49 NC 19 19 NC 49 ACRE_REF_CLKN
+5VL 50 50 +5VL GND2 1 NC 50 NC 20 20 NC 50 NC
+5VL 51 51 +5VL RC_GPI_ACREOPT_INSERT_N R_PLD_GPO_RST_ACRE R_PLD_GPO_RST_ACRE RC_GPI_ACREOPT_INSERT_N
+5VL 52 52 +5VL GND2 2 51 21 21 51
R_PLD_GPO_RST_ACREPCIE R_PLD_GPO_RST_ACREPCIE
+5VL 53 53 +5VL +3.3V 3 NC 52 22 22 52 NC
+5VL 54 54 +5VL
+5VL 55 55 +5VL
+3.3V 4 3R3V ON 53 NC 23 23 NC 53 3R3V ON
+5VL 56 56 +5VL nCNCT FAX 5 NC 54 NC 24 24 NC 54 NC
㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰㻌㼀㻻㻌㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼛㼞㻌

+5VL 57 57 +5VL FAXD TXD N 6 GND 55 5VN 25 25 5V IN 55 GND


+5VL 58 58 +5VL
TXD_LCDsub 59 59 TXD_LCDsub FAXD TXD P 7 GND 56 5VN 26 26 5V IN 56 GND
RXD_LCDsub 60 60 RXD_LCDsub +5VL 8 GND 57 5VN 27 27 5V IN 57 GND
PNL_USB_DN 61 61 PNL_USB_DN
PNL_USB_DP 62 62 PNL_USB_DP
nRES FAX 9 GND 58 5VN 28 28 5V IN 58 GND
USB_VBUS 63 63 USB_VBUS FAXCS TXD P 10 GND 59 5VN 29 29 5V IN 59 GND
MT_USB_RTN_P 64 64 MT_USB_RTN_P FAXCS TXD N 11 GND 60 5VN 30 30 5V IN 60 GND

㻰㻌
㻰㻌

MT_USB_RTN_N 65 65 MT_USB_RTN_N
PICVPPON 66 66 PICVPPON GND 12 &1 6< 㻥㻤㻢㻜㻮㻙㻢㻜㼅㻥㻞㻝
RXD_SCN 67 67 RXD_SCN FAXD RXD N 13
nCTS_SCN 68 68 nCTS_SCN FAXD RXD P 14
TXD_SCN 69 69 TXD_SCN QG)$;81
nRTS_SCN 70 70 nRTS_SCN nFAX WUP 15
nRES_SCN 71 71 nRES_SCN FAXCS RXD 16
nRES_PCU 72 72 nRES_PCU 237,21 
RXD_PCU 73 73 RXD_PCU
FAXCS RXD N 17
nCTS_PCU 74 74 nCTS_PCU +5VL 18

㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰㻌㼀㻻㻌㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼛㼞㻌
TXD_PCU 75 75 TXD_PCU GND2 19 
nRTS_PCU 76 76 nRTS_PCU
nPOF_MFPC 77 77 nPOF_MFPC nFAXD RTS 20
nREQ_PIC 78 78 nREQ_PIC GND2 21 &1
nCLR_PIC 79 79 nCLR_PIC
TXD_PIC 80 80 TXD_PIC
nFAXD CTS 22
RXD_PIC 81 81 RXD_PIC FLVPP 23 UG)$;81
PWM 82 82 PWM nFAXCS RTS 24
nCNCT_FAN 83 83 nCNCT_FAN
7(//,83:% )$;3:% nRST_PIC 84 84 nRST_PIC +5V0 25 237,21IRU-DSDQ 
USB_VBUS_CTRL 85 85 USB_VBUS_CTRL nFAXCS CTS 26
PWM2 86 86 PWM2
CN2 CN7 CN1 CN18 nREQ_PIC_INT 87 87 nREQ_PIC_INT
+24V3 27
+24V 1 1 +24V PGND 1 31 PGND TXD_FAX_D 88 88 TXD_FAX_D +3.3V 28
AGND 2 2 AGND DGND 2 30 DGND RXD_FAX_D 89 89 RXD_FAX_D +3.3V 29
nRTS_FAX_D 90 90 nRTS_FAX_D
+24V 3 3 +24V +3.3V 3 29 +3.3VN nCTS_FAX_D 91 91 nCTS_FAX_D GND2 30
AGND 4 4 AGND +3.3V 4 28 +3.3VN TXD_FAX_CS 92 92 TXD_FAX_CS GND1 31
+24V1 27 +24V1 RXD_FAX_CS 93 93 RXD_FAX_CS
150VON 5 5 150VON 6 nRTS_FAX_CS 94 94 nRTS_FAX_CS
%%&65.
CION 6 6 CION nFAXCS CTS 5 26 nCTS_FAX_CS nCTS_FAX_CS 95 95 nCTS_FAX_CS
MSGMUTE 7 7 MSGMUTE +5V A 8 25 +5VO nRES_FAX 96 96 nRES_FAX +''VWDQGDUG
nCNCT_FAX 97 97 nCNCT_FAX
HS1- 8 8 HS1- nFAXCS RTS 7 24 nRTS FAX CS

㻯㻌
nWU_FAX2 98 98 nWU_FAX2
㻯㻌

72/,1( 0- HS2- 9 9 HS2- FLVPP 10 23 +3.3VN 3R3V_ECO 99 99 3R3V_ECO CN4


+''$ 5$,'3:% +''%
1 TEL1 CI- 10 10 CI- nFAXD CTS 9 22 nCTS_FAX_D INT_TP 100 100 INT_TP GND2 1  *1' &1 6$7$6,*1$/ 32:(5


+3.3VN 101 101 +3.3VN
2 L1 EXHS- 11 11 EXHS- DGND 12 21 DGND +3.3VN 102 102 +3.3VN SATA0 TX P 2  6$7$B7;3 *1'   *1'
3 L2 SON1 12 12 SON1 nFAXD RTS 11 20 nRTS FAX D +3.3VN 103 103 +3.3VN SATA0 TX N 3  6$7$B7;1 6$7$B7;3   6$7$B7;3
USB_VBUS_CTRL2 104 104 USB_VBUS_CTRL2
4 TEL2 SON2 13 13 SON2 DGND 14 19 DGND +5VO 105 105 +5VO GND2 4  *1' 6$7$B7;1   6$7$B7;1
0--5' /) ECON 14 14 ECON +5V OFF 16 18 +5VL LAN_CNT 106 106 LAN_CNT SATA0 RX N 5  6$7$B5;1 *1'   *1'
MRON 15 15 MRON FAXCS RXD N 13 17 FAX RXD CS N LCDSEL2 107 107 LCDSEL2 SATA0 RX P 6  6$7$B5;3 6$7$B5;1   6$7$B5;1
LCDSEL3/nSCU_RES_REQ 108 108 LCDSEL3/nSCU_RES_REQ

TELID 16 16 TELID FAXCS RXD 15 16 FAX_RXD_CS_P GND2 7  *1' 6$7$B5;3   6$7$B5;3


DGND 109 109 DGND
CI2- 17 17 CI2- nFAX WUP 18 15 nWU_FAX DGND 110 110 DGND ,06$%< 1&  9 *1'   *1'

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 15
14 FAX_RXD_D_P DGND 111 111 DGND 1&  9 1&  9
NC 18 18 NC FAXD RXD P 17 DGND 112 112 DGND
6$73%%
TELID2 19 19 TELID2 FAXD RXD N 19 13 FAX RXD D N DGND 113 113 DGND CN3 1&  9 1&  9
NC 20 20 NC DGND 20 12 DGND DGND 114 114 DGND A SCLK 1 1&  '*1' 1&  9
DGND 115 115 DGND
GND2 21 21 GND2 FAXCS TXD N 21 11 FAX_TXD_CS_N DGND 116 116 DGND B LD 2 1&  '*1'  '*1'
+3.3V 22 22 +3.3V FAXCS TXD P 23 10 FAX_TXD_CS_P DGND 117 117 DGND C DO 3 1&  '*1' &1  '*1'
72(;7(/ 9 nRES FAX DGND 118 118 DGND 1&  9+' *1'   '*1'
0- GND2 23 23 GND2 nRES FAX 22 NC 119 119 NC
Y DI 4
1 TEL1 +5VS 24 24 +5VS +5V OFF 24 8 +5VL +24V1_FAX 120 120 +24V1_FAX GND 5 1&  9+' 9&&9   9+'
2 TEL2 GND2 25 25 GND2 FAXD TXD P 25 7 FAX_TXD_D_P %0%65667%7 /) 61  9+' *1'   9+'
0--5' /) SI3 RES- 26 26 SI3 RES- FAXD TXD N 27 6 FAX_TXD_D_N  '*1' %0%3$667)7  9+'
SPK 27 27 SPK nCNCT FAX 26 5 nCNCT FAX 7;3/7+( 7;5/7+(  '*1'  '*1'
MDM ATXD 28 28 MDM ATXD +3.3V 28 4 +3.3VN  '*1'  '*1'
72+$1'6(7 &1 MDM ARXD 29 29 MDM ARXD +3.3V 29 3 +3.3VN 1&  9  '*1'
1 TX+ MDM_ABITCLK 30 30 MDM_ABITCLK DGND 30 2 DGND CN2 1&  9 3$396 1&  9
-$3$1  2 RX+ MDM_ASPCLK 31 31 MDM_ASPCLK %0%6+/'6*7)7 1& 1 PGND %39+ 4536&  4533&  1&  9 1&  9
3 RX- RGDT- 32 32 RGDT- 6+/'396 % %%&65. 5VHD 1 4 5VHD 4 6$7$6,*1$/ 32:(5 1&  9
㻮㻌

㻮㻌
4 TX- MDM CLK 33 33 MDM CLK &653. GND 2 5 GND 5
5 DG AFERES- 34 34 AFERES- GND 3 8 GND 8
6 RHS- BBITCLK 35 35 BBITCLK 9+51
BSPCLK 36 36 BSPCLK
BRXD 37 37 BRXD CN3 &1
BTXD 38 38 BTXD A SCLK 1  $B6&/.
HDMUTE- 39 39 HDMUTE- B LD 2  %B/'
RHS- 40 40 RHS- C DO 3  &B'2 +''$
7;567+ 7;367+ Y DI 4  <B',
GND 5  *1' &1 6$7$6,*1$/ 32:(5
%0%65667%7 /) 61 6+596% 6+596% %0%65667%7 *1'   *1'
CN4 &1 7;3   6$7$B7;3
GND2 1  *1' 7;1   6$7$B7;1
CN2 SATA0 TX P 2  7;3 *1'   *1'
1 SP- SATA0 TX N 3  7;1 5;1   6$7$B5;1
63($.(5 2 SP+ GND2 4  *1' 5;3   6$7$B5;3
6%3$6. /) 61 SATA0 RX N 5  5;1 *1'   *1'
3$396 SATA0 RX P 6  5;3 95   9
GND2 7  *1' 95   9
,06$%< 1&  95 95   9
1&  95 *1'   '*1'
1&  95 *1'   '*1'
 *1' *1'   '*1'
 *1' 9   9+'
㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌

㻭㻌
㻭㻌

5$,' 237,21   *1' 9   9+'


CN2  9 9   9+'
%39+ 4536&  4533&   9 *1'   '*1'
5VHD 1 4 5VHD 4  9 *1'   '*1'
GND 2 5 GND 5  *1' *1'   '*1'
GND 3 8 GND 8  *1' 9   9
 *1' 9   9
9+51 1&  9 9   9
1&  9 )%*=/
1&  9
6$73.6%)*

㻤㻌 㻣㻌 㻢㻌 㻡㻌 㻠㻌 㻟㻌 㻞㻌 㻝㻌
B. Scanner

CN20 CN12 CN19 CN1

PCU TxD 9 1 PCU TxD GND 50 50 GND


PCU RES 8 2 PCU RES GND 49 49 GND
PCU RxD 7 3 PCU RxD GND 48 48 GND
/POF 6 4 /POF GND 47 47 GND
PCU RTS 5 5 PCU RTS GND 46 46 GND
PRTPDout 4 6 PRTPDout GND 45 45 GND
PCU_CTS 3 7 PCU_CTS GND 44 44 GND
5VO 2 8 5VO GND 43 43 GND
GND 1 9 GND GND 42 42 GND
GND 41 41 GND
CN AFE SDO 40 40 SDO C
AFE SDIO 39 39 SDI C
AFE SCLK 38 38 SCLK C
AFE CS 37 37 CS C
RES CCDAD 36 36 RESET C
GND 35 35 GND
A3.3V 34 34 +3.3V IN
A3.3V 33 33 +3.3V IN
A3.3V 32 32 +3.3V IN
A3.3V 31 31 +3.3V IN
A3.3V 30 30 +3.3V IN
A3.3V 29 29 +3.3V IN
GND 28 28 GND
A5V 27 27 +5V IN
A5V 26 26 +5V IN
A5V 25 25 +5V IN
GND 24 24 GND
A10V 23 23 +10V IN
A10V 22 22 +10V IN
GND 21 21 GND
CN_TA_N 20 20 TX0N
CN TA P 19 19 TX0P
GND 18 18 GND
CN TB N 17 17 TX1N
CN TB P 16 16 TX1P
GND 15 15 GND
CN TC N 14 14 TX2N
CN TC P 13 13 TX2P
GND 12 12 GND
CN TCLK N 11 11 TXSYNCN
CN TCLK P 10 10 TXSYNCP
GND 9 9 GND
CN TD N 8 8 TX3N
CN TD P 7 7 TX3P
GND 6 6 GND
CN TE N 5 5 TX4N
CN TE P 4 4 TX4P
CCD SEL2 3 3 GND
CCD SEL1 2 2 SEL1
GND 1 1 GND

CN3

CN AU PNC 1
CN AU COPY 2
CN AU CA 3
CN AU READY 4
CN AU AUD 5
5V 6
GND 7
24V 8
CN COL 9
CN AU TC 10
24V 11
CN AU nPNC-a 12
GND 13

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 16
CN24 6 MIM_NB
5 -
MIM NB 1 4 MIM B
MIM B 2 3 MIM NA
MIM NA 3 2 -
MIM A 4 1 MIM A

CN22

nMHPS 1 3 nMHPS
GND 2 2 GND
5V 3 1 +5V

CN21
CN1 CN2
24V 5 1 24V IN IDRV1 1 1 IDRV1
24V 4 2 24V IN IDRV2 2 2 IDRV2
CL ON 3 3 LAMP ON/OFF IDRV3 3 3 IDRV3
GND 2 4 GND IDRV4 4 4 IDRV4
GND 1 5 GND IDRV5 5 5 IDRV5
IDRV6 6 6 IDRV6
Vout 7 7 Vin

1 5V
CN20 2 GND
3 nOCSW
5V 1
GND 2
/OCSW 3
24V 4 +24V
/SIZE LED1 5 CN nSIZE LED1
/SIZE LED2 6 CN nSIZE LED2
GND
1

CN23

GND 1 41 GND 40 (NC)


CN nLCD DI 2 40 CN nLCD DI 36 (NC)
GND 3 39 GND OPE_+3.3V 1 39 3.3V
C. Operation panel

CN LCDSEL0 4 38 CN LCDSEL0 OPE_+3.3V 2 38 3.3V


GND 5 37 GND DDC_+3.3V 3 37 3.3V
LCD A3 P 6 36 LCD A3 P CN_EDID_SCL_OUT 4 35 CLKEDID
LCD A3 N 7 35 LCD A3 N CN_EDID_SDA_OUT 5 34 DATAEDID
GND 8 34 GND TX_OUT_0N 6 33 TX_OUT0-
LCD CLK P 9 33 LCD CLK P TX_OUT_0P 7 32 TX_OUT0+
LCD CLK N 10 32 LCD CLK N GND 8 31 D-GND
GND 11 31 GND TX_OUT_1N 9 30 TX_OUT1-
LCD A2 P 12 30 LCD A2 P TX_OUT_1P 10 29 TX_OUT1+
LCD A2 N 13 29 LCD A2 N GND 11 28 D-GND
GND 14 28 GND TX_OUT_2N 12 27 TX_OUT2-
LCD A1 P 15 27 LCD A1 P TX_OUT_2P 13 26 TX_OUT2+
LCD A1 N 16 26 LCD A1 N GND 14 25 D-GND
GND 17 25 GND TX_CLKOUT_N 15 24 TCLK-
LCD A0 P 18 24 LCD A0 P TX_CLKOUT_P 16 23 TCLK+
LCD A0 N 19 23 LCD A0 N GND 17 22 D-GND
GND 20 22 GND GND 18 19 D-GND
CN nCCFT 21 21 CN nCCFT GND 19 16 D-GND
CN YH(Y2) 22 20 CN YH(Y2) GND 20 13 D-GND
CN nXL(X2) 23 19 CN nXL(X2) GND 21 10 D-GND
CN nYL(Y1) 24 18 CN nYL(Y1) GND 22 9 D-GND
CN XH(X1) 25 17 CN XH(X1) GND 23 8 D-GND
GND 26 16 GND CCFT_OUT 24 6 CCFT_out
5V LVDS 27 15 5V LVDS DISP_OUT 25 5 DISP_out
5V LVDS 28 14 5V LVDS LCD_+18V 26 3 18V_LCD
5V_LVDS 29 13 5V_LVDS LCD_+18V 27 2 18V_LCD
5V LVDS 30 12 5V LVDS LCD_+18V 28 1 18V_LCD
GND 31 11 GND (NC) 29 21 (NC)
GND 32 10 GND (NC) 30 20 (NC)
24V LVDS 33 9 24V LVDS (NC) 31 18 (NC)
24V LVDS 34 8 24V LVDS (NC) 32 17 (NC)
24V LVDS 35 7 24V LVDS (NC) 33 15 (NC)
24V LVDS 36 6 24V LVDS (NC) 34 14 (NC)
GND 37 5 GND (NC) 35 12 (NC)
GND 38 4 GND (NC) 36 11 (NC)
GND 39 3 GND (NC) 37 7 (NC)
GND 40 2 GND (NC) 38 4 (NC)
GND 41 1 GND (NC) 39
(NC) 40
(NC) 41

For Japan
1 GND XH(X1) 1
2 12V /YL(Y1) 2
3 INFO_L_G /XL(X2) 3
4 INFO_L_R YH(Y2) 4
5 XH(X1)
6 /YL(Y1)
6 GND 7 /XL(X2)
5 PD 8 YH(Y2)
4 5V
3 PDSEL2
2 PDSEL1
1 PDSEL0

CN25

5VO 1
5VO 2
nHOME KEY 3
nBZR 4
CN nXL(X2) 5
CN YH(Y2) 6
GND 7
GND 8 11 12V 11
5V 9 10 CN_XH(X1) 10
GND 10 9 CN_nYL(Y1) 9
PD 11 7 CN_nXL(X2) 7
CN nYL(Y1) 12 8 CN_YH(Y2) 8 11 GND
PDSEL2 13 6 GND 6 10 GND(POW_LED2)
PDSEL1 14 4 CN_BZR 4 9 nBZR
PDSEL0 15 1 CN_nHOME_KEY 1 8 nHM_KEY
CN XH(X1) 16 2 CN_nOPELED_F0 2 7 F0(nHM_LED)

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 17
nF0 17 3 CN_OPELED_SEG0 3 6 SEG0(LED_MATRIX_12V)

SEG0 18 5 +5VO 5 5 nWU_KEY


nWU_KEY 19 4 WU_LED
nWU LED 20 3 5VO
NC/(nKEYIN) 21 2 POW_LED
nPWR LED 22 1 nPOW_SW
NC 23
NC 24 1 nWU_KEY 1
nPWR SW 25 2 WU_LED 2
nFAX_INFO_LE 26 3 POW_LED_R 3
4 nPWR_SW_G 4
5 INFO_LED-G 5
6 INFO_LED-R 6
7 GND 7
CN14

SHIELD 1 1 SHIELD 6
GND 2 2 GND 5 CARD READER(OPTION)
D4+ 3 3 D4+ 4
D4- 4 4 D4- 3
VBUS 5 5 VBUS 2
6 NC 1
6 (NC) 6 6 F-GND 6 GY F-GND
SHIELD 6 5 Shield3 5 5 Shield3 5 GY Shield3
GND 7 4 DGND3 4 4 DGND3 4 GY DGND3

D3- 9 2 D3- 2 2 D3- 2 LB D3-


VBUS 10 1 VBUS3 1 1 VBUS3 1 BL VBUS3
SHIELD 11
GND 12
D1+ 13 1 5VO
D1- 14 2 nFAX_INFO_LED
VBUS 15 3 NC

1 SHIELD SHIELD -
2 GND GND 4
3 D1+ D1+ 3
4 D1- D1- 2 FRONT USB
5 VBUS VBUS 1

CN13

SHIELD 1 1 SHIELD
GND 2 2 GND
D2+ 3 3 D4+
D2- 4 4 D4-
VBUS 5 5 VBUS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
D. DSPF

㻠㻛㻝㻝㻌

6&29
1 D SCOV
2 GND
3 5V(sensor)

F
F

  9+36*$


6&1027+(53:% '63)FQW3:% '63)&&'3:% '63)'5,9(53:% CN4 63('
D SCOV 6 1 D SPED1
GND 1 2 GND
'63)&&'))&7$8 5V(sensor) 5 3 5V(sensor)
CN15 3+'596 3+'596 CN5 D_SPED1 8   9+36*$
GND 1 1 GND CN4 CN1 GND 2
GND 2 2 GND GND 40 40 GND 5V(sensor) 7 678'
+24VPD 3 3 +24VPD CN AFE CS 39 39 CS C D STUD 10 1 D STUD
+24VPD 4 4 +24VPD GND 38 38 GND GND 3 2 GND
+24VPD 5 5 +24VPD CN_TE_P 37 37 TX4P 5V(sensor) 9 3 5V(sensor)
+24VPD 6 6 +24VPD CN_TE_N 36 36 TX4N GND 4   9+36*$
+12V 7 7 +12V GND 35 35 GND D_RANDOM 12
+5V 8 8 +5V CN TD P 34 34 TX3P 5V 11 635'0'
+5VO 9 9 +5VO CN_TD_N 33 33 TX3N GND 17 1 GND
+5V SPF 10 10 +5V SPF GND 32 32 GND D SPPD1 14 2 D RANDOM
+3.3V 11 11 +3.3V CN TCLK P 31 31 TXSYNCP 5V 13 3 5V
+3.3V 12 12 +3.3V CN_TCLK_N 30 30 TXSYNCN 24V_TR 15 3+5 3+5 9+3*3$/
GND 13 13 GND GND 29 29 GND /D_SPFC 16
GND 14 14 GND CN TC P 28 28 TX2P GND 18 1& 633'
%%3+'66% %%3+'66% CN_TC_N 27 27 TX2N %%3+'66% 3+'596 1 GND
GND 26 26 GND 2 D SPPD1
CN17 CN6 CN TB P 25 25 TX1P 3 5V

E
E

CN_nRTS_DSPF 1 1 CN_nCTS_SCN CN TB N 24 24 TX1N 3+5 3+5 9+3*3$/


GND 2 2 GND GND 23 23 GND 6039%&6059%
CN_nCTS_DSPF 3 3 CN_nRTS_SCN CN_TA_P 22 22 TX0P 1 24V TR 1
DSDATA_3P 4 4 DSDATA_3P CN TA N 21 21 TX0N 2 /D_SPFC 2 63)& 3&/&)&==
CN TXD DSPF 5 5 CN RXD SCN GND 20 20 GND
DSDATA 3N 6 6 DSDATA 3N A10V 19 19 +10V_IN
CN_RXD_DSPF 7 7 CN TXD SCN A10V 18 18 +10V_IN
GND 8 8 GND GND 17 17 GND
GND 9 9 GND A5V 16 16 +5V IN
DSCLKOUT P 10 10 DSCLKOUT P A5V 15 15 +5V_IN CN9
CN_nDSPF_INT 11 11 CN_nDSPF_INT A5V 14 14 +5V IN %%3+'66% 
DSCLKOUT_N 12 12 DSCLKOUT_N GND 13 13 GND GND 1 1 GND 4
GND 13 13 GND A3.3V 12 12 +3.3V_IN D STSET 2 2 D STSET 3
GND 14 14 GND A3.3V 11 11 +3.3V_IN /D STMPS 3 3 /D STMPS 2 67036
CN_nRES_DSPF 15 15 CN_nRES_DSPF A3.3V 10 10 +3.3V IN 24V_STMP 4 4 24V_STMP 1
DSDATA 2P 16 16 DSDATA 2P A3.3V 9 9 +3.3V IN /D STRRBC 5 1&
CN_nDSPFUP 17 17 GND A3.3V 8 8 +3.3V_IN 24V_TR 6 1& 3+15+%83753+3+15+
DSDATA 2N 18 18 DSDATA 2N GND 7 7 GND /D STRRC 7 2 /D STRRC 1 6755&
(NC) 19 1& 1& 19 (NC) CN_CCD_SEL 6 6 SEL 24V_TR 8 1 24V_TR 2 3&/&)&=
GND 20 20 GND CN_RES_CCDAD 5 5 RESET C /D SRRBC 9 1&
CN SPED 21 21 SPED CN_AFE_SCLK 4 4 SCLK_C 24V TR 10 1&
DSDATA 1P 22 22 DSDATA 1P CN_AFE_SDIO 3 3 SDI_C /D SPFMBout 11 1&
GND 23 23 nLVDS_STBY_SCN CN_AFE_SDO 2 2 SDO C /D SPFMAout 13 1&
DSDATA 1N 24 24 DSDATA 1N GND 1 1 GND NC 15 1&

D
D

(NC) 25 1& 1& 25 (NC) )+669 )+669 NC 16 1&


GND 26 26 GND D SPFMAout 17 1&
CN_nPOF_DSPF 27 27 CN_nPOF_DSPF D_SPFMBout 19 1& 3+15+%83753+3+15+
DSDATA 0P 28 28 DSDATA 0P /D SRRC 20 2 /D SRRC 1 655&
GND 29 29 GND 24V_TR 12 1 24V_TR 2 3&/&)&=
DSDATA 0N 30 30 DSDATA 0N GND 25 1&
%%3+'66% 3+'596 3+'596 %%3+'66% FANPWM 26 1&
FANCOM 27 1&
)*1' )*1' &1 D_FAN_LOCK 28 1& 60391&60591
65$7 65$7 SPFFAN +V 1 24V TR 14 1 24V TR 1 675&
SPFFAN_GND 2 63))$1 /D_STRC 18 2 /D_STRC 2 3&/&)&=
SPFFAN_SIG 3 NC 21 1&
 NC 22 1&
 24V_SPFM 23 1&
24V_SPFM 24 1&
3+'596 63/6
633' ;5+3 CN2 CN6 1 D_SPLS1
GND 3 1 GND 3 +5V 1 1 5V 2 GND
CN SPPD2 2 2 CN SPPD2 2 GND 2 2 GND CN1 3 5V(sensor)
5V 1 3 5V 1 CN_SPFFAN 3 3 D_SPFFAN D_SPLS1 2   9+3*363
  GND 4 4 GND GND 1
9+3*3$/ CN SPPD1 5 5 D SPPD1 5V(sensor) 3 63/6
CN_SPRANDO 6 6 D_RANDOM D_SPLS2 8 1 D_SPLS2
633' CN SCOV 7 7 D SCOV GND 9 2 GND

C
C

GND 1 3 CN SPOD 8 8 D SPOD 5V(sensor) 7 3 5V(sensor)


CN_SPPD3 2 2 CN_SPUM_A 9 9 D_SPUMA VAREF 4   9+3*363
+5V 3 1 CN_SPUM_XA 10 10 D_SPUMXA D_SPWS 5
%%3+.6 &.+3& CN1 CN_SPUM_B 11 11 D_SPUMB GND 6 3+15+%83753+3+15+ 63:6
9+3*3$/ 㻮 㻞㻠㻮㻙㻯㼆㼃㻴㻷㻙㼂㻙㻮㻙㻝 CN SPUM XB 12 12 D SPUMXB %%3+.6 3 VAREF 1 VAREF
A-1 GND CN_SLUM_A 13 13 D_SLUMA 2 D_SPWS 2 D_SPWS

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 18
633' A-2 CN_SPPD2 CN_SLUM_XA 14 14 D_SLUMXA 1 GND 3 GND
GND 1 3 A-3 5V CN_SLUM_B 15 15 D_SLUMB 3+5 &3:%))&(
CN SPPD4 2 2 A-4 GND CN SLUM XB 16 16 D SLUMXB
+5V 3 1 A-5 CN_SPPD3 CN_SPOM_EN 17 17 D_SPOM_ENA
%%3+.6 &.+3& A-6 +5V CN_SPOM_STE 18 18 D_SPOM_STEP 63('
46:3)&== A-7 GND CN_SPOM_MOD 19 1& 1& 19 D_SPOM_MODE 1 D_SPED2
A-8 CN_SPPD4 CN_SPOM_DIR 20 1& 1& 20 D_SPOM_DIR 2 GND
633' &.+3&%83753+&.+3& A-9 +5V +24VPD 21 21 24V 3 +5VB(5VPWM)
GND 1 3 1 GND 3 A-10 GND GND 22 22 GND CN2   9+3*363
CN SPPD5 2 2 2 CN SPPD5 2 A-11 CN SPPD5 +24VPD 23 23 24V D SPED2 4
+5V 3 1 3 +5V 1 A-12 +5V GND 24 24 GND GND 1
%%3+.6 &.+3& +24VPD 25 25 24V +5VB(5VPWM 3 67/'
9+3*3$/ B-1 5V SOCD GND 26 26 GND D STLD 6 1 D STLD
B-2 GND %%3+'66% 3+'596 3+'596 %%3+'66% GND 2 2 GND
62&' B-3 CN SOCD 5V(sensor) 5 3 5V(sensor)
5V_SOCD 3 B-4 GND CN501 CN3 D_SPOD 8   9+3*363
GND 2 B-5 CN ROCD CN SPUM VRE 1 1 D SPUM VREF GND 9
CN_SOCD 1 B-6 CN_SPUFM_LD CN_SPFM_VRE 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF 5V(sensor) 7
B

B
 ;5+3 B-7 CN_SPUFM_CW CN_SPOM_VRE 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1 GND 10 1& 632'
9+36*$ B-8 CN_SPUFM_BRAKE CN SPOM VRE 4 4 D SPOM VREF2 %%3+'66% 3+'596 1 D SPOD
B-9 CN_SPUFM_CLK CN_SEL_A 5 5 D_SELA 2 GND
6/&29 B-10 PGND CN SEL B 6 6 D SELB 3 5V(ssensor)
GND 2 B-11 +24VPD CN_SEL_C 7 7 D_SELC   9+3*363
CN ROCD 1 B-12 (NC) CN SEL OUT 8 8 D SELOUT
 ;5+3 +3.3V 9 9 VAREF
46:%46== CN SPWS 10 10 D SPWS CN5
GND 11 11 GND /D_LUMBout 1 /D_LUMBout
CN SPFC 12 12 D SPFC /D LUMAout 2 /D LUMAout
LD 7 CN SRRC 13 13 D SRRC D LUMBout 3 D LUMBout 6/80
CW/CCW 6 CN_SRRBC 14 1& 1& 14 D_SRRBC D_LUMAout 4 D_LUMAout
BRAKE 5 CN SPFM M1 15 15 D SPFM M1 24V D LUM 5 24V D LUM
638)0 CLK 4 CN_SPFM_M2 16 16 D_SPFM_M2 %%3+.6 3+5
㸦NC) 3 1& CN_SPFM_CL 17 17 D_SPFM_CLK
PGND 2 CN SPFM DIRE 18 18 D SPFM DIREC CN8
+24 1 CN STRRC 19 19 D STRRC /D SPOMBout 1 1 /D SPUMBout
 ;5+3 CN_STRRBC 20 1& 1& 20 D_STRRBC /D_SPOMAout 2 2 /D_SPUMAout
CN_STMPS 21 21 D_STMPS D_SPOMBout 3 3 D_SPUMBout
6320
CN STRC 22 22 D STRC D SPOMAout 4 4 D SPUMAout
+5V 23 23 5V %%3+.6 3+5 3+5
/('3:% GND 24 24 GND
CN7 +5V SPF 25 25 +5VB(5VPWM) CN7
SPED 26 26 SPED2 mon /D SPUMBout 1
A

㻮 㻜㻣㻮㻙㻯㼆㻴㻷㻙㻮㻙㻝

A
&1 1&
IDRV1 1 7 7 DRV6 +5VO 27 27 5VO /D SPUMAout 2 1&
IDRV2 2 6 6 DRV5 GND 28 28 GND D SPUMBout 3 1&
IDRV3 3 5 5 DRV4 %%3+'66% %%3+'66% D SPUMAout 4 1&
IDRV4 4 4 4 DRV3 3+'596 3+'596 24V SPUM 5 1&
IDRV5 5 3 3 DRV2 24V SPUM 6 1&
IDRV6 6 2 2 DRV1 %%3+.6
Vin 7 1 1 LED_POWER
6%3+.6 &.+3& &=+

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

㻡㻛㻝㻝㻌
E. Paper feed

P-GND 1 2 &=+%837=6&=<
7/80 T1LUM 2 1 1 5VN 6 1 5VN
&.+3& 3&83:% 2 DSW RL1 5 2 DSW RL1 '6:B5/
3 GND 4 3 GND
F

F
P-GND 1 2 4 5VN 3 ;5+3 9+3/*1/
7/80 T2LUM 2 1 CN 4 CN 5 5 T2PPD1 2
&.+3& &=< %%&=:+.% %%&=:+.% &=< 6 GND 1 1 5VN
A-1 GND 5VN A-17 2 T2PPD1 733'
P-GND 1 2 A-2 T1LUM# DSW_RL1 A-16 3 GND
&/80 C3LUM 2 1 A-3 GND GND A-15 ;5+3 9+3*3$/
&.+3& A-4 T2LUM# 5VN A-14
A-5 GND T2PPD1 A-13
P-GND 1 2 A-6 C3LUM# GND A-12 &=+%837=6&=+
&/80 C4LUM 2 1 A-7 GND 5VN A-11 1 5VN 11 1 5VN
&.+3& A-8 C4LUM# C3PFD A-10 2 C3PFD 10 2 C3PFD &3)'
A-9 GND GND A-9 3 GND 9 3 GND
GND 1 6 1& A-10 C3SS1 5VN A-8 4 5VN 8  㼂㻴㻼㻳㻼㻞㻭㻞㻠㻜㻸㻙㻝
GND 2 5 A-11 C3SS2 C3LUD A-7 5 C3LUD 7 1 5VN
C3SS1 3 4 A-12 C3SS3 GND A-6 6 GND 6 2 C3LUD C3LUD
&66㹼 C3SS2 4 3 A-13 C3SS4 5VN A-5 7 5VN 5 3 GND
C3SS3 5 2 A-14 GND C3PED A-4 8 C3PED 4  㼂㻴㻼㻳㻼㻝㻭㻣㻟㻭㻾㻙㻝
C3SS4 6 1 A-15 C4SS1 GND A-3 9 GND 3 1 5VN
&.+3& A-16 C4SS2 24V3 A-2 10 24V3 2 2 C3PED &3('
A-17 C4SS3 /C3PUS A-1 11 /C3PUS 1 3 GND
GND 1 6 1& A-18 C4SS4  9+3*3$$5
GND 2 5 3+15+%83753+3+15+
C4SS1 3 4 1 24V3 2
&66㹼 &386
+

C4SS2 4 3 2 /C3PUS 1

E
C4SS3 5 2 㻾㻼㻸㼁㻙㻜㻟㻢㻥㻲㻯㼆㼆
C4SS4 6 1
&.+3& &=+ &=+%837=6&=+
5VN B-17 1 5VN 11 1 5VN
5VN 1 &=+ C4PFD B-16 2 C4PFD 10 2 C4PFD &3)'
763' T1SPD 2 B-18 (NC) GND B-15 3 GND 9 3 GND
GND 3 B-17 5VN 5VN B-14 4 5VN 8  㼂㻴㻼㻳㻼㻞㻭㻞㻠㻜㻸㻙㻝
㼂㻴㻼㻸㻳㻞㻠㻤㻺㻸㻝㻙㻝 ;5+3 B-16 T1SPD C4LUD B-13 5 C4LUD 7 1 5VN
B-15 GND GND B-12 6 GND 6 2 C4LUD &/8'
5VN 1 B-14 5VN 5VN B-11 7 5VN 5 3 GND
763' T2SPD 2 B-13 T2SPD C4PED B-10 8 C4PED 4  9+3*3$$5
GND 3 B-12 GND GND B-9 9 GND 3 1 5VN
㼂㻴㻼㻸㻳㻞㻠㻤㻺㻸㻝㻙㻝 ;5+3 B-11 5VN 24V3 B-8 10 24V3 2 2 C4PED &3('
㻞㻥㻞㻞㻡㻠㻙㻠 B-10 GND /C4PUS B-7 11 /C4PUS 1 3 GND
㻝㻣㻥㻞㻞㻤㻙㻠 㻜㻠㼄㻾㻙㻢㻴㻙㻼 B-9 T1LUD 5VN B-6  9+3*3$$5
5VN 1 4 5VN 1 B-8 T1PED LPPD B-5 3+15+%83753+3+15+
GND 2 3 GND 2 B-7 5VN GND B-4 1 24V3 2
7/8'73(' T1LUD 3 2 T1LUD 3 B-6 GND (NC) B-3 2 /C4PUS 1 &386
T1PED 4 1 T1PED 4 B-5 T2LUD (NC) B-2 㻾㻼㻸㼁㻙㻜㻟㻢㻥㻲㻯㼆㼆
㻯㻼㼃㻮㻲㻞㻝㻝㻥㻲㻯㻱㻝 3$396 B-4 T2PED (NC) B-1
㻝㻣㻥㻞㻞㻤㻙㻠 㻞㻥㻞㻞㻡㻠㻙㻠 㻜㻠㼄㻾㻙㻢㻴㻙㻼 B-3 5VN
5VN 1 4 5VN 1 B-2 T1PPD1 &=+%837=6&=<
GND 2 3 GND 2 B-1 GND 1 5VN 3 1 5VN
7/8'73(' T2LUD 3 2 T2LUD 3 2 LPPD 2 2 LPPD
D

/33'

D
T2PED 4 1 T2PED 4 3 GND 1 3 GND
㻯㻼㼃㻮㻲㻞㻝㻝㻥㻲㻯㻱㻝 3$396 ;5+3 㼂㻴㻼㻳㻼㻞㻭㻞㻟㻜㻸㻙㻝
㻝㻣㻟㻥㻣㻣㻙㻟 㻞㻥㻞㻞㻡㻠㻙㻟 㻜㻟㼄㻾㻙㻢㻴㻙㻼
5VN 1 3 5VN 1
733' T1PPD1 2 2 T1PPD1 2
GND 3 1 GND 3 ;5+3 60391&60591
㼂㻴㻼㻳㻼㻞㻭㻞㻟㻜㻸㻙㻝  1 GND 3 2 GND 2
2 C4PWD 2 3 C4PWD 3 &3:'
24V3 1 CN6 3 Vref 1 1 Vref 1
24V3 2 1& %%&=:+.% &=< 㻰㼁㻺㼀㻙㻣㻣㻞㻜㻰㻿㼆㼆
P-GND 3 GND A-18
P-GND 4 1& C4PWD A-17
&3)0 CPFM_CLK 5 CN8 Vref A-16
CPFM D 6 &=+596 %%&=:+.% 5VN A-15 1 5VN
CPFM LD 7 B-13 24V3 C3SPD A-14 2 C3SPD &63'
CW/CCW 8 1& B-12 GND GND A-13 3 GND
(NC) 9 B-11 /CPFM_CLK# 5VN A-12 ;5+3 㼂㻴㻼㻳㻼㻝㻭㻣㻟㻭㻾
㻾㻹㻻㼀㻼㻝㻜㻟㻡㻲㻯㻼㻝 3$396 B-10 /CPFM_D C4SPD A-11
B-9 CPFM LD GND A-10 1 5VN
 B-8 CPFM_CW 5VN A-9 2 C4SPD &63'
7 TRC_LCC 1 B-7 /TRC_LCC TNDSET A-8 3 GND
6 DGND 2 B-6 GND GND A-7 ;5+3 㼂㻴㻼㻳㻼㻝㻭㻣㻟㻭㻾
5 RES_LCC 3 B-5 RES_LCC /PTRC1 A-6

C
4 DSR LCC 4 B-4 /DSR LCC 24V3 A-5 1 5VN
C

3 DTR LCC 5 B-3 /DTR LCC /C3PUC A-4 2 TNDSET 71'6(7


2 RxD_LCC 6 B-2 RxD_LCC 24V3 A-3 3 GND
1 TxD_LCC 7 B-1 TxD_LCC /C4PUC A-2 ;5+3 㼂㻴㻼㻳㻼㻝㻭㻣㻟㻭㻾
24V3 A-1 ;5+3
1 PTRC1 2
2 24V3 1 375&

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 19
;5+3
1 C3PUC 2
2 24V3 1 &38&

;5+3
1 C4PUC 2
2 24V3 1 &38&

&=+
(NC) B-18 ;5+3
;5+3 /T1PUS B-17 1 T1PUS 2
 7386  24V3 B-16 2 24V3 1 7386
7386  9  &=< A-13 (NC) PSFM2_LD B-15
A-12 /T2PUS GND B-14
A-11 24V3 PSFM2_V B-13 ;5+3
;5+3 A-10 /PTRC2 GND B-12 1 PSFM2_LD 3

B
B

 375&  A-9 24V3 PSFM1 LD B-11 2 GND 2 36)0


375&  9  A-8 /TTRC PSFM1_V B-10 3 PSFM2_V 1
A-7 24V3 GND B-9 1)$13)&3=
A-6 /T2PUC PROFM LD B-8
;5+3 A-5 24V3 PROFM_V B-7 ;5+3
 775&  A-4 /T1PUC LSUFM LD B-6 1 GND 3
775&  9  A-3 24V3 GND B-5 2 PSFM1_LD 2 36)0
A-2 /MPUC LSUFM_V B-4 3 PSFM1_V 1
A-1 INT24V2 DSW-F1 B-3 1)$13)&3=
;5+3 GND B-2
 738&  5V_DSW_F1 B-1 ;5+3
738&  9  1 GND 3
2 CCFM LD 2 &&)0
3 CCFM_V 1
;5+3 1)$16)&3=
 738& 
738&  9  ;5+3
1 LSUFM LD 3
2 GND 2 /68)0
;5+3 3 LSUFM_V 1
 038&  1)$13)&3=
038&  ,179 
1 DSW-F
A

A
2 GND '6:)
3 5VN+R
;5+3 㼂㻴㻼㻿㻳㻞㻭㻝㻠㻝㻗㻙㻝

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F
F

CN16

INT24V2 1 /WEBM A A-15 1 /WEBM A 15 1 /WEBM A 15 1 6 /WEBM A


INT24V2 2 /WEBM B A-14 2 /WEBM B 14 2 /WEBM B 14 2 5 /WEBM B
GND 3 CN12 24V1 A-13 3 24V1 13 3 24V1 13 3 4 24V1
F. Paper exit, Motor

GND 4 24V1 A-12 4 24V1 12 4 24V1 12 4 3 24V1


DM CK 5 A-14 INT24V2 /WEBM /A A-11 5 /WEBM /A 11 5 /WEBM /A 11 5 2 /WEBM /A
DM_D 6 A-13 GND /WEBM_/B A-10 6 /WEBM_/B 10 6 /WEBM_/B 10 6 1 /WEBM_/B
DM LD 7 A-12 /DM CLK# POFM3 LD A-9 7 POFM3 LD 9 7 POFM3 LD 9
CW/CCW 8 A-11 /DM D GND A-8 8 GND 8 8 GND 8
(NC) 9 A-10 DM LD POFM3_V A-7 9 POFM3_V 7 9 POFM3_V 7 1 POFM3_LD 3
A-9 /DM CW GND A-6 10 GND 6 10 GND 6 2 GND 2
A-8 CCM_B FUFM2_LD A-5 11 FUFM2_LD 5 11 FUFM2_LD 5 3 POFM3_V 1
A-7 CCM_A FUFM2_V A-4 12 FUFM2_V 4 12 FUFM2_V 4
CCM A 1 A-6 FUM_CW(GND GND A-3 13 GND 3 13 GND 3
(NC) 2 A-5 FUM_LD DVFM1_LD A-2 14 DVFM1_LD 2 14 DVFM1_LD 2
CCM_B 3 A-4 /FUM_D DVFM1_V A-1 15 DVFM1_V 1 15 DVFM1_V 1 1 GND 3
A-3 /FUM_CLK# 2 FUFM2 LD 2
A-2 GND 3 FUFM2_V 1
FUM LD 7 A-1 INT24V2
GND(CW/CCW 6
FUM_D 5
FUM CK 4 1 GND 3
(NC) 3 2 DVFM1 LD 2

E
E

GND 2 3 DVFM1_V 1
INT24V2 1

1 5VN
2 PPD2
B-1 (NC) 3 GND
1 OZFM V 3 B-2 OZFM V 5VN B-15 1 5VN 3
2 OZFM LD 2 B-3 OZFM LD PPD2 B-14 2 PPD2 2
3 GND 1 B-4 GND GND B-13 3 GND 1
B-5 (NC)/OZFM 5VN B-12 1 5VN 12 1 5VN
B-6 5V_CCMD POD2 B-11 2 POD2 11 2 POD2
B-7 GND GND B-10 3 GND 10 3 GND
5VN+R 3 B-8 CCMD 5VN B-9 4 5VN 9
GND 2 B-9 DVM LD TFD2 B-8 5 TFD2 8
CCMD 1 B-10 DVM CW(G GND B-7 6 GND 7
B-11 /DVM D POFM5 LD B-6 7 POFM5 LD 6 1 5VN
B-12 /DVM CLK GND B-5 8 GND 5 2 TFD2
B-13 GND POFM5_V B-4 9 POFM5_V 4 3 GND
B-14 24V3 POFM6_LD B-3 10 POFM6_LD 3
DM LD 7 GND B-2 11 GND 2
GND(CW/CCW 6 POFM6_V B-1 12 POFM6_V 1
DM D 5 1 POFM R2 LD 4
D

D
DM CK 4 2 GND 3
(NC) 3 3 - 2
GND 2 4 POFM_R2_V 1
INT24V2 1

1 POFM R1 LD 4
2 GND 3
3 - 2
4 POFM_R2_V 1

CN2 CN1 CN7 CN19(1/2)


C

C
INT24V1 2 5 INT24V1 5 1 INT24V1 24V1 8 1 D-GND POM OUT /B A-8 1 POM XB 4 4 POM XB
INT24V1 5 6 INT24V1 6 2 INT24V1 D-GND 7 3 24V3 POM OUT B A-7 2 POM B 3 3 POM B
B 4 3 B 3 3 B RRM MODE 6 5 /RRM MODE POM OUT /A A-6 3 POM XA 2 2 POM XA
/B 6 4 /B 4 4 /B RRM_CW 5 7 /RRM_CW POM_OUT_A A-5 4 POM_A 1 1 POM_A
/A 3 1 /A 1 5 /A RRM CNT 4 9 /RRM CNT PFM OUT B A-4
A 1 2 A 2 6 A RRM_EN 3 11 /RRM_ENABLE PFM_OUT_A A-3
RRM CLK 2 13 /RRM CLK PFM OUT /B A-2

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 20
5VN 1 15 5VN PFM_OUT_/A A-1
1 6 (NC)
2 5 PFM B
3 4 PFM A
4 3 PFM_XB
5 2 PFM_XA
6 1 (NC)

CN2 CN1

INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1 INT24V2 8 2 INT24V2


INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1 D-GND 7 4 GND
B 4 3 B HPFM MODE 6 6 /HPFM MODE

B
B

/B 6 4 /B HPFM CW 5 8 /HPFM CW
/A 3 5 /A HPFM CNT 4 10 /HPFM CNT
A 1 6 A HPFM_EN 3 12 /HPFM_ENABLE
HPFM CLK 2 14 /HPFM CLK
5VN 1 16 5VN

1 GND 3
2 POFM1 LD 2
3 POFM1_V 1
CN18(2/2)
NC 1
ADUM1 XA 2 (NC)/POFM1_CNT A-12
ADUM1_XB 3 GND A-11
ADUM1 A 4 CN19(2/2) POFM1 LD A-10 1 POFM4 LD 3
ADUM1 B 5 POFM1 V A-9 2 GND 2
NC 6 A13 ADUM1_A A8 B-1 ADUM1_OUT_A POFM4_LD A-8 3 POFM4_V 1
A14 ADUM1 XA A7 B-2 ADUM1 OUT /A GND A-7
A15 ADUM1 XB A6 B-3 ADUM1 OUT /B (NC)/POFM4_CNT A-6
A16 ADUM1_B A5 B-4 ADUM1_OUT_B POFM4_V A-5
A17 ADUM2 A A4 B-5 ADUM2 OUT A GND A-4 1 GND 3
A18 ADUM2 XA A3 B-6 ADUM2 OUT /A FUFM1 LD A-3 2 FUFM1 LD 2
A19 ADUM2_XB A2 B-7 ADUM2_OUT_/B FUFM1_V A-2 3 FUFM1_V 1
A

A20 ADUM2_B A1 B-8 ADUM2_OUT_B (NC) A-1

A
NC 1
ADUM1 XA 2
ADUM1 XB 3
ADUM1 A 4
ADUM1 B 5
NC 6

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

㻣㻛㻝㻝㻌

7850 3+15+%83753+3+15+
G. Right door

P-GND 1 5 P-GND 1
TURM 2 4 TURM 2
3 BESTD 3

F
F

㻯㻯㻻㼂㻼㻞㻜㻠㻤㻲㻯㻟㻝 㻼㻴㻾㻙㻞 2 GND 4


1 5VN+R 5
%(67'
BESTD 1
D-GND 2
5VN+R 3
 *36

6059160391&
1 24V3 1
03)6 2 /MPFS 2

3+15+%83753+3+15+
1 24V3 8
03(' 2 /MPFS 7
MPED 1 3 MPED 6
D-GND 2
5VN+R 3 4 D-GND 5
 *36 5 5VN+R 4
3+15+%83753+3+15+
60391&60591 4 /MPGS 2 7 /MPGS 2
2 /MPGS 2 1 5VN+R 5 6 5VN+R 3
03*6 1 24V3 1 5 24V3 1

E
E

2 D-GND 4
3 MPFD 3 8 MPFD 1

03)'
MPFD 1 6 4 2 5 3 1 35:=9.**3 /) 61 㻟㻥㻾㻙㻾㼃㼆㼂㻙㻷㻞㻳㻳㻙㻼㻞㻔㻸㻲㻕㻔㻿㻺㻕
D-GND 2 㻯㼆㻴㻾㻙㻞㻜㼂㻙㻿 㻯㼆㻴㻾㻙㻞㻜㼂㻙㻿 3&83:%
5VN+R 3 㻲㻳 1 P-GND 1 㻲㻳
 *36 65$7 㻺㻯 2 TURM 2 㻺㻯 65$7 CN17

24V3
24V3
24V3
㻝㻥㻯㼆㻙㻢㻴 㻜㻥㻯㼆㻙㻢㻴 㻮㻝㻤㻮㻙㻯㼆㼃㻴㻷㻙㻮㻙㻝

D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
B-19 P-GND B-1 B-9 GND
')'363 B-18 TURM B-2 B-8 TURM#
B-17 BESTD B-3 B-7 BESTD
B-16 24V3 B-4 B-6 24V1
B-15 MPFS B-5 B-5 MPFS/
03/' 3+15+%83753+3+15+ 3+15+%83753+3+15+ B-14 MPGS B-6 B-4 MPGS/
MPLD 1 1 NC 9 1& 3 MPLD 12 B-13 MPED B-7 B-3 MPED
D-GND 2 2 NC 8 1& 1 MPLD2 14 1& B-12 MPFD B-8 B-2 MPFD
5VN+R 3 3 NC 7 1& 4 5VN+R 11 B-11 MPLD1 B-9 B-1 MPLD1
*36  4 MPLD 6 B-10 5VN B-10 A-9 5VN
5 D-GND 5 5 5VN 10 B-9 MPWD B-11 A-8 MPWD
03:' 6 5VN+R 4 6 MPWD 9 B-8 MTOP2 B-12 A-7 MTOP2
5VN 3 7 5VN 3 B-7 5VN+R B-13 A-6 5V MTOP2
MPWD 2 8 MPWD 2 B-6 MTOP1 B-14 A-5 MTOP1
D-GND 1 9 D-GND 1 B-5 5VN+R B-15 A-4 5V_MTOP1
D

D
95B3:% 3+15+ B-4 5VN B-16 A-3 5VN
0723 B-3 HUD M B-17 A-2 HUD M
MTOP2 1 7 MTOP2 8 B-2 TH M B-18 A-1 TH M
D-GND 2 B-1 (NC) B-19 㻜㻥㻯㼆㻙㻢㼅 CN18(1/2)
5VN+R 3 8 5VN+R 7 㻞㻜㻯㼆㻙㻢㻴 㻝㻞㻯㼆㻙㻢㻴 %%&=:+.%
0723 *36  A-1 GND A-20 B-1 GND
MTOP1 1 9 MTOP1 6 A-2 5VN A-19 B-2 5VN
D-GND 2 A-3 5VN A-18 B-3 5VN
5VN+R 3 10 5VN+R 5 A-4 APPD2 A-17 B-4 APPD2
*36  7+ +8' A-5 APPD1 A-16 B-5 APPD1
5VN 1 11 5VN 4 A-6 DSW ADU A-15 B-6 DSW ADU
HUD_M 2 12 HUD_M 3 A-7 POD3 A-14 B-7 POD3
D-GND 3 13 D-GND 2 A-8 TFD3 A-13 B-8 TFD3
TH_M 4 14 TH_M 1 A-9 5VO+R A-12 B-9 5VO PRTPD
=+5 2 13 1& A-10 PRTPD A-11 B-10 PRTPD
      ')'363 A-11 ADUGS A-10 B-11 /ADUGS
㻰㻙㻳㻺㻰 A-12 24V3 A-9 B-12 24V1
$33'
APPD2 1
D-GND 2 A-13 ADUM1 A A-8
5VN+R 3 A-14 ADUM1 XA A-7
*36  A-15 ADUM1_XB A-6
A-16 ADUM1_B A-5
$33' &=<%837=6&=+596 A-17 ADUM2_A A-4

C
C

APPD1 1 3 APPD1 1 A-18 ADUM2 XA A-3


D-GND 2 2 D-GND 2 A-19 ADUM2 XB A-2
5VN+R 3 1 5VN+R 3 A-20 ADUM2_B A-1
*36 ;5+3

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 21
'6:B$'8
DSW_ADU 1
D-GND 2
5VN+R 3
*36 
䠟䠪2
Japan 3573' &=<%837=6&=+596 %%3+'66% /) 61
PRTPD 1 3 PRTPD 1 1 5VN+R
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 2 2 GND
5VO+R 3 1 5VO+R 3 3 5VN+R
*36 ;5+3 4 GND
5 GND
6 GND
Standard : Japan 7 5VN+R
Option : except Japan 7)' &=<%837=6&=+596 8 GND
TFD3 1 3 TFD3 4 9 5VN+R
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 5 㻔㻺㻯 10 (NC)
5VN+R 3 1 5VN+R 6
32' *36 ;5+3

B
B

POD3 1 6 POD3 1
D-GND 2 5 D-GND 2
5VN+R 3 4 5VN+R 3
*36 ;5+3 䠟䠪1
%%3+'66% /) 61
1 5VN
6059160391& 2 GND
2 ADUGS 2 3 5VN+R
$'8*6 1 24V3 1 4 GND
5 5VN+R
6 GND
7 5VN+R
8 GND
9 5VN+R
10 GND
11 5VN+R
㻔㻺㻯 12 (NC)
13 5VN
㻔㻺㻯 14 (NC)

5,*+7'225,)

A
3:%
A

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

㻤㻛㻝㻝㻌
H. LSU

F
/'3:% /68&173:% 3&83:%
CN3 CN21
CN1 CN500 %%&=+.% /) 61 9 &=< &=< %%&=:+.%
5V_BD 1 1 5V_BD nPCU_TRG 1 A-14 /PCU_TRG
nBD 2 2 nBD JOBEND_INT 2 A-13 JOBEND_INT

E
E

DT_A1-_LD1- 3 3 DT_A1-_LD1- nRSV_DAT 3 A-12 RSV_DAT


DT A2- LD2- 4 4 DT A2- LD2- nSCK LSU 4 A-11 SCK LSU
P4 A 5 5 P4 A nTRANS_DAT 5 A-10 TRANS DAT
nINIT_A 6 6 nINIT_A nTRANS_RST 6 A-9 TRANS_RST
MSET_A 7 7 MSET_A RST_LSU 7 A-8 LSU_RST
AK_TXD 8 8 AK_TXD +5V 8 A-7 5VN
AK_CS_EEP_A 9 9 AK_CS_EEP_A DGND 9 A-6 GND
DT B1- LD3- 10 10 DT B1- LD3- +3.3V 10 A-5 3.3V
DT_B2-_LD4- 11 11 DT_B2-_LD4- DGND 11 A-4 GND
P4_B 12 12 P4_B INT_5VLD 12 A-3 INT_5VLD
#P2 13 13 #P2 DGND 13 A-2 GND
#P0 14 14 #P0 INT 5VLD 14 A-1 INT 5VLD
MSET_B 15 15 MSET_B
AK_CS_EEP_B 16 16 AK_CS_EEP_B CN2
DGND 17 17 DGND % %&=+.% /) 61 9 &=< &=+
DGND 18 18 DGND +24V3 13 B-1 24V3
LDCHK1 19 19 LDCHK1 PGND 12 B-2 GND
LDCHK2 20 20 LDCHK2 +24V3 11 B-3 24V3
LDCHK3 21 21 LDCHK3 PGND 10 B-4 GND
nPOLY_START 22 22 nPOLY_START DGND 9 B-5 GND
nPOLY_CK 23 23 nPOLY_CK AK_RXD 8 B-6 AK_RXD#
PGND 24 24 PGND AK TXD 7 B-7 AK TXD#
%'3:% 24V 25 25 24V AK SCLK 6 B-8 AK SCLK#
&1 DGND 26 26 DGND AK_CS_EEP_AK1 5 B-9 AK_CS_EEP_K1#

㻰㻌
D

CN3
DGND 4 1 DGND SDCLK 27 27 SDCLK AK_CS_EEP_AK2 4 B-10 AK_CS_EEP_K2#
nBD 3 2 nBD DT_A1+_LD1+ 28 28 DT_A1+_LD1+ AK_CS_AK1 3 B-11 AK_CS_K1#
DGND 2 3 DGND DT_A2+_LD2+ 29 29 DT_A2+_LD2+ AK CS AK2 2 B-12 AK CS K2#
+5V 1 4 +5V P3 A 30 30 P3 A DGND 1 B-13 GND
6%3+.6 3+5 3+5 %%3+.6 nLDERR_AB 31 31 nLDERR_AB B-14 (NC)
AK_RXD 32 32 AK_RXD
AK_SCLK 33 33 AK_SCLK

%2$5'72%2$5'&RQQHFWRU
AK_CS_A 34 34 AK_CS_A
DT_B1+_LD3+ 35 35 DT_B1+_LD3+
DT_B2+_LD4+ 36 36 DT_B2+_LD4+
P3_B 37 37 P3_B
#P1 38 38 #P1
32/<*2102725 nINIT_B 39 39 nINIT_B
&1 CN2 AK CS B 40 40 AK CS B
+24V 5 1 +24V 5VLD 41 41 5VLD 6&1027+(53:%
PGND 4 2 PGND 5VLD 42 42 5VLD CN1 CN26
nPOLY START 3 3 nPOLY START 3.3V 43 43 3.3V )+669 )+669
nPOLY LOCK 2 4 nPOLY LOCK WP 44 44 WP GND 31 1 GND
nPOLY_CK 1 5 nPOLY_CK SDA 45 45 SDA GND 30 2 GND
 $03 &=+ 6%&=+.% SCL 46 46 SCL LSU_HSYNC_N 29 3 LSU_HSYNC_N
;5+3 nBRAKE 47 47 nBRAKE LSU_HSYNC_P 28 4 LSU_HSYNC_P
nPOLY_LOCK 48 48 nPOLY_LOCK LSU_ECLK_P 27 5 LSU_ECLK_P
PGND 49 49 PGND LSU_ECLK_N 26 6 LSU_ECLK_N
24V 50 50 24V GND 25 7 GND

C
C

7;367+ 7;567+( LSU_VSYNC_C_N 24 8 LSU_VSYNC_C_N


LSU_VSYNC_C_P 23 9 LSU_VSYNC_C_P
GND 22 10 GND
LSU_VSYNC_K_P 21 11 LSU_VSYNC_K_P
LSU_VSYNC_K_N 20 12 LSU_VSYNC_K_N
GND 19 13 GND
LSU_CH4_P 18 14 LSU_CH4_P
LSU CH4 N 17 15 LSU CH4 N

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 22
GND 16 16 GND
LSU CH3 P 15 17 LSU CH3 P
LSU_CH3_N 14 18 LSU_CH3_N
GND 13 19 GND
LSU_CLK_P 12 20 LSU_CLK_P
LSU CLK N 11 21 LSU CLK N
GND 10 22 GND
LSU CH2 P 9 23 LSU CH2 P
LSU_CH2_N 8 24 LSU_CH2_N
GND 7 25 GND
LSU CH1 P 6 26 LSU CH1 P
LSU CH1 N 5 27 LSU CH1 N
GND 4 28 GND
LSU_CH0_P 3 29 LSU_CH0_P
LSU_CH0_N 2 30 LSU_CH0_N
GND 1 31 GND

B
B

A
A

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F
F

CN9 CN10

24V3 8 7 24V3 1 13 24V3 1 16 24V3 CRUM DATA A-10 1 CRM DT 4 1 CRM DT


GND 7 6 GND 2 12 GND 2 15 GND CRUM CLK A-9 2 CRM CK 3 2 CRM CK
5VN 6 5 5VN 3 11 5VN 3 14 5VN CRUM 5V A-8 3 5VCRUM 2 3 5VCRUM
WTM_D 5 4 WTM_D 4 10 WTM_D 4 13 /WTM_D GND A-7 4 GND 1 4 GND
WTM CK 4 3 WTM CK 5 9 WTM CK 5 12 /WTM CLK /TNM A A-6
GND(WTM_CW 3 2 GND(WTM_CW) 6 8 GND(WTM_CW) 6 11 WTM_CW(GND) /TNM_B A-5
WTM LD 2 1 WTM LD 7 7 WTM LD 7 10 WTM LD 24V3 A-4 1 6 /TNM A
GAIN 1 6 WTFD 8 9 WTFD 24V3 A-3 2 5 /TNM_B
5 GND 9 8 GND /TNM /A A-2 3 4 24V3
4 5VN+R 10 7 5V_WTFD /TNM_/B A-1 4 3 24V3
WTFD 1 3 WTSD 11 6 WTSD 5 2 /TNM /A
GND 2 2 GND 12 5 GND 6 1 /TNM_/B
5VN+R 3 1 5VN+R 13 4 5V_WTSD
3 GND
2 DVFM2_LD (NC) B-10
I. Process , High voltage

WTSD 1 1 DVFM2_V (NC) B-9 QR/P8-8S-C(02) / QR/P8-8P-C(01)


GND 2 TSGout B-8 1 TSGout 8 8 TSGout 8 1 TSGout
5VN+R 3 GND B-7 2 GND 7 7 GND 7 4 GND
TCS B-6 3 TCS 6 6 TCS 6 3 TCS
24V3 B-5 4 24V 5 5 24V 5 2 24V
E

E
3 GND 1 DVCH3 B-4 5 DVCH3 4 4 DVCH3 4
2 CFM-DV LD 2 DVCH2 B-3 6 DVCH2 3 3 DVCH2 3
1 CFM-DV_V 3 DVCH1 B-2 7 DVCH1 2 2 DVCH1 2
GND B-1 8 GND 1 1 GND 1

D
D

CN11 1 4 GND
2 3 NC
GND A-16 3 2 TFSD
CN 3(1/2) GND A-15 1 GND 15 4 1 24V
CN101 TFSD A 14 2 TFSD 14
A-15 (NC) 24V3 A-13 3 24V3 13
1 TC_DR TC_ERR 1 A-14 TC_ERR /TNHM1_A A-12 4 /TNHM1_A 12 1 6 /TNHM1_A
HV REM TC 2 A-13 HV REM TC /TNHM1_B A-11 5 /TNHM1_B 11 2 5 /TNHM1_B
/TC CL REM 3 A-12 /TC CL REM 24V3 A-10 6 24V3 10 3 4 24V3
/TC CL PWM 4 A-11 /TC CL PWM 24V3 A-9 7 24V3 9 4 3 24V3
1 TC /TC DR REM 5 A-10 /TC DR REM /TNHM1 /A A-8 8 /TNHM1 /A 8 5 2 /TNHM1 /A
/TC_DR_PWM 6 A-9 /TC_DR_PWM /TNHM1_/B A-7 9 /TNHM1_/B 7 6 1 /TNHM1_/B
/TC AC REM 7 A-8 /TC AC REM /TNHM2 A A-6 10 /TNHM2 A 6
C

C
/TC_AC_PWM 8 A-7 /TC_AC_PWM /TNHM2_B A-5 11 /TNHM2_B 5
1 TC CL /TC- REM 9 A-6 /TC- REM 24V3 A-4 12 24V3 4 1 6 /TNHM2 A
/TC- PWM 10 A-5 /TC- PWM 24V3 A-3 13 24V3 3 2 5 /TNHM2 B
/TC+ REM 11 A-4 /TC+ REM /TNHM2 /A A-2 14 /TNHM2 /A 2 3 4 24V3
/TC+ PWM 12 A-3 /TC+ PWM /TNHM2 /B A-1 15 /TNHM2 /B 1 4 3 24V3
GND 13 A-2 GND 5 2 /TNHM2 /A
INT24V2 14 A-1 INT24V2 6 1 /TNHM2_/B
TC PWB

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 23
CN3 CN1

1 DV INT24V2 9 B-1 INT24V2


GND 8 B-2 GND
24V1 7 B-3 24V1 TH DV B-16 1 TH DV 7 1 4 TH DV
GND 6 B-4 GND GND B-15 2 GND 6 2 3 GND
1 GB MC DATA 5 B-5 MC DATA HUD DV B-14 3 HUD DV 5 3 2 HUD DV
MC_CLK 4 B-6 MC_CLK 3.3V B-13 4 3.3V 4 4 1 3.3V

B
B

MC LD 3 B-7 MC LD PCS LED B-12 5 PCS LED 3


HV_REM_MC 2 B-8 HV_REM_MC PCS B-11 6 PCS 2
1 MC MC ERR 1 B-9 MC ERR 5VN B-10 7 5VN 1 1 3 PCS LED
PSPS B-9 1 PSPS 9 2 2 PCS
24V3 B-8 2 24V3 8 3 1 5VN
GND B-7 3 GND 7
PTDL# B-6 4 PTDL# 6
DL2# B-5 5 DL2# 5
DL1# B-4 6 DL1# 4
CN4 5VN B-3 7 5VN 3 2 PSPS 2
CCHPD B-2 8 CCHPD 2 1 24V3 1
1 DR_CL GND B-1 9 GND 1

CN5 2 PTDL 2
1 5VN 1
1 DHV

3 GND
2 GND
1 DL2

3 GND

A
A

2 GND
1 DL1

1 5VN
2 CCHPD
3 GND

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

㻝㻜㻛㻝㻝㻌
J. Fusing

F
F

㻞㻟㻼㻙㻾㼃㼆㼂㻙㻷㻠㻳㻳㻙㻼㻢㻔㻸㻲㻕㻔㻿㻺㻕 55:=9.**3 /) 61 CN3


3 3 3 N-HL(LM)
1& 2 N.C +/3:%
1 N-HL(UW)
9+51 %39+%

CN5
'0 1L '0 1L 9/599/39 </39</59) CN2 %%3$6. 3$396
766 3 L-HL(US) 3 +/ 86 3 N-HL(US) 3 2 N-HL(US) 2 1 N-HL(US) INT24V2 1
1& 2 N.C GND 2
2 L-HL(UW) 2 +/ 8: 2 N-HL(UW) 2 6 N-HL(UW) 6 3 N-HL(UM) HLout US 3
'0 1L '0 1L 9/39%. %39/. HLout UW 4
760 1 L-HL(UM) 1 +/ 80 1 N-HL(UM) 1 1 N-HL(UM) 1 HLout_LM 5
CN4 HLout UM 6
E

E
4 L-HL(UM) 4 3 L-HL(UM/UW) HL PR 7
1& 2 N.C (NC) 8
5 L-HL(US/LM) 5 1 L-HL(US/LM)
%39/5'
9/395

CN13 CN 3(2/2)
6059%6039%& &=+596 &=+ &=+ %%&=:+.% %%&=:+.% 㻝㻡㻯㼆㻙㻢㻴
white 1 TH UM CS 1 1 TH UMCS IN 12 B-1 TH UMCS IN HL PR B-10 6 HL PR 1
7+B80 black 2 TH_UM 2 2 TH_UM_IN 11 B-2 TH_UM_IN HLout_UM B-11 5 HLout_UM 2
blue 3 GND 3 3 GND 10 B-3 GND HLout_UW B-12 4 HLout_UW 3
5'7&7)&== 4 TH US1CS IN 9 B-4 TH US1CS IN HLout US B-13 3 HLout US 4
5 TH US1 IN 8 B-5 TH US1 IN GND B-14 2 GND 5
6059%6039%& 6 GND 7 B-6 GND INT24V2 B-15 1 INT24V2 6
white 1 TH US1 CS 1 7 TH US2 IN 6 B-7 TH US2 IN
7+B86 black 2 TH US1 2 8 GND 5 B-8 GND &=+%837=6&=+596
blue 3 GND 3 9 TH_LM_IN 4 B-9 TH_LM_IN
5'7&7)&== 10 GND 3 B-10 GND
11 /WEBS 2 B-11 /WEBS
6059%6039%& 12 24V3 1 B-12 24V3
1 TH US2 1
7+B86 2 GND 2
D

D
5'7&7)&==

6059%6039%&
1 TH LM 1
7+B/0 2 GND 2
5'7&7)&==
㻰㻲㻝㻝㻙㻠㻰㻼㻙㻿㻼㻝㻔㻜㻡㻕
6059%6039%&
1 WEBS 1 㻰㻲㻝㻝㻙㻠㻰㻿㻙㻞㻯
:(%6 2 24V3 2 㻝 㻞 㻟 㻠
53/8)&==

&=+596 &=+ &=<


5VN 1 11 5VN 1 A-12 5VN
:(%' WEB2D 2 10 WEBEND2 2 A-11 WEBEND2
GND 3 9 GND 3 A-10 GND
9+3/*1/  8 5VN 4 A-9 5VN
7 WEBEND1 5 A-8 WEBEND1
5VN 1 6 GND 6 A-7 GND
:(%' WEB1D 2 5 5VN 7 A-6 5VN
GND 3 4 POD1 8 A-5 POD1
9+3/*1/  3 GND 9 A-4 GND
2 5VN 10 A-3 5VN
5VN 1 1 FPFD 11 A-2 FPFD

C
C

32' POD1 2 1& A-1 GND


GND 3 5&=53,1
9+3/*1/ 

5VN 1
)3)' FPFD 2

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 24
GND 3 3&83:%
9+3*3$/ 
B

B
A
A

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

㻝㻝㻛㻝㻝㻌

CN2
%39+% 9+51 9+51 6&1027+(53:%
CN6 CN1 D-GND 1 CN6

F
F

+/3:% %39+%5 㼂㻴㻾㻙㻟㻺㻙㻾 9+51 %39+% D-GND 2 1 GND


L HL 1 3 Live in 5VO 3 2 GND
 NC 2 1& 1& 2 NC 5VL 4 3 5VL
N HL 3 1 Neutral in 5VL 5 4 5VL
5 5VO
K. Power supply


%39+
9+51 CN7
CN1 06: 1 3.3V
%39/ 㼂㻸㻼㻙㻜㻟㼂 36 CN3 2 5VN
L HL 1 /LYH 3.3V 1 3 12V
NC 2 1& 36 3.3V 2 4 GND
N_HL 3 1HXWUDO '&3:% D-GND 3 5 GND
%39+% 6 24V4
CN6 %39+
DCCNT1(nRY 1 CN10
NC 2 1 nRY_CNT
DCCNT2(nOFF 3 2 nOFF_CNT
%%3$6. 3 DGND
CN4 3$396 %%3$6.
5VN 1
CN1 CN2 5VN 2
㼂㻸㻼㻙㻜㻟㼂 %39/ %39/ 㼂㻸㻼㻙㻜㻟㼂 36 5' 5VN 3
1 L IN Nout 1 1HXWUDO 5VN 4
㸺9㸼 1& 2 NC NC 2 1& 36 5' D-GND 5
E

E
3 N IN Lout 3 /LYH D-GND 6
)*1' %39+%
㻿㻾㻭㻙㻡㻝㼀㻙㻠 CN5
&1 %39+% 3&83:%
CN1 12V 1
㻵㻺㻸㻱㼀 㼂㻸㻼㻙㻜㻟㼂 %39/ 12V 2
/B,1 1 L IN $&3:% D-GND 3
㸺9㸼 1& 1& 2 NC D-GND 4
1B,1 3 N IN %39+%
)*1' CN7
FW 1
P-GND 2
P-GND 3
Option : except Japan CN3 P-GND 4
9+51%. %39+%. NC(P-GND) 5 CN1
1 L out P-GND 6 %39+% /) 61
2 NC P-GND 7 10 FW
3 N out NC(P-GND) 8 9 GND
%39+% 8 3.3V
CN8 7 5VN
NC(24V1) 1 6 GND
$&3:%-DSDQ  24V1 2 5 12V
24V2 3 4 GND
:+3:%H[FHSW-DSDQ CN9 24V3 4 3 24V3
1 LiveR_in 24V3 5 2 GND
D

D
2 NC 24V4 6 1 24V1
CN1 9+51%. 3 LiveR_out 24V5 7
%39+%. %39+%( %39+%
L_WH_IN 3
NC 2
N_WH_IN 1
6/39 6/59)
9 1 24V2 1 CN14
Standard : Japan JP:CN6 '6:5 %39+ /) 61
Option : except Japan EX:CN5 '6:B5 1 DSW_R(24V)
%%3$6. 3$396 369 2 (NC)
WH_CNT 1
24V 2 (/59 CN15
TxD FIN 1 %39+ /) 61
RxD FIN 2 '6:B5BRXW 1 DSW_R_out
CN3 DTR FIN 3 '6:) 2 (NC)
%39+5 㼂㻴㻾㻙㻟 36 DSR FIN 4 '6:B) 9 3 DSW_F2(24V)
Live_WH 1 /LYHB:+ RES_FIN 5 369
NC 2 1& 36 24V5 6
Live WH-SW 3 /LYHB:+6: 5VN 7
GND 8
GND 9 CN2
JP:CN4 F-GND 10 %%3+.6 /) 61
EX:CN3 24V5 11 1 TxD FIN
C

C
%39+ 9+51 GND 12 2 RxD FIN
WH-N(SCAN) 1 (/59 (/39 (/59 (/39 3 /DTR_FIN
NC 2 1& 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2 6&1KHDWHU 4 /DSR FIN
WH-L(SCAN) 3 1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 5 RES_FIN
65$7 1& 6 RES FIN INS
6&1:+㺨㺦㺛1 7 GND
JP:CN5 1& 8 GND

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 25
EX:CN4 9 24V3
%39+ 9+51 10 /WH CNT
WH-N 1 (/59 (/39
NC 2 1& 1 WH-N 1 FDVVHWWHKHDWHU
WH-L 3 2 WH-L 2

(/59 (/39
1 WH-N 1 FDVVHWWHKHDWHU
2 WH-L 2

(/59 (/39
1 WH-N 1 WDQGHPKHDWHU
2 WH-L 2
B

B
CN22
(/59 (/39 %%31'=6 /) 61
12 WH-N 12 1 24V3
4 WH-L 4 2 GND
5 GND 5
㻸㻯㻯㻌㻌㻔㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺㻕 3 /CV_COPY
3 (NC) 3 (/39 (/59 (/39 (/59 4 /CV_COUNT
㻿㻾㻭㻙㻞㻝㼀㻙㻠 1 24V3 1 1 24V3 1 5 /CV_START
2 GND 2 2 GND 2 72&2,19(1'25 6 /CV_CA
3 5VN 3 3 5VN 3 7 /CV_CLCOPY
(/59 237,21 8 /CV_COLOR1
(NC) 1 9 /CV_STAPLE
(NC) 2 ;5+3 10 /CV_COLOR0
/TxD LCC 3 1 /TxD LCC 7 11 /CV_DUPLEX
/RxD LCC 4 2 /RxD LCC 6 12 5VN
DTR LCC 5 3 DTR LCC 5 13 /CV_SIZE0
/DSR LCC 6 4 /DSR LCC 4 14 /CV_SIZE1
RES LCC 7 5 RES LCC 3 15 /CV_SIZE2
F-GND 8 6 GND 2 16 /CV_SIZE3
/&& 237,21 5VN 9 7 TRC LCC 1
GND 10
24V3 11
GND 12
TRC LCC 13

A
A

(NC) 14
(NC) 15

㻿㻾㻭㻙㻞㻝㼀㻙㻠

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4. Signal list
Signal Name [Type] Function/Operation Connector level CN No. Pin No. PWB NOTE
name "L" "H" name
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate. ON OFF 18 B-11 PCU
ADUM1 ADU motor 1 Drives the transport roller. - - 19 B-1,B-2 PCU Drives with
B-3,B-4 the 4-phase
ADUM2 ADU motor 2 Drives the transport roller - - 19 B-5,B-6 PCU signal.
B-7,B-8
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects paper pass in the ADU Paper Paper 18 B-5 PCU
upper section. present empty
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects paper pass in the ADU Papaer Paper 18 B-4 PCU
medium section. present empty
BESTD Belt separation detection Belt separation detection - Separat 17 B-7 PCU
e
CCFT LCD backlight Backlight for LCD ON OFF 23 21 SCNcnt
CL_ON Scanner lamp Radiates lights to the document ON OFF 21 3 SCNcnt
for the CCD to scan the document
images.
C3LUD Tray 3 paper upper limit Detects the tray 3 upper limit. Upper - 5 A-7 PCU
detection limit
C3LUM Paper tray lift-up motor Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive 4 A-6 PCU
(Paper feed tray 3)
C3PED Tray 3 paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the tray 3. Paper Paper 5 A-4 PCU
empty present
C3PFD Tray 3 transport detection Detects paper pass in the tray 3. Paper Paper 5 A-10 PCU
(Paper entry detection) present empty
C3PUC Paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in ON OFF 6 A-4 PCU
(Paper feed tray 3) the paper feed tray section.
C3PUS Paper feed solenoid Paper pick up roller control ON OFF 6 A-4 PCU
(Paper feed tray 3)
C3SPD Tray 3 remaining paper Detects the remaining paper Remainin - 6 A-14 PCU
quantity detection quantity in the tray 3. g qty
C3SS1 Tray 3 paper size detection 1 Tray 3 paper size detection 1 - - 4 A-10 PCU
C3SS2 Tray 3 paper size detection 2 Tray 3 paper size detection 2 - - 4 A-11 PCU
C3SS3 Tray 3 paper size detection 3 Tray 3 paper size detection 3 - - 4 A-12 PCU
C3SS4 Tray 3 paper size detection 4 Tray 3 paper size detection 4 - - 4 A-13 PCU
C4LUD Tray 4 paper upper limit Detects the tray 4 upper limit. Upper - 5 B-13 PCU
detection limit
C4LUM Paper tray lift-up motor Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive 4 A-8 PCU
(Paper feed tray 4)
C4PED Tray 4 paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the tray 4. Paper Paper 5 B-10 PCU
empty present
C4PFD Tray 4 transport detection Detects paper pass in the tray 4. Paper Paper 5 B-16 PCU
(Paper entry detection) present empty
C4PUC Paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in ON OFF 6 A-2 PCU
(Paper feed tray 4) the paper feed tray section.
C4PUS Paper feed solenoid Paper pick up roller control ON OFF 5 B-7 PCU
(Paper feed tray 4)
C4PWD Paper width detection Detects the paper width - - 6 A-17 PCU
C4SPD Tray 4 remaining paper Detects the remaining paper Remainin - 6 A-11 PCU
quantity detection quantity in the tray 4. g qty
C4SS1 Tray 4 paper size detection 1 Tray 4 paper size detection 1 - - 4 A-15 PCU
C4SS2 Tray 4 paper size detection 2 Tray 4 paper size detection 2 - - 4 A-16 PCU
C4SS3 Tray 4 paper size detection 3 Tray 4 paper size detection 3 - - 4 A-17 PCU
C4SS4 Tray 4 paper size detection 4 Tray 4 paper size detection 4 - - 4 A-18 PCU
CCHPD MC home position detec- MC home position detection - home 11 B-2 PCU
tion
CCM Charger cleaner motor Drives charger cleaner - - 12 A-7,A-8 PCU
CCMD MC cleaner shift detection Detects the shift distance of the - - 12 B-8 PCU
MC cleaner
CPFM_CLK Paper feed motor drive Changes the paper feed section - - 8 B-11 PCU Pulse input
frequency speed.
CPFM_D Paper feed motor start/stop Controls the ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF 8 B-10 PCU
feed section.
CPFM_LD Paper feed motor lock Detects the paper feed motor - Lock 8 B-9 PCU
detection lock.
DL1 Discharge lamp [LED] Discharges electric charges - - 11 B-4 PCU
on the OPC drum.
DL2 Discharge lamp [LED] Discharges electric charges on - - 11 B-5 PCU
the OPC drum immediately after
transfer operation.

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 26
Signal Name [Type] Function/Operation Connector level CN No. Pin No. PWB NOTE
name "L" "H" name
DM_CLK Drum motor drive frequency Changes the drum section speed. - - 12 A-12 PCU Pulse input
DM_D Drum motor start/stop Drives the drum section. ON OFF 12 A-11 PCU
DM_LD Drum motor lock detection Detects the drum motor lock. - Lock 12 A-10 PCU
DSR_FIN Serial communication con- Receive control - - 2 4 PCU
trol signal
DSR_LCC Serial communication con- Receive control - - 8 B-4 PCU
trol signal
DSW-ADU Duplex (ADU) cover open/ Duplex (ADU) cover open/close Open Close 18 B-6 PCU
close detection signal detection
DSW_F1 Front cover lower open/close Front cover open/close detection. Open Close 6 B-3 PCU
detection signal
DSW_F2 Inner cover right open/close Inner cover open/close Open Close 15 3 PCU
detection signal detection.Fuser,motor and LSU
laser open/close detection.
DSW_R Right door open/close Right door open/close Open Close 14 1 PCU
detection signal detection.Fuser,motor and LSU
laser open/close detection.
DSW_RL1 Right lower door open/close Right lower door open/close Open Close 5 A-16 PCU
detection signal detection.
DTR_FIN Serial communication con- Send control - - 2 3 PCU
trol signal
DTR_LCC Serial communication con- Send control. - - 8 B-3 PCU
trol signal
DVCH1 Developing check 1 Detects the destination of the Detection - 10 B-2 PCU
developing unit 1.
DVCH2 Developing check 2 Detects the destination of the Detection - 10 B-3 PCU
developing unit 2.
DVCH3 Developing check 3 Detects the destination of the Detection - 10 B-4 PCU
developing unit 3.
DVFM1_LD Developing cooling fan Developing cooling fan motor1 - Lock 16 A-2 PCU
motor1 lock detection lock detection
DVFM1_V Developing cooling fan Controls the developing cool- OFF ON 16 A-1 PCU
motor1 ing fan motor1 drive
DVFM2_LD Developing cooling fan Developing cooling fan - Lock 9 2 PCU
motor2 lock detection motor2 lock detection
DVFM2_V Developing cooling fan Controls the developing cool- OFF ON 9 1 PCU
motor2 ing fan motor2 drive
DVM_CLK Developing motor drive fre- Changes the developing sec- - - 12 B-12 PCU
quency tion speed
DVM_D Developing motor start/ Controls ON/OFF of the ON OFF 12 B-11 PCU
stop developing section
DVM_LD Developing motor lock Developing motor lock detection - Lock 12 B-9 PCU
detection
FPFD Fusing front paper pass Detects paper pass in front of Paper - 13 A-2 PCU
detector the fusing section. present
FUFM1_LD Fusing cooling fan motor1 Fusing cooling fan motor lock - Lock 18 A-3 PCU
lock detection detection.
FUFM1_V Fusing cooling fan motor1 Controls the fusing cooling OFF ON 18 A-2 PCU
fan motor1
FUFM2_LD Fusing cooling fan motor2 Fusing cooling fan motor2 - Lock 16 A-5 PCU
lock detection lock detection
FUFM2_V Fusing cooling fan motor2 Controls the fusing cooling OFF ON 16 A-4 PCU
fan motor2
FUM_CLK Fusing motor drive frequency Changes the fusing section - - 12 A-3 PCU Pulse input
speed.
FUM_D Fusing motor start/stop Drives the fusing section. ON OFF 12 A-4 PCU
FUM_LD Fusing motor lock detection Detects the fusing motor lock. - Lock 12 A-5 PCU
HDDFM_LD HDD cooling fan motor lock HDD cooling fan motor lock - Lock 23 3 PCU
detection detection
HDDFM_V HDD cooling fan motor Controls the HDD cooling fan OFF ON 23 1 PCU
motor
HL_PR Heater lamp control relay Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON 3 B-10 PCU
control relay.
HLout_UM Heater lamp main Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON 3 B-11 PCU
main.
HLout_US Heater lamp sub Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON 3 B-13 PCU
sub.
HLout_UW Heater lamp warm-up Turns ON/OFF the warm-up OFF ON 3 B-12 PCU
operation of the heater lamp.

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 27
Signal Name [Type] Function/Operation Connector level CN No. Pin No. PWB NOTE
name "L" "H" name
HPFM_CLK Horizontal paper transport Horizontal paper transport - - 7 14 PCU
motor control signal motor control
HPFM_CNT Horizontal paper transport Horizontal paper transport - - 7 10 PCU
motor PWM motor PWM control
HPFM_ENA Horizontal paper transport Controls horizontal paper OFF ON 7 12 PCU
BLE motor transport motor
HPFM_MOD Horizontal paper transport Controls horizontal paper - - 7 6 PCU
E motor mode transport motor mode
HUD_DV Humidity detection Detects the developing section - - 11 B-14 PCU Analog
humidity.
HUD_M Humidity detection Detects the humidity - - 17 A-2 PCU
LPPD LCC paper pass detection Detecting of paper entry from Paper Paper 5 B-5 PCU
signal LCC present empty
LSUFM_LD LSU cooling fan motor lock Detects the LSU cooling fan - Lock 6 B-6 PCU
detection motor lock.
LSUFM_V LSU cooling fan motor Cools the LSU section. OFF ON 6 B-4 PCU
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home - Home 22 1 SCNcnt
position. position
MIM_* Scanner motor Scanner (reading) section - - 24 1,2,3,4 SCNcnt
MPED Manual feed paper empty Detects paper empty in the Paper Paper 17 B-3 PCU
detection manual paper feed tray. present empty
MPFD Manual feed paper pass Manual tray paper pass Paper Paper 17 B-2 PCU
detection signal detection present empty
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF 17 B-5 PCU
(Manual paper feed) pickup roller.
MPGS Manual paper feed gate Manual paper feed gate sole- ON OFF 17 B-4 PCU
solenoid noid control
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length Detects the paper length in the Detection - 17 B-1 PCU
detector manual paper feed tray.
MPWD Manual feed tray paper width Detects the paper width in the - - 17 A-8 PCU Analog
detector manual feed tray.
MTOP1 Manual tray pull-out posi- Manual paper feed tray pull- - Store 17 A-5 PCU
tion detection signal 1 out position detection (Storing
position)
MTOP2 Manual tray pull-out posi- Manual paper feed tray pull- - Pull out 17 A-7 PCU
tion detection signal 2 out position detection (Pull-
out position)
OCSW Original cover SW Detects open/close of the Close Open 20 3 SCNcnt
document cover (document size
detection trigger).
OZFM_LD Ozone fan motor lock detection Detects the ozone fan motor lock. - Lock 12 B-3 PCU
OZFM_V Ozone fan motor drive Controls the ozone fan motor OFF ON 12 B-2 PCU
drive.
PCS Process control sensor light Detects the toner patch density. - - 11 B-11 PCU Analog
reception
PCS_LED Process control sensor Adjust light emission quantity. - - 11 B-12 PCU Analog
light generation
PFM_OUT PS front transport motor Transports and drives the - - 19 A-1,A-2 PCU Drives with
registration front roller drive A-3,A-4 the 4-phase
system. signal.
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper exit from fusing. - Paper 13 A-5 PCU
present
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the discharged paper. Paper Paper 16 B-11 PCU
present empty
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects paper exit to the right tray. Paper Paper 18 B-7 PCU
present empty
POFM1_LD POFM 1 lock detection Detects the POFM 1 lock. - Lock 18 A-10 PCU
POFM1_V Paper exit cooling fan motor 1 Controls the paper exit cooling fan OFF ON 18 A-9 PCU
motor 1 drive.
POFM3_LD POFM 3 lock detection Detects the POFM 3 lock. - Lock 16 A-9 PCU
POFM3_V Paper cooling fan motor 3 Controls the paper cooling fan OFF ON 16 A-7 PCU
motor 3 drive.
POFM4_LD POFM 4 lock detection Detects the POFM 4 lock. - Lock 18 A-8 PCU
POFM4_V Paper exit cooling fan motor 4 Controls the paper exit cooling fan OFF ON 18 A-5 PCU
motor 4 drive.
POFM5_LD POFM 5 lock detection Detects the POFM 5 lock - Lock 16 B-6 PCU
POFM5_V Paper cooling fan motor (F) Controls the paper cooling OFF ON 16 B-4 PCU
fan motor (F) drive
POFM6_LD POFM 6 lock detection Detects the POFM 6 lock - Lock 16 B-3 PCU

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 28
Signal Name [Type] Function/Operation Connector level CN No. Pin No. PWB NOTE
name "L" "H" name
POFM6_V Paper cooling fan motor Controls the paper cooling OFF ON 16 B-1 PCU
(R) fan motor (R) drive
POM_OUT Paper exit motor Controls the paper exit motor - - 19 A-5,A-6 PCU Drives with
drive. A-7,A-8 the 4-phase
signal.
PPD2 Registration detection Detects paper at the rear of the Paper Paper 16 B-14 PCU
registration roller. present empty
PROFM_LD Process fan motor lock Process fan motor lock detection - Lock 6 B-8 PCU
detection
PROFM_V Process fan motor Controls the process fan motor OFF ON 6 B-7 PCU
drive.
PRTPD Right paper exit tray paper Detects paper empty in the right Paper Paper 18 B-10 PCU
empty detection paper exit tray. empty present
PSFM1_LD Power cooling fan motor 1 lock Detects the power cooling fan - Lock 6 B-11 PCU
detection motor 1 lock.
PSFM1_V Power cooling fan motor 1 Controls the power cooling fan OFF ON 6 B-10 PCU
motor drive.
PSFM2_LD Power cooling fan motor 2 lock Detects the power cooling fan - Lock 6 B-15 PCU
detection motor 2 lock.
PSFM2_V Power cooling fan motor 2 Controls the power cooling fan OFF ON 6 B-13 PCU
motor drive.
PSPS Separation solenoid Controls the separation solenoid. ON OFF 11 B-9 PCU
ROCD DSPF lower door open/close Detects open/close of the lower Open Close 1 B-5 DSPFcnt
detection door.
PTDL Discharge lamp Controls discharge lamp - - 11 B-6 PCU
PWM
PTRC1 Vertical paper transport Controls vertical paper trans- ON OFF 6 A-6 PCU
clutch port clutch
PTRC2 Vertical paper transport Controls vertical paper trans- ON OFF 8 A-10 PCU
upper clutch port upper clutch
RRM_CLK Registration motor control Controls registration motor drive. - - 7 13 PCU
signal
RRM_CNT Registration motor PWM Registration motor PWM con- - - 7 9 PCU
trol
RRM_ENAB Registration motor Controls registration motor OFF ON 7 11 PCU
LE drive
RRM_MOD Registration motor mode Controls registration motor - - 7 5 PCU
E mode
SPFFAN_SI SPF fan motor lock detection Detects fan motor lock. Open Lock 1001 3 DSPFcnt
G
SPPD2 DSPF document pass Detects paper pass. Paper - 1 A-2 DSPFcnt
detection 2 present
SPPD3 DSPF document pass Detects paper pass. Paper - 1 A-5 DSPFcnt
detection 3 present.
SPPD4 DSPF document pass Detects paper pass. Paper - 1 A-8 DSPFcnt
detection 4 present.
SPPD5 DSPF document pass Detects paper pass. Paper - 1 A-11 DSPFcnt
detection 5 present.
SPUFM_BR DSPF paper feed motor Controls DSPF paper feed ON OFF 1 B-8 DSPFcnt
AKE signal motor drive
SPUFM_LD DSPF paper feed motor Detects DSPF paper feed - Lock 1 B-6 DSPFcnt
lock detection motor lock
SOCD DSPF open/close detection Detects open/close of the DSPF Close Open 1 B-3 DSPFcnt
signal unit.
T1LUD Paper feed tray upper limit Paper feed tray upper limit Upper - 4 B-9 PCU
detection (Paper feed tray detection (Paper feed tray 1) limit
1)
T1LUM Paper tray lift-up motor Paper tray lift-up control - ON 4 A-2 PCU
control signal (Paper feed (Paper feed tray 1)
tray 1)
T1PED Paper empty detection sig- Paper presence detection Paper Paper 4 B-8 PCU
nal (Paper feed tray 1) (Paper feed tray 1) empty present
T1PPD1 Paper pass detection sig- Paper pass detection Paper Paper 4 B-2 PCU
nal (Paper feed tray 1) (Paper feed tray 1) present empty
T1PUC Paper feed clutch Paper feed clutch control ON OFF 8 A-4 PCU
(Paper feed tray 1) (Paper feed tray 1)
T1PUS Paper pick-up solenoid Paper pick-up solenoid con- ON OFF 6 B-17 PCU
control signal (Paper feed trol (Paper feed tray 1)
tray 1)

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 29
Signal Name [Type] Function/Operation Connector level CN No. Pin No. PWB NOTE
name "L" "H" name
T1SPD Paper remaining quantity Paper remaining quantity - - 4 B-16 PCU
detection (Paper feed tray detection (Paper feed tray 1)
1)
T2LUD Paper feed tray upper limit Paper feed tray upper limit Upper - 4 B-5 PCU
detection (Paper feed tray 2) detection (Paper feed tray 2) limit
T2LUM Paper tray lift-up motor Paper tray lift-up control - ON 4 A-4 PCU
control signal (Paper feed (Paper feed tray 2)
tray 2)
T2PED Paper empty detection signal Paper presence detection Paper Paper 4 B-4 PCU
(Paper feed tray 2) (Paper feed tray 2) empty present
T2PPD1 Paper pass detection signal Paper pass detection Paper Paper 5 A-13 PCU
(Paper feed tray 2) (Paper feed tray 2) present empty
T2PUC Paper feed clutch Paper feed clutch control ON OFF 8 A-6 PCU
(Paper feed tray 2) (Paper feed tray 2)
T2PUS Paper pick-up solenoid control Paper pick-up solenoid control ON OFF 8 A-12 PCU
signal (Paper feed tray 2) (Paper feed tray 2)
T2SPD Paper remaining quantity Paper remaining quantity - - 4 B-13 PCU
detection (Paper feed tray 2) detection (Paper feed tray 2)
TCS Toner density sensor Detects the toner density. - - 10 B-6 PCU Analog
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face-down paper exit Full - 16 B-8 PCU
tray full.
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full Detects the paper exit full in the Full - 18 B-8 PCU
detection right tray.
TFSD Toner remaining quantity Toner hopper remaining empty - 11 A-14 PCU
detection signal quantity detection
TH_DV Developing section Detects the temperature in the - - 11 B-16 PCU Analog
temperature detection developing section.
TH_LM Main thermistor Fusing temperature detec- - - 13 B-9 PCU Analog
tion.
TH_M Temperature sensor Temperature detection - - 17 A-1 PCU Analog
TH_UM Main thermistor Fusing temperature detection - - 13 B-2 PCU Analog
TH_US1 Sub thermistor 1 Fusing temperature detec- - - 13 B-5 PCU Analog
tion.
TH_US2 Sub thermistor 2 Fusing temperature detection. - - 13 B-7 PCU Analog
TNDSET Tandem tray close detec- Tandem tray close detection Open Close 6 A-8 PCU
tion
TNHM1 Toner motor Controls toner motor drive - - 11 A-7,A-8 PCU
A-11,A-
12
TNHM2 Hopper motor Controls hopper motor drive - - 11 A-1,A-2 PCU
A-5,A-6
TNM Bottle motor Controls bottle motor drive 10 A-1,A-2 PCU
A-5,A-6
TTRC Tandem paper transport Controls tandem paper trans- ON OFF 8 A-8 PCU
clutch port clutch
TURM Transfer separation motor Controls transfer unit OFF ON 17 B-8 PCU
WEBEND1 Web end detection 1 Detects the fusing web end. 1 - End 13 A-8 PCU
WEBEND2 Web end detection 2 Detects the fusing web end 2 - End 13 A-11 PCU
WEBM Web motor Controls the web motor. - - 16 A-10, PCU Drives with
A-11, the 4-phase
A-14, signal.
A-15
WEBS Web drive solenoid Controls web drive solenoid ON OFF 13 B-11 PCU
WH_CNT Dehumidifying heater Controls dehumidifying ON OFF 2 10 PCU
heater
WTFD Waste toner full detection Waste to ner full detection - Full 9 2 PCU
WTM_CLK Waste toner motor control Waste toner motor control - - 9 12 PCU
signal signal
WTM_D Waste toner motor Controls waste toner motor ON OFF 9 13 PCU
drive
WTM_LD Waste toner motor lock Detects waste toner motor - Lock 9 10 PCU
detection lock
WTSD Waste toner shutter open/ Detects open/close of the Open Close 9 6 PCU
close detection waste toner shutter

ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 30
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.

Example:

<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>

Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code


code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm
a Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
i
n
s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag

(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD


When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommended.

(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK


Since the melting-point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT © XXXX
solder is about 220°C, which BYSHARP
is about CORPORATION
40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. RESERVED.
Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.

CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL


(For USA, CANADA)
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.

“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”


CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT © 2014 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Trademark acknowledgements
x Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0,
Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® 7, Windows® 8,
Windows® 8.1, Windows® Server 2003, Windows® Server 2008,
Windows® Server 2012 and Internet Explorer®
are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
and other countries.
x PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
x Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Laser Writer, and Safari are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Apple Inc.
x IBM, PC/AT, and Power PC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
x Acrobat® Reader Copyright® Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
x PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
x Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
x All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.

SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions CS Promotion Center
First edition: 2014 October Published in Japan
Latest edition: 2014 December Published in Japan

S-ar putea să vă placă și